Bizhub PRESS C8000 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2010/08/25
Table of Contents
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. OUTLINE.....................................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-3
3. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-4
3.1 Descriptions in the service manual............................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 Descriptions for safety and important warning items.................................................................................................................A-4
4. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-5
4.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC......................................A-5
4.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................A-5
4.1.2 Prohibited Actions...........................................................................................................................................................A-5
4.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-6
4.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................A-6
4.2.2 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-6
4.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-7
4.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................A-7
4.3.2 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
4.3.3 Installation Requirements................................................................................................................................................A-9
4.3.4 Servicing........................................................................................................................................................................A-10
4.3.5 Fuse..............................................................................................................................................................................A-14
4.3.6 Used Batteries Precautions...........................................................................................................................................A-14
5. SAFETY INFORMATION..........................................................................................................................................A-16
5.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE.............................................................................................................................................................A-16
5.2 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE...................................................................................................................A-16
6. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-23
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS .................................................................................................B-1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL .........................................................................................................B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME ......................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. TRADEMARK .............................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES ..............................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ...............................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS .......................................................................................................................B-4
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION ........................................................................................................................................B-6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub PRESS C8000 ................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Function ....................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Paper.........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
(1) Paper weight.......................................................................................................................................................................C-1
(2) Type of paper......................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.4 Recommended paper................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.1 Inch.................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4.2 Metric..............................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.5 Materials ...................................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.6 Print volume .............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.7 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.8 Operating environment .............................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.9 Scan function ............................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.10 Note regarding the specifications ...........................................................................................................................................C-3
2. DF-622 .......................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.3 Type of paper ...........................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.4 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.6 Note regarding the specifications .............................................................................................................................................C-4
3. PF-704/705 ................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.2 Function ....................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
(1) Paper feed .........................................................................................................................................................................C-5
(2) Scanner (PF-705 only) .......................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.3 Type of paper ...........................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.4 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-5
i
(1) PF-704 ...............................................................................................................................................................................C-5
(2) PF-705 ...............................................................................................................................................................................C-6
4. HT-506 .......................................................................................................................................................................C-7
4.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-7
4.2 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5. HD-514 .......................................................................................................................................................................C-8
5.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
5.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
5.3 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6. PH-101........................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.1 Type .........................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2 Function.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.3 Machine data ............................................................................................................................................................................C-9
7. EF-101 .....................................................................................................................................................................C-10
7.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-10
7.2 Type of paper .........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
7.3 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-10
7.4 Operating environment ...........................................................................................................................................................C-10
8. RU-508 .....................................................................................................................................................................C-11
8.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
8.2 Function ..................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
8.3 Type of paper .........................................................................................................................................................................C-11
8.4 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-11
9. HM-101 ....................................................................................................................................................................C-12
9.1 Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
9.2 Function ..................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
9.3 Type of paper .........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
9.4 Machine data ..........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
10. FS-521 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-13
10.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
10.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-13
(2) Number of staple sheets ..................................................................................................................................................C-13
(3) Staple position .................................................................................................................................................................C-13
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray ..........................................................................................................................C-13
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray ............................................................................................................................C-14
10.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-15
(1) Staple ...............................................................................................................................................................................C-15
10.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-15
10.5 Operating environment .........................................................................................................................................................C-15
10.6 Note regarding the specifications .........................................................................................................................................C-15
11. FS-612 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-16
11.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
11.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(2) Staple ...............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(3) Folding .............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1..................................................................................................................................................C-16
11.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-17
(1) Staple mode .....................................................................................................................................................................C-17
(2) Saddle stitching mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-17
(3) Half-Fold mode ................................................................................................................................................................C-17
(4) Tri-folding mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-18
11.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
ii
12. PK-512/513.............................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-19
13. PI-502 .....................................................................................................................................................................C-20
13.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
13.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
13.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-20
13.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-20
14. LS-505 ....................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-21
(2) Maximum tray capacity ....................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-22
15. FD-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-23
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-24
(1) Punching function ............................................................................................................................................................C-24
(2) Folding functions ..............................................................................................................................................................C-24
(3) PI functions ......................................................................................................................................................................C-24
15.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-25
16. SD-506 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-26
16.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-26
16.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-26
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-26
16.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-26
(1) Straight/sub tray mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-26
(2) Saddle stitching mode .....................................................................................................................................................C-26
(3) Trimming mode ................................................................................................................................................................C-28
(4) Multi center folding mode .................................................................................................................................................C-28
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................................C-29
16.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-29
17. PB-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................C-30
17.1 Type .....................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
17.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(1) Function............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(2) Binding sheets .................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(4) Others ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
17.3 Type of paper .......................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(1) Paper size ........................................................................................................................................................................C-30
(2) Paper weight ....................................................................................................................................................................C-31
17.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
18. RU-506....................................................................................................................................................................C-33
18.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-33
18.2 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................C-33
18.3 Paper type.............................................................................................................................................................................C-33
18.4 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-33
iii
19. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.2 Modes of Operation...............................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.3 Machine data.........................................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.4 Software................................................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.5 Electronic...............................................................................................................................................................................C-34
19.6 Inputs.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-34
(1) Media Input from Printer...................................................................................................................................................C-34
(2) Power................................................................................................................................................................................C-35
19.7 Outputs..................................................................................................................................................................................C-35
19.8 Performance..........................................................................................................................................................................C-35
(1) Reliability..........................................................................................................................................................................C-35
19.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport.........................................................................................................................C-35
19.10 Safety /Regulatory...............................................................................................................................................................C-35
(1) Safety Compliance............................................................................................................................................................C-35
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance............................................................................................................................................C-35
19.11 Appendix A..........................................................................................................................................................................C-36
19.12 Appendix B..........................................................................................................................................................................C-36
19.13 Appendix C..........................................................................................................................................................................C-37
19.14 Glossary of Terms...............................................................................................................................................................C-38
D OVERALL COMPOSITION ...........................................................................................................D-1

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System configuration.................................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.2 Configuration for optional device...............................................................................................................................................D-2
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option................................................................................D-2
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option......................................................................................D-2
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................D-4
3. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................D-5
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................................D-6
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS .................................................................................................................................D-7
5.1 Image creation flow and functions ............................................................................................................................................D-7
5.2 Charging process (Step 1) .......................................................................................................................................................D-8
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)...............................................................................................................................................D-8
5.4 Developing process (Step 3).....................................................................................................................................................D-8
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4) .....................................................................................................................................D-8
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5) ...................................................................................................................................................D-9
5.7 Separation process (Step 6) .....................................................................................................................................................D-9
5.8 Auxiliary discharge (Sub step 1) .............................................................................................................................................D-10
5.9 Drum cleaning (Sub step 2) ....................................................................................................................................................D-10
5.10 Exposure before charging (Sub step 3) ................................................................................................................................D-11
5.11 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 4) ..................................................................................................................D-11
5.12 2nd transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 5) ................................................................................................................................D-11
5.13 Toner collection (Sub step 6) ...............................................................................................................................................D-12
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL................................................................................................................................D-13
7. PROCESS SPEED...................................................................................................................................................D-15
E SERVICE TOOL ............................................................................................................................E-1
1. bizhub PRESS C8000 ................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1 Service material list ..................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1.1 Service material list ........................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2 Jig list ........................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2.1 Jig list .............................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.3 Mail remote notification system ................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.2 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.3 Major functions ...............................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.4 Initial setting ...................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system ........................................................................................E-6
1.3.6 Mail sending ...................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.4 Job history list ...........................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.4.2 Major functions ...............................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.4.3 Setting method ...............................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory ...........................................................................................................................E-10
1.5.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-10
iv
1.5.2 List that can be acquired ..............................................................................................................................................E-10
1.5.3 Acquisition method .......................................................................................................................................................E-10
1.6 Panel log .................................................................................................................................................................................E-11
1.6.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................E-11
1.6.2 Log acquisition method ................................................................................................................................................E-11
1.7 Management Tool ...................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.7.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................E-12
1.7.2 Installation of Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................E-14
1.7.3 Starting up of Management Tool ..................................................................................................................................E-15
1.7.4 Technician mode ..........................................................................................................................................................E-18
1.7.5 Administrator mode ......................................................................................................................................................E-38
1.7.6 Various setting for the software ....................................................................................................................................E-44
1.7.7 Error message list ........................................................................................................................................................E-51
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................F-1

1. MAINTENANCE ITEM ................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C8000 ..............................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts ..............................................................................................F-1
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 150,000 prints) ..............................................................................................................F-1
1.1.7 Periodic maintenance 6 (Every 1,200,000 prints) ...........................................................................................................F-4
1.1.9 Periodic maintenance 8 (Every 1,500,000 prints)............................................................................................................F-4
1.1.10 Periodic maintenance 9 (Every 2,250,000 prints) .........................................................................................................F-4
1.1.11 Periodic maintenance 10 (Every 2,400,000 prints) .......................................................................................................F-5
1.1.19 Periodic maintenance 18 (Every 10,800,000 prints) .....................................................................................................F-6
1.2 DF-622 ......................................................................................................................................................................................F-6
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds) ..................................................................................................................F-6
1.3 PF-704/705 (1st tandem) ..........................................................................................................................................................F-6
1.3.6 Spotted replacement (Every 6,000,000 prints) ...............................................................................................................F-7
1.4 PF-704 (2nd tandem) ................................................................................................................................................................F-8
1.4.5 Spotted replacement (Every 6,000,000 prints) ...............................................................................................................F-8
1.5 EF-101 ......................................................................................................................................................................................F-8
1.6 RU-508/HM-101 ......................................................................................................................................................................F-10
1.6.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 300,000 prints) ............................................................................................................F-10
1.6.4 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints) ................................................................................................................F-10
1.6.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,500,000 prints) .............................................................................................................F-10
1.7 FS-521 ....................................................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.7.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations) ........................................................................................................F-11
1.7.4 Spotted replacement (Every 600,000 feeds) ................................................................................................................F-11
1.7.5 Spotted replacement (Every 5,400,000 operations) .....................................................................................................F-11
v
1.8 FS-612 ....................................................................................................................................................................................F-11
1.8.4 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 staples) .............................................................................................................F-12
1.9 PI-502 .....................................................................................................................................................................................F-12
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds) .............................................................................................................F-13
1.10 LS-505 ..................................................................................................................................................................................F-13
1.10.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 prints) ...........................................................................................................F-13
1.11 FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................F-13
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 prints) ........................................................................................................................F-14
1.11.5 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 prints) ..............................................................................................................F-14
1.12 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................F-14
1.12.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F-14
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts) ..................................................................................................................F-15
1.12.4 Spotted replacement (Every 37,500 cuts) ..................................................................................................................F-15
1.12.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 cuts) ................................................................................................................F-15
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times) ..............................................................................................................F-15
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets) .............................................................................................................F-16
1.12.9 Spotted replacement (Every 2,500,000 sets) .............................................................................................................F-16
1.12.10 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 sets) ...........................................................................................................F-16
1.13 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.13.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 750,000 prints) ..........................................................................................................F-16
1.13.3 Spotted replacement (Every 3,000,000 operations) ...................................................................................................F-17
1.13.9 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours) .....................................................................................................................F-18
1.13.10 Spotted replacement (Every 240 hours) ...................................................................................................................F-18
1.13.11 Spotted replacement (Every 2000 hours) .................................................................................................................F-18
1.13.12 Spotted replacement (Every 6000 hours) .................................................................................................................F-18
1.14 RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints).........................................................................................................................F-19
1.14.2 Spotted replacement (Every 5,000,000 operations)....................................................................................................F-19
1.15 GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints)......................................................................................................................F-19
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)....................................................................................................................F-20
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches)..........................................................................................................F-20
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle).....................................................................................................F-20
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST..............................................................................................................F-21
2.1 Periodical replacement parts ..................................................................................................................................................F-21
2.2 bizhub PRESS C8000 ............................................................................................................................................................F-21
2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list ......................................................................................................................................F-21
2.2.2 Spotted replacement parts list.......................................................................................................................................F-24
3. ORU-M PARTS.........................................................................................................................................................F-26
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ................................................................................................................................................F-26
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts ............................................................................................................................................F-26
3.2 ORU-M parts list .....................................................................................................................................................................F-26
(1) ORU-M parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................F-26
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing ...........................................................................................................................................F-28
(1) ORU-M target unit life setting ...........................................................................................................................................F-28
(2) ORU-M warning icon display ............................................................................................................................................F-28
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter ....................................................................................................................................F-28
(1) Counter display ................................................................................................................................................................F-28
vi
(2) Counter clear ....................................................................................................................................................................F-28
4. LIFE VALUE .............................................................................................................................................................F-29
4.1 Life value of materials/parts ....................................................................................................................................................F-29
4.2 Life value determining condition .............................................................................................................................................F-29
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C8000 ....................................................................F-30
5.1 External section ......................................................................................................................................................................F-30
5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter /A (right) ........................................................................................................................F-30
5.1.2 Replacing the ozone filter, dust-proof filter /B (rear) .....................................................................................................F-30
5.1.3 Replacing the dust-proof filter /C (left) ..........................................................................................................................F-31
5.1.4 Replacing the dust-proof filter /C (Rr1), /C (Rr2), /C (Rr3) ...........................................................................................F-32
5.2 Writing section ........................................................................................................................................................................F-33
5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof glass .......................................................................................................................................F-33
5.3 Photo conductor section..........................................................................................................................................................F-33
5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section ..................................................................................................F-33
5.3.2 Opening/closing the toner hopper unit ..........................................................................................................................F-34
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit ..........................................................................................................................................F-34
5.3.4 Replacing the drum unit ................................................................................................................................................F-34
5.4 Charging section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-36
5.4.1 Replacing the charging corona .....................................................................................................................................F-36
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona .......................................................................................................................................F-37
5.5 Intermediate transfer section ..................................................................................................................................................F-38
5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit ....................................................................................................F-38
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit ......................................................................................................................F-40
5.5.3 Intermediate transfer belt position adjustment ..............................................................................................................F-40
5.5.4 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade and Transfer belt cleaning seal/F, /R.........................................................F-42
5.5.5 Replacing the toner collection sheet .............................................................................................................................F-43
5.5.6 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw ..................................................................................................................F-44
5.5.7 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt .......................................................................................................................F-45
5.5.8 Replacing the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing ......................................................F-47
5.5.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up ............................................................................................................................F-48
5.5.10 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD7) ....................................................................................................F-49
5.5.11 Cleaning the IDC sensors /Fr (IDCS/1) and /Rr (IDCS/2) and the color registration sensors /Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84)
and /Rr (PS85) ........................................................................................................................................................................F-49
5.5.12 Replacing the Sensor shutter......................................................................................................................................F-50
5.6 2nd transfer section ................................................................................................................................................................F-50
5.6.1 Position adjustment of the 2nd transfer belt .................................................................................................................F-50
5.6.2 Cleaning the suction guide plate...................................................................................................................................F-51
5.6.3 Removing/reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit ..................................................................................................................F-52
5.6.4 Replacing the 2nd transfer separation discharging unit ...............................................................................................F-53
5.6.5 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd transfer ground plates /1 and /2 ..... F-53
5.6.6 Replacing the 2nd transfer entrance guide /Up ............................................................................................................F-56
5.6.7 Replacing the 2nd transfer processing blade assy, the 2nd transfer cleaning brush and the 2nd transfer belt. ..........F-57
5.7 Developing section .................................................................................................................................................................F-59
5.7.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K ..................................................................................................................F-59
5.7.2 Replacing the Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K ................................................................................................................F-61
5.8 Toner supply section................................................................................................................................................................F-62
5.8.1 Replacing the developing cooling filters /Y, /M, /C and /K ............................................................................................F-62
5.9 Toner collection section ..........................................................................................................................................................F-62
5.9.1 Replacing the toner collect box ....................................................................................................................................F-62
5.10 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................................................F-63
5.10.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber ....................................................................................F-63
5.10.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber .......................................................................................................................F-63
5.10.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch ................................................................................F-64
5.11 Vertical conveyance section .................................................................................................................................................F-65
5.11.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL20) and /2 (CL21) ........................................................................F-65
5.12 Registration section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-66
5.12.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet ...................................................................................................................F-66
5.12.2 Replacing the registration roller assy .........................................................................................................................F-67
5.12.3 Replacing the loop roller cleaning assy ......................................................................................................................F-68
5.13 Duplex section ......................................................................................................................................................................F-71
5.13.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the duplex section ...................................................................................................................F-71
5.13.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2 (CL15) ...............................................................F-71
5.13.3 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), /3 (CL9) and /4 (CL10) ................................................F-73
5.13.4 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /5 (CL11), /6 (CL12) and /7 (CL13) ...........................................................F-73
5.13.5 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning brush and the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning stay .....
F-74
5.13.6 Replacing the de-curler roller .....................................................................................................................................F-75
5.13.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance roller cleaning member A, /B ..................................................................................F-76
5.13.8 Replacing the ADU reverse cleaning assy..................................................................................................................F-78
5.13.9 Cleaning the ADU guide plate.....................................................................................................................................F-79
vii
5.14 Paper exit section .................................................................................................................................................................F-79
5.14.1 Replacing the main body paper exit driven roller and the paper exit conveyance driven roller ..................................F-79
5.15 Fusing section .......................................................................................................................................................................F-81
5.15.1 Precautions on maintenance ......................................................................................................................................F-81
5.15.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit ..........................................................................................................................F-81
5.15.3 Replacing the fusing web unit .....................................................................................................................................F-82
5.15.4 Replacing the fusing external heating unit, the fusing temperature sensor assy (external heating) and the fusing
heater /5 ..................................................................................................................................................................................F-84
5.15.5 Replacing the fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1 ...........................................................................................F-86
5.15.6 Replacing the fusing belt unit /Lw, fusing heater /4, lubrication to the fusing pressure arms /Fr and /Rr....................F-89
5.15.7 Position adjustment of the fusing belt /Lw ..................................................................................................................F-92
5.15.8 Replacing the fusing swing shaft assy ........................................................................................................................F-93
5.15.9 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy (lower belt) ........................................................................................F-93
5.15.10 Replacing the fusing paper exit guide assy and the fusing claw unit .......................................................................F-94
5.15.11 Replacing the fusing actuator ...................................................................................................................................F-96
5.15.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Lw .................................................................................................................F-96
5.15.13 Replacing the web motor assy .................................................................................................................................F-97
5.15.14 Replacing the fusing web torque limiter and the fusing web prevention part ...........................................................F-97
5.15.15 Replacing the fusing refresh roller assy ...................................................................................................................F-99
5.15.16 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy (fusing roller) ..................................................................................F-99
5.15.17 Replacing the fusing drive assy ..............................................................................................................................F-100
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622 ..........................................................................................F-102
6.1 Precautions on maintenance ................................................................................................................................................F-102
6.2 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................................................F-102
6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit ..................................................................................................................F-102
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller ................................................................................................F-103
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller ...................................................................................................................................F-104
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302) ...........................................................................................................................F-105
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover ......................................................................................................F-106
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller ....................................................................................................................................F-106
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301) ...................................................................................................................F-107
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-704/705 ...................................................................................F-108
7.2 Paper feed tray section .........................................................................................................................................................F-108
7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller /Lw and the loop roller bearing /Lw .....................................................................................F-108
7.3 Paper feed suction section ...................................................................................................................................................F-109
7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutches /1 (CL15), /2 (CL16) and /3 (CL17) ....................................................................F-109
7.4 Vertical conveyance section .................................................................................................................................................F-109
7.4.1 Replacing the exit clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2) and the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5) .....
F-109
7.5 Horizontal conveyance section .............................................................................................................................................F-110
7.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9) ...................F-110
7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing ...............................................................F-110
7.5.3 Replacing the loop roller /Up ......................................................................................................................................F-111
7.6 Tandem conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................F-112
7.6.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14) ...................F-112
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EF-101 ..........................................................................................F-113
8.2 2nd Fusing section ................................................................................................................................................................F-113
8.2.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing unit .....................................................................................................................................F-113
8.2.2 Replacing the 2nd fusing idler gear /3 ........................................................................................................................F-114
8.2.3 Replacing the 2nd fusing heater..................................................................................................................................F-116
8.2.4 Replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Up and the 2nd fusing roller bearing ........................................................................F-117
8.2.5 Replacing the 2nd fusing /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller bearing, the 2nd fusing
heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve) ........................................................................................F-119
8.2.6 Replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Lw and the 2nd fusing roller bearing ........................................................................F-121
8.2.7 Replacing the 2nd fusing /Lw, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw, the 2nd fusing heating roller bearing, the 2nd fusing
heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve) ........................................................................................F-122
8.2.8 Replacing the 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Up...............................................................................................F-124
8.2.9 Replacing the 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Lw...............................................................................................F-125
8.3 Conveyance section .............................................................................................................................................................F-125
8.3.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing de-curler roller ....................................................................................................................F-125
8.3.2 Cleaning the De-curler driven roller.............................................................................................................................F-126
8.3.3 Replacing the 2nd fusing drawer entrance guide........................................................................................................F-126
8.4 Paper exit section .................................................................................................................................................................F-128
8.4.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing exit roller/Up........................................................................................................................F-128
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-508/HM-101 ...........................................................................F-130
9.2 Entrance conveyance section................................................................................................................................................F-130
viii
9.2.1 Cleaning the entrance conveyance rollers /1 and /2, entrance conveyance roller guide PET (upper), entrance
conveyance roller /2 guide PET, and entrance guide plate /Lw corner section.....................................................................F-130
9.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance driven rollers /1 and /2 ......................................................................................F-130
9.3 Output paper density detection section.................................................................................................................................F-131
9.3.1 Cleaning the shutter ...................................................................................................................................................F-131
9.4 Humidification section (HM-101) ...........................................................................................................................................F-132
9.4.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller ..................................................................F-132
9.4.2 Replacing the water feed filter ....................................................................................................................................F-138
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505 ........................................................................................F-140
10.1 Precautions on maintenance ..............................................................................................................................................F-140
10.2 Conveyance section ...........................................................................................................................................................F-140
10.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1) .......................................................................................................F-140
10.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) ...........................................................................................................F-140
10.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) ..............................................................................................................F-144
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521 ........................................................................................F-146
11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam ............................................................................................F-146
11.3 Stacker section ...................................................................................................................................................................F-146
11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) ........................................................................................F-146
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam ...........................................................................................................................F-147
11.4 Stapler section ....................................................................................................................................................................F-147
11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy .......................................................................................................................................F-147
11.4.2 Replacing the staples ...............................................................................................................................................F-151
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box ......................................................................................................................................F-152
11.5 Main tray section .................................................................................................................................................................F-152
11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller ..................................................................................................................................F-152
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9) ............................................................................................F-153
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-612 ........................................................................................F-156
12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller) ..........................................................................................................F-156
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) .................................................................................F-157
12.3 Stacker section ...................................................................................................................................................................F-157
12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) ......................................................................................................F-157
12.4 Stapler section ....................................................................................................................................................................F-158
12.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover .............................................................................................................F-158
12.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit .........................................................................................................................................F-158
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502 .........................................................................................F-162
13.2 Paper feed section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-162
13.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up .................................................................................F-162
13.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw .................................................................................F-163
13.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up .................................................................................F-163
13.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw .................................................................................F-164
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503 ........................................................................................F-165
14.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) ........................................................................................................F-165
14.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) ............................................................................................................................F-165
14.3 Punch section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-167
14.3.1 Replacing the punch unit ..........................................................................................................................................F-167
14.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board ...........................................................................................F-168
14.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section ..........................................................................................................................F-168
14.4 Main tray section .................................................................................................................................................................F-169
14.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11) .................................................................................................................F-169
14.5 PI section ............................................................................................................................................................................F-170
14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage) .............................................................................................................F-170
14.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage) .......................................................................................................F-172
14.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage) ........................................................................................................F-173
14.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage) .............................................................................................................F-174
14.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage) ........................................................................................................F-175
14.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage) .........................................................................................................F-176
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506 .......................................................................................F-177
15.2 Right angle conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................F-177
15.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) .........................................................................................................F-177
ix
15.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) .....................................................................................F-178
15.3 Saddle stitching section ......................................................................................................................................................F-183
15.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy .......................................................................................................................................F-183
15.3.2 Replacing the slope unit ...........................................................................................................................................F-186
15.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit ..........................................................................................................................F-188
15.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit ...........................................................................................................................F-190
15.4 Trimmer section ..................................................................................................................................................................F-191
15.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ...........................................................................................................F-191
15.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit ................................................................................................................................F-191
15.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy ............................................................................................................................F-193
15.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit ......................................................................................................................................F-194
15.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32) ................................................................................................................F-196
15.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) ................................................................................................................F-197
15.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit ..................................................................................................................................F-200
15.5 Bundle processing section ..................................................................................................................................................F-201
15.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear ....................................................................................................................F-201
15.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit .....................................................................................................................F-203
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503 ........................................................................................F-208
16.1 Sub compile (SC) section ...................................................................................................................................................F-208
16.1.1 Precautions on maintenance ....................................................................................................................................F-208
16.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller ................................................................................................................................F-208
16.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B ........................................F-209
16.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) .....................................................................................................F-212
16.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) ..........................................................................................................F-213
16.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft ....................................................................................................F-214
16.2 Cover paper table section ...................................................................................................................................................F-215
16.2.1 Precautions on maintenance ....................................................................................................................................F-215
16.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy ......................................................................................................................F-215
16.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate ...............................................................F-216
16.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft ................................................................................................F-217
16.3 Cover paper supply section ................................................................................................................................................F-218
16.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ...........................................................F-218
16.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller ..............................................................................................F-221
16.3.3 Replacing the separation roller .................................................................................................................................F-223
16.3.4 Replacing the cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) ............................F-223
16.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4) ..............................................................................................................F-224
16.5 Framework section .............................................................................................................................................................F-226
16.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B .....................................................................................................................F-226
16.6 Glue tank section ................................................................................................................................................................F-227
16.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing ...................................................................................................F-227
16.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear ...........................................................................................................F-229
16.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (M4) ............................................................................................................F-230
16.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy ....................................................................................................................................F-230
16.7 Clamp section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-233
16.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft ..........................................................................................................F-233
16.8 Book stock section ..............................................................................................................................................................F-233
16.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt ................................................................................................................F-233
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506........................................................................................F-235
17.1 Caution for maintenance procedure....................................................................................................................................F-235
17.2 Conveyance section............................................................................................................................................................F-235
17.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt..........F-235
17.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley........................................................................F-236
17.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K........................................................................................................F-237
17.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K..................................................................................................F-238
17.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K...........................F-240
17.2.6 Replacing the straight gate........................................................................................................................................F-243
17.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring..................................................................F-244
17.3 Stacker section....................................................................................................................................................................F-246
17.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2).....................................................................................................F-246
17.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)...........................................................................................................F-247
17.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)......................................................................................F-248
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501........................................................................................F-250
18.1 Caution for maintenance procedure....................................................................................................................................F-250
18.2 DIE SET SERVICE..............................................................................................................................................................F-250
18.2.1 Die Set Service..........................................................................................................................................................F-250
18.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy............................................................................................................................................F-250
x
18.2.3 Die Set Components.................................................................................................................................................F-250
18.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set.........................................................................................................................F-252
18.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts......................................................................F-252
18.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection.........................................................................................................................................F-253
18.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION.........................................................................................................................F-253
18.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION...............................................................................................................F-253
18.3.2 External Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................F-254
18.3.3 Internal Cleaning.......................................................................................................................................................F-254
18.3.4 Operational Inspection...............................................................................................................................................F-254
18.3.5 Internal Inspection.....................................................................................................................................................F-254
18.3.6 Cleaning the base......................................................................................................................................................F-254
18.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide..............................................................................................................................................F-255
18.3.8 Checking the Door Latch...........................................................................................................................................F-255
18.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels.......................................................................................F-256
18.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller.......................................................................................................F-256
18.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt..................................................................................................................F-257
18.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid..................................................................................................F-257
18.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.................................................................................................................F-258
18.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers........................................................................................................F-260
18.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers................................................................................................................F-262
18.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch......................................................................................................................................F-262
18.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors..................................................................................................................................F-263
18.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path......................................................................................................F-264
18.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path.......................................................................................................F-265
18.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt..................................................................................................................F-265
18.3.21 Bypass panel...........................................................................................................................................................F-266
18.3.22 Bypass panel Removal............................................................................................................................................F-266
18.3.23 Aligner panels..........................................................................................................................................................F-268
18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal............................................................................................................................................F-268
18.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement.............................................................................................................................F-269
18.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement...............................................................................................................................F-269
18.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller........................................................................................................F-274
18.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism....................................................................................................................F-274
18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal..............................................................................................................................................F-275
18.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement.................................................................................................................................F-277
18.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle.................................................................................................................................................F-278
18.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment.........................................................................................................................F-278
18.3.33 Punch module..........................................................................................................................................................F-279
18.3.34 Punch Module Removal..........................................................................................................................................F-279
18.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams......................................................................................................................F-281
18.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement.....................................................................................................................................F-282
18.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment...............................................................................................F-284
18.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement.........................................................................................................................F-284
18.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment............................................................................................................................F-284
18.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement.........................................................................................................................F-285
18.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement.........................................................................................................F-285
18.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement................................................................................................................F-286
18.3.43 Belt replacement......................................................................................................................................................F-287
18.3.44 Tools........................................................................................................................................................................F-288
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING ...........................................................................................G-1
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED ....................................................................................................G-1
1.1 Screw-lock applied screw .........................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards ..........................................................................................................................G-1
1.3 Precaution on removing the boards .........................................................................................................................................G-1
1.4 Writing unit cover .....................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.4.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited ..................................................................................................................G-1
1.4.2 Reason of prohibition .....................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.5 PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................G-1
1.5.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited ..................................................................................................................G-1
1.6 Fusing unit ................................................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.6.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited ................................................................................................G-2
2. bizhub PRESS C8000 ................................................................................................................................................G-4
2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts .............................................................................................................................G-4
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures .............................................................................................................................G-4
2.2.1 Rear cover /Up, /Md1, /Md2, /Md3, /Lw, filter cover /2 ...................................................................................................G-4
2.2.2 Left cover /Up, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, filter cover /3 .............................................................................................................G-5
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, working table .....................................................................................G-6
xi
2.2.4 Upper cover, cover table ................................................................................................................................................G-7
2.2.5 Main board unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-7
2.2.6 Writing unit .....................................................................................................................................................................G-9
2.2.7 Process unit .................................................................................................................................................................G-11
2.2.8 Image correction unit ...................................................................................................................................................G-12
2.2.9 Toner collection pipe ....................................................................................................................................................G-12
2.2.10 Duplex section ...........................................................................................................................................................G-15
2.2.11 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2 ............................................................................................................................G-16
2.2.12 Paper feed trays /1 to /3 .............................................................................................................................................G-17
2.2.13 Tray up/down wire ......................................................................................................................................................G-18
2.2.14 Thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2) ....................................................................................................................................G-20
2.2.15 Thermostat /3 (TS3) ...................................................................................................................................................G-22
2.2.16 Thermostats /4 (TS4) and /5 (TS5) ............................................................................................................................G-23
3. DF-622 .....................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ...........................................................................................................................G-24
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ...........................................................................................................................G-24
3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling ...........................................................................................................G-24
3.2.2 DF ................................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.2.3 Front cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-25
3.2.4 Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-25
3.2.5 Conveyance belt ..........................................................................................................................................................G-25
4. PF-704/705 ..............................................................................................................................................................G-27
4.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ..............................................................................................................G-27
4.1.1 CCD unit ......................................................................................................................................................................G-27
4.1.2 Mirror unit/exposure unit ..............................................................................................................................................G-27
4.1.3 Framework panel /1, /2 ................................................................................................................................................G-27
4.3.2 Right cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.3.3 Rear cover /Lt3 ............................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.3.4 Rear cover /Lt2 ............................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.3.5 Rear cover /Lt1 ............................................................................................................................................................G-30
4.3.6 Rear cover /Rt ..............................................................................................................................................................G-30
4.3.7 Read cover /Fr .............................................................................................................................................................G-30
4.3.8 Read cover /Rt .............................................................................................................................................................G-31
4.3.9 Read cover /Rr .............................................................................................................................................................G-31
4.3.10 Read cover /Lt ............................................................................................................................................................G-31
4.3.11 Upper cover /Fr, /Lt, /Rr .............................................................................................................................................G-32
4.3.12 Original glass assy .....................................................................................................................................................G-33
4.3.13 Front door ..................................................................................................................................................................G-34
4.3.14 Tray front cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-34
4.3.15 CCD unit ....................................................................................................................................................................G-35
4.3.16 Exposure unit .............................................................................................................................................................G-36
4.3.17 Exposure lamp (L101) ................................................................................................................................................G-37
4.3.18 Removing the scanner wire .......................................................................................................................................G-37
4.3.19 Reinstalling the scanner wire .....................................................................................................................................G-38
4.3.20 Tray ............................................................................................................................................................................G-40
4.3.21 Floating duct flap /Fr, /Rr ...........................................................................................................................................G-41
4.3.22 Lift wire .......................................................................................................................................................................G-42
4.3.23 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12), Paper
leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18) .............................................................................................G-43
4.3.24 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9) ...................................................................................................................G-46
4.3.25 Paper feed suction unit ..............................................................................................................................................G-49
4.3.26 Paper feed belt ...........................................................................................................................................................G-50
4.3.27 Paper suction fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), and /6 (FM6) ..................................................G-50
4.3.28 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20) ...................G-52
4.3.29 Shutter solenoid /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16) ................................G-54
4.3.30 Floating duct solenoid /Fr1 (SD7), /Fr2 (SD12), /Fr3 (SD17), /Rr1 (SD8), /Rr2 (SD13), /Rr3 (SD18) .......................G-56
4.3.31 Paper feed check window ..........................................................................................................................................G-57
4.3.32 Vertical conveyance unit ............................................................................................................................................G-57
4.3.33 Horizontal conveyance unit ........................................................................................................................................G-58
4.3.34 Tandem conveyance unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-59
4.3.35 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS) ...........................................................................................................G-60
5. EF-101 .....................................................................................................................................................................G-63
5.1.1 Fusing unit ...................................................................................................................................................................G-63
xii
5.3.2 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-64
5.3.3 Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-64
5.3.4 Thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2) ......................................................................................................................................G-65
5.3.5 Thermostat /3 (TS3), /4 (TS4) ......................................................................................................................................G-65
6. RU-508/HM-101........................................................................................................................................................G-67
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit .............................................................................................................................................G-67
6.3.2 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-68
6.3.3 Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-68
6.3.4 Upper cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-69
6.3.5 Humidification unit ........................................................................................................................................................G-69
6.3.6 Water feed tank ............................................................................................................................................................G-72
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1) ..........................................................................................................................................................G-73
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit .............................................................................................................................................G-73
6.3.9 Shutter .........................................................................................................................................................................G-74
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board ......................................................................................................................................G-75
7. FS-521 .....................................................................................................................................................................G-76
7.2.2 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-76
7.2.3 Sub tray ........................................................................................................................................................................G-77
7.2.4 Upper cover /1 .............................................................................................................................................................G-77
7.2.5 Upper cover /2 .............................................................................................................................................................G-78
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr ................................................................................................................................................................G-79
7.2.7 Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-79
7.2.8 Stacker unit ..................................................................................................................................................................G-79
7.2.9 Main tray ......................................................................................................................................................................G-82
7.2.10 Lift wire .......................................................................................................................................................................G-82
7.2.11 Tray up down motor ...................................................................................................................................................G-86
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1 ..............................................................................................................................G-86
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2 ..............................................................................................................................G-86
8. FS-612 .....................................................................................................................................................................G-89
8.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper ............................................................................................G-89
8.3.2 Upper cover /1 .............................................................................................................................................................G-90
8.3.3 Upper cover /2 .............................................................................................................................................................G-90
8.3.4 Front door ....................................................................................................................................................................G-90
8.3.5 Rear cover ...................................................................................................................................................................G-91
8.3.6 Left cover .....................................................................................................................................................................G-91
8.3.7 Main tray ......................................................................................................................................................................G-91
8.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire .........................................................................................................................................G-92
8.3.9 Stacker unit cover ........................................................................................................................................................G-95
8.3.10 Stacker unit ................................................................................................................................................................G-95
8.3.11 Paper exit opening unit ..............................................................................................................................................G-97
9. PK-512/513...............................................................................................................................................................G-99
9.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted...............................................................................................................G-99
9.1.1 Punch unit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-99
9.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list..........................................................................................................................................G-99
9.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure.......................................................................................................................................G-99
9.3.2 Punch unit.....................................................................................................................................................................G-99
10. PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................G-101
10.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts .......................................................................................................................G-101
10.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures .......................................................................................................................G-101
10.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling .......................................................................................................G-101
10.2.2 Upper cover .............................................................................................................................................................G-101
10.2.3 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-101
10.2.4 Operation panel cover ..............................................................................................................................................G-101
11. LS-505 .................................................................................................................................................................G-102
xiii
11.2.2 Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................G-102
11.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire .................................................................................................................G-104
11.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW ........................................................................................................G-107
12. FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-108
12.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ..........................................................................................................G-108
12.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section .....................................................................................G-108
12.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr .................................................................................................................................G-109
12.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr .................................................................................................................................G-109
12.3.3 Upper door ...............................................................................................................................................................G-110
12.3.4 Rear cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-110
12.3.5 Left cover /Fr ............................................................................................................................................................G-110
12.3.6 Left cover /Rr ...........................................................................................................................................................G-111
12.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover ..........................................................................................................................................G-111
12.3.8 Right cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-111
12.3.9 Left cover /Up ...........................................................................................................................................................G-112
12.3.10 Mount cover ...........................................................................................................................................................G-112
12.3.11 Front door ..............................................................................................................................................................G-112
12.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ............................................................................................G-113
12.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) .............................................................................................G-114
12.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ................................................................................................................................G-114
12.3.15 Folding conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................G-115
12.3.16 Main tray up/down wire ..........................................................................................................................................G-118
12.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) .....................................................................................G-123
12.3.18 Note for replacing the board ..................................................................................................................................G-125
13. SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................G-127
13.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ..........................................................................................................G-127
13.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) .....................................................G-127
13.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) .........................................................................................................................G-127
13.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) .......................................................................................................................G-127
13.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) .....................................................G-128
13.1.5 Trimmer press brake ................................................................................................................................................G-128
13.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ...........................................................................................................G-129
13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt ..........................................................................................................................................................G-130
13.3.3 Rear cover /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................................G-130
13.3.4 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-130
13.3.5 Upper cover /Fr ........................................................................................................................................................G-131
13.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3 ......................................................................................................................................................G-131
13.3.7 Sub tray cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-132
13.3.8 Front door /Lt ...........................................................................................................................................................G-132
13.3.9 Front door /Rt ...........................................................................................................................................................G-133
13.3.10 Folding unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-133
13.3.11 Note for replacing the board ..................................................................................................................................G-135
14. PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................G-137
14.2.2 Front door ................................................................................................................................................................G-138
14.2.3 Front cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-139
14.2.4 Booklet door .............................................................................................................................................................G-140
14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt ..........................................................................................................................................................G-140
14.2.6 Rear cover /Lt ..........................................................................................................................................................G-141
14.2.7 Left cover .................................................................................................................................................................G-141
14.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr ............................................................................................................................G-142
14.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr ............................................................................................................................G-142
14.2.10 Pellet supply cover .................................................................................................................................................G-142
14.2.11 SC cover /Fr ...........................................................................................................................................................G-143
14.2.12 SC cover /Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G-144
14.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt ..................................................................................................................................................G-145
14.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt ...................................................................................................................................................G-145
14.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt ..................................................................................................................................................G-145
14.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt ...................................................................................................................................................G-146
14.2.17 Upper cover /Md ....................................................................................................................................................G-146
xiv
14.2.18 Deodorant unit .......................................................................................................................................................G-146
14.2.19 Pellet supply unit ....................................................................................................................................................G-148
14.2.20 Glue tank unit .........................................................................................................................................................G-149
14.2.21 SC unit ...................................................................................................................................................................G-151
14.2.22 Clamp unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-153
14.2.23 PB left unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-154
14.2.24 Book lift wire ...........................................................................................................................................................G-157
14.2.25 Cart wire .................................................................................................................................................................G-160
14.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw ..............................................................................................................................................G-161
14.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-162
14.2.28 Cover paper tray ....................................................................................................................................................G-163
14.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ...............................................................................................................................................G-165
14.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function ......................................................................................G-168
14.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) ....................................................................................G-169
15. RU-506..................................................................................................................................................................G-172
15.2.2 Front cover................................................................................................................................................................G-172
15.2.3 Rear cover................................................................................................................................................................G-173
15.2.4 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-173
15.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board........................................................................................................G-173
16. GP-501..................................................................................................................................................................G-175
16.1 Centering punched holes....................................................................................................................................................G-175
16.2 Door latch............................................................................................................................................................................G-177
16.2.1 Door latch check.......................................................................................................................................................G-177
16.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................G-177
16.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement........................................................................................................................G-177
16.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service.............................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service...................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer....................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................G-178
16.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer.....................................................................................................................................G-178
(1) Procedure.......................................................................................................................................................................G-179
(2) Tool Required.................................................................................................................................................................G-179
(3) To level the punch:.........................................................................................................................................................G-179
17. Commercially available parts ...............................................................................................................................G-180
17.1 Status indicator light ...........................................................................................................................................................G-180
17.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................G-180
17.1.2 Connector ................................................................................................................................................................G-180
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION ..........................................................................................................H-1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................H-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ................................................................................................................I-1
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK ...................................................................................................................I-1
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE .....................................................................................I-2
3. UTILITY........................................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.1 List of utility menus ....................................................................................................................................................................I-3
3.2 Start/exit .....................................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3.2.1 Start method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-5
3.2.2 Exit method ......................................................................................................................................................................I-5
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS ..................................................................................................................................I-6
4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts ...................................................................................................................I-6
5. SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................................I-10
5.1 Service mode list ......................................................................................................................................................................I-10
5.2 Start/exit ...................................................................................................................................................................................I-12
5.2.1 Start method ..................................................................................................................................................................I-12
5.2.2 Exit method ....................................................................................................................................................................I-13
5.3 Machine adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................I-13
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ...........................................................................................................I-13
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I-14
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .....................................................................................................................I-14
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I-15
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-16
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I-16
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ......................................................................................................................I-17
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .....................................................................................................................I-17
xv
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory) ..........................................................I-18
5.3.10 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory) ............................................................I-18
5.3.11 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-18
5.3.12 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment) ..........................................................................................................I-19
5.3.13 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ...............................................................................................................I-20
5.3.14 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................................I-21
5.3.15 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I-22
5.3.16 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ........................................................................................................................I-23
5.3.17 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................I-24
5.3.18 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-24
5.3.19 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ..............................................................................................................I-25
5.3.20 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment) ................................................................................................................I-25
5.3.21 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-26
5.3.22 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment) ...............................................................................................................I-26
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ..........................................................I-27
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) ........................................................I-28
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .........................................................I-29
5.3.26 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment) .............................................................I-30
5.3.27 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ...............................................................................................................I-30
5.3.28 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................I-31
5.3.29 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) .......................................................................I-31
5.3.30 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) .......................................................................I-32
5.3.31 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) .......................................................................I-32
5.3.32 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .........................................................................................................................I-33
5.3.33 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ................................................................................I-33
5.3.34 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) .........................................................................I-33
5.3.35 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) .........................................................................................I-34
5.3.36 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ......................................................................................I-34
5.3.37 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) ........................................................................................................................I-35
5.3.38 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I-36
5.4 Process Adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................I-36
5.4.1 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I-36
5.4.2 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I-36
5.4.3 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual (High Voltage Adjustment) ............................................................................................I-36
5.4.4 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I-36
5.4.5 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I-36
5.4.6 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I-36
5.4.7 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment) .................................................................................................I-36
5.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-36
5.4.9 Charge Potential Auto. Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ...........................................................................................I-37
5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I-37
5.4.11 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) .............................................................................................I-37
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..........................................................................................I-40
5.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ...................................................................................................I-40
5.4.14 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I-40
5.4.15 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment) ......................................................................................I-41
5.4.16 Surface Potential Sensor (Sensor Output Confirm) .....................................................................................................I-41
5.4.17 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ..............................................................................................................I-41
5.4.18 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ..............................................................................................I-41
5.4.19 Drum Surface Potential (Sensor Output Confirm) .......................................................................................................I-41
5.4.20 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................I-42
5.4.21 Toner Charge Quantity Detect (Sensor Output Confirm) .............................................................................................I-42
5.4.22 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ...........................................................................................I-42
5.4.23 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ...............................................................................................I-43
5.4.24 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I-43
5.4.25 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment) ....................................................................................................I-44
5.4.26 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) ..................................................................................................I-44
5.4.27 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) ......................................................................................................I-44
5.4.28 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.) ................................................................................................I-45
5.4.29 Int. Transfer Belt Info. ..................................................................................................................................................I-45
5.4.30 IDC Sensor Information ...............................................................................................................................................I-46
5.4.31 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information........................................................................................................I-46
5.4.32 Recall Standard Data ...................................................................................................................................................I-46
5.5 System Setting .........................................................................................................................................................................I-47
5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures .............................................................................................................................I-47
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list............................................................................................................................................I-47
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX ...............................................................................................................................................I-59
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting ............................................................................................................................................I-59
5.5.5 Setting Date Input ..........................................................................................................................................................I-59
5.6 Counter/Data ............................................................................................................................................................................I-60
xvi
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter ....................................................................................................................................................I-60
5.6.2 Data collection procedures ............................................................................................................................................I-60
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print) ...........................................................................................................................I-61
5.6.4 ADF Counter ..................................................................................................................................................................I-62
5.6.5 Coverage Data History ..................................................................................................................................................I-62
5.6.6 Paper JAM History .........................................................................................................................................................I-64
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section .......................................................................................................................I-64
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1) .....................................................................................................................................I-73
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2) .....................................................................................................................................I-78
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec. ......................................................................................................................I-84
5.6.11 SC data of time series ...............................................................................................................................................I-100
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-100
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History) ..................................................................................................I-100
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History ....................................................................................................................................I-101
5.6.15 RFID Information .......................................................................................................................................................I-102
5.6.16 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter ..................................................................I-103
5.6.17 Special Parts Counter ................................................................................................................................................I-103
5.6.18 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) .....................................................................................................................I-113
5.6.19 Custom Counter Threshold Set .................................................................................................................................I-114
5.7 State Confirmation ................................................................................................................................................................I-114
5.7.1 I/O Check Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................I-114
5.7.2 Input check procedures ...............................................................................................................................................I-115
5.7.3 Output check procedures .............................................................................................................................................I-115
5.7.4 IO check mode list .......................................................................................................................................................I-115
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI) ..................................................................................I-174
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB) .............................................................I-176
5.7.7 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage ................................................................................................................I-178
5.7.8 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage ....................................................................................................I-178
5.7.9 Printer image processing board line memory check ....................................................................................................I-178
5.7.10 Hard disk check .........................................................................................................................................................I-178
5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure ...................................................................................................................................I-179
5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the writing unit .....................................................................................................................I-179
5.8 ADF adjustment .....................................................................................................................................................................I-180
5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj. .................................................................................................................................................I-180
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position ...............................................................................................................................................I-180
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I-180
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj ..........................................................................................................................................I-181
5.9 Finisher Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................................I-181
5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) .....................................................................................I-181
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) .................................................................................I-182
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ...............................................................................I-182
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) .............................................................................I-183
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment) ............................................................................I-183
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ....................................................................................................I-184
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.) ...............................................................................................I-185
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ..............................................................................................I-185
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .............................................................................................................I-186
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) .........................................................................................................I-187
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ...................................................................................................I-188
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ............................................................................................................I-188
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ..............................................................................................................I-189
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.) ................................................................................................I-190
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................I-191
5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) .........................................................................................................I-191
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment) ........................................................................................................I-191
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ....................................................................................................I-191
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .................................................................................................I-192
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .................................................................................................I-192
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ....................................................................................................I-193
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ......................................................................................................I-193
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) .....................................................................................................I-194
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ......................................................................................................I-195
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) ....................................................................................................I-195
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .....................................................................................................I-196
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ..................................................................................................I-196
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ................................................................................................I-197
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ........................................................................................................I-197
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ......................................................................................................I-198
5.9.31 GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .............................................................................................I-199
5.9.32 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ..............................................................................................I-200
xvii
5.9.33 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .........................................................................................I-200
5.9.34 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ........................................................................................I-201
5.9.35 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) .....................................................................................I-201
5.9.36 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment) ................................................................................................I-202
5.9.37 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)................................................................................................I-202
5.9.38 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment) .............................................................................................I-203
5.9.39 Recall Standard Data .................................................................................................................................................I-203
5.9.40 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment .............................................................................................................................I-204
5.9.41 Half-Fold Stopper Adj. ...............................................................................................................................................I-204
5.9.42 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) .................................................................................................................I-205
5.9.43 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) .............................................................................................................I-205
5.9.44 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment) ............................................................................................................I-206
5.9.45 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment) .......................................................................................................I-206
5.9.46 Tri-Fold Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................I-206
5.9.47 2 Position Staple Pitch ...............................................................................................................................................I-207
5.9.48 Post Inserter Tray Size ..............................................................................................................................................I-208
5.9.49 Output Quantity Limit .................................................................................................................................................I-208
5.10 Firmware Version .................................................................................................................................................................I-208
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-208
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-208
5.11 CS Remote Care ..................................................................................................................................................................I-208
5.11.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................I-208
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail).................................................................................I-208
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)..............................................................I-211
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)..................................................................I-212
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system ..............................................I-214
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ................................................................................................I-214
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC) ...................................................................................................I-215
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC) ................................................................................I-215
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC) .......................................................................................I-216
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care .......................................................................................I-216
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care ..........................................................................................................I-216
5.11.12 Setup confirmation ...................................................................................................................................................I-224
5.11.13 Maintenance call ......................................................................................................................................................I-224
5.11.14 Center call from administrator ..................................................................................................................................I-224
5.11.15 Confirm communication log .....................................................................................................................................I-224
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ...............................................................................................................I-224
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list ...............................................................................................................................I-224
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................................................................................I-226
5.12 List Output ............................................................................................................................................................................I-226
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-226
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-226
5.13 Test Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................I-227
5.13.1 Running Test Mode ...................................................................................................................................................I-227
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode .........................................................................................................................................I-228
5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check ................................................................................................................................I-228
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern ........................................................................................................I-229
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis XL/i1-Pro) .I-229
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan) ..................................................................................I-230
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan) ....................................................................................I-230
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone ..........................................................................................................................I-231
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern ......................................................................................................I-231
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage .............................................................................................................................I-232
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern ..................................................................................................................I-232
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern ..................................................................................................I-233
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL ........................................................................................I-233
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2) ......................................................................I-234
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual ............................................................................................I-235
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern ...........................................................................................I-235
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output ........................................................................................................................I-236
5.14 Setting data ..........................................................................................................................................................................I-236
5.14.1 Load from external memory .......................................................................................................................................I-236
5.14.2 Store to external memory ..........................................................................................................................................I-237
5.15 Log Store .............................................................................................................................................................................I-238
5.15.1 Log Store Setting .......................................................................................................................................................I-238
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing ..................................................................................................................................................I-239
5.16 ORU-M Setting ....................................................................................................................................................................I-239
5.16.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................I-239
5.16.2 Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................................I-239
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING..........................................................................................................I-241
xviii
6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list ....................................................................................................................................I-241
6.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-241
6.3 CE Authentication ..................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-241
6.4 CE Auth. Password ................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-241
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-241
6.5 Admin. Authentication ............................................................................................................................................................I-242
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-242
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-242
6.6 Administrator Password .........................................................................................................................................................I-242
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-242
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-242
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING..................................................................................................................................I-243
7.1 Fee Collection Setting list ......................................................................................................................................................I-243
7.2 Start/exit .................................................................................................................................................................................I-243
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-243
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-243
7.3 Management Function ...........................................................................................................................................................I-243
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-243
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-243
7.4 Billing Coefficient Setting .......................................................................................................................................................I-243
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-243
(2) Functions .........................................................................................................................................................................I-243
(3) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-243
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD .......................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1 Process Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1.1 Outline .........................................................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front) ..................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back) ..................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-244
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)....................................................................................................................................I-245
8.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)....................................................................................................................................I-245
8.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back).....................................................................................................................................I-245
8.1.8 Separation AC(Front)....................................................................................................................................................I-246
8.1.9 Separation AC(Back)....................................................................................................................................................I-246
8.1.10 Separation DC(Front) ................................................................................................................................................I-247
8.1.11 Separation DC(Back)..................................................................................................................................................I-247
8.1.12 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Idle)..............................................................................................................................I-248
8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Print) ............................................................................................................................I-248
8.1.14 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Idle).................................................................................................................................I-249
8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print)...............................................................................................................................I-249
8.1.16 Fus. UnderBelt CenterTemp. (Idle) ............................................................................................................................I-250
8.1.17 Fus. UnderBelt CenterTemp. (Print)...........................................................................................................................I-250
8.1.18 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Idle)..............................................................................................................................I-251
8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print).............................................................................................................................I-251
8.1.20 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Idle)................................................................................................................................I-252
8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print)..............................................................................................................................I-252
8.1.22 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Idle)..............................................................................................................................I-253
8.1.23 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Print)............................................................................................................................I-253
8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle)..............................................................................................................................I-254
8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print)............................................................................................................................I-254
8.1.26 Speed Down...............................................................................................................................................................I-254
8.1.27 CPM Down .................................................................................................................................................................I-255
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C8000 ............................................................................................I-256
9.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 ............................................................................................................I-256
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-256
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-256
9.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 ...........................................................................................I-256
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-256
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-256
9.3 Fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment .........................................................................................................................I-256
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-256
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-257
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622 .................................................................................................................I-258
10.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees) ........................................................................................................I-258
xix
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-258
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-258
10.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees) ..................................................................................................................................I-258
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-258
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-258
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-704/705 ..........................................................................................................I-259
11.1 Upper limit sensor standard position adjustment..................................................................................................................I-259
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-259
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-259
11.2 Paper feed performance adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I-259
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-259
(2) Preparation ......................................................................................................................................................................I-259
(3) Multi-feed adjustment (J-1649, J-1849) ...........................................................................................................................I-259
(4) No feed adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803) .................................................................................................I-260
(5) Paper lead edge buckle adjustment ................................................................................................................................I-260
(6) Adjustment for paper surface scratch due to floating duct ..............................................................................................I-260
(7) Adjustment for no feed due to paper convex curl (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803) ...................................................I-260
(8) Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803) .....................................................................................I-260
11.3 Centering adjustment (for each tray) ...................................................................................................................................I-260
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-260
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-260
11.4 Centering Adjustment (PF) ..................................................................................................................................................I-260
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-260
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-261
11.5 Horizontal adjustment...........................................................................................................................................................I-261
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-261
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-261
11.6 Tilt adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................I-262
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-262
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-262
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT EF-101 .................................................................................................................I-263
12.1 Height adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I-263
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-263
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-263
12.2 Fusing exit roller pressure adjustment .................................................................................................................................I-263
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-263
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-264
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-508 .................................................................................................................I-265
13.1 Height adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................I-265
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-265
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-265
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521 .................................................................................................................I-266
14.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position ..........................................................................................................................I-266
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-266
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-266
14.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position .................................................................................................................................I-267
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-267
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-268
14.3 Horizontal adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................................I-269
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-269
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-269
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-612 .................................................................................................................I-270
15.1 Adjustment the bypass gate .................................................................................................................................................I-270
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-270
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-270
15.2 Adjusting the shift position ...................................................................................................................................................I-271
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-271
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-271
15.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid ...........................................................................................................................I-271
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-271
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-272
15.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm .........................................................................................................I-273
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-273
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-273
15.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up .................................................................................................I-274
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-274
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-274
15.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw .................................................................................................I-275
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-275
xx
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-275
15.7 Staple position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................I-276
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-276
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-276
15.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching) ......................................................................................................................I-277
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-277
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-277
15.9 Staple up/down position adjustment ....................................................................................................................................I-278
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-278
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-278
15.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I-279
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-279
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-280
15.11 Folding pressure adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I-280
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-280
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-280
15.12 Tri-folding position adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................I-281
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-281
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-281
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513 ..........................................................................................................I-282
16.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment ..................................................................................................................................I-282
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-282
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-282
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502 ..................................................................................................................I-283
17.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ...........................................................................................................................I-283
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-283
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-283
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505 .................................................................................................................I-284
18.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) .......................................................................................................................I-284
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-284
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-284
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-284
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-284
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-284
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-285
18.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) ............................................................................................................................I-285
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-285
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-285
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-285
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-286
18.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment ..........................................................................................................................I-286
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-286
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-286
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 .................................................................................................................I-288
19.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment .................................................................I-288
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-288
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-288
19.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment ........................................................................................................I-288
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-288
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-289
19.3 Punch Centering Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................I-289
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-289
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-289
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-290
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-290
19.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) ..........................................................................................................I-290
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-290
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-290
19.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) ..................................................................................................................I-291
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-291
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-291
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506 .................................................................................................................I-292
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-292
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-292
xxi
20.2 Folding skew adjustment .....................................................................................................................................................I-292
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-292
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-292
20.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment .................................................................................................................I-293
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-293
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-293
20.4 Staple position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................I-294
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-294
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-294
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1 .................................................................................................................................................I-294
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2 .................................................................................................................................................I-295
20.5 Stapler position adjustment ..................................................................................................................................................I-295
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-295
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-295
20.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher .......................................................................................................................................I-296
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-296
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-296
20.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................I-297
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-297
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-298
20.8 Trimming adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................................I-298
(1) Usasge.............................................................................................................................................................................I-298
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-299
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 .................................................................................................................I-300
21.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment .................................................................................................................I-300
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-300
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-300
21.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment ...............................................................................................................I-300
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-300
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-301
21.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment .....................................................................................................................................I-301
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-301
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-301
21.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment .........................................................................................................................................I-302
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-302
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-302
21.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment ........................................................................................................................................I-302
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-302
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode .................................................................................................................I-303
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode ................................................................................................................I-303
21.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ...............................................................................................................................I-304
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-304
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-304
21.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-304
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-304
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-305
21.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment ......................................................................................................................I-305
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-305
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-305
21.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment ........................................................................................................................I-306
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-306
(2) Check point .....................................................................................................................................................................I-306
(3) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-307
21.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment ...........................................................................................................................I-307
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-307
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-308
21.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................I-308
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-308
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-308
21.12 Cover paper table positioning ............................................................................................................................................I-309
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-309
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-309
21.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment .................................................................................................................................I-309
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-309
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-310
21.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment .............................................................................................................I-311
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-311
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-312
21.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment .............................................................................................................I-313
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-313
xxii
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-314
21.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment .............................................................................................................................I-314
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-314
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-314
21.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment ................................................................................................................I-314
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-314
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-315
21.18 Height adjustment ..............................................................................................................................................................I-317
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-317
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-318
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506..................................................................................................................I-319
22.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment.................................................................................................................I-319
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-319
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-319
22.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2).............................................................................................I-319
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-319
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-320
22.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)...................................................................................................I-320
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-320
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-321
22.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)..............................................................................I-321
(1) Usage...............................................................................................................................................................................I-321
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-322
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE ........................................................................................................J-1

1. OUTLINE ....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware .......................................................................................................................................J-1
(1) ISW execution procedures .................................................................................................................................................J-1
(2) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards .....................................................................................................................J-1
(3) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware .........................................................................................................J-1
(4) Checksum check ................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.2 Firmware data flow ....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.3 Main body setting for ISW .........................................................................................................................................................J-1
(1) Type of setting ....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
(2) When in the version up of the program ..............................................................................................................................J-2
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed) ............................................................J-2
1.4 Type ..........................................................................................................................................................................................J-2
(1) USB MEMORY ISW ...........................................................................................................................................................J-2
(2) Internet ISW ........................................................................................................................................................................J-2
2. ISWTrns_G .................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software) ..............................................................................................................................................J-3
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G ...................................................................................................................................................J-3
(1) Procedure ...........................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G ..........................................................................................................................................................J-5
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check .............................................................................................................................................J-5
2.4 Error list .....................................................................................................................................................................................J-5
(1) ISWTrns_G error list ...........................................................................................................................................................J-5
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................................................J-6
3. USB MEMORY ISW ....................................................................................................................................................J-7
3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW ................................................................................................................................................J-7
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware ....................................................................................................................................J-7
(2) Procedure ...........................................................................................................................................................................J-7
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW ...........................................................................................................................................................J-10
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware ..................................................................................................................................J-10
(2) Procedure .........................................................................................................................................................................J-11
3.3 Error list ...................................................................................................................................................................................J-11
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality ......................................................................................................................J-11
(2) Error list ............................................................................................................................................................................J-11
4. Internet ISW ..............................................................................................................................................................J-13
4.1 Outline .....................................................................................................................................................................................J-13
4.2 Operating environment ............................................................................................................................................................J-13
4.3 Initial setting ............................................................................................................................................................................J-13
(1) Setting from the operation panel ......................................................................................................................................J-13
(2) Settings from the Web browser.........................................................................................................................................J-13
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities ........................................................................................................................................J-17
(1) Procedure .........................................................................................................................................................................J-17
4.5 Usage precautions ..................................................................................................................................................................J-18
4.5.1 Notice to administrator ..................................................................................................................................................J-18
xxiii
4.5.2 Power cut during writing ................................................................................................................................................J-18
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel ...................................................................................................................................J-19
(1) Procedure .........................................................................................................................................................................J-19
(2) Main body error list ...........................................................................................................................................................J-22
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW ..................................................................................................................J-22
(1) Proxy server .....................................................................................................................................................................J-22
(2) Authentication of the proxy server ....................................................................................................................................J-22
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list .........................................................................................J-22
(4) Remark .............................................................................................................................................................................J-23
K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM INDICATION ......................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 Jam code list .............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE.............................................................................................................................................K-23
2.1 Trouble reset method .............................................................................................................................................................K-23
2.2 Function to detach defective sections ....................................................................................................................................K-23
(1) User operation .................................................................................................................................................................K-23
(2) DIPSW setting ..................................................................................................................................................................K-23
2.3 Malfunction code list ...............................................................................................................................................................K-23
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection .........................................................................................................K-102
2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C8000 ................................................................................................................................................K-102
2.4.2 OR-101 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.4.3 HD-514 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.4.4 PH-101 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.4.5 EF-101 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.4.6 PF-704/705 .................................................................................................................................................................K-109
2.4.7 HT-506 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300) ....................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.5.1 C-0002 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.5.2 C-0101 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.5.3 C-0104 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.5.4 C-0105 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.5.5 C-0106 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.5.6 C-0107 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-112
2.5.7 C-0108 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-112
2.5.8 C-0109 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.5.9 C-0110 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.5.10 C-0111 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.5.11 C-0112 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.5.12 C-0113 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.5.13 C-0114 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.5.14 C-0115 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-115
2.5.15 C-0116 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-115
2.5.16 C-0117 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.5.17 C-0118 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.5.18 C-0119 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.5.19 C-0120 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.5.20 C-0121 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.5.21 C-0122 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.5.22 C-0123 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.5.23 C-0150 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.5.24 C-0151 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.5.25 C-0201 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.5.26 C-0202 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.5.27 C-0203 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.28 C-0209 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.29 C-0212 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.5.30 C-0215 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.5.31 C-0218 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.5.32 C-0221 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.5.33 C-0224 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400) ....................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.6.1 C-0301 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.6.2 C-0302 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.6.3 C-0303 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.6.4 C-0304 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.6.5 C-0305 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.6.6 C-0306 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.6.7 C-0308 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.6.8 C-0309 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
xxiv
2.6.9 C-0310 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.6.10 C-0311 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.6.11 C-0312 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.6.12 C-0313 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.6.13 C-0314 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.6.14 C-0315 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.6.15 C-0316 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.6.16 C-0317 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.6.17 C-0318 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.6.18 C-0319 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.6.19 C-0320 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.6.20 C-0321 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.6.21 C-0322 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.6.22 C-0323 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.6.23 C-0324 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.6.24 C-0325 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.6.25 C-0326 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.6.26 C-0327 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.6.27 C-0328 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.6.28 C-0329 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.6.29 C-0330 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.30 C-0331 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.31 C-0332 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.6.32 C-0333 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.33 C-0334 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.34 C-0335 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.6.35 C-0336 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.36 C-0337 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.37 C-0338 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.6.38 C-0339 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.6.39 C-0340 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.6.40 C-0341 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500) ....................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.7.1 C-0405 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.7.2 C-0406 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.7.3 C-0407 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.7.4 C-0408 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.7.5 C-0409 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.7.6 C-0410 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.7.7 C-0411 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.7.8 C-0412 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.7.9 C-0413 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.7.10 C-0414 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.7.11 C-0415 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.7.12 C-0416 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.7.13 C-0417 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.7.14 C-0418 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.7.15 C-0419 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.7.16 C-0420 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.7.17 C-0421 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.7.18 C-0422 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.7.19 C-0423 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.7.20 C-0424 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.7.21 C-0450 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126) ....................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.1 C-1005 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.2 C-1006 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.3 C-1007 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.4 C-1009 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.8.5 C-1010 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.8.6 C-1011 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.8.7 C-1012.........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.8.8 C-1013 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.8.9 C-1014.........................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-149
xxv
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.8.36 C-1124 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.8.37 C-1125 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.8.38 C-1126 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230) ....................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.1 C-1127 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.2 C-1132 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-612) ........................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521) ........................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521) ......................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.9.13 C-1201 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.9.14 C-1202 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.9.15 C-1203 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.9.16 C-1204 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.9.17 C-1205 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.9.18 C-1206 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.9.19 C-1211 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.9.20 C-1212 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.9.21 C-1213 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.9.22 C-1214 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.23 C-1215 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.24 C-1216 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.25 C-1221 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.26 C-1222 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.27 C-1223 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.28 C-1224 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.29 C-1225 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.30 C-1226 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.31 C-1227 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.32 C-1228 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.9.33 C-1229 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.9.34 C-1230 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270) ..................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.10.1 C-1231 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.10.2 C-1232 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.10.3 C-1233 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.10.4 C-1234 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.10.5 C-1235 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.10.6 C-1241 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.10.7 C-1242 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.10.8 C-1243 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.10.9 C-1244 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.10.10 C-1245 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.10.11 C-1246 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-177
xxvi
2.10.12 C-1247 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.10.13 C-1248 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.10.14 C-1249 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.10.15 C-1250 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.10.16 C-1251 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.10.17 C-1252 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.10.18 C-1253 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.10.19 C-1254 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.10.20 C-1255 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.10.21 C-1256 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.10.22 C-1257 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.10.23 C-1258 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.10.24 C-1259 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.10.25 C-1260 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.10.26 C-1261 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.10.27 C-1262 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.10.28 C-1263 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.10.29 C-1264 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.10.30 C-1265 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.10.31 C-1266 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.10.32 C-1267 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.10.33 C-1268 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.10.34 C-1269 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.10.35 C-1270 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) ..................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.11.1 C-1271 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.11.2 C-1272 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.11.3 C-1273 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.11.4 C-1275 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.11.5 C-1281.......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.11.6 C-1282.......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.11.7 C-1290 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.11.8 C-1291 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.11.9 C-1292 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.11.10 C-1293 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-192
2.11.11 C-1294 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.11.12 C-1295 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.11.13 C-1296 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-193
2.11.14 C-1297 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.11.15 C-1298 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-194
2.11.16 C-1299 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.11.17 C-1301 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.11.18 C-1302 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-195
2.11.19 C-1303 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.11.20 C-1304 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.11.21 C-1305 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-196
2.11.22 C-1306 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.11.23 C-1307 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.11.24 C-1308 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-197
2.11.25 C-1309 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.11.26 C-1310 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.11.27 C-1311 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-198
2.11.28 C-1330 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.11.29 C-1331 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.11.30 C-1332 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-199
2.11.31 C-1333 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.11.32 C-1334 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.11.33 C-1341.....................................................................................................................................................................K-200
2.11.34 C-1342.....................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.35 C-1351 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.36 C-1352 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.37 C-1353 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.11.38 C-1354 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.11.39 C-1355 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.40 C-1356 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.41 C-1357 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.42 C-1358 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.11.43 C-1359 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.11.44 C-1360 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-204
2.11.45 C-1361 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-205
xxvii
2.11.46 C-1364 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-205
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500) ..................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.12.1 C-1402 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.12.2 C-1403 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.12.3 C-1404 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-206
2.12.4 C-1406 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.12.5 C-1407 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.12.6 C-1408.......................................................................................................................................................................K-207
2.12.7 C-1411 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.12.8 C-1431 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.12.9 C-1432 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.12.10 C-1433 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-208
2.12.11 C-1435 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.12.12 C-1436 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.12.13 C-1437 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-209
2.12.14 C-1438 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.15 C-1439.....................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.16 C-1440 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.17 C-1441 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.12.18 C-1451 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.12.19 C-1452 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.12.20 C-1454 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.12.21 C-1455 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.12.22 C-1456.....................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) ..................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.13.1 C-1501 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.13.2 C-1502 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.13.3 C-1504 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.13.4 C-1505 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.13.5 C-1506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-214
2.13.6 C-1507 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.13.7 C-1508 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.13.8 C-1509 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-215
2.13.9 C-1510 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.13.10 C-1511 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-216
2.13.11 C-1512 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.13.12 C-1513 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.13.13 C-1514 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-217
2.13.14 C-1515 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.13.15 C-1516 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-218
2.13.16 C-1517 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.13.17 C-1518 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.13.18 C-1519 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-219
2.13.19 C-1520 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.13.20 C-1521 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-220
2.13.21 C-1522 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.13.22 C-1523 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.13.23 C-1524 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-221
2.13.24 C-1525 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.13.25 C-1526 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-222
2.13.26 C-1527 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.13.27 C-1528 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.13.28 C-1530 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-223
2.13.29 C-1531 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.13.30 C-1532 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-224
2.13.31 C-1534 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.13.32 C-1537 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.13.33 C-1538 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567) ................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.14.1 C-1540 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.14.2 C-1541 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.14.3 C-1542 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.14.4 C-1543 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.14.5 C-1544 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.14.6 C-1545 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.14.7 C-1546 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.14.8 C-1547 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.14.9 C-1548 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.14.10 C-1549 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.14.11 C-1550 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-231
xxviii
2.14.12 C-1551 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-231
2.14.13 C-1552 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.14.14 C-1553 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-232
2.14.15 C-1554 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.14.16 C-1555 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-233
2.14.17 C-1556 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.14.18 C-1557 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-234
2.14.19 C-1558 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.14.20 C-1559 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-235
2.14.21 C-1560 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.14.22 C-1561 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-236
2.14.23 C-1562 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.14.24 C-1565 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-237
2.14.25 C-1566 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.14.26 C-1567 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-238
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2310) ................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.15.1 C-2001 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.15.2 C-2002 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.15.3 C-2201 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-239
2.15.4 C-2202 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.15.5 C-2203 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.15.6 C-2204 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-240
2.15.7 C-2211 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.15.8 C-2212 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.15.9 C-2213 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-241
2.15.10 C-2214 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.15.11 C-2220 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-242
2.15.12 C-2221 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.15.13 C-2222 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.15.14 C-2223 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-243
2.15.15 C-2224 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.15.16 C-2225 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-244
2.15.17 C-2226 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.15.18 C-2227 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-245
2.15.19 C-2228 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.15.20 C-2229 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.15.21 C-2230 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-246
2.15.22 C-2231 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.15.23 C-2232 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.15.24 C-2233 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-247
2.15.25 C-2234 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.15.26 C-2235 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-248
2.15.27 C-2302 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.15.28 C-2303 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.15.29 C-2304 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-249
2.15.30 C-2305 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.15.31 C-2306 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.15.32 C-2307 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.15.33 C-2308 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-250
2.15.34 C-2309 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500) ................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.16.1 C-2401 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-251
2.16.2 C-2402 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.16.3 C-2403 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.16.4 C-2404 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-252
2.16.5 C-2411 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.16.6 C-2412 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.16.7 C-2413 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-253
2.16.8 C-2414 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.16.9 C-2431 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.16.10 C-2432 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-254
2.16.11 C-2433 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.16.12 C-2434 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.16.13 C-2441 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-255
2.16.14 C-2442 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.16.15 C-2443 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-256
2.16.16 C-2444 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.16.17 C-2451 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.16.18 C-2452 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-257
2.16.19 C-2453 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-258
xxix
2.16.20 C-2454 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.16.21 C-2461 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-258
2.16.22 C-2462 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.16.23 C-2463 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-259
2.16.24 C-2464 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.16.25 C-2470 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.16.26 C-2471 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-260
2.16.27 C-2472 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.16.28 C-2473 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-261
2.16.29 C-2474 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2754) ................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.17.1 C-2701 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.17.2 C-2702 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-262
2.17.3 C-2703 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.17.4 C-2704 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-263
2.17.5 C-2711 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.17.6 C-2712 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.17.7 C-2713 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-264
2.17.8 C-2714 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.17.9 C-2720 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.17.10 C-2721 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-265
2.17.11 C-2731 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.17.12 C-2732 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.17.13 C-2733 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-266
2.17.14 C-2734 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.17.15 C-2740 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.17.16 C-2741 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-267
2.17.17 C-2742 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.17.18 C-2743 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-268
2.17.19 C-2744 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.17.20 C-2751 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.17.21 C-2752 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-269
2.17.22 C-2753 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.17.23 C-2754 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000) ................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.18.1 C-2801 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-270
2.18.2 C-2802 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.18.3 C-2803 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-271
2.18.4 C-2804 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.18.5 C-2811 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.18.6 C-2812 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-272
2.18.7 C-2813 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-273
2.18.8 C-2814 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-273
2.18.9 C-2821 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-273
2.18.10 C-2822 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.18.11 C-2823 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-274
2.18.12 C-2824 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.18.13 C-2831 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.18.14 C-2832 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-275
2.18.15 C-2833 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.18.16 C-2834 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-276
2.18.17 C-2840 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.18.18 C-2841 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.18.19 C-2851 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-277
2.18.20 C-2852 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.18.21 C-2853 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-278
2.18.22 C-2861 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.18.23 C-2862 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.18.24 C-2863 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-279
2.18.25 C-2871 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.18.26 C-2872 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-280
2.18.27 C-2873 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.18.28 C-2881 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.18.29 C-2882 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-281
2.18.30 C-2883 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-282
2.18.31 C-2884 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-282
2.18.32 C-2891 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.18.33 C-2892 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.18.34 C-2893 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-283
2.18.35 C-2894 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-284
xxx
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500) ................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.19.1 C-3101 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-284
2.19.2 C-3102 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.19.3 C-3103 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.19.4 C-3104 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-285
2.19.5 C-3105 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.19.6 C-3106 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-286
2.19.7 C-3107 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.19.8 C-3108 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-287
2.19.9 C-3109 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.19.10 C-3110 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.19.11 C-3111 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-288
2.19.12 C-3150 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.19.13 C-3151 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.19.14 C-3152 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.19.15 C-3153 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.19.16 C-3154 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.19.17 C-3302 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.19.18 C-3303 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.19.19 C-3304 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.19.20 C-3305 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.19.21 C-3306 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.19.22 C-3311 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-292
2.19.23 C-3312 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.19.24 C-3313 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-293
2.19.25 C-3314 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.19.26 C-3315 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.20 Solution 16 (C-3501_3900) ................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.20.1 C-3501 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-294
2.20.2 C-3502 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.20.3 C-3503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-295
2.20.4 C-3504 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.20.5 C-3505 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-296
2.20.6 C-3506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.20.7 C-3507 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-297
2.20.8 C-3508 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.20.9 C-3509 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.20.10 C-3510 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.20.11 C-3511 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.20.12 C-3512 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.20.13 C-3513 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.20.14 C-3520 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.20.15 C-3550 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.20.16 C-3552 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.20.17 C-3553 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.20.18 C-3555 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.20.19 C-3556 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-302
2.20.20 C-3558 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.20.21 C-3560 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-303
2.20.22 C-3561 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.20.23 C-3570 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-304
2.20.24 C-3801 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-305
2.20.25 C-3802 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-305
2.20.26 C-3803 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.20.27 C-3804 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-306
2.20.28 C-3805 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.20.29 C-3850 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.20.30 C-3852 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.20.31 C-3853 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.20.32 C-3854 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.20.33 C-3855 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.20.34 C-3856.....................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.20.35 C-3857.....................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.20.36 C-3858.....................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.20.37 C-3859.....................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.21 Solution 17 (C-3901_3999) ................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.21.1 C-3901 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.21.2 C-3902 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.21.3 C-3903 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.21.4 C-3904 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
xxxi
2.21.5 C-3905 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.21.6 C-3906 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.21.7 C-3907 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.21.8 C-3908 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-315
2.21.9 C-3909 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.21.10 C-3910 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.21.11 C-3911 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-316
2.21.12 C-3912 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.21.13 C-3913 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-317
2.21.14 C-3914 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.21.15 C-3915 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.21.16 C-3916 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.21.17 C-3917 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.21.18 C-3918 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.21.19 C-3919 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.21.20 C-3920 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.21.21 C-3921 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.21.22 C-3950 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.21.23 C-3952 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.21.24 C-3953 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-322
2.21.25 C-3955 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.21.26 C-3956 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.21.27 C-3958 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.21.28 C-3959 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.21.29 C-3961 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.21.30 C-3962 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.21.31 C-3964 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.21.32 C-3965 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.21.33 C-3967 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.22 Solution 18 (C-4001_5000) ................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.22.1 C-4101 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.22.2 C-4102 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.22.3 C-4103 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.22.4 C-4104 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.22.5 C-4120 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.22.6 C-4302 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.22.7 C-4501 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.22.8 C-4502 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.22.9 C-4503 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-330
2.22.10 C-4504 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.22.11 C-4511 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.22.12 C-4512 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-331
2.22.13 C-4513 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.22.14 C-4514 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-332
2.22.15 C-4520 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.22.16 C-4521 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.22.17 C-4522 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-333
2.22.18 C-4523 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.22.19 C-4531 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-334
2.22.20 C-4532 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.22.21 C-4533 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.22.22 C-4534 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-335
2.22.23 C-4541 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-336
2.22.24 C-4542 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-336
2.22.25 C-4543 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.22.26 C-4544 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.22.27 C-4601 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-337
2.22.28 C-4602 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.22.29 C-4603 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.22.30 C-4604 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-338
2.22.31 C-4611 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.22.32 C-4612 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.22.33 C-4613 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.22.34 C-4614 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-339
2.22.35 C-4621 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.22.36 C-4622 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.22.37 C-4623 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-340
2.22.38 C-4624 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.22.39 C-4631 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.22.40 C-4632 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-341
xxxii
2.22.41 C-4633 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-341
2.22.42 C-4634 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.22.43 C-4641 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.22.44 C-4642 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-342
2.22.45 C-4643 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.22.46 C-4644 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.22.47 C-4651 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-343
2.22.48 C-4652 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.22.49 C-4653 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.22.50 C-4654 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.22.51 C-4661 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-344
2.22.52 C-4662 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.22.53 C-4663 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.22.54 C-4701 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-345
2.22.55 C-4702 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.22.56 C-4703 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.22.57 C-4705 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.22.58 C-4706 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.22.59 C-4708 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.22.60 C-4709 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.22.61 C-4713 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.22.62 C-4714 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.22.63 C-4715 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.22.64 C-4716 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.22.65 C-4717 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.22.66 C-4718 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-349
2.22.67 C-4719 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.22.68 C-4720 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.22.69 C-4721 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-350
2.22.70 C-4722 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.22.71 C-4723 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.22.72 C-4724 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-351
2.22.73 C-4725 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.22.74 C-4840 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.22.75 C-4850 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-352
2.22.76 C-4860 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.23 Solution 19 (C-5001_6000) ................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.23.1 C-5001 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.23.2 C-5002 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-353
2.23.3 C-5003 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.23.4 C-5004 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-354
2.23.5 C-5005 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.23.6 C-5006 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.23.7 C-5007 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-355
2.23.8 C-5010 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.23.9 C-5012 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.23.10 C-5013 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-356
2.23.11 C-5014 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.23.12 C-5015 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.23.13 C-5016 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-357
2.23.14 C-5017 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.23.15 C-5018 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.23.16 C-5019 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-358
2.23.17 C-5020 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.23.18 C-5021 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.23.19 C-5022 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-359
2.23.20 C-5023 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.23.21 C-5024 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.23.22 C-5025 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-360
2.23.23 C-5100 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.23.24 C-5101 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-361
2.23.25 C-5102 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.23.26 C-5103 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.23.27 C-5104 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-362
2.23.28 C-5105 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.23.29 C-5106 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.23.30 C-5107 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-363
2.23.31 C-5108 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.23.32 C-5109 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
2.23.33 C-5121 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-364
xxxiii
2.23.34 C-5137 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.23.35 C-5149 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-365
2.23.36 C-5199 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.23.37 C-5301 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.23.38 C-5302 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-366
2.23.39 C-5303 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.23.40 C-5304 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.24 Solution 20 (C-6001_9999) ................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.24.1 C-6101 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-367
2.24.2 C-6102 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.24.3 C-6301 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.24.4 C-6701 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-368
2.24.5 C-6702 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.24.6 C-6703 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-369
2.24.7 C-6704 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.24.8 C-6705 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.24.9 C-6706 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-370
2.24.10 C-6707 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.24.11 C-6708 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.24.12 C-6709 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-371
2.24.13 C-6710 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.24.14 C-6711 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.24.15 C-6712 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.24.16 C-6713 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.24.17 C-6714 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.24.18 C-6715 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.24.19 C-6716 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.24.20 C-6717 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.24.21 C-6718 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.24.22 C-6719 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.24.23 C-6720 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.24.24 C-6721 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.24.25 C-6722 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.24.26 C-6723 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.24.27 C-6724 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-376
2.24.28 C-6725 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.24.29 C-6801 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.24.30 C-7001 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-377
2.24.31 C-8001 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.32 C-8101 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.33 C-8102 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-378
2.24.34 C-8103 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.35 C-8401 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.36 C-8402 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-379
2.24.37 C-8403 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.24.38 C-8404 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.24.39 C-8405 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-380
2.24.40 C-8406 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.24.41 C-8407 ....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.25 Solution 21 (C-C001_C200) ...............................................................................................................................................K-381
2.25.1 C-C101 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-381
2.25.2 C-C102 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25.3 C-C103 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25.4 C-C104 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.25.5 C-C106 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.25.6 C-C107 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.25.7 C-C108 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.25.8 C-C109 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.25.9 C-C111 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.25.10 C-C112 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.11 C-C113 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.12 C-C114 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.25.13 C-C116 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.14 C-C117....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.15 C-C118....................................................................................................................................................................K-386
2.25.16 C-C119 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.25.17 C-C120 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.26 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100) ...............................................................................................................................................K-387
2.26.1 C-C201 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-387
2.26.2 C-C211 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
xxxiv
2.26.3 C-C212 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-388
2.26.4 C-C213 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.26.5 C-C214 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.26.6 C-C215 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-389
2.26.7 C-C216 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.26.8 C-C217 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.26.9 C-C218 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-390
2.26.10 C-C219 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.26.11 C-C220 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-391
2.26.12 C-C221 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.26.13 C-C222 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.26.14 C-D0E0 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-392
2.26.15 C-D0E1 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.26.16 C-D0E2 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-393
2.26.17 C-D0E3 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.26.18 C-D0E4 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.26.19 C-D0E5 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-394
2.26.20 C-D0E6 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.26.21 C-D0E7 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.26.22 C-D0E8 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-395
2.26.23 C-D0EF ..................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.26.24 C-D0F0 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.26.25 C-E001 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-396
2.26.26 C-E002 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.26.27 C-E003 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.26.28 C-E004 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-397
2.26.29 C-E005 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.30 C-E006 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.31 C-E007 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-398
2.26.32 C-E008 ...................................................................................................................................................................K-399
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE ....................................................................K-400
3.1 The power of main body does not turn ON ...........................................................................................................................K-400
3.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in red .........................K-400
3.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything .............K-400
3.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green ..............................................K-400
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF ...........................................................................................................................................K-401
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option ..............................................................................................................K-401
3.3.1 PF-704/PF-705 ...........................................................................................................................................................K-401
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option ..................................................................................................................K-401
3.4.1 EF-101 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-401
3.4.2 RU-508 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-402
3.4.3 LS-505 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-402
3.4.4 FD-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-402
3.4.5 FS-521 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-403
3.4.6 FS-612 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-403
3.4.7 SD-506 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-403
3.4.8 PB-503 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-404
3.4.9 RU-506........................................................................................................................................................................K-404
3.4.10 GP-501......................................................................................................................................................................K-404
4. IMAGE TROUBLE ..................................................................................................................................................K-406
4.1 Initial check point ..................................................................................................................................................................K-406
4.1.1 Initial check items........................................................................................................................................................K-406
4.2 Printer system procedure......................................................................................................................................................K-407
4.2.1 Printer system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction.............................................K-407
4.2.2 Printer system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction...........................................K-409
4.2.3 Printer system: Image memory, Size memory............................................................................................................K-410
4.2.4 Printer system: Uneven density in sub scan direction.................................................................................................K-411
4.2.5 Printer system: Uneven density in main scan direction...............................................................................................K-413
4.2.6 Printer system: Light density (ID lowering)..................................................................................................................K-415
4.2.7 Printer system: Pitch unevenness...............................................................................................................................K-417
4.2.8 Printer system: Gray background................................................................................................................................K-418
4.2.9 Printer system: Void areas, White spots.....................................................................................................................K-419
4.2.10 Printer system: Color spots.......................................................................................................................................K-421
4.2.11 Printer system: Moire................................................................................................................................................K-422
4.2.12 Printer system: Gradation error.................................................................................................................................K-423
4.2.13 Printer system: Image blurring..................................................................................................................................K-424
4.2.14 Printer system: Color reproducibility error.................................................................................................................K-425
4.2.15 Printer system: Color registration error.....................................................................................................................K-426
4.2.16 Printer system: Brush effect, Image bleeding............................................................................................................K-427
4.2.17 Printer system: Inky backside....................................................................................................................................K-428
xxxv
4.2.18 Printer system: Poor fusing performance, Offset......................................................................................................K-429
4.2.19 Printer system: Blank print, Black print......................................................................................................................K-429
4.2.20 Printer system: Uneven gloss, Rough gloss..............................................................................................................K-430
4.2.21 Printer system: Darker at trailing edge of paper........................................................................................................K-430
4.2.22 Printer system: Ripple unevenness (solid section of red and blue)...........................................................................K-431
4.2.23 Printer system: Image erasure at trailing edge of thick paper...................................................................................K-431
4.3 Scanner system procedure....................................................................................................................................................K-432
4.3.1 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in sub scan direction .........................................K-432
4.3.2 Scanner system: White stripe, white band, color stripe, color band in main scan direction .......................................K-433
4.3.3 Scanner system: Color spots .....................................................................................................................................K-434
4.3.4 Scanner system: Gray background ............................................................................................................................K-434
4.3.5 Scanner system: Blurred image, brush effect ............................................................................................................K-435
4.3.6 Scanner system: Color registration error, out of synchronization (Stripe in main scan direction) ..............................K-435
4.3.7 Scanner system: Moire ...............................................................................................................................................K-436
4.3.8 Scanner system: Leaning image ................................................................................................................................K-436
4.3.9 Scanner system: Image distortion...............................................................................................................................K-437
4.3.10 Scanner system: Low image density, Rough image ................................................................................................K-437
4.3.11 Scanner system: ACS malfunction ...........................................................................................................................K-438
4.3.12 Scanner system: Blank copy, black copy..................................................................................................................K-438
4.3.13 Scanner system: Image abnormality.........................................................................................................................K-439
4.3.14 Scanner system: Uneven density .............................................................................................................................K-439
4.3.15 Scanner system: Faulty density difference between original and copy output .........................................................K-440
4.3.16 Scanner system: Tone difference between original and copy output .......................................................................K-441
5. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP)....................................................................................................................................K-443
5.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)...........................................................................................................................................K-443
5.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................................................................K-443
5.2.1 Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................................................................K-443
5.2.2 General........................................................................................................................................................................K-443
5.2.3 Back Gauge.................................................................................................................................................................K-444
5.2.4 Die Set.........................................................................................................................................................................K-444
5.3 Initial Service Action..............................................................................................................................................................K-444
5.3.1 Initial Service Action....................................................................................................................................................K-444
5.4 Mis-Feed Service Action........................................................................................................................................................K-445
5.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action.............................................................................................................................................K-445
5.5 Final Service Action...............................................................................................................................................................K-447
5.5.1 Final Service Action.....................................................................................................................................................K-447
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .................................................................................L-1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C8000 ...............................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Main body rear side ........................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Main body upper surface ................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.3 Main body front side .......................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.4 Inside of the main body ...................................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.5 Writing section ................................................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.6 PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION ..................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.7 Process unit section ........................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.8 TONER SUPPLY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.9 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section 1 ....................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.10 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section 2 ..................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.11 Vertical conveyance section .........................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.12 Registration section top side .........................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.13 Registration section left side .........................................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.14 Duplex section front side ............................................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.15 Duplex section top side ...............................................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.16 Duplex section internal side ........................................................................................................................................L-11
1.1.17 Duplex section right side .............................................................................................................................................L-11
1.1.18 Operation panel section ..............................................................................................................................................L-12
1.1.19 REVERSAL SECTION ................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.1.20 Paper exit section .......................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.1.21 Fusing section right side .............................................................................................................................................L-13
1.1.22 Fusing section left side ...............................................................................................................................................L-14
1.1.23 Inside of the fusing section .........................................................................................................................................L-14
1.1.24 Intermediate transfer section ......................................................................................................................................L-15
1.1.25 2nd transfer section ....................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.1.26 SYSBOX front side .....................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.1.27 SYSBOX rear side ......................................................................................................................................................L-17
1.1.28 Power distribution section ...........................................................................................................................................L-18
1.1.29 HD-514 .......................................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.2 DF-622 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-19
xxxvi
1.3 PF-704/705/HT-506 ................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.3.1 Front side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.3.2 Right side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.3.3 Top side (PF-705 only) .................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.3.4 Rear side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.3.5 Tandem conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L-22
1.3.6 Vertical conveyance section front side .........................................................................................................................L-23
1.3.7 Vertical conveyance section rear side ..........................................................................................................................L-24
1.3.8 Vertical conveyance section top side ............................................................................................................................L-25
1.3.9 Horizontal conveyance section bottom side .................................................................................................................L-26
1.3.10 Horizontal conveyance section rear side ....................................................................................................................L-26
1.3.11 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section ...................................................................................................................................L-27
1.3.12 Paper feed suction section .........................................................................................................................................L-27
1.3.13 HT-506 ........................................................................................................................................................................L-28
1.4 EF-101 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-28
1.4.1 Rear side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-28
1.4.2 Front/left side ................................................................................................................................................................L-29
1.4.3 Mount 1 .........................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.4.4 Mount 2 .........................................................................................................................................................................L-30
1.4.5 Fusing section1 .............................................................................................................................................................L-31
1.4.6 Fusing section2 .............................................................................................................................................................L-32
1.5 RU-508/HM-101 ......................................................................................................................................................................L-33
1.5.1 Right side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-33
1.5.2 Left side.........................................................................................................................................................................L-34
1.5.3 Rear side 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................L-35
1.5.4 Rear side 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................L-36
1.5.5 Humidification section front side ...................................................................................................................................L-37
1.5.6 Humidification section rear side ....................................................................................................................................L-37
1.5.7 Output paper density detection section ........................................................................................................................L-38
1.6 FS-521 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.6.1 Rear side 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.6.2 Rear side2 ....................................................................................................................................................................L-39
1.6.3 Front side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-40
1.6.4 Stacker inside 1 ............................................................................................................................................................L-40
1.6.5 Stacker inside2 .............................................................................................................................................................L-41
1.6.6 Stapler ..........................................................................................................................................................................L-41
1.6.7 Paper exit alignment .....................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.7 FS-612 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.7.1 Front side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-42
1.7.2 Rear side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-43
1.7.3 Folding section ..............................................................................................................................................................L-43
1.7.4 Stapler section ..............................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.8 PK-512/513 .............................................................................................................................................................................L-44
1.9 PI-502 .....................................................................................................................................................................................L-45
1.10 LS-505 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-45
1.10.1 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-45
1.10.2 Upper surface .............................................................................................................................................................L-46
1.10.3 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-46
1.10.4 Shift unit ......................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.11 FD-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-47
1.11.1 Conveyance section front side/right side ....................................................................................................................L-47
1.11.2 Major boards in the power source section ..................................................................................................................L-48
1.11.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side .......................................................................................................................L-48
1.11.4 PI rear side .................................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.11.5 PI upper surface .........................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.11.6 PI lower tray ................................................................................................................................................................L-49
1.11.7 Punch section .............................................................................................................................................................L-50
1.11.8 Folding unit front side/right side ..................................................................................................................................L-50
1.11.9 Folding unit rear side/left side .....................................................................................................................................L-51
1.12 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-51
1.12.1 Horizontal conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................L-51
1.12.2 Right angle conveyance section .................................................................................................................................L-52
1.12.3 Folding section ............................................................................................................................................................L-52
1.12.4 Saddle stitching section ..............................................................................................................................................L-55
1.12.5 Bundle processing section ..........................................................................................................................................L-57
1.12.6 Trimmer section ..........................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.12.7 Left side.......................................................................................................................................................................L-58
1.12.8 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-59
1.12.9 Rear side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-59
1.13 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-60
xxxvii
1.13.1 SC section ..................................................................................................................................................................L-60
1.13.2 Clamp section .............................................................................................................................................................L-61
1.13.3 Pellet supply section ...................................................................................................................................................L-62
1.13.4 Glue tank section ........................................................................................................................................................L-62
1.13.5 Cover paper supply section ........................................................................................................................................L-63
1.13.6 Cover paper table section ...........................................................................................................................................L-64
1.13.7 Book stock section ......................................................................................................................................................L-65
1.13.8 Conveyance section and framework section ..............................................................................................................L-66
1.13.9 Relay conveyance section ..........................................................................................................................................L-68
1.14 RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................................L-69
1.14.1 Stacker section (front side)..........................................................................................................................................L-69
1.14.2 Stacker section (front side)..........................................................................................................................................L-69
1.14.3 Rear side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-69
1.15 GP-501...................................................................................................................................................................................L-70
1.15.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1..............................................................................................................................................L-70
1.15.2 Rear side 2/Left side....................................................................................................................................................L-71
1.15.3 Right side 2..................................................................................................................................................................L-71
1.15.4 Front side.....................................................................................................................................................................L-71
1.15.5 Bypass conveyance section........................................................................................................................................L-72
1.15.6 Punch conveyance section..........................................................................................................................................L-72
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD.......................................................................................................L-74
2.1 bizhub PRESS C8000 .............................................................................................................................................................L-74
2.1.1 Overall control board (OACB)........................................................................................................................................L-74
2.1.2 Printer control board (PRCB).........................................................................................................................................L-74
2.1.3 Printer image processing board (PRIPB) ......................................................................................................................L-75
2.1.4 Memory control board /1 (MCB1)..................................................................................................................................L-75
2.1.5 Memory control board /2 (MCB2)..................................................................................................................................L-76
2.1.6 Conveyance drive board (CDB).....................................................................................................................................L-76
2.1.7 AC drive board /1 (ACDB/1)..........................................................................................................................................L-77
2.1.8 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1).......................................................................................................................................L-77
2.1.9 DC power supply /2 (DCPS/2).......................................................................................................................................L-78
2.1.10 DC power supply /3 (DCPS/3).....................................................................................................................................L-78
2.1.11 DC power supply /4 (DCPS/4).....................................................................................................................................L-79
2.1.12 High voltage unit /1-1 (HV/1-1)....................................................................................................................................L-79
2.1.13 High voltage unit /1-2 (HV/1-2)....................................................................................................................................L-80
2.1.14 High voltage unit /2 (HV/2)...........................................................................................................................................L-80
2.1.17 Operation board /1 (OB1)............................................................................................................................................L-82
2.1.20 Drum potential sensor board /Y, /M, /C, /K (DPSB/Y, /M, /C, /K )...............................................................................L-83
2.1.21 IDC sensor /Fr, /Rr (IDCS/1, /2)...................................................................................................................................L-84
2.1.22 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB)..................................................................................................................L-84
2.1.23 Index board /Y, /M, /C, /K (IDB/Y, /M, /C, /K )..............................................................................................................L-85
2.1.24 Operation inverter (O_INVB).......................................................................................................................................L-85
2.1.25 Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K (LDB/Y, /M, /C, /K )....................................................................................................L-86
2.1.26 Toner drive board (TDB)..............................................................................................................................................L-86
2.1.27 Color registration board /1, /2, /3 (CRB/1, /2, /3).........................................................................................................L-87
2.1.28 Preview control board (PHCB).....................................................................................................................................L-87
2.1.29 Antenna board /1, /2, /3 (AB1, 2, 3).............................................................................................................................L-88
2.1.30 RFID control board (RFIDCB)......................................................................................................................................L-88
2.1.31 Relay board /U (RBU)..................................................................................................................................................L-89
2.2 DF-622.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-89
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB) ..............................................................................................................................................L-89
2.2.2 Size sensor board (SSB) ..............................................................................................................................................L-89
2.3 PF-704/705/HT-506 ................................................................................................................................................................L-90
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB)..................................................................................................................................................L-90
2.3.2 AC drive board (ACDB).................................................................................................................................................L-90
2.3.3 DC power supply /1, /2 (DCPS/1, /2).............................................................................................................................L-90
2.3.4 Scanner drive board (SCDB).........................................................................................................................................L-91
2.3.5 Scanner relay board (SCRB).........................................................................................................................................L-91
2.3.6 CCD board (CCDB).......................................................................................................................................................L-91
2.3.7 Inverter board (INVB).....................................................................................................................................................L-91
2.3.8 Multi feed detection board /R, /S (MFDBR, S)...............................................................................................................L-92
2.4 EF-101 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-92
2.4.1 EF control board (EFCB)...............................................................................................................................................L-92
2.4.2 AC drive board (ACDB).................................................................................................................................................L-92
2.4.3 DC power supply (DCPS)..............................................................................................................................................L-93
2.4.4 Antenna board /4 (AB4).................................................................................................................................................L-93
xxxviii
2.5 RU-508/HM-101 ......................................................................................................................................................................L-93
2.5.1 RU control board (RUCB)..............................................................................................................................................L-93
2.5.2 RU drive board (RUDB).................................................................................................................................................L-94
2.5.3 DC power supply (DCPS) .............................................................................................................................................L-94
2.5.4 Color density detection board /Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK) .....................................................L-94
2.5.5 Color density control board (CDCB) .............................................................................................................................L-95
2.5.6 Color density relay board (CDRLB) ..............................................................................................................................L-95
2.5.7 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .......................................................................................................................................L-95
2.6 FS-521.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-96
2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) .........................................................................................................................................L-96
2.6.2 FNS drive board (FNSDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-96
2.6.3 Stapler board (STB) ......................................................................................................................................................L-96
2.6.4 Operation board (OB) ...................................................................................................................................................L-97
2.6.5 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .......................................................................................................................................L-97
2.7 FS-612 ....................................................................................................................................................................................L-97
2.7.1 FNS control board (FNSCB) .........................................................................................................................................L-97
2.7.2 Relay board (RB) ..........................................................................................................................................................L-97
2.8 PK-512/513..............................................................................................................................................................................L-98
2.8.1 Punch drive board (PDB)...............................................................................................................................................L-98
2.8.2 Paper size sensor board................................................................................................................................................L-98
2.9 PI-502......................................................................................................................................................................................L-98
2.9.1 PI drive board (PIDB) ....................................................................................................................................................L-98
2.9.2 PI operation board (PIOB) ............................................................................................................................................L-98
2.10 LS-505...................................................................................................................................................................................L-99
2.10.1 LS control board (LSCB) .............................................................................................................................................L-99
2.10.2 Relay board /1 (RLB/1) ...............................................................................................................................................L-99
2.10.3 Relay board /2 (RLB/2) ...............................................................................................................................................L-99
2.10.4 DC power supply (DCPS) ...........................................................................................................................................L-99
2.10.5 Relay board (RLB) ......................................................................................................................................................L-99
2.11 FD-503.................................................................................................................................................................................L-100
2.11.1 FD control board (FDCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-100
2.11.2 Punch drive board (PDB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-100
2.11.3 Folding drive board (FDB) ........................................................................................................................................L-101
2.11.4 PI drive board (PIDB) ................................................................................................................................................L-101
2.11.5 FD operation board (FDOB) .....................................................................................................................................L-101
2.11.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) ...................................................................................................................................L-101
2.11.7 DC power supply board (DCPS) ...............................................................................................................................L-102
2.11.8 Multi feed detection board /1, /2 (MFDB1, 2) ............................................................................................................L-102
2.12 SD-506.................................................................................................................................................................................L-102
2.12.1 SD control board (SDCB) .........................................................................................................................................L-102
2.12.2 SD drive board (SDDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-103
2.12.3 SD drive board /2 (SDDB/2) .....................................................................................................................................L-103
2.12.4 DC power supply /1 (DCPS1) ...................................................................................................................................L-103
2.12.7 Jam indication board /1 (JAMIB/1) ............................................................................................................................L-104
2.12.8 Jam indication board /2 (JAMIB/2) ............................................................................................................................L-104
2.13 PB-503.................................................................................................................................................................................L-105
2.13.1 PB control board (PBCB) ..........................................................................................................................................L-105
2.13.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ............................................................................................................................................L-105
2.13.3 PB drive board /1 (PBDB1) .......................................................................................................................................L-106
2.13.6 Jam indication board /1 (JAMB1) ..............................................................................................................................L-107
2.13.7 Jam indication board /2 (JAMB2) ..............................................................................................................................L-107
2.13.8 Manual operation board (OB1) .................................................................................................................................L-107
2.13.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) ........................................................................................................................L-107
2.13.10 DC power supply /1 (DCPU/1) ................................................................................................................................L-107
2.14 RU-506.................................................................................................................................................................................L-109
2.14.1 RU control board (RUCB)..........................................................................................................................................L-109
2.14.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB)....................................................................................................................................L-109
2.15 GP-501.................................................................................................................................................................................L-110
2.15.1 Punch Controller PCB................................................................................................................................................L-110
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING...........................................................................................................L-111
3.1 SD-506 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-111
3.1.1 Right side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-111
xxxix
3.1.2 Left side ......................................................................................................................................................................L-112
3.1.3 Rear side-1 .................................................................................................................................................................L-113
3.1.4 Rear side-2 .................................................................................................................................................................L-113
3.1.5 Folding section ............................................................................................................................................................L-114
3.1.6 Saddle stitching section-1 ...........................................................................................................................................L-115
3.1.7 Saddle stitching section-2 ...........................................................................................................................................L-115
3.2 PB-503 ..................................................................................................................................................................................L-116
3.2.1 Rear side-1 .................................................................................................................................................................L-116
3.2.2 Rear side 2 .................................................................................................................................................................L-117
3.2.3 Rear side 3 .................................................................................................................................................................L-118
3.2.4 Rear side 4 .................................................................................................................................................................L-119
3.2.5 Rear side 5 .................................................................................................................................................................L-120
3.2.6 Front side ....................................................................................................................................................................L-121
3.2.7 Sub compile (SC) section ...........................................................................................................................................L-121
3.2.8 Clamp section .............................................................................................................................................................L-122
3.2.9 Cover paper supply section ........................................................................................................................................L-122
3.2.10 Cover paper table section .........................................................................................................................................L-123
3.2.11 Book stock section ....................................................................................................................................................L-123
3.2.12 Conveyance section .................................................................................................................................................L-124
3.2.13 Pellet supply section .................................................................................................................................................L-124
3.2.14 Relay conveyance section ........................................................................................................................................L-124
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub PRESS C8000 ...............................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1 Timing chart of turning ON the sub power switch ....................................................................................................................M-1
1.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode...............................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.1 Operation condition.........................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.2.2 Timing chart....................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2. DF-622 .......................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode (Reverse exit) .....................................................................................................................M-3
2.1.1 Operation condition ........................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.1.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2 Timing chart of the duplex mode ..............................................................................................................................................M-3
2.2.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-4
3. PF-704/705 ................................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode ............................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-5
4. EF-101 .......................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1 Timing chart of the duplex fusing conveyance mode ...............................................................................................................M-6
4.1.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.2 Timing chart of the bypass conveyance mode .........................................................................................................................M-6
4.2.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-7
5. RU-508/HM-101 .........................................................................................................................................................M-8
5.1 Timing chart of the reverse exit mode (Without humidification) ...............................................................................................M-8
5.1.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-8
5.2 Timing chart of the straight exit mode (With humidification) ....................................................................................................M-8
5.2.2 Timing chart ...................................................................................................................................................................M-9
6. FS-521 .....................................................................................................................................................................M-10
6.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ................................................................................................................................................M-10
6.1.1 Operation condition ......................................................................................................................................................M-10
6.1.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-10
6.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .........................................................................................................................................M-10
6.2.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-11
6.3 Timing chart of the staple mode .............................................................................................................................................M-11
6.3.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-12
7. FS-612 .....................................................................................................................................................................M-13
7.1 Timing chart of the sort mode ................................................................................................................................................M-13
7.1.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-13
7.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ....................................................................................................................................M-13
xl
7.2.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-14
7.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................M-14
7.3.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-15
7.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode .......................................................................................................................................M-15
7.4.2 Timing chart .................................................................................................................................................................M-16
8. PK-512......................................................................................................................................................................M-17
8.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side......................................................................................M-17
9. PK-513......................................................................................................................................................................M-18
9.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side......................................................................................M-18
10. PI-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode ..............................................................................................................M-19
10.1.1 Operation condition ....................................................................................................................................................M-19
10.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-19
11. LS-505 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-20
11.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................M-20
11.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-20
11.2 Timing chart of the shift mode ..............................................................................................................................................M-20
11.2.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-21
11.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .......................................................................................................................................M-21
11.3.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-22
11.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode .......................................................................................................................................M-22
11.4.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-23
12. FD-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-24
12.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode .................................................................................................................................M-24
12.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-24
12.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode ...............................................................................................................................M-24
12.2.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-25
12.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode .............................................................................................................................M-25
12.3.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-26
12.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ...................................................................................................................................M-26
12.4.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-27
12.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode ......................................................................................................................................M-27
12.5.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-28
12.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode ...........................................................................................................................................M-28
12.6.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-29
12.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode ..............................................................................................................M-29
12.7.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-30
12.8 Timing chart of the punch mode ..........................................................................................................................................M-30
12.8.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-31
13. SD-506 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-32
13.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................M-32
13.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-32
13.2 Timing chart of the sub tray mode .......................................................................................................................................M-32
13.2.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-33
13.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode .........................................................................................................................M-33
13.3.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-34
13.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode ............................................................................................................M-35
13.4.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-36
14. PB-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................M-38
14.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode .......................................................................................................................M-38
xli
14.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-38
14.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply) .....................................................................................M-38
14.2.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-39
14.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply) .........................................................................M-39
14.3.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-40
14.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode ........................................................................................................................M-40
14.4.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-41
15. RU-506...................................................................................................................................................................M-42
15.1 Timing chart of the duplex mode...........................................................................................................................................M-42
15.1.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-42
15.2 Timing chart of the punch mode (GP-501)............................................................................................................................M-42
15.2.2 Timing chart ...............................................................................................................................................................M-43
N WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................N-1

1. bizhub PRESS C8000 ................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.1 bizhub PRESS C8000 (1/5) ......................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.2 bizhub PRESS C8000 (2/5) ......................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.3 bizhub PRESS C8000 (3/5) ......................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.4 bizhub PRESS C8000 (4/5) ......................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.5 bizhub PRESS C8000 (5/5) ......................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.6 bizhub PRESS C8000 (1/5-1)...................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.7 bizhub PRESS C8000 (1/5-2)...................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.8 bizhub PRESS C8000 (1/5-3)...................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.9 bizhub PRESS C8000 (2/5-1)...................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.10 bizhub PRESS C8000 (2/5-2).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.11 bizhub PRESS C8000 (2/5-3).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.12 bizhub PRESS C8000 (2/5-4).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.13 bizhub PRESS C8000 (3/5-1).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.14 bizhub PRESS C8000 (3/5-2).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.15 bizhub PRESS C8000 (3/5-3).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.16 bizhub PRESS C8000 (3/5-4).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.17 bizhub PRESS C8000 (4/5-1).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.18 bizhub PRESS C8000 (4/5-2).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.19 bizhub PRESS C8000 (4/5-3).................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.20 bizhub PRESS C8000 (4/5-4).................................................................................................................................................N-2
1.21 bizhub PRESS C8000 (5/5-1).................................................................................................................................................N-2
1.22 bizhub PRESS C8000 (5/5-2).................................................................................................................................................N-2
1.23 bizhub PRESS C8000 (5/5-3).................................................................................................................................................N-2
1.24 bizhub PRESS C8000 (5/5-4).................................................................................................................................................N-2
2. DF-622 .......................................................................................................................................................................N-3
3. PF-704/705/HT-506 ...................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.1 PF-704/705/HT-506 (1/2) .........................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.2 PF-704/705/HT-506 (2/2) .........................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.3 PF-704/705/HT-506 (1/2-1) ......................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.4 PF-704/705/HT-506 (1/2-2) ......................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.5 PF-704/705/HT-506 (1/2-3) ......................................................................................................................................................N-4
3.6 PF-704/705/HT-506 (1/2-4) ......................................................................................................................................................N-4
4. EF-101........................................................................................................................................................................N-5
4.1 EF-101 ......................................................................................................................................................................................N-5
4.2 EF-101 (1/4)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-5
4.3 EF-101 (2/4)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-5
4.4 EF-101 (3/4)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-5
4.5 EF-101 (4/4)..............................................................................................................................................................................N-5
5. RU-508/HM-101 .........................................................................................................................................................N-6
6. FS-521 .......................................................................................................................................................................N-7
7. FS-612 .......................................................................................................................................................................N-8
8. PK-512/513 ................................................................................................................................................................N-9
9. PI-502 .......................................................................................................................................................................N-10
10. LS-505 ....................................................................................................................................................................N-11
11. FD-503 ...................................................................................................................................................................N-12
12. SD-506....................................................................................................................................................................N-13
xlii
12.1 SD-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................N-13
12.2 SD-506 (1/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-13
12.3 SD-506 (2/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-13
12.4 SD-506 (3/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-13
12.5 SD-506 (4/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-13
13. PB-503....................................................................................................................................................................N-14
13.1 PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................................N-14
13.2 PB-503 (1/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-14
13.3 PB-503 (2/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-14
13.4 PB-503 (3/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-14
13.5 PB-503 (4/4)..........................................................................................................................................................................N-14
14. RU-506....................................................................................................................................................................N-15
15. GP-501....................................................................................................................................................................N-16
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub PRESS C8000.......................................................................O-1
1. INTERFACE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.1 Main body right side .......................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.2 Main body left side .........................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1.3 Main body rear side .......................................................................................................................................................O-2
1.1.4 Operation panel section .................................................................................................................................................O-2
2. WRITING SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................O-3
2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................O-3
2.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................O-4
2.2.1 Exposure path ................................................................................................................................................................O-4
2.2.2 Writing control ................................................................................................................................................................O-4
2.2.3 Writing area ....................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.4 Color registration control ................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.5 Front/back sides skew correction in main scan direction ...............................................................................................O-9
2.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction .............................................................................................O-9
2.2.7 Image stabilization control .............................................................................................................................................O-9
3. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION ...........................................................................................................................O-10
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-10
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-11
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-11
3.3.1 Auxiliary discharging control ........................................................................................................................................O-11
3.3.2 Drum cleaning/lubricant applying mechanism .............................................................................................................O-11
3.3.3 Erase lamp (EL) control ...............................................................................................................................................O-12
3.3.4 Image stabilization control ...........................................................................................................................................O-12
4. CHARGING SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O-13
4.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-13
4.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-13
4.2.1 Charging control ...........................................................................................................................................................O-13
4.2.2 Charging corona cleaning ............................................................................................................................................O-13
5. DEVELOPING SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-15
5.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-15
5.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.2.1 Developing drive ..........................................................................................................................................................O-16
5.2.2 Dust-proof filter cleaning mechanism ...........................................................................................................................O-17
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-17
5.3.1 Developer conveyance ................................................................................................................................................O-17
5.3.2 Developing bias control ................................................................................................................................................O-18
5.3.3 Toner spillage prevention control .................................................................................................................................O-18
5.3.4 Developing cooling control ...........................................................................................................................................O-19
5.3.5 Toner density detection control ....................................................................................................................................O-20
6. TONER SUPPLY SECTION ....................................................................................................................................O-21
6.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-21
6.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-22
6.2.1 Toner bottle drive .........................................................................................................................................................O-22
6.2.2 Toner conveyance drive ...............................................................................................................................................O-23
6.2.3 Toner hopper drive .......................................................................................................................................................O-24
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-24
6.3.1 Toner supply control to the toner hopper .....................................................................................................................O-24
6.3.2 Toner supply control to the developing section ............................................................................................................O-24
6.3.3 Remaining toner amount detection control ..................................................................................................................O-25
6.3.4 Overflow toner prevention shutter mechanism ............................................................................................................O-25
xliii
7. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION .................................................................................................................O-26
7.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-26
7.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-27
7.2.1 Intermediate transfer belt conveyance drive ................................................................................................................O-27
7.2.2 Intermediate transfer belt pressure drive .....................................................................................................................O-28
7.2.3 Intermediate transfer belt steering drive ......................................................................................................................O-29
7.2.4 Transfer belt cleaning drive ..........................................................................................................................................O-30
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-30
7.3.1 1st transfer roller pressure/release mechanism ...........................................................................................................O-30
7.3.2 1st transfer control .......................................................................................................................................................O-31
7.3.3 Intermediate transfer belt steering mechanism ............................................................................................................O-31
7.3.4 Intermediate transfer belt steering control ...................................................................................................................O-32
7.3.5 Image correction unit shutter mechanism ....................................................................................................................O-33
7.3.6 Intermediate transfer belt drive matching control .........................................................................................................O-33
8. 2ND TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION ............................................................................................................O-35
8.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-35
8.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-36
8.2.1 2nd transfer belt conveyance drive ..............................................................................................................................O-36
8.2.2 2nd transfer pressure release mechanism ...................................................................................................................O-37
8.2.3 2nd transfer belt steering drive ....................................................................................................................................O-37
8.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-38
8.3.1 2nd transfer roller pressure release mechanism ..........................................................................................................O-38
8.3.2 2nd transfer control ......................................................................................................................................................O-39
8.3.3 2nd transfer belt steering mechanism ..........................................................................................................................O-40
8.3.4 2nd transfer belt steering control .................................................................................................................................O-41
8.3.5 Paper separation control ..............................................................................................................................................O-42
8.3.6 2nd transfer belt cleaning/lubricant applying mechanism ............................................................................................O-42
8.3.7 2nd transfer belt blade set control ................................................................................................................................O-43
8.3.8 High voltage control on the 2nd transfer entrance guide plate ....................................................................................O-43
9. TONER COLLECTION SECTION............................................................................................................................O-44
9.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................O-44
9.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................O-45
9.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................O-45
9.3.1 Toner collecting path ....................................................................................................................................................O-45
9.3.2 Conveyance control in the toner collection box ...........................................................................................................O-46
9.3.3 Toner collection box set detection ...............................................................................................................................O-47
9.3.4 Toner collection box full detection ................................................................................................................................O-47
10. PAPER FEED SECTION........................................................................................................................................O-48
10.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-48
10.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-49
10.2.1 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................O-49
10.2.2 Lift plate up down drive ..............................................................................................................................................O-49
10.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-50
10.3.1 Up/down control .........................................................................................................................................................O-50
10.3.2 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................O-50
10.3.3 Paper size detection control .......................................................................................................................................O-52
10.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ............................................................................................................................O-52
10.3.5 Internal heater control ................................................................................................................................................O-53
11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................O-54
11.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-54
11.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-54
11.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-54
11.3.1 Vertical conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................O-54
12. REGISTRATION SECTION ...................................................................................................................................O-56
12.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-56
12.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-56
12.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-57
12.3.1 Loop control ...............................................................................................................................................................O-57
12.3.2 Registration control ....................................................................................................................................................O-58
12.3.3 Pre-loop movable guide control .................................................................................................................................O-58
13. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-60
13.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-60
13.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-61
13.2.1 Fusing roller drive/Fusing external heating belt drive/fusing belt /Lw drive ................................................................O-61
13.2.2 Fusing belt drive when released ................................................................................................................................O-61
13.2.3 Fusing external heating belt pressure release drive ..................................................................................................O-62
13.2.4 Fusing belt /Lw pressure drive ...................................................................................................................................O-62
xliv
13.2.5 Fusing refresh roller drive ..........................................................................................................................................O-63
13.2.6 Fusing refreshing roller pressure release drive ..........................................................................................................O-64
13.2.7 Fusing belt /Lw steering drive ....................................................................................................................................O-64
13.2.8 Fusing cleaning web drive .........................................................................................................................................O-65
13.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-65
13.3.1 Fusing roller control ...................................................................................................................................................O-65
13.3.2 Fusing temperature control ........................................................................................................................................O-66
13.3.3 Fusing external heating belt control ...........................................................................................................................O-70
13.3.4 Fusing belt /Lw control ...............................................................................................................................................O-72
13.3.5 Fusing refresh roller control .......................................................................................................................................O-76
13.3.6 Fusing cleaning web control ......................................................................................................................................O-77
13.3.7 Fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment mechanism .........................................................................................O-78
14. DUPLEX SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-79
14.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-79
14.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-80
14.2.1 Duplex section introducing drive ................................................................................................................................O-80
14.2.2 Duplex section drive ...................................................................................................................................................O-81
14.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-81
14.3.1 Conveyance path switching control ...........................................................................................................................O-81
14.3.2 Duplex section introducing control .............................................................................................................................O-82
14.3.3 Paper reverse control .................................................................................................................................................O-83
14.3.4 Duplex section conveyance control ...........................................................................................................................O-84
14.3.5 Reverse de-curler roller pressure control ...................................................................................................................O-85
14.3.6 Back side centering correction control .......................................................................................................................O-86
14.3.7 Duplex section loop amount restriction control ..........................................................................................................O-86
14.3.8 Conveyance assist control .........................................................................................................................................O-86
15. PAPER EXIT SECTION..........................................................................................................................................O-88
15.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................O-88
15.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................O-88
15.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................O-89
15.3.1 Conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................................O-89
15.3.2 Tucking prevention/wax unevenness reduction control .............................................................................................O-90
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL......................................................................................................................O-91
16.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................O-91
16.1.1 OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................................................................O-91
16.1.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON ...............................................................................O-91
16.1.3 Long image stabilization control .................................................................................................................................O-91
16.1.4 Short image stabilization control ................................................................................................................................O-91
16.1.5 Other image stabilization controls ..............................................................................................................................O-92
16.2 Image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) is ON .........................................................................................O-92
16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow with SW2 ON............................................................................................................O-92
16.2.2 Drum rotation control .................................................................................................................................................O-92
16.2.3 Environmental decision control ..................................................................................................................................O-92
16.2.4 Color registration control ............................................................................................................................................O-92
16.3 Long image stabilization control ...........................................................................................................................................O-93
16.3.1 Long image stabilization control operation flow .........................................................................................................O-93
16.3.2 Black band, ATVC ......................................................................................................................................................O-93
16.3.3 IDC sensor Vref setting ..............................................................................................................................................O-93
16.3.4 V0 correction 1 ...........................................................................................................................................................O-94
16.3.5 Maximum density correction ......................................................................................................................................O-94
16.3.6 V0 correction 2 ...........................................................................................................................................................O-94
16.3.7 MPC correction ..........................................................................................................................................................O-94
16.3.8 V0 correction 3 ...........................................................................................................................................................O-95
16.3.9 Gamma correction .....................................................................................................................................................O-95
16.3.10 Standard value setting for the Short image stabilization control ..............................................................................O-95
16.4 Short image stabilization control ..........................................................................................................................................O-95
16.4.1 Short maximum density control ..................................................................................................................................O-95
16.4.2 Short MPC control ......................................................................................................................................................O-95
16.4.3 Short image stabilization control at the process speed of 300mm/s ..........................................................................O-96
16.4.4 Black-and-white mode Short image stabilization control ...........................................................................................O-96
16.5 Other image stabilization controls ........................................................................................................................................O-96
16.5.1 Mixed original mode Short image stabilization control ...............................................................................................O-96
16.5.2 Print cancel Long image stabilization control .............................................................................................................O-96
16.5.3 Image stabilization control after service call cleared ..................................................................................................O-96
17. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION .........................................................................................................................O-97
17.1 Image processing in the scanner section .............................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section ...........................................................................................................O-97
17.1.2 Photoelectric conversion ............................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.3 A/D conversion ...........................................................................................................................................................O-97
xlv
17.1.4 Shading correction .....................................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.5 RGB gap correction ...................................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.6 Chroma aberration correction ....................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.7 Gradation adjustment .................................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.8 Area discrimination ....................................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.9 Image distinction ........................................................................................................................................................O-97
17.1.10 ACS processing .......................................................................................................................................................O-98
17.1.11 Magnification processing .........................................................................................................................................O-98
17.1.12 AE control ................................................................................................................................................................O-98
17.1.13 Color conversion ......................................................................................................................................................O-98
17.2 Image processing in the write section ..................................................................................................................................O-98
17.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section ................................................................................................................O-98
17.2.2 Image compressing (Image controller) ......................................................................................................................O-98
17.2.3 Image compressing (Scanner) ...................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.4 DRAM, HDD ...............................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner) .......................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.6 Cell average (Scanner) ..............................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.7 Image expansion (Image controller) ..........................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.8 Noise addition ............................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.9 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis .....................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.10 Smoothing (Scanner) ...............................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.11 Outline emphasis .....................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.12 Density balance .......................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.13 Gradation correction gamma ...................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.14 Screen processing ...................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.15 Delay control between drums ..................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.16 PWM gamma ...........................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.17 PWM conversion ......................................................................................................................................................O-99
17.2.18 Write unit /Y, /M, /C, /K ............................................................................................................................................O-99
18. POWER SOURCE SECTION ..............................................................................................................................O-100
18.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord ......................................................................................................O-100
18.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-100
18.1.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................O-100
18.2 Operating parts with the main power switch (SW1) ON .....................................................................................................O-100
18.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-100
18.2.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................O-100
18.3 Operating parts with the sub power switch (SW2) ON .......................................................................................................O-101
18.3.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-101
18.3.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................O-101
18.4 Power cord .........................................................................................................................................................................O-101
18.4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-101
18.5 Operating parts with the internal heater switch (SW3) ON ................................................................................................O-102
18.5.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-102
18.5.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................O-102
19. FAN CONTROL....................................................................................................................................................O-103
19.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................O-103
19.2 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................O-104
19.2.1 Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM1) and /2 (FM2) control .......................................................................................O-104
19.2.2 Motor cooling fans /1 (FM3) and /2 (FM4) control ....................................................................................................O-104
19.2.3 Cooling fan (FM5) control ........................................................................................................................................O-104
19.2.4 Toner suction fans /1 (FM17) and /2 (FM6) control .................................................................................................O-104
19.2.5 Developing charge fans /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), /3 (FM9) and /4 (FM10) control ..........................................................O-104
19.2.6 Deodorization fans /1 (FM11) and /2 (FM12) control ...............................................................................................O-104
19.2.7 Writing ventilation fans /1 (FM13), /2 (FM14), /3 (FM15) and /4 (FM16) control ......................................................O-104
19.2.8 Dew condensation prevention fan (FM18) control ...................................................................................................O-105
19.2.9 Intermediate transfer cleaning cooling fans /1 (FM19), /2 (FM20) and /3 (FM21) control ........................................O-105
19.2.10 Fusing thermal insulation fans /Fr (FM22) and /Rr (FM23) control ........................................................................O-105
19.2.11 Paper exit cooling fans /1 (FM24), /2 (FM25) and /3 (FM26) control .....................................................................O-105
19.2.12 Tucking fan /1 (FM27), /2 (FM28), /3 (FM29) control .............................................................................................O-105
19.2.13 Toner collection cooling fan (FM30) control ...........................................................................................................O-105
19.2.14 ADU ventilation fans /1 (FM31) and /2 (FM32) control ..........................................................................................O-105
19.2.15 Control of System cooling fan /Up (FM33), /Lw (FM34), /Re (FM35) ....................................................................O-106
19.2.16 ADU Cooling fan /1 (FM/36) control .......................................................................................................................O-106
19.2.17 ADU Cooling fan /2 (FM/37) control .......................................................................................................................O-106
19.2.18 ADU cooling fans /3 (FM38) and /4 (FM39) control ...............................................................................................O-106
19.2.19 Pre-fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM40), /Md (FM41) and /Rr (FM42) control ...............................................................O-106
19.2.20 Fusing belt cooling fans /Fr (FM43), /Md (FM44) and /Rr (FM45) control .............................................................O-106
19.2.21 HDD unit cooling fans /1 (FM46) and /2 (FM47) control (Option) ..........................................................................O-106
20. COUNTER CONTROL..........................................................................................................................................O-108
20.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................O-108
xlvi
20.2 Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................O-108
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 .........................................................................................PA-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.1 Simplex mode ..............................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2.2 Duplex mode ................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PA-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PA-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PA-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PA-3
2.3.1 Original feed control .....................................................................................................................................................PA-3
2.3.2 Original size detection ..................................................................................................................................................PA-5
2.3.3 Original empty detection ..............................................................................................................................................PA-5
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PA-6
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PA-6
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PA-6
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PA-6
3.3.1 Original scan and conveyance control .........................................................................................................................PA-6
4. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PA-10
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PA-10
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PA-10
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PA-10
4.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................PA-10
4.3.2 Paper exit control .......................................................................................................................................................PA-11
4.3.3 Reverse conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................PA-13
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-704/705/HT-506 ......................................................................PB-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PB-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PB-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PB-2
2. PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION ...............................................................................................................................PB-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PB-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.2 Side guide shutter drive ...............................................................................................................................................PB-4
2.2.3 Paper leading edge shutter drive .................................................................................................................................PB-5
2.2.4 Paper feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PB-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.1 Up/down control ...........................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.2 Size detection control ...................................................................................................................................................PB-6
2.3.3 Air control .....................................................................................................................................................................PB-7
2.3.4 Paper empty detection control ...................................................................................................................................PB-10
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control ............................................................................................................................PB-10
2.3.6 Tray lock control .........................................................................................................................................................PB-11
3. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION ......................................................................................................................PB-12
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PB-12
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-12
3.2.1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-12
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-13
3.3.1 Suction control ...........................................................................................................................................................PB-13
3.3.2 Paper feed belt control ...............................................................................................................................................PB-13
4. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION...................................................................................................................PB-15
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-15
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-16
4.3.1 Vertical conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PB-16
5. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PB-17
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-17
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-17
5.3.1 Pre-registration control ...............................................................................................................................................PB-17
5.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................PB-18
5.3.3 Paper centering correction control..............................................................................................................................PB-18
5.3.4 Multi feed detection control ........................................................................................................................................PB-18
6. TANDEM CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................PB-19
xlvii
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-19
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-20
6.3.1 Tandem conveyance control ......................................................................................................................................PB-20
7. SCANNER SECTION ............................................................................................................................................PB-21
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PB-21
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-21
7.3.1 Control when the sub power is turned ON .................................................................................................................PB-21
7.3.2 Control when the start button is turned ON ................................................................................................................PB-22
7.3.3 Original reading area .................................................................................................................................................PB-24
7.3.4 Original size detection control ....................................................................................................................................PB-24
7.3.5 AE/ACS control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB-25
7.3.6 Image processing .......................................................................................................................................................PB-25
8. OTHERS ................................................................................................................................................................PB-26
8.1 Internal heater control ..........................................................................................................................................................PB-26
8.2 Main body assist mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PB-26
8.2.1 Filter retaining mechanism .........................................................................................................................................PB-26
8.2.2 Machine internal cooling mechanism .........................................................................................................................PB-26
9. HT-506 (Option) .....................................................................................................................................................PB-28
9.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PB-28
9.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control...................................................................................................................................PB-28
PC THEORY OF OPERATION EF-101 .........................................................................................PC-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PC-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-2
2. FUSING SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
2.2.1 Fusing roller drive ........................................................................................................................................................PC-4
2.2.2 Fusing pressure drive ..................................................................................................................................................PC-4
2.2.3 Fusing swing drive .......................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3.1 Fusing roller control .....................................................................................................................................................PC-5
2.3.2 Fusing pressure/release control ..................................................................................................................................PC-7
2.3.3 Fusing temperature control ..........................................................................................................................................PC-8
2.3.4 Fusing unit swing control ...........................................................................................................................................PC-11
2.3.5 Fusing exit roller pressure adjustment mechanism ...................................................................................................PC-11
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive .......................................................................................................................................PC-13
3.2.2 Bypass conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PC-14
3.2.3 De-curler pressure drive ............................................................................................................................................PC-14
3.2.4 Bypass gate drive ......................................................................................................................................................PC-15
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PC-15
3.3.1 Bypass gate control ...................................................................................................................................................PC-15
3.3.2 Conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................................PC-15
3.3.3 De-curler pressure control .........................................................................................................................................PC-16
4. OTHERS ................................................................................................................................................................PC-18
4.1 Fan control ...........................................................................................................................................................................PC-18
4.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................PC-18
4.1.2 Control .......................................................................................................................................................................PC-18
PD THEORY OF OPERATION RU-508/HM-101 ...........................................................................PD-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PD-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance/de-curler conveyance/humidification conveyance mode ............................................................PD-2
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance mode ...................................................................................................................................PD-3
2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................PD-4
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-4
2.2.1 Conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................................PD-4
2.2.2 Humidification section gate drive .................................................................................................................................PD-5
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PD-5
2.3.1 Conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................................PD-5
xlviii
2.3.2 Humidification section gate control ..............................................................................................................................PD-5
3. DE-CURLER SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PD-7
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PD-7
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PD-8
3.2.1 De-curler section conveyance drive .............................................................................................................................PD-8
3.2.2 De-curler gates /1 and /2 drive ....................................................................................................................................PD-9
3.2.3 De-curlers /3 and /4 pressure drive .............................................................................................................................PD-9
3.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-10
3.3.1 Outline of de-curler ....................................................................................................................................................PD-10
3.3.2 De-curler section conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PD-13
3.3.3 De-curlers /1 and /2 control .......................................................................................................................................PD-14
3.3.4 De-curlers /3 and /4 control .......................................................................................................................................PD-14
4. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION............................................................................................PD-15
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PD-15
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PD-16
4.2.1 Conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................................PD-16
4.2.2 Shutter drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PD-16
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-17
4.3.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................PD-17
4.3.2 Output paper density detection section .....................................................................................................................PD-19
5. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION ....................................................................................................................................PD-20
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PD-21
5.2.1 Reverse/exit conveyance drive ..................................................................................................................................PD-21
5.2.2 Reverse/exit gate drive ..............................................................................................................................................PD-22
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-22
5.3.1 Reverse/exit conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PD-22
5.3.2 Reverse/exit gate control ...........................................................................................................................................PD-27
6. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION ................................................................................................................................PD-28
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PD-29
6.2.1 Humidification section entrance conveyance drive ....................................................................................................PD-29
6.2.2 Humidification section conveyance drive ...................................................................................................................PD-29
6.2.3 Humidification roller pressure drive (HM-101) ...........................................................................................................PD-30
6.2.4 Water feed pump drive ..............................................................................................................................................PD-30
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PD-30
6.3.1 Outline of humidification section ................................................................................................................................PD-30
6.3.2 Humidification section conveyance control ................................................................................................................PD-31
6.3.3 Humidification roller/water feed roller pressure control (HM-101 only) ......................................................................PD-32
6.3.4 Water feed control .....................................................................................................................................................PD-35
7. OTHER CONTROLS .............................................................................................................................................PD-37
7.1 Fan control ...........................................................................................................................................................................PD-37
7.1.1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................PD-37
7.1.2 Control .......................................................................................................................................................................PD-37
7.2 Door detection control ..........................................................................................................................................................PD-38
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 ..........................................................................................PE-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION ..........................................................................................................................PE-3
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PE-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching .........................................................................................................................................PE-4
2.3.2 Bypass roller /Lw pressure release control ..................................................................................................................PE-4
3. SUB TRAY SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PE-7
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-7
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PE-7
(1) Sub tray paper full detection control ................................................................................................................................PE-7
(2) Conveyance speed switching control ..............................................................................................................................PE-7
4. STACKER SECTION ...............................................................................................................................................PE-9
4.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PE-9
4.2.1 Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive ............................................................................................................................PE-9
4.2.2 Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive ..........................................................................................................................PE-10
4.2.3 Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive .....................................................................................................................PE-10
xlix
4.2.4 Alignment drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PE-11
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-11
4.3.1 Stacker conveyance speed control ............................................................................................................................PE-11
4.3.2 Stacker entrance roller control ...................................................................................................................................PE-11
4.3.3 Intermediate roller control ..........................................................................................................................................PE-12
4.3.4 Stack assist control ....................................................................................................................................................PE-13
4.3.5 Rear stopper control ..................................................................................................................................................PE-14
4.3.6 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PE-14
4.3.7 Stacker paper exit ......................................................................................................................................................PE-15
5. STAPLER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PE-16
5.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
5.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation .........................................................................................................................................PE-16
5.2.2 Stapler ........................................................................................................................................................................PE-17
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-17
5.3.1 Stapler movement control ..........................................................................................................................................PE-17
5.3.2 Staple control .............................................................................................................................................................PE-17
6. MAIN TRAY SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................PE-21
6.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PE-21
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-22
6.2.1 Tray up/down drive ....................................................................................................................................................PE-22
6.2.2 Main tray paper exit drive ...........................................................................................................................................PE-22
6.2.3 Paper exit opening drive ............................................................................................................................................PE-23
6.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive .................................................................................................................................PE-23
6.2.5 Paper exit alignment plate retraction drive .................................................................................................................PE-24
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PE-24
6.3.1 Paper exit opening control .........................................................................................................................................PE-24
6.3.2 Paper press arm control .............................................................................................................................................PE-25
6.3.3 Main tray up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................PE-26
6.3.4 Paper exit alignment control ......................................................................................................................................PE-27
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 ..........................................................................................PF-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode ..........................................................................................................................................PF-2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ..............................................................................................................................................................PF-2
1.2.3 Staple mode .................................................................................................................................................................PF-3
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode ...........................................................................................................................PF-3
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode ...........................................................................................................................................................PF-4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PF-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PF-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PF-6
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................PF-6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed) ................................................................................................PF-6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control .................................................................................................................................................PF-7
2.3.3 Gate drive control .........................................................................................................................................................PF-7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ......................................................................................................................................................PF-8
2.3.5 Shift control ..................................................................................................................................................................PF-9
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control ..............................................................................................................................................PF-10
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control ...........................................................................................................................PF-10
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control .........................................................................................................................................PF-11
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control .........................................................................................................................................PF-12
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION............................................................................................................................................PF-13
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PF-13
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-13
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-14
3.3.1 Tray up down control ..................................................................................................................................................PF-14
4. STACKER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PF-16
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-17
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-17
4.3.1 Alignment /Up control .................................................................................................................................................PF-17
4.3.2 Alignment /Lw control .................................................................................................................................................PF-18
4.3.3 Stopper control ...........................................................................................................................................................PF-18
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PF-20
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control ..........................................................................................................................................PF-22
5. STAPLER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PF-24
l
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-24
5.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-25
5.3.1 Stapler movement control ..........................................................................................................................................PF-25
5.3.2 Stapler control ............................................................................................................................................................PF-26
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION ........................................................................PF-28
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-28
6.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PF-29
6.3.1 Folding knife control ...................................................................................................................................................PF-29
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PF-29
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control ...............................................................................................................................................PF-30
PG THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513...................................................................................PG-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PG-1
1.1 UNIT COMPOSITION.............................................................................................................................................................PG-1
1.2 PAPER PATH.........................................................................................................................................................................PG-1
2. PUNCH SECTION....................................................................................................................................................PG-2
2.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................PG-2
2.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive...........................................................................................................................................................PG-2
2.2.2 Punch drive...................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-5
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control...................................................................................................................PG-5
2.3.2 Punch position correction control.................................................................................................................................PG-5
2.3.3 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION...........................................................................................................................PG-9
3.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
3.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PG-9
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control.............................................................................................................................................PG-9
PH THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 ..........................................................................................PH-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PH-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PH-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................PH-1
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) .....................................................................................................................PH-1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) .........................................................................................................................PH-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.2.1 Paper feed drive ..........................................................................................................................................................PH-2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive ................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................PH-3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................................................................................PH-4
2.3.4 Registration control ......................................................................................................................................................PH-4
2.3.5 Paper size detection control ........................................................................................................................................PH-4
PI THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 .............................................................................................PI-1

1. OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.1 Unit configuration .....................................................................................................................................................................PI-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................PI-2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................PI-3
2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism .........................................................................................................................................PI-3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism ...............................................................................................................................PI-3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................PI-4
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.3.1 Path switching ...............................................................................................................................................................PI-4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control .....................................................................................................................................PI-6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism .............................................................................................................................................PI-6
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION ........................................................................................................................................PI-7
li
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................PI-8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ...........................................................................................................................................PI-8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse) .................................................................................................................PI-8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward) .......................................................................................................................PI-9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive ..................................................................................................PI-9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive ..........................................................................................................................................PI-10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive ....................................................................................................................................PI-10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive ..........................................................................................................................PI-11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive ...........................................................................................................................PI-11
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PI-11
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance .............................................................................................................................................PI-11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance ..................................................................................................................................................PI-16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance ...................................................................................................................................................PI-16
PJ THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ...........................................................................................PJ-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.1 Unit configuration ....................................................................................................................................................................PJ-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
(1) Straight mode ...................................................................................................................................................................PJ-2
(2) Sub tray mode ..................................................................................................................................................................PJ-3
(3) Punch mode (L and S sizes) ............................................................................................................................................PJ-4
(4) Z-Fold mode .....................................................................................................................................................................PJ-5
(5) Letter fold-out mode .........................................................................................................................................................PJ-6
(6) Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode ......................................................................................................................................PJ-7
(7) Gate fold mode .................................................................................................................................................................PJ-8
(8) Half-Fold mode .................................................................................................................................................................PJ-9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .....................................................................................................................................PJ-10
2.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PJ-10
2.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive .......................................................................................................................................................PJ-11
2.2.2 Gate drive ...................................................................................................................................................................PJ-12
2.2.3 Alignment drive ...........................................................................................................................................................PJ-12
2.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching ........................................................................................................................................PJ-13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ..................................................................................................................................PJ-15
2.3.3 Alignment control ........................................................................................................................................................PJ-15
2.3.4 Gap recovery control ..................................................................................................................................................PJ-16
3. PUNCH SECTION...................................................................................................................................................PJ-18
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-18
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ................................................................................................................................................PJ-18
3.2.2 Punch drive .................................................................................................................................................................PJ-19
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-19
(1) Punch control .................................................................................................................................................................PJ-19
(2) Punch hole switching control ..........................................................................................................................................PJ-19
(3) Punch-hole scraps box control .......................................................................................................................................PJ-19
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................PJ-20
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-20
4.2.1 Conveyance drive .......................................................................................................................................................PJ-20
4.2.2 Folding drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PJ-21
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-21
4.3.1 Registration control .....................................................................................................................................................PJ-21
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching ........................................................................................................................................PJ-22
4.3.3 1st folding control .......................................................................................................................................................PJ-22
4.3.4 2nd folding control ......................................................................................................................................................PJ-23
4.3.5 3rd folding control .......................................................................................................................................................PJ-25
5. MAIN TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................PJ-27
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-28
5.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-28
5.3.1 Main tray up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................PJ-28
6. SUB TRAY SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PJ-30
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-30
6.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-30
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control ..........................................................................................................................PJ-30
6.3.2 Line speed switching ..................................................................................................................................................PJ-31
7. PI SECTION............................................................................................................................................................PJ-32
lii
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PJ-32
7.2.1 Tray lift drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PJ-32
7.2.2 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................PJ-33
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PJ-33
7.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PJ-33
7.3.1 Size detection control .................................................................................................................................................PJ-33
7.3.2 Up/down control ..........................................................................................................................................................PJ-34
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PJ-34
7.3.4 Separation mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PJ-35
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control .........................................................................................................................................PJ-36
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control ....................................................................................................................................PJ-36
PK THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 .........................................................................................PK-1

1. OUTLINE .................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.1 Unit configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................PK-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PK-2
(1) Coupling exit/subtray exit mode ......................................................................................................................................PK-2
(2) Overlap tri-folding mode ..................................................................................................................................................PK-2
(3) Center folding/saddle stitching mode ..............................................................................................................................PK-3
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION................................................................................................................PK-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PK-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PK-5
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PK-5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................PK-5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive ..................................................................................................................PK-6
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PK-6
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control .............................................................................................................................PK-6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control .........................................................................................................................PK-6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control ...........................................................................................................................................PK-7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ............................................................................................................................PK-7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................PK-8
3.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PK-8
3.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PK-8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ............................................................................................................PK-8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ................................................................................................................................................................PK-9
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................PK-9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control ...................................................................................................................................................PK-9
3.3.2 Alignment control .......................................................................................................................................................PK-11
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PK-12
4. FOLDING SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................PK-14
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PK-14
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ...............................................................................................................................................PK-14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................PK-15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive .....................................................................................................................................................PK-15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ............................................................................................................................PK-16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive .................................................................................................PK-16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ........................................................................................................................................................PK-17
4.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-17
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PK-17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control .........................................................................................................................PK-18
4.3.3 Folding control ...........................................................................................................................................................PK-19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ...........................................................................................................................PK-22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control .....................................................................................................................................................PK-23
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ...........................................................................................................................PK-25
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive ................................................................................................................................PK-25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive .........................................................................................................................................PK-26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive ..............................................................................................................................................PK-26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ................................................................................................................................PK-27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive .................................................................................................................................................PK-27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive ...........................................................................................................................................PK-28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive ......................................................................................................................................PK-28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive ..............................................................................................................................................PK-29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive .........................................................................................................................................................PK-29
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control .............................................................................................................................PK-29
liii
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control .............................................................................................................................PK-30
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control ......................................................................................................................................PK-31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ...........................................................................................................................................PK-32
5.3.5 Stapler control ............................................................................................................................................................PK-34
5.3.6 Bundle arm control .....................................................................................................................................................PK-35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control ...........................................................................................................................................PK-38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control ......................................................................................................................................................PK-39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION ......................................................................................................................PK-43
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .......................................................................................................................................PK-43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ...................................................................................................................................PK-44
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive ............................................................................................................................................PK-44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive .....................................................................................................................................................PK-45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive ........................................................................................................................................................PK-45
6.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ..........................................................................................................................PK-46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ................................................................................................................................PK-48
6.3.3 Bundle press control ..................................................................................................................................................PK-49
6.3.4 Bundle registration control .........................................................................................................................................PK-51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control .....................................................................................................................................................PK-52
7. TRIMMER SECTION .............................................................................................................................................PK-57
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PK-57
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive ...................................................................................................................................................PK-57
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive ...................................................................................................................................................PK-58
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive ...................................................................................................................................................PK-58
7.2.4 Paddle drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PK-59
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................PK-59
7.3.1 Trimmer press control ................................................................................................................................................PK-59
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control ................................................................................................................................................PK-61
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ................................................................................................................................................PK-62
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control ..............................................................................................................................................PK-63
PL THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 ..........................................................................................PL-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.1 Unit configuration ....................................................................................................................................................................PL-1
1.2 Paper path ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit .................................................................................................................................................................PL-2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode ...................................................................................................................................................PL-2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ..............................................................................................................................................PL-4
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PL-5
2.1 Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-5
2.2 Drive .......................................................................................................................................................................................PL-6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive ......................................PL-6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive ...................................PL-6
2.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................PL-7
2.3.1 Gate control ..................................................................................................................................................................PL-7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................PL-8
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control .................................................................................................................................PL-9
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control ..................................................................................................................................PL-9
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control ...............................................................................................................................PL-9
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control ............................................................................................................................PL-9
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control ......................................................................................................................PL-9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION .............................................................................................................................PL-11
3.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................PL-11
3.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive ...............................PL-12
3.2.2 Switchback release drive ............................................................................................................................................PL-12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive ................................................................................................PL-13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive ...............................................................................................................................PL-13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive ....................................................................................................................................PL-14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive ...........................................................................................................................................PL-14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive .....................................................................................PL-14
3.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview ...................................................................................................................................PL-15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance .........................................................................................................................PL-17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control ...............................................................................................................................PL-17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control ............................................................................................................................PL-17
liv
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control .................................................................................................................................PL-20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control ........................................................................................................................................PL-21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control ........................................................................................................................PL-22
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control ............................................................................................................................PL-23
3.3.9 SC stopper control ......................................................................................................................................................PL-23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control ..........................................................................................................................................PL-24
4. CLAMP SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................PL-25
4.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-25
4.2.1 Clamp drive ................................................................................................................................................................PL-25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive ...................................................................................................................................................PL-26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive ................................................................................................................................................PL-26
4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control .............................................................................................................................................PL-26
4.3.2 Clamp control .............................................................................................................................................................PL-27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control ................................................................................................................................................PL-28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control ................................................................................................................................PL-32
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION ..................................................................................................................................PL-33
5.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive ......................................................................................................................................................PL-33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive ...............................................................................................................................................PL-34
5.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview ................................................................................................................................PL-34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control ............................................................................................................................................PL-35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control ......................................................................................................................................PL-36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control .................................................................................................................PL-38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening/closing detection control .................................................................................................PL-38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION...........................................................................................................................................PL-39
6.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-39
6.2.1 Drive ...........................................................................................................................................................................PL-39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive ................................................................................................................................................PL-40
6.2.3 Tank up drive ..............................................................................................................................................................PL-40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive ......................................................................................................................................PL-40
6.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control ................................................................................................................................PL-41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control .............................................................................................................................................PL-41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control ...............................................................................................................................................PL-42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control ............................................................................................................................................PL-43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control ............................................................................................................................................PL-44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION .....................................................................................................................PL-46
7.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive ...........................................................................................................................................PL-46
7.2.2 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................PL-47
7.2.3 Pick-up drive ...............................................................................................................................................................PL-47
7.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-48
7.3.1 Up/down control .........................................................................................................................................................PL-48
7.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................PL-49
7.3.3 Separation mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................PL-49
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................PL-50
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism .................................................................................................................................................PL-50
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control .........................................................................................................................PL-50
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate ...............................................................................................................................................PL-50
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION ........................................................................................................................PL-52
8.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive ..............................................................................................................PL-53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive ......................................................................................................................................PL-53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive ...................................................................................................................................PL-54
8.2.4 Book exit drive ............................................................................................................................................................PL-54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate /Rt and /Lt drive .................................................................................................................PL-54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm /Rr and /Lt drive ..........................................................................................................PL-55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive ..................................................................................................................................................PL-55
8.2.8 Cutter drive .................................................................................................................................................................PL-55
8.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview ...........................................................................................................PL-55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control ................................................................................................................................PL-59
lv
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control .....................................................................................................................................PL-60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive ......................................................................................................................................PL-60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control ............................................................................................................................PL-62
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control ...............................................................................................................................PL-63
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control ........................................................................................................................PL-65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control ......................................................................................................................PL-67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control ...............................................................................................................................................PL-67
8.3.10 Waste paper control .................................................................................................................................................PL-68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION .......................................................................................................................................PL-69
9.2 Drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................PL-69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive ..............................................................................................................................................PL-69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive .......................................................................................................................................PL-70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive ................................................................................................................................PL-70
9.2.4 Book movement drive .................................................................................................................................................PL-71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive .....................................................................................................................................................PL-71
9.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................PL-71
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview ......................................................................................................................PL-71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control ..................................................................................................................PL-72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control ....................................................................................................................................PL-74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control .............................................................................................................................PL-74
9.3.5 Book movement control ..............................................................................................................................................PL-75
9.3.6 Book stopper control ..................................................................................................................................................PL-76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control ................................................................................................................................PL-76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................PL-77
10.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................................................................PL-77
10.2 Drive ...................................................................................................................................................................................PL-77
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive ...................................................................................PL-77
10.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................................PL-78
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control ........................................................................................................................................PL-78
11. OTHERS...............................................................................................................................................................PL-79
11.1 Fan control ..........................................................................................................................................................................PL-79
11.1.1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................PL-79
11.2 Door opening/closing control ..............................................................................................................................................PL-79
PM THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506.........................................................................................PM-1

1. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.1 Unit configuration....................................................................................................................................................................PM-1
1.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PM-2
1.2.1 Straight conveyance.....................................................................................................................................................PM-2
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance.............................................................................................................................................PM-3
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................PM-4
2.2.2 Straight gate drive........................................................................................................................................................PM-5
2.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PM-5
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching operation..........................................................................................................................PM-5
2.3.2 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PM-5
3. STACKER SECTION...............................................................................................................................................PM-8
3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................................PM-8
3.2 Drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................PM-9
3.2.1 Stacker exit shutter drive..............................................................................................................................................PM-9
3.2.2 Stack switching drive..................................................................................................................................................PM-10
3.2.3 Stacker entrance guide plate drive.............................................................................................................................PM-10
3.2.4 Alignment drive...........................................................................................................................................................PM-11
3.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PM-11
3.3.1 Alignment control........................................................................................................................................................PM-11
3.3.2 Reverse/exit control....................................................................................................................................................PM-12
3.3.3 Stack assist fan control..............................................................................................................................................PM-14
PN THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501..........................................................................................PN-1

1. PREFACE.................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations......................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.2 PRODUCT POSITIONING......................................................................................................................................................PN-1
1.3 LONG EDGE FEED (LEF) ONLY...........................................................................................................................................PN-1
2. OUTLINE..................................................................................................................................................................PN-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram......................................................................................................................................................PN-2
lvi
2.2 Paper path..............................................................................................................................................................................PN-3
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................................PN-4
3.1 Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................................PN-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...................................................................................................................................PN-5
4.1 Punch conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................PN-5
4.2 Punch operation......................................................................................................................................................................PN-6
4.3 Chip tray control......................................................................................................................................................................PN-7
4.4 Bypass conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................PN-7
5. Punch module...........................................................................................................................................................PN-9
5.1 Tools Required........................................................................................................................................................................PN-9
5.2 Procedure...............................................................................................................................................................................PN-9
lvii
bizhub PRESS C8000
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
bizhub PRESS C8000 A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. IMPORTANT
bizhub PRESS C8000 NOTICE
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the
risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the
KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBTtrained service
technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the
product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the
product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. DESCRIPTION
bizhub PRESS C8000 ITEMS FOR DANGE...
3. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
3.1 Descriptions in the service manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and "
CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and property damage
3.2 Descriptions for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

General precaution Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when using the copier. General prohibition Do not touch with Do not disassemble
wet hand
:Direction when using the copier.

General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth
A-4
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. SAFETY
bizhub PRESS C8000 WARNINGS
4. SAFETY WARNINGS
4.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
4.1.1 Outline
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved
through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
4.1.2 Prohibited Actions
WARNING
• Using any cables or power cord not specified

by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by

KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a
risk of fire and injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse
terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or
similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging
paper between relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety

circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured,
leading to a risk of fire and injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless
instructed by KMBT.
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
A-5
4.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

4.2.1 Outline
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used
in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach
appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
4.2.2 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the

following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet AC230V
appropriate for the product's rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
- provided with three-conductor cable
having enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory AC208V 240V
requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or
electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following
criteria:
- having configuration intended for the
connection to wall outlet appropriate for
the product's rated voltage and current,
and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
- meets regulatory requirements for the
area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the
product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric
shock.
A-6
• Conductors in the power cable must be

connected to terminals of the plug according
to the following order:
- Black or Brown:L (line)
- White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
- Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards
within the product, and results in fire or
electric shock.
4.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

4.3.1 Outline
Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and
eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety
checks.
4.3.2 Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may
result in fire or electric shock. ?V
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet
having same configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply
(voltage, current capacity, grounding),
and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available,
advice the customer to contact qualified
electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall
outlet with a capacity greater than the kw
maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall
outlet, fire may result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged
into the wall outlet, the total load must not
exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall
outlet, fire may result.
A-7
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the

wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and the risk of
fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an
ungrounded product, you may suffer
electric shock while operating the
product. Connect power plug to
grounded wall outlet.
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product. Connect power plug to
grounded wall outlet.
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type)

that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped
on or pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to
a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power
cord or cord set (with plug and
connector on each end) specified by
KMBT.
Using the damaged power cord may
result in fire or electric shock.
A-8
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to
a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the

power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a
risk of fire and electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug

multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a

specified one. Current that can flow in the
extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with
the cable taken up. Fire may result.
4.3.3 Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable

materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
A-9
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an

extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during

operation, but it will not be harmful to the
human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In case of an earthquake and so on, the
product may slide, leading to a injury.
4.3.4 Servicing
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all

relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
in safety clothes, using only the prescribed
tools.
A-10
Do not make any adjustment not described

in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk
of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the product
and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned
OFF. Arisk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments

or performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading
to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum
unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When taking a report of problems from a

user, check each part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire
exists.
• Check the exterior and frame for edges,
burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
A-11
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,

staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and
cause electric shock or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
product trouble or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
• Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and sign of
leakage.
trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write
unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been
disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye,
leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do
not supply power with the write unit shifted
from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye,
leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it
with a new lithium battery specified in the
Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used
lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause
explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp),
be sure to check the installation state.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you
may receive an electric shock or be
A-12
injured when you insert your hand in the

product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
• Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed
for safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock,
and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful

substances, but care must be taken not to
breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc.
It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse
with plenty of water immediately. When
symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into
fire.
You may be burned due to dust
explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly
flammable and must be handled with
care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product
ON before any solvent remnants on the
cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
A-13
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time

and take care not to spill any liquid. If this
happens, immediately wipe it off.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room
well.
Breathing large quantities of organic
solvents can lead to discomfort.
4.3.5 Fuse
Fuse
CAUTION
• CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
• ATTENTION
Double pôle / Fusible sur le neutre
4.3.6 Used Batteries Precautions

Handling of batteries
CAUTION
• ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
• France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent
recommandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
• Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
• Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
A-14
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
• Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-15
bizhub PRESS C8000 INFORMATION
5. SAFETY INFORMATION
5.1 IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according
to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this
copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
5.2 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing
these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
(Fusing unit left side)
(Duplex section Upper surface)
DO NOT put your hand between

the main body and duplex section;
otherwise you may be injured.
A-16
(Toner collection box Upper surface)
(Rear side)
CAUTION
Do not open the cover
during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
A-17
Do not open the cover for

50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
CAUTION
after shutting off the machine.
Do not touch power supply unit for 50min.
Capacitors (C15 C25 C252 C402)
Electric Shock from Storged Charge on
(DF rear side)
A-18
(EF-101)
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-19
(FS-612)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both
sides of the printed
sheets when removing
them, and DO NOT leave
your hand on the printed
sheets while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
(SD-506)
WARNING
Do not touch the edge of the
trimmer blade.
You get injured.
A-20
(RU-508)
WARNING
Do not open the cover for

50 minutes after turning
OFF the power switch.
There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
(GP-501) WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any
caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also,
A-21
when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly, replace it
with a new caution label.
A-22
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 6. MEASURES
bizhub PRESS C8000 TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
6. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-23
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub PRESS C8000 HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B-1
bizhub PRESS C8000 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) bizhub PRESS C8000: Copier or Main body
(2) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
The combination of above OS: Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
B-2
bizhub PRESS C8000 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA and KONICA MINOLTA logo are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC..
bizhub and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC..
© 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
B-3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C8000 SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B-4
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub PRESS C8000 SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B-5
bizhub PRESS C8000 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B-6
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub PRESS C8000
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub PRESS C8000
1.1 Type
Type Console type (floor-mounted type)
Copying method 4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand None*1
Photo conductor type OPC
Writing type 8-beam laser scanning type
Tray capacity 3 trays (500 sheets x 3, 80g/m2)
PF-704/705 (1390 sheets x 2, 1850 sheets x 1, 80g/m2)*2
*1 Mounted on PF-705 (option).
*2 PF-704/705 is optional.
1.2 Function
Paper size Tray 1, 2, 3 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, A4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Max. 330 x 487mm, Min. 140 x 182mm)
ADU SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11,
8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Warm-up time Inch: 390 seconds or less
Metric: 420 seconds or less
Continuous printing speed Color 80 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Black and white 80 sheets/min. (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Resolution Scan*1 Main scan: 600dpi
Sub scan: 600dpi
Writing Main scan: 1200dpi (equivalent to 3600dpi)
Sub scan: 1200dpi
Standard memory 512MB x 6
Expanded memory (HD-514)*2 160GB (SATA) x 6
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Service port (USB Type A), Connector for image controller
*1 Scanner is mounted on PF-705 (option).
*2 When connecting PF-705, HD-514 and PH-101 must be connected.
1.3 Paper
(1) Paper weight
Weight that can be fed Tray 1, 2, 3 64g/m2 to 300g/m2 (plain paper, fine paper, color paper)
81g/m2 to 300g/m2 (coated paper)
PF-704/705 64g/m2 to 350g/m2 (plain paper, fine paper, color paper)
81g/m2 to 350g/m2 (coated paper)
Weight that can be exited Simplex straight paper exit 64g/m2 to 350g/m2
Simplex reverse/exit *1 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
ADU 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
* Use RU-508 for reversing paper
(2) Type of paper

Type of paper Tray 1, 2, 3 PF-704/705
Plain ○ ○
C-1
Fine ○ ○
Color ○ ○
Coated GL, ML, GO, MO *1 *2 △ ○
Postcard x ○ *3
Label x x
OHP sheet x x
Tab Paper *4 ○ ○
○: Can be fed, △: Can be fed only per 1 sheet, -: Cannot be fed

(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 80g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-506 (option) is required for humidity 50% or more.
*3 Only when feeding from PF that is connected to the 1st tandem.
*4 Set direction is specified. Only for simplex.
1.4 Recommended paper

1.4.1 Inch
Paper type Product name*1
Plain Hammermill Tidal MP (75g/m2)
Fine
Color Hammermill Color Copy Photo White (105g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover (163g/ m2, 216g/m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO Hammermill Color Copy Glossy (120g/m2)
Kromekote Laser High Gloss C2S 90lb Book (133g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type Product name*1
Plain Profi (80g/m2)
Fine
Color Mondi Color Copy (90g/m2, 100g/m2, 120g/m2, 160g/m2, 200g/m2, 220g/m2, 250g/m2, 280g/m2, 300g/
m2, 350g/m2)
Coated-GL
Coated-GO Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Mondi Color Copy Coated Glossy (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Coated-ML
Coated-MO
1.5 Materials
Parts name Useful life Name
Toner bottle /Y 60,000 prints*1 TN-615Y
Toner bottle /M 68,000 prints*1 TN-615M
Toner bottle /C 75,000 prints*1 TN-615C
Toner bottle /K 91,000 prints*1 TN-615K
Drum unit 300,000 prints DU-103
(Drive distance 160km)*2
Developer /Y 300,000 prints DV-613Y
Developer /M 300,000 prints DV-613M
Developer /C 300,000 prints DV-613C
Developer /K 300,000 prints DV-613K
Toner collect box 100,000 prints*3 A1RFA366
C-2
*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage.

*2 The actual life is decided by the useful life or drive distance whichever comes earlier.
*3 A4 original at 10% coverage. The actual life is detected automatically by the sensor.
1.6 Print volume

Maintenance cycle Other than fusing section: Every 300,000 prints *1
Fusing section: Every 450,000 prints *1
Average number of prints *2 100,000 per month
Max. number of prints *2 Q zone *3 500,000 per month 20,000 per day
B, C zone *3 250,000 per month 10,000 per day
A zone *3 200,000 per month 8,500 per day
*1 A sheet of paper which its length is 355mm or longer in the paper feed direction is counted as 2 sheets.
*2 The number is the sum of black-and-white and color.
*3 The zones mean the temperature and humidity range indicated in the following graph.
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
1.7 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC208 to 240V 24A, 60Hz
Metric: AC220V to AC240V24A, 50Hz/60Hz
Power consumption Inch: 5,760W or less (Main body only)
Metric: 5,760W or less (Main body only)
China/Taiwan: 5,280W or less (Main body only)
Dimension*1 Main body 900 (W* 2) x 950 (D) x 1,319 (H* 3) mm
Main body + EF-101 + PF-705 + 4,974 (W) x 950 (D) x 1,319 (H* 3) mm
RU-508 + LS-505 + PB-503
Weight Approx. 450kg
*1 The spaces 500mm or more in the rear and 100mm or more in both sides are required.
*2 Excluding the operation section and the working table.
*3 Excluding the operation section.
1.8 Operating environment

Temperature 10°C to 30°C
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
1.9 Scan function

Scanning function is mounted on PF-705. Check the specifications of PF-705.
1.10 Note regarding the specifications

Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
C-3
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-622
2. DF-622
2.1 Type
Type Belt conveyance type original auto feeder
2.2 Function
Original size A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S
11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Max. original size 297mm x 431.8mm
Min. original size 128mm x 139.7mm
• Various sizes of paper can be accommodated
2.3 Type of paper

Type of paper Plain paper Simplex 35g/m2 to 210g/m2
Duplex 50g/m2 to 210g/m2
However, paper 49g/m2 or less is conveyed in the thin paper mode
and paper 129g/m2 is conveyed in the thick paper mode.
Special paper Same as plain paper. However, paper feed and conveyance
performance are not guaranteed.
The paper feed environment is Q-zone only.
• Recycled paper, coarse paper, thermal paper, binding holed paper,
custom paper, paper with smooth surface (coated paper), paper
with rough surface (letter head), and paper with folds
Following types of special paper cannot be used.
• OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded
original, high-quality paper of less than 35g/m2 or 211g/m2 or more
Paper curl amount Up to 10mm with 5 originals overlapped one another
[1]
a
15sat1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] Original
Maximum tray capacity 100 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Scan speed Color: 40sheets/min. or more
(A4, 81/2 x 11) Black-and-white : 40sheets/min. or more
Scanning system After the original that is conveyed on the belt stops, the scanner moves and scans the original.
2.4 Machine data

Power source DC24/5V (supplied from the main body via PF)
Power consumption Maximum 60W or less
Dimensions 588 (W) x 519 (D) x 135 (H) mm (excluding the paper feed tray)
Weight Approx. 14.5kg


Note
C-4
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-704/705
3. PF-704/705
3.1 Type
Type Front loading type suction method 3-tray paper feeder *1
Original stand *2 Fixed
Original alignment *2 Left rear standard
*1 Scanner and DF-622 (Refer to C.2. DF-622) are supplied with PF-705.
*2 PF-705 only
3.2 Function
(1) Paper feed
Number of trays 3 trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 4,630 sheets (80g/m2)
Tray 1, 2: 1,390 sheets
Tray 3: 1,850 sheets
(2) Scanner (PF-705 only)

Original Sheet, book, solid object
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom paper: Max. 303mm x 438mm)
Scanning resolution Main scan: 600dpi
Sub scan: 600dpi
Copy magnification Fixed magnification x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154,
x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500
Zoom magnification x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Continuous copy count Up to 9,999 sheets
Expanded memory (HD-514)*1 160GB (SATA) x 6
Number of originals to be stored Full color 4,300 sheets
(Raw HDD) Conditions Original: KM#101 chart /A3
(color)
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, life size
Black and white/Single Color 8,600 sheets
Conditions Original: FAX#4 chart /A4
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, life size
*1 When connecting PF-705, HD-514 and PH-101 must be connected.
3.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S*1, ISOB6S*1 ,
A6S*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Custom size paper (Maximum 330mm x 487mm, Minimum 100mm x 140mm) *2
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Postcard *1
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Paper weight 64g/m2 to 350g/m2
*1 Use the small size guide and only for the 1st tandem.
*2 For paper whose width is less than 139.7mm, use the small size guide and only for the 1st tandem. The smallest size of the 2nd tandem is
140mm x 140mm.
3.4 Machine data

(1) PF-704
Power source 5/12/-12VDC, 180VAC to 264VAC (supplied both from the main body)
inch: 120VAC
metric: 230VAC
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 70W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 212kg
Dimensions 996 (W) x 772 (D) x 1038 (H) mm
C-5
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PF-704/705
*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.
(2) PF-705
Power source 5/12/-12VDC, 180VAC to 264VAC (supplied both from the main body)
inch: 120VAC
metric: 230VAC
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 270W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 242kg
*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.


Note
C-6
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. HT-506
4. HT-506
4.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
4.2 Machine data

Power source (supplied from the 24/5VDC
connected device) Inch: 90VAC to 132VAC
Metric: 180VAC to 264VAC
Maximum power consumption DC: 6W or less
AC (Inch): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
AC (Metric): 384W or less (per 1 unit)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan unit + air supply/exhaust duct: 293 (W) x 336 (D) x 176 (H) mm
Power source unit: 212 (W) x 106 (D) x 77 (H) mm
Weight 6kg
(Dehumidifier fan unit x 3, air supply/exhaust duct x 3, power source unit x 1)


Note
C-7
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. HD-514
5. HD-514
5.1 Type
Type External hard disk kit
5.2 Function
Function Scanning image memory
Storage of image data
Storage of image data header file
Storage of thumbnail data for preview
Job edit*2
Storage of job history
Storage of log data
* The installation of PF-705 and PH-101 is necessary.*1
* The installation of PH-102 is necessary.*2
HDD specifications 3.5-inch, SATA 160GB (Raw: 150GB, file system (FAT32: 10 GB) x 6 (Y, M, C, K, A and P)
Raw (150GB) Y / M /C / K Storage of image data, scanning
Unformatted image memory
A Storage of image data header file
P Storage of thumbnail data for
preview, storage of job history
File system (10GB) Y / M /C / K Not used
FAT32 A Storage of log data
P Job history setting data
Number of originals recorded Full color 4,300 sheets
(RawHDD) Conditions Original: KM#101 chart /A3 (color)
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size
Black and white/Single Color 8,600 sheets
Conditions Original: The Institute of Image
Electronics Engineers of Japan
FAX#4 chart /A4
Density: Standard
Mode: Text/Photo, Full Size
*1 C8000 only
*2 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
5.3 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 100W or less
Weight Approx. 15kg


Note
C-8
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. PH-101
6. PH-101
6.1 Type
Type Board kit for image preview
6.2 Function
Function Make thumbnail data of HDD store job
Preview of thumbnail data
* PF-705 and HD-514 must be connected.
6.3 Machine data

Power source 3.3VDC (supplied from the main body)


Note
C-9
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. EF-101
7. EF-101
7.1 Type
Type External finishing fusing device
7.2 Type of paper

Paper path Plain Coat
2nd fusing path 136g/m2 or more 81g/m2 or more
Bypath path Less than 136g/m2 -
7.3 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC208 to 240V 16A, 60Hz
Metric: AC220V to AC240V15A, 50Hz/60Hz
Maximum power consumption Inch: 2,970W
Metric: 2,550W
Dimensions 497 (W) x 774 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
Weight 95.5kg


Note
C-10
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. RU-508
8. RU-508
8.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with paper cooling/de-curler function
8.2 Function
De-curler conveyance mode Reduces paper curl and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
In the straight conveyance mode Feed without the de-curl process and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Reverse/exit conveyance mode Reverses paper and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear velocity.
Humidifier conveyance mode Executes humidification of HM-101 (option) and conveys at an accelerating rate with post treatment linear
velocity.
Output paper density adjustment Measures the color density of the density patch printed on paper and feeds back to the image stabilization
mode control of the main body.
8.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Straight paper exit 64g/m2 to 350g/m2
Reverse paper exit 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
Allowed curl 60mm or less
8.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC (Japan), 120VAC (North America), 220VAC to 240VAC (Europe)/5VDC (supplied from the main
body)
Weight Approx. 80kg


Note
C-11
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. HM-101
9. HM-101
9.1 Type
Type Paper humidifier kit
9.2 Function
Functions Humidifies the both sides of paper to adjust curling.
Tank capacity 20L (equivalent to approx. 100,000 copies)
9.3 Type of paper

Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
Postcard
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Type of paper Same as the main body (except for the coated paper)
9.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from RU-508)
Maximum power consumption 60W
Dimension Humidifier section: 194 (W) x 492 (D) x 83 (H) mm
Water feed tank section: 339 (W) x 646 (D) x 246 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 10kg


Note
C-12
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. FS-521
10. FS-521
10.1 Type
Type Staple-cut type multi staple device
10.2 Function
(1) Function
Straight mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Shift mode Exited into the main tray after being shifted.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Staple mode Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.
Subset staple mode Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main
tray.
(2) Number of staple sheets

The maximum number of staple sheets is decided according to either conditions which is met first, the combination condition of the paper
type/the paper length/the number of sheets for every range of paper weight, or the combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet
thickness.
• Combination condition of the paper weight/the paper type/the paper length and the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Number of staple sheets
Paper not coated Coated paper/color paper
Paper weight (g/m2) Less than 400mm 400mm or more Less than 400mm 400mm or more
50 to 71 100 50 35 35
72 to 81 100 50 35 35
82 to 91 100 50 35 35
92 to 130 50 50 30 30
131 to 161 40 40 25 25
162 to 216 25 25 20 20
217 to 244 25 25 15 15
• Combination condition of the booklet length/the booklet thickness

Length (mm) Booklet thickness (mm)
219 or less 23 or less
220 or more 20 or less
(3) Staple position

Staple position 1 in the back (45 degrees), 1 in the front, 2 in center
(4) Maximum tray capacity of the main tray

Straight/Shift mode Large size: A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, SRA3, SRA4, SRA4S,
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/
13 x 19 *2*3*6*11, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*3 *7 *11
m2 *1,
Wide paper *1 (Max. 324mm x 463mm)
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2*11,
Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, 9 x 11*1*3*11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 16K*2*3 *7 *11 16KS*2*3 *7 *11
Minimum size: A5, A5S*2*3*11, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3*6*11
Others: Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size • 1200/1200P/1051
paper*12 Minimum 148 (128)mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 148 (128)mm x 148mm, Maximum 324 (330)mm x 463 (483)mm
• C8000
• C7000/C7000P/C6000
Paper weight (g/m2) Tray capacity (sheets)
Large size Small size Minimum size
40 to 71 500 750 100
72 to 81 1500 3000 (1500) *10 750
C-13
82 to 91 1000 2000 (1500) *10 500

92 to 130 750 1500 400
131 to 161 350
162 to 216 500 1000 250
217 to 300 375 750 200
301 to 350 250 500 100
Staple mode Number of sets of staple sheet Number of sets
(Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/ 2 to 9 150 (paper length: 182mm to 364mm)
m2 *1, 75 (paper length: other than 182mm to 364mm)
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *2 *3*11) 10 to 20 50
21 to 30 30
31 to 40 25
41 to 50 20
51 to 60 15
61 to 100 10
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 Default for North America (C8000/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C6000 only)
*5 Default for Europe
*6 Straight mode only
*7 For China/Taiwan only (C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C7000/C7000P/C6000 only)
*8 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*9 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 ( ) when shifted
*11 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
*12 () when in straight mode
(5) Maximum tray capacity of the sub tray

Maximum tray capacity 200 sheets (20 sheets for Z-Folding/40 sheets for center folding)
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/
m2 *1*3, 64g/m2 to 300g/m2
*2*11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4)
SRA3, A3, JISB4 *5, ISOB4 *1 *4 *6 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5 *5, ISOB5 *1 *4 *6 *11, JISB5S *5, ISOB5S*4 *6 *11, A5, A5S *2
*4*11, JISB6S *2 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*4 *6 *11, A6S *2*4*11, 13 x 19 *2*4*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *1*4*11, 81/ x 14, 81/ x 11, 81/ x
2 2 2
11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1*4, 51/2 x 81/2S *2*4*11, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *2*4 *7 *11, 16K *2*4 *7 *11, 16KS *2*4 *7 *11,
Post card
Wide paper *1 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper • 1200/1200P/1051
Minimum 95mm x 139mm*10, Maximum 324mm x 463mm
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 331mm x 483mm
• C8000
• C7000/C7000P/C6000
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
*4 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
*9 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 95mm x 133mm when post pocessing with FS only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
C-14
10.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5 *2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*5*9, A5, 8K *4*5*6*9, 16K*4*5*6*9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*5*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13,
81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Maximum
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper • 1200/1200P/1051
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc
• C8000
• C7000/C7000P/C6000
Applicable paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Main tray 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5*9
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curl amount: 20mm or less (50g/m2 to 90g/m2), 10mm or less (91g/m2 to 300g/m2)
[1] 5 sheets
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*8 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
10.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 110VA
Weight Approx. 80kg
Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
915 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is set in:
798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm
When the main tray is removed:
544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1020 (H) mm


Note
C-15
11. FS-612
11.1 Type
Type Multi folding/multi stapling device
11.2 Function
(1) Function
Non-sort mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Sort/group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
Saddle stitching mode After folding and stapling on the center of paper, folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet
tray
Half-Fold mode Folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet tray
Tri-folding mode Folds the paper twice and exits to the booklet tray
Punch mode *1 Executes punching operation and exits paper to the main tray or the sub tray
PI mode *2 Feeds the sheet
*1 When PK (option) is mounted. The combination with the non-sort mode, sort/group mode, and staple mode is available.
*2 When PI (option) is mounted. Manual stapling and manual punching are available.
(2) Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
64g/m2 to 80g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Parallel in front/45 degrees in back Slant:1 point Center:2 points
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
Within the range of the above number, up to 200g/m2: 1 sheet can be inserted.
Staple position Changeable (128mm to 160mm)
(3) Folding
Maximum center fold 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 3 sheets
Maximum tri-folding 64g/m2 to 105g/m2: 1 sheet
(4) Maximum tray capacity*1

Main tray Non-sort mode, • 2,500 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ Sort/group mode A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S,
m2) 16K, 16KS
• 1500 sheets
SRA3 *2, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K
• 500 sheets
A5, A5S *2, B6S *2, ISOB6S *2, 51/2 x 81/2 *2*5, 51/2 x 81/2 S *2
• Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/ x 11)
2
• Custom paper*4 • C8000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 (140) mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
• C7000/C7000P/C6000
Minimum 182 (128) mm x 148 mm,
Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm
Staple Staple sheet Length in the sub Length in the sub
Mode scan direction: scan direction:
418mm or more 417mm or less
2 to 9 50 sets 100 sets
C-16
Booklet tray Saddle stitching mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 15 sets with 5
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 105g/ sheets
Other than the above: 20 sets with 5 sheets
m2)
Folding mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 25 sets with 3
sheets folding
Other than the above: 33 sets with 3 sheets folding
Tri-folding mode 50 sets with 1 sheet folding
Sub tray • 100 sheets
(Paper weight 64g/m2 to 300g/ SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S,
A6S
m2)
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2*5,
51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Postcard
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 x 487 mm, Minimum 100 x 140 mm*5, 100 x 148 mm*6)
*1 The capacity is counted with 80g/m2 paper.

*2 Non-sort mode only
*4 ( ) When in non-sort mode
*5 C8000 only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
11.3 Type of paper

(1) Staple mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 140 mm*2, Minimum 182 x 148 mm*3)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*2 C8000 only
*3 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
(3) Half-Fold mode

Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
C-17
(4) Tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
11.4 Machine data

Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
When the main tray is set in:
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight 65kg


Note
C-18
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. PK-512/513
12. PK-512/513
12.1 Type
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device
12.2 Function
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes PK-512: 2 holes/3 holes (inch) or 2 holes/4 holes (metric)
PK-513: 4 holes
Hole diameter
6.5 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 8.0 mm (3 holes)
Hole pitch PK-512: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)

PK-513: 21, 70, 21 mm
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
12.3 Type of paper

Type of paper PK-512 (2 holes) (A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
PK-512 (3 holes/4 holes) (A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K, 16K)
PK-513 (A3, B4, A4, B5)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, color paper, coated paper (same as the main body)
Punch prohibited paper Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper, and the other paper that may
interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade.
Paper curling
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curling (10 mm or less)

[1] 5 sheets
12.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supply from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 40 W or less
Weight Approx. 3 kg


Note
C-19
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. PI-502
13. PI-502
13.1 Type
Type Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
13.2 Function
Automatic sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(Online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
(Offline operation) The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch mode (when PK-512/513 is installed on FS)
Saddle stitching mode
Tri-folding mode
Note
The tray /Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
13.3 Type of paper

Paper size Tray /Up A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 216mm x 297mm, Min. 182mm x 139mm)
Tray /Lw A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330mm x 483mm, Min. 182mm x 140mm)
Type of paper Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Capacity Tray /Up, /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount
[1]
a
15jft1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
13.4 Machine data



Note
C-20
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 14. LS-505
14. LS-505
14.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20mm (stacker tray only) *1
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
14.2 Function
(1) Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20mm) and exits paper to the stacker tray *1
Coupling mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.
*1 The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
(2) Maximum tray capacity

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray • 5,000 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) SRA3, A3, JISB4 *1, ISOB4 *2 *3 *4 *6, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19*3 *4 *5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11 *3 *4 *6, 81/2 x 14, 81/2
x 11, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16K *4 *5 *6 *7
• 3,000 sheets
Coated paper (Sub-scan direction is 380mm or longer)
• 2,000 sheets
JISB5 *1, ISOB5 *2 *3 *4 *6, A5, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4 *5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Folding paper: 20 sheets
Half-folding paper: 40 sheets
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*6 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
14.3 Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S,
JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11, A5
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8
x 13, 8K*4 *5 *11, 16K*4 *5 *11
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper
Max. 324mm x 463mm, Min. 210mm x 148mm *3
Max. 483mm x 210mm, Min. 148mm x 2mm *4*5*11
C-21
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 14. LS-505
Sub tray SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S,
JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *3 *5 *11, A5,
A5S*4 *5 *11, JISB6S*1*4 *5 *11, ISOB6S*2 *5 *11, A6S*4 *5 *11
13 x 19*4 *5 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *5 *11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *5, 51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *11, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K*4 *5 *6 *11, 16K*4 *5 *6 *11,
16KS*4 *5 *6 *11
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *8 *9 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper
Max. 330mm x 487mm, Min. 100mm x 148mm *4*11
Paper weight Stacker tray 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 256g/m2 *4 *5*11
Sub tray 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*10
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *4 *11
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *5
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*5 C8000 only
*7 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000 is A4 and 81/2 x 11 only
*11 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
14.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (supplied from the main body) *1
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C-22
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. FD-503
15. FD-503
15.1 Type
Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
15.2 Function
(1) Function
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Folding functions Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each
sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS
connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/main tray. (The stapling
function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1 *3 *5 *11, JISB5S*4, ISOB5S*3 *5 *11
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 9 x 11*1 *3 *11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
*1,
16K*2 *3 *6 *11, 16KS*2 *3 *6 *11
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11,
1500 sheets: SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4, SRA4S
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
13 x 19*2 *3 *11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*2*3 *6 *11
500 sheets: A5, A5S*2*3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *11, ISOB6S*3 *5 *11, 51/2 x
81/2*1*3, 51/2 x 81/2S*2*3 *11
Others: Tab paper *7*8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max.
324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3
Sub tray Folding type: Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
(with folder tray) Paper size: A3, B4, ISOB4*1 *3 *11, A4S, SRA4S,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K*2 *3 *6 *11
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x
279mm)
Paper weight: Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out
50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 130g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *11
Tray capacity of folding paper 30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*9
Sub tray Tray capacity: 200 sheets
(without folder tray)
(Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2
*1*10,
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *2 *11,
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3)
C-23
SRA3, A3, JISB4*4, ISOB4*1 *3 *5 *11, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*4, ISOB5*1*3 *5*11, JISB5S*4,
ISOB5S *3 *5 *11, A5, A5S*2 *3 *11, JISB6S*2 *3 *4 *5 *11, ISOB6S *3 *11, A6S*2 *3 *11
13 x 19*2 *3*11, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *3*11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*1 *3,
51/2 x 81/2S*2 *3*11
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper *1(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm*1
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum 330mm x 483mm*2 *11
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
*8 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*9 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*11 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
15.3 Type of paper

(1) Punching function
Paper size 2-hole: SRA3*1, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S*1, A4, A4S,
JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S *2 *4 *9, A5, A5S *4
*5 *9
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3 *4
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
3-hole: SRA3*1, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, A4, JISB5*1 *2, ISOB5*3 *4
*9,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *9, 81/2 x 11,
8K*4 *5 *6 *9, 16K*4 *5 *6 *9
Tab paper *7(A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 216g/m2(2 sheets overlap mode: 50g/m2 to 91g/m2)*3,
64g/m2 to 216g/m2 *4 *5 *9
(2) Folding functions

Paper size A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *9, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K*4*5 *6 *9
Custom size paper (Maximum 305mm x 458mm, Minimum 210mm x 279mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper
Paper weight Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold- 50g/m2 to 130g/m2 *3,
out, Z-Fold
64g/m2 to 130g/m2*4 *5 *9
Double parallel, Gate 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *3,
64g/m2 to 91g/m2*4 *5 *9
(3) PI functions
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5S*2*3*4, JISB5S*1, A5
C-24
13 x 19*4*5 *9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4 *9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3 *4,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4*5 *6 *9, 16K*4*5 *6 *9, 16KS*4*5 *6 *9
Custom size paper *8
• 1200/1200P/1051
• C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C6000
• C8000
Applicable paper Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 When using as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182mm x 279mm, Maximum 307mm x 483mm)
*9 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
15.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 180VA or less
Dimensions 400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H)mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
*1 C8000 /C6501 /C6501P /C65hc /C7000 /C7000P /C6000 : Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body


Note
C-25
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 16. SD-506
16. SD-506
16.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function
16.2 Function
(1) Function
Sub tray paper exit mode Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding/saddle stitching/trimming operation.
Multi center folding mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi center folding trimming Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets
mode of paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray 200 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Z-Folding 20 sheets
Center folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Folding & Stapling/trimming Stitching sheets Set
Mode 2 to 10 50 or more
11 to 20 30 or more
21 to 40 20 or more
41 to 50 15 or more
Multi center folding mode 30 sets
Tri-folding paper exit tray Overlap tri-folding mode 20 sets
16.3 Type of paper

(1) Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *10, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2 *3 *4 *10,
JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2 *4 *10, A5, A5S *4 *5 *10, B6S *4 *5 *10, ISOB56*4 *10, A6S *4 *5 *10
13 x 19 *4 *5 *10, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*3 *4 *10, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2*3 *4,
51/2 x 81/2S*4 *5 *10
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16K*4 *5 *6 *10, 16KS*4 *5 *6 *10
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Tab paper *7 *8 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm)
Postcard
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139mm, Maximum 324mm x 463mm *3
Minimum 100mm x 148mm, Maximum.330mm x 483mm*5*10
Minimum 100mm x 140mm, Maximum 330mm x 487mm *4
Paper weight 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *3*9
64g/m2 to 300g/m2 *5 *10
64g/m2 to 350g/m2 *4
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*8 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*10 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
(2) Saddle stitching mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4*8, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
C-26
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S

81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *8, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *8
Wide paper *3(A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *8
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated Paper weight Sheet
Plain paper Coated *4 *5 *8
50g/m2 to 81g/ 50 *7 30 *7
m2
82g/m2 to 91g/ 30 *7 15 *7
m2
92g/m2 to 20 *7 10 *7
130g/m2
131g/m2 to 15 *7 5 *7
161g/m2
162g/m2 to 10 -
209g/m2
210g/m2 to 5 -
244g/m2
Fine Paper brand 55kg (64g/m2) 70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V 50 sheets 50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE -
NEW NPi 50 sheets 30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 2mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 ± 2mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S (260mm or
11 x 17 less)
(301mm to (261mm to
(401mm or
400mm) 300mm)
more)
2 to 5 35mm or less 40mm or less 45mm or less Not defined
6 to 15 45mm or less 50mm or less Not defined
16 to 30 50mm or less 55mm or less
31 to 50 60mm or less 65mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
C-27
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200g/m2)
*8 C7000 /C7000P /C6000 only
(3) Trimming mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4 *5 *6 *7, 16KS *4 *5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2 *3
64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4 *5 *7
Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)
(The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C7000 /C7000P /C6000 only
(4) Multi center folding mode

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2 *3 *4 *7, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K *4*5 *6 *7, 16KS *4*5 *6 *7
Wide paper *3 (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 244g/m2*3, 64g/m2 to 244g/m2 *4*5 *7
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
50g/m2 to 81g/m2 5 sheets

Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 1.5mm
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
C-28
*7 C7000 /C7000P /C6000 only
(5) Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
Paper weight 50g/m2 to 91g/m2 *1, 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2 *3 *4
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet

Folding precision (for 1 sheet) Paper size [1] [2] [3]
A4S 97.5 ± 4mm 102.0 ± 4mm 1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 4mm 96.1 ± 4mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
*1 1200/1200P/1051 only
*2 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*3 C8000 only
*4 C7000 /C7000P /C6000 only
16.4 Machine data

Maximum power consumption 270W
Weight 280kg
Dimensions When the bundle output tray is stored:
1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
*1 C8000/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C7000/C7000P/C6000: Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body.


Note
C-29
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. PB-503
17. PB-503
17.1 Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
17.2 Function
(1) Function
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process
Relay conveyance mode Exits paper to the option (FS-521) on the subsequent stage without any process
(2) Binding sheets

Binding sheets Min. thickness 10 sheets
Max. thickness Plain: 300 sheets or 30mm
Color/Coated: 150 sheets or 15mm
Binding sheets with Z-Fold Simplex printing Number of Z-Fold Max. number of Total
sheets*1 sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Max. number of
Binding sheets*1
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
Duplex printing Number of Z-Fold Max. number of Total
sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Max. number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
Simplex/duplex mixed printing When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the
(printer function) same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*1 The limit of the total number of sheets can be released by switching DIPSW30-5 from 0 (default) to 1.

Book stock section Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30mm)
10 sheets to 30 sheets book 50 sets
31 sheets to 150 sheets book 35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
151 sheets to 300 sheets book Until the upper limit is detected
PB cover paper tray*3 1000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray 200 sheets (80g/m2)
*1 The available number of books may decrease due to curls of papers.
*2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart, and
piling books at the first row continues.
*3 Cover paper supply is selectable from PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU (1200/1200P/1051 only).
(4) Others
Warm-up time Approx. 20 minutes
Cover trimming Selectable from Trim/Not trim.
17.3 Type of paper

(1) Paper size
Perfect binding mode Inside paper: A4, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, A5, A5S*3*9, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x
81/2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9, 16K*3*4*9
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
Z-fold size (A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S,
8K*3*4*9)
C-30
Cover: Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm

Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
Sub tray mode SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*9, A5, A5S*3*9, B6S*3*9, ISOB6S*3*9, A6S*3*9, 8K*3*4*9, 16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*4*9
13 x 19*3*9, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x 81/2S*3*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 460mm)
Custom size: Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm *5
Finite tab paper *6*7 : A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Postcard
Relay conveyance mode *8 Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521)
• Large size: SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*5*9, SRA4, SRA4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19*3*9, 8K*3*4*9
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper *5 (Max. 324mm x 460mm)
• Small size: A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*5*9, JISB5S*1, ISOB5S*2*3*9,
16K*3*4*9, 16KS*3*9
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
• Minimum size: A5, A5S*3*9, JISB6S*1*3*9, ISOB6S*2*3*9, 51/2 x 81/2*3*5, 51/2 x
81/2S*3*9
• Others: Finite tab paper *6*7: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 330mm x 487mm*3*9, 324mm x 463mm*5
Minimum 100mm x 140mm*3, 100mm x 148mm*9, 95mm x 139mm
*5
(2) Paper weight

Perfect binding mode Inside paper: 64g/m2 to 91g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 105g/m2*1*6
Cover: 82g/m2 to 216g/m2*2
81g/m2 to 209g/m2*1*6
Sub tray mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2 *2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
Relay conveyance mode 40g/m2 to 350g/m2*2
64g/m2 to 350g/m2*1
64g/m2 to 300g/m2*6
*3 C8000 only
*5 1200/1200P/1051 only
*7 For C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000, A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503
*9 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
17.4 Machine data

Power source 100VAC 50/60Hz common
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 1000W or less
C-31
Dimensions 1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm

Binding section 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 775 (D) mm
Book stock section 620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm
Relay conveyance section


Note
C-32
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 18. RU-506
18. RU-506
18.1 Type
Type Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
18.2 Function
Double sheets reverse/exit Reverses 2 sheets of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to finishing unit.
conveyance mode *1
Single sheet reverse/exit Reverses a single sheet of paper exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 and conveys to
conveyance mode finishing unit.
Straight conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the main body, PI-PFU *2 or GP-501 to finishing unit without any process.
*1 1200/1200P only
*2 1200/1200P/1051 only
18.3 Paper type

Paper size SRA3, A3, JISB4*1, ISOB4*2*3*4*9, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, JISB5*1, ISOB5*2*3*4*9, JISB5S*1,
ISOB5S*2*3*4*9, A5, A5S *4*5*9, JISB6S *1 *4*5*9, ISOB6S*2 *4 *9, A6S *4*5*9, 13 x 19*4*5*9, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 9 x 11*3*4*9, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 *3*4, 51/2 x 81/2S *4*5*9, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K *4*5*6*9, 16K *4*5*6*9, 16KS *4*5*6*9
Wide paper*3 (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x
11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W, Max. 324mm x 463mm)
Custom size paper (Max. 324mm x 463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5, Max. 330mm x 487mm*4*9, Min.
95mm x 133mm)
Tab paper*7 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, Max. 324mm x
463mm*3, Max. 324mm x 487mm*5)
Paper type Plain, Fine, Coat, recycled paper: same as the main body.
Paper weight 40g/ m2 to 350g/ m2 *3,64g/ m2 to 300g/ m2 *5*9
2 pages reverse/exit conveyance mode *8 40g/ m2 to 216g/ m2
*3 1200/1200P/1051 only
*4 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
*5 C6501/C6501P/C65hc only
*7 C8000 is A4, 81/2 x 11 only
*8 1200/1200P only
*9 C7000/C7000P/C6000 only
18.4 Machine data

Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 63VA or less
Weight Approx. 45 kg


Note
C-33
bizhub PRESS C8000 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 19. GP-501
19. GP-501
19.1 Type
Type Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
19.2 Modes of Operation

Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
19.3 Machine data

Punch unit size 12” (305mm) W x 40” (1016mm) H x 30.5” (775mm) D
Weight 170 lbs (80kg) unpackaged,
270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color Top Cover . Orca Black, Lower covers . Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501 External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501 Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines GP-501 Internal Lead-Through
• On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
• On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on left side cover.
19.4 Software
Communication method i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.
ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Max Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content According Interface Specification (See also Appendix B)
19.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP & RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
Downstream connected units
19.6 Inputs
(1) Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick
Center justified 4mm
up
Line speed 290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up
2%
Sheet frequency 120 ppm maximum
(a) For Punching

Paper weight 20lb bond - 80lb cover
Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size Letter configuration 279 x 216mm
A4 configuration 297 x 210mm
(b) For Bypass

Paper weight 16lb bond - 93lb cover
64gsm - 350gsm
Paper type Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Post Card, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight 5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size 13” x 24.8” (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size 3.74” x 5.47” (95 x 139mm)
C-34
(2) Power
Supply GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market See table below.
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
19.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery ± 2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery ± 1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity 2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
19.8 Performance
Punch accuracy Hole size ± 2%
Alignment ±0.5mm
Back gauge depth ±0.3mm
(1) Reliability
MCBJ: Punch 1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass 1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
19.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transport

Normal Operation Temperature 10 deg C – 30 deg C
Normal Operation Humidity 10% - 80%
Storage Temperature -10 deg C – 40 deg C
Storage Humidity 10% - 80%
19.10 Safety /Regulatory

Noise emissions (measured to Punch Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
ISO7779) Bypass Maximum of 70dBA
(1) Safety Compliance

UL & CSA standards CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01
UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
(2) Electromagnetic Compliance

EMC standards EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003
EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C-35
19.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
19.12 Appendix B
No. Model Die set type # Pins Pinshape Hole size Paper size Label artwork
(WxH or D)
1 DS-501 Ring Binder 3 Round 8mm 81/2 x 11
3Hole (0.316")
2 DS-502 Plastic Bind 19 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm 81/2 x 11

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
3 DS-503 WireBind –3:1 32 Square 4mm x 4mm 81/2 x 11
Square (0.156" x
0.156")
4 DS-504 WireBind –2:1 21 Rect. 6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/ x 11
2
Rectangular (0.250" x
0.214")
5 DS-505 Color Coil 44 Round 4.4mm 81/2 x 11
(0.174")
C-36
6 DS-506 VeloBind 11 Round 3.2mm 81/2 x 11

(0.125")
7 DS-507 To be determined
8 DS-508 Ring Binder 4 4 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
9 DS-509 Plastic Bind 21 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
10 DS-510 WireBind –3:1 34 Round 4.4mm A4
Round (0.174")
11 DS-511 WireBind –2:1 23 Round 6.38mm A4

Round (0.251")
12 DS-512 Color Coil 47 Round 4.4mm A4

(0.174")
13 DS-513 VeloBind 12 Round 3.2mm A4

(0.125")
14 DS-514 To be determined
15 DS-515 Ring Binder 2 2 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
16 DS-516 Plastic Bind 20 Rect. 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x
0.116")
17 DS-517 WireBind –2:1 23 Rect. 6.4mm x 5.4mm A4
Rectangular (0.250" x
(Australia) 0.214")
18 DS-518 WireBind –3:1 34 Square 4mm x 4mm A4
Square (0.156" x
(Australia) 0.156")
19.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching
Destination Paper Name Weight (g/m2) Punch *2
(1) US Hammermill Color Copy Paper - 120 Q-Zone
Photo White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75 All
Hammermill Fore MP 75 All
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 120 Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated 215 Q-Zone
(C1S) *1
Hammermill Color Copy Cover *1 163 Q-Zone
216 Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) *1 160 Q-Zone
(2) EU Konica Minolta Original 80 All
Konica Minolta Profi 80 All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80 All
Mondi Color Copy 200 Q-Zone
*1 For only C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the below graph
C-37
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
19.14 Glossary of Terms

These terms are common to the punch and bindery industry.
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes punched in the document then
the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5 holes per inch).
This type of bind lays flat and even folds around for easy handling of the document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding The name used to describe GBC's most common binding method.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are actually slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad) Tabbing or hanging chad is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material leaving a piece of
paper hanging from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and will usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is feed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that lays flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for it's security and it's attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for it's security
feature.
C-38
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration
[19]
[3]
[20] [2]
[18]
[17]
[21]
[22]
[1] [4]
[16] [23] [25]
[5]
[15] [13] [12]
[6]
[24] [7]
[14]
[11] [8]
[10]
[9]
[1] Main body [2] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-622)*1

[3] Dehumidification heater (HT-506) [4] Large capacity paper feed unit (with scanner) (PF-705)
[5] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-704) [6] Image controller (IC-306)
[7] Upgrade kit (UK-102) [8] ORU kit (OR-101)
[9] Preview board kit (PH-101) *2 [10] Hard disk (HD-514) *2
[11] Die set (DS-***)*3 [12] Multi-hole punch unit (GP-501)
[13] Relay unit ( RU-506) [14] Folding unit (FD-503)
[15] Finisher (Flat staple type) (FS-521) [16] Perfect binder (PB-503)
[17] Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501) [18] Large capacity stacker (LS-505)
[19] Saddle stitch unit (SD-506) [20] Post inserter (PI-502)
[21] Punch kit (PK-512/513) [22] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612)
[23] Relay unit ( RU-508) [24] Humidifier unit (HM-101)
[25] 2nd fusing unit (EF-101) -
*1 Standard equipment.
*2 To connect PF-705, HD-514 and PH-101 must be connected.
*3 Selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
Model Paper size The number of pins Shape of pin
DS-501 81/2 x 11 3 Round
DS-502 81/2 x 11 19 Rectangle
DS-503 81/2 x 11 32 Square
DS-504 81/2 x 11 21 Rectangle
DS-505 81/2 x 11 44 Round
DS-506 81/2 x 11 11 Round
DS-507 To be determined
DS-508 A4 4 Round
D-1
DS-509 A4 21 Rectangle
DS-510 A4 34 Round
DS-511 A4 23 Round
DS-512 A4 47 Round
DS-513 A4 12 Round
DS-514 To be determined
DS-515 A4 2 Round
DS-516 A4 20 Rectangle
DS-517 A4 23 Square
DS-518 A4 34 Square
1.2 Configuration for optional device

Note
• The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.
• IC-306 is available with all combinations.
• The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
1.2.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option AC power to be connected to
1 PF-704 *1 Main body External (PF-704)
2 PF-705 *1 *2 Main body External (PF-705)
3 PF-704 *1 PF-704 *1 Main body External (each PF-704)
4 PF-704 *1 PF-705 *1 *2 Main body External (PF-704/705)
*1 HT-506 can be connected arbitrarily to PF-704/705.

*2 To connect PF-705, HD-514 and PH-101 must be connected.
1.2.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option AC power to be connected to
1 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
2 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 LS-505 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
3 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 SD-506 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
4 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
5 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/PB-503)
6 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 LS-505 SD-506 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/SD-506)
7 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 LS-505 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
8 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 LS-505 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/PB-503)
9 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 SD-506 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503
10 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/PB-503)
11 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/PB-503)
12 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503/PB-503)
13 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FD-503 LS-505 LS-505 External (EF-101/RU-508/
FD-503)
14 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505)
15 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 SD-506 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/SD-506)
16 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505)
17 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/PB-503)
D-2
18 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 SD-506 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/

LS-505/SD-506)
19 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 SD-506 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/SD-506/PB-503)
20 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/PB-503)
21 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 LS-505 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505)
22 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 LS-505 SD-506 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/SD-506)
23 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 LS-505 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505)
24 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 LS-505 LS-505 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
LS-505/PB-503)
25 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 SD-506 External (EF-101/RU-508/
SD-506)
26 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 SD-506 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
SD-506)
27 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 SD-506 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
SD-506/PB-503)
28 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
SD-506/PB-503)
29 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508)
30 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
PB-503)
31 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
PB-503)
32 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501)
33 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 FD-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501/FD-503)
34 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 LS-505 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501/LS-505)
35 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 SD-506 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501/SD-506)
36 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 PB-503 FS-521 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501/PB-503)
37 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 GP-501 RU-506 LS-505 PB-503 External (EF-101/RU-508/
GP-501/LS-505/PB-503)
38 Main body EF-101 RU-508 *1 FS-612 *2 External (EF-101/RU-508)
*1 HM-101 can be connected arbitrarily to RU-508.

*2 PK-512/513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-612.
D-3
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT
bizhub PRESS C8000 CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[15] [1]
[14]
[13] [2]
[12] [3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[9]
[6]
[8]
[7]
A1RFM0DC002CA
[1] Operation panel section [2] Write section

[3] Developing section [4] Charging section
[5] Registration section [6] Vertical conveyance section
[7] Paper feed section [8] Toner collection section
[9] 2nd transfer/separation section [10] Duplex section
[11] Paper exit section [12] Fusing section
[13] Photo conductor section [14] Toner supply section
[15] Intermediate transfer section -
D-4
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
[1]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4]
A1RFM0DC003CA
[1] Transfer/fusing conveyance [2] Registration paper feed (common)

[3] PF paper feed [4] Vertical conveyance
[5] ADU paper feed [6] Tray 3 paper feed
[7] Tray 2 paper feed [8] Tray 1 paper feed
[9] ADU reverse conveyance [10] Exit conveyance
D-5
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
USB USB RS232C LAN

I/F I/F I/F I/F
HDD IC HDD HDD RBU AB
OB RFIDCB
CCD SCIPB PHCB
DF PF PRIPB MCB1 MCB2 EF FS FD LS SD PB
OACB
Write
RU
Section
PRCB
Fusing
ACDB CDB DCPS HV TDB
Unit
M FM MC SD PS M FM PS FM M MC SD SW PS
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
A1RFM0DC004CA
[1] SATA [2] Individual signal line

[3] Other bus [4] UART bus
[5] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Image bus
Board name Purpose of board ISW target
Overall control board (OACB) Overall condition control Target
Memory control board /1 (MCB1) Image memory (DRAM+HDD option) control Non-target
Memory control board /2 (MCB2) Image memory (DRAM+HDD option) control Non-target
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Image processing control for writing Non-target
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor Target
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) Image processing control for scanner (option) Non-target
Preview control board (PHCB) Image memory for thumbnail (DRAM+HDD option) control (option) Non-target
D-6
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step Process Functions
Step 1 Charging process Forms a charge layer on the drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on the drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4 Intermediate transfer process Forms an image by compositing the monochromatic
(YMCK) visible image on each drum on the intermediate
transfer belt.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers the image on the intermediate transfer belt to
paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper after the toner transfer from the
intermediate transfer belt.
Sub step 1 Assist neutralizing After the 1st transfer, neutralizes the accumulated toner
on the intermediate transfer belt and the surface of the
photo conductor drum.
Sub step 2 Drum cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the photo conductor
drum after the intermediate transfer.
Sub step 3 Exposure before charging Removes the potential remains on the drum after the
drum cleaning.
Sub step 4 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the intermediate transfer
belt after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 2nd transfer belt cleaning Removes the adhered toner on the 2nd transfer belt
after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 6 Toner collection Collects the toner removed by the drum cleaning, the
intermediate transfer belt cleaning and the 2nd transfer
belt cleaning. (Not displayed in the following picture.)
Sub step 3
Sub step 2 Step 3
[14] Step 2
[13]
[1]
Sub step 4
Step 4
[2]
[3]
Sub step 1 [4]
Step 1
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
Step 6
[8]
Step 5
[7] [5]
Sub step 5
[6]
A1RFM0DC005CA
[1] Developing unit [2] Writing unit

[3] Charging corona [4] Erase lamp (EL)
[5] Blade (2nd transfer belt cleaning) [6] 2nd transfer roller /Lw
[7] 2nd transfer belt [8] Separation neutralizing section
[9] 2nd transfer roller /Up [10] Intermediate transfer belt
[11] Blade (drum cleaning) [12] Assist neutralizing section
D-7
[13] Blade (Intermediate transfer belt) [14] Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with gold coated tungsten wire, and charges the negative charge to the drum by
discharging of wire. The charging corona has the charger control plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
a03ut2c003ca
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)

[3] Charging corona [4] Charger control plate
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. With this
characteristic, creates an image on the photo conductor drum by exposing the laser beam to the image area. This image is called an
electrostatic latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of YMCK drum corresponds to the color data disassembled into 4 at the
image processing section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
a03ut2c004ca
[1] Writing unit [2] Laser beam

[3] Neutralized section [4] Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum and as a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)

[3] Developing roller -
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller provided on the back surface of the intermediate
transfer belt. This makes the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than that of the each drum surface so that the
toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D-8
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
a03ut2c006ca
[1] Drum /Y [2] 1st transfer roller /Y

[3] Intermediate transfer belt [4] Toner /Y
[5] Charge (negative) [6] Drum /M
[7] 1st transfer roller /M [8] Toner /M
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image composed of four colors on the intermediate transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer. At 2nd
transfer, the 2nd transfer belt on the 2nd transfer unit which is mounted on the bottom part of the intermediate transfer belt conveys the paper
while pressing it against the intermediate transfer belt. At this time, the 2nd transfer roller /Up on the back side of the intermediate transfer belt is
applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the electric field is produced between the 2nd transfer roller /Up and the 2nd transfer roller /Lw
mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the toner on the intermediate transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
A1RFM0DC006CA
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Paper

[3] 2nd transfer roller /Lw [4] 2nd transfer belt
[5] 2nd transfer unit [6] 2nd transfer roller /Up
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At 2nd transfer, the paper on which is being transferred is negatively charged by the 2nd transfer roller /Up. It causes the paper and the
intermediate transfer belt to attract each other and the paper is electrostatic absorbed with the intermediate transfer belt and conveyed.
D-9
Separation is performed by the gap of the curvature between the intermediate transfer belt and the 2nd transfer belt. Applying the high voltage
AC and DC bias to the discharge section neutralizes the charges of the paper and the 2nd transfer belt.
[1]
[2]
[5] [3]
[4] A1RFM0DC007CA
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Paper

[3] 2nd transfer roller /Lw [4] 2nd transfer belt
[5] Separation neutralizing section -
5.8 Auxiliary discharge (Sub step 1)

After the 1st transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The toner is negatively charged and it has the adsorptive property to the
drum surface. It makes removing of it from the drum difficult.
To lower its adsorptive property, the auxiliary discharge section neutralizes the charged potential of the toner. The auxiliary discharge section
also neutralizes the potential of the 1st-transferred toner on the intermediate transfer belt.
Auxiliary discharge is performed by applying the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the auxiliary discharge section. In this way the potential of
the intermediate transfer belt is neutralized.
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
[1] Drum [2] Remaining toner (neutralized)

[3] Auxiliary discharge section [4] Transferred toner (neutralized)
[5] Intermediate transfer belt [6] Transferred toner (negative)
[7] Remaining toner (negative) -
5.9 Drum cleaning (Sub step 2)

After the 1st transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum cleaning."
Drum cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2] a03ut2c009ca
[1] Drum [2] Cleaning blade
D-10
[3] Remaining toner -
5.10 Exposure before charging (Sub step 3)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is perfomed to neutralize the potential on
the drum surface completely. This process is reffered to as "exposure before charging."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3]
[2] a03ut2c010ca
[1] Drum [2] Erase lamp (EL)

[3] Remained electric charge -
5.11 Intermediate transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 4)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of toner remains on the Intermediate transfer belt. The process to remove that toner is referred to as
"intermediate transfer belt cleaning."
Intermediate transfer belt cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the intermediate transfer belt with the edge of the urethane
rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2]
a03ut2c011ca
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Remaining toner

[3] Cleaning blade -
5.12 2nd transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 5)

The 2nd transfer belt gets dirty because the toner on the intermediate transfer belt contacts it directly. The process to remove that toner is
referred to as "2nd transfer belt cleaning."
2nd transfer belt cleaning is conducted by scraping the toner adhering to the 2nd transfer belt surface with the edge of the urethane rubber plate
which is called blade.
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
A1RFM0DC009CA
[1] Intermediate transfer belt [2] Cleaning blade

[3] Toner [4] 2nd transfer belt
D-11
5.13 Toner collection (Sub step 6)

The toner removed at the drum cleaning section, the intermediate transfer belt cleaning section and the 2nd transfer belt cleaning section is
collected to the toner collection box via the toner collection screw.
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
A1RFM0DC010CA
[1] Drum /Y toner collection port [2] Drum /M toner collection port
[3] Drum /C toner collection port [4] Drum /K toner collection port
[5] 2nd transfer belt toner collection port [6] Toner collect box
[7] Intermediate transfer belt toner collection port -
D-12
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

• The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the
drum motor /K (M4) turns ON [1].
• After M4 turns ON, the drum motor /Y (M1) [2], /M (M2) [3], /C (M3) [4] turns ON in this order. The intermediate transfer belt motor (M9) and
the 2nd transfer belt motor (M40) turn ON after M4 turns ON.
• After M40 turns ON, the 2nd transfer bias turns ON.
• When the drum motors of all colors turn ON [4], the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor
(M41) turn ON.
• The timing to turn ON the erase lamp and the charging corona of each color is when each motor turns ON.
• The timing [6] to turn ON the developing bias of each color (DC) is when each charging corona turns ON [5].
• The timing [7] to turn ON the developing motor of each color depends on the time difference with the writing start timing [9] and has been
registered in advance.
• The timing to start the writing of each color (1st sheet) [9] is after the charging corona turns ON [5]. However, start timing of writing yellow as
the first writing turns ON at the same time [8] whichever completes later; the intermediate transfer pressure or the 2nd transfer pressure.
• The writing start timing [13] of after the 2nd paper is after a specified period of time from the writing start timing of the preceding paper.
These timings have been registered for each paper size in advance.
• The timing [10] [11] to turn ON the developing bias (AC) and the intermediate transfer of each color is based on the writing start timing (1st
sheet) [9] of each color.
• The timing to turn ON the assist neutralizing of each color is the same that to turn ON the intermediate transfer [11].
• The timing to turn ON the separation [12] is based on the writing start timing (1st sheet) [9] of yellow.
• The timing to turn ON the 2nd transfer [17] [20] is based on each writing start timing [9] [13] of yellow.
• The timing to turn OFF the developing bias (AC), the intermediate transfer, and the assist neutralizing of each color [15] [18] [19] is based
on the timing [14] to turn OFF the writing of the last paper.
• The timing to turn OFF the developing motor of each color [16] is based on the timing [15] to turn OFF the developing bias (AC) of each
color.
• After a specified period of time since the last paper passes the 2nd transfer/separation section, the separation charger unit is turned OFF
[21].
• Based on the OFF timing [21] of the separation charger unit, M11, M41 and the charging corona of all colors are turned OFF at the same
time.
• The timing to turn OFF the developing bias (DC) of each color [23] is based on the timing [22] to turn OFF the charging corona of each
color.
• When the intermediate transfer pressure release and the 2nd transfer pressure release are completed [24], the drum motor and the eraser
lamp of each color are turned OFF at the same time. After a specified period of time, M40 and M9 are also turned OFF [25] [26].
• The timing to turn OFF M40 is based on the timing to turn OFF the 2nd transfer bias.
D-13
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
[11] [14] [16] [19]

[1] [2] [3] [5] [6] [7] [9][10] [13] [15] [18] [22] [23]
Drum motor /Y (M1)

Developing motor /Y (M5)
Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
Charging /Y (HV/1-1)
Writing /Y (LDB/Y)
Developing bias /Y (DC) (HV/1-1)
Developing bias <$&+9
Intermediate Trans. /Y (HV/2)
Assist neutralizing /Y (HV/3)
Drum motor /M (M2)
Developing motor /M (M6)

Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
Charging /M (HV/1-1)
Writing /M (LDB/M)
Developing bias /M (DC) (HV/1-1)
Developing bias /M (AC) (HV/1-1)
Intermediate Trans. /M (HV/2)
Assist neutralizing /M (HV/3)
Drum motor /C (M3)
Developing motor /C (M7)
Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
Charging /C (HV/1-2)
Writing /C (LDB/C)
Developing bias /C (DC) (HV/1-2)
Developing bias /C (AC) (HV/1-2)
Intermediate Trans. /C (HV/2)
Assist neutralizing /C (HV/3)
Drum motor /K (M4)
Developing motor /K (M8)
Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
Charging /K (HV/1-2)
Writing /K (LDB/K)
Developing bias /K (DC) (HV/1-2)
Developing bias /K (AC) (HV/1-2)
Intermediate Trans. /K (HV/2)
Assist neutralizing /K (HV/3)
Intermediate transfer belt motor (M9)
2nd transfer belt motor (M40)
1st transfer pressure release motor (M11)
2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41)
2nd transfer
Separation (HV/4)
2nd transfer bias (HV/2)
[4] [8] [12] [17] [20] [21] [24] [25] [26]
A1RFM0DE011CA
[1] M4 ON [2] M1 ON
[3] M2 ON [4] M3 ON
[5] Charger /Y ON [6] Developing bias /Y (DC) ON
[7] M5 ON [8] Intermediate transfer pressure, 2nd transfer pressure
completed
[9] Writing /Y started (1st sheet) [10] Developing bias /Y (AC) ON
[11] Intermediate transfer /Y started, assist neutralizing /Y ON [12] Separation ON
[13] Writing /Y started (2nd sheet) [14] Writing /Y completed
[15] Developing bias /Y (AC) OFF [16] M5 OFF
[17] 2nd transfer started (1st sheet) [18] Intermediate transfer /Y completed
[19] Assist neutralizing /Y OFF [20] 2nd transfer started (2nd sheet)
[21] Separation OFF [22] Charger /Y OFF
[23] Developing bias /Y (DC) OFF [24] Intermediate transfer pressure release, 2nd transfer
pressure release completed
[25] M40 OFF [26] M9 OFF
D-14
bizhub PRESS C8000 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
Corresponding to the combination of the number of the stacked sheets and the environment temperature, this machine has 3 types of the
process speed.
Paper weight Environment temperature
19°C or more 18°C or less
64g/m2 to 80g/m2 400mm/s (1/1speed) 400mm/s (1/1speed)
D-15
bizhub PRESS C8000 E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C8000
E SERVICE TOOL
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
000V-16-0 Drum cleaner 200ml
Isopropyl alcohol
50gaf2c142na
000V-17-0 Roller cleaner 200ml

Acetone
50gaf2c142na
000V-19-0 Setting powder 25g
50gaf2c143na
A1RFPP0000 Setting toner 30g
000V-18-1 Cleaning pad 10pcs/1 pack
50gaf2c144na
65AA-9920 Hydro-wipe 10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR00260 Multemp FF-RM 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR00020 Plas guard No.2 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR00220 Molykote EM-30L 25g
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67## Magnalube-G Teflon Grease 0.75 oz
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
A1RFPJG4## Thermostat adjustment jig /E Quantity: 1
For main body
A1RJPJG0## Thermostat adjustment jig /A Quantity: 1

For main body and EF
A1RJPJG1## Thermostat adjustment jig /B Quantity: 1

For main body andEF
7050K0020 Optics unit positioning jig Quantity: 2
8050fs3011
E-1

00M6-2-00 Door switch jig Quantity: 1
8050fs3012
9J06PJP1## Color chart (A3) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
9J06PJP2## Color chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711# Adjustment chart Quantity: 1

For DF
8050fs3005
65AA-991# Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets/A3) Quantity: 1

For multi feed detection
8050fs3005
00VC-2-00 Drum cover Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-1000 Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
56UAPJG0## Multimeter Quantity: 1
8050fs3019
13QEJG010 Stapler positioning jig Quantity: 1

For FS-612
8050fs3022
A1RFRX00## Loading wagon Quantity: 1
A1RFRX01## Developer ejection jig Quantity: 1
- Management Tool Quantity: 1

Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
E-2

A1RFPJG1## RFID reader/writer Quantity: 1
Other than Europe
A0H2RX00## Trimmer unit support board Quantity: 1

For SD
1.3 Mail remote notification system

1.3.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body using the Internet mail
(E-mail).
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the main
body to receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
1.3.2 Operating environment

In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main body
does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
2. The copier has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is ON
• The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
• When the "Enhance Security Mode" is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
1.3.3 Major functions

Sending a mail with a simple keyword allows you to use the following functions.
1. The list print information of the main body you want to obtain can be received by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
• Mode Memory List
• User Management List
• Font Pattern List
• Machine Management List
• Adjustment Data List
• Use Management List
• Counter List
• Coverage Data List
• Parameter List
• Communication Log List
• Audit Log Report
2. The counter list can be checked by cell phone.
3. A password used for certification of mail can be changed.
4. Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by e-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For details of the command, refer to "E.1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system."
1.3.4 Initial setting

To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to "E.1.3.4.(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [03 Machine Manager Setting].
3. Press [05 Network Setting].
4. Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
E-3
Note
• No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
()<>;:“[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error massage. When
not correcting the error, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
E-4
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"
Setting item Details

Enable E-mail notification When using the mail remote notification system, select "ON." Default is "OFF."
Time difference The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For time difference setting,
enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to
+1200 (-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is set. (Example: In the case
of Japan, enter + 900.)
Sending mail Set the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number Set the port Number of the SMTP server. For default, 25 is set.
Sending mail (SMTP) server Set the time-out of the SMTP connection. Default is for 5 minutes.
time out
Interval between fetching mails The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) Taking into consideration
the load on the network, this is set at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server Set the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.
When using SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
Kind of mail spool Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP) Select "Enable default" when using 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When using other than the
port number default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server Enter an account name assigned to the main body by the receiving mail server.
Password Enter a password to the account name above.
E-mail Address for Machine Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
Address name@incoming mail server name."
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent from the main body. No entry
causes no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for security check.
Also Notice to the administrator • Not transfer: Default
• only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with the password
above, or when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
• all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
Administrator E-mail address When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when
mail a mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. Default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) before After authentication is made by the mail receiving server, a selection is made to decide whether to
SMTP Authentication send out the mail or not. For default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine POP poling option in machine busy state. For default, "Send" is selected.
is busy
Enable SMTP Authentication Input the User name and the password when using it. Default is "No."
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending/receiving test.
E-5
• Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
set in Step6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address
for Machine" set in Step6.
1.3.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command Option Description Minimum input
GETLOG Send back a mail with the information specified in the option. G
ModeMemory Send back [Mode Memory List] by mail. M
UserSetting Send back [User Management List] by mail. U
FontPattern Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail. F
Management Send back [Machine Management List] by mail. Ma
Adjustment Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail. A
UserManagement Send back [Use Management List] by mail. UseM
Counter Send back [Counter List] by mail. C
CoverageData Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail. Cov
CommunicationLog Send back [Communication Log List] by mail. Co
Audit Log Send back [Audit Log List] by mail. Au
ALL Send back all preceding items by mail. AL
Not specified Edit the [Counter List] to display it on cell phone and send
back.
CHPASS [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] Change a password to be used for certification of a mail. C
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating instructions of H
the not specified commands above.
1.3.6 Mail sending

A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input listed on the preceding table.
Note
• Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
• Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
• For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters displayed in a line.
• One or more spaces or TAB are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
• Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When any other
characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
• Start a command written in the mail from the line head with not space. When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the
line is ignored.
• The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
• Avoid attaching a file to a mail to send to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail as a
nuisance mail.
• Avoid adding a signature to a mail to send to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and send
back an error mail.
• In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail can
be sent back twice.
• The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
1.4 Job history list

1.4.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history displayed on the operation
panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is turned OFF. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the optional
hard disk unit (HD-514) so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 is turned OFF.
1.4.2 Major functions

The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
• Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
E-6
• Saving of the job history up to 1 million (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000, 500,000 or 1 million. Select 0 to turn
OFF the job history utility.)
• Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
• The contents displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
• The history data displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in HD-514. Therefore the
data is not stored in case the job is stopped, proof is output or jam is caused.
• Sending history of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved
• The history data is stored only in /P of HD-514. Therefore, if the hard disk of /P is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.4.3 Setting method

When using the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of job history are displayed. However by importing the customized setting file,
other items can be displayed. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the Support section of the
authorized distributor.
The following are the display items of job history in the initialization
• No
• Job Number
• Mode
• Date
(1) Setting from the touch panel

Set the IP address of the copier from the touch panel to connect the copier to the network.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "E.1.4.3.(2) Setting from the Web browser" .
(a) Procedure
1. Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
Note
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Input the setting on the web browser to import the setting file to the copier. In order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
(a) Procedure
• When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "E.1.4.3.(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
E-7

4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"9279272")
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
• When the copier is not in service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import/Export] is unavailable.

Click [Machine setting data Import/Export]
7. "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"

Click each symbol (A to J) displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting]
Note
• The setting file imported to A is displayed on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A is
recommended.

When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting
file.
E-8
Note
• The setting file does not need to be named [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.

Click [OK].

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
• To enable the setting data, turn the SW2 OFF and ON again and initialize the HDD-514.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body/options is completed. The imported setting files may not take
effect when accessing the Web Utility soon after the OFF/ON of SW2.

Click [Administrator Setting].
12. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier
Note
• They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance
13. "Administrator Setting screen"

Click [Job History List].
14. "Job History List screen"
Change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file to update the page.
Example
E-9
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
• In case the customized file is imported to "B".
15. "Job History List screen"

Click [JobHistory list].
Note
• This operation sets the customized item number in order.
• The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click.
(b) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the hard
disk HD-514 has malfunction and requires the replacement or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after conducting these processes, conduct the step4 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
Press the Start button to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" is displayed.
When “OK” appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after conducting these processes, the trouble of the HD-514 is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
• When replacing the HD-514, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" -
"HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has backed up data)
• The job history data is not restored by executing "HDD Restore/Backup."
1.5 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.5.1 Outline
By connecting the USB memory to the service port, the counter list information can be saved in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.5.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. Mode Memory List
3. User setting list
4. User setting list
5. Audit log report
6. Machine Management List
7. Adjustment Data List
8. Coverage data list
9. Maintenance History
Note
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
• When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History and the RFID Information List.
1.5.3 Acquisition method

(1) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
E-10
Note
• Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If the USB memory is removed while the message is displayed, the file cannot be saved properly.
• ORU-M Maintenance History and RFID Information List are output to the file only when DIPSW15-0 is ON.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name

The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No. Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA1RF001123456_20100107_1010.txt
1.6 Panel log

1.6.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW) is turned OFF. However when "I.5.15 Log
Store" in the service mode is set to "ON", the log is stored in the optional hard disk unit (HD-514) or the USB memory at the time SC occurs. At
this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
• Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
• Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
• Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
• In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
• The log data is stored only in /A of HD-514. Therefore, if the /A of the hard disk is damaged, the data does not recover.
1.6.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
• Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
• HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 7 panel log items are displayed.
E-11
• No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

• scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
• kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
• detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
• mean: Key type pressed
• time: Time it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
• File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer to I.5.15 Log Store.
Note
• The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.7 Management Tool

1.7.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment

The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later versions)
Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later versions)
CPU Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk space 100MB or more
Memory space Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6.0 (Service Pack 1 or later versions)
Library Windows 2000 & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0
Windows XP & Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)
Display At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more
16 bits color or more
E-12
Applicable machine bizhub PRESS C8000
(2) RFID tag reader/writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader/writer for reading and writing the PFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader/writer.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
• "TWN3" (Elatec Corporation)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader-writer needs to be installed to the computer beforehand.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
TmRfid USB driver
• "TWN3" (Elatec Corporation)
TWN Serial Port driver
• The following shows the setting the port of the TWN Serial Port driver.
Item Value
bit/sec 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control None
(3) Main functions

The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
• Reading/writing RFID tag of unit
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
• Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
• Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log when replacing in the CSV format file.
• Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log when replacing.
E-13
• Association of the user information and the device

The user information can be associated with the device.
• Export/Import
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
• Unit Serial Number Setting
When replacing the tag due to the breakage, new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
• Log in mode
To use the Management Tool, login is required.
2 modes are provided for log in; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode."
[Administrator mode]
Mode when log in as administrator.
[Technician mode]
Mode when log in as technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.
No. Function name Administrator mode Technician mode
1 Replacement work No Yes
2 Work log Yes Yes
3 Register user Yes Yes
4 Register technician Yes No
5 SetPersonal No Yes
6 Administrator Setting Yes No
7 Unit Serial Number Setting No Yes
8 Version Yes Yes
Yes: operable, No: inoperable
1.7.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install the Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
• Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
• If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
• Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2)" has been installed on the computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
• Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
E-14
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed

Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
• Program
• Readme
• Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
• Shortcut of program
Note
• The "Readme" of the Start menu can be set not to be installed.
• Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
• Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
• Use "Add or Remove Programs" ("Add/Remove Programs" for Windows2000).
• Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
• The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
• When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
1.7.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
• Start from the Start menu of Windows
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" ("Programs" for Windows2000) - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management
Tool."
• Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
• Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when installing.
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode and enter the required information to log in.
E-15
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been set right after the installation. Set the administrator password when the password setting screen
appears after clicking [OK] button.
E-16
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name] and enter the required information to log in.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(4) Image setting)
• When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering technician, refer to E.1.7.5.(2) Register technician.
E-17
(3) Operation screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] Menu bar [2] Navigation

[3] Operation area [4] Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.7.6 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
[1] [2]
[1] Path [2] Image

• Path
The transition of screens from the top screen is displayed as the path.
• Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user is displayed.
4. Operation area
The operation panel based on the purpose is displayed.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
• Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
• Select [Exit] from [File] menu
• Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
• Shut down or log off the computer
1.7.4 Technician mode

The operation procedures when logging in as an registered technician is described below.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(2) Replacement work)
E-18
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

• To perform unit parts replacement, click "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(2) Replacement work)
• To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(3) Work log)
• To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(4) Register user)
• To change the password or edit the memo, click "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(5) Set Personal)
Note
• The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work

Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Procedures of the replacement work

1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Or select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. When the unit read screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E-19
3. When read successfully, the unit information screen is displayed.

The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
4. Select the parts to reset the counted value from the unit information read.
E-20
Note
• When selecting the intermediate transfer belt of the intermediate transfer unit, the intermediate transfer belt information
screen is displayed.
Be sure to input the reflectance value which is written on the belt.
5. Click "Reset count".

When the count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
E-21
6. When count reset is done successfully, the unit information screen is updated.
7. When canceling the count reset, Click "Undo reset count."

When the canceling count reset screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader. The count information returns to the
condition when it was read.
E-22
8. To read information of another unit, click "Read another."

Allow R Return to step 2.
Note
• Information of up to 10 units can be read at a time of each replacement work.
When reading information of more than 10 units, exit the replacement work once and select "Replacement work " on the
top screen again.
• While in replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
(b) Associating customers

When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When not set, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
• Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
• Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
E-23
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
• For details on user registration, refer to E.1.7.4.(4) Register user.
(c) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location to store the file.
E-24
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.7.6.(6) Export CSV.
(d) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.7.6.(7) Print Report.
(3) Work log

The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Or select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
• To display the work log by selecting the user, click "Select user."
Proceed to step 3.
• To display the work log by selecting the technician, click "Select technician."
Proceed to step 4.
• To display all the work log, click "All."
Proceed to step 5.
E-25
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
Select the user to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
E-26
Select the technician to check the work log, and click "OK."
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
Select the work log information to check its detail, export as CSV or print report.
E-27
For the display filter, the displayed contents differs depending on the display method selected on the work log reference method in step
2.
When selecting "Select user":
When selecting "Select technician":
Note
• The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the work log list. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the work log list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer to
E.1.7.6.(5) Set list view)
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(6) Export CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information

The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user to be associated or edit the work information memo.
E-28
Import
• Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(6) Export CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.7.6.(7) Print Report)
• For details on user association, refer to E.1.7.4.(2).(b) Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file to import.
E-29
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password set on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
• Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
• The work log information already exists is not imported.
• The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
• The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However it happens that the work log information is
overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
E-30
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Set the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
• The password set on the export file is required when importing it.
• The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user

Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list

Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
E-31
Note
• The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the user information list. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the user information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.7.6.(5) Set list view)
(b) New resister

Register the user information.
E-32
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
4. Select "Type of business."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
• Enter "User code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User ID." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User office location name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "User office location code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact person name." Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "Contact person ID no." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact telephone." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add." Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list."
Select and click the serial number to delete from "Machine list".
• Enter "Remark."
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
• Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when reading unit information while in the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For entering each items, refer to E.1.7.4.(4).(b) New resister."
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file to import.
E-33
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
• The user information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
E-34
The export of the user information starts.

Note
• The fie format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) Set Personal

Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change

1. Click "Password change."
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
E-35
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
(6) Unit Serial Number Setting

The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
• When replacing the RFID tag because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized by the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write."
E-36
Note
• Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When writing is completed, the result screen is displayed.
E-37
1.7.5 Administrator mode

Set the required information of the Management Tool.
E-38
(1) Top screen
When logging in successfully, the top screen is displayed.

• To check the work log, click "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(3) Work log)
• To register the customer information, click "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(4) Register user)
• To register a technician, click "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(2) Register technician)
• To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(3) Administrator Setting)
(2) Register technician

Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list

Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Or select "RegisterTech" in "Tool" menu.
E-39
Note
• The items can be sorted in descending/ascending order by clicking the item name of the technician information list. The mark
▲ indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the technician information list screen, the items to be displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.7.6.(5) Set list view)
(b) New registration

Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
E-40
1. Enter "Technician name."

2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if necessary.
• Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• "Generate a password"
By clicking "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to set the password automatically generated to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)." Click "Copy" to
copy the password automatically generated to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
Note
• Registration No. is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
E-41
1. Edit the items to be changed.

• Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file to import.
E-42
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
• The technician information already exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
E-43
The export of the technician information starts.

Note
• The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(3) Administrator Setting

Change the administrator password.
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is set.
Note
1.7.6 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
• Work log
Select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool. (Refer to E.
1.7.4.(3).(c) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
Select "User information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the user information which has been exported with the Management
Tool. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(4).(d) Import)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Import" in the "File" menu to load the technician information which has been exported with the
Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(2).(d) Import)
Note
• This menu is displayed when logging in as an administrator.
• It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
E-44
(b) Export
• Work log
Select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective work log as a file. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(3).(d) Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
Select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(4).(e)
Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
Select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu to store the collective user information as a file. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(2).(e)
Export)
Note
• It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu

The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work

Select "Replacement work" in "Tool" menu to perform unit parts replacement. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(2) Replacement work)
Note
• This menu is displayed when logging in to the technician mode.
(b) Work log

Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(3) Work log)
(c) Register user

Select "Register user" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete user information. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(4) Register user)
(d) SetPersonal
Select "Set personal info" in "Tool" menu to change the password of login technician or edit comments. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(5) Set Personal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu to write the unit serial number in the RFID tag. (Refer to E.1.7.4.(6) Unit Serial Number
Setting
Note
(f) Register technician

Select "Register technician" in "Tool" menu to check, register, edit, or delete technician information. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(2) Register
technician)
Note
(g) Administrator Setting

Select "Administrator Setting" in "Tool" menu to change the password of administrator. (Refer to E.1.7.5.(3) Administrator Setting)
Note
(3) Help menu

(a) Version
Select "Version" in the "Help" menu to display version information of the Management Tool.
Note
• The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to: E.1.7.6.(4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting

(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
E-45
Supported file type GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG

Image size Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method Custom image to be displayed is enlarged or reduced to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location (Install directory)\Images
Remark When a file exists, a custom image is displayed. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.
*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image shown above is displayed.
(b) Log in screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
File Name Login.(extension*2)
(c) Top screen

"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). An image to be
displayed here can be customized by users.
E-46
Item Description
File Name Version.(extension*2)
*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. The image is displayed by enlarged or reduced in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
An image to be displayed here can be customized by users.
Item Description
E-47
File Name Version.(extension*2)
(5) Set list view

The items to be displayed and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen is displayed.
The items to be displayed differs among screens.
The figure below is the work log set list view screen.
3. Set show/hide of items by checking in the list.

• Items with check are displayed.
• The setting can be changed by clicking [Show]/[Hide] on the right of the screen.
4. Set other conditions if necessary.
• Selected column width: Specify the display width by entering desired value. It can be specified by 0 to 999.
• [Top] :Item display order is moved to top.
• [Bottom] :Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV

The format of the CSV file exported by the Management Tool is as follows.
Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No Item Description
1 User name The user name associated to replacement work is exported.
2 Type of business (user) The type of business associated to replacement work is exported.
3 User code The user code associated to replacement work is exported.
4 User ID The user ID associated to replacement work is exported.
E-48
5 User office location name (user) The user office location name associated to replacement work is exported.
6 User office location code (user) The user office location code associated to replacement work is exported.
7 Contact person name (user) The contact person name associated to replacement work is exported.
8 Contact person ID no. (user) The contact person ID no. associated to replacement work is exported.
9 Contact telephone (user) The contact telephone associated to replacement work is exported.
10 Technician name The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11 Technician code The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12 Country (technician) The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is
13 Company name (technician)
exported.
The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is
14 Company code (technician)
exported.
The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
15 Service office name (technician)
exported.
The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
16 Service office code (technician)
exported.
17 Main Body Serial Number The serial number of the main body is exported.
18 Unit type The unit type is exported.
19 Unit Serial Number The serial number of the unit is exported.
20 Times of replacement The number of times of unit replacement is exported.
21 Unit removal date The date of unit removal is exported.
22 Count read date The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
23 Count reset date The date when the count is reset is exported.
24 The last undo reset date The last date when undoing reset is exported.
25 Number of parts The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)
26 No Assigned from 1 automatically.
27 Replacement The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
28 Parts name The parts name is exported.
29 Parts Number The parts number is exported.
30 Q’ty The quantity of parts is exported.
31 Count The count value of parts is exported.
32 Life cycle The life cycle value of parts is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
33 Supplement 1 transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
34 Supplement 2 transfer belt" with count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Print Report
• Break character is "," (comma).
• Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
• When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
File format
The header (item name) is created on first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
E-49
1st row Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row Replacement work 2 - part (2)

4th row Replacement work 3 - part (3) N of replaced parts
per replacement work
5th row Replacement work 4 - part (4)
(7) Print Report

Details on the replacement work can be printed as replacement report.
E-50
Print layout
1.7.7 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
E-51
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code Countermeasures
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008, Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367,
2500-2509, 2516, 2517, 2520-2523,
3000-3006, 3008-3014, 3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 5001-5010, 5200-5208 Check the RFID tag and retry.
Note
• When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/writer
from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management Tool.
• When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
2400, 5100-5106 Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868, Reinstall the Management Tool.
2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633, 2636-2644,
3000-3006
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221, The file is not supported.
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359
100 Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404, 5102, Reboot the Management Tool.
5201
2510-2515 Check the printing environment.
E-52
bizhub PRESS C8000 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 bizhub PRESS C8000
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub
PRESS C8000.
1.1.2 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 150,000 prints)

No. Unit classification Description Quan Implementation classification Materials
tity Cleani Check Lubric Repla Tools used
ng ation ce
1 Charging section Charging corona /Y 1 ● ● Actual replacement cycle: 70
A1RFR701## hours charging
Charging corona /M 1 ● ● Execute the cleaning when it is
A1RFR701## dirty.
Charging corona /C 1 ● ●
A1RFR701##
Charging corona /K 1 ● ●
A1RFR701##
2 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 1 ●
section 65AAR756##
Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 ● 150,000 prints or the
A1RFR7F1## intermediate transfer belt drive
distance 93km, whichever is
earlier
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr 1 ● Replace at the same time as the
A1RF5112## transfer belt cleaning blade
Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr 1 ● Replace at the same time as the
A1RF5116## transfer belt cleaning blade
3 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer cleaning unit 1 ● 150,000 prints or the 2nd
A1RFR714## transfer belt drive distance
78km, whichever is earlier
Setting toner
2nd Transfer processing blade assy 1 ●
A1RFR7F8##
2nd transfer cleaning brush 1 ●
A1RF5328##
Suction guide plate ● Hydro-wipe

ng ation ce
1 Preparation Image check ●
2 External section Ozone filter 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
A1RF1144## Changes depending on the
Dust-proof filter /A (right) 1 ● coverage, developing roller drive
A1RFR702## distance, and humidity.
Dust-proof filter /B (back) 1 ●
A1RFR745##
Dust-proof filter /C (left) 1 ●
A1RFR744##
Dust-proof filter /C (rear 1) 1 ●
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
A1RFR744##
3 Write section Dust-proof glass /Y ● Hydro-wipe
Dust-proof glass /M ●
Dust-proof glass /C ●
Dust-proof glass /K ●
F-1
4 Photo conductor Drum unit /Y 1 ● 300,000 prints or the drum drive

section A1RFA330## distance 160km, whichever is
Drum unit /M 1 ● earlier
A1RFA330##
Drum unit /C 1 ●
A1RFA330##
Drum unit /K 1 ●
A1RFA330##
5 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt 1 ●
section A1RF5001##
Intermediate transfer belt drive roller ● Hydro-wipe /isopropyl alcohol
A1RF5005##
IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/1) ● Blower brush
Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol
IDC sensor /Rr (IDCS/2) ● Blower brush
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS83) ● Blower brush
Color registration sensor /Md (PS84) ● Blower brush
Color registration sensor /Rr (PS85) ● Blower brush
Sensor shutter 1 ● ● Blower brush
A1RFR7F7## Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol
1st transfer roller /Y 1 ●
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /M 1 ●
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /C 1 ●
A03U5012##
1st transfer roller /K 1 ●
A03U5004##
2nd transfer roller /Up 1 ●
A1RF5004##
6 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer unit ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
2nd transfer belt 1 ● Setting toner
A1RF5204##
2nd transfer separation discharging 1 ●
unit
A1RFR705##
7 Duplex section ADU conveyance rollers ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
ADU reverse cleaning assy ●
8 Developing section Developer /Y 1 ● 300,000 prints or the developing
A1DYT700## roller drive distance 196km,
Developer /M 1 ● whichever is earlier
A1DYT800##
Developer /C 1 ●
A1DYT900##
Developer /K 1 ●
A1DYT600##
Developing unit /Y ● Hydro-wipe /isopropyl alcohol
Developing unit /M ●
Developing unit /C ●
Developing unit /K ●
9 Toner supply section Developing cooling filter /Y 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing cooling filter /M 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing cooling filter /C 1 ●
A1RFR703##
Developing cooling filter /K 1 ●
A1RFR703##
10 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber ● Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol
Separation roller rubber ●
Pick-up roller ●
F-2
11 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance rollers ● Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol

section
12 Paper exit section Switching gate ● Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol
Paper exit guide ●
13 Fusing section Fusing exit driven roller ● Cleaning pad /isopropyl alcohol
14 Final check Check of the image and the paper ●
through
(including each adjustment)
Maintenance counter reset (Service ●
Mode)

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 1) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
25SA4096## 125,000 feeds
Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 2) 1 ●
25SA4096##
Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 3) 1 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber (Tray 1) 1 ●
25SA4096##
25SA4096##
25SA4096##
2 Fusing section Fusing web unit 1 ● Replace it once for every
A1RFR707## 450,000 prints or the fusing web
drive time 35,300 seconds,
whichever is earlier.
Fusing external heating unit 1 ●
A1RFR708##
Fusing swing shaft assy 1 ●
A1RFR709##
Fusing paper exit guide assy 1 ●
A1RFR710##
Fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy 1 ●
A1RFR7H1##
Fusing belt unit /Lw 1 ● Multemp FF-RM
A1RFR711##
Fusing pressure arm /Fr ●
Fusing pressure arm /Rr ●
Fusing roller assy 1 ●
A1RFR712##
Fusing claw unit 1 ●
A1RFR713##

ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer Belt Separation Claw 3 ●
section 65AAR753##
2 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer entrance guide /Up 1 ●
A1RFR729##
2nd transfer belt unit 1 ●
A1RFR715##
3 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet 1 ● ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
A1RFR716##
Loop roller cleaning assy 1 ● ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
A1RFR7F3##
F-3

ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit 1 ●
section A1RFR717##
2 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance roller 1 ●
cleaning stay
A1RFR718##
Intermediate conveyance roller 1 ●
cleaning brush
A1RFR7G4##
3 Fusing section Fusing web torque limiter 1 ●
A1RF7239##
Fusing web prevention part 1 ●
A1RF7240##
1.1.7 Periodic maintenance 6 (Every 1,200,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer ground plate /1 1 ●
A1RFR719##
2nd transfer ground plate /2 1 ●
A1RFR720##
2 Developing section Developing unit /Y 1 ● Replace it once for every
A1RFR727## 1,200,000 prints or the
Developing unit /M 1 ● developing roller drive distance
A1RFR727## 784km, whichever is earier
Developing unit /C 1 ●
A1RFR727##
Developing unit /K 1 ●
A1RFR727##
3 Duplex section De-curler roller 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
A1RF8605## 600,000 feeds

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller /Lw 1 ●
A1RF7517##
Fusing refresh roller assy 1 ●
A1RFR721##

ng ation ce
1 Registration section Registration roller assy 1 ●
65LAR707##
2 Duplex section ADU conveyance roller cleaning 3 ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
material /A
ADU conveyance roller cleaning 2 ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
material /B

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing drive assy 1 ●
A1RFR7F2##
F-4

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick up roller (Tray 1) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
56AAR721## 800,000 feeds
Pick up roller (Tray2) 1 ●
56AAR721##
Pick up roller (Tray3) 1 ●
56AAR721##

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Fusing temperature sensor assy 1 ●
(lower belt)
A1RFR731##
Fusing Temp. Sensor(fusing roller) 1 ●
A1RFR734##
Fusing heater/1 1 ●
A1RFM31A## (Japan)
A1RFM31E## (North America)
A1RFM31F## (Europe)
A1RFM34A## (Japan)
A1RFM34F## (Europe)
A1RFM35A## (Japan)
A1RFM35F## (Europe)
Fusing actuator 1 ●
A1RFR732##

ng ation ce
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid (SD7) 1 ●
section A1RFR748##
Transfer roller bearing 8 ●
65AA2638##
2 Duplex section ADU conveyance roller cleaning 3 ● Actual replacement cycle: Every
material /A 1,500,000 prints
A1RFR7F5##
ADU conveyance roller cleaning 2 ● Actual replacement cycle: Every
material /B 1,500,000 prints
A1RFR7F6##
ADU reverse cleaning assy 1 ● Actual replacement cycle: Every
A1RFR7F4## 1,500,000 prints
3 Paper exit section Main body paper exit driven roller 1 ●
A1RF8950##
Exit conveyance driven roller 1 ●
A1RF8950##

ng ation ce
1 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 2 ●
(CL14), /2 (CL15)
A03UM201##
F-5

ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch /2 (CL21) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section A03UM201## 3,600,000 feeds

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch /1 (CL1), /2 3 ● Actual replacement cycle:
(CL3), /3 (CL5) 2,000,000 feeds
56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL2), /2 3 ●
(CL4), /3 (CL6)
56AA8201##

ng ation ce
1 Duplex section ADU conveyance clutch /1 (CL7), /2 7 ● Actual replacement cycle:
(CL8), /3 (CL9), /4 (CL10), /5 3,600,000 feeds
(CL11), /6 (CL12), /7 (CL13)
A03UM201##

ng ation ce
1 Fusing section Web motor 1 ●
A1RFR735##

ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL20) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section A03UM201## 3,600,000 feeds
1.2 DF-622
1.2.1 Spotted replacement (Every 625,000 feeds)
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ●
13YH4064##
Paper feed roller 1 ●
13YH4039##
Separation roller 1 ●
20AJ4015##
1.3 PF-704/705 (1st tandem)

ng ation ce
1 Scanner section Scanner unit (glass, mirror) (PF-705 (●) Blower brush/cleaning pad/
only) isopropyl alcohol
F-6
2 Tandem conveyance Each roller ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol

section
3 Vertical conveyance Each roller ●
section
4 Horizontal Each roller ●
conveyance section

ng ation ce
1 Horizontal Pre-registration clutch (CL7) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
conveyance section 56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 2 ●
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
56AA8201##

ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch /3 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section (CL5), /4 (CL6) 2,000,000 feeds

ng ation ce
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch /1 5 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 2,000,000 feeds
(CL13), /5 (CL14) Be sure to replace only the 1st
56AA8201## tandem of the coupling It does
not need the replacement when
using just 1 PF.

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch /1 (CL15), /2 3 ● Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Exit clutch /1 (CL1), vertical 3 ●
section conveyance clutch /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4)
56AA8201##
3 Paper feed tray Exit clutch /2 (CL2) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
4 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing 2 ●
conveyance section A03U8128##
Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A1RG7160##
Loop roller /Up 1 ●
A1RG7161##
1.3.6 Spotted replacement (Every 6,000,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing /Lw 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section A03U8128## 6,000,000 feeds
Loop roller /Lw 1 ●
A1RG6075##
F-7
1.4 PF-704 (2nd tandem)

ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Each roller ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
section
2 Horizontal Each roller ●
conveyance section

ng ation ce
1 Horizontal Pre-registration clutch (CL7) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
conveyance section 56AA8201## 2,000,000 feeds
Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 2 ●
(CL8), /2 (CL9)
56AA8201##

ng ation ce
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch /3 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch /1 (CL15), /2 3 ● Actual replacement cycle:
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Exit clutch /1 (CL1), vertical 3 ●
section conveyance clutch /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4)
56AA8201##
3 Paper feed tray Exit clutch /2 (CL2) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
4 Horizontal Pre-registration bearing 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:
conveyance section A03U8128## 6,000,000 feeds
Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A1RG7160##
Loop roller /Up 1 ●
A1RG7161##

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller bearing /Lw 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:
section A03U8128## 6,000,000 feeds
Loop roller /Lw 1 ●
A1RG6075##
1.5 EF-101
ng ation ce
1 2nd fusing section Fusing exit driven roller ● Cleaning pad/isopropyl alcohol
2 Conveyance section De-curler driven roller ●
F-8
2nd fusing drawer entrance guide ●

Conveyance guide plate ●

ng ation ce
1 2nd fusing section 2nd fusing heating roller 2 ● Actual replacement cycle:
A03U7201## 450,000 feeds
2nd fusing Belt 2 ● Multemp FF-RM
A03U7205 ##
2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve 4 ●
A03U7250##
2nd fusing insulating sleeve 4 ●
A03U7295##
2nd fusing heating roller bearing 4 ●
A03U8078##
2nd fusing roller /Lw 1 ●
A1RJ7201##
2nd fusing roller /Up 1 ●
A1RJ7202##
2nd fusing roller bearing 4 ●
A1RJ7212##

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance 2nd fusing decurler roller 1 ●
A1RJ8152##

ng ation ce
1 2nd fusing 2nd fusing idler gear/3 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
A1RJ8096## 1,350,000 feeds

ng ation ce
1 2nd fusing section 2nd fusing heater 2 ●
A1RJM31A## (Japan)
A1RJM31E## (North America)
A1RJM31F## (Europe)
2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/ 1 ●
Up
A1RJR712##
2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/ 1 ●
Lw
A1RJR716##

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section 2nd fusing drawer entrance guide 1 ●
A1RJR717##
2 Paper exit section 2nd fusing exit roller/Up 1 ●
A1RJ8973##
F-9
1.6 RU-508/HM-101
ng ation ce
1 Entrance Entrance sensor ● Blower brush
conveyance section De-curler entrance sensor ●
Entrance conveyance roller /1 ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller /2 ●
Entrance conveyance roller /1 guide ●
PET (upper)
Entrance conveyance roller /2 guide ●
PET
Entrance guide plate /Lw corner ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad/
section cotton swab
Entrance guide plate 2 /Lt ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
2 Output paper density Color density detection timing sensor ● Blower brush
detection section
3 Reverse/exit section Reverse paper exit gate previous ●
sensor
Paper exit sensor ●
4 HM-101 Humidification section entrance ●
sensor
Humidification section conveyance ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
roller
Water feed roller ●
Humidification roller /Rt 1 ● ●
A1TU5001##
Humidification roller /Lt 1 ● ●
A1TU5002##
Control roller ●

ng ation ce
1 Output paper density Shutter ● Blower brush
detection section

ng ation ce
1 Entrance Entrance conveyance driven roller /1 1 ●
conveyance section A1TT7141##
Entrance conveyance driven roller /2 1 ●
A1TT7111##
1.6.4 Spotted replacement (Every 300,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 HM-101 Water feed filter 1 ●
A1TU5215##

ng ation ce
1 HM-101 Water feed roller 2 ●
A1TU5003##
F-10
1.7 FS-521
ng ation ce
1 Preparation Original through check ●
Removing from the main body
Removing the rear cover
2 Main tray section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
3 Stacker section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of the paper dust removing ● Vacuum cleaner/blower brush
brush
5 Post-process Installing the rear cover
Installing to the main body
6 Final check Original through check ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Bypass roller /Lw pressure release 2 ● Molykote EM-30L
cam
2 Stacker section Worm gear, cam 1 ● Molykote EM-30L
1.7.3 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 operations)

ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Stapler unit /Fr 1 ●
A0GYA735##
Stapler unit /Rr 1 ●
A0GYA736##

ng ation ce
1 Main tray section Paper exit roller /A 8 ●
122H4825##
1.7.5 Spotted replacement (Every 5,400,000 operations)

ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Intermediate roller release solenoid 1 ●
(SD7)
15AAR718##
2 Main tray section Paper exit opening solenoid assy 1 ●
(SD9)
A0GYB904##
1.8 FS-612
ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor ●
Paper exit opening motor ●
Bypass gate solenoid ●
F-11
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller ●

(sponge roller)
3 Folding section Folding knife motor ●
Tri-folding gate solenoid ●

ng ation ce
1 Main tray section Paper exit roller /A 6 ●
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller /B 4 ●
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
Intermediate conveyance roller 4 ●
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##

ng ation ce
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1 ●
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
1.8.4 Spotted replacement (Every 200,000 staples)

ng ation ce
1 Stapler section Stapler unit /Fr 1 ●
15JM-501##
Stapler unit /Rr 1 ●
15JM-501##
1.9 PI-502
ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Paper feed roller ●
Separation roller ●

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller 2 ●
13QNR705##
13QNR704##

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ●
50BAR701##
F-12

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter 2 ●
13QN4073##
1.9.5 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 feeds)

ng ation ce
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch /Up 1 ●
13QN8201##
Paper feed clutch /Lw 1 ●
13QN8201##
1.10 LS-505
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
15AV8255## 5,000,000 feeds
Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) 1 ●
15AV8252##
Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) 1 ●
15AV8251##
Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 1 ●
15AV8253##
Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 1 ●
15AV8003##
1.11 FD-503
ng ation ce
Removing the punch unit
Removing from RU
2 Punch section Punch shaft and the punch support ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
board
Punch drive section ● Molykote EM-30L
3 Post-process Installing the punch unit
Installing to RU

ng ation ce
F-13
1 PI section Cleaning of each sensor ●

2 Tray up/down Cleaning of each sensor ●
section
3 Punch section Cleaning of each sensor ●
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ●
5 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
1.11.4 Spotted replacement (100,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 ●
50BAR702##
Separation rubber 2 ●
13QNR704##

ng ation ce
1 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 ●
50BAR701##

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Punch unit 1 ●
A0H0R700## (Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702## (Europe)
2 Conveyance section Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) 1 ●
15AGR723##
Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) 1 ●
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 1 ●
15AGR761##
3 Tray up/down Tray up down motor 1 ●
section 129U-108##
1.12 SD-506
ng ation ce
Removing the rear cover
Removing the unit
2 Right angle Right angle conveyance sensor /1 ● Blower brush
conveyance section Right angle conveyance sensor /2 ●
Right angle conveyance roller /1 ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
F-14
Right angle conveyance roller /2 ●

3 Folding section Folding main scan alignment home ● Blower brush
sensor /Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home ●
sensor /Fr2
Folding entrance roller /1 ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Folding entrance roller /2 ●
Folding entrance roller /3 ●
4 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching paper sensor ● Blower brush
section Bundle sensor /1 ●
5 Bundle processing Bundle sensor /2 ●
section
6 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps full sensor ●
Actuator ●
7 Post-process Installing the unit ●
Installing the rear cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Paper holding screw 2 ● ● Molykote EM-30L
A0H26621## Actual lubrication cycle:37,500
cuts
1.12.3 Spotted replacement (Every 18,900 cuts)

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy 1 ● Actual replacement cycle:
A0H2B622# 18,900 cuts

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade kit 1 ● ●
A0H2R901##

ng ation ce
1 Trimmer section Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##
1.12.6 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 times)

ng ation ce
1 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 1 ●
section 15AN7719##

ng ation ce
F-15
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●

A0H2M102##
1.12.8 Spotted replacement (Every 1,000,000 sets)

ng ation ce
1 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 2 ●
section 15AN-550##

ng ation ce
1 Right angle Saddle stitch unit 1 ●
conveyance section A0H2A720##
Slope unit 1 ●
15AN-500##
Bundle press stage unit 1 ●
A0H2A530##
2 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A0H2A620##

ng ation ce
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) 1 ●
conveyance section 15AN8251##
Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) 1 ●
15ANR710##
Right angle conveyance gate 1 ●
solenoid (SD2)
15ANR711##
2 Folding section Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) 1 ●
15AN8251##
1.13 PB-503
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Entrance sensor ● Blower brush
SC entrance sensor ●
Sub tray conveyance roller ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Intermediate conveyance roller ●
Entrance conveyance roller ●
Cover paper conveyance roller ●
3 Glue tank section Glue tank ● ●*1 Tweezers, cleaning pad,
Multemp FF-RM
4 Up/down forming Cover paper folding plate ●*2 Tweezers, cleaning pad
section
Book spine backing plate ●*2
Book exit belt /Rr ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Book exit belt /Fr ●
Cover paper conveyance roller /Rt ●
Cover paper conveyance roller /Ft ●
Cover paper table entrance roller ●
Paper dust removing brush ● Blower brush
Cover paper alignment plate shaft ●*3 Plas guard No.2
F-16
5 Glue supply section Pellet hopper ● Blower brush

6 Book stock section Book load limit sensor ●
Book upper limit LED ●
Booklet sensor /1, /2 ●
Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt ●*4 Plas guard No.2
Book conveyance belt /Rr ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Book conveyance belt /Fr ●
Book movement belt ●
7 Cover paper tray Paper dust removing brush ● Blower brush
section Paper dust removing roller ●
Conveyance roller ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
8 SC section Switchback assist roller /Rr ●
Switchback assist roller /Fr ●
Sub scan alignment plate slide shaft ●
9 Clamp section Paper reference plate ●
Clamp pressure plate shaft 1 ●*5 Plas guard No.2
10 Relay conveyance Relay conveyance roller /1, /2, /3, / ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section 4, /5
Relay paper exit roller /1, /2 ●
Relay conveyance entrance sensor ● Blower brush
Relay conveyance intermediate ●
sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor ●
11 Book stock section Book movement belt /2 ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
*1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.
*2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as necessary.
*3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*4 Lubricate to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
*5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.

ng ation ce
1 Cutter section Roller cutter blade assy 1 ●
A0756230##

ng ation ce
1 SC section SC switchback release motor (M13) 1 ●
A0V9M101##
2 Sub tray section Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 1 ●
15ANR714##

ng ation ce
1 SC section FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 1 ●
15AA8251##
SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) 1 ●
A075B746##

ng ation ce
1 SC section One-way clutch /A 1 ●
F-17
13GQ7709##
One-way clutch /B 1 ●
13GQ7709##

ng ation ce
1 Cover paper tray Pick-up roller 1 ●
section 55VAR750##
Paper feed roller 1 ●
55VAR749##
55VAR749##

ng ation ce
1 SC section Switchback roller 1 ●
13GQ4519##

ng ation ce
1 Cover paper tray Cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
2 Cover paper separation clutch 1 ●
(CL72)
56AA8201##
1.13.9 Spotted replacement (Every 120 hours)

ng ation ce
1 Fan unit section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 1 ●
27LA8051##
2 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter /A 1 ●
A15X3017##

ng ation ce
1 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter /B 1 ●
A15X3018##

ng ation ce
1 Glue tank section Glue tank assy 1 ●
A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)

ng ation ce
F-18
1 Glue tank section Glue apply roller drive gear bearing 4 ●

A0753799##
1.14 RU-506
1.14.1 Maintenance 1 (Every 600,000 prints)
ng ation ce
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
Cleaning of the cover ● Drum cleaner/cleaning pad

ng ation ce
1 Conveyance section Straight gate solenoid (SD1) 1 ●
A0GER709##
Straight gate spring 1 ●
15AG4587##
2 Stacker section Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) 1 ●
A0GER700##
Stack switching solenoid (SD3) 1 ●
A0GER701##
Stacker entrance guide plate 1 ●
solenoid (SD4)
A0GER702##
1.15 GP-501
ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Pins ● ● 3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)
Actual lubrication count: 50,000
punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set Shoulder Bolts ● ● Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
This maintenance to be done by
user.
1.15.3 Maintenance 3 (Every 3,000,000 prints)

ng ation ce
GP removement, Front door open
2 Bypass conveyance Paper Path, Bypass ● ● Alcohol
section
3 Punch conveyance Latching Mechanisms aligner ●
4 section Paper Path, Aligner panels ● ● Alcohol
5 Aligner Idler Rollers ● ●
F-19
6 Roller energy drive ● ●

7 Bypass/Punch Optical Sensors ● Blower brush
8 conveyance section Timing Belts ● ● Alcohol
9 Idler Rollers ● ●
10 Drive Rollers ● ●
11 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism ● ● Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
12 Die Guide ● Vacuum cleaner
13 Paper Path, Punch ● ● Alcohol
14 External section Base ● Vacuum cleaner
15 Door Closing Latch ●
16 Post-process Front door close, GP connected
18 Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad
1.15.4 Maintenance 4 (Every 12,000,000 prints)

ng ation ce
1 Punch conveyance Aligner Idler Roller Assembly ● Alcohol
2 section Belt Aligner (Green) 1 ●
3 Punch section Punch drive cams 1 ● Magnalube-G Teflon Grease
Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches
1.15.5 Spotted replacement (Every 500,000 punches)

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● Replacement is recommended if
hanging chips are usually
generated.
1.15.6 Spotted replacement part (Every 4,000,000 cycle)

ng ation ce
1 Punch section Back Gauge Mechanism 1 ● Actual replacement count:
A0N9PP59## 4,000,000 punches
F-20
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED
bizhub PRESS C8000 PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub
PRESS C8000 to F.18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501.
The parts count No. given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service mode.
2.2 bizhub PRESS C8000

2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list
(1) Main body
No. Classification Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual Parts count No.
replacement
cycle
1 External section Ozone filter A1RF1144## 1 300,000 2
2 Dust-proof filter /A (right) A1RFR702## 1 F.4. LIFE 3
VALUE
3 Dust-proof filter /B (back) A1RFR745## 1 F.4. LIFE 4
VALUE
4 Dust-proof filter /C (left) A1RFR744## 1 F.4. LIFE 5
VALUE
5 Dust-proof filter /C (rear 1) A1RFR744## 1 F.4. LIFE 6
VALUE
VALUE
VALUE
8 Photo conductor Drum unit /Y A1RFA330## 1 F.4. LIFE 21, 22
section VALUE
9 Drum unit /M A1RFA330## 1 F.4. LIFE 23, 24
VALUE
10 Drum unit /C A1RFA330## 1 F.4. LIFE 25, 26
VALUE
11 Drum unit /K A1RFA330## 1 F.4. LIFE 27, 28
VALUE
12 Intermediate transfer Intermediate transfer belt A1RF5001## 1 300,000 58
13 section Toner collection sheet 65AAR756## 1 150,000 60
14 Transfer belt cleaning blade A1RFR7F1## 1 150,000 61, 62
15 Transfer belt cleaning seal/Fr A1RF5112## 1 150,000 189
16 Transfer belt cleaning seal/Rr A1RF5116## 1 150,000 190
17 1st transfer roller /Y A03U5012## 1 300,000 63
18 1st transfer roller /M A03U5012## 1 300,000 64
19 1st transfer roller /C A03U5012## 1 300,000 65
20 1st transfer roller /K A03U5004## 1 300,000 66
21 2nd transfer roller /Up A1RF5004## 1 300,000 68
22 Transfer belt separation claw 65AAR753## 3 600,000 69
23 Sensor shutter A1RFR7F7## 1 300,000 104
24 Transfer belt cleaning unit A1RFR717## 1 900,000 59
25 Belt separation claw solenoid (SD7) A1RFR748## 1 3,000,000 103
26 Transfer roller bearing 65AA2638## 8 3,000,000 70
27 Charging section Charging corona /Y A1RFR701## 1 F.4. LIFE 13, 14
VALUE
28 Charging corona /M A1RFR701## 1 F.4. LIFE 15, 16
VALUE
29 Charging corona /C A1RFR701## 1 F.4. LIFE 17, 18
VALUE
30 Charging corona /K A1RFR701## 1 F.4. LIFE 19, 20
VALUE
31 2nd transfer section 2nd transfer belt A1RF5204## 1 300,000 72
32 2nd transfer cleaning unit A1RFR714## 1 F.4. LIFE 73, 74
VALUE
33 2nd transfer process blade assy A1RFR7F8## 1 150,000 136
34 2nd transfer cleaning brush A1RF5328## 1 150,000 138
35 2nd transfer separation discharging unit A1RFR705## 1 300,000 75
F-21
36 2nd transfer entrance guide /Up A1RFR729## 1 600,000 76

37 2nd transfer belt unit A1RFR715## 1 600,000 78
38 2nd transfer ground plate /1 A1RFR719## 1 1,200,000 79
39 2nd transfer ground plate /2 A1RFR720## 1 1,200,000 80
40 Developing section Developer /Y A1DYT700## 1 F.4. LIFE 41, 42
VALUE
41 Developer /M A1DYT800## 1 F.4. LIFE 43, 44
VALUE
42 Developer /C A1DYT900## 1 F.4. LIFE 45, 46
VALUE
43 Developer /K A1DYT600## 1 F.4. LIFE 47, 48
VALUE
44 Developing unit /Y A1RFR727## 1 F.4. LIFE 49, 50
VALUE
45 Developing unit /M A1RFR727## 1 F.4. LIFE 51, 52
VALUE
46 Developing unit /C A1RFR727## 1 F.4. LIFE 53, 54
VALUE
47 Developing unit /K A1RFR727## 1 F.4. LIFE 55, 56
VALUE
48 Toner supply section Developing cooling filter /Y A1RFR703## 1 300,000 9
49 Developing cooling filter /M A1RFR703## 1 300,000 10
50 Developing cooling filter /C A1RFR703## 1 300,000 11
51 Developing cooling filter /K A1RFR703## 1 300,000 12
52 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 1) 25SA4096## 1 125,000 105
53 Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 2) 25SA4096## 1 125,000 106
54 Paper feed roller rubber (Tray 3) 25SA4096## 1 125,000 107
55 Separation roller rubber (Tray 1) 25SA4096## 1 125,000 105
58 Pick up roller (Tray 1) 56AAR721## 1 800,000 109
61 Paper feed clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3), /3 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 113, 114, 115
(CL5)
62 Pre-registration clutch /1 (CL2), /2 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 117, 118, 119
(CL4), /3 (CL6)
63 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL20) A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 120
64 section Vertical conveyance clutch /2 (CL21) A03UM201## 1 3,600,000 121
65 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet A1RFR716## 1 600,000 122
66 Loop roller cleaning assy A1RFR7F3## 1 600,000 116
67 Registration roller assy 65LA4641## 1 1,500,000 123
68 Duplex section ADU conveyance roller cleaning A1RFR7F5## 3 1,500,000 140
member /A
69 ADU conveyance roller cleaning A1RFR7F6## 2 1,500,000 141
member /B
70 ADU reverse cleaning assy A1RFR7F4## 1 1,500,000 139
71 De-curler roller A1RF8605## 1 600,000 128
72 Intermediate conveyance roller cleaning A1RFR718## 1 900,000 124
stay
73 Intermediate conveyance roller clean A1RFR7G4## 1 900,000 125
brush
74 ADU conveyance clutch /1 (CL7), /2 A03UM201## 7 3,600,000 126
(CL8), /3 (CL9), /4 (CL10), /5 (CL11), /6
(CL12), /7 (CL13)
75 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 A03UM201## 2 3,600,000 127
(CL14), /2 (CL15)
76 Paper exit section Main body paper exit driven roller A1RF8950## 1 3,000,000 129
77 Exit conveyance driven roller A1RF8950## 1 3,000,000 130
78 Fusing section Fusing web unit A1RFR707## 1 F.4. LIFE 82, 83
VALUE
79 Fusing external heating unit A1RFR708## 1 450,000 84
80 Fusing swing shaft assy A1RFR709## 1 450,000 85
F-22
81 Fusing paper exit guide assy A1RFR710## 1 450,000 86

82 Fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy A1RFR7H1## 1 450,000 160
83 Fusing belt unit /Lw A1RFR711## 1 450,000 87
84 Fusing roller assy A1RFR712## 1 450,000 88
85 Fusing claw unit A1RFR713## 1 450,000 89
86 Fusing web torque limiter A1RF7239## 1 900,000 90
87 Fusing web prevention part A1RF7240## 1 900,000 91
88 Fusing paper exit roller /Lw A1RF7517## 1 1,350,000 92
89 Fusing refresh roller assy A1RFR721## 1 1,350,000 93
90 Fusing drive assy A1RFR7F2## 1 2,250,000 94
91 Fusing temperature sensor assy (lower A1RFR731## 1 2,700,000 96
belt)
92 Fusing temperature sensor (fusing roller) A1RFR734## 1 2,700,000 97
93 Fusing heater/1 A1RFM31A## 1 2,700,000 98
(Japan)
A1RFM31E##
(North America)
A1RFM31F##
(Europe)
(Japan)
A1RFM34E##
(North America)
A1RFM34F##
(Europe)
(Japan)
A1RFM35E##
(North America)
A1RFM35F##
(Europe)
96 Fusing actuator A1RFR732## 1 2,700,000 101
97 Web motor A1RFB735## 1 7,500,000 102
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 PF-704/705 Suction belt clutch /1 (CL15), /2 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 162, 163, 164,
(CL16), /3 (CL17) 175, 176, 177
2 Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL3), /2 56AA8201## 3 2,000,000 165, 178
(CL4), exit clutch /1 (CL1)
3 Exit clutch /2 (CL2) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 166, 179
4 Vertical conveyance clutch /3 (CL5), /4 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000 167, 180
(CL6)
5 Pre-registration clutch (CL7) 56AA8201## 1 2,000,000 168, 181
6 Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (CL8), / 56AA8201## 2 2,000,000
2 (CL9)
7 Pre-registration bearing A03U8128## 2 6,000,000 170, 182
8 Pre-registration roller A1RG7160## 1 6,000,000 171, 183
9 Loop roller /Up A1RG7161## 1 6,000,000 172, 184
10 Tandem conveyance clutch /1 (CL10), /2 56AA8201## 5 2,000,000 169
(CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), /5 (CL14)
11 EF-101 2nd fusing decurler roller A1RJ8152## 1 900,000 156
12 2nd fusing heating roller A03U7201## 2 450,000 143
13 2nd fusing belt A03U7205## 2 450,000 144
14 2nd Fusing belt regulating sleeve A03U7250## 4 450,000 145
15 2nd fusing insulating sleeve A03U7295## 4 450,000 146
16 2nd fusing heating roller bearing A03U8078## 4 450,000 147
17 2nd fusing roller /Lw A1RJ7201## 1 450,000 148
18 2nd fusing roller /Up A1RJ7202## 1 450,000 149
19 2nd fusing roller bearing A1RJ7212## 4 450,000 150
20 2nd fusing idler gear/3 A1RJ8096## 1 1,350,000 152
F-23
21 2nd fusing heater A1RJM31A## 2 2,700,000 153

(Japan)
A1RJM31E## (North
America)
A1RJM31F##
(Europe)
22 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Up A1RJR712## 1 2,700,000 154
23 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Lw A1RJR716## 1 2,700,000 155
24 2nd fusing exit roller/Up A1RJ8973## 1 3,000,000 157
25 2nd fusing drawer entrance guide assy A1RJR717## 1 3,000,000 158
26 RU-508 Entrance conveyance driven roller /1 A1TT7141## 1 3,000,000 319
27 Entrance conveyance driven roller /2 A1TT7111## 1 3,000,000 318
28 HM-101 Humidification roller /Rt A1TU5001## 1 300,000 322
29 Humidification roller /Lt A1TU5002## 1 300,000 323
2.2.2 Spotted replacement parts list

(1) Main body
replacement
cycle
- - - - - - -
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 DF-622 DF pick-up roller 13YH4064## 2 625,000 288
2 Paper feed roller 13YH4039## 1 625,000 289
3 Separation roller 20AJ4015## 1 625,000 290
4 PF-704/705 Loop roller bearing /Lw A03U8128## 2 6,000,000 173, 185
5 Loop roller /Lw A1RG6075## 1 6,000,000 174, 186
6 HM-101 Water feed roller A1TU5003## 2 1,500,000 324
7 Water feed filter A1TU5215## 1 300,000 325
8 FS-521 Stapler unit /Fr A0GYA735## 1 500,000 193
9 Stapler unit /Rr A0GYA736## 1 500,000 194
10 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825## 8 600,000 196
11 Intermediate roller release solenoid 15AAR718## 1 5,400,000 -
(SD7)
12 Paper exit opening solenoid assembly A0GYB904## 1 5,400,000 -
13 FS-612 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 122H4825## 6 200,000 255
14 Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller) A04D8904## 4 200,000 256
15 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge 13QE4531## 4 200,000 257
roller)
16 Paper assist roller (sponge roller) 20AK4210## 1 400,000 258
17 Stapler unit /Fr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 248
18 Stapler unit /Rr 15JM-501## 1 200,000 249
19 PI-502 Paper feed roller 13QNR705## 2 100,000 265,270
20 Separation roller 13QNR704## 2 100,000 266,271
21 Pick-up roller 50BAR701## 2 200,000 264,269
22 Torque limiter 13QN4073## 2 600,000 267,272
23 Paper feed clutch /Up 13QN8201## 1 1,000,000 263
24 Paper feed clutch /Lw 13QN8201## 1 1,000,000 268
25 LS-505 Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 15AV8003## 1 5,000,000 219, 224
26 Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) 15AV8252## 1 5,000,000 215, 220
29 Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 15AV8253## 1 5,000,000 216, 221
30 FD-503 Separation rubber 13QNR704## 2 100,000 202, 205
31 Paper feed rubber 50BAR702## 2 100,000 203, 206
32 Pick-up rubber 50BAR701## 6 200,000 201, 204
33 Tray up down motor (M11) 129U-108## 1 5,000,000 210
F-24
34 Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000 208

35 Roller solenoid /2 (SD6) 15AGR723## 1 5,000,000
38 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 15AGR761## 1 5,000,000 209
39 Punch unit A0H0R700## 1 5,000,000 207
(Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702##
(Europe)
40 SD-506 Trimmer board assy A0H2B622## 1 18,900 230
41 Trimmer blade kit A0H2R901## 1 37,500 229
42 Bundle press stage gear 15AN7719## 1 500,000 242
43 Trimmer press motor (M32) A0H2M101## 1 500,000 231
44 Trimmer blade motor (M31) A0H2M102## 1 850,000 232
45 Stapler assy 15AN-550## 2 1,000,000 234, 235
46 Saddle stitch unit A0H2A720## 1 2,500,000 -
47 Slope unit 15AN-500## 1 2,500,000 -
48 Bundle press stage unit A0H2A530## 1 2,500,000 -
49 Trimmer unit A0H2A620## 1 2,500,000 233
50 Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 239
51 Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) 15ANR710## 1 5,000,000 -
52 Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) 15AN8251## 1 5,000,000 239
53 Right angle conveyance gate solenoid 15ANR711## 1 5,000,000 -
(SD2)
54 PB-503 Roller cutter blade assy A0756230## 1 100,000 304
55 Pick-up roller 15VA-484## 1 500,000 300
56 Paper feed roller 15VA-483## 1 500,000 301
57 Separation roller 15VA-483## 1 500,000
58 Switchback roller 13GQ4519## 1 600,000 299
59 Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 27LA8051## 1 750,000 -
60 SC switchback release motor (M13) A0V9M101## 1 3,000,000 296
61 Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 15ANR714## 1 3,000,000 295
62 Cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 302
63 Cover paper separation clutch (CL72) 56AA8201## 1 3,000,000 303
64 FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 15AA8251## 1 5,000,000 297
65 SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) A075B746## 1 5,000,000 298
66 One-way clutch /A 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 -
67 One-way clutch /B 13GQ7709## 1 6,000,000 -
68 Exhaust filter /A A15X3017## 1 120 hours 305
69 Exhaust filter /B A15X3018## 1 240 hours 306
70 Glue apply roller drive gear bearing A0753799## 4 6,000 hours -
71 Glue tank assy A15XA36A## 1 2,000 hours 308
(100V) A15XA36E##
(120V) A15XA36F##
(240V)
72 RU-506 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) A0GER709## 1 5,000,000 -
73 Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) A0GER700## 1 5,000,000 -
74 Stack switching solenoid (SD3) A0GER701## 1 5,000,000 -
75 Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid A0GER702## 1 5,000,000 -
(SD4)
76 Straight gate spring 15AG4587## 1 5,000,000 -
77 GP-501 Die Set DS-5## 500,000 -
78 Back Gauge mechanism A0N9PP59## 1 4,000,000 317
F-25
bizhub PRESS C8000 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. ORU-M PARTS
3. ORU-M PARTS
3.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
(1) ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps/adjustment setting methods and manages
data when the educated user replaces the parts.
This function is enabled by installing the prescribed option and setting DIPSW15-0 to 1. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts
provided as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement
operation.
3.2 ORU-M parts list

(1) ORU-M parts list
The Allow/Restrict of the ORU-M parts can be set on I.5.16 ORU-M Setting individually.
Parts No. Target of ORU-M Detection of Detection of Required adjustment Life Life Life
connector RFID (Standard) (Lower limit) (Upper
disconnection connection limit)*1
57 Intermediate transfer Provided Provided Blade Setting Mode (for 300,000 66% 333%
unit intermediate transfer) prints (200,000 (1,000,000
Belt Line Speed Adj. prints) prints)
Color Registration Auto
Adjustment
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
49,50 Developing unit /Y Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 784km 50% 120%
TonerDenditySensorInit.Au (Standard x (Standard x
to (Y) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Printer Gamma Offset
Auto.
51,52 Developing unit /M Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 784km 50% 120%
to (M) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
53,54 Developing unit /C Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 784km 50% 120%
to (C) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
55,56 Developing unit /K Provided None Auto. Developer Charge 784km 50% 120%
to (K) 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
41,42 Developer /Y None None Auto. Developer Charge 196km 50% 120%
to 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
43,44 Developer /M None None Auto. Developer Charge 196km 50% 120%
to 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
45,46 Developer /C None None Auto. Developer Charge 196km 50% 120%
to 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
F-26
47,48 Developer /K None None Auto. Developer Charge 196km 50% 120%
to 0.5) 1.2)
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
Auto.
71 2nd transfer unit Provided Provided Blade Setting Mode (for 150,000 50% 120%
2nd transfer) prints (Standard x (Standard x
Belt Line Speed Adj. 0.5) 1.2)
Color Registration Auto
Adjustment
Gamma Automatic
Adjustment
81 Fusing unit Provided Provided None 450,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
142 2nd Fusing Unit None Provided None 450,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
21,22 Drum unit /Y - - Color Registration Auto. 160km 80% 113%
Gamma Automatic (130km) (180km)
Adjustment
23,24 Drum unit /M - - Color Registration Auto. 160km 80% 113%
Adjustment
25,26 Drum unit /C - - Color Registration Auto. 160km 80% 113%
Adjustment
27,28 Drum unit /K - - Color Registration Auto. 160km 80% 113%
Adjustment
13,14 Charging corona /Y - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
Adjustment (40h) (100h)
15,16 Charging corona /M - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
17,18 Charging corona /C - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
19,20 Charging corona /K - - Gamma Automatic 70h 57% 143%
3 Dust-proof filter /A - - None 300,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
4 Dust proof filter /B - - None 300,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
5,6,7,8 Dust proof filter /C - - None 300,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
9,10,11,12 Developing cooling - - None 300,000 50% 120%
filter prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
2 Ozone filter - - None 300,000 50% 120%
0.5) 1.2)
109 Paper feed roller (Tray - - None 800,000 50% 120%
1) prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
105 Feed/Separation - - None 125,000 50% 120%
rubber (Tray1) prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
0.5) 1.2)
F-27

0.5) 1.2)
* The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that can be set by CE according to the demand of customer.
3.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

(1) ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be set individually on I.5.16 ORU-M Setting of Service Mode. Set the life with percent.
(2) ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
• ORU-M function is enabled
• I.5.16 ORU-M Setting
3.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

(1) Counter display
By pressing [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
• By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
• The content which appears on [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] reflects the setting of I.5.16 ORU-M Setting.
(2) Counter clear

When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
F-28
bizhub PRESS C8000 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. LIFE VALUE
4. LIFE VALUE
4.1 Life value of materials/parts
Parts name Replacement cycle Actual Life/Verification method
Drum unit Equivalent to 300,000 prints Drum drive distance is 160km.
On the user screen, the life counter shows the remaining life with
percentage. (100% is the end of life)
Developer Equivalent to 300,000 prints Developing roller drive distance is 196km.
Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K Equivalent to 1,200,000 prints Developing roller drive distance is 784km.
Toner collect box assy Equivalent to 100,000 prints When the waste toner full sensor (PS48) detects the waste toner full.
Charging corona Equivalent to 150,000 prints Energization time of the charging corona is 70 hours.
Dust proof filter /A, /B, /C Equivalent to 300,000 prints Changes depending on the coverage, developing roller drive distance,
and temperature/humidity.
Transfer belt cleaning blade Equivalent to 150,000 prints Intermediate transfer belt drive distance is 93km.
2nd transfer cleaning unit Equivalent to 150,000 prints 2nd transfer belt drive distance is 76km.
Fusing web unit Equivalent to 450,000 prints Fusing web unit drive time is 35,300 seconds.
4.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when printing is made under the conditions
listed in the table below. Since the idle running time (when not creating an image) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode, the
actual life cycle may become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item Description
Printing method Full color 8 copies intermittently
Paper size A4
Coverage 5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp/humidity Q zone
F-29
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE bizhu...
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub PRESS C8000

5.1 External section
5.1.1 Replacing the dust-proof filter /A (right)
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Dust-proof filter /A (right): Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door of the PF [1].
Note
• When the PF is not connected, remove 2 screws [1] and
then remove the filter cover /1 [2].
• When the PF is not connected, skip the step 2 and go on
to the step 3.
[1]
[2]
2. Pull the filter holding bracket [1] and turn to the right.
3. Remove the dust-proof filter /A (right) [1].

4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
5. After replacing the dust-proof filter /A (right), conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.3
5.1.2 Replacing the ozone filter, dust-proof filter /B (rear)

• Ozone filter: Every 300,000 prints
• Dust-proof filter /B (rear): Every 300,000 prints
F-30
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the filter cover /2 [2].
2. Pull the handle [1] and then remove the ozone filter [2].
3. Remove the dust-proof filter /B (rear) [2] from the filter cover /2 [1].
5. After replacing the ozone filter and the dust-proof filter /B (rear),
conduct the following items.
For the ozone filter: Counter reset of the parts counter No.2
2 For the dust-proof filter /B (rear): Counter reset of the parts counter
No.4
5.1.3 Replacing the dust-proof filter /C (left)

• Dust-proof filter /C (left): Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the filter cover /3 [2].
F-31
2. Remove the dust-proof filter /C (left) [3] from the filter cover /2 [1].
[2] 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] 4. After replacing the dust-proof filter /C (left), conduct the following
steps.
5.1.4 Replacing the dust-proof filter /C (Rr1), /C (Rr2), /C (Rr3)

• Dust-proof filter /C (Rr1), /C (Rr2), /C (Rr3): Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove each of 2 screws [1], and remove 2 filter covers /4 [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover /4 [2].
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and remove the dust proof filters /
C (Rr1), /C (Rr2) and /C (Rr3) from each filter cover /4 [2].
5. After replacing the dust-proof filters /C (Rr1), /C (Rr2) and /C (Rr3),
conduct the following steps.
Counter reset of parts counters No.6 for the dust proof filter /C
1 (Rr1), No.7 for /C (Rr2), and No.8 for /C (Rr3)
3
1
F-32
5.2 Writing section

5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof glass
(1) Periodically cleaned parts/cycle
• Dust-proof glasses /Y, /M, /C and /K: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening/closing the
toner hopper unit)
2. Remove the dust-proof glasses /Y [1], /M [2], /C [3], and /K [4] by
pulling them out.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] 3. Clean the glass [2] of each dust-proof glass [1] with hydro-wipe.
[2]
5.3 Photo conductor section

5.3.1 Disassembling procedure of the process unit section
Open the toner hopper unit
Pull out the process unit Remove the charger unit
Remove the intermediate

transfer unit
Remove the drum unit Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
F-33
5.3.2 Opening/closing the toner hopper unit

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt [1] and /Lt [2].
2. Push the release button [3] and then open the toner supply cover
[4].
[3] 3. Loosen the screw [5] and then open the toner hopper unit [6].
Note
• Do not press the toner hopper unit while it is open. The
shape of the hinge on the toner hopper unit changes.
4. When closing the toner hopper unit, follow the steps in reverse.
[2] [5] [4] [6] [1]
5.3.3 Pulling out the process unit

Note
• To prevent the main body from falling, the process unit and the duplex section cannot be pulled out at the same time.
• Be sure to put the duplex section in the main body before pulling out the process unit.
• When the process cannot be pulled out, check to see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and replace them if necessary.
(Refer to G.2.2.11 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2)
[3]
toner hopper unit)
2. Push the mount handle /Lt [1] and the process mount handle /Rt [2]
inward together to unlock the process unit [3], and pull out the
process unit [3] by holding the handles.
[1] [2]
5.3.4 Replacing the drum unit

• Drum unit: 300,000 prints or 160km drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
Note
• 4 drum units one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are provided. Yellow, magenta, and cyan are common parts, and
black is exclusive part. Do not use a once-used drum cartridge for another color even they are common parts, or the old
remaining toner and the new toner mix up and the print quality degrade.
F-34
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
2. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Hold the edges [2] of the image correction unit [1], and open to the
down side.
Note
• Be sure to open the image correction unit. Removing the
drum unit /K [3] has difficulty with the unit closed.
[12][10] [5] [11] [4] [9] [5] [11] [12]
4. Lift up the both edges [5] of the drum stay /Up [4], grab the edges,
and remove the drum unit /Y [6].
5. Remove the drum unit /M [7], /C [8], and /K [3] in the same manner
as step 4.
[6] Note
• When reinstalling each drum unit, be sure to check that
[7] the both edges of the unit are fitted in the groove of the
drum attachment blocks /Fr [9] and /Rr [10]. (Drum
attachment blocks /Fr and /Rr shown in the picture is for
[8] the yellow drum cartridge. Install magenta, cyan, and
black drum cartridges in the same manner.)
[3] • When reinstalling each drum unit, be sure to align the
mark [11] of the drum unit with the mark [12] of the
process unit.
• When reinstalling the drum unit /K, be careful not to
[2] [1] [2]
entangle the sheet [13] of the image correction unit.
• Be careful not to touch or damage the drum photo
conductor section with bare hands.
• When leaving drum unit, be sure to spread a sheet over
[13]
the unit to protect from light, and put them in a dark place.
[4] [1] [3] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] of the new drum unit, remove the blade fixing
plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [3], and then remove the locking tape [4].
[1] [2] [4]
F-35
7. Remove the screw [1] and remove the coupling [2].
[8] [4]
8. Loosen the screw [3], 1 each, and release the pressure of the
blade.
9. Install the blade fixing plates /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] inside out by using
the screw [4] removed in step 6.
Note
• When installing the blade fixing plates /Fr and /Rr, be sure
to set the projections [7] with the salient [8] of each notch.
[2] [1] [3] [7] [6]
10. Tighten the screw [3], 1 each.
11. Install the coupling [2] by using the screw [1].
[4]
[5] [7] [3] [8]
[1] [2] 12. Apply setting powder uniformly to both sides of the drum [1], and
turn around both ends of the drum with fingers in the arrow-marked
direction [2] until no more setting power is visible.
Note
• Be sure to turn around the drum with the outer flanges [4]
of the edge [3]. Do not touch the image area.
• Be sure to turn around in forward direction [2]. Turning in
the reverse direction breaks the cleaning blade and the
smoothing blade.
13. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
removal steps in reverse.
14. • After replacing the drum unit, conduct the following items.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.21, No.22 for drum
unit /Y, No.23, No.24 for drum unit /M, No.25, No.26 for drum
unit /C, No.27, No.28 for drum unit /K
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the
dust-proof glass)
- Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
- Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.12 Color
Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment))
- Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma
Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
[3] [4] a0u0t3c001ca
5.4 Charging section

5.4.1 Replacing the charging corona
• Charging corona: Every 150,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 70 hours of energization)
(2) Procedure
Note
• The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up
and the print quality degrade.
F-36
toner hopper unit)
2. Push down the lever [2] of the charging corona [1] to the right, and
then pull it out [3] to remove.
Note
• When reinstalling the charging corona [1], be sure to
[1] check that the projection [4] of the charging corona aligns
with the groove of the ozone duct [5]. Push the charging
corona gently to the rear. This operation makes the
distance appropriate between the drum unit and the
charging corona. Be careful not to push hard, otherwise
the charging corona becomes deformed.

4. After replacing the charging corona, conduct the following items.
[5] - Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-
proof glass)
[4] - Counter reset of the parts counter No.13, No.14 for charging
corona /Y, No.15, No.16 for charging corona /M, No.17, No.18 for
charging corona /C, No.19, No.20 for charging corona /K
[2]
[3]
5.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona

(1) Cleaned parts/cycle
• Charging corona: When it gets dirty.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona. (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing the
charging corona)
2. Remove the charging corona cleaning jig [1].
[1]
F-37
3. For cleaning the charging wire, insert the charging corona cleaning
jig [3] from the insertion opening [2] of the charging corona [1] of
[5] each color, and move it back and forth [5] along the guide [4].
Note
• The charging wire [6] is cleaned by being scrubbed with
[2] the velvet section [7] of the charging corona cleaning
member [3].
[4]

[1] [7]
[6] [3]
5.5 Intermediate transfer section

5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure
toner hopper unit)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1].

4. Turn the belt positioning shaft [2] counterclockwise, and remove
the shaft.
5. Disconnect the connector [1].
F-38
6. Pull up the mount handle /Rt [1] and the process mount handle /Lt
[2], and then pull out the process unit [3].
7. Lift up the handles [1] and remove the intermediate transfer unit
[2].
Note
4 • Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
2 • Be sure to hold the handle of the intermediate transfer
unit by its ends with both hands.
• Confirm that the toner supply cover [4] is open.
3
8. Turn the supporting base [2] of the intermediate transfer unit [1], 1
each, to stand the intermediate transfer unit [1] independently.
2 2
Note
• When reinstalling the intermediate transfer belt unit [1],
align 2 guide pins [2] on the front and the rear with the
supporting blocks /Fr [3] and /Rr [4], 2 each.
• When reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit, be sure
not to hit the intermediate transfer unit to the drum.
Note
• When reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit, be sure to
align the mark [1] of the intermediate transfer unit with the
mark [2] of the process unit.
1 2
F-39
Note
• When installing a new intermediate transfer unit, be sure
to remove 1 each of the screws [1] to remove the 6 locking
materials [2].
Installing the intermediate transfer unit with the locking
materials [2] installed damages the main body drive
section.
[1] [2]
5.5.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

• Transfer belt cleaning unit: Every 900,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [2] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/
2. Holding the transfer belt cleaning unit [1], remove the 2 screws [2],
and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
• Handle the belt cleaner unit gently when removing the
unit. The toner accumulated in between the toner guide
roller of the transfer belt cleaning unit and the
[1] intermediate transfer belt cleaning pad may spill. It is
normal if the toner is accumulated because the toner is
used to grind the intermediate belt surface. If the toner is
spilled over the separation claw unit, remove and clean
the unit.
• The transfer belt cleaning unit consists of the belt
cleaning roller unit and the following components:
Transfer belt cleaning blade: 1
Spring: 2
[3]
C-clip: 2
Blade support shaft: 1
Toner collection sheet: 1
Toner collection sheet /2: 1
Spring: 7
Intermediate transfer belt cleaning pad: 1
• Before installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply
setting powder to the part [3] on the intermediate transfer
belt. After applying, be sure to rotate the intermediate
transfer belt to scrape off the applied setting powder.
• When installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, insert the
guides at the both bottom ends of the transfer belt
cleaning unit in the slits of the intermediate transfer unit
and tighten the screws.

4. After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, conduct the following
steps.
5.5.3 Intermediate transfer belt position adjustment

Note
• Adjust the position of the intermediate transfer belt when the intermediate transfer belt cannot be controlled because of too much
distortion to the front or to the rear.
• Conduct this adjustment when malfunction code C-2235 occurs and the machine stops.
• The adjustment differs depending on which side the intermediate transfer belt is tilted.
F-40
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
the transfer belt cleaning unit)
2. Check the distance [4] and [5] from the edges of the intermediate
transfer belt [1] to the steps [2] and [3] of the belt and judge which
side the fusing belt /Lw is tilted.
Note
• The tilt direction of the intermediate transfer belt is the
one whose distance to the frames is shorter.
[2] [1] [3]
[4] [5]
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the belt rotation jig [2].
[2] [1]
4. Insert the belt rotation jig [1] to the power supply cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-41
5. When the intermediate transfer belt tilts to the front side, rotate the
[1] [2] cam [2] to the position shown on the left figure.
Note
• The rotation direction of the cam [2] has no regulation.
6. When the intermediate transfer belt tilts to the rear side, rotate the
[1] [2] cam [2] to the position shown on the left figure.
Note
• The rotation direction of the cam [2] has no regulation.
7. Rotate the belt rotation jig [2] counterclockwise until the

intermediate transfer belt [1] comes to the center area.
[1] [2]
5.5.4 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade and Transfer belt cleaning seal/F, /R
• Belt cleaning blade: 150,000 prints or 93km drive, whichever is earlier
Transfer belt cleaning seal /F: 150,000 prints or 93km drive, whichever is earlier
Transfer belt cleaning seal /R: 150,000 prints or 93km drive, whichever is earlier
F-42
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the transfer belt cleaning blade
cover [2].
[2]
[4] [3] 3. Remove 2 springs [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2] and then pull out the blade fulcrum shaft [3]
to remove the transfer belt cleaning blade [4].
Note
• When installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the
setting powder to entire surface of the intermediate
transfer belt to which the transfer belt cleaning unit is
attached.
• Take extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the
belt Cleaning blade [4]. After applying setting powder,
rotate the transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[3] [1]
6. After installing the transfer belt cleaning blade, replace the transfer
belt cleaning seal /F [1], /R [2].
Note
• When installing a new transfer belt cleaning seal [1], be
sure to set is so that it contacts the transfer belt cleaning
blade [3] and the part [4].
When replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade, be sure to
[2] replace the transfer belt cleaning seal.
Otherwise, a gap is created between the transfer belt
[2] [3] [1] cleaning blade and the seal pad /C and the toner spills
out.
•
7. After replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade, conduct the
following items in order.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.61 and 62
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
Peculiarity Adjustment))
[4]
5.5.5 Replacing the toner collection sheet

• Toner collection sheet: Every 150,000 prints
F-43
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the toner collection sheet /2 [2]
and then remove the toner collection sheet [3].
Note
• Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner
collection sheet /1.
attached. After applying setting powder, rotate the
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
[1]
4. After replacing the toner collection sheet, conduct the following
items.
[2] [3] 8050ma3159
5.5.6 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

• Transfer belt separation claw: Every 600,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the separation claw unit [2].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt [3] with bare hands.
• When installing the separation claw unit, apply the setting
powder on half a round [4] of the intermediate transfer
unit [3]. After applying setting powder, rotate the transfer
belt to brush all setting powder off.
[3] [2] [4]
[1]
[2]
F-44
3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 3 transfer belt
separation claws [2].
5. After replacing the transfer belt separation claw, conduct the
following items.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3051
5.5.7 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt

• Intermediate transfer belt: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Remove the transfer belt separation claw. (Refer to F.5.5.6
Replacing the transfer belt separation claw)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness
from 2 wiring harness clamps [2].
[1] 5. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the sensor unit [4].
[3] [4]
F-45
[1] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the handle [2].
7. Remove 2 springs [3].
[3] [2] [3]
8. Have the intermediate transfer unit [1] stand with its front side
[1]
facing down.
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the power supply cover [2].
[2]
F-46
10. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the transfer panel [3].
11. Remove the transfer belt [4] by pulling it straight up.
Note
• Be sure to install the intermediate transfer belt so that the
lot number comes to the upper side (rear side of
machine).
• Hold the transfer belt by its both ends within 10 mm from
the edge, and do not touch other areas.
• Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate
transfer belt with bare hands.
attached. After applying setting powder, rotate the
[2] [3]
transfer belt to brush all setting powder off.
• When reinstalling the intermediate transfer belt, be sure to
input the intermediate transfer belt information. (Refer to I.
5.4.29 Int. Transfer Belt Info.)
13. After replacing the transfer belt separation claw, conduct the
following items.
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-
proof glass)
- Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
- Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj.
(Printer Adjustment))
- Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
[4] [1] Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
- Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.12 Color Registration
Manual (Printer Adjustment))
- Int. Transfer Belt Information (Refer to I.5.4.29 Int. Transfer Belt
Info.)
5.5.8 Replacing the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing

• 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K: Every 300,000 prints
• Transfer roller bearing: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.2 Replacing
2. Let the intermediate transfer unit stand by itself.
3. Remove the C-clip [1].
[6] 4. Remove the bearing [2] and slide the pressure shaft [3] to release
the tip of the transfer release arm [4].
5. Slide and remove the 1st transfer roller /K [5].
6. Remove the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M and /C [6], 1 each.
Note
• Never touch the roller of the 1st transfer roller. When
handling the 1st transfer roller, always grasp it by its
[5] metal shaft.
• Install the 1st transfer roller so that the side with groove
on shaft comes to the front side, and confirm that the
cables are securely fastened and the plastic films on the
[3]
cables are not twisted. If the cables are not fastened,
correct by pressing the cables against the metal frame
[2] side. If the plastic films are twisted, move the films to the
center of the cables.
[1]
[4]
F-47
[8] 7. Remove the claws [7], 2 each, and remove 8 transfer roller
bearings [8].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the
transfer roller bearings.
• Be careful not to brake the claw [7].

9. After replacing the 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, C and /K, conduct the
[7] following items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.63 for /Y, No.64 for /M, No.
65 for /C, No.66 for /K
[9] [8]
proof glass)
[8]
5.5.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up

• 2nd transfer roller /Up: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.5.5.7 Replacing
[1]
the intermediate transfer belt)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the power supply cover [2].
[2]
F-48
[2] 3. Lift the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1] upward temporarily, and remove
the roller obliquely downward.
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer roller, be sure to set it
so that the groove on the shaft comes to the front side.
• Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller /Up. When
handling the 2nd transfer roller /Up, always grasp it by its
metal shaft.
4. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer roller /Up [1].
6. After replacing the 2nd transfer roller /Up, conduct the following
item.
[2] [1]
5.5.10 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD7)

• Belt separation claw solenoid: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Disconnect the connector [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from 4 clamps [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the belt separation claw
solenoid (SD7) [4].
Note
[2] • When reinstalling SD7, be sure to install it with the pin [5]
faced up.
• When reinstalling SD7, be sure to contact it with 3
projections [6] of the process unit.
• After installing the solenoid lever, check if the shaft of
SD7 slides smoothly.
[3] [4] [5] [6]
6. After replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD7), conduct
the following step.
5.5.11 Cleaning the IDC sensors /Fr (IDCS/1) and /Rr (IDCS/2) and the color registration sensors /Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84)
and /Rr (PS85)
• IDC sensors /Fr (IDCS/1) and /Rr (IDCS/2): Every 300,000 prints
• Color registration sensors /Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84) and /Rr (PS85): Every 300,000 prints
F-49
(2) Procedure
[7] [4] [6] [3] [5] reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
2. Slide the sensor shutter [1] to the arrow-marked direction [2], and
then clean the IDC sensors /Fr (IDCS/1) [3] and /Rr (IDCS/2) [4]
and the color registration sensors /Fr (PS83) [5], /Md (PS84) [6],
and /Rr (PS85) [7] with such as blower brush.
Note
• When the toner dirt cannot be removed with the blower
brush, clean it with the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning
pad. Do not clean it with dry cloth, as it does not
effectively remove the adhered toner.
3. Move back the sensor shutter following the steps in reverse.

[2] [1]
5.5.12 Replacing the Sensor shutter

• Sensor shutter: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[5] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.15.2
Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Remove the screws [1] and [2].
3. Remove the sensor shutter [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When removing the sensor shutter [3], be sure to align the
projection [4] of the rail with the notch [5] of the sensor
shutter.
[7][8] [4] [10] • When the IDC sensor and the color registration sensor [6]
are dirty, clean them with a blower brush. When the toner
is not removed by using a blower brush, clean with the
isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
• When reinstalling the sensor shutter [3], be sure to align
the projection [7] of the shutter mounting plate with the
hole [8] of the sensor shutter.
• When reinstalling the sensor shutter [3], be sure to tighten
the screws [1] and [2] in this order so that the sensor
shutter does not bend. Furthermore, be careful not to use
the other kind of screw or the transfer belt gets damaged.
• When reinstalling the sensor shutter [3], be sure to check
that the wire [9] is under the sensor shutter and cannot be
[1] [3] [6] [2] [9] seen from the window [10] of the sensor shutter.
• After reinstalling the sensor shutter [3], be sure to check
that the wire [9] operates properly.
5.6 2nd transfer section

5.6.1 Position adjustment of the 2nd transfer belt
Note
• Adjust the position of the 2nd transfer belt when the 2nd transfer belt cannot be controlled because of too much distortion to the
front or to the rear.
• The adjustment differs depending on which side the 2nd transfer belt is tilted.
F-50
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
reinstalling the duplex section)
2. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.5.6.3 Removing/
reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
3. Check the distances [4] and [5] from the edges of the 2nd transfer
belt [1] to the frames [2] and [3] of the belt and judge which side
the 2nd transfer belt is tilted.
Note
• The tilt direction of the 2nd transfer belt is the one whose
[2] [4] [1] [5] [3] distance to the frames is shorter.
[1] 4. Change the position of the control arm [1] according to the tilt
direction of the 2nd transfer belt.
• When the tilt direction is front: Lift the control arm [2].
• When the tilt direction is rear: Lower the control arm [3].
5. Turn the gear [4] until the 2nd transfer belt moves to the center.
Note
[2] • Do not turn the gear [4] to the direction other than arrow-
marked [5].
[3]
[5]
[4]
5.6.2 Cleaning the suction guide plate

• Suction guide plate: Every 150,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
2. Clean the surface of the suction guide plate [1] with hydro wipe.
F-51
5.6.3 Removing/reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit

(1) Procedure
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] to remove the suction guide plate [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the suction guide plate, be sure to
check that its attaching surface [3] contacts the attaching
surface [4] of the duplex section.
3. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer cover /Fr
[2].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer cover /Fr, be sure to set
the projections [3] and [4] into the positioning holes [5]
and [6] of the duplex section.
4. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer cover /Rr
[2].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer cover /Rr, be sure to set
the projection [3] into the positioning hole [4] of the
duplex section.
F-52
6. Hold the cover handles [1] on the front and rear, and then remove
the 2nd transfer unit [2].
Note
• Be careful not to touch or damage the 2nd transfer belt
with bare hands.
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit, be sure to check
that the bearings on the front and rear are securely set in
the frame of the duplex section.
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit, be careful not to
hit the other parts with the gear.
Before securing the 2nd transfer unit, be sure to check the
mesh of the gears and confirm that there is no trouble
such as running on of the gear. If the mesh of the gears is
not proper, an image trouble such as pitch unevenness
occurs.

NOTE
• When installing the new 2nd transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer belt, conduct the following steps for applying the setting toner
before installing the 2nd transfer unit.
• First, put the setting toner on the hydro wipe and apply the toner to the whole area which shows the belt until the color of the
toner can be distinguished. Then, turn the belt until the toner applied on the 2nd transfer belt disappears.
• Apply the setting toner again to the uncovered spot on the belt. Then, turn the belt until the applied toner disappears.
• Do not use the setting powder or the 2nd transfer cleaning blade is rolled up and gets broken.
• Be sure not to apply the setting toner on the area 3mm to 5mm away from the edges of the 2nd transfer belt. Since the 2nd
transfer cleaning blade is not touched, toner cannot be wiped off completely.
5.6.4 Replacing the 2nd transfer separation discharging unit

• 2nd transfer separation discharging unit: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[3] [2]
2. Remove the faston [1].
3. Remove the screws [2] and [3], and remove the 2nd transfer
separation discharging unit [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer separation discharging
unit, be sure to tighten the screw [2] first for positioning,
then tighten the screw [3].

5. After replacing the 2nd transfer separation discharging unit,
conduct the following item.
[1] [4]
5.6.5 Replacing the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd transfer ground plates /1 and /2
• 2nd transfer belt unit: Every 600,000 prints
• 2nd transfer cleaning unit: Every 150,000 prints
• 2nd transfer ground plate /1: Every 1,200,000 prints
F-53
• 2nd transfer ground plate /2: Every 1,200,000 prints
(2) Procedure for removal

[1] reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
2. Remove the 2nd transfer separation discharging unit. (Refer to F.
5.6.4 Replacing the 2nd transfer separation discharging unit)
3. Release the wiring harness [1] from 2 cable clamps [2].
[3] [2] [3]
[5] Note
• Be careful not to touch the collection shutter [2] and the
spring [3] mounted on the toner collection pipe [1] since
they easily come off.
• When the collection shutter and the spring come off, keep
them by fitting the stopper [5] of the collection shutter to
[4] the groove [4] on the toner collection pipe.
• To prevent the waste toner from spilling off from the exit
[6] of the toner collection pipe, be sure to operate with the
collection shutter and the spring installed.
[1] [6] [2] [3]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover handle /Fr [2].
Note
• The removed cover handle /Fr is connected to the 2nd
transfer unit with the wiring harness [3].
6. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the cover handle /Rr [5].
[5] [3] [2]
[4] [1]
[3] [1] 7. Disconnect the connector [1].

8. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the earth plate mounting
bracket [3].
[2]
F-54
[4] [5] [3] [5] [2] 9. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2nd transfer
earth plates /1 [3] and /2 [4] from the earth plate mounting bracket
[2].
Note
• When installing the earth plate mounting bracket, make
sure that 2 each of contacts [5] of the 2nd transfer earth
plates /1 and /2 are touching the shaft of each roller.
• When there is any contact not touching, remove the earth
plate mounting bracket and adjust the angle of the folds
[6] of the 2nd Transfer Earth Plate /1 and /2.
[6] [1] [6]
10. Remove 4 screws [1].

[10] [9] [6] [3] [4] [5] 11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the swing shaft /1 assy [3].
12. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the swing shaft /3 assy [5].
13. Lift up the control arm [6].
14. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the swing shaft /2 assy [8].
15. Remove the screw [9] and then remove the swing shaft /4 assy
[10].
16. Remove the 2nd transfer belt unit [11].
[7] [8] [2] [11]
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [1] 17. Removing the 2nd transfer belt unit [1] divide the 2nd transfer unit
into the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [2] and the 2nd transfer pressure
unit [3].
18. After replacing the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning
unit, and the 2nd transfer ground plates /1 and /2, perform the
following procedures.
- For the 2nd transfer belt unit: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.78
Blade Setting Mode (Refer to I.5.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum
- Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj.
- For the 2nd transfer cleaning unit: Counter reset of the parts
counters No.73 and No.74
- For the 2nd transfer earth plate /1: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.79
- For the 2nd transfer earth plate /2: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.80
(3) Procedure for reinstallation

Note
• When installing a new 2nd transfer belt unit, be sure to apply the setting toner on the belt. (Refer to F.5.6.3 Removing/
[2] [1] 1. When installing a new 2nd transfer cleaning unit [1], be sure to
apply the setting toner on the edge area [2] of the cleaning blade
using the cotton swab.
F-55
2. Install the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [2] to the 2nd transfer belt unit
[1], and then install the swing shaft /3 assy [5] and the swing shaft /
4 assy [6] using the screws [3] and [4].
Note
• When installing the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [2] to the
2nd transfer belt unit [1], be sure to align 2 projections [8]
of the transfer cleaning unit to 2 holes [7] of the transfer
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
belt unit.
[2] [8]
[7]
[1] 3. Set the 2nd transfer belt unit and the 2nd transfer cleaning unit [1]
that are paired in step 1 on the 2nd transfer pressure unit [2].
Note
• Be sure to set it so that the metal frame of the 2nd transfer
pressure unit [3] is positioned between the metal frame [4]
of the 2nd transfer belt unit and the metal frame [5] of the
2nd transfer cleaning unit.
[2]
[4] [3] [5] [5] [3] [4]
4. Install the swing shaft /1 assy [2] with 2 screws [1].

5. Install the swing shaft /2 assy [4] with the screw [3].
[3] [4] [1] [2]
5.6.6 Replacing the 2nd transfer entrance guide /Up

• 2nd transfer entrance guide plate /Up: Every 600,000 prints
F-56
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the 2nd transfer pressure unit. (Refer to F.5.6.5 Replacing
the 2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the
2nd transfer ground plates /1 and /2)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the 2nd transfer entrance
[3] [1]
guide plate /Up [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer entrance guide plate /
Up, be sure to set it in the inside step section [3].

5. After replacing the 2nd transfer entrance guide plate /Up, conduct
the following item.
[1] [2] [3]
5.6.7 Replacing the 2nd transfer processing blade assy, the 2nd transfer cleaning brush and the 2nd transfer belt.
• 2nd transfer processing blade assy : Every 150,000 prints
• 2nd transfer cleaning brush: Every 150,000 prints
• 2nd transfer belt: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the 2nd transfer belt unit. (Refer to F.5.6.5 Replacing the
2nd transfer belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and the 2nd
transfer ground plates /1 and /2)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the 2nd transfer processing
blade assy [2].
Note
[2]
• When reinstalling the 2nd transfer processing blade assy,
be sure to press the regulation plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [4]
[5] [1] [3] against the mounting plates /Fr [5] and /Rr [6] of the 2nd
transfer unit.
[6]
[1]
[4]
F-57
[5] [4] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
5. Remove the E-ring [4], 1 each, and then remove 2 bearings [5].
6. Remove the 2nd transfer cleaning brush [6].
[6]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[2] [2] 7. Lower the control arm [1].

8. Remove 6 screws [2] and remove the assist stay /A [3].
Note
• When removing the assist stay /A, release the leading
edge [5] of the actuator [4] from the 2nd transfer belt [6].
[1] [6] [5]
[3]
[4]
[6] [1] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 tension blocks /
1 [2] and 2 springs [3].
Note
• When removing the tension block /1, be careful not to lose
the spring.
10. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the mounting plate /Rr [5].
11. Remove the 2nd transfer belt [6].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [3] [2] [5] Note
• When installing the new 2nd transfer belt, be careful not to
touch except the edge.
• When installing a new 2nd transfer belt unit, be sure to
apply the setting toner on the belt. (Refer to F.5.6.3
Removing/reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit)
• When removing the 2nd transfer belt, be sure to clean
each roller inside it with the isopropyl alcohol.
Note
• If the 2nd transfer belt unit is vertical when installing the
2nd transfer belt, the tension roller [1] falls down.
Therefore, be sure to put the side of the tension roller on
the mounting plate /Rr [2].
• Be sure to insert the new 2nd transfer belt so that it
comes to the same level as the side [3] of the 2nd transfer
[1] [2] [3] roller /Lw.
13. After replacing the 2nd transfer processing blade assy, the 2nd
transfer cleaning brush and the 2nd transfer belt, conduct the
following item.
For the 2nd transfer processing blade assy: Counter reset of the
parts counter No.136
For the 2nd transfer cleaning brush: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.138
F-58
For the 2nd transfer belt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.72
5.7 Developing section

5.7.1 Replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K
• Developer /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 300,000 prints or drive distance 196km, whichever is earlier
(2) Developer ejection procedures

1. Remove the cover table. (Refer to G.2.2.4 Upper cover, cover
[1] [2] table)
2. Remove the developer charge plate [1], developer charge funnel /L
[2], and rotation jig [3].
Note
• Use the developer charge plate and developer charge
funnel /L for charging new developer.
[3]
3. Remove the developing unit. (Refer to F.5.7.2 Replacing the

Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K)
4. Repeat the following steps 5 and 6 to exit the developer of each
color.
Note
• Do not remove the cover of the developer unit [1] and the
toner inlet [2] when ejecting the developer.
5. Install the rotation jig [1] to the coupling [2] on the agitator screw
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
[2] [1]
6. Install the rotation jig to the coupling [1] on the developing roller
[1]
side and turn in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Never turn the coupling in the direction other than the
specified herein.
• When replacing the developer, be sure to conduct "Toner
Density Sensor Init." in Service Mode. (Refer to I.5.4.12
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
7. Install all of the developer units which have ejected the developer
to the process unit.
Note
• Be sure to charge the developer while the process unit is
set to the main body.
F-59
(3) Developer charging procedures

1. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2]
and install it by sliding.
Note
• The shoulder screws are on the top of each developing
unit.
2. Install the developer charge funnel /L [2] aligning with the groove
of the developer charge plate [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge
funnel /L to the toner supply opening of the developing
unit.
3. Install the included developer charge funnel /U [1] to the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
Note
• Be sure to use the developer charge funnel /U that is
included in each developer. Reuse is prohibited.
4. Charge new developer [1] into the developer charge funnel /U [2].
5. Remove the developer charge funnel /U [1] and the developer

charge funnel /L [2].
F-60
6. Pull out the developer charge plate [1] from the shoulder screw [2]
and then slide it to remove.
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 to charge the developer to the other
developer units.
8. Reinstall the parts after that following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• After replacing the developer, be sure to clean each dust-
proof glass. (Refer to F.5.2.1 Cleaning the dust-proof
glass)
9. After replacing the developers /Y, /M, /C and /K, conduct the
following steps.
Counter reset of the parts counters No.41, 42 for the developer /Y,
No.43, 44 for /M, No.45, 46 for /C,and No.47, 48 for /K.
Toner Density Sensor Init. (Refer to I.5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor
Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
Gamma Automatic Adj. (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj.
(Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Refer to I.5.3.24 Printer Gamma
Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment))
5.7.2 Replacing the Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K

• Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K
1,200,000 prints or 784km drive, whichever is earlier
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be careful not to fold the teflon sheet applied on the top cover of the developing unit on the developing roller side.
• When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro wipe set as a CE tool. Using paper or cloth other than hydro wipe
causes a white line on the image because of the dust and lint stuck in the developing regulation plate of the developing unit.
• 4 developing units are provided; one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a once-
used developing unit for another color even they are common parts, or the old remaining toner and the new toner mix up and
the print quality degrade.
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.5.3.3 Pulling out the process
unit)
3. Loosen the screw [2].
4. Slide the developing pressure material [1] to the left to remove.

Note
• When reinstalling the developing pressure material, be
sure to check that the spring which presses the
developing unit is not bended.
5. Remove the developing unit [1] from the process unit [2].
Note
• When removing the developing unit, be careful not to
touch the developing roller.
• When removing the developing unit, be careful so that the
developing roller does not touch the process unit.
• When reinstalling the developing unit, be sure to align the
triangle marks of the developing unit and the process unit.

Note
• When keeping 2 sets of each color of developing unit, be
sure to put the identification labels (A, B) that are
included.
F-61
7. After replacing the developing units /Y, /M. /C and /K, conduct the
following steps.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.49 and 50 for /Y, No.51 and
52 for /M, No.53 and 54 for /C, No.54 and 56 for /K
5.8 Toner supply section

5.8.1 Replacing the developing cooling filters /Y, /M, /C and /K
• Developing cooling filters /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening/closing the
toner hopper unit)
2. Open the developing cooling fan assy [1].
3. Remove 4 developing cooling filters /Y, /M, /C, and /K [1].

5. After replacing the developing cooling filters, conduct the following
steps.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.9 for the developing cooling
filter /Y, No.10 for /M, No.11 for /C, No.12 for /K
5.9 Toner collection section

5.9.1 Replacing the toner collect box
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the toner collection door [1] and then pull out the toner
collection box [2].
F-62
2. Remove the label [2] from the toner collection box [1] and then
[2] [3]
cover the entrance of the toner collection box [1].
[1]
5.10 Paper feed section

5.10.1 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber
• Pick-up roller: Every 2,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 800,000 feeds)
• Paper feed roller rubber: Every 450,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 125,000 feeds)
* Be sure to replace the paper feed roller rubber together with the separation roller rubber at the same time.
(2) Procedure
Note
• Since the configurations of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 are the same, the following shows the steps of the paper feed tray /1.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] to remove
the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed roller assy, check that
there is no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[3] [2] [6] [5] [1] 3. Remove the bearing [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the pick-up roller, be sure to set it with
its arrow-marked side [4] on the C-clip side [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and remove the paper feed roller [6].
Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to set it
with its arrow-marked side [7] on the C-clip side [5].
6. Remove the paper feed roller rubber [8] from the paper feed roller.
Note
[4] [7]
• When reinstalling the paper feed rubber, be sure to set it
with its paint-marked side [9] on the arrow-marked side
[7].

8. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller rubber,
[9] [8] a03uf2c055ca Counter reset of the parts counter No.109 for the pick-up roller
paper feed tray /1, No.110 for the paper feed tray /2, No111 for the
paper feed tray /3.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.105 for the paper feed roller
rubber paper feed tray /1, No.106 for the paper feed tray /2, No107
for the paper feed tray /3.
5.10.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber

• Separation roller rubber: Every 450,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 125,000 feeds)
F-63
* Replace the separation roller rubber at the same timing as the paper feed roller rubber.
(2) Procedure
Note
[4] [8] [7] [3] [6]
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.5.10.1 Replacing
the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
2. Set the paper size guide [1] to the minimum width.
3. Loosen the screw [2], and while holding up the paper lift plate [3],
remove the paper stopper plate [4] by putting up a part [5] of it and
pulling out to the Fr side [6].
4. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the separation roller [8].
Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed roller, check that there is
no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
5. Remove the separation roller rubber [9] from the separation roller
[8].
[9] [10] [8] [1] [5] [2] Note
• When reinstalling the separation roller rubber, be sure to
set it with its paint-marked side [10] on the C-clip side [7].

7. After replacing the separation roller rubber, conduct the following
item.
For the separation roller rubber: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.105 for tray /1, No.106 for tray /2, No.107 for tray /3.
5.10.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch
• Paper feed clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3), /3 (CL5): Every 6,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
• Pre-registration clutches /1 (CL2), /2 (CL4), /3 (CL6): Every 6,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 2,000,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
Note
1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[2] [3] [2] [3] [3]
[1] a03uf2c052ca
F-64
[5] [3] [2] [1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove the 2 screws [2] and loosen the fixing shaft screw [3].
[4]
a03uf2c053ca
[9] [10] [4] [3] [1] 5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] to the rear side and then bring it
upward Disconnect the connector [5] and remove the paper feed
unit [4].
7. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the paper feed clutch /1 (MC7)
[3].
Note
• When reinstalling MC7, be sure to align each stopper [5]
to each guide [5].

9. Remove the C-clip [7] and remove the pre-registration clutch
(MC8) [8].
[8] [7] [6] [5] [2] a03uf2c057ca
Note
• When reinstalling MC8, be sure to align each stopper [9]
to each guide [10].
11. After replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration
clutch, conduct the following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.113 for the paper feed
clutch /1 (CL1), No.114 for /2 (CL3), No.115 for /3 (CL15)
Counter reset of the parts counter No.117 for the pre-registration
clutch /1 (CL1), No.118 for /2 (CL4), No.119 for /3 (CL6)
5.11 Vertical conveyance section

5.11.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL20) and /2 (CL21)
• Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL20): Every 3,600,000 prints
• Vertical conveyance clutch /2 (CL21): Every 3,600,000 prints
F-65
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the right covers /Up, /Lw1 and /Lw2. (Refer to G.2.2.3
Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, working table)
3. Remove 8 screws [2], and then remove the vertical conveyance
section [3]
[1]
[7] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], remove the support plate [2] and then
[5] [6]
remove the E-ring [3] and the gear [4].
5. Remove 2 clamps [5] to release the wiring harness and then
disconnect 2 connectors [6].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [7], and then remove the vertical conveyance
clutches /1 (CL20) [8] and /2 (CL21) [9].
[9] [3] [2] [1] [4] [8]
Note
[2]
• When reinstalling the vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL20)
[1], be sure to align the stopper [2] with the guide [3].
• When reinstalling the vertical conveyance clutch /2 (CL21)
[4], be sure to align the stopper [5] with the guide [6].
8. After replacing the vertical conveyance clutch, conduct the

[4] [6] [1] [3]
following item.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.120 for the vertical
conveyance clutch /1, No.121 for /2
5.12 Registration section

5.12.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet
• Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 prints
F-66
(2) Procedure
[2] reinstalling the duplex section)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
[1]

[1] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the registration cleaning sheet
[3].
6. After replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy, conduct the
following steps.
[2]
5.12.2 Replacing the registration roller assy

• Registration roller assy: Every 1,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
3. Remove the duplex section cover /Rt. (Refer to F.5.13.2 Replacing
the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2 (CL15))
4. Remove 2 connectors [1].
[1]
F-67
5. Remove the C-clips [1], 1 each, and remove the bearings [2] on
the front and the back, 1 each.
[6] [4] [5] [3] 6. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the registration unit [4].
Note
• When removing the registration unit, open the
conveyance guide plate /Up [5] and move the registration
unit to the back side of the duplex section by holding the
cover [6] and then remove it pulling out the shaft [7] on
the front from the panel [8] of the duplex section.
• When reinstalling the registration unit, be careful not to
damage the paper feed side of the guide plate.
[2] [8]
[7]
[1]
[2] [1]
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the registration gear [2] and the
[3] [5] pin [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the registration gear, be sure to reinstall
the pin.
8. Remove the E-rings [4], 1 each, and remove 2 bearings [5].

[1] [2] [8] [4]
9. Release the hook [7] of the spring [6] and then remove the
registration roller assy [8].
Note
• When reinstalling the spring, be sure to set it at its
original position.
11. After replacing the registration roller assy, conduct the following
steps.
[7]
[6] [5] [4]
5.12.3 Replacing the loop roller cleaning assy

• Loop roller cleaning assy: Every 600,000 prints
F-68
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
2. Remove the registration unit. (Refer to F.5.12.2 Replacing the
registration roller assy)
4. Remove the screw [3] while lifting up the conveyance guide plate
[2] and remove the cover section [4].
[4]
[1]
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the cover section [1], be sure to install it
so that the cover section [1] is put over the conveyance
guide plate [2].
[1]
F-69
[2] [1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the assist stay /A [2].
Note
• Note that the registration unit [3] and the assist stay assy
[2] are bound with the wiring
[1] [3]
Note
[1] [2] • When reinstalling the assist stay assy, be sure to fit 2
projections [2] of the registration unit to 2 holes [1] of the
assist stay assy.
• When reinstalling the assist stay assy, be sure to fit the
projection [3] of the assist stay assy to the hole [4] of the
registration unit.
[3] [4]
[1] 6. When there is paper dust piled in the registration unit [1], be sure
to clean it with the cleaning pad.
7. Release 2 E-rings [2] and remove the loop roller cleaning assy [3]
to the arrow-marked direction.
[3]
[2]
F-70
Note
• When reinstalling the loop roller cleaning assy, be sure to
tilt 2 scrapers [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
5.13 Duplex section

5.13.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the duplex section
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front doors /Rt [1] and /Lt [2].
[2] [1]
2. While releasing the lock [2], push the lever that pulls out the duplex
[3] section [1] down in the counterclockwise direction and remove the
duplex section [3].
Note
• To prevent the main body from falling, the process unit
and the duplex section cannot be pulled out at the same
time.
• When pulling out the duplex section, return the process
unit to the main body in advance.
• When the duplex section cannot be pulled out, check to
see whether the lock levers /1 and /2 are distorted and
replace them if necessary. (Refer to G.2.2.11 Replacing the
lock levers /1 and /2)
3. When reinstalling it, push in the duplex section and bring up the
lever that pulls out the duplex section.
[1] [2]
5.13.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2 (CL15)

• Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL14): Every 3,600,000 prints
• Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (CL15): Every 3,600,000 prints
F-71
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the duplex section cover /Rt [2].
[1]
4. Remove the screw [1], and pull out the duplex section pull out
[2] [1]
lever [2].
[2] [3] 5. Open the jam release lever [1].

6. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the duplex section cover /Lt [3].
[1]
[2]

8. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the ADU conveyance motor /3
assy [3].
[2] [3]
F-72
[6] [5] [1] 9. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].

10. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and then remove the intermediate
Note
• When reinstalling CL14 and CL15, be sure to align each
[2] [1] stopper [5] with each guide [6].
12. After replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch, conduct the
following items.
[4] [2] For the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2 (CL15):
[6] [5]
5.13.3 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), /3 (CL9) and /4 (CL10)
• ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), /3 (CL9) and /4 (CL10): Every 7,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: 3,600,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[4]
2. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2
(CL15))
3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
[3] 4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the ADU conveyance
Note
[2] • When reinstalling CL7 and CL8, be sure to align each
stopper [5] with each guide [6].
[1] [5] [6] [2] [1]

[1] [5] [6]
6. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the ADU conveyance
Note
• When reinstalling CL9 and CL10, be sure to align each
[1] stopper [5] with each guide [6].
[6]
8. After replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), /3
[5]
(CL9) and /4 (CL10), conduct the following items.
[2] [3] [4] [2]
5.13.4 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /5 (CL11), /6 (CL12) and /7 (CL13)
• ADU conveyance clutches /5 (CL11), /6 (CL12), /7 (CL13): Every 7,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,600,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 2. Remove the duplex section covers /Rt and /Lt. (Refer to F.5.13.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /1 (CL14) and /2
(CL15)
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the ADU lock solenoid unit [3].
F-73
[7] [1] [6] [7]
6. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and then remove the ADU
conveyance clutches /5 (CL11) [3], /6 (CL12) [4] and /7 (CL13) [5].
Note
• When reinstalling CL11, CL12 and CL13, be sure to align
[5] each stopper [6] with each guide [7].
[6]
[3] [2] 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8. After replacing the ADU conveyance clutch, conduct the following
item.
[2]
[4]
[2]
[7] [6]
5.13.5 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning brush and the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning
stay
• Intermediate roller cleaning brush: Every 900,000 prints
• Intermediate roller cleaning stay: Every 900,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] reinstalling the duplex section)
3. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the wiring cover /Rt [2].
[1]

Note
• Be sure to pull out the wiring harness of the removed
connector to the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning
assy [2] side.
[1] [2]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the mount guide /Rr [2].
[1] [2]
F-74
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the intermediate conveyance
[1] roller cleaning assy [2].
[1] [2]
[2] 7. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the intermediate conveyance

roller cleaning stay [2].
[1]
8. Clean the paper dust around the intermediate conveyance roller

cleaning brush [1] with the blower brush.
[1]
[2] [3] [8] [8] [7]

9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
[6].
11. Remove the E-ring [7], 1 each, and then remove 2 bearings [8].
12. Remove the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning brush [9].
[1] [7] [6] [5] [4] 13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
14. After replacing the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning brush
and the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning stay, conduct the
following item.
For the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning brush: Counter
reset of the parts counter No.125
For the intermediate conveyance roller cleaning stay: Counter
reset of the parts counter No.124
[9]
5.13.6 Replacing the de-curler roller

• De-curler roller: Every 1,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 prints)
F-75
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Open the introduction section of duplex section [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the protective cover [3].
[3] [2]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the support plate /Fr [2].
6. Remove the de-curler roller assy [3].
[3]
[2] [1]
[4] [5] [5] [4] 7. Remove the E-ring [2], the bearing [3], 2 E-rings [4] and 2 bearings
[5] from the de-curler roller [1].
9. After replacing the de-curler roller, conduct the following steps.
[2] [3] [1]
5.13.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance roller cleaning member A, /B

• ADU conveyance roller cleaning member /A: Every 3,000,000 prints(Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,500,000 prints)
• ADU conveyance roller cleaning member /B: Every 3,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,500,000 prints)
F-76
(2) Procedure
2. Release the jam release lever [1] and move down the reverse unit
[2].
3. Loosen the screws [3], 1 each, and then remove the knobs [4] and
[5].
Note
• The knobs [4] and [5] have same shape, but the labels on
them are different. When reinstalling, be careful not to
confuse them.
4. Remove 5 screws [6] and remove the reverse unit cover [7].
Note
[6] [1] [6] • When removing the reverse unit cover, be sure to rotate
the locking material /Rt [8] to secure enough space for
removing operation.
[7] [4] [3] [5] [8]
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the guide plate /K [2].
[6]
6. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the guide plate /8 [4].
7. Remove 3 screws [5] and then remove the guide plate /10 [6].
[4] [2] [1] [3] [5]
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ADU conveyance

[4] [3] driven roller /3 assy [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the ADU conveyance driven roller /3
assy, be sure to insert each slit [4] to the projections [3] at
2 positions of the reverse unit.
[2] [1]
9. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 2 ADU conveyance

roller cleaning members /B [2].
[2]
[1]
F-77
[5] 11. Remove the screw [2] and remove the ADU conveyance sensor /1
assy [3].
12. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the ADU driven roller /2
assy [5].
Note
• When reinstalling the ADU driven roller /2 assy, be sure to
set it so that the guide pin [6] of the reverse unit is
inserted into the mounting hole [7].
[6][7] [3] [2] [1] [4]
13. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove 3 ADU conveyance
[1]
roller cleaning members /A [2].
15. After replacing the ADU conveyance roller cleaning members /A
and /B, conduct the following items.
For ADU conveyance roller cleaning member /A: Counter reset of
the parts counter No.140
For ADU conveyance roller cleaning member /B: Counter reset of
[2] the parts counter No.141
5.13.8 Replacing the ADU reverse cleaning assy

• ADU reverse cleaning assy: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Release the jam release lever and move down the reverse unit.
(Refer to F.5.13.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance roller cleaning
member A, /B)
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the ADU reverse cleaning assy
[2] to the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Be sure to remove the ADU reverse cleaning assy [2]
while supporting it from below, otherwise it falls down.
• Note that there is paper dust piled in the ADU reverse
cleaning assy [2].

[2] Note
• When reinstalling the ADU reverse cleaning assy, be sure
to fit 2 projections [1] of the ADU reverse cleaning assy to
2 holes [2] of the reverse unit.
[1]
F-78
5.13.9 Cleaning the ADU guide plate

• ADU guide plate: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
2. Lift the duplex section wiring harness assy [1] and clean the PET
part [2] of the ADU intermediate board with the cleaning pad.
3. Clean the ADU guide plate with the cleaning pad.
[3]
5.14 Paper exit section

5.14.1 Replacing the main body paper exit driven roller and the paper exit conveyance driven roller
• Main body paper exit driven roller: Every 3,000,000 prints
• Paper exit conveyance driven roller: Every 3,000,000 prints
F-79
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ADU section.
3. Remove the left cover.
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cover spacer /2 [2].
5. Disconnect 3 connectors [3], remove 4 screws [4] and then remove
the paper exit section [5].
[4]
[5]
[2] [1] [4]
6. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the cooling duct [2].

[1]
[2]

[3] [4] disconnect the connector [2].
8. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the mounting plate /1 [4].
[2] [1]
F-80
[2] [3] 9. Remove the spring [1] and E-ring [2], 1 each, and then remove the
bearing [3], 1 each.
10. Remove the paper exit conveyance driven roller [4] and the main
body paper exit driven roller [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
12. After replacing the paper exit driven roller and the paper exit
conveyance driven roller, conduct the followings.
For the paper exit driven roller of the main body: Counter reset of
the parts counter No.129
For the paper exit conveyance driven roller: Counter reset of the
[1]
[5] [4]
5.15 Fusing section

5.15.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• The fusing section is extremely hot immediately after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. To prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
5.15.2 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit

(1) Procedure
1. Open the paper exit guide section [1].
2. Loosen the screw [1] and pull the fusing fixing plate [2].
F-81
3. Hold the handles [1] on the front and rear of the fusing unit with 2
people and slide it until the fusing unit [2] hits to the front.
Note
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because
the fusing unit is heavy.
4. Hold the handles [1] on the front and rear of the fusing unit with 2
people and remove the fusing unit [2].

Note
the fusing unit is heavy.
• When reinstalling the fusing unit, be sure to check that the
rail is under the bearing.
• When reinstalling the fusing unit, be sure to slide it until it
hits to the rear side.
5.15.3 Replacing the fusing web unit

• Fusing web unit: Every 450,000 prints or the fusing web drive time 35,300 seconds, whichever is earlier.
F-82
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section from the main body. (Refer to F.5.13.1
[1] Pulling out/reinstalling the duplex section)
2. Remove the fusing section. (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/
reinstalling the fusing unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fusing cover /Fr [2].
[2]
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fusing cover /Up [2].
[1] [2] [1]
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing cover /Up, be sure to put so
that the upper side faces down.
Putting the upper side facing up has a risk of breakage of
the fusing cover /Up.
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fusing cover /Rt [2] in
[1]
the arrow-marked direction.
[2]
F-83
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the fusing web unit [3] in the
[4]
arrow-marked direction holding the handle [2].
Note
• Be careful not to make the spring [4] and the bearing of
the fusing web unit touched with the fusing unit [5].

Note
• When the fusing web slacks, rotate the screw [6].
[5]
8. After replacing the fusing web unit, conduct the following item.
[1]
Counter reset of the parts counter No.82 and No.83
[3] [2]
[6]
5.15.4 Replacing the fusing external heating unit, the fusing temperature sensor assy (external heating) and the fusing
heater /5
• Fusing external heating unit: Every 450,000 prints
• Fusing heater /5: Every 2,700,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/reinstalling
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing cover. (Refer to F.5.15.3 Replacing the fusing
web unit)
4. Remove the fusing web unit. (Refer to F.5.15.3 Replacing the
fusing web unit)
disconnect 4 connectors [2].
6. Remove the screw [3] and then release the ground [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing external heating unit, be sure
to set the wiring harness to the proper clamp and lock the
clamp.
Contact of the wiring harness and the 1st wiring harness
[2] [4] [3]
has a risk of earth leakage.
F-84
7. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] to release the
[2] [1] [4] pressure.
8. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the pressure arms /Fr [4]
and /Rr [5] in the arrow-marked direction [6].
9. Remove the fixing plate [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[3]
[5] [6] [4]
10. Release 2 pins [2] and then remove the fusing external heating
unit [3].
[1] Note
• When removing the unit, be sure to pull out the left side
first so that the unit and the gear do not contact with each
other.
• Never touch the thermostat [4] directly.
• Be sure that the replacement cycle differs between the
[3] [2] fusing external heating unit, the fusing temperature
sensor assy (external heating) and the fusing heater /5.
[4]
11. Remove the clamp to release the wiring harness. Then, remove
[2] the screw [1] and remove the fusing temperature sensor assy
(external heating) [2].
[1]
F-85
12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then release the wiring harness from the
cable clamp.
[2] [1] 13. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the heater support plate /
Rr [3].
14. Remove 2 fastons [4].
15. Remove 2 screws [5] and then release the wiring harness from the
cable clamp.
16. Remove 2 clamps [6] to release the wiring harness.
17. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the heater support plate /
Fr [8].
18. Remove the fusing heater /5 [9].
Note
• When removing the heater support plates /Fr and /Rr, be
[4] [3] careful not to damage the wiring harness.
[9] [6]
[5] [7] [8]
Note
[1]
• When reinstalling the fusing heater /5, be sure to install it
so that the manufacturer mark comes to the rear side, and
be sure to fit the projection [1] of the fusing heater /5 to
the notch [2] of the heater holder.
20. After replacing the fusing external heating unit, fusing temperature
sensor assy (external heating) and the fusing heater /5, conduct
the following items.
For the fusing external heating unit: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.84
For the fusing heater /5: Counter reset of the parts counter No.100
[2]
5.15.5 Replacing the fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1
• Fusing roller assy: Every 450,000 prints
F-86
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
web unit)
4. Open the fusing paper exit guide assy [1] and remove the screws
[2] and [3]. Then remove the open/close pins /Fr [5] and /Rr [6]
while holding the fusing unit /Up [4].
[5] [3]
[2] [4]
[1]
5. Open the fusing unit /Up [1] in the arrow-marked direction.

[4] [5]
6. Remove the clamp [2] to release the wiring harness and then
disconnect the connector [3].
Rr [5].
8. Remove the clamps [6] to release the wiring harness and then
remove the faston [7].
Fr [9].
[1] [3] [2]
[9] [8]
[6] [7]
F-87
[2] Note
• When reinstalling the heater support plate /Rr, be sure to
align the projection [1] of the fusing heater /1 and the
notch [2] of the heater support plate /Rr.
[1]
10. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the jam release knob [2].
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove 2 bearing holders [4] in the
arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the fusing roller assy.
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
12. Remove the fusing roller assy [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
[4] Note
• When removing the fusing roller assy or when installing
the new fusing roller, be sure to hold the side edges [2]
not to touch the roller.
• When reinstalling the fusing roller assy, be sure to install
so that the bearing [3] comes to inside of the panel [4].
• When reinstalling the new fusing roller assy, be sure to
apply the Multemp FF-RM to the gear [5].
• Be sure that the replacement cycle differs between the
fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1.
[3] [1]
[5] [2]
F-88
13. Remove the fusing heater /1 [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing heater /1, be sure to install it
so that the manufacturer mark [2] comes to the gear side
[3].
15. After replacing the fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1,
conduct the followings.
For fusing roller assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.88
For the fusing heater /1: Counter reset of the parts counter No.98
[1] [3]
5.15.6 Replacing the fusing belt unit /Lw, fusing heater /4, lubrication to the fusing pressure arms /Fr and /Rr
• Fusing belt unit /Lw: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Periodic lubrication parts/Cycle

• Fusing pressure arm /Fr, /Rr: Every 450,000 prints
(3) Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/
the fusing unit)
web unit)
4. Open the fusing unit /Up. (Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the fusing
roller assy and the fusing heater /1)
6. Release the pressure arms /Fr [2] and /Rr [3] in the arrow-marked
direction to remove.
[1] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-89
Note
• The pressure arm /Fr has the engraved mark "F", while
the /Rr has "R." When reinstalling them, be sure to check
the engraved marks "F" and "R" [1].
[1]
7. Remove 2 clamps [1] and release the wiring harness, and then
remove the faston [2].
8. Remove the fusing belt unit /Lw [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When removing the fusing belt unit /Lw [3], release the
gear by lifting the edge of the fusing belt unit /Lw [4].
Then, insert fingers to the rear and pull it out while
gripping it securely.
• When reinstalling the fusing belt unit /Lw [3], be careful
not to damage the belt surface.
• The replacement cycle differs between the fusing belt
unit /Lw and the fusing heater /4.
[3] [2] [1]
[4] [1]
[2]
F-90
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing belt unit /Lw, be sure to push
[2]
the section [2] to engage the gear [1].
[1]
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing belt unit /Lw, be sure to
install so that the bearing [1] hit the inside of the metal
plate [2].
When the bearing does not hit the metal plate, press the
area [3] to adjust the position.
[3] [1] [2]
9. Apply the multemp FF-RM to the fusing pressure arms /Fr [1] and /
Rr [2].
[2] [1]
F-91
[3] 10. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and then remove the heater holder
[2], 1 each.
Note
• Be careful not to remove the screw [3], since it is not
allowed to be adjusted.
11. Remove the fusing heater /4 [4].

Note
• When reinstalling the fusing heater /4, be sure to set so
that the manufacture mark comes to the rear side.
[4] [1] [2] 13. After replacing the fusing belt unit /Lw and the fusing heater,
For the PCC unit: Counter reset of the parts counter No.87
For the fusing heater lamp /4: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.99
[3]
[2] [1]
5.15.7 Position adjustment of the fusing belt /Lw

Note
• Adjust the position of the fusing belt /Lw when the fusing belt /Lw cannot be controlled because of too much distortion to the
front or to the rear.
• The adjustment differs depending on which side the fusing belt /Lw is tilted.
(1) Procedure
2. Open the paper exit guide section. (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/
3. Open the fusing paper exit guide assy. (Refer to F.5.15.5
Replacing the fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1)
4. Check the distances [4] and [5] from the edges of the fusing belt /
Lw [1] to the bearings [2] and [3] of the belt and judge which side
the fusing belt /Lw is tilted.
Note
• The tilt direction of the fusing belt /Lw is the one whose
distance to the bearings is shorter.
[3] [1] [2]
[5] [4]
F-92
5. Close the exit guide section and the fusing paper exit guide assy.
Then, set back the duplex section to the main body and close the
front door.
6. When the tilt direction is front: Enter "47-30" on the "I/O Check
Mode" in the service mode and then press the start button.
7. When the tilt direction is rear: Enter "47-29" on the "I/O Check
Mode" in the service mode and then press the start button.
8. Pull out the duplex section again and open the fusing paper exit
guide assy. Then, turn the gear [1] to the arrow-marked direction to
return the position of the fusing belt /Lw [2] to the center.
Note
• Do not turn the gear to the direction other than arrow-
[1] [2] marked.
5.15.8 Replacing the fusing swing shaft assy

• Fusing swing shaft assy: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fusing belt /Lw cooling
duct [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[1] 4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fusing swing shaft
assy [2].
6. After replacing the fusing swing shaft assy, conduct the following
steps.
[2]
5.15.9 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy (lower belt)

• Fusing temperature sensor assy (lower belt): Every 2,700,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing belt /Lw cooling duct. (Refer to F.5.15.8
Replacing the fusing swing shaft assy)
5. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the fusing temperature
sensor assy (lower belt).
7. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy (lower belt),
[1] [2]
F-93
5.15.10 Replacing the fusing paper exit guide assy and the fusing claw unit
• Fusing paper exit guide assy: Every 450,000 prints
• Fusing claw unit: Every 450,000 prints
• Fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy: Every 450,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[4][5] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
the fusing unit)
3. Open the fusing paper exit guide [1].
4. Remove the screws [2], 2 each, and remove the fusing paper exit
guide assy [3] while opening the outer metal frame.
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing paper exit guide assy [3], be
sure to align the projection [4] with the positioning hole
[5].
[2]
[4][5] [3] [1]
[2]
F-94
[2][3] 5. While opening the outer metal frame, remove the fusing paper exit
guide /Lw assy [1].
Note
• When reinstalling the fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy [1],
be sure to align the projection [2] with the positioning hole
[3].
[2][3] [1]
6. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and then remove the bracket [2], 1
[2] [1]
each.
7. Remove the fusing claw unit [3].
9. After replacing the fusing paper exit guide assy, fusing claw unit,
and fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy, conduct the following steps.
For the fusing paper exit guide assy: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.86
For the fusing claw unit: Counter reset of the parts counter No.89
For the fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.160
[1] [2] [3]
F-95
5.15.11 Replacing the fusing actuator

• Fusing actuator: Every 2,700,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing claw unit. (Refer to F.5.15.10 Replacing the
fusing paper exit guide assy and the fusing claw unit)
4. Remove the screw [1], disconnect the connector [3] and then
remove the fusing actuator [3].
6. After replacing the fusing actuator, conduct the following steps.
[2] [3] [1]
5.15.12 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller /Lw

• Fusing paper exit roller /Lw: Every 1,350,000 prints
F-96
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit
3. Open the fusing paper exit guide. (Refer to F.5.15.10 Replacing
the fusing paper exit guide assy and the fusing claw unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [1], 1 each, and then remove the bearing [2], 1
each.
5. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the gear [4].
6. Remove the fusing paper exit roller /Lw [5] in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
• The gear [4] has a one-way mechanism on the inside. Be
[3] [4] careful not to confuse the direction.
8. After replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Lw, conduct the

following steps.
[5] [2] [1]
5.15.13 Replacing the web motor assy

• Web motor assy: Every 7,500,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] reinstalling the duplex section)
the fusing unit)
web unit)
6. Pull the web motor assy [4] to release the joint of the gear, and
then remove it in the arrow-marked direction.
8. After replacing the web motor assy, conduct the following steps.
[3]
5.15.14 Replacing the fusing web torque limiter and the fusing web prevention part
• Fusing web torque limiter: Every 900,000 prints
• Fusing web prevention part : Every 900,000 prints
F-97
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
web unit)
4. Remove the fusing web unit. (Refer to F.5.15.3 Replacing the
fusing web unit)
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the fusing web prevention
part [2] by rotating it in the arrow-marked direction.
6. Remove the bearing [3].
[1]
Note
[3] [1] • When reinstalling the fusing web prevention part [1], be
sure to align the projection [2] with the positioning hole [3]
by rotating it in the arrow-marked direction.
[2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the assist stay [2].
[1]
[2]
F-98
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[3] [2] 9. Remove the support plate [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
10. Pull out the drive shaft [1] forward.

11. Remove the E-ring [2], and then remove the gear [3] and the
[4] [3] torque limiter [4].
Note
• Be careful not to drop the pin [5].
13. After replacing the fusing web torque limiter, the web prevention
part assy, conduct the following steps.
For the fusing web torque limiter: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.90
For the web prevention part assy : Counter reset of the parts
counter No.91
[5] [2] [1]
5.15.15 Replacing the fusing refresh roller assy

• Fusing refresh roller assy: Every 1,350,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[2] [5] [4] reinstalling the duplex section)
the fusing unit)
web unit)
4. Remove the fusing roller assy. (Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the
fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1)
5. Remove the screw [1] and then lift the presser plate [2] in the
arrow-marked direction [3].
6. Remove the fusing refresh roller assy [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [5].
8. After replacing the fusing refresh roller assy, conduct the following
steps.
[3] [1]
5.15.16 Replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy (fusing roller)

• Fusing temperature sensor assy (fusing roller): Every 2,700,000 prints
F-99
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
the fusing unit)
web unit)
5. Remove the fusing refresh roller assy. (Refer to F.5.15.15
Replacing the fusing refresh roller assy)
7. Remove 2 clamps [2] and then remove 2 screws [3] to release the
wiring harness.
[1] [3] [2] 8. Remove 2 clamps [1] to release the wiring harness. Then, remove
the screw [2] and remove the fusing temperature sensor assy [3].
10. After replacing the fusing temperature sensor assy(fusing roller),
5.15.17 Replacing the fusing drive assy

• Fusing drive assy: Every 2,250,000 prints
(2) Procedure
the fusing unit)
disconnect the connectors [2] and [3].
[1]
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the wiring plate [2].

[2]
[1]
F-100
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the fusing drive assy [2].
Note
[2]
• Be careful that the fusing motor (M48) and the fusing belt /
Lw release time motor (M50) are not included as the
periodically replaced parts.
[1]
6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the fusing motor (M48) [2].
[1]
[2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the fusing belt /Lw release
[2] time motor (M50) [2].
9. After replacing the fusing drive assy, conduct the following steps.
[1]
F-101
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE DF-62...
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-622

6.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

6.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the paper feed unit
(1) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover [1].
[2] [2]
2. Release 2 locks [2].
3. While pushing the paper feed unit [3] to the paper feed cover side
[1], turn the paper feed guide [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5]
to remove it to the upper side.
Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to set 3
claws [6] of the paper feed guide to the mounting holes
[7].
• When reinstalling the paper feed guide, be sure to reinstall
so that the no paper detection actuator [8] comes out from
[5] [1] [4] [3] [5] the paper feed guide [4].
[8] [6] [7]
a052f2c001ca
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the bearing plate [2].
[1]
5. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
6. Move 2 bearings [4] inward to remove the paper feed unit [5].
[2]
[5]
[3] [4]
[4] [3]
a052f2c002ca
F-102
[4] [3] [2] [1]
Note
• When removing the paper feed unit, be careful not to
damage the arm [2] with the shaft [1].
• When reinstalling the unit, be sure to check that the arm
[2] is on the shaft [1].
• When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the claw [3]
under the cover plate section [4].
a052f2c003ca
6.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
(1) Spotted replaced parts/cycle
• Paper feed roller
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 625,000 feeds)
• Pick-up roller
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the paper feed unit (Refer to F.6.2.1 Removing/
reinstalling the paper feed unit)
a052f2c004ca
4. Push the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] to remove the
[5] [4] [1] [3] [2]
pin [3]. Then, remove the gear [1] and the belt [4] in the arrow-
marked direction [5].
a052f2c005ca
[1] [2] [3]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], remove the gear [2] and then remove the
pin [3].
Note
• Note that the pin [3] drops when the gear [2] is removed.
a052f2c006ca
6. Remove the arm [1] and remove the pin [2].

[1] [2]
Note
• Note that the pin [2] drops when the arm [1] is removed.
a052f2c007ca
F-103
[2] [3] [1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3] from
the paper feed roller assy [2].
a052f2c008ca
[1] [2] [4] 8. Remove the C-clip [1] and then pull out the paper feed roller [2]
from the shaft to replace.
Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed roller, be sure to reinstall
so that the side with arrow mark [3] faces to the gear [4].
[3]
a052f2c009ca

[2] Note
• Note that the pin [2] drops when the C-clip [1] is removed.
10. Remove the pin [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3].
[3] 11. Remove the C-clip [4].
Note
• Note that the pin [5] drops when the C-clip [4] is removed.
12. Remove the pin [5] and remove the pick-up roller [6].
14. After replacing the pick-up roller and paper feed roller, conduct the
following steps.
- For pick up roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.288
- For the paper feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
289
[6]
[5]
a052f2c010ca
6.2.3 Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller
F-104
(2) Procedure
2. Release the claw lock [2] of the separation unit cover to the inside
[2]
to remove.
[1]
[2]
a052f2c011ca
[1] 3. Hold the edges of the roller shaft and pull up the separation roller
[1].
a052f2c012ca
[1] 4. Remove the separation unit [1] to replace.

6. After replacing the separation roller, conduct the following item.
a052f2c013ca
6.2.4 Cleaning the timing sensor (PS302)

• Timing sensor (PS302)
: Every 300,000 prints
F-105
(2) Procedure
1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.10.2
[1] [2] [4] [5] [3] [2]
Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees))
2. Open the DF [1] vertically.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then open the metal plate [3] in the
Note
• Note that each of 2 screws is different type.
4. Clean the timing sensor (PS32) with a blower brush from the hole
[5].
a052f2c014ca
6.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the registration roller cover

[3] 2. Raise the paper feed tray [2] straight up.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the registration roller cover
[4].
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
a052f2c015ca
6.2.6 Cleaning the registration roller

• Registration roller
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Wipe 3 registration rollers [1] with the cleaning pad soaked in the
drum cleaner.
a052f2c016ca
F-106
6.2.7 Cleaning the registration sensor (PS301)

• Original registration sensor (PS301)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (Refer to F.6.2.5 Removing/
[1]
reinstalling the registration roller cover)
2. Clean the registration sensor (PS301) [2] with the blower brush.
a052f2c017ca
F-107
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE PF-70...
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PF-704/705

CAUTION
7.2 Paper feed tray section

7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller /Lw and the loop roller bearing /Lw
• Loop roller /Lw
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 feeds)
• Loop roller bearing /Lw
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 6,000,000 feeds)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the tray 3 at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Procedure
for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fan cover [2].
[2]
[6] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning stay [2].
4. Remove the E-rings [3], 1 each, and slide the loop roller bearing /
Lw [4] backward and then remove the loop roller bearing /Lw [5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6].
[4] [5]
[2]
[1]
F-108
6. Slide the pulley [1] frontward and remove the pin [2].
7. Remove the pulley [1] and the belt [3].
[2] [3] [1] [5] [4]
8. Remove the loop roller bearing /Lw [4].
9. Slide and remove the loop roller /Lw [5].
11. After replacing the loop roller /Lw and the loop roller bearing /Lw,
For loop roller /Lw: Counter reset of the parts counter No.173 for
the 1st tandem, No.185 for the 2nd tandem
For loop roller bearing: Counter reset of the parts counter No.174
for the 1st tandem, No.186 for the 2nd tandem
7.3 Paper feed suction section

7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutches /1 (CL15), /2 (CL16) and /3 (CL17)
• Suction belt clutch /1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), /3 (CL17)
: Every 6,000,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feeds)
: Every 12,000,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000,000 feeds)*1
*1 Periodical replacement cycle when using as the 2nd tandem.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.4.3.6 Rear cover /Rt)
[4] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the suction belt
clutches /1 (CL15) [4], /2 (CL16) [5] and /3 (CL17) [6].
Note
[5] • When reinstalling, be sure to insert the stopper [7] of the
clutch over the projection [8] of the metal frame.

6. After replacing the suction belt clutches /1 (CL15), /2 (CL16), and /
3 (CL17), conduct the following items.
[6] For suction belt clutch /1: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
162 for the 1st tandem, No.175 for the 2nd tandem
For suction belt clutch /2: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
[1] For suction belt clutch /3: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
7.4 Vertical conveyance section

7.4.1 Replacing the exit clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2) and the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) and /3 (CL5)
• Exit clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2)
• Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4)
• Vertical conveyance clutch /3 (CL5), /4 (CL6)
*1 Actual replacement cycle when using at the 1st/2nd tandem.
F-109
(2) Procedure
[4] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.4.3.6 Rear cover /Rt)
[6] 3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the exit
clutches /1 (CL1) [4] and /2 (CL2) [5] and the vertical conveyance
clutches /1 (CL3) [6], /2 (CL4) [7], /3 (CL5) [8], and /4 (CL6) [9].
[7]
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to insert the stopper [10] of the
6. After replacing the exit clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), vertical
[8] conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4), /3 (CL5) and /4 (CL6),
[9] For the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) and the
exit clutch /1 (CL1): Counter reset of the parts counter No.165 (1st
tandem), No.178 (2nd tandem).
For the exit clutch /2 (CL2): Counter reset of the parts counter No.
[1]
166 (1st tandem), No.179 (2nd tandem).
[2] For the vertical conveyance clutches /3 (CL5), /4 (CL6): Counter
reset of the parts counter No.167 (1st tandem), No.180 (2nd
[10] tandem).
[11]
[3]
7.5 Horizontal conveyance section

7.5.1 Replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7) and the horizontal conveyance clutches /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
• Pre-registration clutch (CL7)
: Every 2,100,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,000,000 feeds)
• Horizontal conveyance clutch /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] [6] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the pre-
registration clutch (CL7) [4] and the horizontal conveyance
Note

6. After replacing the pre-registration clutch (CL7), the horizontal
conveyance clutches /1 (CL8) and /2 (CL9), conduct the following
items.
Counter reset of the parts counter No.168 (1st tandem), No.181
(2nd tandem).
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]
7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing
• Pre-registration roller
F-110
: Every 6,000,000 prints
• Pre-registration bearing
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit. (Refer to G.4.3.33
[1] Horizontal conveyance unit)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration roller
bearing [2].
[2]
[5].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration roller
bearing [2].
5. Slide and remove the pre-registration roller [3].
7. After replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration
roller bearing, conduct the following items.
For the pre-registration roller bearing: Counter reset of the parts
counter No.170 (1st tandem), No.182 (2nd tandem).
For the pre-registration roller: Counter reset of the parts counter
No.171 (1st tandem), No.183 (2nd tandem).
[3]
7.5.3 Replacing the loop roller /Up

• Loop roller /Up
*1 Periodical replacement cycle when using as the 2nd tandem.
F-111
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit. (Refer to G.4.3.33
Horizontal conveyance unit)
[7] 2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pulley cover [2], the
belt [3], the pulley [4] and the pin [5].
Note
[8] • When reinstalling the pulley cover [2], be sure to install it
so that the stepped side [6] comes to the E-ring side [1].
3. Remove 2 E-rings [7] and then remove 2 bearings [8].

4. Slide and remove the loop roller /Up [9].
6. After replacing the loop roller /Up, conduct the following items.
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.172 for the 1st tandem, No.
188 for the 2nd tandem
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [2] [6]
[8]
[7]
7.6 Tandem conveyance section

7.6.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14)
• Tandem conveyance clutch /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), /5 (CL14)
Note
• Be sure to replace only the 1st tandem of the coupling It does not need the replacement when using just 1 PF-704/705.
(2) Procedure
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the tandem
conveyance clutches /1 (CL10) [4], /2 (CL11) [5], /3 (CL12) [6], /4
(CL13) [7], and /5 (CL14) [8]
Note

6. After replacing the tandem conveyance clutches/1 (CL10), /2
[1] (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14), conduct the following
items.
[2] Counter reset of the parts counter No.169
[9]
[10]
[3]
F-112
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE EF-10...
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE EF-101

CAUTION
• The fusing section is extremely hot immediately after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. To prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
8.2 2nd Fusing section

8.2.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing unit
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Lower the latch [2] and turn down the lever [3]. Then, Pull out the
mount [4].
3. Lift the lever [1] on the front side and then open the exit guide plate
[2].
4. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
5. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].
F-113
6. Loosen the screw [1] until it is released by the spring force.
[4] 7. Hold the handle [1] at 2 positions and slide the 2nd fusing unit [2]
to the front until it is stuck. Then, lift it up to remove.
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set the unit on the fusing
mount so that the triangle mark [4] of the 2nd fusing unit
aligns with the triangle mark [3] of the connector
mounting bracket. Then, slide it to the rear until it is stuck.
[3]
8.2.2 Replacing the 2nd fusing idler gear /3

• 2nd Fusing Idler Gear/3
: Every 1,800,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,350,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the 2nd fusing unit. (Refer to F.8.2.1 Replacing the 2nd
[2] [1] fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the front cover [2].
F-114
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sensor assy [2].
[1] [2] [6]
4. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the actuator [4].
5. Disconnect the connectors [5] and [6].
[5]
[4]
[3]
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the 2nd fusing drive assy
[2].
Note
• When reinstalling, make sure that the metal frame is fitted
with no gap before securing it with screws.
[2] [1]
F-115
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the 2nd fusing idler gear /3 [2].
[1] [2]
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to align it to the pin [3].
• When reinstalling, be sure to apply multemp FF-RM.

Note
• After replacing the parts, be sure to conduct the counter
reset of parts counter No.152.
[3]
8.2.3 Replacing the 2nd fusing heater

2nd Fusing Heater /Up, /Lw
Note
• The 2nd fusing heater /Up consists of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L/1), /2 (L/2) and /3 (L/3). In the same way, the 2nd fusing
heater /Lw consists of the fusing heater lamps /4 (L/4), /5 (L/5) and /6 (L/6).
• The fusing heaters /Up and /Lw are the same parts.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1]
fusing unit)
2. Remove the 2nd fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.8.2.2 Replacing the
2nd fusing idler gear /3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the 2nd fusing cover /RrUp
[2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fusing cover /RrLw [4].
[4] [3]
F-116
5. Remove 2 fastons with the crimping terminal [1] at the front side.
[3] [5] Note
• Be sure to remove the fastons with white wiring harness.
• The terminal connection positions can be exchanged
between the faston with white wiring harness and the
faston with black wiring harness.
[2]
6. Remove the screw [3], remove the wiring harness from the wiring
[1] harness clamp [4], and then remove the fusing heater mounting
bracket /FrUp [5].
[4] 7. Remove the screw [6], remove the wiring harness from the wiring
harness clamp [7], and then remove the fusing heater mounting
bracket /FrLw [8].
[2] [1] [7] [8] [6]
8. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness

[5] [7] [4] [3]
from the wiring harness clamp.
9. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 fusing heater mounting
brackets /Rr [4].
10. Straighten the wiring harness of the front side, and remove the 2nd
fusing heaters /Up [7] and /Lw [8] by pulling out them from the 2nd
fusing heating rollers /Up [6] and /Lw [2] to the rear side.
Note
• Never touch the lamp section (glass section) of the fusing
heater with bare hands.
• When pulling out from the 2nd fusing heating rollers /Up
[2] and /Lw, be careful not to damage the the fusing heater
lamps.
[1]
[3] [6] [4] [8]
Note
• Check that the projection [1] of the fusing heater is
securely fitted to the slit [2] of the fusing lamp mounting
bracket.
Note
[1] [2]
8.2.4 Replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Up and the 2nd fusing roller bearing
• 2nd fusing heating roller /Up
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 450,000 prints)
• 2nd fusing roller bearing
F-117
(2) Procedure
[1]
fusing unit)
3. Remove the fusing heater /Up. (Refer to F.8.2.3 Replacing the 2nd
fusing heater)
4. Remove the screws of the rear side [2] and of the front side [2],
and open the 2nd fusing unit /Up [3].
[3]
[2]
[3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the pin
[3].
[2]
[1]
F-118
6. Remove 3 screws [1] on the front side and then remove the
[3]
bearing mounting bracket [2] and the 2nd fusing roller bearing [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing roller bearing [3], be sure
to set it with its collar inside.
[2] [1]
7. Remove 3 screws [1] on the rear side and then remove the power
[1] [2]
supply bracket [2].
8. Remove 3 screws [1] on the rear side and then remove the bearing
mounting bracket [2] and the 2nd fusing roller bearing [3].
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the 2nd fusing roller bearing [3], be sure
to set it with its collar inside.
[1]
[3]
9. Insert the driver [2] into the 2nd fusing roller /Up [2] and pull out it
[4]
backward from the 2nd fusing belt /Up [3].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the 2nd fusing roller /Up and the
2nd fusing belt /Up.
• When holding the 2nd fusing belt /Up, be sure to hold by
the area within 10mm from its edge. Never touch the
surface of the paper pass-through section with bear
hands.
• When reinstalling, be sure to set it so that its side with
longer shaft comes to the front side.
Note
[2] [1] [3]
• After replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Up, be sure to
conduct the counter reset of parts counter No.149.
• After replacing the 2nd fusing roller bearing, be sure to
8.2.5 Replacing the 2nd fusing /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller bearing, the 2nd
fusing heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve)
• 2nd Fusing Belt /Up
• 2nd fusing heating roller /Up
• 2nd Fusing Belt Regulating Sleeve
• 2nd Fusing Bearing
F-119
• 2nd Fusing Insulating Sleeve
(2) Procedure
[1]
fusing unit)
3. Remove the 2nd fusing heater /Up. (Refer to F.8.2.3 Replacing the
2nd fusing heater)
4. Remove the 2nd fusing roller /Up. (Refer to F.8.2.4 Replacing the
2nd fusing roller /Up and the 2nd fusing roller bearing)
5. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the 2nd fusing cover /Up
[2].
[2]
6. Remove the O-rings [1], 1 each, and remove the 2nd fusing
[5] [2] [3] insulating sleeves [2] and the 2nd fusing heating roller bearings [3],
1 each.
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve [2] and
[4] [1] the fusing 2nd fusing heating roller bearing [3], be sure to
turn the flange outside.
• When reinstalling, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM inside
and outside of the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve [2].
7. Hold the inside area at the front and rear of the 2nd fusing heating
roller /Up [4] and remove it upward together with the fusing belt /
Up [6].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the 2nd fusing belt /Up [6] with
the metal plate. Be careful not to touch both of its front
and rear surface, other than 10mm of edge area.
[6]
• Never touch the roller surface of the 2nd fusing heating
roller /Up [4].
Note
[1]
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt /Up, be sure to set it
so that the surface with shiny stripe [1] on its edge comes
to rear side.
8. Remove the 2nd fusing heating roller assy /Up [1] pulling out from
[2]
the 2nd fusing belt /Up [2].
[1]
F-120
[1] [3] [2]

Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt /Up [1], remove the
packaging materials [2] and install it with the protect
paper (hydro-wipe) [2] to the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up.
Remove the protect paper [2] after installing the 2nd
fusing roller /Up to the 2nd fusing unit.
9. Remove the O-rings [2], 1 each at 2 positions, and remove the 2nd
fusing belt regulating sleeves [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2nd
[3] fusing heating roller /Up [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve [2],
[2]
be sure to set it with its flat surface inside.
[1]
Note
• After reinstalling the 2nd fusing roller /Up, check that the
2nd fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) contacts the 2nd
fusing belt /Up [2].
• After replacing the 2nd fusing belt /Up, be sure to conduct
the counter reset of parts counter No.144.
• After replacing the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up, be sure
to conduct the counter reset of parts counter No.143.
• After replacing the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve, be sure to
[2] [1] • After replacing the 2nd belt regulating sleeve, be sure to
8.2.6 Replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Lw and the 2nd fusing roller bearing
• 2nd Fusing Roller(Bottom)
• 2nd Fusing Ball Bearing
(2) Procedure
[2]
fusing unit)
3. Remove the 2nd fusing heater /Lw. (Refer to F.8.2.3 Replacing the
2nd fusing heater)
4. Open the 2nd fusing unit (refer to F.8.2.4 Replacing the 2nd fusing
roller /Up and the 2nd fusing roller bearing
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the 2nd fusing guide plate /
RtLw[2].
[1]
F-121
[3] [3].
[2]
[1]
7. While lifting the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw bearing bracket [1],
insert the screw driver [2] to the hole [3] on the rear side. Then,
insert the screw driver [2] up to the under the 2nd fusing heating
roller /Lw bearing bracket to loosen the tension of the fusing belt /
Lw.
Note
• The front side also has the hole and is the same
mechanism. Therefore, insert the screw driver to the front
side as necessary to improve the workability.
[2] [3] [1]
8. Remove 2 2nd fusing roller bearings [1].

[1]
9. Insert the screw driver [2] to the 2nd fusing roller /Lw [1] and
remove it to the rear side.
Note
• Be careful not to damage the 2nd fusing roller /Lw and the
2nd fusing belt /Lw.
• When holding the 2nd fusing belt /Lw, be sure to hold by
the area within 10mm from its edge. Never touch the
surface of the paper pass-through section with bear
hands.
Note
[2] [1] • After replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Lw, be sure to
8.2.7 Replacing the 2nd fusing /Lw, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw, the 2nd fusing heating roller bearing, the 2nd
fusing heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve)
• 2nd Fusing Belt /Lw
• 2nd Fusing Roller(Bottom)
• 2nd Fusing Bearing
F-122
• 2nd Fusing Insulating Sleeve
• 2nd Fusing Belt Regulating Sleeve
(2) Procedure
fusing unit)
[5] 2. Remove the 2nd fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.8.2.2 Replacing the
[4]
2nd fusing heater)
[3] 4. Remove the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw. (Refer to F.8.2.6
Replacing the 2nd fusing roller /Lw and the 2nd fusing roller
bearing)
5. Remove the O-rings [3] on the rear [1] and front [2], and remove
the 2nd fusing insulating sleeves [4] and the 2nd fusing heating
roller bearings [5], 1 each.
[1] Note
[6]
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve [4] and
the fusing 2nd fusing heating roller bearing [5], be sure to
turn the flange outside.
[7] • When reinstalling, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM inside
and outside of the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve [4].
6. Hold the inside area at the front and rear of the fusing heating
[3]
roller assy /Lw [6] and remove it upward together with the fusing
belt /Lw.
[4]
Note
• Be careful not to damage the 2nd fusing belt /Lw with the
[5] metal plate. Be careful not to touch both of its front and
[2]
rear surface, other than 10mm of edge area.
• Never touch the roller surface of the 2nd fusing heating
roller /Lw.
Note
[1]
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt /Lw, be sure to set it
so that the surface with shiny stripe [1] on its edge comes
to rear side.
7. Remove the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw [1] pulling out from the
[2]
2nd fusing belt /Lw [2].
[1]
F-123
[1] [3] [2]

Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt /Lw [1], remove the
packaging materials [2] and install it with the protect
paper (hydro-wipe) [2] to the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw.
Remove the protect paper [2] after installing the fusing
roller /Lw to the fusing unit.
8. Remove the O-rings [2], 1 each at 2 positions, and remove the 2nd
fusing belt regulating sleeves [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2nd
[3] fusing heating roller /Lw [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve [2],
[2]
be sure to set it with its flat surface inside.

Note
[1]
• After replacing the 2nd fusing belt /Lw, be sure to conduct
the counter reset of parts counter No.144.
• After replacing the 2nd fusing heating roller /Lw, be sure
to conduct the counter reset of parts counter No.143.
• After replacing the 2nd fusing insulating sleeve, be sure to
• After replacing the 2nd belt regulating sleeve, be sure to
8.2.8 Replacing the 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Up

• 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy /Up
(2) Procedure
[3] fusing unit
[2] 2. Remove the 2nd fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.8.2.2 Replacing the
[1]
3. Remove the 2nd fusing cover /Up. (Refer to F.8.2.5 Replacing the
2nd fusing /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up, the 2nd fusing
heating roller bearing, the 2nd fusing heat insulating sleeve and
the 2nd fusing belt regulating sleeve))
5. Release the projection [3] by widening the metal frame [2] slightly
outward, and then remove the 2nd fusing cover /RtUp [2].
[4]
F-124
[3] [4]
7. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness from the
clamp.
8. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the 2nd fusing
temperature sensor assy/Up [4].
Note
• After reinstalling, be sure to check that the temperature
detection section of the 2nd fusing temperature sensor
assy/Up touches the 2nd fusing belt /Up.

Note
[2] [1]
8.2.9 Replacing the 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Lw

• 2nd fusing temperature sensor assy /Lw
(2) Procedure
[3] [2]
fusing unit)
2nd fusing heater)
4. Remove the 2nd fusing roller /Lw. (Refer to F.8.2.6 Replacing the
2nd fusing roller /Lw and the 2nd fusing roller bearing
5. Remove the fusing belt /Lw and the fusing heating roller /Lw.
(Refer to F.8.2.7 Replacing the 2nd fusing /Lw, the 2nd fusing
heating roller /Lw, the 2nd fusing heating roller bearing, the 2nd
fusing heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd fusing belt regulating
sleeve))
7. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2nd fusing
[1] temperature sensor assy /Lw.
Note
• After reinstalling, be sure to check that the temperature
detection section of the 2nd fusing temperature sensor
assy /Lw touches the 2nd fusing belt /Lw.
8.3 Conveyance section

8.3.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing de-curler roller
• 2nd Fusing De-curler Roller
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the mount. (Refer to F.8.2.1
[2] [3]
Replacing the 2nd fusing unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the bracket [2]. Then, remove the
de-curler roller assy [3] by sliding it to the front side.
Note
• When reinstalling the bracket [2], be sure to set it with its
slotted hole down.
[1]
[4]
F-125
[1] [2] [3]
Note
• When reinstalling the bearing [1], be sure to set it with its
collar inside.
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and remove the pressure roller [3].
5. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the spacer [5] and the
bearing [6].
Note
• When reinstalling the bearing [6], be sure to set it with its
collar inside.
6. Remove the E-ring [7] to remove the pressure roller [8], and then
remove the 2nd fusing de-curler roller [9].
Note
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4]
8.3.2 Cleaning the De-curler driven roller

• De-curler driven roller
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door and pull out the mount. (Refer to F.8.2.1
2. Remove the 2nd fusing de-curler roller. (Refer to F.8.3.1 Replacing
the 2nd fusing de-curler roller)
3. Clean the de-curler driven roller [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and
the cleaning pad.
8.3.3 Replacing the 2nd fusing drawer entrance guide

• 2nd fusing mount entrance guide assy
F-126
(2) Procedure
[4][5] 1. Open the front door and pull out the mount. (Refer to "F.8.2.1
Replacing the 2nd fusing unit")
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
3. Clean the wax attached in the 2nd fusing mount entrance guide
assy [3] using the vacuum cleaner.
Note
• Be sure to clean inside the guide before removing the 2nd
fusing mount entrance guide assy, or the wax scrap may
drop on the conveyance section.
• When reinstalling the cover [2], be sure to set 3
projections [4] of the cover into 3 positioning holes [5].
[2] [1] [3]
[1] [2] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
5. Remove the screw [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the metal frame [1], be sure to set the
shaft [2] into the cut [3] of the metal frame.
[3] [2] [1]
6. Remove the screw [1] and remove the gate solenoid cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-127
[6][7] [4] [5] 7. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the E-ring [2], and then remove
2 screws [3].
8. While widening the distance of metal frames [4], remove the 2nd
fusing mount entrance guide assy [5].
Note
• 2nd fusing drawer entrance guide assy
[1] [2] [3]
8.4 Paper exit section

8.4.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing exit roller/Up
• 2nd fusing exit roller/Up
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Open the front door and pull out the mount. (Refer to F.8.2.1
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws [2], and then
remove the paper exit section [3].
F-128
3. Remove the spring [1] and E-ring [2], 1 each, and then remove the
bearings [3], 2 each.
4. Remove the 2nd fusing exit roller/Up [4] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] [2] [3]

Note
• When reinstalling the paper exit section, be sure to
engage it with the pin [2] by rotating the coupling [1].
[1] [2]
F-129
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE RU-50...
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-508/HM-101

CAUTION
9.2 Entrance conveyance section

9.2.1 Cleaning the entrance conveyance rollers /1 and /2, entrance conveyance roller guide PET (upper), entrance
conveyance roller /2 guide PET, and entrance guide plate /Lw corner section
• Entrance conveyance roller /1: Every 300,000 prints
• Entrance conveyance roller /2: Every 300,000 prints
• Entrance conveyance roller /1 guide PET (upper): Every 300,000 prints
• Entrance conveyance roller /2 guide PET: Every 300,000 prints
• Entrance guide plate 1 /Lw corner section: Every 300,000 prints
• Entrance guide plate 2 /Lt: Every 300,000 prints
(2) Procedure
1. Clean the entrance conveyance rollers /1 [1] and /2 [2], entrance
conveyance roller /1 guide PET (upper) [3], entrance conveyance
roller /2 guide PET [4], entrance guide plate 1 /Lw corner section
[5], and entrance guide plate 2 /Lt [6].
[5] [2] [4] [1] [3]
[6]
9.2.2 Replacing the entrance conveyance driven rollers /1 and /2

• Entrance conveyance driven roller /1
• Entrance conveyance driven roller /2
F-130
(2) Procedure
2. Open the entrance conveyance assy /Lw [1].
3. Open the entrance conveyance assy /Up [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then pull out the shaft [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the fan assy [6].
6. Remove the entrance conveyance assy /Up [2].
[1] [2] [6]
[4]
[3]

[2] [3] 8. Remove 4 E-rings [2].
9. Remove 8 bearings [3].
10. Remove the entrance conveyance driven roller /1 [4] and then
remove the entrance conveyance driven roller /2 [5].
11. After replacing the entrance conveyance driven roller /1 and /2,
[1] For entrance conveyance driven roller /1: Counter reset of the
For entrance conveyance driven roller /2: Counter reset of the
[5] [4]
9.3 Output paper density detection section

9.3.1 Cleaning the shutter
• Shutter: Every 600,000 prints
F-131
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the shutter stopper [2] in the
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 3. Pull out the shutter [1] and clean the correction plate [2] with a
blower brush.
Note
• Be careful that the shutter [3] falls down when it is pulled
out too much.
9.4 Humidification section (HM-101)

9.4.1 Replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water feed roller
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle
• Humidification roller /Rt
: every 300,000 prints
• Humidification roller /Lt
: every 300,000 prints
• Water feed roller
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 1,500,000 prints)
F-132
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
[1] 2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the humidification unit cover [2].
3. Pull out the humidification unit [3].
[2] [3]
[5] [8] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the connector cover /Lt [2].
5. Remove the screw [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
7. Open the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] and remove in the arrow-
Note
• When reinstalling the open/close plate /Lt assy [6], be sure
to hit the open/close plate /Lt assy [6] to the E-ring [8].
[7] [6]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
F-133
[1] [2] [3] [4] 8. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover /Rt
[2].
9. Release the clamp [3] and then disconnect the connector [4].
12. Open the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] and remove in the arrow-
[5] [8] [7] Note
• When reinstalling the open/close plate /Rt assy [7], be
sure to hit the open/close plate /Rt assy [7] to the E-ring
[9].
[6] [9]
[1] 13. Remove 4 screws [1].

14. Remove the humidification roller assy [2].
[2]
F-134
15. Check point when reinstalling the humidification roller assy.
[1] Note
• When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
set the projections [1] of the pressure release cam so that
they hit the pressure rollers [2] beforehand. (Execute this
setting to all 4 places.)
• When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure to
turn the gear so that the projection [3] of the gear aligns
with the notch [4] beforehand.
• When reinstalling the humidification roller assy, be sure
not to mis-align the positions of the projections of the
humidification pressure cam [1] and the gear [3].
[2] [2]
[3]
[4]
F-135
16. Put the humidification roller assy with bottom-up.
[8] [7] [12] [6] [5] [3] 17. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and remove 2 gears [2].
18. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the gear [5] with 2 bearings [4].
19. Remove the spacer [6].
20. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the gear [8]
21. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove the gear [10] and the spacer
[11].
22. Remove the gear [12].
[11] [10] [9] [4]
[2] [1] [2]
F-136
23. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then remove the humidification pressure
[8] [7] cams /FrRt [2] and /FrLt [3] and 2 bearings [4].
24. Remove the C-clips [5], and then remove the humidification
pressure cam /RrLt [6].
25. Remove the humidification pressure cam /RrRt [7] and 2 bearings
[8].
26. Remove the humidification rollers /Rt [9] and /Lt [10] in the arrow-
Note
• Remove the control roller [12] releasing to outside.
[6] [5]
[11] [10]
[12] [9]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
27. Check point when reinstalling the humidification rollers/Rt [1] and /
[1] [3]
Lt [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the humidification rollers /Rt [1] and /Lt
[2], be sure to note the following points.
The humidification roller /Rt is longer than the
humidification roller /Lt.
The side with the groove [3] on the roller shaft comes to
the front side.
Never touch the roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
F-137
28. Remove the C-clips [1], pressure rollers [2], and bearings [3], 4
[4] [5] [6] each.
29. Remove 2 water feed rollers [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5].
Note
• When reinstalling the water feed roller, never touch the
roller surface with bare hands.
[2]
[3] [1]
31. After replacing the humidification rollers /Rt and /Lt and the water
feed roller, conduct the following items.
For humidification roller /Rt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
322
For humidification roller /Lt: Counter reset of the parts counter No.
323
For water feed roller: Counter reset of the parts counter No.324
Note
• When reinstalling the pressure roller, be sure to set so
that the bearing [1] comes inside.
9.4.2 Replacing the water feed filter

• Water feed filter: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 300,000 prints)
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1] and then pull out the water feed tank [2].
[1]
F-138
[1] [2] 3. Remove 3 screws [1] and open the filter cap [2].
[1]
4. Remove the water feed filter [1].
6. After replacing the water feed filter, conduct the following item.
F-139
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE LS-5...
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LS-505

CAUTION

10.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/Cycle
• Stacker tray up down motor (M1)
: Every 1,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 feeds *2)
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000.
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Cover)
2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1).
[5] Note
• When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
[4] fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.224
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
10.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)

• Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8)
F-140
(2) Procedure
Note
• When conducting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
2. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
[2] 2 the fixing.
Note
• In this step, be careful not to release the fixing on the rear
1
guide rail [3].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2004c
3. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the
upper surface of it.
Note
• Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in
[1] advance.
• Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by
the bottom of the shift unit.
4. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from
[2]
the connector [4].
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
5. How to handle the ribbon cable.

Note
• Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable
[1] in the arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon
cable [3].
[3] When reinstalling the ribbon cable, slide the lock in the
reverse direction after inserting the cable.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F-141
7. Slide the guide rail [2] in the arrow-marked direction and release
the fixing.
8. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
9. Check point when reinstalling the belt.

Note
[2] • When attaching the belt [2] to the stopper section [1], slide
the shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and engage
[1] the stopper section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1] [4] 10. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts
[1].
Note
• When removing the conveyance unit [2], be careful that
the edge stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms /3 [4]
do not contact the belt [1].
[2]
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
F-142
13. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and
remove it.
14. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /3 assy
[4].
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
15. Check point when reinstalling the paper press solenoid/3 assy.
Note
• When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /3 assy, be
[1]
sure to insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section
[1] at the tip of the solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
[3] 16. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) [2].
[1]
[2] ls502fs2012c

F-143
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Cover)
[3] [4]
3. Remove the spring [2].
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid /1 assy
[4].
Note
• When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /1 assy, be
[6] sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[5] [1] a0h1t3c001ca
[1] 5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3]
from the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) [2].
[3] [2] a0h1t3c002ca

(2) Procedure
[2] [6] 1. Remove the front covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the paper press solenoid /2
(SD7) [4].
Note
[3]
• When reinstalling the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7), be
sure to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the
shaft into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

[1] [4] ls502fs2033c
10.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

• Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
F-144
(2) Procedure
[5] [6] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lw. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)
[3] [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the rear stopper solenoid (SD3), be sure
to insert the actuator [6] provided at the tip of the shaft
[4] into the slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.

[1] ls502fs2016c
F-145
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE FS-5...
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-521

CAUTION

11.2.1 Lubrication to bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
• Bypass roller /Lw pressure release cam
(2) Procedure
1. Lubricate to 2 bypass roller /Lw pressure release cams [1].
(Molykote EM-30L)
Note
• Lubricate to the arc of the bypass roller /Lw pressure
release cam [1].
[1] a0gyt3c013ca
11.3 Stacker section

11.3.1 Replacing the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
• Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
: Every 5,200,000 prints*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover
[3].
[2] a0gyt3c001ca
F-146
[6] [5] [1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and 2 screws [2], and then remove
the intermediate roller release solenoid [3] to the allowed direction
[4].
Note
• When installing it, insert the pin of the plunger [5] to the
groove [6] on the resin.
• When installing it, install with the screw [2] so that the
stroke A of the plunger gets to the standard value.
Standard value: A = 5.0mm to 6.0mm
A
[2] [3] [4] a0gyt3c002ca
11.3.2 Lubrication to worm gear and cam

• Warm gear and cam: Every 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the stacker unit [1] and lubricate to the cam [2] and all over
around the worm gear [3]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[3] [2] a0gyt3c014ca
11.4 Stapler section

11.4.1 Replacing the stapler assy
• Stapler assy /Fr
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 staples)
• Stapler assy /Rr
(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy

CAUTION
• After moving the stapler, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
• Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy.
• Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side [3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the
opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful not to close it.
• When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
F-147
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2030c
[2] [1] 1. Select 2 sheets A4 originals with 1-staple at the upper right corner,
make a print and then move the stapler to the stapling position.
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug from the power
outlet.
3. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
4. Remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[3] 5. Remove the stapler cartridges /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].
6. Remove the screws [3], 1 each, of the stoppers provided in front
and rear and pull further out the stacker unit.
[1] [2]
[3] fs503fs2005c
F-148
(3) Stapler assy /Fr

[2] [1] 1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler
assy."
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Fr [2].
[1] fs503fs2031c
[2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2032c
[7] [6] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding band [2].
5. Remove 1 screw [3] and raise the lower section of the stapler assy
mounting plate [4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide the
upper notch [6] to the lower side to release it from the pin [7] and
then remove the stapler assy /Fr [8] together with the mounting
plate [4].
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Fr, conduct the following item.
For fusing roller assy: Counter reset of the parts counter No.193
[8]
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3] fs503fs2033c
(4) Stapler assy /Rr

[1] [2] 1. Conduct "F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler
assy."
Note
• The following steps are the removal steps using a short
driver. When using a driver of a regular length, removal of
the stapler assy /Rr is available only when the stapler
assy /Fr has been already removed. When using a regular
length driver, be sure to remove the stapler assy /Fr in
advance by following the steps given in "F.11.4.1.(3)
Stapler assy /Fr."
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker entrance roller
mounting plate /Rr [2].
[1] fs503fs2034c
F-149
[2] [3] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
metal fitting [3].
[1]
fs503fs2035c
[6]
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove 2 wire binding bands [2].
5. In the same procedure as the step 5 of the stapler /Fr, remove the
screw [3] and raise the lower portion of the stapler mounting plate
[4] a little to remove it from the notch [5]. Slide it to the lower side
[2] and remove the stapler /Rr [6] together with the mounting plate [4].
[1]
7. After replacing the stapler assy /Rr, conduct the following item.
For stapler assy /Rr: Counter reset of the parts counter No.194
[4]
[3]
[5] 1050fs2036c
(5) Replacing the stapler assy

[1] 1. Conduct the following operations.
• F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
• F.11.4.1.(3) Stapler assy /Fr
• F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
2. Remove 3 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the cut staple duct [2].
[2]
fs503fs2012c
[1] [3] 3. Remove 4 screws [1] together with the stapler assys /Fr and Rr,
and then remove the bracket [3] from the stapler [2].
Note
• Take note that the brackets for the stapler assys /Fr and /
Rr are different in the position where the wire binding
band is attached.
[2]
fs503fs2013c
F-150
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stapler guide block [2].
[1] fs503fs2063c
(6) Checking of the stapler guide seal

Note
• The pasting of the stapler guide seal is limited only to the stapler assy /Rr.
[1] 1. Conduct the following operations.
• F.11.4.1.(2) Pre-arrangement for replacing the stapler assy
• F.11.4.1.(4) Stapler assy /Rr
• F.11.4.1.(5) Replacing the stapler assy
2. The stapler guide seal [2] must be pasted on the clincher side [1]
of the new stapler assy /Rr.
Note
• Be sure to align the end line [3] on the clincher side [1]
with the bend line of the stapler guide seal [2] and paste it
with no slippage (tolerance: 0.5mm).
• Be sure to check the guide seal to ensure it is not
damaged or soiled.
[3] [2] fs503fs2064c
11.4.2 Replacing the staples

• Staple cartridge
: Every 5,000 staples
(2) Procedure
2. Pull the stapler cartridge knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction to
remove it.
[1] fs503fs2001c
F-151
[2] [1] 3. Hold the knob [2] of the cover [1] and open it.
4. Rotate and wind up carefully the remaining refill staples [3] to the
arrow-marked direction [4] and take it out.
Note
[3] • Be careful when handling the refill staples since they are
apt to break away.
[4]
fs503fs2043c
[2] 5. With the refill staples [1] set as shown in the drawing, place them
gently in the pocket [2] of the stapler cartridge.
[1]
fs503fs2044c
[4] 6. Feed the refill staples [1] by hand to the arrow-marked direction [2]
and get the tip of the refill staples near to the stapling position [3].
New refill staples are attached with a lead sheet.
Note
• The tip of the refill staples can be pulled up to the stapling
position by this lead sheet.
[2]
7. Close the cover [4].
[3] fs503fs2045c
11.4.3 Cleaning the cut staple box

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the cut staple box [2].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2037c
11.5 Main tray section

11.5.1 Replacing the paper exit roller
• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)
: Every 600,000 prints*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 feeds)*3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
CAUTION
• After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
• When replacing the paper exit rollers /A (sponge roller), be sure to replace all 4 pairs of rollers (8 rollers in all).
F-152
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1]
[2]
blocking the light of the tray upper limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up
and down operation of the main tray, and then turn OFF the main
power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller [1] and remove
[1] the sponge roller [1] by prizing it open.
fs503fs2003c
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new sponge roller and the
shaft brought together, press the sponge roller until it clicks to fit it
in securely.
5. After replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller), conduct the
[1]
following item.
[1]
fs503fs2004c
11.5.2 Replacing the paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)

• Paper exit opening solenoid assy (SD9)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,400,000 operations) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
F-153
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.7.2.4 Upper cover /1)
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
4. Remove the wiring harness from 6 wiring harness guides [2] and
slide the board mounting plate [3] backward.
Note
• Be sure not to break the wiring harness when moving the
board mounting plate [3].
[2]
a0gyt3c004ca

[1] [6] [7] [5]
6. Remove the G-ring [2] and then remove the arm [3] from the pin
[4].
Note
• Be sure to install the G-ring [2] to the position about 2mm
away from the arm [3] so that the arm is free to move.
• Since the pin [4] does not have a groove, be sure to check
that the G-ring is fixed securely so that it does not come
of from the pin.
7. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [6] together with the mounting plate [7].
[4] [2] [3]

a0gyt3c005ca
8. Standard value when reinstalling the paper exit opening solenoid

unit.
Note
• Hold the paper exit opening solenoid (SD9) temporally
with screws and lower the mounting plate of the paper exit
opening solenoid assy once, then slide it upward to
tighten it fully at the position where the paper press arm
[1] starts moving and protrudes for the standard value
from the paper stopper plate [2].
Standard value A = -0.5mm to +0.5mm
[2] [1] a0gyt3c006ca
F-154
[3] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit opening
solenoid assy (SD9) [3] from the mounting plate [2].
A Note
• Be sure to check that the stroke of the plunger is the
standard value A.
Standard value A = 5mm ± 0.5mm
[1] [2] a0gyt3c007ca
F-155
12. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-612

CAUTION

12.2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 prints)
• Paper exit roller /B (sponge roller)
Note
• When replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace 3 sets of the paper exit rollers /A (6 all) and 2 sets of the
paper exit rollers /B (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) of the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
with fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Turn OFF SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power
plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
[1] sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c002na
F-156
in securely.
[1] - Counter reset of the parts counter No.255, No.256
[1]
15jkf2c003na
12.2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)

• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
Note
• When replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller), be sure to replace both of 2 sets (4 all) at a time.
(2) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the
shaft [3] of the intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller and remove the
sponge roller by prizing it open.
15jkf2c005na
in securely.
[1] Counter reset of the parts counter No.257
Note
• When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of
[1] the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into
the groove on the receiver side securely.
15jkf2c006na

12.3.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
• Paper assist roller (sponge roller)
F-157
(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Open the paper assist section [1] and then lift the paper assist
roller [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the paper assist roller [2].
[1]
[3] [2] 15jmf2c001na
12.4 Stapler section

12.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover
CAUTION
• Pulling out the stacker unit while removing the FS from the main body causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1] 15jmf2c002na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
[1]
out the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
• To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under
the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jmf2c003na
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c004na
12.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit

Note
• The stapler unit consists of the clincher section and the stapler section.
F-158
• Be sure not to move the clincher section and the stapler section in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the
timing belt tooth skipping.
• After installing, be sure to perform the staple up/down position adjustment. (Refer to I.15.9 Staple up/down position adjustment)

• Stapler unit
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-32 : Stapler movement motor
(M11) (A4,1-stapling position). Then turn OFF the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer
to F.12.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2] and then
remove the flat stitching stopper release unit /Fr [3].
5. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check
Mode]. Perform the output code 72-31, and then turn OFF the
main body.
15jmf2c005na
[5] 6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the
clamp [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] to remove the clincher /Fr [5], and then
remove the connector [6].
[6] [4]
[1]
[3] [2]
15jmf2c006na
[2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1] and remove the flat stitching stopper release
unit /Rr [2].
9. Disconnect the connector [3] at the rear side of the flat stitching
stopper release unit /Rr [2] and remove the wiring harness from
the clamp [4].
[3] [4]
15jmf2c007na
F-159
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [4] of the clincher /Rr [1] and then remove the
ground [3].
[1] [3] 15jmf2c008na
[3] 11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the ball bearing bracket [2].
Then rotate the clincher /Rr so that it comes to the position easily
removed and disconnect the connector [4].
Note
• Be careful not to lose the ball bearing retaining spring [5]
and the ball.
[4]
[5] [1]
[2] 15jmf2c009na
[2] 12. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

13. Remove 4 screws [2] of the stapler /Fr [1], and remove the screw
[1] [3] of the ground cable. Then put out the stapler /Fr [1] and
[2]
[3] [4] 15jmf2c010na
14. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Fr [2].
[1] [3] [2] 15jmf2c011na
[1] 15. Remove 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler /Rr [1]
After that remove the screw [4] of the ground cable and then
Note
• When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be sure to set it so
that the wiring harness does not interfere the stapler
[2]
rotation home sensor (PS13) [7] or it is not nipped by the
gear.
[5]
[3] [4] [6]

15jmf2c012na
F-160
[1] 16. Remove 4 screws [1] to remove the stapler /Rr [2], and then
[2] Note
• When removing the stapler /Rr [2], be careful not to
damage PS13 [4].
[1]
[4] [3]
15jmf2c013na
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the
stapler /Rr [2].
Counter reset of the parts counters No.248 and No.249
[3] [1] [2] 15jmf2c014na
F-161
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE PI-5...
13. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PI-502

CAUTION

13.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up and the paper feed roller /Up
• Pick-up roller /Up
: Every 1,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 feeds*2)
• Paper feed roller /Up
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
*1 The periodical replacement is C6501/C6501P/C65hc only.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.10.2.2 Upper cover)
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca
F-162
[2] [3] 5. Remove the C-clip [1].

6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove
the pick-up roller /Up [3] and the paper feed roller /Up [4].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set them so that the blue
surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller and
the paper feed roller come to the front side.
[4] [1] a04hf2c003ca
[2] [5] [1] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the
one-way clutches [3] and [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-way
clutch [3] from the notch [5] side with its projection [6]
fitted to the notch [5] of the pick-up roller.
• When reinstalling the paper feed roller [2], insert the one-
[7] way clutch [4] with its projection [8] fitted to the notch [7]
of the paper feed roller.
[4] [3]
[8] [6] a04hf2c004ca - Counter reset of the parts counter No.264, No.265
13.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller /Lw and the paper feed roller /Lw
• Pick-up roller /Lw
: Every 1,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 200,000 feeds)*2
• Paper feed roller /Lw
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds)*2
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of "F.13.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller /Up
and the paper feed roller /Up."
Counter reset of the parts counter No.269, No.270
15jff2c004na
13.2.3 Replacing the separation roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up
• Separation roller /Up
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
• Torque limiter /Up
: Every 3,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 600,000 feeds*2)
F-163
(2) Procedure
[1]
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [2] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left
and right to remove the paper feed roller assy /Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
[2] 3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then remove the
separation roller assy /Up [2] by lifting it up.
[1] 15jff2c006na
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy /Up and then
remove the separation roller /Up [2] and the torque limiter /Up [3].
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.266, No.267
[3]
Note
• Be sure to install the separation roller /Up with its 2
notches [4] on the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[4]
[5] 15jff2c007na
13.2.4 Replacing the separation roller /Lw and the torque limiter /Lw
• Separation roller /Lw
: Every 600,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds*2)
• Torque limiter /Lw
: Every 3,000,000 prints*1 (actual replacement cycle: every 600,000 feeds*2)
(2) Procedure
[1] [2]
1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of "F.13.2.3 Replacing the separation
roller /Up and the torque limiter /Up."
Counter reset of the parts counter No.271, No.272
15jff2c008na
F-164
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE FD-5...
14. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FD-503

CAUTION

14.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
• Roller solenoid /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 punches *2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board /A
[2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller
solenoids /1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8) [3].
[1]
6. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.19.1
[2] Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
adjustment)
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2002c
14.2.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)

• 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
F-165
(2) Procedure
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm /Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
[1] [2] 5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[3] a0h0t3c004ca
F-166
[1] 7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[2] 8. Open the guide plate [1].

9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[3].
[3] [1] a0h0t3c005ca

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller
solenoid (SD18) [3].
13. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.19.2 2nd
folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)
[3] a0h0t3c006ca
14.3 Punch section

14.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
• Punch unit
F-167
(2) Procedure
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
[2]
fd501fs2003c
14.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board
• Punch shaft
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
: Every 750,000 prints *2
: Every 1,500,000 prints *3
• Punch support board
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual cleaning count: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
[2]
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Drum
cleaner/Cleaning pad)
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support
[2]
board [1]. (Isopropyl alcohol/Cleaning pad)
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
14.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
• Punch drive section
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 1,000,000 punches) *1
F-168
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
[1] 4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
14.4 Main tray section

14.4.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
• Tray up down motor (M11)
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *1
: Every 10,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 5,000,000 prints) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
• Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while supporting the up/down stay with your hands.
F-169
[2] 1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.12.3.4 Rear cover) and the left
cover /Rr (refer to G.12.3.6 Left cover /Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor
(M11) [3].
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2005c
14.5 PI section
14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
• Pick-up rubber
: Every 5,200,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 feeds)*1
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c

[4] [1] 4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Up [3].
Note
• The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4].
Be sure to remove the pick-up unit /Up [3] from the front
[3]
side.
• Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up
[5] [2] unit /Up.
fd501fs2007c
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
[3] fd501fs2008c
F-170
[4] [3] [2] 7. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3]
from the mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
[1] fd501fs2010c
[1] [2] 10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1] [2] [3] 11. Remove the belt [3] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove
the gears [2] and [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way
clutch [3] (blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
F-171
[4] [7] 14. Remove the C-clip [1].

16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear
[5] and the pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the
pick-up roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
[3] [4] [7] 20. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

21. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear
[2] [4] and the pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
[6] 23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove
the pick-up roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1] [5] [8] [1]
fd501fs2016c
14.5.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-172
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 8 of "F.14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
[8] (Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7] 3. Remove the belt restriction plate [2].
[3] 4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4]
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
[2] [3] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm
[2] from the paper feed shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Remove the spacer [1].

10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
[3] [2] [1] 13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1] 16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed
[2] rubber[2].
Note
fd501fs2021c
14.5.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

• Separation rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
F-173
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" and remove the pick-up unit /Up.
3. Remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] 4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from
the mounting plate while pressing the separation roller assy [4]
against the front gear [5].
Note
• Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller
assy [4] and the gear [5] respectively. When removing
them, be careful that these pins do not get lost. With the
C-clip [6] on the front side of the gear left as it is, pressing
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c the roller onto the gear prevents the pins from dropping
off.
[1] [2] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller
[2] and replace it.
fd501fs2023c
14.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

• Pick-up rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
Note
• A shaft fixing screw is inserted when removing the PI tray /Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray /Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller /Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the
PI tray /Up damage to the PI section.
[2] [3] 1. Make sure that the PI lift plate /Up [1] has come down fully. If it has
not come down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up:
70-11, PI/Lw: 70-13) in the service mode.
2. Perform steps 1 to 4 of "F.14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Upper stage)" to remove the pick-up unit.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /Up [3].
[2]
[1] fd501fs2024c
F-174
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing
[1] hole [2].
Note
• Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem
section disappears completely.
• After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber
(lower stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1]
from the position [2] and get it back to the position [1].
Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted
to the position [2] damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
[5] [3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit
[1] and the PI tray /Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray /Up [3].
Note
• When removing the PI tray /Up [2], be sure to pull it
diagonally up to the left.
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit /Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper
[1] stage) (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.14.5.1 Replacing the pick-up
rubber (Upper stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
[2] [2]
Note
• When installing the PI tray /Up, be sure to remove the
shaft fixing screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
14.5.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

• Paper feed rubber
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.14.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.14.5.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
F-175
14.5.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

• Separation rubber
: Every 2,250,000 prints (actual replacement cycle: every 100,000 feeds) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of "F.14.5.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber
(Lower stage)."
2. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper
plate /Lw [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber
(upper stage) (steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.14.5.3 Replacing the
separation rubber (upper stage)
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
[2]
fd501fs2028c
F-176
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE SD-5...
15. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-506

CAUTION
15.2 Right angle conveyance section

15.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
• Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5)
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
[2] [1]
15anf2c028na
[4] [5] [3] [6] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid /
1 (SD5) [3].
Note
• When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
• Install it with the wiring harness [6] located on the guide
plate side.
[2] [1]
15anf2c029na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
[2] solenoid /1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
and then fully tighten the screws.
a
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
7. After replacing the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5), conduct the
[3] following item.
[1]
15anf2c030nb

: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations *2)
F-177
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door /Rt.
15anf2c031na

2 (SD6) [3].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has
been inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
plate side.
[1] [6] [2] [3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. With the plunger [1] pulled, temporarily hold the new roller release
[2]
solenoid /2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a"
between the roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value,
a and then fully tighten the screws.
Standard value "a": 0mm to 0.5mm
[1]
15anf2c033nb
15.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

• Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door /Rt and then remove the screw [1].
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section.
(Refer to F.15.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
15anf2c057na
F-178
[3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt
[3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c059nb
[4] [8] [3] 8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it,
and then open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
• When reinstalling the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on
the position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the
jam release handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm
[3] into the hole [8].
[1] [2] [6] [7] [5]

15anf2c130ca
F-179
[1] [3] [3] [1]

9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance
unit [2].
Note
• When reinstalling, press it against 2 positioning pins [3]
and then tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c060na
10. Check point when reinstalling the entrance conveyance unit.

[1] [2]
Note
• As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure
to insert it fully before tightening the screw.
a0h2t3c043ca

[3] [2] [1]
12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid
[3] and the plunger [4].
[4] a0h2t3c044ca
F-180
13. Standard value when reinstalling the entrance gate solenoid.
[4]
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set in the following
[2] [1]
conditions before tightening the screw [4]; with the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid not pulled, the gap
between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [2] is at
a standard value "a", and with the plunger of the entrance
gate solenoid pulled, the gap between the entrance gate
a
[1] and the guide plate [3] is at a standard value "b".
Standard value
a: 2.0mm ± 0.3mm
b b: 5.0mm ± 0.5mm
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
[6] [5] [2] [4] [3] 14. Disconnect the connector [1].
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in
the arrow-marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle
conveyance gate solenoid assy [7].
Note
• When reinstalling, press the arm [4] against the D-cut of
the shaft [5] and then tighten the screws [2].
[1] [7]
a0h2t3c045ca
17. Standard value when reinstalling the right angle conveyance gate
solenoid assy.
[1] Note
• With the plunger [1] pulled, adjust the position so that the
clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance gate [3]
and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a", and then
fully tighten the screws [4].
[4] Standard value a: 4.8mm ± 0.5mm
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c052ca
F-181
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and
[7] [2] [4] [3] the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
• When installing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid,
make sure that the wires [6] are located on the other side
of the hole [7] in the mounting plate [2].
[1] [5] [6]

a0h2t3c046ca

(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
15anf2c157ca
[2] [6] [3] [1]

3 (SD7) [3].
Note
• When installing the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is
hitched to the plunger [4].
plate side.
[4] [5]
15anf2c158ca
F-182
5. Slightly tighten the new roller release solenoid/3 with the plunger
[1] pulled, adjust the position so that the gap between the paper
feed surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3] falls
within the standard value, and secure the roller release solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3mm to 1.8mm
7. After replacing the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7), conduct the
[1]
following item.
[3]
[2] a
15anf2c159ca
15.3 Saddle stitching section

15.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
• Stapler assy
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 1,000,000 staples) *2
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.13.3.8 Front door /Lt)
[1]
2. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and
release the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
15anf2c034na
[3] [2] 4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.15.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
• When moving the stapler assy, be sure to move them by
rotating the rotating knob [3] to prevent the belt tooth from
skipping. Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
[1] 15anf2c035na
F-183
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
[4]
8. Move the staplers /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] forward, and then remove the
pins [4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler. Then
[5] remove the staplers /Lt and /Rt downward.
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
a0h2t3c047ca
9. Check point when removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt.

Note
• When removing/reinstalling the stapler /Lt, be sure not to
bend the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf2c038na

Note
• When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c039na
F-184
[3] [4] 13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove 2 connector covers
[2].
Note
• When removing the connector covers, while lifting up the
clinchers /Lt [3] and /Rt [4].
[1]
[1] [2] 15anf2c040na
[5] [4] [6] 14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
• When installing the grounds, fasten it with screws letting
the wiring harness on the lower side.
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].

16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clinchers /Lt [5]
and /Rt [6].
Note
• When installing the clinchers, slide them down as far as
they go, and secure them with screws.
[3] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 15anf2c041na
[3] from the clincher [2].
[3] [1] [2] 15anf2c042na
Note
• When reinstalling the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire
the wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the
clincher.
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as shown
in the figure [7]. or the wiring harness may break at the
clincher operation.
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers.
(Refer to F.15.3.1.(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting
position)
20. After replacing the stapler assy, conduct the following steps.
[6]
[7] 15anf2c043na
F-185
- Counter reset of the parts counter No.234, No.235
(3) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position

[7] [7] 1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then
check the step edges [4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges
[5] of the clincher in the sub scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 ± 0.5mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[7] each and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the
standard surface of the stapler [8] is located in rear side in main
[11] [11] scan direction [10] compared to the inside plate inner surface [9] of
the clincher.
[4] [6] [10]
Standard value "a": 0.2mm to 0.3mm
4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws
[8]
A [11] each and move the staplers in the main scan direction for
adjustment while rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make
the clinchers [2] and the stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the
screws [11].
[9]
Note
a
• After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and
check that the stapling is performed without problem.
• After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment
between the fold line position and the staple position, and
tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher.
(Refer to I.20.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.20.6
[5]
Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher)
A
Section A
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
15.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

• Slope unit
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[1] 15anf2c018na
F-186
[1] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
15anf2c019na
[2] 3. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], push them to the rear simultaneously and move
the bundle arms [1] approximately 30mm.
Note
• When rotating the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to
rotate it gently with both hands because the bundle arm is
driven simultaneously by the belts on both sides.
Otherwise, it causes the belt tooth skipping.
• Never rotate the bundle arm [1] by holding its tip. Be sure
to rotate it by holding the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of
the fulcrum shaft [2]. It causes the deformation.
[1] 15anf2c020na
[2] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the
bottom and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
• When reinstalling the slope, be sure to align 2 positioning
projections [4].
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c022na
F-187
15.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.13.3.8 Front door /Lt)
2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.15.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
• When remove the 2nd wire [1], support the horizontal
conveyance guide plate /Lt [3] with your hand so that it
does not fall down.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c014na
[1] [2] [1] 4. Slide 2 pins [1] to the arrow-marked direction and hook into the
notches [2] to release the horizontal conveyance guide plate /Lt
[3], and then remove the guide plate.
Note
• When reinstalling the horizontal conveyance guide plate /
Lt [3], align the positions of the shafts [4], and then
displace the pins [1] from the notches.
[4] [3] [4] 15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1], move the wiring harness cover [4] to the
rear, unplug the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the
wiring harness cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
15anf2c016na
F-188
[1]
15anf2c017na
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1] [6] [1] 8. Holding the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the
fulcrum shaft [2], gently move them to the inside [3], and then
remove the guide shaft [4] from the hole of the shock absorbing
guide [5].
Note
• When narrowing the space between the bundle arms [1],
be sure to move them gently and simultaneously.
• When reinstalling them, be sure to check that the guide
shaft [4] has been inserted into the shock absorbing hole
[5].
9. Rotate the bundle arms [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler
side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [2] [1] 15anf2c021na
F-189
[1] [2] [1] 10. Remove the 6 screws (with 1 washer each) [1], and then hold the
shafts [2] to pull out the saddle stitching unit [3].
Note
• When pull out the saddle stitching unit, be sure not to
snap the wiring harness of the removed connector contact
with SD.
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 15anf2c024nb
15.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the saddle stitching unit is heavy.

• Saddle stitch unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [4] [5] 1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.15.3.3 Pulling out the
saddle stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle
stitching unit [5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4]
while lift up the shaft [3] slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit
to the front side.
Note
• Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3]
and [4].
• When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the
unit is surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the
unit.
[1] [2]
[6]
[1] 15anf2c025na
F-190
15.4 Trimmer section

15.4.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
[1] • Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Store the trimmer scraps box completely in the SD.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the trimmer scraps guide [2].
Note
• When installing the trimmer scraps guide, be sure that the
trimmer scraps box is stored completely in the SD, and
the trimmer scraps guide [2] is fully stretched. If you
stretch the trimmer scraps guide with the trimmer scraps
box has not stored completely, the trimmer scraps guide
gets broken during operation.
[2] a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the trimmer paddle assy [2].
[2] a0h2t3c010ca
15.4.2 Replacing the trimmer blade kit

WARNING
• Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local authority.
[2]
[1] a0h2t3c011ca

• Trimmer blade kit
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 37,500 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-191
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[3] [2] [1]
Note
• Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit
sensor (PS52) by the output check code ""71-56" in the I/O
check mode in the service mode.
2. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.15.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
[6] WARNING
[7]
• Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the
[4] loosening amount of the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade [4].
7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then
[5] move the trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull
a0h2t3c012ca
out from the hole [5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling
down.
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when handling the trimmer blade [4].
Never touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the
[1] [2]
trimmer blade, and then slide it from right [3] to left [4] (viewed
from the operator) to clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
• Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is
one-step thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the
installation screws of the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes
the deformation of the mounting slit.
• To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the
wrench once and reinsert it again.
[5] • The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the
operator) is curved in the same manner as the blade [5].
Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower
brush.
[4] [3]
a0h2t3c013ca
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws
[4]
about half and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
• Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the
trimmer blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down
during the operation.
Note
• Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the
trimmer blade kit.
[3] [1] [2]
a0h2t3c014ca
12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put
that cover on the old trimmer blade.
F-192
13. Insert the trimmer blade to the hole [3] by holding 2 screws [2].
Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1]
[1][2] [4] [6]
and [2] downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the
bottom, and then press it to the right side [5] (viewed from the
operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
• When tightening 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them
[7] temporarily with the torque that bends the tip of the #3
hex wrench [6] approximately 5 degrees [7], and then fully
[8]
tighten them with the strong torque that bends it
approximately 15 degrees [8].
Note
• Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that
obstacles the operation of the trimmer blade.
[3] [5]
Note
• After replacing the trimmer blade, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.
17. After replacing the trimmer blade kit, conduct the following steps.
[2] [1]
a0h2t3c016ca
15.4.3 Replacing the trimmer board assy

• Trimmer board assy
: Every 600,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 18,900 cuts) *2
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 18,900 cuts) *3
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-193
(2) Procedure
1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
[7] [1]
Note
• By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode, move the trimmer press board to the
position where the trimmer board is released.
outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.15.4.1 Removing/
installing the trimmer paddle assy)
5. Remove the trimmer board assy [1] by pulling it horizontally to the
back side.
[4] Note
[3] • When reinstalling it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer
[5]
board assy [1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the
trimmer press plate [4] and the hold plate [5].
• When inserting it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet
[6].
• When pushing it into the machine, be sure to insert it
[6] horizontally by pushing the movement arm receiver [7].
[2]
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2]
[1] of the trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom
surface.
Note
• When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not
conducted properly, the trimmer completion timing differs
and a trimming fault occurs.

8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
• Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by
the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of
the service mode.
[2] a0h2t3c067ca • If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid
operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced
becomes faster than specified timing (700/500/300 times
of trimming). (In the first operation only)
• After replacing the trimmer board, perform the saddle
stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is
performed without problem.
9. After replacing the trimmer board assy, conduct the following item.
15.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the trimmer unit is heavy.

• Trimmer unit
: Spot replacement (actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 cuts) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000
F-194
(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit

[2] [2]
• Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
• Rear cover /Rt (Refer to G.13.3.3 Rear cover /Rt)
• Left cover (Refer to G.13.3.4 Left cover)
• Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.15.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca

[2] [1] [2]
Note
• When reinstalling it, be careful not to nip the wiring
harness with the metal plate.

5. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and
[5] touch to the anti-drop brackets [6] and [7] by holding the
configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit.
[5] [7] [6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(3) Removing/reinstalling the trimmer unit

1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer
[1] unit (Refer to F.15.4.4.(2) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer
unit)
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.

[1] a0h2t3c020ca
F-195
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the
[1] [3] [2] [1]
stoppers /1 [2] and /2 [3].
4. Pull out the trimmer unit [4] to the back side by holding the
configuration parts [5].
Note
• Remove or reinstall the trimmer unit [4] by lifting it slightly
to avoid the projection for preventing falling off [6] on the
trimmer unit plate.
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
like the electrical parts.
CAUTION
the trimmer unit is heavy.

6. After replacing the trimmer unit, conduct the following item.
[5] [4] [5]
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
15.4.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

• Trimmer press motor (M32)
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 cuts *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.15.4.4 Replacing the trimming
[2] [3] [6] [4] [2]
unit)
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after
making the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting
plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5], and then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the trimmer press
motor (M32) [5] into the round hole [8].
[7] [8] [6]
[5] [1]
a0h2t3c022ca
F-196
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the
[1] [2] trimmer press motor (M32) [3].
7. After replacing the trimmer press motor (M32), conduct the
following items.
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
15.4.6 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

• Trimmer blade motor (M31)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[2] [2]
• Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.15.4.1 Removing/installing
the trimmer paddle assy)
[1]
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2
fixing plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then
remove the anti-drop bracket [2].
F-197
4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the
[4] [2] [3] [1]
corner [4] of the trimmer unit based on the hole [2] of the jig for
supporting trimmer unit [1].
[2] [3] [1] 5. Disconnect the connector [1].

Note
harness with the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].

7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have
been removed in step 3.
DANGER:
• Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
[4]
[6]
[5] [6]
F-198
[1] from the wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
[3] [4] 10. Pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the stoppers [3]
touch to the anti-drop brackets [4] by holding the lower edges [2] of
the trimmer unit [1].
Note
• Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged
[1] like the electrical parts.
[2]
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the
[1] [3]
engaging [3] of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put
the trimmer unit [1] on the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1] a0h2t3c024ca
F-199
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor
[1] [2] [1] (M31) [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set so that the wiring
harness [3] comes in the position as shown in the picture.
[3] a0h2t3c025ca
14. Check point when reinstalling the trimmer blade motor (M31).
[2] [1]
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the
shaft on the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole
[2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3]
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1] from the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure that the label [4] is in the
same direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting
bracket [3].
17. After replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31), conduct the
following item.
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
15.4.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

(1) Periodic lubrication parts/cycle
• Paper holding screw
: Every 1,400,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *1
: Every 1,500,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 37,500 cuts) *2*3
• Drive gear /3, /4
: Every 20,250,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 500,000 cuts) *2
*1 C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 1200/1200P/1051
*3 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-200
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gears /3 [2] and /4 [3].
Note
• When applying the grease, be careful not to spill the
grease to other parts.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
15.5 Bundle processing section

15.5.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
• Bundle press stage gear
: Every 20,250,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 set (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray) *2)
*2 Spotted replaced cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000
F-201
(2) Procedure
[2]
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
3. Remove the E-ring [5] and move the gear [8] to the back side after
moving the bearings [6] and [7].
[8] [7] [3]
[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca

[2] [3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up
down motor (M24).
Note
• Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when
removing the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage
gear [2] and 2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
• After replacing the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure to
apply plas guard No.2 to the gear.

8. After replacing the bundle press stage gear, conduct the following
items.
[1] [2] [3] a0h2t3c030ca
F-202
15.5.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

• Bundle press stage unit
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 2,500,000 copies (number of set of sheets exited to the bundle tray)) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[2]
• Trimmer unit (Refer to F.15.4.4 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction
until it stops.
Note
• When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check
that the bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper
position [3] after the bundle press stage goes down and
the tension of the wire [4] is released.
• Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[3]
[4] [1] a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it
[1] out from the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
[2] • When reinstalling it, be careful not to nip the wiring
[5] [4] [3] harness [2] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
a0h2t3c032ca
F-203
5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of
[1] [2] [4]
the up-down wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the
machine from the trimmer unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to lubricate Molykote EM-30L
to each 2 shafts [4].
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7] [3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2]
[3] [1]
from clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the metal
plate to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[5] [6] [2] [4]
[7] [8]
a0h2t3c034ca
F-204
[1] [3] [2]
11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration
motor (M12) [3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press
movement motor (M17) [6].
[6] [5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
[1] [2] [3] [3].
[6].
[4] [5] [6] a0h2t3c036ca
F-205
[2] [6] [3] [4]
17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring
harness [4].
Note
• Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the
shaft hole [5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the
[2] side between the bands [2] and [3].
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c037ca
18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].

[7] [5][10] [6] [2] [3] [4] 19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate /Lt
[3].
Note
• Since the wire /Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure
to remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting
plate /Lt [3] and lift it up until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
[8] 20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate /Rt [6]
downward to move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then
remove it to the space between the side plate [8] and the timing
belt [9].
Note
• Since the wire /Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be
sure to lift up the wire mounting plate /Rt [6] until the
tension is released, and then take it off gently.
[9] [1]
a0h2t3c038ca
21. Check point when reinstalling the wire.

Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2
pulleys [2].
[1] [2] a0h2t3c039ca
F-206
22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
[6] 23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive
shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
a0h2t3c040ca
25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1]
[3] [2] [1]
horizontally, push the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with
holding the shaft [2] to release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper
exit assist roller arm from the regulation bracket [5]. After the
release, put down the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] gently.
Note
• Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller
arm is removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle
paper exit assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to
hold with hands.
• When reinstalling, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under
the regulation bracket [5].
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
[4]
Note
• If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the
bundle press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture
with holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to
the back with paying attention to the contacting places [5], [6], and
[7] on the right side, and remove the arm [8].
Note
• After the installation, be sure to check that the bundle
press stage unit goes up and down horizontally by
rotating the jam cleaning knob.
[2] [3] [8] [1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
F-207
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE PB-5...
16. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PB-503

16.1 Sub compile (SC) section
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power outlet.
• Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
16.1.2 Replacing the switchback roller

• Switchback roller
Every 750,000 prints*1
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 600,000 prints)*2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[6] [7] [5] [4] [5] 1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the
upper door [1].
Note
• To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the
hole [3]. Be sure to remove the screwdriver when closing
the sub clamp door, or the cover gets damaged.
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the
inside.
Note
[3] [8] [2] [1] • Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper and so on under the switchback roller assy to
prevent the C-clips from dropping into inside of the
machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the
switchback roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
[2] [1] 4. Check point when reinstalling the switchback roller assy.
Note
• After reinstalling the switchback roller assy, use a mirror
to check that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley
[2] without any slackness. If the belt has comes off the
pulley, remove the SC cover /Up to correct that. (Refer to
G.14.2.12 SC cover /Up)
a075f2c002ca
F-208
[9] [4] [3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
[8] Note
• Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces
toward the switchback roller.
[6]
7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the
direction of the arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin
[7]. Then remove the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
[5]
arrow [9].
Note
[7] [2] [1]

a075f2c003ca
16.1.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches /A and /B
• SC switchback release motor (M13)
: Every 6,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 750,000 prints*2)
• One-way clutch /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 prints*2)
• One-way clutch /A
: Every 12,000,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000,000 cuts *2)
*1 Periodical replacement only for 1200/1200P/1051. C8000 is not supported.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.14.2.12 SC cover /Up)
2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and set the paper
[3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
• Before removing the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of
paper under the switchback roller assy to prevent the C-
clips from dropping into the machine inside.
a0v9t3c020ca
F-209
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
• The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via
the switchback arm [3]. When removing the screw [1], the
[2]
switchback arm [3] is pulled by the spring [4] and the
switchback cam [2] moves. At this time, be careful not to
[3]
drop the screw [1].
[4]
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
5. Check point when reinstalling the switchback cam.

[2] [1] Note
• When reinstalling the switchback cam [2], be sure to
install it following the positional relation with the actuator
[2] as shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c022ca
[1] [3] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

[2] a0v9t3c023ca
[1] 8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2
wiring harness clamps [2].
[2] a0v9t3c024ca
F-210
[1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release

motor assy [2].
[2] a0v9t3c025ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release
motor [2].
[2] a0v9t3c026ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch /B [2].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c027ca
[1] 12. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /B.
Note
• When reinstalling the one-way clutch /B [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c028ca
[4] [3] [1] [2] 13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch /A [4].
Note
a0v9t3c029ca
F-211
16. Check point when reinstalling the pressure cam.
[2] [1]
Note
• When reinstalling the pressure cam [1], be sure to install it
following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as
shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c030ca
[1] 17. Check point when reinstalling the one-way clutch /A.
Note
• When reinstalling the one-way clutch /A [1], be sure to
install it in the direction shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c033ca
18. Standard value when reinstalling the SC switchback release motor

assy.
Note
• When reinstalling the SC switchback release motor assy,
a b be sure to set so that the distances "a" and "b" become
same value.
Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" =
0.2mm or less
a0v9t3c004ca
16.1.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

• SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.14.2.21 SC unit)
Note
• When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction.
a0v9t3c005ca
F-212
[1] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid
(SD13) [3].
Note
[2] a0v9t3c006ca
[1] 6. Standard value when reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid

(SD13).
Note
• When reinstalling the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust
the position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard
value with the plunger [1] pulled, and then fix with the
screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 ± 1mm
[2]
a a0v9t3c007ca
16.1.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

• FD alignment solenoid (SD11)
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.14.2.21 SC unit)
[1]
Note
• When putting down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the
wiring harness under it.
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of
the sub scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3] [2]
a0v9t3c008ca
F-213
3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] faced up.
[2] [3] [4]
Note
• Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback
release motor assy [3] does not contact the floor.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the
sub scan alignment plate [2].
[1] a0v9t3c009ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then
[5] remove the FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
• When removing the FD alignment solenoid assy, be
careful not to drop the pin.
[4] [3] [2]

a0v9t3c010ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then
remove the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [4] pulled.
Standard value: a = 17.5 ± 0.5mm
[4] [3] a0v9t3c011ca
a 9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

Note
a0v9t3c012ca
16.1.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft

• Sub scan alignment plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-214
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.14.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.14.2.17 Upper cover /
Md)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate shafts [2].
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
16.2 Cover paper table section

CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
Note
• Before performing the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part/unit is at the home position.
16.2.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

• Roller cutter blade assy
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000.
F-215
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw. (Refer to G.14.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade assy [2]. Then
[1] disconnect the connector [3].
Note
• Pull out the cover paper waste box before removing the
roller cutter assy.
• When reinstalling the roller cutter assy, be sure to route
the wire binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
• Push the roller cutter blade assy [2] against the metal
[2]
plate [6] to reinstall the assy.

Note
[6]
[1]
[4] [5] [3] a075f2c007ca
16.2.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
• Cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-216
(2) Simplified cleaning procedure

[1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate
opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
[2] 2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing
plate [2].
a075f2c004cb
16.2.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft

• Cover paper alignment plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-217
(2) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate inward.
2. Apply plas guard No.2 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate shafts
[2].
Note
• Apply plas guard No.2 to the outside of the cover paper
alignment plate bearing on both sides.
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
16.3 Cover paper supply section

16.3.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
[2] paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
F-218
[2] [3] 3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow
(counterclockwise as seen from the front side) to make the
coupling [2] upright.
Note
• Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the
direction of the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is
not designed to rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
[2] [1]
5. Remove the bearing /Fr [1].
6. Move the bearing /Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
• When reinstalling them, insert the bearing /Rr [2] into the
notch [5] on the metal frame while keeping on the level the
flat face [4] of the bearing, and slightly pressing down the
metal frame [3] of the pick-up roller assy. Then insert the
bearing /Fr [1] in the same manner.
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
a075f2c010ca
F-219
[1] [5] [4] 7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper
feed roller [3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller
to remove it from the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
• When removing the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not
to damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[3] [2] [6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
[3]
8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper
feed guide plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
Note
• After installing the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up
roller counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
• Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate
smoothly.
• The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction
only. Be sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
F-220
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate
[2].
[2] a075f2c012ca
a075f2c013ca
[2]
12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of
the arrow, and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from
the joint [3]. Then remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
• When reinstalling, make sure to engage the coupling pin
[2] with the joint [3].
• When reinstalling the separation roller assy [4], fasten it
[3]
with the screws while pressing it down.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
16.3.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller
• Pick-up roller
• Paper feed roller
F-221
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Note
• The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.16.3.1 Removing/
[4] [2] [1]
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with
the shaft [4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the
[2] [1] shaft [3].
5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[4] [3]
a075f2c082ca
[1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing /Fr [2] from the shaft
[3].
8. Move the bearing /Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5]
together with the shaft [3].
[4] [5] [2] [3] a075f2c086ca

[2] [1] 10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
Note
• There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [2] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
Note
reset of parts counters No.240 and No. 241.
a075f2c016ca
F-222
16.3.3 Replacing the separation roller

• Separation roller
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.16.3.1 Removing/
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together
with the shaft [2].
[1] a075f2c017ca
[2] [3] [4] [1] 3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
Note
• There is no big difference in appearance between the 2
collars (one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is
for the separation roller). However, they are different in
the inside. The collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a
one-way mechanism in it, and the other one [6] does not.
Make sure to attach them correctly.
[6] [5] reset of parts counter No.241.
a075f2c018ca
16.3.4 Replacing the cover paper pick up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
• Cover paper pick up clutch (CL71)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 feeds)*1
• Cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 feeds)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
F-223
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right and left
rails of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.
14.2.28 Cover paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1] [2]
a075f2c019ca
[4] [2] [3] [5] [6] 3. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed
clutch (CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
clutch over the tab [6] of the metal frame.

Note
[5] [6] [1]

a075f2c020ca

16.4.1 Replacing the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
• Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4)
: Every 10,500,000 prints *1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 3,000,000 prints *2)
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000.
F-224
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
[7]
3. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.14.2.13 Upper cover /
[4]
FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover /RrRt. (Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
[6] [10] [11]
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
[9]
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
Note
• Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper
entrance guide does not contact the floor.
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] a0v9t3c013ca
[1] [2] 12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover /Rt, and remove
the upper cover /Rt.
a0v9t3c014ca

14. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[3].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c015ca
F-225
15. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy
[1] [2] (SD4) [2].
Note
a0v9t3c016ca
[1]
17. Standard 1 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4).
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value
with the plunger [2] pulled.
a a0v9t3c017ca
18. Standard 2 value when reinstalling the sub tray exit solenoid assy
(SD4).
Note
• While pulling the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid,
adjust the position so that the distance "a" (the distance
between the paper exit roller and the paper exit driven
roller) obtains a standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 ± 1.5mm
a a0v9t3c018ca
19. Check point when reinstalling the conveyance unit.

a Note
• After reinstalling the conveyance unit, check the points
"a" shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit
does not contact the upper door. When they are in
contact, loosen 4 fixing screws on the upper cover /Rt and
adjust the position so that the upper door and the upper
cover /Rt does not come in contact.
a0v9t3c019ca
16.5 Framework section

16.5.1 Replacing the exhaust filters /A and /B
• Exhaust filter /A
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
• Exhaust filter /B
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 240 hours of rotation of glue apply roller)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-226
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
[2] [1] 2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and
then remove 2 exhaust filters /A [2].
a15xt3c004ca
[1] 3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter /B [1] in
the arrow-marked direction to remove it.
Note
a15xt3c005ca
16.6 Glue tank section

16.6.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
• Glue apply roller drive gear bearing
: Every 30,000,000 prints *1(Actual replacement cycle: Every 6,000 hours)*2
F-227
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.14.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover /Lt [2].
[2] [1] a15xt3c006ca
[2] [3] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch
[2].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3]
into the notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
[1] 4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
projections [2].
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
F-228
[1] [5] [4] [2] 5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
6. Pull up the glue tank assy by holding the shaft [2], and remove the
glue apply roller drive gears /1 [3] and /2 [4] and the bearings [5], 2
for each.
[5] [3] a15xt3c009ca
16.6.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear

• Glue apply roller drive gear
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
• When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [2] on the right side of the unit.
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the gear cover [4].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to put the edge of the gear
cover [4] under the notch [5] of the glue tank side.
[5]
[4] [3]
a15xt3c010ca
F-229
3. Apply the multemp FF-RM to the Glue apply roller drive gear [2].
[2] [1]
a15xt3c011ca
16.6.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (M4)

• Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 120 hours) *2
*1 1200/1200P/1051
*2 C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan
(M4) [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the pellet supply cooling fan (M4) [3], be
sure to reinstall it to the same direction as shown in the
picture.
• Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
[2] 8050ma3141
16.6.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

• Glue tank assy
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: Every 2,000 hours) *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
F-230
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.14.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover
[2].
[2] a15xt3c012ca
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate
[1]
[2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover /Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover /Rt [6].
Note
• When reinstalling it, reinstall it so that the curved part
comes top.
[5] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[3] [5] a15xt3c013ca
F-231
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of
[1] [3] [2]
the temperature sensor.
Note
• When reconnecting the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness,
and connect each connector to the corresponding wiring
harness.
Number Color
1 White
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 Black
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].

Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set the metal wiring
harness [6] toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8] [7] [2] [6] [4] [5] a15xt3c014ca
[1] [2] 9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2] a15xt3c015ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
projections [3].
[3] [3]
a15xt3c016ca
F-232
[3] [1] [2] [3] 11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with 2 springs [1] put
on the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy and on
the projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
• After replacing the parts, be sure to conduct the glue
apply roller gap adjustment. (Refer to I.21.4 Glue apply
roller gap adjustment)
[4] a15xt3c017ca
16.7 Clamp section

16.7.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft
• Clamp pressure plate shaft
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000C/7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the clamp unit.
2. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 2 positions on the clamp pressing
board shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
16.8 Book stock section

16.8.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts /Rt and /Lt
• Guide shaft /Rt, /Lt
F-233
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000
(2) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No.2 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the
guide shafts /Rt and /Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
F-234
17. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RU-506

17.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

17.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1), Paper exit motor (M2)
• Entrance conveyance belt, Paper exit conveyance belt
*1 1200/1200P/1051
(2) Procedure of removing the entrance conveyance motor assy, Procedure of replacing the entrance conveyance
belt
[3] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance conveyance
motor assy [3] and the entrance conveyance belt [4].
Note
• When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [2] and
apply tension to the entrance conveyance belt [4] by own
weight of the entrance conveyance motor [3]. Then tighten
3 screws [2].
4. Reinstall the parts by following the removal steps in reverse.
[2] [1] [2]

a0get3c001ca
(3) Procedure of removing the paper exit conveyance motor assy and replacing the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [5] [6] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover. G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
3. Remove the straight gate spring [3].
4. Remove 3 screws [4] and then remove the paper exit motor assy
[5] and the paper exit conveyance belt [6].
Note
• When reinstalling, temporary tighten 3 screws [4] and
apply tension to the paper exit conveyance belt [6] by own
weight of the paper exit motor assy. Then tighten 3 screws
[4].
[4] [1] [2]

a0get3c002ca
F-235
(4) Replacing procedure of the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit motor (M2)
[2] [1] 1. Remove the entrance conveyance motor assy and the paper exit
motor assy.
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the mounting bracket [2].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to put the connector [3], be
sure to install it in the direction shown in the picture.
[1] [3]
a0get3c003ca
[3] [4] [2] 3. Loosen 2 screws [1] to remove the pulley gear [2]. Then remove
the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor
(M2) [3].
Note
• When reinstalling, insert the pin [5] to the shallower
groove [4] until it comes in contact, and then tighten 2
screws [1].
[5] [1] a0get3c004ca
17.2.2 Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance pulley
• Conveyance pulley, Paper exit conveyance pulley
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F-236
(2) Procedure
• Rear cover (Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
[2]
[3] • Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt, Paper
exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.17.2.1
Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the paper exit
motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
[1]
2. Remove the screws [1], 2 for each of 4 places, 4 conveyance
pulleys [2], and 4 pulley guides [3].
3. Remove the E-ring [4], the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] and
the pulley guide [6].
Note
• Reinstall the paper exit conveyance pulley [5] with the
gear inside.
[5]
[4]
[6]
a0get3c005ca
17.2.3 Replacing the entrance roller /1, the bearing /K

• Entrance roller /1, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F-237
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [5] [4] • Rear cover (Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
• Entrance conveyance motor, Entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.17.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
• Conveyance pulley /1 of the entrance pulley. (Refer to F.17.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
3. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each position, and then remove the
E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing /K comes in the position [5] as
• To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the
screws [2], 2 for each, in counterclockwise order.
• When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply the
Molykote EM-30L on all over around the spring pins [6] on
front and rear of the shaft.
4. Remove the pick-up roller /1 [7].

[3] [5] [4]

[7]
[2] [6]
a0get3c006ca
17.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller /2, the stacker entrance roller, the stacker entrance conveyance belt, the stacker
entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, the bearing /K
• Entrance roller /2, Stacker entrance roller
• Stacker entrance conveyance belt
• Stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr and /Rr, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F-238
(2) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] [3] • Rear cover(Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
• Entrance conveyance motor/entrance conveyance belt (Refer
to F.17.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1),
the paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
• Conveyance pulley of the entrance roller /2 (Refer to F.17.2.2
Replacing the conveyance pulley, the paper exit conveyance
pulley)
2. Remove the stacker entrance roller pressure springs /Fr [1] and /
Rr [2].
3. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each position, and then remove 2
coupling brackets [4].
Note
• When reinstalling, push the stacker entrance roller assy
[6] [4] [6] [5] a0get3c007ca [5] against the coupling receiver bracket [6] and then
install the coupling bracket [4].
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].

[2] [1] [7]
6. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each front and rear sides, and then
[6] remove the E-rings [3] and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
[5] Note
• When reinstalling the bearing /K [6], be sure to set so that
[4]
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller assy [9].
[9]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4] [3] [8]
a0get3c008ca
F-239
[1] [1]
E-rings [2] and the bearings /K [3], 1 for each.
Note
[2] the notch of the bearing /K comes in the position [4] as
[2] [3] shown in the picture.
[3] [4] screws [1], 2 for each, in counterclockwise order.
[4]
9. Remove the stacker entrance roller[5].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[6] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6] [5]
a0get3c009ca
[1]
[1] E-rings [2], 1 each. Then slide the bearings [3], 1 for each.
Note
• When reinstalling the bearing [3], be sure to set so that
the notch of the bearing comes in the position [4] as
11. Remove the entrance roller /2 [5] and the stacker entrance
[4] [3] [2] [2] [3] [4]
conveyance belt [6] from the bracket [7].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the flange section
[8] of the pulley comes in the direction shown in the
picture.
[6] [8] [5] [7]

a0get3c010ca
17.2.5 Replacing the paper refeed roller, the merging section roller, the paper exit roller, the bearing /K
• Paper refeed roller, Merging section roller, Paper exit roller, Bearing /K
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F-240
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [1] [6]
• Front door(Refer to G.15.2.2 Front cover)
• Rear cover(Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
• Left cover(Refer to G.15.2.4 Left cover)
• Paper exit motor, Paper exit conveyance belt (Refer to F.
17.2.1 Replacing the entrance conveyance motor (M1), the
paper exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt)
• Conveyance pulleys of the paper refeed roller, the merging
section roller and the paper exit roller
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the screw [2]. Then remove the
FD alignment belt [3] from the pulley [4].
Note
[3] [7] [8] [7] • When reinstalling the FD alignment belt [3], be sure to
insert it to the pulleys [4] and [5], and place it under the
tension of the spring [6] and then tighten the screw [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [7] and the pulley fixing plate [8].
[5]
a0get3c011ca
F-241
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
[6] [5] [4] 5. Remove the screws [3], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [4] and the bearings /K [5], 1 for each.
Note
[3]
[2] [1]
[7]
a0get3c012ca
F-242
6. Remove 2 E-rings [1].
[5] [4] [3]
7. Remove the screws [2], 2 for each of 3 positions, and then remove
the E-rings [3], and the bearings /K [4], 1 for each.
Note
• When reinstalling the bearing /K [4], be sure to apply
[2]
[1] [6]
a0get3c013ca
8. Remove the paper exit roller [1], the merging section roller [1] and
[2] [1] the paper refeed roller [3].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set each roller in the
following conditions; the paper exit roller [1] with the side
which has a step on the top of the shaft faced rear, the
merging section roller [2] with its screw hole faced rear
and the paper refeed roller [3] with its D-cut faced
front.
[3] a0get3c014ca
17.2.6 Replacing the straight gate

• Straight gate
*1 1200/1200P/1051
F-243
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
[7] [6] [4] [5] [3] 2. Remove the straight gate spring [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[5].
5. Remove the E-ring [6] and then remove the bearing [7].
[2] [1] a0get3c015ca
6. Open the straight conveyance guide plate [1].

[1] [4]
7. Remove the E-ring [2] and remove the bearing [3] and the straight
gate [4].
[3]
[2]
a0get3c016ca
17.2.7 Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
• Replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1) and the straight gate spring
: Spot replacement (Actual replacement cycle: every 5,000,000 operations)
F-244
(2) Procedure
[6] [4] [5] 2. Remove the straight gate spring [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm
[3].
4. Remove the connector [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the straight gate solenoid
assy [6].
[3] [2] [1] a0get3c020ca
Note
[1] [2] • When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the straight gate
solenoid assy so that the leading edge [1] of the straight
gate without pulling the plunger comes to upper than the
guide plate [2] and the leading edge [3] of the straight gate
with pulling the plunger comes to lower than the guide
plate [4] after installing the straight gate spring.
[3] [4] a0get3c021ca
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
[6] [1] [2] [3] plunger [3]. Then, remove the straight gate solenoid (SD2) [4].
Note
• When reinstalling this part, be sure to install it so that the
wiring harness [5] is on the side of the screw hole [6] of
the mounting bracket [2].
[5] [4] a0get3c022ca
F-245

17.3.1 Replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)
• Stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker exit shutter arm [2].
Then remove the plunger [3].
Note
• Be careful that the plunger [3] falls down when removing
the C-clip [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid assy [6].
[5] [3] [2] [1] a0get3c023ca
Note
[2]
• When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker exit
shutter solenoid assy so that the leading edge [3] of the
stacker exit shutter [2] comes to the inner area [6] of the
folding part of the guide plate [5] on the refeed roller [4]
when pulling the plunger of the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) to which the stacker exit shutter arm [1] is
connected.
• Check it from the opening [7].
[3] [6] [5] [4]
[1] [7] a0get3c024ca
F-246
[1] [2] [5] 5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stacker exit shutter
solenoid (SD2) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[4] [3] a0get3c025ca
17.3.2 Replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

• Stack switching solenoid (SD3)
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] [5] [2] [1] 1. Remove the Rear cover(Refer to G.15.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stack switching arm [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the plunger [5] and the
stack switching solenoid assy [6].
[3] a0get3c026ca
Note
[2] [3] • When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stack
switching solenoid assy so that the driven roller [2]
touches with the refeed roller [3] when not pulling the
plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3), and
when pulling it, the gap between them is larger than the
standard value "a".
Standard value "a"
:The gap between the driven roller [2] and the re-feed
roller [3] is 2mm or more.
[1] [4] a0get3c027ca
F-247
[2] [1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stack switching
solenoid (SD3) [3] from the mounting bracket [2].
Note
[3] [5] [4] a0get3c028ca
17.3.3 Replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)

• Stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(2) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the stacker entrance guide
plate arm [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stacker entrance guide
plate solenoid assy [5].
[3] [5] a0get3c029ca
F-248
Note
[5] [4] • When reinstalling the parts, be sure to fix the stacker
entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the position where
the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the solenoid
starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the
mounting bracket [2].
[6] [3]
[2] [1] [7] a0get3c030ca
[6] [2] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2] and the
plunger [3]. Then, remove the stacker entrance guide plate
solenoid (SD4) [3].
Note
[5] [1] [4] [3] a0get3c031ca
F-249
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURE GP-5...
18. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE GP-501

18.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION: This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.
CAUTION
• GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not mix them with other products (metric standard screws). Otherwise, the
screw hole is damaged.
18.2 DIE SET SERVICE

18.2.1 Die Set Service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
18.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
• Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
• Variety and types of paper being punched
• Cover stocks being punched
• Length of the average job
• Other environmental conditions
18.2.3 Die Set Components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type Description Bindery Style
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate) 517, 518
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components

• Shoulder bolt and spring [1]
• Punch pins [2]
• Felt pad [3]
• Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
F-250
Note
• The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top
bar is facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly
press them against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the
assembly is sitting on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against
the punch pins [4].
F-251
(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
18.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set

(1) Periodically Checked and replaced parts/Spotted Checked and replaced parts/cycle
• Dieset
: Every 2,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 500,000 punches*2) *3
*1 The periodical replacement is only for 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc.
*2 Actual replacement cycle of 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc/C8000.
*3 Replace as needed. Replacement is recommended if hanging chips are usually generated.
(2) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for asmooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customer’s paper through the punch. Inspectthe holes.
• Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
• Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
• Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
18.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts
(1) Periodically Checked and lubricated parts/cycle
• Die Set pins
: Every 200,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches)*1
: Every 210,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 50,000 punches)*2
• Die Set Shoulded bolts
: Every 800,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches)*1
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 200,000 Punches)*2
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C6501/C6501P/C65hc
*2 C8000
(2) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F-252
(3) To lubricate Die Set pins:

• Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
• Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
• Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.18.2.3 Die Set Components.
(4) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

• Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
• Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
18.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection

Inspect the hole alignment on the customer’s punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
18.3 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION

18.3.1 CHECK, CLEANING, AND LUBRICATION
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description Qty. Part Number Period Check Clean Lubricate Replace Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt 12,000K X a soft cloth and
(green belt) prints alcohol
Aligner idler 12,000K X a soft cloth and
roller assembly prints alcohol
Aligner idler 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
rollers prints alcohol
Aligner latching 3,000K X -
mechanisms prints
Back gauge 3,000K X X Blower brush/
solenoid prints vacuum cleaner
F-253
Back gauge 1 A0N9PP59## 4,000K X -

mechanism prints
Base 3,000K X Vacuum
prints cleaner
Die guide 3,000K X Vacuum
prints cleaner
Die set 500K Y -
prints
Punch die (pins) 50K X Oil 3-IN-ONE
prints (WD-40
Company)
Die set shoulder 200K X Grease Magnalube-G
bolts prints Teflon Grease
Door closing 3,000K X -
latch prints
Drive rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
Idler rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
Optical sensors 3,000K X Blower brush
prints
Paper path, 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
Aligner Panels prints alcohol
bypass prints alcohol
punch prints alcohol
Punch drive 3,000K Grease Magnalube-G
cams prints Teflon Grease
Roller energy 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
drive prints alcohol
Timing belts 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
prints alcohol
18.3.2 External Cleaning

The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
18.3.3 Internal Cleaning

Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
WARNING:
• Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could result
in death or serious Injury.
18.3.4 Operational Inspection

Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customer’s paper.
18.3.5 Internal Inspection

Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
18.3.6 Cleaning the base

• Base
(2) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technician’s visits.
F-254
(3) Chip Bin

Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
18.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide

• Die guide
(2) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
18.3.8 Checking the Door Latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Periodically checked parts/cycle

• Door latch
: Every 3,000,000 prints.
(2) Procedure
• Ensure latch holds door closed.
• Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
• To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.16.2.1 Door latch check)
F-255
18.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels
(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle
• Aligner paper path and panels
(2) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
(3) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
18.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.18.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement)
(a) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/cycle

• Aligner Idler Roller
(b) Procedure
• Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
• Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
• Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
WARNING:
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
(c) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each roller’s bracket [1]. The roller should move
away from the green belt drive and then when released, they
spring back into place.
F-256
2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(d) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
18.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt

• Aligner (Green) Drive Belt
: Every 12,000,000 prints. *1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
• Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
• Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(3) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.18.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement)
18.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid

• Back Gauge Solenoid
(2) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
F-257
Note
• Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.18.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal)
18.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers

• Idler rollers
(2) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the referance page about the maintainence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3]. (Refer to F.18.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers)
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.18.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers)
(3) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
F-258
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
Installation Note:
• Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
• Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
• After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(4) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.18.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F-259
To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
18.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.18.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
• Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F-260
• Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing
the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
F-261
18.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.

• Drive rollers
(2) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.18.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers.
18.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.

• Aligner Latch
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
• Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
• Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F-262
18.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors

• Optical Sensors
(2) Procedure
• Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(3) Supplies Needed

Canned air or vacuum cleaner
F-263
Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
18.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path

• Bypass paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.18.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers, F.18.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers)
• Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
• Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
• Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
F-264
18.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path

• Punch Paper path
(2) Procedure
• Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
• Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
• Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
• Clean as needed.
18.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt

• Timing Belt
(2) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.18.3.43 Belt replacement.
F-265
Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4” (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
18.3.21 Bypass panel

(1) Tools Needed
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
• Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer, G.16.3.3
Removing the Rear Cover)
18.3.22 Bypass panel Removal

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 4 screws [1].
F-266
2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the
exit side of the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass

sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the
Bypass shaft.
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the
shaft [1] without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft
clears the nylon bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass
panel in the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
• Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it
protrudes through the mounting bracket of the rear frame
into the Bypass panel [5].
F-267
8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the
entrance side of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
• Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft
mounting brackets. The nylon bushings go through the
mounting brackets [1], into the Bypass panel [2].
18.3.23 Aligner panels

The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the
Printer).
18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel
cover by removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
• The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
F-268
5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.
6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
18.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement

(1) Tools Required
• Flat head screw driver
• Needle nose plyers
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with
fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly
[4] down and then out.
Note
• Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the
rollers need to be removed.
18.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal) Then follow the procedures
below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver
• Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
• Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
• Snap ring pliers
• E-Ring tool
• Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
CAUTION
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to observe
this caution can result in injury.
Note
• Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
F-269
(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement

1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to
remove the entrance guide [2].
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:

1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings
of the GP2 aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it
clears the rear frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it
aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.
18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To
remove it simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter
Shaft[6], leave it hanging.
F-270
10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide
the Diverter out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the
large sheet metal assembly that actually contains the green drive
belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side
frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner assembly up and outward. You can grab the
assembly at the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able
to reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage
the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing
the 4 screws [1].
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
• The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the Sensor Harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you
have good alignment. You may now go back and tighten the
screws until they are snug.
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.
5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler
Roller 4 Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then
tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect the
power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
F-271
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings
of the GP6 Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the
rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:

1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501
Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide
assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet
metal Exit Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set
aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner
assembly. This is the large sheet metal assembly within the
GP-501 Punch that contains the green drive belt Aligner.
CAUTION
• Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The
Coupler is loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper
Guide Aligner up and outward. You can grab the assembly at
the roller cut out with your fingers.
CAUTION
• Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very
delicate.
Note
• In order to access these screws, you must first remove
the Die Set storage shelf and the cable shield attached
to the Die storage shelf at the paper entrance side.
Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will enable better
access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
• As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind
the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it.
Failure to do this can damage the unit.
5. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws (S).
F-272
CAUTION
• Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
6. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by

removing the 4 screws.
CAUTION
• Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly,
green side out.
• Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as
not to damage the Flex Coupling.
• Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws
with the 4 lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is
flush with the sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal
ruler works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the
green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces. Adjust
the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure
3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly
up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the
sheet metal surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The
green drive belt should appear to be even and just floating above
the surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
- Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
- Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
- Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
- Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear
of the GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper
Guide assembly and that the sensor harness is properly
connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on
the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go
back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
• Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley
arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to
the top of the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly
aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws
back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on
the rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment,
then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2
Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4
screws.
F-273
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper
Guide.
11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:
1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both
pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding
the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal
for:
- A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
- As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the
GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the
front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of
the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.18.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and connect
the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
18.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Periodically cleaned and checked parts/ cycle
• Energy drive rollers
: 3,000,000 prints
(2) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them
gently to one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its
mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers
[3] to remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated
over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the
mounting brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient
force for the rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of
the machine.
18.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism

The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
F-274
(1) Periodically replaced parts/Spotted replaced parts/cycle

• Back gauge mechanism
: Every 16,000,000 prints*1 (Actual replacement cycle: Every 4,000,000 punches*2)
(2) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.
16.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(3) Tools Required

Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2]
lines up the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor
connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the
bracket aside [3].
F-275
6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller

PCB [1].
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
• If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it
for access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull
the wire through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge
can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and
pivot the bracket down.
F-276
13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1]
so that it extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness
[3].
CAUTION
• Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on
the front of the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to
towards the front.
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.

16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.
17. After replacing the Back gauge mechanism, conduct the following
item.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
18.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
F-277
18.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in "F.18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
18.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed
while keeping it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
F-278
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.
3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep
punching, and skew.
18.3.33 Punch module

(1) Tools Required
• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
• Punch motor
• Drive motor belt
• Punch module brake
• Cams
• Flexible drive coupling
• Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.18.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
WARNING
• Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or death and damage the punch.
18.3.34 Punch Module Removal

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:

1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.
2. Use a 5/64” hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front
panel.
F-279
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the
Punch Module wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2].
Remove harness from brake and clutch as per image below.
5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking
the belts over the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical
belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the
respective tensioner.
F-280
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent
removal of the module.
18.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams

(1) Periodically lubricated parts/cycle
• Punch drive cams
: Every 12,000,000 prints (Actual lubrication cycle: Every 3,000,000 punches)*1
*1 1200/1200P/1051/C8000
(2) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.18.3.29 Back Gauge Removal for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
F-281
Installation Note
• Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
18.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
• The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
(3) To remove the clutch:

1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
F-282
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].

Installation Note
• When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of
the clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch
clutch [2] off the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the
shaft key. Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear
plate. While pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten
the 2 set screws. The assembly does not require a gap
between the Punch clutch and clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from
the Punch Controller PCB.
F-283
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
18.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.18.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.18.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment)
(2) Tools Needed

• Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)
• Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Pliers
18.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].
2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on
the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2
set screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the
Punch module brake. (Refer to F.18.3.39 Punch Module
Brake Adjustment)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch
end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
18.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
F-284
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the
shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
18.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2]
off the shaft.
Installation Note
• When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan
hub with the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and
spring clip are facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the
pulley and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
18.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
F-285
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch
gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work
it onto the clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection
when pressed.
18.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required

• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
F-286
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler
roller assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of
the Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at
the end where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
18.3.43 Belt replacement

(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
• When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that
the belt has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
F-287
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
18.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

• Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4” and 5/16" nut drivers
• Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

• Wire cutters
• Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F-288
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED
bizhub PRESS C8000 TO BE DISASSEMBL...
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED
1.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
• The screw-lock is applied as a prevention of screw looseness.
• The screw-lock is applied to the screws which have a risk of loosening with the oscillation and load during using and shipment.
• When loosening or removing the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after
tightening the screw.
1.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
• Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.3 Precaution on removing the boards

CAUTION
• When removing the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
• The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
• Be sure to use the body earth when touching the element on the board by necessity.
• For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply /1 of the main body for 50 minutes after turning OFF the
power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by charging voltage.
power switch.
power switch.
power switch.
• For the prevention of electric shock, do not touch the DC power supply of the RU for 50 minutes after turning OFF the power
switch.
1.4 Writing unit cover

1.4.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 4 mounting screws of the writing unit cover
[1]
[2]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Writing unit cover
1.4.2 Reason of prohibition

The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside by opening the cover, it prevents the laser path. Therefore, do
not remove the screw of the writing unit cover.
1.5 PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

1.5.1 Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 1 screw of the stopper plate /Fr on the drum unit
• 1 screw of the stopper plate /Rr on the drum unit
G-1
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
[5]
a03uf2c129ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Stopper plate /Fr

[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Stopper plate /Rr
[5] Drum unit -

The distance between the drum and developing roller is adjusted by the installation positions of the guides /Fr and /Rr. Therefore, do not remove
the screws of the guides /Fr and /Rr.
1.6 Fusing unit

1.6.1 Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 2 screws [1] of the steering tension spring [2]
• 2 screws [5] of the pressure pad spring [6]
• 2 screws [4] of the separation roller pressure spring [3]
[2]
[1]
[5] [6]
[4] [3]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Steering tension spring
G-2
[3] Separation roller pressure spring [4] Screws not allowed to be removed
[5] Screws not allowed to be removed [6] Pressure pad spring

• The belt tension of the fusing belt /Lw has been adjusted before shipment to keep the balance and execute the steering properly with the
steering tension spring. Therefore, do not adjust it by removing the adjustment screw of the steering tension spring.
• The pressure of the pressure pad to the fusing roller has been adjusted before shipment so that the pressure is proper with the pressure
pad spring. Therefore, do not adjust it by removing the adjustment screw of the pressure pad spring.
• The pressure of the separation roller to the fusing roller has been adjusted before shipment so that the pressure is proper with the
separation roller pressure spring. Therefore, do not adjust it by removing the adjustment screw of the separation roller pressure spring.
G-3
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. bizhub PRESS C8000

2.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace (other
than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while in normal
service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.5.1 External section to F.5.15 Fusing section.
No. Section Parts name
1 Cover Rear cover /Up
2 Rear cover /Md1
3 Rear cover /Md2
4 Rear cover /Md3
5 Rear cover /Lw
6 Filter cover /2
7 Left cover /Up
8 Left cover /Lw1
9 Left cover /Lw2
10 Left cover /Lw3
11 Filter cover /3
12 Right cover /Up1
13 Right cover /Up2
14 Right cover /Up3
15 Right cover /Lw1
16 Right cover /Lw2
17 Right cover /Lw3
18 Working table
19 Upper cover
20 Cover table
21 Main board unit
22 Write section Writing unit
23 Process section Process unit
24 Image correction unit
25 Toner collection section Toner collection pipe
26 Duplex section Duplex section
27 Lock lever /1
28 Lock lever /2
29 Paper feed section Paper feed tray
30 Tray up/down wire
31 Fusing unit Thermostat /1 (TS1)
32 Thermostat /2 (TS2)
2.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

2.2.1 Rear cover /Up, /Md1, /Md2, /Md3, /Lw, filter cover /2
WARNING
• Do not touch the DC power supply /1 for 50 minutes after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1). There is a possibility of
electrical shock caused by charging voltage.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the electric element and the pattern.
G-4
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then loosen the screw [2].
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove the filter box [3] to the arrow-marked direction.
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the rear cover /Md3 [2].
[3] [5] 4. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the rear cover /Md2 [8].
5. Loosen 3 screws [3] and remove the filter cover /2 [4].
[4] 6. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the rear cover /Up [6].
[6]
7. Remove 9 screws [9] and loosen 2 screw [10] and then remove the
rear cover /Md1 [11].
[11] 8. Remove 5 screws [12] and then remove the rear cover /Lw [14].
[9]
[9]
[8] [10]
[7]
[2]
[14]
[1] [13] [12] [13]
2.2.2 Left cover /Up, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, filter cover /3

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the filter cover /3 [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the left cover /Up [4].
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the left cover /Lw2 [6].
[4]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[9]
G-5
2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, working table
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove 4 knob screws [1] and then remove the knob screw [2].
Then, remove the working table [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the working table [3], be sure to note
that only the knob screw [2] does not have a spacer.
[2] [1] [1]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover /Up3 [2].
[4] 3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the right cover /Up2 [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the right cover /Lw1 [6].
5. Remove 12 screws [7] and then remove the right cover /Up1 [8].
6. Remove 2 screws [9] and then remove the right cover /Lw2 [10].
[3] 7. Remove 5 screws [11] and then remove the right cover /Lw3 [12].
[7]
[8]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[5] [11] [6] [11] [12]
[2]
[1]
G-6
2.2.4 Upper cover, cover table

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the working table. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /
[1] Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, working table)
toner hopper unit)
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover table [2].
[2]
4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove upper cover [2].

[1]
[1] [2]
2.2.5 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the filter box, rear covers /Up, /Md1, /Md2, /Md3, and /Lw,
and filter cover /2. (Refer to G.2.2.1 Rear cover /Up, /Md1, /Md2, /
Md3, /Lw, filter cover /2)
2. Remove the right covers /Up2 and /Up3. (Refer to G.2.2.3 Right
cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3, working table)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
G-7
[2] [1] [3] 4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from 2 cable clamps [1].
[1] [2] 6. Remove 13 screws [1] and then remove the board cover /Md [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]

8. Remove 13 screws [2] and then remove the board cover /Up [3].
[2]
[2]
[3] [2] [1]

10. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the board cover /Lw [3].
[2]
[2]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-8
16. Remove 13 screws [1] and remove the main board unit [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the main board unit, be sure to insert
the screw [5] to the slotted hole [3], and then insert the
screw [6] to the slotted hole [4].
[3] [5]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[6]
2.2.6 Writing unit

WARNING
• Do not execute energization while the writing unit is misaligned from the regular installation position.
• Never remove the cover of the writing unit while in energization. The laser beam threatens vision.
Note
• Never remove the cover of the writing unit. Also, never loosen the screw.
• When removing the writing unit, be sure not to touch the dust proof glass. (Not to contaminate the glass)
• Never remove the writing unit for 2 minutes after the main power switch (SW1) turns OFF.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the right covers /Up1 and /Lw1 and the working table.
(Refer to G.2.2.3 Right cover /Up1, /Up2, /Up3, /Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3,
working table)
[1] 3. Remove 9 screws [2], loosen 2 screws [3], and then remove the
fan mounting plate /Rt [4].
[2] [3] [2] [3] [2]
[4]
G-9
[1] 4. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each.

6. Remove the connectors [3], 2 each.
[3] [2]
[2]
7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 4 pressure plate
assy [2] by sliding them to the right.
[3] Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align the spring [4] with the
guide [3].
[4]
8. Remove the writing units /Y [5], /M [6], /C [7], and /K [8].
Note
• The writing units /C, /M, /Y, and /K are the common units.
[6] [5] [1]
10. After disassembling/assembling the writing unit, conduct the
following steps.
Writing unit /K:
proof glass)
-Skew Initial Position Memory (Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position
Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (Refer to I.5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the
writing unit)
- CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.14 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
- Restart Timing Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.1 Restart Timing
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
[7] [8] [2]
Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
Writing unit /Y, /M, /C:
proof glass)
-Skew Initial Position Memory (Refer to I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position
Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
- I/O Check Mode (Refer to I.5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the
writing unit)
G-10
2.2.7 Process unit

(1) Procedure
2. Remove all drum units. (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum unit)
3. Remove all developing units. (Refer to F.5.7.2 Replacing the
Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /K)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.
Note
[4] [5] [2] [8] [1] [6] • Be sure to remove the intermediate transfer unit, drum
unit, and developing unit before removing the process
unit.
• Do not remove the black screw.
5. Push back the process unit [6] until the screw [5] can be seen from
each hole [4] of the guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3].
6. Remove the screw [5], 1 each.
Note
7. Pull out the process unit [6] again, and then remove it from the
guide rails /Lt [2] and /Rt [3] as shown below.
The projection [7] on the guide rail /Lt is set in the notch [8] of the
process unit. The notch of the process unit is on the projection [9]
of the guide rail /Rt. Therefore, remove the process unit from the
guide rail /Lt first by displacing a little. Then, remove the process
unit from the guide rail /Rt by lifting it up.
[1] [9] [3] [5] [4]
[10]
G-11
2.2.8 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] [3] 1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.7 Process unit)
2. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the image correction unit
assy [5].
Note
• For removing the image correction unit assy, turn the
bottom of the process unit up.
[4] [5]
[3] [1] [2]

6. Remove the supporting brackets /Fr [2] and /Rr [3] and then
remove the image correction unit [4].
8. After replacing the image correction unit, conduct the following
steps.
- Cleaning the dust-proof glass
- Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Refer to I.5.3.24 Printer Gamma
Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment))
- Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.25 Printer Gamma
Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment))
[4]
[3] [2]
2.2.9 Toner collection pipe

(1) Procedure
Note
• When the SC codes C-2211, 2212, 2213, 2214 (Drum motor abnormality), C-2222 (Waste toner collection motor abnormality),
C-2231 (Filter cleaning motor abnormality), C-2233 (Cleaning motor abnormality) occur, clean the toner collection pipe following
this procedure.
G-12
[1] 1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.2.2.7 Process unit)

2. Remove the duplex section. (Refer to G.2.2.10 Duplex section)
3. Remove the vertical conveyance section. (Refer to F.5.11.1
Replacing the vertical conveyance clutches /1 (CL20) and /2
(CL21))
4. To prevent the inside of the body from getting contaminated by the
waste toner falling down, put paper [2] under the toner collection
pipe [1].
[2]

6. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the scattering toner
collection pipe assy [3].
[3]
[1]
[2] [1] [3] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the toner collection pipe
cover [2].
8. Remove 5 screws [3], and then remove the horizontal conveyance
pipe assy [4] and the vertical conveyance pipe /2 assy [5].
Note
• The horizontal conveyance pipe assy and the vertical
conveyance pipe /2 assy cannot be removed individually.
[3] However, they can be separated after removing all screws
[3]. Separating these units inside the main body has a risk
of dropping the waste toner from the connecting section.
[5] Be careful about the operation.
[4]

10. Remove 8 screws [2], and then remove the vertical conveyance
pipe /1 assy [3].
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the vertical conveyance pipe /1 assy, be
sure to reinstall it so that the metal plate of the assy is in
contact with the main body. When the metal plate is not in
contact with the main body, the operation error of the
waste toner collection motor occurs.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
G-13
11. Remove 2 screws [2] of the scattering toner collection pipe assy
[1], and then remove the scattering toner collection pipe /Lt [3].
[4]
12. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the scattering toner
collection pipe /Rt [5].
[5]
[2]
[3]
[1]
13. Remove the horizontal conveyance pipe assy [2] from the vertical
conveyance pipe /2 assy [1].
[2]
[1]
[6] pipe /Lt1 [2].
pipe /Lt2 [4].
16. Remove 2 screws [5], and then remove the collection joint [6].
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5]
17. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the
horizontal conveyance screw [3].
[1] 18. Remove the vertical conveyance pipe /2 [4].
[2]
[4] [3]
19. Remove 3 screws [2] of the horizontal conveyance pipe /1 assy [1],
and then remove the antenna board /2 (AB2) [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
G-14
[12] [3] 20. Remove the screws [2], 3 each, from the vertical conveyance
pipe /1 assy [1], and then remove the drum /Y collection pipe [3],
drum /M collection pipe [4], drum /C collection pipe [5], and drum /
K collection pipe [6].
21. Remove the screws [5], 8 each, and then remove the vertical
conveyance pipes /1-4 [9], /1-3 [10], /1-2 [11], and /1-1 [12].
[2]
[7]
[4]
[7]
[11] [2]
[5]
[7]
[10] [2]
[9]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[8] [7] [6]
2.2.10 Duplex section

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [5] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.5.13.1 Pulling out/
the fusing unit)
[3] [4] 5. Remove 2 connectors [1].
6. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fixation of the wiring
harness assy of the duplex section [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the wiring harness assy of the duplex
section, be sure to insert the projection [4] in the slit [5] of
the duplex section.
G-15

Note
9. Move the guide pin [4] of the guide rail /Rt [3] to the avoidance
position of the slotted hole [5].
10. Remove the duplex section [7] from the guide rails /Rt [3] and /Lt
[6].
Note
• When removing the duplex section, be sure to remove
with 2 people; one on the paper feed side and the other on
[2] [7] [6] the paper exit side.
• When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper feed side holds the bottom of the wiring cover /Rt
[8].
• When removing the duplex section, the person on the
paper exit side holds the stay [9].
[1] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [8]
2.2.11 Replacing the lock levers /1 and /2

Note
• The main body has a risk of falling down when the process unit and the duplex section are pulled out at the same time. The lock
levers /1 and /2 are provided to prevent the main body from falling down. The process unit and the duplex section cannot be
pulled out at the same time with the levers.
When the process unit or the duplex section cannot be pulled out independently, it has a possibility that the lock levers /1 and /2
are deformed by a wrong operation. In that case, the levers need to be replaced.
• Since the lock levers /1 and /2 are not the target parts of the routine maintenance, they are installed not to be replaced. Therefore,
the replacement has to be conducted under the indirect vision. Replace the parts following the installation positions of each part
on the pictures.
G-16
(1) Procedure
[6] [5] toner hopper unit)
2. Pull out the duplex section while unlocking the pull out lever of the
duplex section. Then turn the lever counterclockwise and pull out
the duplex section until the screw [1] can be reached. (Refer to F.
5.13.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the duplex section)
Note
• Depending on the deformed condition of the lock levers /1
[2] and /2 [3], the duplex section cannot be pulled out
smoothly. However, keep enough space to access the
screw [1] by pressing the levers.
Note
[3] [5] [1] [2] • When reinstalling the stopper [4], be sure to align the
projection [5] with the positioning hole [6].
[4] 4. Once the stopper [4] is removed, the lock levers /1 [2] and /2 [3]
are deactivated. Then, pull out only the duplex section [7]
furthermore.
WARNING
[2] • Do not pull out the process unit since it has a risk of
[3] falling down the main body.
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and then remove the lock lever /2 [3].
[7]
6. Remove the spring [9] from the lock lever /2 [3].
[1] [3] [8]
Note
• When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
of the spring [9] and the installation position of the hook.
7. Remove 3 screws [10] and then remove the lever enforcing plate
[11].
[9] 8. Remove the E-ring [12] and then remove the lock lever /1 [2].
9. Remove the spring [13] from the lock lever /1 [2].
Note
• When replacing, be careful about the installation direction
[12] [10] [11] of the spring [13] and the installation position of the hook.
[13]
[2]
2.2.12 Paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Procedure
Note
G-17
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.

2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.10.1 Replacing the pick-
up roller and the paper feed roller rubber)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and then lift the paper feed tray /1 [2] to
remove.
[1] [2]
8050ma3162
2.2.13 Tray up/down wire

Wire length
• Up/down wire /A, /C: 531mm
• Up/down wire /B, /D: 160mm
(1) How to unfasten a wire

Note
[8] [7] [5] [6] [1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.
2. Remove the paper feed unit.
3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the wire cover /FR [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the wire cover /FL [4].
6. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the wire cover /RR [6].
7. Remove 2 screws [7], and then remove the wire cover /RL [8].
[4] [3] [2] a03uf2c119ca
G-18
8. Remove 1 E-ring [1].

[7]
9. Move the drive pulley [2] inward and then remove the wires /C [3]
[6]
[3] and /D [4].
[5] 10. Remove 1 E-ring [5], and then remove the wire regulation cover [6]
to release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from the pulley [7].
[8] 11. Remove 1 screw [8] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1, and
[4]
then remove the wire /D [4].
[1] 12. Remove 1 E-ring [9], and then remove the wire regulation cover
[2] [10] to release the wire /C [3] from the pulley [11].
[15] [19] [18] 13. Remove 1 screw [12] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /C [3].
14. Remove 1 E-ring [13].
[17] 15. Move the drive pulley [14] inward and then remove the wires /A
[15] and /B [16].
[20]
16. Remove 1 E-ring [17], and then remove the wire regulation cover
[18] to release the wires /A [15] and /B [16] from the pulley [19].
[16] 17. Remove 1 screw [20] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /B [16].
18. Remove 1 E-ring [21], and then remove the wire regulation cover
[14] [13]
[22] to release the wire /A [15] from the pulley [23].
19. Remove 1 screw [24] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1,
and then remove the wire /A [15].
[23] [22]
[21]
[15] [24]
[11]
[10]
[3]
[9] [12] 8050ma3168
(2) How to string a wire

Note
G-19
1. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /C [3] to the
[12] wire fixing shaft [2] with 1 screw [1].
[11] 2. Wind the wire /C [3] around the pulley [4], insert it into the shaft [6]
[4] [3] with the wire regulation cover [5], and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[13]
[7].
[8] 3. From the bottom of the paper feed tray, install the wire /D [10] to
[9]
[10] the wire fixing shaft [9] with 1 screw [8].
4. Wind the wires /C [3] and /D [10] around the pulley [11], insert it
[16] into the shaft [13] with the wire regulation cover [12], and then fix
them with 1 E-ring [14].
[14] [15]
Note
• Wind the wires around the pulley [11] so that the wire /C
[3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] comes to the
inside.
[17]
5. Insert the wires /C [3] and /D [10] into the up/down drive shaft [14],
[18] move the drive pulley [15] outward, and then fix them with 1 E-ring
[16].
Note
• Insert the wires into the up/down drive shaft [14] so that
the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10]
comes to the inside.
6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] following the steps 1 to 5.

Note
• After re-stretching the wire, turn the up/down drive shaft
manually to check that the up/down plate moves
smoothly.

[17]
[7] [5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[2] [1] 8050ma3169
2.2.14 Thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2)

[4] [3] [3] [5] the fusing unit)
web unit)
4. Remove 2 clamps [1] to release the wiring harness.
5. Remove 2 each of fastons [2].
Note
• Be sure to remove the faston by holding its base. Never
pull out it by holding the wiring harness.
6. Remove the screws [3], 2 each, and remove the thermostats /1

(TS1) [4] and /2 (TS2) [5].
[2] [2] [1]
G-20

Note
• Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostats /1 (TS1) and /2 (TS2) with the thermostat adjust jig /B (A1RJPJG1) before
securing them. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller is cold.
1. Fasten tentatively TS1 [1] and TS2 [2] with the screws [3], 2 each.
[1] [3] [3] [2] 2. Reinstall the fastons [4], 2 each, to the TS1 and TS2.
[4] [4]
3. Install the fusing roller assy. (Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the

[1] [5] [2] [5] [6] fusing roller assy and the fusing heater /1)
4. Remove the fusing refresh roller assy. (Refer to F.5.15.15
Replacing the fusing refresh roller assy)
5. Insert the thermostat adjust jig /B [3] between TS1 and the fusing
roller [2].
6. Adjust the position of TS1 so that the gap amount between TS and
the fusing roller becomes equal to the thickness of the thermostat
adjust jig /B [1], and then secure it with the screw [5].
7. Secure TS6 [6] by following steps 3 to 4.
Note
• Be sure to make the distance between TS1/TS2 and the
fusing roller (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat adjust jig /B [1].
[3] [4]
8. Apply screw-lock to 4 screws [3].

9. Install the fusing refresh roller assy. (Refer to F.5.15.15 Replacing
the fusing refresh roller assy)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Adjustment part

[2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing roller
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing roller
G-21
2.2.15 Thermostat /3 (TS3)

the fusing unit)
[2] [3]
web unit)
4. Remove 2 fastons [1].
Note
5. Remove 2 screws [2], and the remove the thermostats /3 (TS3) [3].
[1]

Note
• Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostat /3 (TS3) with the thermostat adjust jig /A (A1RJPJG0) before securing them. Be
sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
• Be sure to make the position adjustments when the fusing roller /Lw is cold.
1. Fasten tentatively TS3 [1] with 2 screws [2].
[2] [1]
2. Reinstall 2 fastons [3] to TS3.
3. Insert the thermostat adjust jig /A [5] between TS3 and the fusing
belt /Lw [4].
4. Adjust the position of TS3 so that the gap amount between TS3
and the fusing belt /Lw becomes equal to the thickness of the
thermostat adjust jig /A [1], and then secure it with the screw [2].
Note
• Be sure to make the distance between TS3 and the fusing
belt /Lw (distance "a") equal to the thickness of the
thermostat adjust jig /A [1].

[4] [3] [5] removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Adjustment part

[2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing belt /Lw
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing belt /Lw
G-22
2.2.16 Thermostats /4 (TS4) and /5 (TS5)

[1] [1]
the fusing unit)
web unit)
3. Remove the fastons [1], 2 each.
Note
4. Remove the screws [2], 2 each, and remove the thermostats /4

(TS4) [3] and /5 (TS5) [4].
[4] [2] [3] [2]

Note
• Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostats /4 (TS4) [3] and /5 (TS5) with the thermostat adjust jig /E (A1RFPJG4) before
• Be sure to perform the position adjustment when the fusing external heating belt is cold.
1. Fasten tentatively TS4 [1] and TS5 [2] with the screws, 2 each [3].
[4] [2] [1] [4] 2. Reinstall the fastons [4], 2 each, to the TS4 and TS5.
3. Insert the thermostat adjust jig /E [6] between TS4 and the fusing
external heating belt [5].
4. Adjust the position of TS4 so that the gap amount between TS4
and the fusing external heating belt becomes equal to the
thickness of the thermostat adjust jig [1] /E and then secure it with
the screw [3].
5. Secure TS5 by following steps 3 to 4.
Note
• Be sure to make the distance between TS5/TS1 and the
fusing external heating belt (distance "a") equal to the
thickness of the thermostat adjust jig /E [1].

[7] [3] [5] [6] [3] 7. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Adjustment part

[2] The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing external heating belt.
[3] The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing external heating belt.
G-23
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. DF-622
3. DF-622
1 Main body DF main body
2 Cover section Front cover
3 Rear cover
4 Conveyance section Conveyance belt unit

3.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
CAUTION
3.2.2 DF
Note
• Before the removal operation, be sure to secure the DF hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. When removing any parts from
the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it
deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(1) Procedure
2. Secure 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2] at 90 degrees. There are 2
[2] types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the
other for 40 degrees, and they can be distinguished by the
scratched number on each surface.
For 70 degrees: Loosen 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
downward, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
For 40 degrees: Remove 4 screws [3] and move 2 brackets [2]
upside down, and then secure them with 4 screws [3] again.
[3] [1] [3]
[1] 3. Open the DF [1] vertically.

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the metal frame [4].
[2] [3]
[4]
a052f2c019ca
G-24
[1] 6. While supporting the DF [1], release 2 stoppers [2] from the holes
[3] and lift to remove.
Note
• The DF has a risk of falling backward when 2 stoppers [2]
are released. Therefore, be sure to support them.

Note
• After reinstalling the DF, conduct "ADF Orig. Stop
Position" in the Service Mode.
[2] [3] [2]

[3]
a052f2c020ca
3.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
[6] [7] 1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.10.2
2. Open the DF [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
3. Close the DF [1] and then open the paper feed cover [3] and the
paper exit cover [4].
Note
• Be careful for closing the DF [1] since the front cover [5] is
not fixed.
• Since the paper exit cover gets damaged, do not open the
[5] [3] [1] [4]
DF [1] while opening the paper exit cover.
4. Remove the front cover [5] while lifting it up a little so that the claw
[6] comes out from the hole [7].
[2]
a052f2c021ca
3.2.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and the paper exit cover [2].
[3] [1] [5] [4] [3] [2]
3. Tilt the rear cover [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5] and remove
it upward.
a052f2c022ca
3.2.5 Conveyance belt

Note
• Do not touch, scratch, and crease the belt roller. When touching, sure to hold the positions within 20mm from the edges in the sub
scan direction.
G-25
(1) Procedure
[3] [3] 1. Fix the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. (Refer to I.10.2
2. Open the DF [1] vertically.
3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] inside of the conveyance belt unit [2] upper
section to the right to remove.
4. Pull out the upper section of the conveyance belt unit in the arrow-
marked direction [4], and then remove it upward.
[1] [2] [4]
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the drive coupling
belt [5] in the conveyance belt unit.
[5]
a052f2c023ca
[1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then pull up the roller section.
7. Remove the conveyance belt.
[1] a052f2c024ca
G-26
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. PF-704/705
4. PF-704/705
4.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
4.1.1 CCD unit
(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 8 screws for assembling CCD unit
• 4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3] [4] a03uf2c125ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] CCD unit [4] Lens reference plate assembly
(2) Reason of prohibition

The accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, and if disassembled, its accuracy is not guaranteed. Accordingly, removing screws that
lead up to the disassembly of the CCD unit is not allowed.
The lens reference plate assembly acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. Removing this assembly causes the
displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit. So, be sure not to remove the attaching screws of the lens reference plate assembly.
4.1.2 Mirror unit/exposure unit

• Installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit
[1]
[2]
a03uf2c126ca
[1] Exposure unit [2] Mirror unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit affects the magnifications of the original to be read in the sub scan direction.
Therefore, adjusting the installation positions of the mirror unit and the exposure unit arbitrarily is not allowed. However, when the exposure
unit and the scanner wire have been removed, these parts must be reinstalled using the optics unit positioning jig.
4.1.3 Framework panel /1, /2

• 8 mounting screws of the framework panel /1
• 22 mounting screws of the framework panel /2
G-27
[1]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Screws not allowed to be removed

The framework panels /1 and /2 are the parts of the PF framework parts. Therefore, removing the panels has a risk of a scanning image
trouble or a paper feed trouble. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the framework panels /1 and /2.

1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover /Lt3
3 Rear cover /Lt2
4 Rear cover /Lt1
5 Rear cover /Rt
6 Read cover /Fr
7 Read cover /Rt
8 Read cover /Rr
9 Read cover /Lt
10 Coupling cover /Fr, /Lt, /Rr
11 Original glass assy
12 Front door
13 Tray front cover
14 Scanner section CCD unit
15 Exposure unit
16 Exposure lamp
17 Scanner wire (remove)
18 Scanner wire (install)
19 Tray section Tray
20 Floating duct flap /Fr, /Rr
21 Lift wire
22 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)
23 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)
24 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)
25 Paper feed suction unit
26 Paper feed belt
27 Paper suction fan /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)
28 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
29 Shutter solenoid /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3
(SD16)
30 Floating duct solenoid /Fr1 (SD7), /Fr2 (SD12), /Fr3 (SD17), /Rr1 (SD8), /Rr2
(SD13), /Rr3 (SD18)
31 Paper feed check window
32 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
33 Horizontal conveyance unit
34 Tandem conveyance unit
G-28
35 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

CAUTION
4.3.2 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4.3.3 Rear cover /Lt3

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt3 [2].
[2]
[1]

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /Lt3. (Refer to G.4.3.3 Rear cover /Lt3)
[1]
[2]
G-29

(1) Procedure
[2]
4.3.6 Rear cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
[2]
[1]
4.3.7 Read cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[1][2] [3] 2. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the read cover /Fr [3].
G-30
4.3.8 Read cover /Rt

(1) Procedure
[3] [1][2] 2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the read cover /Rr [3].
4.3.9 Read cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the read cover /Rr [2].
4.3.10 Read cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the read cover /Fr. (Refer to G.4.3.7 Read cover /Fr)
[1][2] [4] 2. Remove the screw cap [1].
3. Remove the screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [3] and 2 screws [4] and remove the read cover /
Lt.
[3] [5]
G-31
4.3.11 Upper cover /Fr, /Lt, /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the read cover /Fr. (Refer to G.4.3.7 Read cover /Fr)
[3] [1] 2. Remove the upper covers /Fr [2] and /Rr [3] sections of the brush
[1].
[2]

5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the upper cover /Rr [4].
[3] [4] [1][2]
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and move it in the arrow-marked direction

[2]. Then turn to the arrow-marked direction [3] to remove the
[3] [2] [4]
upper cover /Lt [4].
[1]
G-32
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
4.3.12 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [3] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the original positioning
plate /Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Rt [4].
3. Remove 2 shoulder screws [5] and then remove the original glass
assy [6].
Note
• As the original glass assy consists of the original glass [7]
with the original positioning plate /Lt [8] attached, be sure
to remove it by holding the specified positions [9] and
[10].
• Lifting up of the original positioning plate /Lt causes the
double-stick tape to come off.
[5] [6]
a03uf2c086ca
5. After replacing the original glass assy, conduct the following steps.
Scan Gradation/Color Adj.(Refer to I.5.3.21 Scan Gradation/Color
Adj. (Scanner Adjustment))
[8] [9]
a03uf2c087ca
G-33
4.3.13 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] and the
washer [4], and then remove the front door [1].
CAUTION
• The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
4.3.14 Tray front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1], disconnect the connector[2], and then
remove the tray front cover [3].
Note
• Be noted that the shape of the front cover of the tray 1
differs from the rest.
[1]
[3]
[2]
G-34
4.3.15 CCD unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.4.3.12 Original glass
assy)
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD cover [3].
4. Remove the screws [4] and then remove the ribbon cable cover
[5].
[4] [5] [3]
[1] [2]
8050ma3141
5. Turn the lock lever [1] downward to release the lock and then pull
out the ribbon cable [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the ribbon cable, push down the lock
lever and insert the ribbon cable fully to the connector so
that its conductor side comes opposite side of the lock
lever.
• After that, return the lock lever to its original position and
lock the ribbon cable.
[1] [2]
a03uf2c098ca
[1] [2] 6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD unit [2].
Note
• Never remove any screw other than it. When removed,
various optical adjustments which are not available in the
field are required.
• Never touch the lens or it causes the faulty image

8. After replacing the CCD unit, conduct the following steps.
CD-Mag. Adjustment (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
[2] a03uf2c099ca
Color Registration Auto. (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
Color Registration Manual (Refer to I.5.3.12 Color Registration
G-35
4.3.16 Exposure unit

[4] [3] [5] [2] [1] 1. Remove the original glass assy. (Refer to G.4.3.12 Original glass
assy)
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr, /Lt, and /Rr. (Refer to G.4.3.11
Upper cover /Fr, /Lt, /Rr)
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr2 [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the scanner cover /Fr1 [4].
5. Remove 2 screws [5] and remove the cover mounting plate [6].
[6]
[2] [1] [1] [2]

6. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 2 wire holders
[2].
7. Rotate the exposure unit [3] while keeping it horizontally and then
pull it out upward to put on the scanner frame [4].
[4] [3]
a03uf2c101ca

9. Remove the screw [2] and then release the cable [4] from the cord
holder [3].
10. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[2] [3] [5]
a03uf2c102ca
G-36

[5] [4] [4] [5] 1. Set the exposure unit [1] to the main body.
2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jigs [3] from the front side and pass each of
them through the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror unit [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the exposure unit, use the optics unit
positioning jig.
3. Fix the exposure unit with the screw [4] and the wire holder [5], 1
each.
4. Remove 2 optics unit positioning jigs [3].
6. After replacing the exposure unit, conduct the following steps.
- Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Refer to I.5.3.21 Scan Gradation/
Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment))
[2] [1] [3]
a03uf2c103ca
4.3.17 Exposure lamp (L101)

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.4.3.16 Exposure unit)
2. Cut the wiring harness band [1] to release the fixation of the cable
[2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP detection plate [4].
4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the exposure lamp (L101)
[6].
6. After replacing the exposure lamp, conduct the following steps.
[2] [1] [5]
[6] [5]
a03uf2c104ca
4.3.18 Removing the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the exposure unit. (Refer to G.4.3.16 Exposure unit)
2. Loosen the screws [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of 2 spring
fixing plates [2].
[1]
a03uf2c105ca
G-37
3. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
spring fixing plate [1] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2]
from the pulley /3 [4], outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the
pulley /2 [6] in order.
4. Remove the metal ball [8] of the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the wire
stopper [7] and then remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the
[5] inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9] in order.
5. Remove the scanner wire /Rr [2] from the drive pulley [10].
6. Following the steps 3 to 5, remove the scanner wire /Fr [11].
[4] [6] [3] Note
• Be sure to install the scanner wires /Fr and the /Rr
[9] symmetrically.
[10]
[2]
[2] [7] [8]

[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
8050ma3024
4.3.19 Reinstalling the scanner wire

(1) Procedure
1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side and then insert the
optics unit positioning jig [2] from the front side and pass it through
the V-mirror unit [1].
Note
• Be careful not to damage the mirror with the jig.
• When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to fix the V-
mirror unit with the optics unit positioning jig.
[1] [2]
a03uf2c106ca
G-38
2. Drop the metal ball [3] in between the scanner wire /Fr [1] and /Rr
[6] [5] [1] [2] into the installation hole of the drive pulley [4]. With this hole as
[4] a starting point, wind the wire 3.5 turns [5] outwards and 3.5 turns
[6] inwards.
Note
[7] [3] [8] • The same wire is used for the scanner wires /Fr and /Rr.
• Be sure to wind each scanner wire with its wire terminal
outside, and its metal ball [7] inside.
• Be sure to wind each scanner wire so that its both ends
[8] comes out from the bottom of the drive pulley.
• Wind each scanner wire on the drive pulley thickly and be
[4] careful not to overlap each wire.
3. After winding the scanner wires /Fr [1] and /Rr [2], fix each wire
[5] [6]
with the tape [8] so that they do not come off.
[2]
[4]
[3] [7]
8050ma3026
4. Pass the metal ball [3] side (inside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
[9] which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and
inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] in order, and then hook the metal
ball [3] on the wire stopper [6].
[10] 5. Pass the wire terminal side [7] (outside) of the scanner wire /Rr [2]
which is winded on the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8],
[2] outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9] in order, and
then hook the wire terminal [7] on the spring fixing plate [10].
6. Following the steps 4 to 5, install the scanner wire /Fr [11].
[5]
[4] [6] [3]
FRONT
[2] [7] [8]

[2]
[3]
[1]
[11]
8050ma3027
G-39
[2] 7. Tighten the screws [1], 1 each, and fix 2 spring fixing plates [2].
[1]
a03uf2c105ca
4.3.20 Tray
(1) Procedure for pulling out the tray
2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the tray [4] while lifting
[2]
[3] up a little the tray lock lever [3].
[4]
[1]
a0gdt3c048ca
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum

CAUTION
• Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Avoid pulling out more than 2 trays at once. It causes the PF to turn over.
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling
out the tray)
3. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out
the tray)
[1] [2]
G-40
(3) Procedure for removing the tray

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
[3] 1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.4.3.14 Tray front cover)
3. Remove screws [1], 2 each, from the left and right rails.
4. Remove the tray [2] by holding the specified area [3] and bringing
it up.
Note
• When removing the tray, be sure to hold the specified area
[3] and never hold the parts easily deformed. It may cause
damage or paper feed jam.
[1] [2]

[2] [3] [1] Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to insert the 4 knobs [1] on
the rail to the shallow groove [2] in the case of the tray 1
and 2. In the case of the trays 3, be sure to insert the
knobs to the deep groove [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
4.3.21 Floating duct flap /Fr, /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Tray)
2. Remove the floating duct flap /Fr [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
3. Remove the floating duct flap /Rr [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• When reinstalling the floating duct flap /Fr, be sure to
insert the shaft to the mounting hole of the floating duct
on the left side first and then set the shaft on the right
side.
• When reinstalling the floating duct flap /Rr, be sure to
insert the shaft to the mounting hole of the floating duct
on the right side first and then set the shaft on the left
[1] side.
G-41
4.3.22 Lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Tray)
[4] [5] [3] 2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.4.3.14 Tray front cover)
3. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.4.3.23
Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3
(FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12), Paper leading edge
shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18))
4. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.4.3.24 (1) Removing
procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to reinstall the gear [2] with
the aligned position by inserting the screwdriver to the
quadrilateral hole [3] and rotating the gear [4] going
through the hole [5] of the gear [4].
[2] [1] a0gdt3c096ca
6. Remove 4 E-rings [1] and then remove 1 each of the pulley covers
[7] [2] [1]
[2].
7. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires /Rt [4] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [5]
and [6].
[6] [5] [1] [2] 8. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift
wires /Lt [7] back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [6].
Note
• When hooking the lift wire to the pulley, be sure to hook
the shorter lift wire /Lt [7] to the inside and the longer lift
wire /Rt [4] to the outside.
• When installing the wires, make sure that the lift wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers and are not
crossed each other.
[4]
9. Remove the pulleys [5] and [6].
Note
• When reinstalling the pulley, be sure that the metal
bearing comes to the outside.
[3]
a0gdt3c097ca
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and move the bearing [2] inward.
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the gear [4] inward and then
remove the pin [5].
12. Remove the E-ring [6] and move the bearing [7] inward.
a0gdt3c098ca
G-42
13. Remove the lift wire /Lt [3] from the shaft hole [4] by moving the
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5] [6]
pulley [1] inward [2], and then remove the lift wire /Rt [6] by moving
the pulley [5].
Note
• Be sure to put the shorter lift wire /Lt [7] to the inside and
the longer lift wire /Rt [4] to the outside.
a0gdt3c099ca
14. Pull out the lift wires /Rt and /Lt [3] from the hole [2] of the lift plate
[2] [1] [3] [4]
arm [1] to downward.
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the circular cylindrical
shape wire end [4] from the downside of the hole [2].
• Be sure to install the shorter lift wire /Lt to the lift plate
arm [5] and the longer lift wire /Rt to the lift plate arm [6].
• When pulling/installing it, be sure to pull out carefully and
be careful not to damage it with the corner of the metal
plate.
[5] [6]
a0gdt3c100ca
4.3.23 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12),
Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)
(1) Removing procedures of the loop motor /2 assy (tray 3 only)
1. Pull out the tray 3 at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2)
Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
[1] [2]
G-43
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 screws [2] to remove

the loop motor /2 assy [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
• Operate while holding the loop motor /2 assy [3] with hand
so that it does not fall down.
• When reinstalling the loop motor /2 assy [3], be sure to
align the projection [5] with the positioning hole [4] of the
loop motor /2 assy [3].
[6] [2] [4] [5]
4. Remove the conveyance belt.
[3] [1]
(2) Removing procedures of the paper leading edge separation fans /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM10), /Rr2 (FM14) and /Rr3 (FM18)
[3] [2] 1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
2. Remove the loop motor /2 assy. Tray 3 only) G.4.3.23 (1)
Removing procedures of the loop motor /2 assy (tray 3 only)
3. Widen the paper size guide at the maximum.
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and pull out the paper feed guide assy [2]
obliquely upward and put it to rear side.
Note
• Note that the tray and the paper feed guide assy [2] are
connected with the wiring harness.
• Be careful not to damage the floating duct flap [3].
[1]

[1]
G-44
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2] and then
remove the separation duct assy [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the separation fan assy [5].
Note
• Be careful so that the separation fan assy [5] does not fall
down.
[5] [1]
[4]
[3] [2]
8. Remove the clamp to release the wiring harness and then

disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
9. Remove 6 screws [2] and then remove the paper leading edge
separation fans /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), and /Fr3 (FM17) [3] and
the paper leading edge separation fans /Rr1 (FM10), /Rr2
(FM14), /Rr3 (FM18) [4].
[1] [4] [3]
[2]
[1] [3] 10. Remove the clamp to release the wiring harness and then
11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the paper leading edge
shutter solenoids /1 (SD4), /2 (SD9), and /3 (SD14) [3].
[2]
G-45
Note
• When reinstalling the paper leading edge shutter
[4] solenoids /1 (SD4), /2 (SD9), /3 (SD14), be sure to set the
shutter [3] so that it contact the separation duct [4] while
pulling the plunger [2] until it contacts the solenoid.
[3]
[1] [2]
4.3.24 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)

(1) Removing procedure of the paper lift gear assy
Note
• The removing/installing procedure of the paper lift gear assy is common between the trays 1, 2, and 3 but the installation
position is different at some part. This section shows the procedure for the tray 1 and the different parts are described in the
procedure.
1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
[1] for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.4.3.14 Tray front cover)
[2] a0gdt3c104ca
4. Remove 4 screws [2] (in the case of the trays 1 and 2 [1]) or 4
screws [4] (in the case of the tray 3 [3]), and then remove the
[1]
reinforcing plate [5].
[2] [5]
[3]
[4]
a0gdt3c105ca
G-46
[1] a0gdt3c106ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], the E-ring [2], and the bearing [3] and then
[1] [4]
remove the paper lift gear assy [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c107ca
(2) Removing procedure of the paper lift motor

1. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.4.3.24 (1) Removing
[2] procedure of the paper lift gear assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the support bracket [2].
[1] a0gdt3c108ca
G-47
Note
[2] [3] [1] • When reinstalling it, be sure to put the pin [2] of the arm
[1] into the hole [3] and the pin [4] into the hole [6] of the
support bracket [5].
[4] [6] [5] a0gdt3c109ca
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].

[5] [1] [2] [4]
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align the bearing [3] on the
opposite side.

[5]
[3]
a0gdt3c110ca
6. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the top of the paper lift
[1]
gear assy [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align 3 D-cut [3] positions
of the shaft and then tighten the screw [1].
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c111ca
G-48
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the paper lift motor [2].
[2] [1]
a0gdt3c112ca
4.3.25 Paper feed suction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.12 (3) Procedure for removing
[1]
the tray)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper feed suction unit
[1] [2]
[2] in the arrow-marked direction.

Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed suction unit, be sure to
align the positioning pin [1] with the hole [2].
[1]
[2]
G-49
4.3.26 Paper feed belt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (3) Procedure for pulling out
the tray)
2. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.4.3.25 Paper feed
suction unit)
3. Remove the spring [1] and remove 2 screws [2], and then remove
the drive shaft unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
[3] [2]
[2] [1] [5] Note

• When reinstalling the drive shaft unit [1], be sure to align
the bearing [2] with the notch [3] of the metal plate.
• When reinstalling the drive shaft unit [1], be sure to rotate
the gear [4] in the arrow-marked direction to correct the
tilt of the paper feed belt [5] after reinstalling.
[4] [3]
Note
• When reinstalling the spring [1], be sure to install it so
that the brake plate [2] contact the outside of the bearing
[3].
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing plate [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the fixing plate [2], be sure to insert 2
bearings [4] and 2 projections [5] into 4 holes [3] of the
fixing plate.
5. Remove 2 screws [6] in the arrow-marked direction.

Note
• When reinstalling the paper feed belt [6], install it with its
rough side outside.

[6] [5] [1] [5] [4]
4.3.27 Paper suction fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), and /6 (FM6)
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (3) Procedure for pulling out
the tray)
2. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.4.3.25 Paper feed
suction unit)
4. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the protecting sheet [4], the
paper suction fans /1 (FM1), /3 (FM3) and /5 (FM5) [5].
[5] [1] [2]
G-50
Note
• When reinstalling the paper suction fans /1 (FM1), /3 (FM3)
and /5 (FM5), be sure to align the projection [1] with the
positioning hole of the paper suction fan.
[1]
[2] 5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the duct [2].
[1]
6. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 3 screws [2].

[2] [5]
8. Move the suction partition plate [4] upward, and then pull out the
paper suction fans /2 (FM2), /4 (FM4), and /6 (FM6) [5] in the
Note
[3] [1] [4]

Note
[1]
G-51
4.3.28 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
(1) Removing procedure of the side guide assy
[4] [3] [1] [2] for pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Loosen 1 each of the screws [1] of the side guides /Fr and /Rr.
3. Remove each of the screws [2], 2 each, and shorten the
reinforcing plate [3].
4. Remove the screws [4], 1 each, and remove the reinforcing hinge
[5] from the pin [6].
Note
• Be careful that the screws [2] and [4] are the shoulder
screws.
[5] [4] [1] [2]
[6]
[5] [6] 5. Remove 1 each of the screws [1] at 2 positions, and then remove 1
each of the mounting metal fittings [2].
6. Remove the covers /Fr [3] and /Rr [4] by lifting them in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
• When removing/installing the covers /Fr and /Rr, be sure
to push the flap [5] and the side duct [6] slightly into the
side guide and not to damage them.
[3] [2] [1] [4]
[5] [3] 7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.

8. Remove the connectors [2], 1 each.
Note
• When reinstalling it, tighten the screws [1] temporary and
check the parallel between the side guides /Fr and /Rr by
using paper, and then tighten the screws fully.
9. Remove the side guide /Rr [3].

10. Remove the side guide /Fr [5] by pressing the side guide lock lever
[4].
[4] [2] [1] [1] [2]
G-52
(2) Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19)
1. Remove the side guide assy /Fr. (Refer to G.4.3.28 Removing
procedure of the side guide assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the operation knob /Fr [2].
3. Turn the small size guide [3], remove 6 screws [4] and 4 screws
[5], and then remove the cover [6].
[1] [2] [5] [4]
[6] [5] [3] [4]
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing hinge [2].

[1] [2]
Note
• When installing the reinforcing hinge [2], be careful about
the direction of the reinforcing hinge.
[1] [2] 5. Remove 3 clamps [1] to release the wiring harness and then
[2] 6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed assist fans /
Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), and /Fr3 (FM19).
[1]
G-53
(3) Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
1. Remove the side guide assy /Rr. (Refer to G.4.3.28 Removing
procedure of the side guide assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the operation knob /Rr [2].
3. Turn the small size guide [3], remove 6 screws [4] and 4 screws
[5], and then remove the cover [6].
[4]
[5]
[3] [2]
[1]
[4]
[6] [5]
[3] [1] 4. Remove 2 clamps [1] to release the wiring harness and then
5. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the paper feed assist fans /
Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), and /Rr3 (FM20) [4].
[4] [2]
4.3.29 Shutter solenoid /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)
(1) Removing procedures of the shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 ( SD10) and /Fr3 (SD15)
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure
2. Remove the side guide assy /Fr and remove the cover, and then
open the side guide assy. (Refer to G.4.3.28 Paper feed assist
fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20))
3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the supporting bracket [2]
and the side guide lock lever [3].
[3]

5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the shutter
solenoids /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), and /Fr3 (SD15) from the
plunger [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the body [3] of the shutter solenoid /Rr,
be sure to install so that the wiring harness [5] is in the
direction in the picture.
[1] [2]
G-54
Note
• When reinstalling the shutter solenoids /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2
(SD10), and /Fr3 (SD15), be sure to install them at the
position where the shutter [3] hits the metal plate [4] while
hitting the plunger [1] to the shutter solenoid /Rr [2].
[2] [1]
(2) Replacing procedure of the shutter solenoids /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)
2. Remove the side guide assy /Rr and remove the cover, and then
open the side guide assy. (Refer to G.4.3.28 Paper feed assist
fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20))
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the shutter
solenoids /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), and /Rr3 (SD16) from the
plunger [4].
[4] [3] [1]
[2]
[3] [4] [1] 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When reinstalling the shutter solenoids /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2
(SD11), and /Rr3 (SD16), be sure to install them at the
position where the shutter [3] hits the metal plate [4] while
hitting the plunger [1] to the shutter solenoid /Rr [2].
[2]
G-55
4.3.30 Floating duct solenoid /Fr1 (SD7), /Fr2 (SD12), /Fr3 (SD17), /Rr1 (SD8), /Rr2 (SD13), /Rr3 (SD18)
(1) Replacing procedures of the floating duct solenoids /Fr1 (SD7), /Fr2 (SD12) and /Fr3 (SD17)
2. Remove the side guide assy /Fr, remove the cover, open the side
guide assy, and then remove the paper feed assist fan. (Refer to
G.4.3.28 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3
(FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20))
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the floating
[6] [5] [3] [2] duct solenoids /Fr1 (SD7), /Fr2 (SD12), and /Fr3 (SD17) from the
plunger [4].
Note
• When reinstalling the floating duct solenoids /Fr1 (SD7), /
Fr2 (SD12), and /Fr3 (SD17), reinstall on the position
where the bottom [5] of the duct comes to the same level
as the bottom [6] of the duct mounting plate by hitting the
plunger [4] against the floating duct solenoid /Rr [3].
[1] [4]
(2) Replacing procedures of the floating duct solenoids /Rr1 (SD8), /Rr2 (SD13) and /Rr3 (SD18)
2. Remove the side guide assy /Fr, remove the cover, open the side
guide assy, and then remove the paper feed assist fan. (Refer to
G.4.3.28 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3
(FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20))
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the floating
duct solenoids /Rr1 (SD8), /Rr2 (SD13), and /Rr3 (SD18) from the
plunger [4].
Note
[2] • When reinstalling the floating duct solenoids /Rr1 (SD8), /
Rr2 (SD13), and /Rr3 (SD18), reinstall on the position
where the bottom [5] of the duct comes to the same level
as the bottom [6] of the duct mounting plate by hitting the
plunger [4] against the floating duct solenoid /Rr [3].
[4] [3] [1]
[6] [5]
G-56
4.3.31 Paper feed check window

(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out
[1] the tray)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed check
window [2].
[2] a0gdt3c126ca
4.3.32 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
from the clamp [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
G-57
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance

unit [2].
Note
• When reinstalling the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure
to set it so that its projection [3] and the slit [4] are aligned
to the slit [5] and the projection [6] of PF.
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
[2]
[1]
4.3.33 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
[3]
from 3 clamps [4].
5. Release the clamp [5].
[4]
[1] [2] [5]
G-58

from 4 clamps [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] 8. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit [1].

4.3.34 Tandem conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
2. Disconnect the connector [1] from the bottom side of the tray and
then remove the wiring harness from the clamp [2].
4. Return the tray 2 pulled out to PF halfway.
Note
• Be sure to remove the screw [4] with the tray 2 is returned
to PF halfway. Removing the screw [4] with the tray 2
[3] [4] [2] [3] [1]
pulled out causes deformation of the tandem conveyance
unit.
[5]
G-59
[1] 7. While holding the tandem conveyance unit [1] with both hands, pull
out the tray 2, and then remove the tandem conveyance unit [1]
downward.
CAUTION
• Be sure to hold the tandem conveyance unit with both
hands when pulling out the tray 2. When pulling out the
tray 2 without holding the tandem conveyance unit, the
tandem conveyance unit falls down and causes injury.
Note
• When reinstalling the tandem conveyance unit [1], put it
temporarily with the outer rail [3] contacting the inner rail
[2] so that the position of the marking-off line [4] on the
front of the tandem conveyance unit [1] is aligned to the
elongated hole [5] on the outer rail [2].
[5] [2] [3]
[1] [4]

[1]
Note
• When reinstalling the tandem conveyance unit [1], tighten
the screw [4] with the projection [2] aligned to the center
of the elongated hole [3], and tighten the screw [5] at the
center of the elongated hole [6].
[4] [2] [3] [6] [5]
4.3.35 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

Note
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
• When replacing the multi feed detection board, be sure to conduct the PFU multi feed detection adjustment (printer adjustment).
(Refer to I.5.3.13 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
G-60
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the open/close cover [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the claw [2], and then remove
the protective cover /Up [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]

4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection
board /R (MFDBR) [3].
G-61
5. Remove the screw [1] and the remove the protective cover /Lw [2]
by pulling it frontward.
[3] Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws [3] of the
protective cover /Lw [2] into the holes [4] of the horizontal
conveyance unit.
[4]
[4] [3]
[1] [2]

7. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board /
[1] [2] [3] S (MFDBS) [3].
G-62
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. EF-101
5. EF-101
5.1.1 Fusing unit
• 1 screw of the heating roller arm /UpFr
• 1 screw of the heating roller arm /LwFr
[2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Heating roller arm /UpFr
[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Heating roller arm /LwFr

The heating roller arm /UpFr adjusts the parallel of the fusing roller /Up and the fusing heating roller /Up. As well, the heating roller arm /LwFr
adjusts the parallel of the fusing roller /Lw and the fusing heating roller /Lw. With this operation, the fusing belts /Up and /Lw rotates without
being mis-centered or distorted. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the heating roller arms /UpFr and /LwFr.

1 Cover section Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Fusing section Thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2)
4 Thermostat /3 (TS3), /4 (TS4)

CAUTION
G-63
5.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the door support bracket [3]
and the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
removing it.
• When reinstalling the door support bracket [3], be sure to
align the projection [4] with the positioning hole [5].
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3]
5.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 10 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[2] Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to reinstall so that the rear
cover [2] comes to the outside of the right cover /Lw [3].
• When reinstalling it, be sure to reinstall so that the rear
cover [2] comes over the power cord protector [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2] [4]
G-64
5.3.4 Thermostat /1 (TS1), /2 (TS2)

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.8.2.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing
[5] [4] [7] [6] unit)
2. Remove the fusing drive assy. (Refer to F.8.2.2 Replacing the 2nd
fusing idler gear /3)
3. Remove the fusing cover /RrUp. (Refer to F.8.2.3 Replacing the
2nd fusing heater)
4. Remove the fusing cover /Up. (Refer to F.8.2.5 Replacing the 2nd
fusing /Up, the 2nd fusing heating roller /Up, the 2nd fusing heating
roller bearing, the 2nd fusing heat insulating sleeve and the 2nd
fusing belt regulating sleeve))
5. Remove the fusing cover /RtUp. (Refer to F.8.2.8 Replacing the
2nd fusing temperature sensor assy/Up)
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove 3 wiring harness clamps [2].
[3] [1] [2] [3]
7. Remove the fastons [3], 2 each at 2 positions.
Note
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the thermostat /1 (TS1) [5].


Note
• Adjust the position of the thermostats /1 (TS1) on edge and /2 (TS2) on center with the thermostat adjust jig /B (A1RJPJG1) and
thermostat adjust jig /A (A1RJPJG0) respectively before securing. Be sure to apply Screw-lock to the screw that has been fixed.
1. Temporarily tighten the TS1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
2. Install 2 fastons [3].
3. Insert the coordination face [6] of the thermostat adjust jig /B [5]
[10]
between TS1 [2] and the fusing belt /Up [4].
4. Press the mounting bracket [7] to the fusing belt /Up [4] side,
adjust the position of the TS1, and secure the screw [1] so that the
[6] [9] gap between the TS1 [2] and the fusing belt /Up [4] is the same
thick as the coordination face [6] of the thermostat adjust jig /B [5].
Note
• Be sure to install the mounting bracket [7] so that it is
[8] [7] [5] [4]
parallel to the support stay [8].
[12] • After the installation, be sure to check that the check
face /1 [9] inserts but the check face /2 [10] does not insert
between the TS1 [2] and the fusing belt /Up [4].
[13]
5. As well as the steps 1 to 4, adjust TS2 [11] with the thermostat
adjust jig /A [12] and secure the screw [13].
6. Apply screw-lock to the screws [1] and [13], 2 each.
[2][1] [3] [11]
5.3.5 Thermostat /3 (TS3), /4 (TS4)

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.8.2.1 Replacing the 2nd fusing
[1]
unit)
2. Remove the fusing cover /RtLw. (Refer to F.8.2.6 Replacing the
2nd fusing roller /Lw and the 2nd fusing roller bearing)
[2] [3]
G-65
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove 3 wiring harness clamps [2].

[5] [4] [7] [6]
[1] [3] [2] [3]

Note
• Be sure to adjust the position of the thermostat /3 (TS3) and /4 (TS4) with the thermostat adjust jig /B (A1RJPJG1) [5] before
1. Temporarily tighten the TS3 [2] with 2 screws [1].
2. Install 2 fastons [3].
3. Insert the coordination face [6] of the thermostat adjust jig /B [5]
[10]
between TS3 [2] and the fusing belt /Lw [4].
4. Press the mounting bracket [7] to the fusing belt /Lw [4] side,
adjust the position of the TS3, and secure the screw [1] so that the
[6] [9] gap between the TS3 [2] and the fusing belt /Lw [4] is the same
thick as the coordination face [6] of the thermostat adjust jig /B [5].
Note
• Be sure to install the mounting bracket [7] so that it is
[8] [7] [5] [4] [12] parallel to the support stay [8].
• After the installation, be sure to check that the check face
[9] inserts but the check face [10] does not insert between
the TS3 [2] and the fusing belt /Up [4].
5. As well as the steps 1 to 4, adjust TS4 [11] with the thermostat

adjust jig /B [12] and secure the screw [13].
6. Apply screw-lock to the screws [1] and [13], 2 each.
[3] [2] [1] [13] [11]
G-66
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 6. RU-508/HM-101
6. RU-508/HM-101
6.1.1 Color density sensor unit
(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• Mounting screws of the color density detection boards /Y, /M, /C, /K, 2 each
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Color density sensor unit

The color density detection board detects the color density by the light reflected off the paper. When its position is moved, the density read
value changes.
Do not change the mounting position of the color density detection board. Misaligning the position has a risk of detecting the color density
improperly.

1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover
4 Humidification section (HM-101) Humidification unit
5 Water feed tank
6 Pump motor (P1)
7 Conveyance section Color density sensor unit
8 Shutter
9 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
G-67
6.3.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1], remove the screw [2] and then remove the
wire [3].
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to set so that the wire [3]
becomes level.
and the front door [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
[3] [2] removing it.

Note
• When reinstalling, check that the front door [1] closes
securely.
[1] [4]
[5]
6.3.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [1] [1]
G-68
6.3.4 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the upper cover [3].
[2] [3]
6.3.5 Humidification unit

(1) Procedure
3. Pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
G-69
4. Release 4 clamps [1].
[1]
[1] [1]
[3] [1] 5. Cut off the connection of the pipes [3] and [4] while pressing the
brackets [1] and [2].
Note
• Discharge water inside the cut pipe [4] to proper
container, otherwise water leaks when cutting off the
connection of the pipe [4].
[2] [4]
G-70
6. Remove 2 connectors [1] from the board.

[1] 7. Remove the relay connector [2].
8. Remove the screw [3] and then remove the ground.
9. Remove the screw [4] and then cut off the connecting arm.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [1] from the right and left rails.
11. Remove the humidification unit [2].
Note
• When removing the humidification unit [2], never hold the
parts easily deformed such as Jam clearing lever.
• When reinstalling the humidification unit [2], be sure to fit
the groove on the left side of the unit [3] to the rail [4]
before putting the entire unit on the rail.
[1] [3]
[4]
G-71
Note
[2] • When putting down the humidification unit, put a support
board or something under it not to damage the clamp [1]
or the pipe [2].
[1]
6.3.6 Water feed tank

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
4. Release the wiring harness from all clamps [2].
Note
• Be sure to put the removed connector in the water feed
tank tray [3].
5. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the stopper [5].
[4] [1] [2] [3]
[1] [3] 6. Pull out the humidification unit and remove 2 pipes. (Refer to G.
6.3.5 Humidification unit)
7. Pull out the water feed tank. (Refer to F.9.4.2 Replacing the water
feed filter)
Note
• Be sure to put the pipe to the left [1] beforehand so that it
does not get stuck inside.
8. Put the humidification unit to the original position.

Note
• Be sure to pull out the water feed tank before putting back
the humidification unit so that the pipe does not get stuck
inside.
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the water feed tank [3].
[2]
Note
• When reinstalling the water feed tank, be sure to set the
positioning [1] hole to the projection of the water feed tank
tray.
[1]
G-72
6.3.7 Pump motor (P1)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the wire and then open the front door at the maximum.
(Refer to G.6.3.2 Front door)
3. Pull out the humidification unit.
4. Remove the pipe [2] in the arrow-marked direction while pressing
the bracket [1].
5. Release the pipe from the clamp [3].
[3] [2] [1]
6. Pull out the water feed tank.

7. Remove 7 screws [1] to release the clamp.
[2] Note
• Adjust the positions of the water feed tank and
humidification unit so that the connecting arm [2] does
not bother when removing the screw [1].
[1]
8. Remove the screw [1] to release the clamp.

[6] [1] [3] disconnect the connector [2].
10. Push the bracket [3] to remove the pipe [4].
11. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the pump motor (P1) [6].
[2] [5] [4]
6.3.8 Color density sensor unit

Note
• When replacing the color density sensor unit, replace the shutter at the same time.
G-73
(1) Procedure
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the color density sensor
unit [3].
[1]
[2] [3]
Note
• When reinstalling the unit, be sure to set the projection of
the mounting plate in the hole [3] of the unit by pressing
the color sensor unit while pulling the shutter [1] in the
[2] [1]
6.3.9 Shutter
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Upper cover)
2. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
3. Pull out the shutter [3] in the arrow-marked direction to remove.
[1] [2]
G-74
6.3.10 Note for replacing the board

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
• When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC33).
1. Install EEPROM (IC33) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC33)
in the same direction.
• After replacing the RU control board (RUCB), conduct
rewriting of the firmware.
(Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
[1]
[2]
G-75
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. FS-521
7. FS-521
1 Cover Front door
2 Sub tray
3 Upper cover /1
4 Upper cover /2
5 Left cover /Fr
6 Rear cover
7 Stacker section Stacker unit
8 Main tray section Main tray
9 Lift wire
10 Tray up down motor
11 Stapler section Handling of the clogged stapler 1
12 Handling of the clogged stapler 2

CAUTION
7.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
a0gyt3c015ca
and the front door [3].
Note
• The front door is heavy. Support it securely when
removing it.
[1]
[3] [2] fs503fs2046c
G-76
7.2.3 Sub tray

(1) Procedure
[7] 1. Rotate the sub tray [1] in the arrowed direction [2] and remove the
ball catch [3] from the ball [4].
2. Press the front and rear sections of the sub tray [1] in the arrowed
direction [5] to make it curve a little, and detach the attaching hole
[6] from the pin [7] to remove the sub tray [1].
[6]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fs503fs2047c
7.2.4 Upper cover /1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the sub tray.
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the connector [2] and then remove the
upper cover /1 [3].
[2]
Note
• When the front door support section [4] is hard to remove,
slide the upper cover /1 [3] a little to the front side and
[3] remove it while lifting it up.
[1]
[4] [1] a0gyt3c008ca
G-77

(1) Procedure
[2]
body.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca
[1] 3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the paper exit
alignment plates /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[3] [2] a0gyt3c009ca
[1] 4. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
and move inward.
Note
• Do not hold the rack [2] to move.
5. Remove each 1 screw [3] and then remove each 1 cover [4].
[3] [4] [2] [4] [3] a0gyt3c010ca
6. Hold the installation section [1] of the paper exit alignment plate
[2] [1] [1] [2] and move outward to fit it to the notch holes [2].
Note
• Do not hold the rack [3] to move.
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove upper cover /2 [5].

[4] [3] [5] [4]

a0gyt3c011ca
G-78
7.2.6 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 1 screw [1].
2. Remove 1 screw [2], slant the upper section of the left cover /Fr [3]
and remove it while lifting it up.
[2]
[3]
[1]
fs503fs2050c
7.2.7 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to hook the rear cover to 2
catches [3] provided at the lower section.
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
fs503fs2051c
7.2.8 Stacker unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
2. Open the front door, remove the screw [1] and then remove the
wire [2] of the door.
a0gyt3c015ca
G-79

4. Remove each cables from 4 wiring harness guides [2].
5. Remove the E-ring [3] and the shaft [4], and cut off the coupling
arm [5].
[1]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4] [3] a0gyt3c012ca
[1] 6. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in
front and rear, pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs2061c
G-80
7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, provided on the rails in front and
rear.
8. Lift up the stacker section [2] at the specified positions [3], release
the hook of the rail [4] from the hole [6] and remove the stacker
section [2].
[3] CAUTION
• Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] • When lifting up the stacker section, be sure to hold it at
the specified positions [3]. Holding other positions such
as the roller shaft may damage to these positions.

Note
[6] • When reinstalling the stacker section to the rail [4], be
sure to check that the hooks [5] provided at 2 locations in
[5] front and rear, 4 locations in all, get into the attaching
holes [6] securely.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[4]
fs503fs2041c
10. Check point when reinstalling the stacker section.

Note
[3] • When reinstalling it, be sure to pull out the rail [1] fully
and fasten it with the stopper screw [2] tentatively. Fix the
rail in the rear with tape [3] so that the rail does not move
and contract. It allows you to conduct the operation
smoothly.
[1] [2] fs503fs2042c
G-81
7.2.9 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
[2]
body.
[1]
a0gyt3c003ca

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up/down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
[3] [1] fs503fs2017c
7.2.10 Lift wire

Note
• The following replacement procedure of the lift wire shows the steps taken on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of
wires on the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
• The brackets of the lift wire are stamped with "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side. Be careful not to confuse one with the
other.
(1) Procedure
1. Bring the main tray down to the bottom. (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main
tray)
[1] 2. Remove the following parts.
Main tray (Refer to G.7.2.9 Main tray)
Rear cover (Refer to G.7.2.7 Rear cover)
[1] Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.7.2.6 Left cover /Fr)
Front door (Refer to G.7.2.2 Front door)
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the tray stay
covers /Fr [2] and /Rr [3].
[3] [2] fs503fs2038c
G-82
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 6 screws [2], and then

[1] remove the gear box [4] together with the tray up down motor [3].
Remove the gear box [4] together with the motor [3].
CAUTION
[3]
• When the gear box is removed, the main tray falls down.
So, be sure to support the tray by hand when removing
the gear box.
[4]
[2] fs503fs2018c
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
of the lift wire /Rr [2] from the lift stay [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs503fs2019c
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2020c
G-83
7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2] and the lift
[5] pulley /Lw [3] to remove the lift wire /Rr [4].
Note
• When removing the gear [2] and the lift pulley /Lw [3], be
careful not to drop the pin [5].
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[4]
fs503fs2021c
[3]
8. Tentatively fasten the wire mounting plate [2] of the new lift wire /
Rr [1] to the lift stay [3] with the 2 screws [4].
Note
[4] • Be sure to install the lift wires placing the shorter one
below the longer one.
9. Fasten the new lift wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [6] of the lift
[2]
pulley /Lw [5] and insert it into the shaft. Rotate the lift pulley /Lw
[5] and wind it 6 turns clockwise from inside to outside around the
lift pulley /Lw [5] with no slack, and then insert the lift pulley /Lw [5]
fully deep into the shaft so that it coincides with the pin [7].
[5] [1]
[7]
[6] fs503fs2022c
10. With the lift wire /Rr [1] hooked to the lift pulley /Up [2], wind it 2
turns counterclockwise from inside to outside around the lift
pulley /Lw [3] with no slack and then fasten it with the wire end [4].
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
fs503fs2023c
G-84
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs503fs2024c
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner
[1] with a specified force A and tighten it up 2 screws [2].
[1]
Specified value: A = 2.5kg ± 0.1kg
[2]
fs503fs2025c
[4] [5] [3] [2] [1] 13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire mounting plate [1] on the front
side, press down the lift stay [3] to bring it to a horizontal position,
and tighten up 2 screws [5] of the wire mounting plate [4] on the
rear side and 2 screws [2] on the front side, that is, 4 screws in all.
Note
• Check to see if the lift stay [3] is kept in a horizontal
position. If it is on the slant, an unnecessary load may be
applied onto the gear, thus damaging it.
Note
• When reinstalling the covers, be sure to rotate the tray up/
[2]
down motor counterclockwise as seen from above to raise
[5] fs503fs2026c
the lift stay about 12cm before installing each cover. Since
the lift stay comes down lower than the normal operating
range due to the lift gear box being removed, it is
inevitably necessary to raise the lift stay to install it
without the left cover /Fr and the rear cover hitting against
the up/down stay.
G-85
7.2.11 Tray up down motor

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws [2] and then
remove the tray up down motor [3].
Note
• When reinstalling it, make sure that the belt [4] is set
correctly to the gears [5] and [6].
[2]
[4]
[6] [5]
fs503fs2027c
7.2.12 Handling of the clogged stapler 1

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the stapler cartridge.
Note
• When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed, conduct
[1] the initial operation by turning ON and OFF the sub power
switch (SW2) of the main body.
• When the stapler cartridge cannot be removed by the
[3]
initial operation, conduct "G.7.2.13 Handling of the
clogged stapler 2 ".
[2]
2. Press the release button [1] and open the staple cover [2].
fs503fs2052c 3. Remove the unnecessary staples [3].
4. Close the staple cover [2].
7.2.13 Handling of the clogged stapler 2

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
• Be careful not to get your hand caught in the opening [1] of the stapler assy. Pressing the staple side [2] and/or the clinch side
[3] cause the opening [1] to close unexpectedly. It is very difficult to open the opening by hand once it has closed. So, be careful
not to close it. When holding the stapler assy, be sure to hold it at both ends of the cam shaft [4].
• When conducting the operation, be sure to wear protective gloves.
• When conducting the operation, be careful not to get the glove or your hand caught in the gear.
G-86
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
fs503fs2053c
[3] [2] 1. Remove the stapler assy. (Refer to F.11.4.1 Replacing the stapler
assy)
2. Remove 2 nuts [1] and then remove the clinch protective plates /1
[2] and /2 [3].
[1]
fs503fs2054c
3. Remove the clogged staples.

[3] Note
• When reinstalling it, place the holes [2] of 2 clinch metal
fittings [1] one upon the other so that the tip [3] of the
clinch presser is engaged to the depression [4] of the
[2] clinch metal fitting.
[4]
[1]
fs503fs2055c
4. When the clogged staples cannot be removed, rotate the gear [1]
of the stapler motor shaft and the gear [2] that comes into contact
the motor gear to open the opening [5] until the pin [3] at the tip of
the stapling arm comes to the bottom of the slit [4].
CAUTION
[5]
[6] • Considerable force is required to rotate the gear. Be sure
to wear gloves not to get injured.
[4] Note
• The gear can be rotated in the easier direction.
[3]
5. Remove the stapler cartridge [6] Remove the unnecessary staples
[2] [1] fs503fs2056c from the stapler cartridge. (Refer to G.7.2.12 Handling of the
clogged stapler 1)

CAUTION
• When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-87
control board [2].
Note
• Setting of the SW3 [3] has to be the same as the setting of
the old FNSCB. (Refer to L.2.6.1 FNS control board
(FNSCB))
• After replacing the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c
A 2. Check point when reinstalling the EEPROM (IC68).

Note
• Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC68) in
A the same direction.
fd501fs2078c
G-88
8. FS-612
8.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
1 screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
[1]
15jmf2c017na
[1] Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper -

Note
• For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.

Adjust the tilt of the holding stopper on the slide shaft side of the holding stopper. (Refer to I.15.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment) Do not
loosen the screws not allowed to be removed on the holding stopper. Loosening those screws changes the tilt of the holding stopper and
misaligns the adjusting standard of the slide shaft.

1 Cover Upper cover /1
2 Upper cover /2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
6 Main tray section Main tray
7 Up/down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit cover
9 Stacker unit
10 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
G-89

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove 2 caps [1].
2. Open the front door [2], remove 5 screws [3] and then remove the
[3] upper cover /1 [4].
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na

Note
• When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3]
1. Remove the upper cover /1. (Refer to G.8.3.2 Upper cover /1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove
the upper cover /2 [4].
[1]
[2] 15jkf2c013na
8.3.4 Front door

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove
[1] the front door [1].
[2]
15jkf2c034na
G-90
8.3.5 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set the notch [3] of the rear
[1] cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
8.3.6 Left cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover [2].
[2] 15jkf2c036na
8.3.7 Main tray

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
1. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
[1] with fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
outlet.
[2]
15jkf2c014na
G-91
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up/down stay [3], and
remove the main tray [2].
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
8.3.8 Replacing the up/down wire

CAUTION
• When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while holding the tray with hand.
Note
• The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to those on the rear side.
• When installing the up/down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the wire
bracket.
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the following parts.
• Front door (Refer to G.8.3.4 Front door)
• Main tray (Refer to G.8.3.7 Main tray)
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then,
remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the
connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
• When the up down motor assy is removed, the main tray
falls. Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while
holding the tray with hand.
15jkf2c017na
G-92
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the
up/down wire [2] on the rear from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up/down pulley /Lw [3], and
then remove the up/down wire [4].
[5] Note
[3]
• When removing the up/down pulley /Lw, be careful not to
drop 2 pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
G-93
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up/down wire [4]
to the up/down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
• When installing the up/down wire [4], the shorter one [5]
faces down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up/down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the
up/down pulley /Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns
from inside to outside with no slack. Then, insert the up/down
pulley /L [1] in the shaft aligning with pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up/down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the
pin [3] in which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove of
the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /Up [1] and wind the
wire 2 turns around the up/down pulley /Lw [2] from inside to
[1]
outside with no slack. Then, through the notch of outside and
fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
• Be sure not to overlap the short up/down wire (first
winded) and the longer up/down wire (latter winded) on
[3]
the up/down pulley /Up.
[2]
15jkf2c023na
G-94
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them
with the E-ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner
[1] with a specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2]
13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front to push
down the up/down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on
the rear and front in a horizontal position.
Note
• Be sure to check that the up/down stay [3] is in a
horizontal position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray
up down motor (M3) or gear is overloaded and has a risk
[1] of damage.
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
8.3.9 Stacker unit cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the stacker unit cover [2].
[1] 15jmf2c016na
8.3.10 Stacker unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
G-95
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
• Pulling out the stacker unit while removing the FS from the main body causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the following parts.
• Booklet tray
• Front door (Refer to G.8.3.4 Front door)
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit.
4. Remove 3 connectors (CN22, CN23, CN24) [1] from the relay
board (RB) [2] on the rear of the stacker unit.
[3]
a04df2c001ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the
coupling arm [3].
[3] 15jkf2c028na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull
out the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
• To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under
[1] the pulled out stacker unit for balancing.
[2]
[1]
[3] 15jkf2c029na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it
[4] from the guide rail [3].
[3] Note
• Be careful of your posture when removing it so that you
do not suffer backache.
[5]
Note
• When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3],
check that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation
hole [5].
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4] [1]
15jkf2c030na
G-96
8.3.11 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2]
• Upper cover /1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.8.3.2 Upper cover /1)
• Upper cover /2 (Refer to G.8.3.3 Upper cover /2)
• Main tray (Refer to G.8.3.7 Main tray)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit
opening cover [2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open/close link [2]
on the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2
connectors [3], and 3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and
front, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
• When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
G-97
control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
After replacing the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-98
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 9. PK-512/513
9. PK-512/513
9.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled and adjusted
9.1.1 Punch unit
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
Never loosen the following screws.
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c001na
[1] Punch unit [2] Screw not allowed to be removed
(2) Reason
The specified performance cannot be retained if the screw is loosened.
9.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list

No. Section Part name
1 Punch unit Punch unit
9.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure

CAUTION
9.3.2 Punch unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the punch drive board
[1]
cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c003na
G-99
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 9. PK-512/513
[3] [4] 3. Remove the 2 clamps [1].

4. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] and the relay connector [4] from the
punch drive board (PDB) [2].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c004nb
[1]
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c005na

[3] [2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the punch unit [3] from FS.
[1]
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
8. Reinstall the above parts by following the removal steps in reverse.

Note
[1] • When reinstalling the punch drive board (PDB), attach the
board supports of the punch drive board (PDB) at 4
positions [1] in the figure.
15kjf2c007na
G-100
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 10. PI-502
10. PI-502
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Operation panel cover

CAUTION
10.2.2 Upper cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove upper cover [1].
[1]
15jff2c009na
10.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.10.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[4] 3. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
10.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.10.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove
the operation panel assy [3].
[3] 15jff2c011na
G-101
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. LS-505
11. LS-505
1 Cover Cover
2 Conveyance section Stacker tray up/down wire

CAUTION
11.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
[1] [1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover /Up [2].
2. Remove 6 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover /Lw [4].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[5]
ls502fs2034c
G-102
[1] [1] 4. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover /Up [2] to the upper
side.
5. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
ls502fs2035c
[3] 6. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
8. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover /Lw [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
[2] 9. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c
G-103

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
11.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
• When conducting this operation, be sure to set the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) in advance.
(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to G.11.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor
(M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
5. Check point when reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1).
[5] Note
• When reinstalling the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be
sure to check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the
gear [1], and then engage it with the gear [3] before
[4] fastening the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [4].
• When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the
gear [1] and the gear [3], make adjustments by rotating the
encoder [5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
G-104
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3]
[2] from the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2] [1] [1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
ls501f2c001a
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2],
1 each.
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls501f2c002a
G-105
[4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of
the wire /1 [5].
[1] Note
• On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down
the pulley assy [4] and release the tension of the wire /2
[5] before starting the operation.
• When reinstalling it, the positions of the pulley assy on
[2] the paper feed side and the paper exit side become
important. Be sure to check the marked position in
[5] advance of the pulley assy on the paper exit side.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1] [2] [4] 12. Release the winding of the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the
shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire /1 [1].
[1] Note
• When installing the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to
the wire /1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[2]
ls501f2c004a
[1] [2] 15. Remove the wire /1 [2] from the pulley [1].
16. Reinstall a new wire /1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in
reverse.
ls502fs2028c
G-106
[2] 17. Check point 1 when reinstalling the wire.

Note
• When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time,
the stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the
wires one at a time (The remaining wire holds the stacker
tray in place.)
• When attaching the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align the
groove [1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been
inserted into the shaft.
• Be sure to set up it with the bead set portion [3].
[1] [3] ls502fs2029c
[1] [2] 18. Check point 2 when reinstalling the wire.

Note
• When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to wind
it 8 turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1] comes
to the rear panel side [2].
• The direction of drawing-out of the wire /1 is symmetrical
to that of the wire /2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
19. Check point 3 when reinstalling the wire.

Note
• When fixing the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be
sure to fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
20. Replace the wire /2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6
to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
[1] ls501f2c005a
11.2.4 Caution when setting models using toggle SW

CAUTION
When using C6501/C6501P/C65hc/1200/1200P/1051/C8000/C7000/C7000P/C6000, be sure to set the toggle switch on the connector
connection of the left side of the LS to SYS2 [1].
[1]
G-107
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. FD-503
12. FD-503
CAUTION
12.1.2 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section

Note
• Be sure to avoid removing or loosening the screws [1], [2], and [3] of the folding/conveyance switching position adjustment
section provided on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are
used in the factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

1 Cover section Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr
3 Upper door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover /Fr
6 Left cover /Rr
7 Paper exit stopper cover
8 Right cover
9 Left cover /Up
10 Mount cover
11 Front door
12 Folding conveyance section 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14 3rd folding roller
15 Folding conveyance section
16 Main tray section Main tray up/down wire
17 PI section Multi feed detection board /1, /2
G-108

12.3.1 Upper cover /Fr + PI cover /Fr
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover /Fr [5] to the front side
while raising it together with the upper cover /Fr [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
[1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover /Fr [3]
together with the upper cover /Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
12.3.2 Upper cover /Rr + PI cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover /Rr [4] to the rear
side while raising it together with the upper cover /Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
G-109
12.3.3 Upper door

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the
upper door open/close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] shifted to the front side, remove the upper
door [1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
12.3.4 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover /Lw [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
12.3.5 Left cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
G-110
12.3.6 Left cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
12.3.7 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper
[2]
cover [2].
[1]
fd501fs2036c
12.3.8 Right cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
G-111
12.3.9 Left cover /Up

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr, the PI cover /Fr, the upper cover /Rr
and the PI cover /Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover /Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
12.3.10 Mount cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
12.3.11 Front door

Note
• When removing the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
G-112
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the mount cover [3].
[2] 4. Remove 3 screws [4] while pushing up the front door so that it
does not fall down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
12.3.12 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
12.3.11 Front door)
[1]
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
G-113
12.3.13 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[1] 12.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].
[1]
fd501fs2043c
12.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.
[2] [1]
12.3.11 Front door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.12.3.10 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from
the shaft [1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support
[5] plate [4] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
G-114
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
12.3.15 Folding conveyance section

CAUTION
• The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to conduct this operation with 2 people.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses
from the 7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm /Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm /Fr [3] and the
[3] coupling arm /Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
G-115
[1] 5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left and right rails
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[1] 6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left and right rails.
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G-116
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1]
and [2] and remove it while lifting it up.
[3] CAUTION
• Be careful of your posture when removing it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
Note
[1] • When lifting up the folding conveyance section, be sure to
hold the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. Holding it at other
places such as the roller shaft or the guide plate may
cause deformation to these places.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Stand the folding conveyance section [1] upright when it has been
[1] removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
• Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The
[2] guide plate may get deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2] 9. Check point when reinstalling the folding conveyance section.

Note
• When installing the folding conveyance section, make
sure that all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the
attaching holes [2] of the folding conveyance section.
• The top should be attached by pushing it to the right to
[1] engage the upper rail and the bottom pushed to the left to
engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2] fd501fs2053c
G-117
Note
• When installing the folding conveyance section, pull out
the rail further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the
[2]
stopper screw [2] to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-
out position and fix the rail on the opposite side with tape
[1] [3]. It prevents the rail from moving to inside for an easy
and smooth operation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
12.3.16 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
1. Check point when removing/reinstalling the main tray up/down
wire.
[1] Note
• The following procedure for replacing the up/down wire
shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and
the winding of wires on the front side are symmetrical to
those on the rear side.
• There are 2 types of up/down wires provided, one [1] on
the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be sure to
[2] use the wire with the correct wire mounting plate direction
when installing it. The direction of the wire mounting plate
distinguished between these 2 wires when the shorter
wire [2] is placed under the longer wire.

Rear cover (Refer to G.12.3.4 Rear cover)
Left cover /Fr (Refer to G.12.3.5 Left cover /Fr)
Left cover /Rr (Refer to G.12.3.6 Left cover /Rr)
Front door (Refer to G.12.3.11 Front door)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
G-118
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the
gear box [4] together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
[3] CAUTION
• When the gear box is removed, the up/down stay may fall
down. So, when removing the gear box, be sure to
[1] support the stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3]
[2] of the up/down wire /Rr [2] from the up/down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
G-119
[5] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with
[5] the 2 bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with
[4] the 2 bearings [5].
[9].
Note
[6] • When removing the gear [8], be careful not to drop the pin
[9].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
G-120
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up/down pulley /RrLw
[2] and the pin [3].
Note
• When removing the up/down pulley /RrLw [2], be careful
not to drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up/down
wire /Rr [1] to the up/down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
• Install the up/down wires placing the shorter wire below
the longer one with the wire supporting part of the
mounting plate outside.
[1]
• There are 2 types of up/down wires, one for the front side
[4]
and the other for the rear side, but these 2 wires are
[2] different in the direction of the wire mounting plates. Be
sure to use a wire that fits in with the direction of a wire
[3] mounting plate.
fd501fs2062c
11. Fasten the new up/down wire /Rr [1] with the wire end [3] provided
on the inside of the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and insert it into the
shaft [6]. Rotate the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] and wind it 5.5 turns
clockwise from inside to outside around the up/down pulley with no
slack, and then insert the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] fully onto the
[1] shaft so that it coincides with the pin [4] and fasten it with the E-
[2]
ring [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the pin [4], move up
and down the front side of the up/down tray to change the angle of
the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
G-121
12. Hook up the up/down wire /Rr [1] onto the up/down pulley /RrUp
[3] through the relay pulley /Rr [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up/down wire /Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside
to outside around the up/down pulley /RrLw [2] with no slack and
fasten it with the wire end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
14. The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes.
The route along which the up/down wire /Rr passes is, on the
whole, as shown in the drawing left.
fd501fs2066c
G-122
15. Use a tension gauge or spring balance to pull up the wire tensioner
[1] upward with a designated force "A," and fasten it with the 3
screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
17. With the up/down stay [1] held in a horizontal position, tighten the
[4]
2 screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
[1] Note
• Move the up/down stay up and down and check to see if it
moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust it
[5] again so that it becomes horizontal.
• Check the up/down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator
plate [5]. If it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load
[3] [2] is applied to the up/down wire [4] when the up/down stay
[1] goes up.
fd501fs2069c
12.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)

Note
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi feed detection board (PI).
(Refer to I.5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI))
G-123
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi feed detection
board /1 (MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

board /1 (MFDB/1) [3].
[1]
[3] [2] fd501fs2071c
4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate /2
[1] in the upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board /1
(MFDB/1) from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2] fd501fs2073c
G-124
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate /2 assy [1] inside the
machine and pull it to the outside.
board /2 cover [3].
Note
• When turning it around, or when disassembling or
reassembling it, be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

board /2 (MFDB/2) [3].
[3] [2] [1] a0h0t3c007ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)
[2] • The multi feed detection boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) are
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) [1]: 15AG
Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB/2) [2]: 56UA
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection
boards /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[1] fd501fs2076c

CAUTION
• When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-125
control board [2].
Note
• Be sure to set the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer to
L.2.11.1 FD control board (FDCB))
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c

Note
After replacing the FD control board (FDCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-126
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 13. SD-506
13. SD-506
13.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
• 1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [2] Mounting plate

[3] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [4] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed
[5] Mounting plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

• The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming error
or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
• The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion or the
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
13.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3] [2] [1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

[3] Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) -

• The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the trimmer completion timing is out of alignment, the
paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board
deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
13.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

• 1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G-127
[3] [2] [1]

a0h2t3c063ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

[3] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) -

• The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
13.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] a0h2t3c064ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [2] Actuator

[3] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [4] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
[5] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed [6] Mounting plate

• The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section.
Therefore, be sure not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
• The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. It causes the trimming error by preventing paper from entering to the trimming section, or
the opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
13.1.5 Trimmer press brake

• 1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
G-128
[2] [1] a0h2t3c065ca
[1] Trimmer press brake [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted/removed

• The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
13.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

• All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1] [2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be adjusted/removed (all screws [2] Screws allowed to be removed
shown in the picture)

• The paper holding screw on right and left drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such as gear of the driving
system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth skipping. Therefore, be sure not
to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

1 Cover Rear cover /Lt
2 Rear cover /Rt
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover /Fr
5 Upper cover /Rr3
6 Sub tray cover
7 Front door /Lt
8 Front door /Rt
9 Folding section Folding unit

CAUTION
G-129
13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
[1] [2] 15anf2c002na

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
[2] [1] 15anf2c003na
13.3.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the
outside, and remove it to the bottom.
[2] [1] 15anf2c004na
G-130
13.3.5 Upper cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Open the front doors /Rt and /Lt.
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on
the left, and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover /Fr [6].
Note
[1] • When removing the upper cover /Fr [6], pull the screw [5]
to the front to so that the tip of the screw does not catch
the upper cover /Fr [6].
[6]
[4] [5] 15anf2c005nb
13.3.6 Upper cover /Rr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.13.3.2 Rear cover /Lt)
2. Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover /Rr3 [5].
Note
• When removing the upper cover /Rr3 [5], pull the screw [4]
to the front so that the tip of the screw does not catch the
upper cover /Rr3 [5].
[5]
[3] [3] [3]
[4] 15anf2c006na
G-131
13.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover /Fr. (Refer to G.13.3.5 Upper cover /Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover /Rr3. (Refer to G.13.3.6 Upper cover /
Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub
tray cover [3].
Note
• When reinstalling the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw [4]
to the outside.
[3] [1] [4] [1]
15anf2c007na
13.3.8 Front door /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door /Lt [1].
[6] [5] [4]
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Lt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4] and remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the
hinge [5] upward, and then remove the front door /Lt [1].
Note
• Support the front door /Lt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
G-132
13.3.9 Front door /Rt

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [6] 1. Open the front door /Rt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper /Rt
[3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], remove the fulcrum [6] by sliding the hinge
[5] upward, and then remove the front door /Rt [1].
Note
• Support the front door /Rt [1] with your hand so that it
does not fall down when removing the screw [4].
[2] [3]
[1] 15anf2c009na
13.3.10 Folding unit

CAUTION
• Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the front door /Rt. (Refer to G.13.3.9 Front door /Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding
unit.
Note
• Be sure not to let the clamps [2] fall down.
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].

6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the
hole [6] on the wiring harness guide.
[3] [1] [6] [7] [1]
15anf2c010na
G-133
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch
[2] from the hole [3] and remove the lower cover /2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the
lower cover /1 [7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9]
and remove the lower cover /3 [11].
[8] [11] [1] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [9] [10] [3] [5]
15anf2c011na
11. Check point when reinstalling the lower cover /3.

Note
• Install the lower cover /3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the
shaft [1]. If it is installed at an improper position, other
parts are damaged in storing the folding unit.
[1] [2] 15anf2c071na
G-134
[1] 12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit
[2] with 2 people.
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to align the positioning pin [3]
with the hole.
[3] [2]
[3]
[1] 15anf2c012na
[7] [6]
[5]
Note
• When holding the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts
[4] at front and rear or the upper top of the side plate [5].
Never hold the jam release lever [6] or the handle [7]. They
get damaged.
• When placing the folding unit, place it on the table to
avoid the guide plate [8] on the front being contacted with
the floor because it is projected from the bottom of the
unit.
[8] [4]
15anf2c013na

CAUTION
• When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-135
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB)
[1] and install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
the same direction.
• Be sure to set the SW3 [3] as the same as the settings of
the old SDCB. (Refer to L.2.12.1 SD control board (SDCB))
• After replacing the SD control board (SDCB), conduct
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G-136
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. PB-503
14. PB-503
1 Cover Front door
2 Front cover
3 Booklet door
4 Rear cover /Rt
5 Rear cover /Lt
6 Left cover
7 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr
8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr
9 Pellet supply cover
10 SC cover /Fr
11 SC cover /Up
12 Upper cover /FrRt
13 Upper cover /FrLt
14 Upper cover /RrRt
15 Upper cover /RrLt
16 Upper cover /Md
17 Others Deodorant unit
18 Pellet supply section Pellet supply unit
19 Glue tank section Glue tank unit
20 SC section SC unit
21 Clamp section Clamp unit
22 Others PB left unit
23 Book stock section Book lift wire
24 Cart wire
25 Conveyance section Conveyance unit /Lw
26 Relay conveyance section Relay conveyance unit
27 Cover paper supply section Cover paper tray
28 Cover paper lift wire

CAUTION
G-137
14.2.2 Front door

(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the
lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the front
door [1].
Note
• When reinstalling the wire [3], tighten the screw at the
position in the picture. (In order to prevent the wire from
contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
G-138
14.2.3 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.14.2.2 Front door)
2. Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
4. Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull
out the projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front
cover [7].
[5]
[2] [7]
[3] [4] [1] a15xt3c019ca
G-139
14.2.4 Booklet door

(1) Procedure
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the booklet door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from
the lower pin [6] with the mounting bracket [5] attaching to the
booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
[6] a15xt3c020ca

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.14.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Rt [2].
Note
• When installing the rear cover, make sure to attach the
metal plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.
[3] a15xt3c021ca
G-140
14.2.6 Rear cover /Lt

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.14.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover /Lt [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to set it with the projection [3]
put into the notch of the upper cover /RrLt [4], and with its
bottom [5] put on the metal frame [6].
[1] [2] [1]
[5] [6] a15xt3c022ca
14.2.7 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
[1] a15xt3c023ca
G-141
14.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws[1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Fr [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the claw of the plate in
the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr.
[1] a15xt3c024ca
14.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear
cover /Rr [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put it in the hole of the
relay conveyance gear cover /Rr.
[1] a15xt3c025ca
14.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.14.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /RrRt. (Refer to G.14.2.15 Upper cover /
RrRt)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.14.2.9
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Rr [2].
[1] [2] a15xt3c026ca
G-142

[4]
7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5]
in the arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the
wire harness [4].
Note
• When removing/installing the glue supply cover, be
careful not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1] a15xt3c027ca
14.2.11 SC cover /Fr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.2.8
[2]
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch /Fr [2].
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G-143
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover /Fr [2] to the
[4] [3]
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper
side [3] into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower
side [5] to the inside of the metal frame.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5] a15xt3c029ca
14.2.12 SC cover /Up

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.14.2.19 Pellet supply
[1]
unit)
2. Remove the SC cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.2.11 SC cover /Fr)
3. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC cover /Up [3] in the
arrow-marked direction [4] while slightly lifting up the circled part
[2].
[3] [4]
[1] [2] a15xt3c030ca
G-144
14.2.13 Upper cover /FrRt

(1) Procedure
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.14.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Open the upper door [1].
4. Pull the left part of the upper cover /FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked
direction [4]. Then release the cover from the projection [5] and
disconnect it from the connector [6].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the connector [6] under
the upper cover /FrRt [3] properly so as not to let the
cables get caught between the cover and the frame.
[3]
[6] [5] a15xt3c031ca
14.2.14 Upper cover /FrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.2.8
Relay conveyance gear cover /Fr)
4. Open the relay conveyance door.
5. Remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover /FrLt [5].
Note
[5] [4] harness [6].
[3] [2] [1] [6] a15xt3c032ca
14.2.15 Upper cover /RrRt

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover /RrRt [3].
[2] a15xt3c033ca
G-145
14.2.16 Upper cover /RrLt

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover /Rr. (Refer to G.14.2.9
[1]
Relay conveyance gear cover /Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /RrLt [2].
[2]
[1] a15xt3c034ca
14.2.17 Upper cover /Md

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.14.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Md [2].
a15xt3c035ca
14.2.18 Deodorant unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
G-146
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and lean the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect
the connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the holes
[5].
[4] [5]
[3] a15xt3c036ca

[3] Note
• Connecting the loop connector [1] to the connector [2]
[2] enables the operational check with no error indication
without connecting the deodorant unit. After the
operation, be sure to remove the loop connector [1] and
put it inside [4] of the rear cover /Lt [3].
• After installing it, be sure to check that the deodorant
[4] fans /1 (FM97) and /2 (FM98) of the deodorant unit are
rotating.
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
G-147
14.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.14.2.10 Pellet supply
cover)
[2] a15xt3c045ca
G-148
[2] [3] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
• When removing the unit, be careful not to spill the pellet.
[2] a15xt3c046ca
14.2.20 Glue tank unit

CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is extremely hot right after turning OFF the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the main
body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the maintenance work.
G-149
(1) Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the upper cover /RrRt. (Refer to G.14.2.15 Upper cover /
RrRt)
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then
remove the suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release
the coupling arm [7].
[3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

a15xt3c047ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket
[2].
a075f2c119ca
G-150
7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
[2] [2]
Note
• When moving the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the
metal frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
• When removing the screw [2], be careful to avoid injury
from sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Further pull out the glue tank unit [1].

9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank
unit.
Note
• After installing the glue tank unit, make a test print and
binding to check that no glue is squeezed out of the top
and bottom edges of the created book and no pages come
off the cover when opening the book.
[4] [5] [1] [3] a15xt3c048ca
[1] Note
• Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are
keeping the levelness and vertical position of the glue
tank unit.
a15xt3c049ca
14.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.14.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover /Md. (Refer to G.14.2.17 Upper cover /
Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.14.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the SC cover /Up. (Refer to G.14.2.12 SC cover /Up)
5. Remove the upper cover /FrRt. (Refer to G.14.2.13 Upper cover /
FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wire binding [3] from the SC unit [2] by releasing the
wire binding from the saddles.
[1] a15xt3c050ca
G-151
[1]
8. Remove 6 screws[1].
9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4].
Then remove the belt [5].
Note
• After installing the belt [5], check that the lug belt is
properly engaging with the pulleys with no slack and
turns smoothly when the knob is turned.
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and front side of the unit, and
remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6] [7] [6]
[1]
[4]
[5] [3] [2]

a15xt3c051ca
Note
• When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is
released from the stopper [3]. Therefore, when installing
the SC unit, be sure to put the lock arm [2] under the
stopper [3] while lifting and tilting the unit in the direction
of the arrow [4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
G-152
14.2.22 Clamp unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.14.2.19 Pellet supply
unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] downward to release
the coupling arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the
coupling arm [4] from the saddles.
[3] [2]
[4] [5] a15xt3c052ca
G-153
[2] [3] 6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and
the coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. While lifting the clamp unit [1] by holding its left and right metal
frames [5], release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and
remove the clamp unit.
Note
• When reinstalling the clamp unit, make sure that the 4
hooks [7] are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.
Note
• After installing the clamp unit, make a test print and
[5] [4]
binding to check that the cover and inside papers are
neatly aligned without skewing.
[1]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c053ca
14.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.14.2.6 Rear cover /Lt)
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.14.2.2 Front door)
4. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.14.2.3 Front cover)
5. Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G-154
a15xt3c055ca
a15xt3c056ca
[1] 8. Loosen 4 screws [1].
a15xt3c057ca
G-155
9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.

Note
• As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful
when reinstalling.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
[1] 10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1] a15xt3c059ca
G-156
[2] [7] [1] [6] [3] 11. Rotate the PB left unit around the wiring harness section on the
rear side to remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
• The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
• When rotating the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it
around the wiring harness section and be careful not to
damage the wiring harness.
• When reinstalling it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5]
on the brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins
[6] on the upper side into the holes [7].
[5] [4] a15xt3c060ca
14.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the following order of
output check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and
the main power switch (SW1) after moving the carriage section to
its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.14.2.3 Front cover)
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2
screws [2] and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[2] a15xt3c066ca
G-157
[3] [2] [3] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on
the front and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
• When reinstalling, route the book lift wires /Fr [3] and /Rr
[1] [1] [4] between 2 screws and 1 screw [1], and secure them
with the mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket /Fr [5].

Note
• When installing the tension bracket /Fr [5], be sure to
[5] [6]
tighten the screws [6] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket /Rr [7].

Note
• When installing the tension bracket /Rr [7], be sure to
tighten the screws [8] while pulling the bracket downward
by the specified tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8] [7] [2]

a15xt3c038ca
G-158
[11] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
Then remove the book lift wire/Fr [5].
[4]
Note
[2] • Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2].
Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[1] [9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
[5]
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring
[4], and gear [5].
[3] 10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G-159
11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4].
[4] [2] [1] [3] Then remove the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
• Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire
so that it comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2].
[5] Loop the wire over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8],
[9], [10] pulleys in that order. Then wind the wire 6 times
counterclockwise [11] over the pulley [2], and put the wire
[11] end [4] into the pulley.
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
14.2.25 Cart wire

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate /Rr [2].
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to open the registration
plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [4] fully and then install the mounting
plate /Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate /Fr [6].
Note
• When reinstalling it, temporarily hold the mounting plate /
Fr [6] and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then
pull it in the arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard
[3] [4] value and then fully tighten it.
Standard value: 1 to 1.5kgf
• Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not
contact metal frame.
[8] [7] [5] [6]

a15xt3c061ca
G-160
[1] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting /
Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the
saddles [5].
Note
• When installing the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [6] with the mounting plate /Rr on the
upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting /Fr
[8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the
saddles [11].
Note
• When installing the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to
hook it on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate /Rr on
the upper side.
[10] [7]
[8]
[11] [9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.
Note
• When reinstalling it, be sure to put the edge part [3]
between the projections [4].
a15xt3c063ca
14.2.26 Conveyance unit /Lw

(1) Procedure
[7] [5] [7] 1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6
saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrow-
marked direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit /Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and
[4] [4]
remove the unit.
Note
• When reinstalling, be sure to align it to the projection [7].

[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G-161
14.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2]
2. Remove the upper cover /FrLt. (Refer to G.14.2.14 Upper cover /
FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover /RrLt. (Refer to G.14.2.16 Upper cover /
RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2],
and then release the arm [3].
Note
• When releasing the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate
[4] falls. Hold it by hand during operation.
[4]
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].

[5] a15xt3c064ca
9. Remove the relay conveyance unit [3] by holding 2 shafts [2].
Note
• When removing the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a thin
driver into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance door
[6] [4] does not close. When moving down the relay
conveyance door [4] lower than the horizontal position,
the gear [6] comes off from the dumper gear [7] and the
[7] dumper adjustment is misaligned.
[5] [4] [2] [1]
[1] [3]
[2] a15xt3c065ca
G-162
14.2.28 Cover paper tray

CAUTION
• As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the following work with 2 people.
Note
• When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Unlock the cover paper tray [3] by slightly pushing up the cover
paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a similar tool, and
pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right and left rail [1]
and further pull out the cover paper tray.
[2] [1]
a075f2c065ca
G-163
4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left and right rail, hold the cover
paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it straight
up.
Note
• When installing the cover paper tray, make sure that the 4
knobs [3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4]
of the cover paper tray.
• When lifting the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the
specified positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part
indicated with [6] as the part can easily become deformed,
which adversely affects paper feed resulting in a paper
jam.
[5] [1] [6] [2]
[2] [1] [5]

[3] [4]
a075f2c066ca
G-164
14.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.14.2.28 Cover paper
[2] tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[1] [1] [3]
a075f2c067ca
[5] [3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws[4] and remove the gear cover [5].
[4]
a075f2c068ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1].
a075f2c069ca
G-165
[3] [2] 7. Slide the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of the lift wire /Fr1
[2] and /Fr2 [3] from each hole of the shaft [4].
Note
• The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire /Fr2 [3], must be
inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover
paper tray. The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2
[1]
[3], must be inserted into the shaft hole near the frame of
the cover paper tray.
• When installing the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate
slightly to give slack to the wires and insert the wire ends
one by one into the shaft holes. Then secure them with
the pulley [1].
[4]
a075f2c070ca
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover
[2] [2].
9. Remove the cover paper lift wires/Fr1 [4] and /Fr2 [5] from each
pulley [3].
[4] Note
• When installing the wires, make sure that the wires are
[1]
properly routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not
[5]
[3] crossed each other.
[4] [5]
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift
plate arm [1].
Note
• When pulling out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G-166
11. Remove 6 screws[1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3] [2] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the bearing [3].
[1] a075f2c074ca
[3] [4] 13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the
gear [3].
Note
• When removing the gear [3], be careful not to drop the
pin[4].
[1] [2] a075f2c075ca
[1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop the
bearing [3].
[3] [2] a075f2c076ca
G-167
[1] [3] 15. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
• When removing the gear [2], be careful not to drop and
lose the pin [3].
[2] a075f2c077ca
[1] [2] [3] 16. Remove the E-ring [1].

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and /Rr2 [3] from the shaft
holes in the same manner as step7.
a075f2c078ca
[2] [1] 18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and /Rr2 [2] in the same
manner as step8 to step10.
Note
• When pulling out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift
wire /Rr2 [2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover
paper lift plate arm [4] appears.
• The wire /Fr is gray in color and the wire /Rr is black.
• When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift
plate is horizontal.
[3] [4]
a075f2c079ca
14.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

• When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
G-168
(1) Procedure
2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB
control board (PBCB).
[2] [1] a15xt3c043ca
3. Press the button /1 [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
5. Set the inside paper to the clamp unit.
6. Adjust the clamp alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the inside paper
edge on the shorter side by hand.
8. Set the clamp unit.
Note
• Set the clamp unit gently. Setting it roundly causes the
misalignment of inside papers widening the clamp
alignment plate.
9. Close the front door.

Note
• Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board
(PBCB) after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
14.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
• When replacing the multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
• When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing multi feed detection board. (Refer
to I.5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB))
G-169
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the conveyance unit /Lw [1]. (Refer to G.14.2.26
Conveyance unit /Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board /S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3] a075f2c095ca

[1] [2]
4. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board /
S (MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed
detection board /R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2] a075f2c097ca
G-170

[1] [2]
board /R (MFDBR) [3].
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)
• The multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) are
[2]
installed on the same type board. Be careful not to confuse one
with the other when installing them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when installing it.
Multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection
boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR). So, even if it is installed, the
connector cannot be connected.
[1] a075f2c099ca
G-171
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 15. RU-506
15. RU-506
No. Section Part name
1 Cover Front cover
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover

CAUTION
15.2.2 Front cover

(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the
[1] [3] [2]
wire [3].
and the front door [1].
Note
removing it.
[4]
[5] [4]
a0get3c017ca
G-172
15.2.3 Rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover.
[1] [2] 2. Reinstall the parts by following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] a0get3c018ca
15.2.4 Left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] a0get3c032ca
15.2.5 Note to keep in mind when replacing the board

CAUTION
When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC19).
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC19) from the old RU control board [1] and install it into the new RU control board [2].
G-173
Note
• When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to
replace the EEPROM (IC19). Install EEPROM (IC19) of the
old control board [1] to the new control board [2].
[1]
[2]
a0get2c033ca
Note
A • Be sure to install the "A" sections of EEPROM (IC19) in the
same direction.
a04jf2c017ca
G-174
bizhub PRESS C8000 G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 16. GP-501
16. GP-501
16.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of
punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the
[1] punched-holes should be aligned evenly along the edge and
[2]
centered between the ends [2]. If the punched-holes are not
aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to align the
punched holes.
Note
• The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not
centered, you must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to

access the die set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.16.3.3 Removing
the Rear Cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what
direction the die set cradle [1] must move.
G-175
4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].

5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2]
clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to

the rear of the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw
counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then
you must turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
• Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4"
(6.35 mm) change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly
towards the bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down
screw. This will ensure positive engagement between the locking
lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment.
Re-adjust if necessary.
G-176
16.2 Door latch

16.2.1 Door latch check
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating
bracket tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press
the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming out.
16.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment

(1) To adjust the door latch:
2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.
• To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the
door.
• To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of
the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
16.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement

(1) To replace the door latch:
2. Remove the 2 screws [1].
G-177
(2) To replace the door switch:

2. Remove the 2 screws [1].
3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
16.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

16.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
WARNING
• Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury or
electrical shock.
(1) Procedure
• Unplug the unit from power.
• Disconnect the communication cable
• Empty Chip Bin
16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
16.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.16.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer.)
Note
• It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required

• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6
rear cover screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the
top cover.
16.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
G-178
Note
• It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
(1) Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punch’s castors to level it.
(2) Tool Required

• 2 3/8" open ended wrenches
• Level
(3) To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the
printer and finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which
castor needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the
height of the castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G-179
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 17. Commercially available
bizhub PRESS C8000 parts
17. Commercially available parts

17.1 Status indicator light
17.1.1 Configuration
[2] [1]
[1] Screws (2) [2] Status indicator light
17.1.2 Connector
(1) Connector position
[1]
[1] CN888 -
(2) Connector specifications

Connector Pin Number Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
888 1 PAT1_DR Light ON signal L signal output when the printing available Open collector
2 PAT2_DR L signal output while in the scanning or printing
operation
3 PAT3_DR L signal output when an abnormal stop occurs
due to jams, error codes, no paper, or no toner
4 PAT4_DR L signal output when the toner supply message
is displayed
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V, 500mA
6 GND Ground - -
G-180
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION
bizhub PRESS C8000 PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING
bizhub PRESS C8000 WORK
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKING BEFORE STARTING WORK
When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check first the following:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
• Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
I-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN
bizhub PRESS C8000 CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVIC...
2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN CONDUCTING ON-SITE SERVICE

When repairing the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when operating the machine with the power supplied, be careful of the scan of
the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I-2
bizhub PRESS C8000 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. UTILITY
3. UTILITY
3.1 List of utility menus
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board (NRB).
Note
• For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
• 01 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 02 User Setting
• 01 System Setting
• 01 Language Setting
• 02 Unit Setting
• 03 Feed Tray Setting
• 01 Paper Setting
• 02 Auto Tray Selection Setting
• 03 Type Selection for Auto Paper
• 04 Dehumidify Fan Heater Setting
• 04 Reset Setting
• 01 Auto Reset Setting
• 02 Job Reset Setting
• 05 Default Screen Setting
• 06 Set Zoom Ratio Setting
• 07 Power Save Setting
• 08 Date/Time Setting
• 09 Operation/Info.Sound Setting
• 01 Volume Setting
• 02 Info. Sound Item Setting
• 10 Key Response Time
• 11 Shortcut Key Register
• 01 Application Setting
• 02 Quality Adjustment (copy)
• 03 Quality Adjustment (scan)
• 04 Quality Adjustment Area Setting
• 05 Output Setting
• 12 Service Port Device Setting
• 02 Initial Setting
• 01 Copy Initial Setting
• 02 Scan Initial Setting
• 03 Common Setting
• 04 Copy Setting
• 05 Scan Setting
• 06 Printer Setting
• 01 Gray Text Outline
• 07 Image Quality Setting
• 01 Screen
• 02 Screen Initial Setting
• 03 Original Density Shift
• 04 ACS Adjustment
• 08 Password Change
• 03 Administrator Setting
• 01 Power Save Setting
• 02 Date/Time Setting
• 03 Weekly Timer Setting
• 01 Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting
• 02 Time Setting
• 03 Date Setting
• 04 Select Time for Power Save
• 05 Password Non-Business Hours
• 04 Restrict User Access
• 01 Lock/Delete Mode Memory
• 01 Copy Mode Memory
• 02 Scan Mode Memory
• 02 Change Restrict Setting
• 03 Scan Restrict Setting
• 05 Expert Adjustment
• 01 AES Level Adjustment
• 02 Erase Correction
• 01 Non-Image Area Erase
• 02 ADF Frame Erase
• 03 Printer Adjustment
• 01 Restart Timing Adjustment
• 02 Centering Adjustment
• 03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
• 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
I-3
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment

• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adjustment
• 04 Finisher Adjustment*1
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Staple Center Position
• 02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
• 03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
• 04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
• 05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
• 02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
• 01 Paper Width Adjustment
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
• 01 Half-Fold Position Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*2
• 05 Stacker Adjustment
• 02 Paper Length Adjustment
• 06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
• 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
• 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adjustment
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 GlueFormationFinishPos.
• 07 Temperature Adjustment
• 08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
• 10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 11 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• Relay Stacker Adjustment*2
• 04 Finisher Adjustment*3
• 01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
• 02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
• 03 Punch Adjustment
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.
• 03 Registration Adjustment
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
• 04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
• 05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
• 06 Post Inserter Tray Size
• 07 Output Quantity Limit
• 05 Scan Adjustment
• 06 Process Adjustment
• 01 Front & Back Density
• 02 Toner Density Sensor Speed
• 03 Maximum Density Adjustment
• 04 1st Trans. Dis-elec. Output
• 05 Scattering Filter Cleaning
• 06 Fusing Refresh Setting
• 07 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Stabilization Adj. Setting
• 05 Custom Screen
• 08 Execute Adjust Operation
• 06 List/Counter
• 07 Size Setting
I-4
• 01 Original Glass Original Size Search

• 02 ADF Original Size Search
• 03 Original Glass Small Size
• 04 K Size
• 05 ADF/Original Glass Priority Setting
• 08 Perfect Binder Setting
• 01 Usable Paper Weight Select
• 02 Paper Count Limit for PB
• 03 Unfitting Cover Stop Setting
• 09 Operation Screen Customize
• 01 Font Weight Setting
• 02 Copy Screen Customize Set
• 03 Scan Screen Customize Set
• 02 Administrator Registration
• 03 Scan Address Register
• 01 Address Edit
• 02 E-mail Title Setting
• 03 E-mail Text Setting
• 04 User Auth./Account Track
• 01 Authentication Method
• 02 User Authentication Set
• 01 Management Setting
• 02 User Registration
• 03 User Counter
• 03 Account Track
• 01 Account Track Registration
• 02 Account Track Counter
• 04 Print without Authentication
• 05 Network Setting
• 01 Machine NIC Setting
• 02 E-mail Initial Setting
• 03 http Communication Setting
• 04 Web LCD Setting
• 06 Common Setting
• 07 Copy Setting
• 08 Scan Setting
• 09 System Connection
• 01 Administrator Call
• 10 Security Setting
• 01 Administrator Password
• 02 HDD Management Setting
• 01 HDD Lock Password
• 02 Delete Temporary Data Setting
• 03 Delete All Data Setting
• 04 Delete hold Job
• 05 Delete HDD Job
• 06 HDD Restore/Backup
• 01 HDD Backup
• 02 HDD Restore
• 03 Enhanced Security Mode
• 04 Touch Panel Adjustment
*1 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-508 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*2 Unable to select any time.
*3 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
3.2 Start/exit
3.2.1 Start method
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen is displayed.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
3.2.2 Exit method

1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit] to go back to the ordinary operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I-5
bizhub PRESS C8000 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
4. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

4.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when replacing the parts on the list. Proper operation/image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustment after the parts replacement.
Note
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, be sure to use the NVRAM board (NRB) that
was installed on the damaged OACB on the new OACB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is
considered that NRB is also damaged.
• The NVRAM board (NRB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when replacing the PB,
perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning blade,
cleaning web). For details, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
• When replacing a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB), FD control board (FDCB), RU control board
(RUCB) or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that was installed on
the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new EEPROM and perform all adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU
or FS if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification Replacement parts/Others Adjustment items
After PM Implementation PM cycle setting counter reset
Drum Drum cartridge /Y, M, C, K Setting powder application
(Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing (Refer to F.5.3.4 Replacing the drum unit) Drum cartridge installation position (align the mark △)
the drum unit)
Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Initial Drum Rotation
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Color Registration Manual
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Development Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.5.7.1 Replacing (Refer to F.5.7.1 Replacing the developers / Auto. Developer Charge
the developers /Y, /M, /C Y, /M, /C and /K)
and /K) TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
Intermediate Trans. Intermediate transfer unit Intermediate transfer unit installation position (align the mark △)
(Refer to F.5.5 (Refer to F.5.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Intermediate transfer intermediate transfer unit)
section) Blade setting mode
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Color Registration Auto.
Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate transfer unit installation position (with UPSIDE mark
(Refer to F.5.5.7 Replacing the intermediate in rear)
transfer belt) Setting powder application
Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Blade setting mode
Int. Transfer Belt Info.
Transfer belt cleaning blade Setting powder application
(Refer to F.5.5.4 Replacing the transfer belt Blade setting mode
cleaning blade and Transfer belt cleaning
seal/F, /R)
1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K 1st transfer roller installation direction (groove on the shaft is on
(Refer to F.5.5.8 Replacing the 1st transfer the front side)
rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
bearing)
2nd transfer roller /Up 2st transfer roller installation direction (depression on the shaft
(Refer to F.5.5.9 Replacing the 2nd transfer edge surface is on the front side)
roller /Up)
Image correction unit Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
I-6

Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
IDC sensor /Rr (IDCS/2) IDC Sensor Information
Intermediate transfer belt unit M’ Transfer Steering sensor
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS83), /Md Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(PS84), /Rr (PS85) Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
Setting powder application
Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
2nd transfer 2nd transfer unit Setting toner application
(Refer to F.5.6 2nd transfer (Refer to F.5.6.3 Removing/reinstalling the Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
section) 2nd transfer unit)
2nd transfer belt Setting toner application
(Refer to F.5.6.5 Replacing the 2nd transfer Blade Setting Mode (2nd transfer)
belt unit, the 2nd transfer cleaning unit, and
the 2nd transfer ground plates /1 and /2) Belt Line Speed Adj.
Total process mount Drum cartridge, developer, intermediate Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade Setting powder application (to drum and intermediate transfer
belt)
Setting toner application (2nd transfer belt)
Initial Drum Rotation
Auto. Developer Charge
TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
Scanner*1 CCD unit CD-Mag. Adjustment
(Refer to G.4.3.15 CCD unit) Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
Scan exposure/V-mirror unit Mirror unit positioning (require the jigs)
(Refer to G.4.3.16 Exposure unit) Color Registration Auto.
Exposure lamp (L101) Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
(Refer to G.4.3.17 Exposure lamp (L101))
Original glass Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
(Refer to G.4.3.2 G.4.3.12 Original glass
assy)
Write Writing unit/K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.2.2.6 Writing (Refer to G.2.2.6 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
unit)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Writing unit /Y, /M, /C Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.2.2.6 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I-7
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear, LD alarm

measurement)
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Moire Adjustment
Dust-proof glass /Y, /M, /C, /K Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Refer to G.2.2.6 Writing unit)
Charging Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K Charging corona installation direction (align the marks △)
(Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing (Refer to F.5.4.1 Replacing the charging Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
the charging corona) corona)
Fusing Fusing unit Fusing cleaning web counter clear
(Refer to F.5.15 Fusing (Refer to F.5.15.2 Removing/reinstalling the
section) fusing unit)
Fusing Web Unit Fusing cleaning web counter clear
(Refer to F.5.15.3 Replacing the fusing web
unit)
Fusing Belt Fusing belt installation position (with lot number on the rear side)
(Refer to F.5.15.6 Replacing the fusing belt
unit /Lw, fusing heater /4, lubrication to the
fusing pressure arms /Fr and /Rr)
Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1) Installing direction of fusing heater lamp (with maker mark in
(Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the fusing roller rear)
assy and the fusing heater /1)
Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2) Installing direction of fusing heater lamp (with manufacturer mark
(Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the fusing roller in rear)
(Refer to F.5.15.5 Replacing the fusing roller in rear)
(Refer to F.5.15.6 Replacing the fusing belt in rear)
unit /Lw, fusing heater /4, lubrication to the
fusing pressure arms /Fr and /Rr)
(Refer to F.5.15.4 Replacing the fusing in rear)
external heating unit, the fusing temperature
sensor assy (external heating) and the fusing
heater /5)
F.5.15.4 Replacing the fusing external heating in rear)
unit, the fusing temperature sensor assy
(external heating) and the fusing heater /5
Thermostat /1 (TS1) Adjust by the thermostat positioning jig /B (require the jig)
Thermostat /3 (TS3) Adjust by the thermostat positioning jig /A (require the jig)
Thermostat /4 (TS4) Adjust by the thermostat positioning jig /E (require the jig)
Thermostat /5 (TS5) Adjust by the thermostat positioning jig /E (require the jig)
Boards Overall control board (OACB) NVRAM board (NRB) replacement
Rewriting of firmware
Machine NIC setting
Printer control board (PRCB) Rewriting of firmware
Software DIPSW setting
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Printer Screen Gradation
Hard disk /Y, M, C, K, A, P (HDD/Y, /M, /C, / I/O Check Mode (Replacing procedure of the hard disk)
K, /A, /P)
PF-704/705 Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.4.3.35 Multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS))
PF-705 Scanner relay board (SCRB) I/O Check Mode 90-10 Scanner adjustment data EEPROM
writing
EF-101 Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1) Installing direction of fusing heater lamp (with larger connector in
(Refer to F.8.2.3 Replacing the 2nd fusing rear)
heater)
I-8
Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2) Installing direction of fusing heater lamp (with larger connector in
heater)
heater)
heater)
heater)
heater)
Thermostat /2 (TS2) Adjust by the thermostat positioning jig /A (require the jig)
RU-508 RU control board (RUCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
FS-521 FNS control board (FNSCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
FS-612 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
Stapler unit Stapler positioning (require the jigs)
PK-512/513 Punch drive board (PDB) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
Paper size sensor (PS305) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
LS-505 LS control board (LSCB) Toggle switch setting
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Paper width adjustment
Paper length adjustment
FD-503 FD control board (FDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board (MFDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
PI drive board (PIDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
SD-506 SD control board (SDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter
(Refer to F.15.4.3 Replacing the trimmer reset)
board assy)
PB-503 PB control board (PBCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board adjustment
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
*1 PF-705 is provided with scanner.
I-9
bizhub PRESS C8000 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. SERVICE MODE
5. SERVICE MODE
5.1 Service mode list
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
• 01 Machine Adjustment
• 01 Printer Adjustment
• 04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
• 05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• 06 Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Pre-registration Adjustment
• 08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
• 09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory
• 01 Skew Initial Position Memory
• 02 Cross Direction Initial Pos.
• 10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
• 11 Color Registration Manual
• 12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.
• 13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.
• 14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
• 15 Moire Adjustment
• 16 Recall Standard Data
• 02 Scan Adjustment
• 04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
• 03 Quality Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Adjustment
• 01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• 02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.
• 03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj.
• 04 Printer Screen Gradation
• 02 Sharpness Adjustment
• 03 Contrast Adjustment
• 04 Image Distinction Level
• 01 Dot Detect Adjustment
• 02 Color Text Adjustment
• 03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
• 05 ACS Adjustment
• 06 Density Adjustment
• 01 AE(AES) Adjustment
• 02 Copy Density Adjustment
• 03 BackgroundRemoval
• 04 Bleed Prevention
• 07 Tone Adjustment
• 01 Red
• 02 Green
• 03 Blue
• 02 Process adjustment
• 01 High Voltage Adjustment
• 01 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj.
• 02 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm
• 03 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual
• 04 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• 05 HV Adj. (Separation AC)
• 06 HV Adj. (Separation DC)
• 07 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm
• 02 Drum Peculiarity Adjustment
• 01 Blade setting mode
• 02 Charge Potential Auto. Adj.
• 03 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
• 04 Auto. Developer Charge
• 05 TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto
• 06 Initial Drum Rotation
• 07 Toner Density Revert
• 08 Toner Density Sensor Speed
• 03 Sensor Output Confirm
• 01 Surface Potential Sensor
• 02 IDCSensor Output Confirm
• 03 Toner Density Sensor Output
• 04 Drum Surface Potential
I-10
• 05 Humidity/Temperature Output
• 06 Toner Charge Quantity Detect
• 04 Process Fine Adjustment
• 01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
• 02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
• 03 Develop AC Frequency
• 04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
• 05 Interval/Quantity Adj.
• 01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
• 02 Automatic Refresh Interval
• 03 Toner Density Sensor Interval
• 06 Int. Transfer Belt Info.
• 07 IDC Sensor Information
• 08 M’ Transfer Steering Sensor
• 01 Software DIPSW Setting
• 02 Service Center TEL/FAX
• 03 Serial Number Setting
• 04 Setting Date
• 04 Counter/Data
• 01 Maintenance Counter
• 02 Data collection
• 01 Total Counter/Each Paper Size
• 02 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
• 03 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• 04 ADF Counter
• 05 Coverage Data History
• 06 Time series jam data
• 07 JAM Counter
• 08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
• 08 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
• 10 SC Counter
• 11 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• 12 SC Count Individual Sec.
• 13 SC data of time series
• 14 Maintenance History
• 01 Maintenance Counter Reset
• 02 Parts History in Time Series
• 15 ORU-M Maintenance History
• 16 RFID Information
• 03 Parts Counter
• 01 Special Parts Counter
• 02 Voluntary Part Counter
• 04 Custom Counter Threshold Set*1
• 05 State Confirmation
• 01 I/O Check Mode
• 06 ADF Adjustment
• 01 ADF Original Size Adj.
• 02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
• 03 ADF Sensor Adjustment
• 04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.
• 07 Finisher adjustment*2
• 01 Staple Finisher Adjustment
• 01 Stapling center position adjustment
• 02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)
• 03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)
• 04 Exit Guide Center pos. Adj
• 05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
• 02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.
• 01 Paper width adjustment
• 02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.
• 01 2-Hole Punch
• 02 3-Hole Punch
• 03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.
• 02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
• 03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
• 04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
• 05 Z-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Gate Position Adj.
• 07 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
• 04 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment*3
• 05 Stacker Adjustment
• 02 Paper Length Adjustment
• 06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.
I-11

• 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
• 03 Staple Pitch Adjustment
• 05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.
• 06 Fold Paper Width Adj.
• 07 Trimming Adjustment
• 08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
• 07 Perfect Binder Adjustment
• 01 Cover Trimming Adj.
• 02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
• 03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
• 04 Glue Start Position
• 05 Glue Finish Position
• 06 GlueFormationFinishPos.
• 07 Temperature Adjustment
• 08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
• 09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
• 10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
• 11 Clamp FD Position Adj.
• 08 Relay Stacker Adjustment*3
• 07 Finisher adjustment*4
• 01 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment
• 02 Half-Fold Stopper Adjustment
• 03 Punch Adjustment
• 01 Vertical Position Adj.
• 02 Horizontal Position Adj.
• 03 Registration Adjustment
• 04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment
• 04 Tri-Fold Adjustment
• 05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
• 06 Post Inserter Tray Size
• 07 Output Quantity Limit
• 08 Firmware Version
• 01 Firmware Version
• 09 CS Remote Care
• 01 CS Remote Care
• 01 E-mail
• 02 Modem
• 10 List Output
• Coverage data list
• Parameter List
• Font Pattern
• Communication log list
• Maintenance History
• ORU-M Maintenance History
• RFID Information List
• Memory Dump List
• 11 Test Mode
• 01 Running Test Mode
• 02 Test Pattern Output Mode
• 12 ISW
• 01 ISW
• 13 Setting Data
• 01 Load from External Memory
• 02 Store to External Memory
• 14 Log Store
• 01 Log Store Setting
• 02 Execute Log Storing
• 15 ORU-M Setting
*1 Displayed when DIPSW8-7 is 1.
*2 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-521, FD-503, LS-505, SD-506, RU-508 PB-503 or RU-506) is available.
*3 Unable to select any time.
*4 Adjustment for the connected option (FS-612, PK-512/513 or PI-502) is available.
5.2 Start/exit
5.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
I-12
NOTE
• If you leave the site with the Service Mode setting screen being displayed, unauthorized changes could occur for any set values.
When you finish the setting of Service Mode, or if you have to leave the site by necessity when the Service Mode has been set, be
sure to press [Exit] to the basic screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
3. "Service Mode Menu screen"
The service mode appears.
*1 Default is [MACHINE] screen.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
5.2.2 Exit method

Exit methods differ according to the condition of power switch, ON or OFF.
(1) When the power is ON

1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Exit] to back to "Utility screen".
2. The new settings become effective.
(2) When the power is OFF

Turn OFF the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
5.3 Machine adjustment

5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction by changing the restart timing of the registration roller.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing of the printer.
Note
• Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.3 FD-Mag.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) and paper type (plain paper or thick paper)
respectively.
Note
• Large size: Paper size 300mm or more in the sub scan direction
• Small size: Paper size less than 300mm in the sub scan direction
• Paper thickness: Paper weight 106g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"

Set the print setting according to the selected item and press the start button to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 20 ± 0.5mm
I-13
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
• Setting Range
: -60 (short) to +60 (long)
• 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
5.3.2 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image writing position by changing the laser writing timing.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image centering in the printer main scan direction.
Note
• Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2 x 5 1/2 (tray
1 to 3)) and paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note

6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5mm
• Setting range: -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.3 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image magnification by changing the speed of the polygon motor.
(2) Usage
This adjustment changes the speed of the polygon motor and adjusts the image magnification.
Note
• Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
I-14
• Magnification adjustment on back side in sub-scanning direction is not reflected to the image in default. When adjusting the
magnification on back side, enter "User Setting - Common Setting" in "Utility" and turn the "Back Side Magnification Adj." to
[ON]. However, since the polygon motor speed is switched for back side, the print speed is reduced up to 3/4.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the Registroller line speed adj. is completed.
(4) Procedure
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
Select A3 paper and press Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Standard value
: ± 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
: 205.7 ± 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item to be adjusted.
• Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
Other than the above: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in main scanning direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for back side (each tray).
6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
• Standard value
: 190 ± 1mm or less
I-15
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item to be adjusted.
• Setting range: -100 (short) to +100 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
5.3.5 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) amount of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
Note
• This adjustment is valid when PF-705 is connected. When PF-705 is not connected, it cannot be adjusted.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted.
(4) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Set the test chart to the original glass, choose a paper A3 or 11x17, and press Start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
• Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
• Setting Range
: -20 (narrower) to +40 (wider)
• 1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.6 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
(3) Procedure
I-16

Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of width), and paper type (plain
paper, thick paper).
Note

6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
5.3.7 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
4. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for feed tray (trays, ADU) and paper size (large, small).
Note

7. "Pre-registration Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.8 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes line speed of the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction.
Note
• Note that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions not mentioned above.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
I-17
Press [Print Mode].

• Standard value
: 205.7 ± 1mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.01%
Note
• Setting range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from -5 to -35. An error code may occur by entering
the value that is not within the optimum value.
5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Function
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after replacing the write unit.
Perform this adjustment when misalignment is not solved by both of the auto color registration correction in the user mode and I.5.3.11 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment).I.5.3.11 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
5.3.10 Cross Direction Initial Pos. (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Function
Store the initial position of the horizontal magnification (magnification in the main scan direction) adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the
NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
Note
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field since it has been done in the production process.
5.3.11 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
The color registration misalignment of Y, M, and C of the main scan, sub scan, horizontal (main scanning direction magnification), skew and
partial horizontal (main scanning direction partial magnification) are automatically adjusted referring to K as standard.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
• Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 occurs.
(3) Procedure
I-18

Press [10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears, perform
an error correction referring to the below.
• Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value.
The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct this
adjustment again.
• Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
• Error 3: Other
The other malfunction other than the auto color registration adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check
for malfunction code.
6. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel. (unit:
pixel)
5.3.12 Color Registration Manual (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
The misalignment amount values of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", Mag.(ALL) (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), "Sub Scan", "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) are displayed on the touch
panel.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
• This adjustment is valid when PF-705 is connected. When PF-705 is not connected, perform "Color Registration Auto.Adj.
(Printer Adjustment)."
• Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.4 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
• Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.11 Color Registration
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Color Registration Manual].
4. "Color Registration Manual screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate /Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate /Rr [3], and close the DF or original cover.
Note
• When placing the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face down)
and position.
• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is set to 255. If not, it will cause an error.
I-19
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011
6. Press [Exit PrintMode].

Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
7. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)" (whole magnification in main scanning), "Mag.
(PART)" (partial magnification in main scanning), Sub Scan, "Incline" (skew), and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) at "Rest" section on the
touch panel. (unit: pixel)
8. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code will appear.
If "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Mag.(ALL)", "Sub Scan", or "Incline", perform the Color Registration Auto.Adj. again.
Error code Description Cause
Error 1 Cannot detect the chart pattern Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 13 Measurement error Chart misplacement or chart failure
5.3.13 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when replacing the PF multi feed detection board (MFDTBR, MFDBS) or the PF drive board (PFDB). Adjust it when
multi feed is not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, and thick paper).
Note
• The multi feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
• Adjustment error occurs because of the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to the
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 °C to 30 °C). (In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the
adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the room temperature become the same)
(3) Procedure
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [12 PFU Dfeed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the PF front door [1] and then open the open/close cover /1 [2] of the horizontal conveyance section.
I-20
[1]
[2]
5. Insert a sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) [1] and close the open/close cover /1 [2] (200g/m2 to
300g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
To adjust the PFU of the 1st tandem, insert a paper into the PFU of the 1st tandem.
To adjust the PFU of the 2nd tandem, insert a paper into the PFU of the 2nd tandem.
When inserting paper into both PFUs of 1st and 2nd tandem, PFU of the 1st tandem is adjusted.
[1]
[2]
6. "PFU Dfeed Detect Adj. screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, "Completed" is displayed. If abnormally completed, "Error" is displayed.
When the error message is is displayed, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
• When an error occurs, the error condition is maintained. Be sure to adjust it until the message "Completed" is displayed.
8. Pull out the paper inserted in step 5.

9. Turn ON the sub power switch and enter the I/O check mode.
12. Enter "04" (for the 1st tandem) or "06" (for the 2nd tandem) with the numeric keys. Confirm that "18-04" (for the 1st tandem) or "18-06"
(for the 2nd tandem) is displayed on the message display area.
13. Insert a sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that "0" is displayed on the input check
display.
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
15. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
5.3.14 CD-Mag. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the CY2 lens in the write unit /K and corrects the image distortion of K in main scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a skew in the main scan direction.
Note
• Image distortion of K in main scanning direction cannot be corrected by the Color registration adjustment. (Adjusts YMC only.)
• Image distortion of K in main scanning direction can also be changed by conducting [Chart Adjustment] of [Both Side Adj.] in
the User Mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 CD-Mag. Skew Adj.].
4. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
I-21
Press [Print Mode].

Note
• When the Start key is pressed, CY2 lenses of YMCK are adjusted and the Color registration adjustment (for approx. 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (No.16) will be printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.

• Standard value: ± 0.3% or less (difference between 280mm diagonal lines "a. b" is 0.84 mm or less)
a03uf3c001ca
8. "CD-Mag. Skew Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -30 to +30
• 1 step = 0.01mm
5.3.15 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD8 by changing the write clock.
(2) Usage
Note
• Be sure that the "I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and "I.5.3.11 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" have been adjusted in advance.
• Be sure to set the current value of the "I.5.3.16 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" to 0 before conducting this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, enter "0" through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Set all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way and press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows in descending order the conditions with the values +10, +5, ± 0, -5 and -10 to/from the current value of each
colors.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
I-22
[1] Current +10 [2] Current +5

[3] Current [4] Current -5
[5] Current -10 -
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1], or the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and right
are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
[1] The moires on the top and bottom are even or there is [2] The moires on the bottom is strong
no moire
[3] The moires on the top is strong [4] The white thin line and the black thin line on the left and
right are even or there is no thin line
[5] The white thin line appears on the left side and the [6] The black thin line appears on the left side and the
black one on the right side white one on the right side
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: -100 to +100
5.3.16 Moire Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Prevent moire by lowering the laser powers of LD1 and LD8 to absorb the changes of the beam pitch interval in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Note
• Be sure to complete I.5.3.9 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory), I.5.3.11 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment), and I.5.3.15 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) before this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [15 Moire Adjustment].
4. "Moire Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the moire.
Check the moire of each color on the 3rd column of the chart.
I-23
[1]
7. If there are any moires, press [Exit PrintMode].

8. "Moire Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: 0 to 5
5.3.17 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
The same adjustment table is changed since some parts of the printer adjustment can be changed by the user. Therefore, conduct this
adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
• Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto.", "Color Registration Manual", "PFU Dfeed detect Adj.", and "CD-Mag. Skew Adj."
are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Recall Standard Data].
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
• Selecting [Installation initial data] recalls the adjustment values stored when code "91-00" of the I/O check mode was
conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore standard data.

Press [No] to cancel the operation.
5.3.18 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub-scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing when scanning in platen mode.
Note
• Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" have been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"
I-24
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].

4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 0 ± 1.5mm
• Setting range: -10 (Image Fast) to +20 (Image Slow)
• 1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.19 Centering Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image mis-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove an image mis-centering in the main scan direction when scanning from the original glass and DF.
Note
• Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.3.2 Centering Adjustment
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
5. "Copy screen"
When you select [ADF Centering-Front] or [ADF Centering-Back], set the "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and
press Start key.
When you select [Orig. Glass Centering], set the "Test chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press Start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left and right lines misalign from
each other.
• Standard value
: within 0mm ± 1.5mm (Original Glass mode)
: within 0mm ± 2.0mm (DF mode)
• Setting range: -30 (image in front) to +30 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1mm
5.3.20 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in sub-scanning direction in original grass mode and DF mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
5. "Print Mode screen"
I-25
• Standard value
: 200 ± 1mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
• 1 step = 0.05%
5.3.21 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scanner Adjustment)

Note
In this adjustment, use the special chart and gradation data. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for acquiring these items.
(1) Function
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.
(2) Usage
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
Conduct this adjustment if color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a high light area) after replacing the CCD unit, exposure lamp
(L101), original glass or each scanner mirror.
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
• Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
Note
(3) Procedure
1. After replacing the part(s), set a "Color chart" on the original glass, A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press Start key.
Note
• Press the hard key on the operation panel, not the soft key on the touch panel.
2. Check if there is no image background or problem in color balance.

3. If there is abnormality, enter Service mode.
Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
7. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
• Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at factory. Please note that the scanner gradation data is
overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation screen" is pressed.
• Once [Adj. data reset] is pressed, previous data cannot be restored.
8. Press the [YES] key to overwrite the scanner gradation data to average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
5.3.22 Recall Standard Data (Scanner Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the scan adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
• Performing Recall Standard Data in Scanner Adjustment also restores the settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect
Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES) Adjustment" in Quality Adj.
I-26
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies depending on the screen selected in the copy mode.
Note
• Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum
• When PF-705 is connected (with scanner), normally perform the "I.5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment -
Printer Gamma Adjustment)" to adjust the printer gamma.
Perform this adjustment only when a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is particularly required or when PF-705 is not
connected (without scanner).
• This adjustment is not need to be conducted when conducting "Output Paper Density Adj."
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Adjustment].
4. "Printer Gamma Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Printer Gamma Offset Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
• Line1, Line2, Dot1 Dot2, and Stochastic correspond to the screen names in user mode.
• Contone is a screen used in the character section of Line1, Line2, Dot1, and Dot2.
• Contone does not require the adjustment.
6. Press [Print Mode].

7. Set the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. Check the printed test pattern.
• Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
8050fs1015
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Printer Gamma Offset Adj. screen"
Press the button of a color (C or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is
the same.
I-27
Y
M
C
K
[1]
[6] [5] [4] [2] [3] 8050fs1016
13. If the gray balance is not the same, press the color (Y or M) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
• How to match the gray balance
Take notice of the gray block [4] made up of 49 patches created in C, M and Y.
In the 49 patches, M gets darker toward right, and Y gets darker downward. C remains unchanged.
The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the 4 corners of the patch [5] is the same
color as the gray [3].
Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6].
Example:
• When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the darker direction.
• When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the lighter direction.
5.3.24 Printer Gamma Offset Auto. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the gradation and the background density in a high light area automatically by changing the printer gamma curve.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies depending on the screen selected in the copy mode.
Note
• When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• To adjust the printer gamma, perform this adjustment. When a fine adjustment of the printer gamma is required, perform "I.
5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
• This adjustment is valid when PF-705 is connected. When PF-705 is not connected, perform "I.5.3.23 Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
(Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)."
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Printer Gamma Offset Auto.].
5. "Printer Gamma Offset Auto. screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
• The printer gamma offset value of each YMCK displayed are the current values, and they are linked with the "Printer Gamma
Offset Adj." values.
6. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes], and press [No] to cancel the operation.
Note
• When the gradation in high light area is way off, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the printer gamma offset value to 0, then
press [Readjust].

Set A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper and press Start key to print a test pattern.
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
I-28
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
10. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
11. Press [Start].

12. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
• Since the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
• The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat steps 8 to 11 several times until the
message "Completed normally" appears.

Press [Print Mode].
14. Perform the steps 8 to 11.
15. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
If message other than "Completed normally" is displayed, repeat steps 13 to 14.
5.3.25 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)
(1) Function
The printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses IDC sensor to read the pattern on the transfer belt.
Therefore the correction may be inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of IDC sensor. This adjustment uses the scanner to
correct the IDC sensor, enabling precise printer gamma correction.
(2) Usage
When a poor color reproduction results even after the "Gamma Automatic Adjustment" of the "Process Adjustment", conduct this adjustment
to correct gradation.
Note
• When conducting this adjustment, be sure to use plain paper or color copy paper. Otherwise, the adjustment is not conducted
properly because the color of the test pattern varies depending on the paper color.
• To reset the data to factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] to reset the printer gamma sensor adjustment to the
factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Printer Gamma Sensor Adj].
5. "Printer Gamma Sensor Adj. screen"
Select the screen to be adjusted.
Note
• The adjustable screens are the same as the ones in Printer Gamma Offset Adj.

8. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [3] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [4].
Note
• Set the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
I-29
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
10. Press [Start].

11. If the chart is scanned and it is normal, the gamma sensor adjustment will be carried out, printer gamma correction is executed and
"Completed" message will be displayed.
12. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 6 to
11.
Error code Error Descriptions
Error 1 A crossmark cannot be detected Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the
NVRAM board
Error 7 Accessing to unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 RGB data abnormalities Chart is different, or software bug
Error 13 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 31 Sensor value error Readjust
Error 51 Regression calculation error Readjust
Error 52 Sequential number overflow Software bug
Error 53 Regression order error Software bug
Error 54 Select screen information error Software bug
Error 55 Color information error Software bug
5.3.26 Printer Screen Gradation (Quality Adjustment - Printer Gamma Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous).
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not necessary in the field.
5.3.27 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in user mode.
Note
• This adjustment reflects only to the scanned image.
I-30
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
7. Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/more moire)
5.3.28 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the contrast.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the contrast adjustment in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press Start key.
Setting range: -5 (contrast increase) to +5 (contrast decrease)
5.3.29 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the threshold value of original image distinction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the the dot distinction result differs from the original.
Note
• The scanned original is judged to text, picture, dot, or colored text by the image processing. The screen to be used is decided
according to the result.
• Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original on which the area is misjudged.
• To widen the judgment area of the picture, adjust it in the user mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].
4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].
5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, set the original to be adjusted on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
• Black section: Distinguished as black text
I-31
• Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text

9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Select the color to adjust, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
5.3.30 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the color text distinction function in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Color text detect pattern will be printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons if necessary, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
5.3.31 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
Adjust the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the text photo distinction function in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Dot/Text area adjustment].
5. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Dot/Text detection pattern is outputted.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
I-32

9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase/text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease/text area increase)
5.3.32 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the color/black and white distinction threshold value.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass and press [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" will be displayed.
Setting range: -5 (black) to +5 (color)
5.3.33 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment moves the printer gamma curve in parallel with shade direction without changing form to adjust the copy density.
(2) Usage
Adjust to change the center value selected in automatic copy density function in user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE(AES) Adjustment screen"
Place an original to change the AES density on the original glass and press [Scan].
6. Next to the "Result:", the numeric value will be displayed.
7. If the "RESULT" is other than 0, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
(e.g.: If the "Result" is 2, input -2). )
Setting range: -5 to +5
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the result becomes 0.
5.3.34 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the density for copying.
Perform this adjustment to change the center value of the "Density Shift" in user mode.
Note
I-33
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 +(dark)
5.3.35 Back. Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
5.3.36 Bleed Prevention (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the density of see-through image on back side of paper (density for shadow area) for copying.
In user mode only a batch adjustment is enabled. Therefore, it is impossible to perform adjustment respectively for original settings or color
modes.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Bleed Prevention].
I-34
5. "Bleed Prevention screen"

Select the mode to adjust, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Test chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
9. "Bleed Prevention screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 0
5.3.37 Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment to change the center value for the "Tone Adjustment" in the user mode.
Note
(3) Procedure
Adjust the density of each color; red, green and blue.
(a) Red
Press [07 Tone Adjustment].
4. "Tone Adjustment screen"
Press [01 Red].
5. "Red screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place a "Color chart" on the original glass, and press Start key.
(b) Green
Press [02 Green].
5. "Green screen"
Press [Print Mode].
(c) Blue
Press [03 Blue].
5. "Blue screen"
Press [Print Mode].
I-35
5.3.38 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment set values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
Note
• Adjustment data of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj." is not restored.
• The settings of "Image Distinction Level -Dot Detect Adjustment", "ACS Adjustment" and "Density Adjustment -AE(AES)
Adjustment" are not restored by performing Recall Standard Data in Quality Adj.
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.4 Process Adjustment

5.4.1 1-Trans.Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
The current value which is set through this adjustment is stored in NVRAM board (NRB) and output as the standard value in ATVC control.
5.4.2 1-Trans.V Manual Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

This adjustment outputs the voltage saved in the NVRAM board (NRB) and checks that the voltage is the same as the setting value.
5.4.3 1-Trans.Dis-elec.Pole Manual (High Voltage Adjustment)

Adjust the current that is charged to the drum by the voltage output of the 1st transfer neutralizing corona.
5.4.4 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

Executes offset to the 2nd transfer current value table for each condition making the value set through this adjustment as the standard.
5.4.5 HV Adj.(Separation AC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

Executes offset to the separation AC current value table for each condition making the value set through this adjustment as the standard.
5.4.6 HV Adj. (Separation DC) (High Voltage Adjustment)

Executes offset to the separation DC current value table for each condition making the value set through this adjustment as the standard.
5.4.7 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

5.4.8 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Cleaning after attaching toner on the transfer belt prevents damage to the transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the 2nd transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(3) Procedure
I-36
Press [02 Process Adjustment].

2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Int.Trans.Belt] or [2nd Trans. Belt]. It completes in about 15 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
5.4.9 Charge Potential Auto. Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measures the charged potential of each Y, M, C or K drum and adjusts the charged grid voltage value automatically.
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not necessary in the field. (This adjustment is included in Gamma Automatic Adjustment 0.)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Charge Potential Auto. Adj.].
4. "Charge Potential Auto. Adj. screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 10 seconds then the charger potential for each process speed (1/1 speed, 3/4 speed, 1/2 speed) and
each color (Y, M, C, K) appears, and then the message of completion appears on the screen.
5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
The maximum density correction, V0 correction, Vm correction, and gamma correction are executed all at once for each line speed and
quality mode.
Note
• The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments (0 to 7) but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"1 to 7" is the adjustment for each quality mode and "0" includes all of them.
(2) Usage
Executes the image stabilization control that is executed automatically and periodically on arbitrary timing.
Executes before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Gamma Automatic Adj.].
4. "Gamma Automatic Adj. screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 3.5 minutes then the charger DC bias value for each process speed (1/1 speed, 3/4 speed, 1/2 speed)
and each color (Y, M, C, K) appears, and then the message of completion appears on the screen.
Note
• The gamma automatic adjustment has 8 adjustments but be sure to execute only "0" in the field.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 0": Executes Dmax adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, and gamma adjustment to all screens.
"Gamma Automatic Adj. 1 to 7": Executes the image stabilization control adjustment to each screen.
• An error code is displayed when there is any trouble. Correct the error following the list below.
Error 1: Unable to execute gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error occurs, it is
controlled by using the previous correction value.
5.4.11 Auto. Developer Charge (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Puts the developer automatically into the developing unit.
(2) Usage
Use when putting in new developer.
Note
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to conduct Toner Density Sensor Init. before printing.
Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
• Be sure not to open the cover of the developing unit. Dust in the unit causes the image trouble.
(3) Procedure
1. Open the toner hopper unit. (Refer to F.5.3.2 Opening/closing the toner hopper unit)
I-37
2. Open the toner bottle door [1].
3. Loosen 2 screws of the cover /RtUp [1], pull it while lifting, and then remove the cover /RtUp.
4. Release the plate spring [1] and then remove the developer charge plate [2].
5. Remove the developer charge funnel /Lw [3].
6. Insert the developer charge plate [1] into the shoulder screw [2] and install it by moving to side.
I-38
Note
• The shoulder screws are on top of the developing unit of each color (YMCK).
7. Install the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the developer charge plate [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the leading edge of the developer charge funnel /Lw [2] to the toner supply opening [3] of the developing
unit.
8. Install the developer charge funnel /Up [2] that is included in the developer to the developer charge funnel /Lw [1].
Note
• The developer charge funnel /Up [2] is included in the developer, so be sure not to reuse it.

Press [04Auto. Developer Charge].
13. "Auto. Developer Charge screen"
Select the color of developer.
14. Press [Start] and then put new developer to the developer charge funnel /Up.
15. Confirm that the charge of developer is completed and then press [Cancel].
I-39
16. When charging another developer, repeat the steps 6 to 15.

17. Press [Return] to back to "Drum Peculiarity Adj. screen."
18. Replace the parts that have been installed.
19. Execute "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen." (Refer to I.5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
5.4.12 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Measure developer permeability in the developing unit with TCR sensor, memorize the input voltage obtained when the TCR sensor output
voltage became the standard value to the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Carry out this adjustment after new developer is charged, and adjust the standard toner concentration of the developer.
Note
• After replacing developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density
cannot be obtained, and the developers need to be replaced.
• The value displayed after the adjustment is a TCR sensor control voltage (input voltage) expressed in 8 bit.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed.
5.4.13 Initial Drum Rotation (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
This operation rotates the drum at low speed to lubricate by the Lubricant applying roller it to protect the drum and the cleaning blade.
(2) Usage
Conduct this operation after replacing the drum cartridge.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Initial Drum Rotation].
4. "Initial Drum Rotation screen"
Press [Start]. It completes in about 10 seconds then the message of completion appears on the screen.
5.4.14 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Supply toner automatically up to the standard value for the developing unit, whose output value of the TCR sensor is above the standard
value (low toner concentration).
Note
• When the toner density is high, set the test pattern density of the target color to 128 (set the density of other colors to 0), output
10 sheets of test pattern No.1, and check the toner density again.
(2) Usage
Recover to the normal toner density when the toner density of each color is low.
When SC that alerts low toner density occurs, recover the toner density with this recovery mode (start up the service mode).
(3) Procedure
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [07 Toner Density Revert Mode].
4. "Toner Density Revert Mode screen"
Select the color(s) whose density needs to be recovered.
5. Press [Start] to supply toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches to
the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
• The output value and the state (ON/OFF) on the touch panel are corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (0V to 5V
analog display) and the state (ON/OFF) of toner supply operation.
I-40
5.4.15 Toner Density Sensor Speed (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment)

(1) Function
Readjust the toner density control voltage at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when an error (image background, toner scatter) is caused by the unstable toner density at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Toner Density Sensor Speed].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Speed screen"
Press [Start].
It stops automatically after completion of the adjustment.
Note
• The output value on the touch panel is corresponding to the TCR sensor output value (8bits).
5.4.16 Surface Potential Sensor (Sensor Output Confirm)

Check the V0 potential (charging potential) and the Vi potential (exposure potential).
5.4.17 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

Measure uncharged potential of the transfer belt by the IDC sensors /Fr (IDCS/1) and /Rr (IDCS/2), and check the baseline controlled voltage
for the maximum density correction. (8 bit output)
5.4.18 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the output voltage of the TCR sensor with the analog value (v).
(2) Usage
Check the toner density level in the developer for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [03 Toner Density Sensor Output ].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Output screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (Line Speed 1: 1/1, Line Speed 2: 2/3 and Line Speed 3: 1/2) to be checked.
5. Select the color to be checked.
6. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
7. Press [STOP] to end the check.
8. When checking another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
5.4.19 Drum Surface Potential (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Check the V0 (charging potential) and the Vi (exposure potential) of drums by using the drum potential sensors /Y (DPS/Y), /M (DPS/M), /C
(DPS/C), and /K (DPS/K).
(2) Usage
Check the drum surface potential for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Drum Surface Potential].
4. "Drum Surface Potential screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (Line Speed 1: 1/1, Line Speed 2: 2/3 and Line Speed 3: 1/2) to be checked.
I-41
5. Select the color to be checked.

6. Press [Start] to display the V0 and Vi potential output value of selected items.
8. When checking another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
5.4.20 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Check the output of the temperature/humidity sensor on the main body/option.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature/humidity inside the machine.
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Humidity/Temperature Output].
4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and temperature value of the items below.
• Humidity/Temperature sensor 1: Temp/humidity sensor /1 (TEM/HUM1)
• Humidity/Temperature sensor 2: Process temperature sensor /2 (TEM/HUM2)
• Fus. Roller Center Temp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
• Fus. Roller Edge Temp. Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)
• Fus.UnderBeltCenterTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
• Fus.Out Heat Edge Temp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /5 (TH5)
• 2nd Fix.TopBeltCenterTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
• 2nd Fix.TopBeltEdgeTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
• 2nd Fix.B-BeltCenterTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
• 2nd Fix.B-BeltEdgeTemp.Sensor: Fusing temperature sensor /6 (TH6)
5.4.21 Toner Charge Quantity Detect (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
The toner charged level at output check can be roughly figured out.
(2) Usage
Detects the toner charged amount of each YMCK color when faulty image occurs because of the toner charging amount.
It is used for the investigation of the image trouble.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Toner Charge Quantity Detect].
4. "Toner Charge Quantity Detect screen"
Press [Start] to display the toner charged amount of each color.
5.4.22 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias.
• Image background: Increase the covered margin.
• White spot image/carrier damages to the drum and blade: Decrease the covered margin.
Note
• Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. Unnecessary adjustment may cause image failure (image
background, white spot image) or damages to the drum and the cleaning blade.
• There are several adjustment to reduce the image background. As a priority of adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Develop AC Frequency
2) Covered Margin Fine Adj.
3) Toner Density Fine Adj.
• The covered margin is changed by the gamma automatic adjustment after changing the setting. (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, white spots image, or carrier scattering occurs.
I-42
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].
3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Covered Margin Fine Adj.].
4. "Covered Margin Fine Adj. screen"
Select the color(s) to be adjusted and enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and press [SET].
Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering /white spot image caused by carrier prevention) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 6V
Note
• Take care that carrier scattering/white spot image caused by carrier prevention and image background prevention are trade
off. When either of them is improved, the other is worsened.
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
5.4.23 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
• Up the developing AC bias: Improve the developing ability.
• Down the developing AC bias: Reduce the carrier scattering.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when noisy image, white spots image, or low developing ability occurs.
Note
• After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. I.5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image prevention) to +5 (improve developing ability)
1 step = 0.1kV
5.4.24 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias to inhibit the image background, graininess, or the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
(2) Usage
Increasing the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the image background and graininess.
Lowering the frequency of the developing AC bias improves the darker at trailing edge of the paper.
Note
• Take care that "image background/graininess" and "the darker at trailing edge of the paper" are trade off. When either of them is
improved, the other is worsened.
• After changing the set value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (improve reproducibility of outline characters on a colored background) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 0.3kHz
I-43
5.4.25 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the TCR sensor control voltage.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or white spot caused by carrier occurs.
Note
• To reflect the change immediately, conduct the toner refresh mode (Machine Screen - Adjustment - Execute Adjust Operation)
and the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.5.4.10 Gamma Automatic Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to +5 (carrier scattering, white spot caused by carrier prevention)
1 step = 0.2% to 0.3%
5.4.26 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change interval of low humidity environment correction control (rotates drums periodically).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image failures caused by a uneven drum charging potential (that occurs easily with low humidity) occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Adjustment range: +1 to +5
1 step = 1 minute
5.4.27 Automatic Refresh Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Set the execution intervals and the toner consumption amount of the toner refresh mode*.
* Checks the average of print coverage for each color with each specific drive distance of the developing roller /K and consumes a certain
amount of toner for the color that the density is lower than 5% converted in A4 size after completion of printing.
(Toner refresh required time: About 2.5 minutes)
(2) Usage
Change the setting when rough image, overflow toner, or white spot occurs on the low coverage printing (5% or lower for each color in A4
size).
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Automatic Refresh Interval].
4. "Automatic Refresh Interval screen"
Specify the settings of each adjustment item, "Execution existence", "Execution frequency" and "Refresh quantity", and press [OK]
to enable the new settings.
• "Execution existence": [OFF], [ON]
• "Execution frequency":
[small] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 1,000 prints
I-44
[middle] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 500 prints

[large] - Equivalent to A4 continuous 330 prints
• "Refresh quantity":
[small] - Equivalent to A3 solid 3 sheets
[middle] - Equivalent to A3 solid 5 sheets
[large] - Equivalent to A3 solid 8 sheets
Note
• The execution frequency varies depending on the environmental temperature and print mode.
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.28 Toner Density Sensor Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change correction interval of the TCR sensor control voltage at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed.
Execute automatically for every specified drive distance of the developing roller /K.
(2) Usage
This adjustment does not affect the productivity. Therefore, do not set it to the direction to widen the interval.
When there is a claim that the stabilization control between jobs is too much, set it to the direction to widen the interval. However, the interval
of the toner density adjustment control is widened at 3/4 speed and 1/2 speed and the density change tends to occur.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Dens. Sensor Interval].
4. "Toner Dens. Sensor Interval screen"
Select an interval and press [OK].
5. Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.4.29 Int. Transfer Belt Info.

(1) Function
Enter the reflection rate data that is on the intermediate transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Enter the data when replacing the intermediate transfer belt.
Note
Also enter the specific value to the Management Tool when introducing ORU-M and replacing the intermediate transfer belt.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Int. Transfer Belt Info.].
3. "Intermediate transfer belt information screen"
Press "Front" or "Back" to select the item to be set.
The information of the intermediate transfer belt is on the edge of the belt.
0090831191 F3014 B2987
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
I-45
[1] Rear side of intermediate transfer unit [2] Front side of intermediate transfer unit
[3] Reflection rate data: Rear [4] Reflection rate data: Front
[5] Lot number -
4. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].

5. Repeat the steps 3 to 4 to enter all.
5.4.30 IDC Sensor Information

(1) Function
Set the sensor light volume for detecting the black (Bk) toner. The set value is used for the image stabilization control as the sensor input
voltage.
(2) Usage
Set the value when replacing the IDC sensor /Rr (IDCS/2).
Note
The following codes are the malfunction codes related with IDCS/2.
C-2804
C-2834
C-2884
C-2894
(3) Procedure
Press [07 IDC Sensor Information].
3. "IDC Sensor Information screen"
Enter a value of IDCS/2 through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• Setting range: 50 to 212 digit
Note
After changing the set value, be sure to execute "Process Adj." - "Drum Peculiarity Adj." - "Gamma Automatic Adj.".
When entering wrong value or nonperforming the gamma automatic adjustment, the image density of black (Bk) is not
proper.
5.4.31 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information

(1) Function
Set the standard value for the position of the intermediate transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Set this setting when the intermediate transfer belt unit is replaced.
Note
For the intermediate transfer belt unit, a unique adjustment value is required according to the positions of the intermediate transfer
steering sensor and the intermediate transfer steering edge sensor.
When this value is not proper, a malfunction code related to misalignment of the intermediate transfer belt (C-2235).
(3) Procedure
Press [08 M' Trans. Steering Sensor]
3. "Intermediate Transfer Steering Sensor Information screen"
Input the value marked on the Intermediate transfer belt steering sensor unit with the numeric buttons and press [Set].
• Setting range: 0 to 1024 digits
5.4.32 Recall Standard Data

(1) Functions
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
• Items that can be recalled
• 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
• 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
• HV Adj.(Separation AC)
• HV Adj.(Separation DC)
• Charge potential automatic adjustment
• LD Bias Adjustment
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
I-46
(3) Procedure
Note
conducted.

5.5 System Setting

5.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) OUTLINE
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
• Do not change any switch not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [▲] / [▼] or numeric buttons after pressing the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to set the selected bit number ON/OFF.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected [2] DIPSW number
DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[3] Bit number (0 to 7) [4] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[5] Numeric buttons [6]
5.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list

Default setting
DIPSW Bit Function Set value
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Display of process adjustment on user screen • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
2 Print stop method after displaying toner supply • Stops after ejecting paper in the 1 1 1
or waste toner full display machine: 1-3=0, 1-2=0
(Decide the copier operation when detecting no • Stops at a break between copy
toner or waste toner full.) set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
I-47
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 • Stops at the end of the current 0 0 0
job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
• Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
4 Printing prohibition when the maintenance count • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
is reached • 1: Enabled
5 Number of allowed print quantity after reaching • 1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=0 0 0 0
6 the maintenance count • 2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
7 • 4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1, 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0, 1-5=1
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1, 1-5=1
2 0 Hard disk drive connection recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Adjustment value combination ratio in the • 5:5 = new:old adjustment value: 0 0 0
6 density balance adjustment 2-6=0, 2-5=0 0 0 0
Set the combination (merging) ratio of • 7:3 = new:old adjustment value:
adjustment value when registering the profile 2-6=0, 2-5=1
that has been registered on "Machine Screen" - • 3:7 = new:old adjustment value:
"Adjustment" - "Density Balance Adjustment". 2-6=1, 2-5=0
This setting changes the color/gradation • 6:4 = new:old adjustment value:
drastically because of the change of engine 2-6=1, 2-5=1
process element. Use this setting to change the
ratio for merging the profile.
Note
· Merging the profile is available between the
data whose conditions; "Screen", "Paper
Type", and "Weight" are matched.
7 Polygon motor rotation speed switchover • 0: Speed when printing 0 0 0
Polygon motor rotation speed switchover is completes
available to reduce the operation sound during • 1: 2/3 speed
idling.
The default setting keeps the speed of previous
print.
3 0 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
1 Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, 3501 to • 0: Unlatched 0 0 0
3916) • 1: Latched
2 Reverse de-curler roller preliminary rotation • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 The maximum stacking capacity selection in • 0: Stops at the tray middle 0 0 0
small-size (longer side 250mm to 319mm) of position sensor (PS6) (loading
FS-521 in shift mode 1500 sheets)
The maximum stacking capacity of the main tray • 1: Stops at the tray lower limit
can be changed from 1500 to 3000 in FS-521 sensor (PS3) (loading 3000
shift mode. sheets)
6 I/O check mode output15 memory clear • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 0 Fusing nip measure mode • Disabled: 4-1=0, 4-0=0 0 0 0
The condition of the fusing nip can be checked • 1st fusing nip measure mode:
by transferring to the image (solid blue). Stops 4-1=0, 4-0=1
the paper conveyance once at the timing when • 2nd fusing nip measure mode:
paper reaches the fusing nip and starts again 4-1=1, 4-0=0
after a specified time period. Exits paper to the • Disabled: 4-1=1, 4-0=0
1 tray. • Disabled: 4-1=0, 4-0=1 0 0 0
Note • 1st fusing nip measure mode:
Color paper (80 to 100g/m2, A4) is 4-1=0, 4-0=1
recommended. • 2nd fusing nip measure mode:
4-1=1, 4-0=0
• Disabled: 4-1=1, 4-0=0
I-48
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 - • 0: - 0 1 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 1
4 0 0 0
5 APS when change magnification • 0: Enabled 0 1 0
• 1:Disabled
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 0 Process speed switchover (81 to 105 g/m2) • 0: Down speed under low 0 0 0
Process speed can be selected under low temperature (Priority to fusing
temperature whether to give priority to stability stability)
or productivity. • 1: Not down speed under low
temperature (Priority to speed)
1 Process speed switchover (106 to 135 g/m2) 0 0 0
Process speed can be selected under low
temperature whether to give priority to stability
or productivity.
2 Process speed switchover (136 to 220 g/m2) 0 0 0
Process speed can be selected under low
temperature whether to give priority to stability
or productivity.
3 PPM switchover at 300mm/s • 0: 70ppm (normal) 0 0 0
When the low-coverage continuous printing is • 1: 60ppm (priority to stability)
frequently performed or in the high-temperature
and high-humidity environment, image troubles
such as rough image/toner spillage/image
background tend to occur. When such troubles
occur, setting to 60PPM (stability priority)
prevents the troubles by making a toner band to
increase the toner consumption.
4 Fusing jam blank paper cleaning • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to • 1:Disabled
select whether to feed blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
6 Life message display timing of the dust-proof • 0: 270,000 prints: near life 0 0 0
filters /A and /B (300,000 prints: life)
• 1: 300,000 prints: near life
(330,000 prints: life)
7 Print at reaching life of the dust-proof filters /A • 0: Allow 0 0 0
and /B • 1:Restrict
6 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: FS staple function 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
5 Faulty part isolation: FS 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(1st)
7 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit 0 0 0
(2nd)
7 0 Faulty part isolation: SD saddle stitch 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: SD multi center fold 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: SD multi tri-fold 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: SD trimming 0 0 0
4 Faulty part isolation: SD-tandem conveyance, 0 0 0
sub tray paper exit
5 Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion 0 0 0
6 Faulty part isolation: PB binder function 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: PB 0 0 0
8 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
I-49
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Custom size counter threshold setting • 0: Not display 0 0 0
When setting the DIPSW to 1, the custom size • 1: Display
threshold of the counter per size can be set. Set
the threshold from "Service Mode" - "04
Counter/Data" - "Custom Counter Threshold
Set."
9 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 Duplex mode • Auto: 9-3=0, 9-2=0 1 1 1
3 Reverse de-curler pressure setting • Strong: 9-3=0, 9-2=1 0 0 0
The amount of curling on the front side can be • Middle: 9-3=1, 9-2=0
adjusted in duplex printing. • Weak: 9-3=1, 9-2=1
The pressure volume differs between the print
mode in default. Change the setting when the
amount of curling on the front side is strong in
duplex printing.
4 Copy quantity limit • No limit: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 0 0 0
5 9-4=0 0 0 0
• 1 sheet: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
6 9-4=1 0 0 0
7 • 3 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1, 0 0 0
9-4=0
• 5 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 9 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• 10 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• 20 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• 30 sheets: 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• 50 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• 99 sheets: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=0,
9-4=1
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=0
• No limit: 9-7=1, 9-6=1, 9-5=1,
9-4=1
10 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Hard disk image memory • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Custom size tolerance setting • 0: ± 2mm 0 0 0
• 1: ± 10mm
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 SD multi center folding number limit • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled (up to 50 sheets)
I-50
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Automatic restart of the job under suspension • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 Automatic paper supply • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
7 Jam code display • 1: Enabled 0 0 0
12 0 Counter per mode (2) • 0: No.1 to No.9 Not display the 0 0 0
count per color mode
• 1: No.1 to No.9 Display the
count per color mode
1 OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off • 0: One is possible 0 0 0
• 1: Both are possible
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 - • 0: - 1 1 1
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Konica Minolta logo when power switch is turned • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
ON • 1:Disabled
13 0 Faulty part isolation: Multi punch function (GP) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
FNS
2 Faulty part isolation: RU-508 humidifier function 0 0 0
3 Faulty part isolation: RU-508 color sensor unit 0 0 0
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Recall previous job when reserving next job • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
The setting condition for copy can be kept for • 1: Enabled
the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
1 Utility counter display switchover • 0: Normal display 0 0 0
• 1: Counter display per size
2 Printer 1200dpi compression mode • Standard compression (image 0 0 0
3 Use this mode when image deterioration occurs area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 1 1 1
on the border of the image area or jaggy occurs 14-2=0
on the outlines of the letters or lines of the image • Antialiasing compression
area. (image area resolution priority):
By setting to the standard compression (image 14-3=0, 14-2=1 (not used)
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, the • Standard compression (image
image area is also processed in 1200dpi. area resolution priority): 14-3=1,
14-2=0
• Antialiasing compression
(image area gradation priority):
14-3=1, 14-2=1 (not used)
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 ISO Metric mode • 0: JIS 0 0 1
• 1:ISO
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 CSRC used NIC • 0:Controller NIC 0 0 0
• 1:Main body NIC
15 0 ORU-M operator release setting • 0: ORU-M unavailable 0 0 0
• 1: ORU-M available
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
2 Charging corona life display • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
3 Finishing option alarm stop • Stops immediately after 0 0 0
Select the alarm stop condition. Alarm stop detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=0
means to detect the next function.
I-51
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 FD/FS/LS tray lower limit, FD/FS/LS/SD tray • Stops at a break between print 0 0 0
paper full, FD/PK punch scraps full, FS staple set after detection: 15-4=0,
scraps full, SD trimming scraps full 15-3=1
• Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=0
• Does not stop while printing:
15-4=1, 15-3=1
5 CS Remote Care recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
6 Address reset after scanning • 1: Enabled 0 0 0
7 LDAP function 0 0 0
Use this function to search E-mail address using
LDAP server.
When setting to 1 (enabled), "LDAP Search"
button is displayed from "Scanner" - "E-mail" -
"Search" and enables the E-mail address
search.
(Need to turn ON/OFF the main body after
changing the setting.)
16 0 Scanner magnification setting 0 0 0
1 Box name input in Japanese 0 0 0
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Utility menu mode installation date display • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Dehumidification heater temperature control • Preliminary drying time 4 0 0 0
(PF) minute: 16-6=0, 16-5=0
With PF option dehumidifier heater is connected, • Preliminary drying time 6
this switch is used to set preliminary drying time minute: 16-6=0, 16-5=1
when dehumidifier fan heater control is set to • Preliminary drying time 8
[Compulsive ON] in the Utility menu mode. minute: 16-6=1, 16-5=0
6 Dehumidification heater temperature control • Preliminary drying time 4 0 0 0
(PF) minute: 16-6=1, 16-5=1
With PF option dehumidifier heater is connected,
this switch is used to set preliminary drying time
when dehumidifier fan heater control is set to
[Compulsive ON] in the Utility menu mode.
7 ORU-M developing unit counter setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
User can enter the life counter (distance and • 1: Enabled
quantity) of the developing unit.
17 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 Density selection at scanning tab paper • Brightness level 80: 17-6=0, 0 0 0
5 (Set the background optical density at scanning 17-5=0, 17-4=0 0 0 0
tab paper.) • Brightness level 40 (weakest):
6 17-6=0, 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
• Brightness level 60: 17-6=0,
17-5=1, 17-4=0
17-5=1, 17-4=1
17-5=0, 17-4=0
17-5=0, 17-4=1
17-5=1, 17-4=0
• Brightness level 255
(strongest): 17-6=1, 17-5=1,
17-4=1
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /1 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /2 • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: Tray /3 0 0 0
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-52
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
4 Print during dehumidification heater temperature • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
control (PF) • 1: Allow
5 Faulty part isolation: FS center folding, saddle • 0: Normal 0 0 0
stitch • 1: Unusable
6 Faulty part isolation: PI 0 0 0
7 Faulty part isolation: HDD 0 0 0
19 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Fusing upper and lower roller temperature • -30 °C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=0 1 1 1
2 selection • -20 °C: 19-3=0, 19-2=0, 19-1=1 1 1 1
Change the standard control temperature of • -10 °C: 19-3=0, 19-2=1, 19-1=0
3 fusing. Decrease temperature against paper • Standard: 19-3=0, 19-2=1, 0 0 0
curling or waving and increase temperature 19-1=1
against insufficient fusing or fusing winding jam. • Upper roller standard, lower
roller +10 °C: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=0
• Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=0,
19-1=1
• Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=0
• Standard: 19-3=1, 19-2=1,
19-1=1
4 Multi feed detection (PF) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 Faulty part isolation: PF • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 Developing motor stop control during printing • Normal (automatic switchover): 0 0 0
7 19-7=0, 19-6=0 0 0 0
• Rotation at 1/4 speed when
image is not developed:
19-7=0, 19-6=1
• OFF when image is not
developed: 19-7=1, 19-6=0
• Normal (automatic switchover):
19-7=1, 19-6=1
20 0 Group staple • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
1 Image scanning area with image shift • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Original priority
2 Total page number standard in stamp mode • 0: Based on original 0 0 0
• 1: Based on transfer paper
3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
4 • 1: - 0 0 0
5 Curl adjustment setting after auto reset • 0: Not reset 0 0 0
Reset the value of "Paper Setting" - "Curl • 1: Reset
Adjustment" to 0 at auto reset and set whether
to reset the humidifier setting to default or not.
Note
The default (ON/OFF) of the humidifier setting
differs depending on the paper type and weight.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 Temporary stop operation when initializing the • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
life of the transfer belt cleaning blade • 1: Disabled
Note
Do not disable this setting normally.
21 0 PB perfect binding limit number switchover • 0: Fine/Color/Coated table 0 0 0
• 1: Plain table
1 PB warm-up control switchover (effective by • 0: Warm-up during power ON 1 1 1
power OFF/ON after the setting change) • 1: No warm-up during power
ON
2 PB heater control switchover (effective by power • 0: Heater turns OFF 0 0 0
OFF/ON after the setting change) automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
• 1: Heater does not turn OFF
automatically in 1 minute after
finishing perfect binding.
I-53
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 257 to 300g/m2 paper exit with its face up • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
• 1: Allow
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
22 0 Machine NIC setting • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
1 Number of punch holes (effective by power OFF/ • 2-Hole: 22-2=0, 22-1=0 1 1 0
2 ON after the setting change) • 2/3-hole switchover: 22-2=0, 0 0 1
Change the prohibition control by paper size, 22-1=1
which differs depending on the number of punch • 2/4-hole switchover Swedish 4-
holes. Also change the number of holes on the holes: 22-2=1, 22-1=0
punch hole select screen of user mode. • -: 22-2=1, 22-1=1
3 Image position for the custom size original • 0: Based on user selection 0 0 0
(when using DF) • 1: Based on APS at DF
4 Power save key function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
5 SD trimming board adjustment display • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
6 Operation when staple empty of FS • 0:Staple supply request 0 0 0
• 1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
23 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not delete automatically 0 0 0
100 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This (restrict to receive copier/printer
function sets the operation when 100 jobs are hold job)
stored. • 1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive new job
2 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction (during printing) • 1: Fine
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approx. 0.5 pixels, but the
correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
3 Control of the color registration automatic • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction) • 1:Disabled
Down time while in the continuous printing is
reduced by disable the color registration
correction that is performed periodically. (Color
registration correction when the fusing
temperature is lower than the specified
temperature at power ON is not omitted.)
4 Color registration automatic correction in main 0 0 0
scan direction (periodical correction)
The color registration correction that is
performed periodically can be disabled in the
main scan direction only. This is used
temporarily when there is a registration error
along the main scan as a result of a trouble
around the transfer belt unit, or when isolating
faulty part.
5 Gamma correction (IC) 1 1 1
6 FS-521 rear side staple angle (effective by • 0: 45 degrees diagonal 0 0 0
power OFF/ON after the setting change) • 1:Parallel
7 Punch auto switching (PK/FD) (effective by • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
power OFF/ON after the setting change) • 1: Enabled
24 0 Simple-gamma correction counter reset • 0: Reset when print job is 0 0 0
started
• 1: Not reset when print job is
started
1 Dust-proof filter cleaning control • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
2 Image stabilization control • 1:Disabled 0 0 0
I-54
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 Part patch control • 0:Disabled 0 0 0
Set this setting to 1 when the memory image • 1: Enabled
(vertical band of the previous print) occurs on
the full half-tone image after printing the same
pattern such as vertical band.
When setting it to 1, writing patch on the area
other than vertical band image supplies toner
over the photo conductor and makes the attrition
of the photo conductor and blade even to
prevent the memory image.
4 Developing patch control • Toner save priority (toner 0 0 0
5 Set the developing patch band width created consumption: none): 24-5=0, 0 0 0
between paper according to the image and toner 24-4=0
spillage condition. • Toner save priority (toner
Set it to developing stability priority (toner consumption: small): 24-5=0,
consumption: large) when the rough image or 24-4=1
toner spillage occurs. • Toner save priority (toner
However, it increases the toner consumption. Be consumption: middle): 24-5=1,
sure to check the toner spillage condition when 24-4=0
changing the setting. • Developing stability priority
(toner consumption: large):
24-5=1, 24-4=1
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 Belt reverse rotation control during job • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To prevent the case that something gets stuck • 1:Disabled
between the intermediate transfer belt and the
cleaning blade and toner goes through between
them, stop the operation and rotate the
intermediate transfer belt in the reverse direction
for the specified time.
For the continuous job, stop the job once in
1000 of A3 and rotate the intermediate transfer
belt in the reverse direction.
25 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Color registration automatic correction control • Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0 0 0 0
4 Change the timing of periodical color registration • Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1 0 0 0
correction control or disable the correction. • No performed during printing:
Enabled: Correction is performed by suspending 25-4=1, 25-3=0
print at specified print. • -: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with malfunction code related to the drum
potential sensor or IDC sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by suspending print at every specified
print is performed after the print job to reduce
down time.
5 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction • 1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approx. 30 seconds.
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 Dehumidification heater • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
26 0 Trigger judgment of the color registration • 0: Process mount temperature 0 0 0
automatic correction • (Execute the color registration
Set the standard to judge the timing to execute correction when the process
the color registration correction. mount temperature changes
more than the specified level
from the previous correction.)
•
• 1: Number of print pages
I-55
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
• (Execute the color registration
correction after printing
specified pages from the
previous correction.)
1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 Multi feed detection (PI/FD) (effective by power • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
OFF/ON after the setting change) • 1:Disabled
4 Printer auto centering correction (PF) 0 0 0
5 Printer auto centering correction (ADU) 0 0 0
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 0 0 0
1 LS main tray paper exit limit switchover • 0: Limit by weight 0 0 0
• 1: 5000 sheets uniformly
2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
3 Inclusion of proof copy to the set copy quantity • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 PB perfect binding minimum number of the • 0: Follow the setting of the 0 0 0
inside paper Utility menu
• 1: 6 sheets (81g/m2 or more)
7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
30 0 • 1: - 0 0 0
1 Restriction of the display of the service mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
"List output" • 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1:Disabled
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
31 0 1 1 1
1 SRA4, SRA3 main tray paper exit of FS-612 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
2 Z-fold max. paper exit capacity: FS-521 main • 50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0 0 0 0
tray • 40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1
Z-fold, center-fold max paper exit capacity: FD • 30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
main tray • 20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
Set the max stacking capacity of paper which is
Z-folded or center-folded by FD on the FS or FD
main tray during continuous printing. If folding
performance is poor and causing paper jam or
I-56
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 dropping from tray, reduce the max. stacking 0 0 0
capacity of folded paper using this switch.
(effective by power OFF/ON after the setting
change)
4 FS-521 Z-fold + Staple number limit • 5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0 0 0 0
5 Set the max number of FS-521 Staple Z-folded • 8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1 0 0 0
paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size). • 10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
• 3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 Contone output of solid text (IC) • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 TC black and white large size count method • 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Set the count number to the double count size • 1: 2 count
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in black
and white printing.
1 TC color large size count method 0 1 0
Set the count number to the double count size
paper which is set with DIPSW33-2/3 in color
printing.
2 TC double count size setting • 330mm or more in the sub scan 1 0 1
3 Set the threshold of the double count size in the direction: 33-3=0, 33-2=0 0 1 0
sub scan direction. • 355mm or more in the sub scan
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is direction (except for the U.S):
more than the specified length is counted as the 33-3=0, 33-2=1
double count size with the combination of • 420mm or more in the sub scan
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. direction (the U.S): 33-3=1,
33-2=0
• All size is counted as small
size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Charge count setting • 0:Disabled 0 0 0
When setting this setting to 1, "Total Counter" in • 1: Enabled (displays "Billing
the utility mode is changed to "Billing Total Total Counter")
Counter."
34 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
35 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray /4 (PF) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
1 Faulty part isolation: Tray /5 (PF) • 1: Unusable 0 0 0
2 Faulty part isolation: Tray /6 (PF) 0 0 0
6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
7 • 1: - 0 0 0
36 0 81 to 105g/m2, plain paper, bypass feed/2nd • 0: Bypass feed 0 0 0
fusing feed switchover • 1: 2nd fusing feed
Selectable whether to feed paper to the 2nd
fusing or to bypass the 2nd fusing.
I-57
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
Set this setting to "1" to improve or make even
the brightness. However, it causes rough image
depending on the paper type.
1 106 to 135g/m2, plain paper, bypass feed/2nd 0 0 0
fusing feed switchover
Selectable whether to feed paper to the 2nd
fusing or to bypass the 2nd fusing.
Set this setting to "1" to improve or make even
the brightness. However, it causes rough image
depending on the paper type.
2 81 to 105g/m2, coated paper, bypass feed/2nd • 0: Normal: 2nd fusing feed 0 0 0
fusing feed switchover • 1: Bypass feed (Select when
Selectable whether to feed paper to the 2nd wrapping to the 2nd fusing
fusing or to bypass the 2nd fusing. roller occurs on the solid image)
Feeding the 2nd fusing improves the evenness
of brightness. However, select the bypass feed
when wrapping jam to the 2nd fusing roller
occurs on the solid image.
3 Productivity switchover in 70PPM • 0: Down the productivity in low 0 0 0
Figure out the average coverage for every 2,000 coverage mode (60PPM)
prints and switch the productivity between • 1: Not down the productivity in
70PPM and 60PPM when reaching the specified low coverage mode (Setting to
number of print. give priority to productivity.
When giving priority to the productivity in low However, it causes image
coverage, set it to "1." However, it causes a background or toner spillage. )
trouble related to the quality.
Switch the productivity when the job starts after
reaching the specified condition.
4 2nd fusing de-curler pressure setting in simplex • Auto: 36-5=0, 36-4=0 0 0 0
5 mode • Strong: 36-5=0, 36-4=1 0 0 0
• Middle: 36-5=1, 36-4=0
• Weak: 36-5=1, 36-4=1
6 2nd fusing de-curler pressure setting in duplex • Auto: 36-7=0, 36-6=0 0 0 0
7 mode • Strong: 36-7=0, 36-6=1 0 0 0
• Middle: 36-7=1, 36-6=0
• Weak: 36-7=1, 36-6=1
37 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
1 • 1: - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
38 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
I-58
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 Overwrite all HDD data • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
SW to allow all HDD data to be deleted when • 1:Disabled
throwing the machine away.
Note
· Setting this mode to "1" and executing the
following step disable the machine.
Therefore, do not execute the steps except
when throwing the machine away.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" -
"Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5.5.3 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register telephone and fax numbers of a service center that will be displayed in help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] to be set.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.

Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
5.5.4 M/C Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Set and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
• The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 M/C Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
5.5.5 Setting Date Input

(1) Usage
Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the utility mode.
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date of the total counter is not displayed.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date Setting].
3. "Setup Date Setting screen"
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year/Month/Date to be entered.
4. Press [OK] to update data.
I-59
5.6 Counter/Data
5.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) OUTLINE
Set or reset the maintenance counter cycle.
Note
• The maintenance cycle can be set either paper count (quantity) or travel distance (m) of the developing roller /K (distance).
"Quantity" is selected by default.
• The count condition of the maintenance counter is as follows.
Note
• The count condition cannot be changed.
Standard size
Small size (1 count)
SRA4S : 320mm
81/4 x 13 : 330mm
8 x 13 : 330mm
81/2 x 13 : 330mm
81/8 x 131/4 : 336mm
Custom size
Large size (2 counts)
81/2 x 14 : 355mm
B4 : 364mm
8K : 390mm
A3 : 420mm
11 x 17 : 432mm
Counted as large size with the threshold of 338mm (13.307 inches) or more
(2) Counter reset

After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
• Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 300,000 prints (other than fusing)/every 450,000
prints (fusing)).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and icon do not disappear.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data]
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
4. "Reset confirm screen"
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Set the maintenance counter.
Note
• The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. Default setting is set to 300,000.
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
5.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the counter/data of the main body shown below on the touch panel.
The counter/data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
• Paper Size Counter(Total)
• Paper Size Counter(Copy)
• Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• ADF Counter
• Coverage Data History
I-60
• Time series jam data

• JAM Counter
• Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)
• Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)
• SC Counter
• JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• SC Count Individual Sec.
• SC data of time series
• Maintenance Counter Reset
• Parts History in Time Series
• RFID Information
(1) Procedure
Press [02 Collecting Data].
3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter/data item to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages.
Note
• [Counter Clear] is displayed on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Resetting these data when visiting customers for maintenance enables to check the number of jam and malfunction counted
after the last visit.
• On the individual confirmation screens of [ORU-M Maintenance History] and [RFID Information], select the item to check and
press [Information View] to check the information of the selected item.
5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
No. CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark
01 P1 00 Others
02 P1 01 A3
03 P1 02 A4
04 P1 03 A5
05 P1 04 A6
06 P1 05 B4
07 P1 06 B5
08 P1 07 B6
09 P1 08 12×18
10 P1 09 11×17
11 P1 0A 8.5×14
12 P1 0B 8.5×11
13 P1 0C 7.25×10.5
14 P1 0D 5.5×8.5
15 P1 0E F4
16 P1 0F Post card
17 P1 10 4×6
18 P1 11 8K
19 P1 12 16K
20 P1 13 Long paper
21 P1 14 A2
22 P1 15 SRA3
23 P1 16 SRA4
24 P1 17 13×19
25 P1 18 Inf. 1 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 196 mm or less*
26 P1 19 Inf. 2 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
I-61
No. CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark

27 P1 1A Inf. 3 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
28 P1 1B Inf. 4 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
29 P1 1C Inf. 5 Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 391mm to 487mm
* When DIPSW 8-7 is 0. When DIPSW8-7 is 1, it depends on the setting of I.5.6.19 Custom Counter Threshold Set.
5.6.4 ADF Counter

Confirm the number of originals fed in each DF mode.
Note
• No.01 and No.02 counter do not double count with other counters.
• 1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
No. CSRC parameter Item Remark
01 F0 00 N of originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
02 F0 01 N of originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
03 F0 02 N of originals fed in RDH mode Not used
04 F0 03 N of originals fed in RRDH mode Not used
05 F0 04 N of originals fed in LDF mode Not used
06 F0 05 N of originals fed in CFF mode Not used
07 F0 06 N of single-sided SDF original fed Not used
08 F0 07 N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (single side)
09 F0 08 N of mix originals fed in ADF mode (double side)
10 F0 09 N of originals fed in 2in1 mode Not used
11 F0 0A N of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
12 F0 0B N of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
13 F0 0C N of 2-sided SDF original fed Not used
5.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
• This coverage is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption when actually printed.
• Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in chronological order.
No. CSRC parameter Printer counter Coverage (%)
01 V0 00 B/W accumulated coverage rate (00.0 to 99.9)
02 V0 01 B/W section 1 coverage rate
11 V0 0A B/W section 10 coverage rate
12 V0 0B B/W section 11 coverage rate
13 V0 0C B/W section 12 coverage rate
14 V0 0D B/W section 13 coverage rate
15 V0 0E B/W section 14 coverage rate
16 V0 0F B/W section 15 coverage rate
I-62

27 V0 1A B/W section 26 coverage rate
28 V0 1B B/W section 27 coverage rate
29 V0 1C B/W section 28 coverage rate
30 V0 1D B/W section 29 coverage rate
31 V0 1E B/W section 30 coverage rate
32 V0 1F
33 V0 20 Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34 V0 21 Yellow section 1 coverage rate
43 V0 2A Yellow section 10 coverage rate
44 V0 2B Yellow section 11 coverage rate
45 V0 2C Yellow section 12 coverage rate
46 V0 2D Yellow section 13 coverage rate
47 V0 2E Yellow section 14 coverage rate
48 V0 2F Yellow section 15 coverage rate
59 V0 3A Yellow section 26 coverage rate
60 V0 3B Yellow section 27 coverage rate
61 V0 3C Yellow section 28 coverage rate
62 V0 3D Yellow section 29 coverage rate
63 V0 3E Yellow section 30 coverage rate
64 V0 3F
65 V0 40 Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66 V0 41 Magenta section 1 coverage rate
75 V0 4A Magenta section 10 coverage rate
76 V0 4B Magenta section 11 coverage rate
77 V0 4C Magenta section 12 coverage rate
78 V0 4D Magenta section 13 coverage rate
79 V0 4E Magenta section 14 coverage rate
80 V0 4F Magenta section 15 coverage rate
I-63

91 V0 5A Magenta section 26 coverage rate
92 V0 5B Magenta section 27 coverage rate
93 V0 5C Magenta section 28 coverage rate
94 V0 5D Magenta section 29 coverage rate
95 V0 5E Magenta section 30 coverage rate
96 V0 5F
97 V0 60 Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98 V0 61 Cyan section 1 coverage rate
107 V0 6A Cyan section 10 coverage rate
108 V0 6B Cyan section 11 coverage rate
109 V0 6C Cyan section 12 coverage rate
110 V0 6D Cyan section 13 coverage rate
111 V0 6E Cyan section 14 coverage rate
112 V0 6F Cyan section 15 coverage rate
123 V0 7A Cyan section 26 coverage rate
124 V0 7B Cyan section 27 coverage rate
125 V0 7C Cyan section 28 coverage rate
126 V0 7D Cyan section 29 coverage rate
127 V0 7E Cyan section 30 coverage rate
128 V0 7F
5.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size,
and magnification.
5.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter for Individual Section

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
• Maximum count: 999,999
• (The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
• Jam code is displayed on the user mode screen when changing the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
No. CSRC Item
Parameter Jam code
001 J0 00 J-1001
002 J0 01 J-1002
I-64
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
003 J0 02 J-1003
004 J0 03 J-1051
005 J0 04 J-1101
006 J0 05 J-1151
007 J0 06 J-1201
008 J0 07 J-1251
009 J0 08 J-1301
010 J0 09 J-1351
011 J0 0A J-1501
012 J0 0B J-1502
013 J0 0C J-1551
014 J0 0D J-1552
015 J0 0E J-1601
016 J0 0F J-1602
017 J0 10 J-1603
018 J0 11 J-1604
019 J0 12 J-1605
020 J0 13 J-1606
021 J0 14 J-1607
022 J0 15 J-1608
023 J0 16 J-1609
024 J0 17 J-1610
025 J0 18 J-1611
026 J0 19 J-1612
027 J0 1A J-1613
028 J0 1B J-1614
029 J0 1C J-1615
030 J0 1D J-1616
031 J0 1E J-1617
032 J0 1F J-1618
033 J0 20 J-1621
034 J0 21 J-1622
035 J0 22 J-1623
036 J0 23 J-1624
037 J0 24 J-1625
038 J0 25 J-1626
039 J0 26 J-1627
040 J0 27 J-1628
041 J0 28 J-1629
042 J0 29 J-1630
043 J0 2A J-1649
044 J0 2B J-1651
045 J0 2C J-1652
046 J0 2D J-1653
047 J0 2E J-1654
048 J0 2F J-1655
049 J0 30 J-1656
050 J0 31 J-1657
051 J0 32 J-1658
052 J0 33 J-1660
053 J0 34 J-1661
054 J0 35 J-1662
055 J0 36 J-1663
056 J0 37 J-1664
057 J0 38 J-1665
058 J0 39 J-1666
059 J0 3A J-1670
I-65
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
060 J0 3B J-1671
061 J0 3C J-1672
062 J0 3D J-1673
063 J0 3E J-1674
064 J0 3F J-1675
065 J0 40 J-1701
066 J0 41 J-1702
067 J0 42 J-1703
068 J0 43 J-1704
069 J0 44 J-1705
070 J0 45 J-1706
071 J0 46 J-1707
072 J0 47 J-1708
073 J0 48 J-1709
074 J0 49 J-1710
075 J0 4A J-1751
076 J0 4B J-1752
077 J0 4C J-1753
078 J0 4D J-1754
079 J0 4E J-1755
080 J0 4F J-1756
081 J0 50 J-1801
082 J0 51 J-1802
083 J0 52 J-1803
084 J0 53 J-1804
085 J0 54 J-1805
086 J0 55 J-1806
087 J0 56 J-1807
088 J0 57 J-1808
089 J0 58 J-1809
090 J0 59 J-1810
091 J0 5A J-1811
092 J0 5B J-1812
093 J0 5C J-1813
094 J0 5D J-1814
095 J0 5E J-1815
096 J0 5F J-1816
097 J0 60 J-1817
098 J0 61 J-1818
099 J0 62 J-1821
100 J0 63 J-1822
101 J0 64 J-1823
102 J0 65 J-1849
103 J0 66 J-1851
104 J0 67 J-1852
105 J0 68 J-1853
106 J0 69 J-1854
107 J0 6A J-1855
108 J0 6B J-1856
109 J0 6C J-1857
110 J0 6D J-1858
111 J0 6E J-1860
112 J0 6F J-1861
113 J0 70 J-1862
114 J0 71 J-1863
115 J0 72 J-1864
116 J0 73 J-1865
I-66
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
117 J0 74 J-1866
118 J0 75 J-1901
119 J0 76 J-1902
120 J0 77 J-1903
121 J0 78 J-3101
122 J0 79 J-3102
123 J0 7A J-3103
124 J0 7B J-3149
125 J0 7C J-3151
126 J0 7D J-3152
127 J0 7E J-3201
128 J0 7F J-3202
129 J0 80 J-3203
130 J0 81 J-3204
131 J0 82 J-3252
132 J0 83 J-3206
133 J0 84 J-3207
134 J0 85 J-3209
135 J0 86 J-3220
136 J0 87 J-3221
137 J0 88 J-3222
138 J0 89 J-3223
139 J0 8A J-3224
140 J0 8B J-3225
141 J0 8C J-3226
142 J0 8D J-3251
143 J0 8E J-3252
144 J0 8F J-3254
145 J0 90 J-3270
146 J0 91 J-3271
147 J0 92 J-3272
148 J0 93 J-3273
149 J0 94 J-3274
150 J0 95 J-3275
151 J0 96 J-5101
152 J0 97 J-5102
153 J0 98 J-9201
154 J0 99 J-9202
155 J0 9A J-9251
156 J0 9B J-9252
157 J0 9C J-9301
158 J0 9D J-9351
159 J0 9E J-9401
160 J0 9F J-9402
161 J0 A0 J-9451
162 J0 A1 J-9452
163 J0 A2 J-6101
164 J0 A3 J-6102
165 J0 A4 J-6103
166 J0 A5 J-6201
167 J0 A6 J-6203
168 J0 A7 J-6206
169 J0 A8 J-6209
170 J0 A9 J-6301
171 J0 AA J-6304
172 J0 AB J-6305
173 J0 AC J-6501
I-67
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
174 J0 AD J-6502
175 J0 AE J-6504
176 J0 AF J-6508
177 J0 B0 J-7101
178 J0 B1 J-7102
179 J0 B2 J-7103
180 J0 B3 J-7104
181 J0 B4 J-7105
182 J0 B5 J-7106
183 J0 B6 J-7107
184 J0 B7 J-7108
185 J0 B8 J-7109
186 J0 B9 J-7110
187 J0 BA J-7217
188 J0 BB J-7218
189 J0 BC J-7219
190 J0 BD J-7220
191 J0 BE J-7221
192 J0 BF J-7222
193 J0 C0 J-7223
194 J0 C1 J-7224
195 J0 C2 J-7225
196 J0 C3 J-7226
197 J0 C4 J-7228
198 J0 C5 J-7229
199 J0 C6 J-7230
200 J0 C7 J-7235
201 J0 C8 J-7243
202 J0 C9 J-7248
203 J0 CA J-7249
204 J0 CB J-7250
205 J0 CC J-7251
206 J0 CD J-7281
207 J0 CE J-7282
208 J0 CF J-7283
209 J0 D0 J-7290
210 J0 D1 J-7401
211 J0 D2 J-7402
212 J0 D3 J-7403
213 J0 D4 J-7404
214 J0 D5 J-7405
215 J0 D6 J-7406
216 J0 D7 J-7407
217 J0 D8 J-7408
218 J0 D9 J-7409
219 J0 DA J-7410
220 J0 DB J-7411
221 J0 DC J-7412
222 J0 DD J-7431
223 J0 DE J-7432
224 J0 DF J-7433
225 J0 E0 J-7434
226 J0 E1 J-7435
227 J0 E2 J-7436
228 J0 E3 J-7437
229 J0 E4 J-7438
230 J0 E5 J-7439
I-68
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
231 J0 E6 J-7440
232 J0 E7 J-7441
233 J0 E8 J-7442
234 J0 E9 J-7501
235 J0 EA J-7502
236 J0 EB J-7503
237 J0 EC J-7504
238 J0 ED J-7505
239 J0 EE J-7506
240 J0 EF J-7507
241 J0 F0 J-7508
242 J0 F1 J-7509
243 J0 F2 J-7510
244 J0 F3 J-7511
245 J0 F4 J-7512
246 J0 F5 J-7513
247 J0 F6 J-7514
248 J0 F7 J-7515
249 J0 F8 J-7516
250 J0 F9 J-7517
251 J0 FA J-7518
252 J0 FB J-7519
253 J0 FC J-7520
254 J0 FD J-7521
255 J0 FE J-7522
256 J0 FF J-7523
257 J1 00 J-7524
258 J1 01 J-7530
259 J1 02 J-7531
260 J1 03 J-7532
261 J1 04 J-7533
262 J1 05 J-7535
263 J1 06 J-7550
264 J1 07 J-7551
265 J1 08 J-7552
266 J1 09 J-7553
267 J1 0A J-7554
268 J1 0B J-7555
269 J1 0C J-7556
270 J1 0D J-7557
271 J1 0E J-7558
272 J1 0F J-7561
273 J1 10 J-7562
274 J1 11 J-7563
275 J1 12 J-7564
276 J1 13 J-7565
277 J1 14 J-7566
278 J1 15 J-7567
279 J1 16 J-7568
280 J1 17 J-7569
281 J1 18 J-7570
282 J1 19 J-7571
283 J1 1A J-7572
284 J1 1B J-7573
285 J1 1C J-7574
286 J1 1D J-7575
287 J1 1E J-7576
I-69
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
288 J1 1F J-7577
289 J1 20 J-7578
290 J1 21 J-7579
291 J1 22 J-7580
292 J1 23 J-7581
293 J1 24 J-7582
294 J1 25 J-7583
295 J1 26 J-7584
296 J1 27 J-7585
297 J1 28 J-7590
298 J1 29 J-7591
299 J1 2A J-7592
300 J1 2B J-7593
301 J1 2C J-7594
302 J1 2D J-7595
303 J1 2E J-7596
304 J1 2F J-7597
305 J1 30 J-7660
306 J1 31 J-7661
307 J1 32 J-7662
308 J1 33 J-7663
309 J1 34 J-7664
310 J1 35 J-7665
311 J1 36 J-7666
312 J1 37 J-7667
313 J1 38 J-7668
314 J1 39 J-7669
315 J1 3A J-7670
316 J1 3B J-7671
317 J1 3C J-7672
318 J1 3D J-7673
319 J1 3E J-7674
320 J1 3F J-7675
321 J1 40 J-7676
322 J1 41 J-7677
323 J1 42 J-7678
324 J1 43 J-7679
325 J1 44 J-7680
326 J1 45 J-7681
327 J1 46 J-7682
328 J1 47 J-7683
329 J1 48 J-7684
330 J1 49 J-7685
331 J1 4A J-7686
332 J1 4B J-7687
333 J1 4C J-7688
334 J1 4D J-7689
335 J1 4E J-7690
336 J1 4F J-7691
337 J1 50 J-7692
338 J1 51 J-7693
339 J1 52 J-7696
340 J1 53 J-7697
341 J1 54 J-7698
342 J1 55 -
343 J1 56 -
344 J1 57 -
I-70
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
345 J1 58 -
346 J1 59 -
347 J1 5A -
348 J1 5B -
349 J1 5C -
350 J1 5D -
351 J1 5E -
352 J1 5F -
353 J1 60 -
354 J1 61 -
355 J1 62 -
356 J1 63 -
357 J1 64 -
358 J1 65 -
359 J1 66 -
360 J1 67 -
361 J1 68 -
362 J1 69 -
363 J1 6A -
364 J1 6B -
365 J1 6C -
366 J1 6D -
367 J1 6E -
368 J1 6F -
369 J1 70 -
370 J1 71 -
371 J1 72 -
372 J1 73 -
373 J1 74 -
374 J1 75 -
375 J1 76 -
376 J1 77 -
377 J1 78 -
378 J1 79 -
379 J1 7A -
380 J1 7B -
381 J1 7C -
382 J1 7D -
383 J1 7E -
384 J1 7F -
385 J1 80 -
386 J1 81 -
387 J1 82 -
388 J1 83 -
389 J1 84 -
390 J1 85 -
391 J1 86 -
392 J1 87 -
393 J1 88 -
394 J1 89 -
395 J1 8A -
396 J1 8B -
397 J1 8C -
398 J1 8D -
399 J1 8E -
400 J1 8F -
401 J1 90 -
I-71
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
402 J1 91 -
403 J1 92 -
404 J1 93 -
405 J1 94 -
406 J1 95 -
407 J1 96 -
408 J1 97 -
409 J1 98 -
410 J1 99 -
411 J1 9A -
412 J1 9B -
413 J1 9C -
414 J1 9D -
415 J1 9E -
416 J1 9F -
417 J1 A0 -
418 J1 A1 -
419 J1 A2 -
420 J1 A3 -
421 J1 A4 -
422 J1 A5 -
423 J1 A6 -
424 J1 A7 -
425 J1 A8 -
426 J1 A9 -
427 J1 AA -
428 J1 AB -
429 J1 AC -
430 J1 AD -
431 J1 AE -
432 J1 AF -
433 J1 B0 -
434 J1 B1 -
435 J1 B2 -
436 J1 B3 -
437 J1 B4 -
438 J1 B5 -
439 J1 B6 -
440 J1 B7 -
441 J1 B8 -
442 J1 B9 -
443 J1 BA -
444 J1 BB -
445 J1 BC -
446 J1 BD -
447 J1 BE -
448 J1 BF -
449 J1 C0 -
450 J1 C1 -
451 J1 C2 -
452 J1 C3 -
453 J1 C4 -
454 J1 C5 -
455 J1 C6 -
456 J1 C7 -
457 J1 C8 -
458 J1 C9 -
I-72
No. CSRC Item

Parameter Jam code
459 J1 CA -
460 J1 CB -
461 J1 CC -
462 J1 CD -
463 J1 CE -
464 J1 CF -
465 J1 D0 -
466 J1 D1 -
467 J1 D2 -
468 J1 D3 -
469 J1 D4 -
470 J1 D5 -
471 J1 D6 -
472 J1 D7 -
473 J1 D8 -
474 J1 D9 -
475 J1 DA -
476 J1 DB -
477 J1 DC -
478 J1 DD -
479 J1 DE -
480 J1 DF -
481 J1 E0 -
482 J1 E1 -
483 J1 E2 -
484 J1 E3 -
485 J1 E4 -
486 J1 E5 -
487 J1 E6 -
488 J1 E7 -
489 J1 E8 -
490 J1 E9 -
491 J1 EA -
492 J1 EB -
493 J1 EC -
494 J1 ED -
495 J1 EE -
496 J1 EF -
497 J1 F0 -
498 J1 F1 -
499 J1 F2 -
500 J1 F3 -
501 J1 F4 -
502 J1 F5 -
503 J1 F6 -
504 J1 F7 -
505 J1 F8 -
506 J1 F9 -
507 J1 FA -
508 J1 FB -
509 J1 FC -
510 J1 FD -
511 J1 FE -
512 J1 FF -
5.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode(1)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
I-73
Note
No. CSRC Item Count conditions
Parameter
001 F1 00 1 → 1 Mode Scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by number
of output side)
002 F1 01 1 → 2 Mode Scans 1-side and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
number of output side)
003 F1 02 2 → 1 Mode Scans 2-sides and outputs 1-side (Counts by
004 F1 03 2 → 2 Mode Scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
005 F1 04 ADF1>1 mode ADF scans 1-side and outputs 1-side (Counts by
006 F1 05 ADF1>2 mode ADF scans 2-sides and outputs 2-sides (Counts by
007 F1 06 Mixed original mode Counts by number of output side
008 F1 07 Tab original mode Counts by number of output side
009 F1 08 Z-Folded original mode Counts by number of output side
010 F1 09 LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Reg.) Counts by number of output side
011 F1 0A LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Reg.) Counts by number of output side
012 F1 0B LEF:Portrait/SEF:Landscape(Rev.) Counts by number of output side
013 F1 0C LEF:Landscape/SEF:Portrait(Rev.) Counts by number of output side
014 F1 0D Original Type: Text/Photo Counts by number of output side
015 F1 0E Original Type: Text Counts by number of output side
016 F1 0F Original Type: Photo Counts by number of output side
017 F1 10 Original Type: Map Counts by number of output side
018 F1 11 Custom Size Original Counts by number of output side
019 F1 12 Corner Staple(Left) Specifies 1 stapling position (upper left) (Counts by
number of stapling)
020 F1 13 Corner Staple(Right) Specifies 1 stapling position (upper right) (Counts by
number of stapling)
021 F1 14 2 Position Staple(Left) Specifies 2 stapling positions (left bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
022 F1 15 2 Position Staple(Top) Specifies 2 stapling positions (top bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
023 F1 16 Right & Left Bind Folding direction is left or right (Counts by number of
output side)
024 F1 17 2 Position Staple(Right) Specifies 2 stapling positions (right bind) (Counts by
number of stapling)
025 F1 18 Top Bind Folding direction is upper (Counts by number of
output side)
026 F1 19 Tri-Fold Counts by number of folding
027 F1 1A Folding & Stapling Counts by number of folding
028 F1 1B Stacker5000 sheets full alarm LS 1st tandem or 2nd tandem 5000 sheets full alarm
is ON
029 F1 1C Group Group and offset no output (Counts by number of
output side)
030 F1 1D Offset Group Group and offset output (Counts by number of
output side)
031 F1 1E Sort Sort and no offset (Counts by number of output side)
032 F1 1F Offset Sort Sort and offset (Counts by number of output side)
033 F1 20 Face down Counts by number of output side
034 F1 21 Face up Counts by number of output side
035 F1 22 1 to N Counts by number of output side
036 F1 23 N to 1 Counts by number of output side
037 F1 24 -
038 F1 25 Post inserter Cover Sheet Specify
039 F1 26 Trim Counts by number of trimming
040 F1 27 Real Size Copy Axial magnification 1.000, lateral magnification 1.000
(Counts by number of output side)
041 F1 28 Preset magnification E4 Specifies preset magnification (A5 → A3) (Counts by
I-74

Parameter
042 F1 29 Preset magnification E3 Specifies preset magnification (A3 → A3/B5 → B4)
043 F1 2A Preset magnification E2 Specifies preset magnification (A4 → B4) (Counts by
044 F1 2B Preset magnification E1 Specifies preset magnification (B4 → A3/B5 → A4)
045 F1 2C Preset magnification R4 Specifies preset magnification (A4 → B5/A3 → B4)
046 F1 2D Preset magnification R3 Specifies preset magnification (B4 → A4) (Counts by
047 F1 2E Preset magnification R2 Specifies preset magnification (A3 → A4/B4 → B5)
048 F1 2F Preset magnification R1 Specifies preset magnification (A3 → A5) (Counts by
049 F1 30 Preset Zoom 1 Counts by number of output side
052 F1 33 Zoom Counts by number of output side
053 F1 34 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Counts by number of output side
054 F1 35 Maximum ZOOM Counts by number of output side
055 F1 36 Minimum ZOOM Counts by number of output side
056 F1 37 APS Counts by number of output side
057 F1 38 AMS Counts by number of output side
058 F1 39 AES Counts by number of output side
059 F1 3A Preset Density 1 Counts by number of output side
060 F1 3B Preset Density 2 Counts by number of output side
061 F1 3C Interrupt Copy Counts by number of output side
062 F1 3D Cancel Automatic Image Rotation Counts by number of output side
063 F1 3E -
064 F1 3F -
065 F1 40 Combine Counts by number of output side
066 F1 41 Booklet Counts by number of output copy
067 F1 42 Adhesive Binding Counts by number of output copy
068 F1 43 -
069 F1 44 -
070 F1 45 -
071 F1 46 -
072 F1 47 -
073 F1 48 -
074 F1 49 -
075 F1 4A -
076 F1 4B Image Repeat Counts by number of output side
077 F1 4C Frame erasure Counts by number of output side
078 F1 4D Center Erase Counts by number of output side
079 F1 4E Centering Counts by number of output side
080 F1 4F All-image area Counts by number of output side
081 F1 50 Image shift Counts by number of output side
082 F1 51 -
083 F1 52 -
084 F1 53 -
085 F1 54 -
086 F1 55 Date/Time Stamp-Date/Time (Counts by number of output side)
087 F1 56 Page Stamp/Page No. (Counts by number of output side)
088 F1 57 Numbering Stamp Numbering (Counts by number of output
side)
089 F1 58 Set quantity 1
090 F1 59 Set Quantity 2 - 5
091 F1 5A Set Quantity 6 - 10
092 F1 5B Set quantity 11 or more
I-75

Parameter
093 F1 5C Time while power remote 1 is On Count up by periodic timer
094 F1 5D Time while power remote 2 is On Count up by periodic timer
095 F1 5E Time while power remote 3 is On Count up by periodic timer
096 F1 5F Time while power remote 4 is On Count up by periodic timer
097 F1 60 Time During Low Power Mode Time in the LOW-POWER mode. (unit: min.)
098 F1 61 Time During Warm Up Time during which the fusing heater is ON with
UNREADY status. (unit: min.)
099 F1 62 Time during which the front door is open Time during which the front door is open. (unit: min.)
100 F1 63 Ope.Time in 1side Straight Exit Accumulation of time from the start of print to the
101 F1 64 Ope.Time in 1side Reverse Exit end of print. 1 count per second. (unit: sec.) (Down
time due to jam omitted)
102 F1 65 Operation Time in 2side Print
103 F1 66 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which DF is operating.
(unit: min.)
104 F1 67 Morning Correction Counter Counts 1 per image stabilization control.
105 F1 68 Time during APS sensor On Time during which the APS sensor is ON. (unit: min.)
106 F1 69 -
107 F1 6A -
108 F1 6B N of Fold & Staple Used Jobs 1 count when Folding & Stapling job starts
109 F1 6C Fold & Staple Tri-Fold Full 1 count for each ON of fold & staple tri-fold full alarm
110 F1 6D N of ADF NF occurred Number of DF no feed detection
111 F1 6E N of ADF special error 1 occurred Number of wrong detections of original size
112 F1 6F N of ADF special error 2 occurred Number of wrong detections of next original
information
113 F1 70 N of ADF special error 3 occurred Number of errors in size for which mixed size mode
is not allowed
114 F1 71 N of Scanner Scanned Counts 1 for pressing start button in the platen mode
115 F1 72 N of Electrode Cleaned When conducting the electrode cleaning
116 F1 73 N of Memory Overflow Total count of No.124, 125, 126 and the number of
occurrences of HDD reading over flow.
117 F1 74 N of Fusing Alarm Occurred Fusing alarm is ON
118 F1 75 N of No Toner Stop Occurred All 4 colors
119 F1 76 N of AGC retry When AGC retry occurs
120 F1 77 N of Sub Scan Beam Correct Error When the sub scan beam correct error occurs
121 F1 78 N of Mis-Centering Correct Error When the centering correction time out error occurs
122 F1 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error When the ADF skew correction time out occurs
123 F1 7A N of ADF distortion data error When the ADF skew correction error occurs
124 F1 7B Compression Memory Overflow Compression Memory Overflow
125 F1 7C Page Memory Overflow(Scan) When the scan memory overflow occurs
126 F1 7D Page Memory Overflow (print) When the print memory overflow occurs
127 F1 7E FNS Alarm(Main Tray) Counts for each ON of finisher main tray alarm
128 F1 7F FNS Alarm(Staple) Counts for each ON of finisher staple alarm
129 F1 80 Saddle Stitcher Scrap Box Full Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher scrap box full
alarm
130 F1 81 N of ADF special error4 occurred Ready timeout error
131 F1 82 -
132 F1 83 -
133 F1 84 -
134 F1 85 -
135 F1 86 -
136 F1 87 -
137 F1 88 Saddle Stitcher Staple Alarm Counts for each ON of saddle stitcher staple alarm
138 F1 89 -
139 F1 8A -
140 F1 8B -
141 F1 8C -
142 F1 8D -
143 F1 8E Hole-Punch
144 F1 8F Z-Folding Counts by number of paper exit (except for GP-501)
145 F1 90 Multi Folder trash full alarm Counts by number of folding
I-76

Parameter
146 F1 91 Hold Job Number(Copy) Counts by number of each job
147 F1 92 Hold + Output Job Number(Copy)
148 F1 93 Hold Job Number(Print)
149 F1 94 Hold + Output Job Number(Print)
150 F1 95 Hold Output Job Number
151 F1 96 Hold Output Job Number(Delete)
152 F1 97 HDD Store JOB (Hold → HDD Store)
153 F1 98 HDD Store JOB read Print JOB
154 F1 99 HDD Store JOB read Hold JOB
155 F1 9A HDD Store JOB read Print + Hold JOB
156 F1 9B -
157 F1 9C -
158 F1 9D -
159 F1 9E -
160 F1 9F -
161 F1 A0 -
162 F1 A1 -
163 F1 A2 -
164 F1 A3 -
165 F1 A4 -
166 F1 A5 -
167 F1 A6 -
168 F1 A7 -
169 F1 A8 -
170 F1 A9 -
171 F1 AA -
172 F1 AB -
173 F1 AC -
174 F1 AD -
175 F1 AE -
176 F1 AF -
177 F1 B0 -
178 F1 B1 -
179 F1 B2 -
180 F1 B3 -
181 F1 B4 -
182 F1 B5 -
183 F1 B6 -
184 F1 B7 -
185 F1 B8 -
186 F1 B9 -
187 F1 BA -
188 F1 BB -
189 F1 BC Perfect Bind(Cover Blank) Counts on each mode
190 F1 BD Perfect Bind(Cover Print 1-in-1)
191 F1 BE Perfect Bind(Cover Print 2-in-1)
192 F1 BF Perfect Bind(Cover Print 3-in-1)
193 F1 C0 Perfect Binder Cover Tray mode
194 F1 C1 Perfect Bind Set Number Counts by number of copy
195 F1 C2 Perfect Bind Set(Cover Trim)
196 F1 C3 Perfect Bind Set(Cover Non-Trim)
197 F1 C4 Perfect Binder Sub Tray output Counts by number of exit paper
198 F1 C5 Perfect Binder SubCompile output
199 F1 C6 Perfect Binder Cover Tray pull-out Counts by number of time
200 F1 C7 Perfect Binder Front Door open
201 F1 C8 Stacker Cover of Perfect Binder open
202 F1 C9 -
I-77

Parameter
203 F1 CA -
204 F1 CB -
205 F1 CC -
206 F1 CD -
207 F1 CE -
208 F1 CF -
209 F1 D0 -
210 F1 D1 -
211 F1 D2 -
212 F1 D3 -
213 F1 D4 -
214 F1 D5 -
215 F1 D6 -
216 F1 D7 -
217 F1 D8 Sample Paper Counter Same count as total counter
218 F1 D9 Printer Sample Print Sheets
219 F1 DA Printer Sample Print Sheets (Large)
220 F1 DB -
221 F1 DC -
222 F1 DD Job Unit Offset Job Number Counts by number of each job
223 F1 DE Set Offset Job Number
224 F1 DF Page Offset Job Number
225 F1 E0 1Set+Page Offset Job Number
226 F1 E1 Continued Job for Next Day Counts by number of execution time
227 F1 E2 Corner Crop Mark setting Counts by number of output side
228 F1 E3 Center Crop Mark setting Counts by number of output side
229 F1 E4 Tab Paper Used Job Number Number of tab paper exiting is 1 or more
230 F1 E5 Needless Tab Paper Exit Job Number of needless tab paper exiting is 1 or more
231 F1 E6 Ticket Edit Counter Ticket Edit start
232 F1 E7 Sample Output Number Sample output in ticket edit
233 F1 E8 600dpi Print Counter Counts by number of output side
234 F1 E9 Multi Punch GP punch number (Counts by number of output
side) (not used)
235 F1 EA -
236 F1 EB -
237 F1 EC -
238 F1 ED -
239 F1 EE -
240 F1 EF -
241 F1 F0 -
242 F1 F1 -
243 F1 F2 -
244 F1 F3 -
245 F1 F4 -
246 F1 F5 -
247 F1 F6 -
248 F1 F7 -
249 F1 F8 -
250 F1 F9 -
251 F1 FA -
252 F1 FB -
253 F1 FC -
254 F1 FD -
255 F1 FE -
256 F1 FF -
5.6.9 Counter of Each Copy Mode(2)

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
I-78
Note
parameter
001 F2 00 Auto color specification, DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by
ACS
002 F2 01 Full color Counts by number of output side
003 F2 02 Black DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
004 F2 03 Single Color(Y) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
005 F2 04 Single Color(M) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
006 F2 05 Single Color(C) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
007 F2 06 Single Color(R) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
008 F2 07 Single Color(G) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
009 F2 08 Single Color(B) DIPSW12-0=1 (Counts by number of output side)
010 F2 09 ADF Thick Counts by number of output side
011 F2 0A ADF Thin Counts by number of output side
012 F2 0B Image Type: Printed Counts by number of output side
013 F2 0C Image Type: Photo Paper Counts by number of output side
014 F2 0D Image Type: Copied Counts by number of output side
015 F2 0E Image Type: Inkjet Counts by number of output side
016 F2 0F Bleed Prevention Counts by number of output side
017 F2 10 Screen: Auto Counts by number of output side
018 F2 11 Screen: Line1 Counts by number of output side
019 F2 12 Screen: Line2 Counts by number of output side
020 F2 13 Screen: Dot1 Counts by number of output side
021 F2 14 Screen: Dot2 Counts by number of output side
022 F2 15 Screen: Stochastic Counts by number of output side
023 F2 16 Glossy Counts by number of output side
024 F2 17 Density Shift Not used
025 F2 18 BackgroundRemoval Quality AdjustmentBackground Removal other than
0 specification (Counts by number of output side)
026 F2 19 Red Quality AdjustmentRed other than 0 specification
027 F2 1A Green Quality AdjustmentGreen other than 0 specification
028 F2 1B Blue Quality AdjustmentBlue other than 0 specification
029 F2 1C Hue Adjustment Quality AdjustmentHue other than 0 specification
030 F2 1D Saturation Adjustment Quality AdjustmentSaturation other than 0
specification (Counts by number of output side)
031 F2 1E Brightness Adjustment Quality AdjustmentBrightness other than 0
032 F2 1F Color Balance Adjustment Quality AdjustmentColor Balance Adjustment other
than 0 specification to any of YMCK adjustment
value (Counts by number of output side)
033 F2 20 Sharpness Adjustment Quality AdjustmentSharpness other than 0
034 F2 21 Contrast Adjustment Quality AdjustmentContrast other than 0
035 F2 22 Image Distinction Level Quality Adjustment Image Distinction other than 0
specification to one of TextPhot or Color (Counts by
036 F2 23 Paper Type: Plain Counts by number of output side
037 F2 24 Paper Type: Coated-ML Counts by number of output side
038 F2 25 Paper Type: Colored Paper Not used
039 F2 26 Paper Type: Fine Counts by number of output side
040 F2 27 Paper Type: Coated-GL Counts by number of output side
041 F2 28 Paper Type: Tab Paper Counts by number of output side
042 F2 29 Paper Type: Color Specific Counts by number of output side
043 F2 2A Paper Type: Coated-GO Counts by number of output side
044 F2 2B Paper Type: Coated-MO Counts by number of output side
I-79

parameter
045 F2 2C Paper Weight: 1 Weight Setting 64g/m2 to 74g/m2 (Counts by
046 F2 2D Paper Weight: 2 Weight Setting 75g/m2 to -80g/m2 (Counts by
047 F2 2E Paper Weight: 3 Weight Setting 81g/m2 to 105g/m2 (Counts by
048 F2 2F Paper Weight: 4 Weight Setting 106g/m2 to 135g/m2 (Counts by
049 F2 30 Paper Weight: 5 Weight Setting 136g/m2 to 162g/m2 (Counts by
054 F2 35 Main Tray: Face Up Output to FS/FD main tray and face is face up
055 F2 36 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(Y) Stop by no toner
056 F2 37 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(M) Stop by no toner
057 F2 38 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(C) Stop by no toner
058 F2 39 N of No Toner Stop Occurred(K) Stop by no toner
059 F2 3A N of Toner Recovery Box Full Detect toner recovery box full
060 F2 3B N of Color Registration Adj. Time up of 60 seconds timer
061 F2 3C N of Auto Stability Control Time up of 60 seconds timer
062 F2 3D -
063 F2 3E -
064 F2 3F -
065 F2 40 OFF Mode Time Not used
066 F2 41 -
067 F2 42 -
068 F2 43 Polygon Motor Operation Time Time up of 60 seconds timer
069 F2 44 Develop Motor Ope. Time(Color) Time up of 60 seconds timer
070 F2 45 Develop Motor Ope. Time(Black) Time up of 60 seconds timer
071 F2 46 ON Time of PCL(Color) Time up of 60 seconds timer
072 F2 47 ON Time of PCL(Black) Time up of 60 seconds timer
073 F2 48 Operation Time in Scanner Mode Time up of 60 seconds timer
074 F2 49 Time While Power(ADF) Time up of 60 seconds timer
075 F2 4A -
076 F2 4B -
077 F2 4C -
078 F2 4D Auto Y Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
079 F2 4E Auto M Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
080 F2 4F Auto C Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
081 F2 50 Auto K Toner Refresh Mode Count Time up of 60 seconds timer
082 F2 51 N of 4 Toner Refresh Performed Time up of 60 seconds timer
083 F2 52 N of MC Toner Refresh Performed Time up of 60 seconds timer
084 F2 53 -
085 F2 54 -
086 F2 55 -
087 F2 56 -
088 F2 57 Right/Left binding originals Counts by number of output side
089 F2 58 Upper binding originals Counts by number of output side
090 F2 59 Inside print multi tri-fold Counts by number of tri-folding
091 F2 5A Outside Print Multi Tri-Fold Counts by number of tri-folding
092 F2 5B Inside Print Tri-Fold-in Counts by number of tri-folding
I-80

parameter
093 F2 5C Outside Print Tri-Fold-in Counts by number of tri-folding
094 F2 5D Inside Print Tri-Fold-out Counts by number of tri-folding
095 F2 5E Outside Print Tri-Fold-out Counts by number of tri-folding
096 F2 5F Inside Print Double Parallel Counts by number of double parallel folding
097 F2 60 Outside Print Double Parallel Counts by number of double parallel folding
098 F2 61 Inside Print Gate Fold Counts by number of gate folding
099 F2 62 Outside Print Gate Fold Counts by number of gate folding
100 F2 63 Multi Half Fold Counts by number of multi half folding
101 F2 64 Inside Print Half-Fold Counts by number of half folding
102 F2 65 Outside Print Half-Fold Counts by number of half folding
103 F2 66 Main Tray Output Counts by number of output side
104 F2 67 Stacker Tray Output Counts by number of output side
105 F2 68 Stacker Pile Allow Counts by number of output side
106 F2 69 Fold & Staple Tray Output Counts by number of output side
107 F2 6A Tri-Fold Tray Output Counts by number of output side
108 F2 6B Folding Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
109 F2 6C Stacker Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
110 F2 6D Fold & Staple Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
111 F2 6E Staple Finisher Sub Tray Output Counts by number of output side
112 F2 6F Main Tray Output Job Count for each output setting
113 F2 70 Stacker Tray Output Job
114 F2 71 Fold & Staple Output Job No.
115 F2 72 Tri-Fold Tray Output Job No.
116 F2 73 Fold Sub Tray Job
117 F2 74 Stacker Sub Tray Job
118 F2 75 Fold & Staple Sub Tray Job
119 F2 76 Staple Finisher Sub Tray Job
120 F2 77 Multi Half Fold Job
121 F2 78 Inside Print Half-Fold Job
122 F2 79 Outside Print Half-Fold Job
123 F2 7A -
124 F2 7B -
125 F2 7C -
126 F2 7D -
127 F2 7E -
128 F2 7F -
129 F2 80 -
130 F2 81 -
131 F2 82 -
132 F2 83 -
133 F2 84 -
134 F2 85 -
135 F2 86 Post Inserter Count Count by the number of insert of post inserter
136 F2 87 Number of Perfect Bind (Copy) job Perfect Bind and Copy job
137 F2 88 Number of Perfect Bind (Printer) job Perfect Bind and Printer JOB
138 F2 89 Color Density Control Count by paper exit of Output Paper Density Adj.
139 F2 8A Color Density Control (L Size) Count by large size paper exit of Output Paper
Density Adj.
140 F2 8B -
141 F2 8C S.M.A.R.T(Y) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/Y rotates/
stops.
142 F2 8D S.M.A.R.T(Y) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/Y
retracts.
143 F2 8E S.M.A.R.T(Y) Reallocated Count
144 F2 8F S.M.A.R.T(Y) Power On Hours
145 F2 90 S.M.A.R.T(M) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/M
rotates/stops.
I-81

parameter
146 F2 91 S.M.A.R.T(M) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/M
retracts.
147 F2 92 S.M.A.R.T(M) Reallocated Count
148 F2 93 S.M.A.R.T(M) Power On Hours
149 F2 94 S.M.A.R.T(C) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/C
rotates/stops.
150 F2 95 S.M.A.R.T(C) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/C
retracts.
151 F2 96 S.M.A.R.T(C) Reallocated Count
152 F2 97 S.M.A.R.T(C) Power On Hours
153 F2 98 S.M.A.R.T(K) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/K rotates/
stops.
154 F2 99 S.M.A.R.T(K) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/K
retracts.
155 F2 9A S.M.A.R.T(K) Reallocated Count
156 F2 9B S.M.A.R.T(K) Power On Hours
157 F2 9C S.M.A.R.T(A) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/A rotates/
stops.
158 F2 9D S.M.A.R.T(A) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/A
retracts.
159 F2 9E S.M.A.R.T(A) Reallocated Count
160 F2 9F S.M.A.R.T(A) Power On Hours
161 F2 A0 S.M.A.R.T(P) Start/Stop Count Number of times the spindle motor of HDD/P rotates/
stops.
162 F2 A1 S.M.A.R.T(P) Load Cycle Count Number of times the magnetic head of HDD/P
retracts.
163 F2 A2 S.M.A.R.T(P) Reallocated Count
164 F2 A3 S.M.A.R.T(P) Power On Hours
165 F2 A4 -
166 F2 A5 -
167 F2 A6 -
168 F2 A7 -
169 F2 A8 -
170 F2 A9 -
171 F2 AA -
172 F2 AB -
173 F2 AC -
174 F2 AD -
175 F2 AE -
176 F2 AF -
177 F2 B0 -
178 F2 B1 -
179 F2 B2 -
180 F2 B3 -
181 F2 B4 -
182 F2 B5 -
183 F2 B6 -
184 F2 B7 -
185 F2 B8 -
186 F2 B9 -
187 F2 BA -
188 F2 BB -
189 F2 BC -
190 F2 BD -
191 F2 BE -
192 F2 BF -
193 F2 C0 -
194 F2 C1 -
195 F2 C2 -
I-82

parameter
196 F2 C3 -
197 F2 C4 -
198 F2 C5 -
199 F2 C6 -
200 F2 C7 -
201 F2 C8 -
202 F2 C9 -
203 F2 CA -
204 F2 CB -
205 F2 CC -
206 F2 CD -
207 F2 CE -
208 F2 CF -
209 F2 D0 -
210 F2 D1 -
211 F2 D2 -
212 F2 D3 -
213 F2 D4 -
214 F2 D5 -
215 F2 D6 -
216 F2 D7 -
217 F2 D8 -
218 F2 D9 -
219 F2 DA -
220 F2 DB -
221 F2 DC -
222 F2 DD -
223 F2 DE -
224 F2 DF -
225 F2 E0 -
226 F2 E1 -
227 F2 E2 -
228 F2 E3 -
229 F2 E4 -
230 F2 E5 -
231 F2 E6 -
232 F2 E7 -
233 F2 E8 -
234 F2 E9 -
235 F2 EA -
236 F2 EB -
237 F2 EC -
238 F2 ED -
239 F2 EE -
240 F2 EF -
241 F2 F0 -
242 F2 F1 -
243 F2 F2 -
244 F2 F3 -
245 F2 F4 -
256 F2 F5 -
247 F2 F6 -
248 F2 F7 -
249 F2 F8 -
250 F2 F9 -
251 F2 FA -
252 F2 FB -
I-83

parameter
253 F2 FC -
254 F2 FD -
255 F2 FE -
256 F2 FF -
5.6.10 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.
Note
• When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
No. CSRC Item
Parameter (SC Code)
001 E0 00 C-0002
002 E0 01 C-0101
003 E0 02 C-0104
004 E0 03 C-0105
005 E0 04 C-0106
006 E0 05 C-0107
007 E0 06 C-0108
008 E0 07 C-0109
009 E0 08 C-0110
010 E0 09 C-0111
011 E0 0A C-0112
012 E0 0B C-0113
013 E0 0C C-0114
014 E0 0D C-0115
015 E0 0E C-0116
016 E0 0F C-0117
017 E0 10 C-0118
018 E0 11 C-0119
019 E0 12 C-0120
020 E0 13 C-0121
021 E0 14 C-0122
022 E0 15 C-0123
023 E0 16 C-0150
024 E0 17 C-0151
025 E0 18 C-0201
026 E0 19 C-0202
027 E0 1A C-0203
028 E0 1B C-0209
029 E0 1C C-0211
030 E0 1D C-0212
031 E0 1E C-0215
032 E0 1F C-0218
033 E0 20 C-0221
034 E0 21 C-0224
035 E0 22 C-0301
036 E0 23 C-0302
037 E0 24 C-0303
038 E0 25 C-0304
039 E0 26 C-0305
040 E0 27 C-0306
041 E0 28 C-0308
042 E0 29 C-0309
043 E0 2A C-0310
044 E0 2B C-0311
045 E0 2C C-0312
046 E0 2D C-0313
I-84
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
047 E0 2E C-0314
048 E0 2F C-0315
049 E0 30 C-0316
050 E0 31 C-0317
051 E0 32 C-0318
052 E0 33 C-0319
053 E0 34 C-0320
054 E0 35 C-0321
055 E0 36 C-0322
056 E0 37 C-0323
057 E0 38 C-0324
058 E0 39 C-0325
059 E0 3A C-0326
060 E0 3B C-0327
061 E0 3C C-0328
062 E0 3D C-0329
063 E0 3E C-0330
064 E0 3F C-0331
065 E0 40 C-0332
066 E0 41 C-0333
067 E0 42 C-0334
068 E0 43 C-0335
069 E0 44 C-0336
070 E0 45 C-0337
071 E0 46 C-0338
072 E0 47 C-0339
073 E0 48 C-0340
074 E0 49 C-0341
075 E0 4A C-0401
076 E0 4B C-0402
077 E0 4C C-0405
078 E0 4D C-0406
079 E0 4E C-0407
080 E0 4F C-0408
081 E0 50 C-0409
082 E0 51 C-0410
083 E0 52 C-0411
084 E0 53 C-0412
085 E0 54 C-0413
086 E0 55 C-0414
087 E0 56 C-0415
088 E0 57 C-0416
089 E0 58 C-0417
090 E0 59 C-0418
091 E0 5A C-0419
092 E0 5B C-0420
093 E0 5C C-0421
094 E0 5D C-0422
095 E0 5E C-0423
096 E0 5F C-0424
097 E0 60 C-0450
098 E0 61 C-1005
099 E0 62 C-1006
100 E0 63 C-1007
101 E0 64 C-1008
102 E0 65 C-1009
103 E0 66 C-1010
I-85
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
104 E0 67 C-1011
105 E0 68 C-1012
106 E0 69 C-1013
107 E0 6A C-1014
108 E0 6B -
109 E0 6C -
110 E0 6D C-1101
111 E0 6E C-1102
112 E0 6F C-1103
113 E0 70 C-1104
114 E0 71 C-1105
115 E0 72 C-1106
116 E0 73 C-1107
117 E0 74 C-1108
118 E0 75 C-1109
119 E0 76 C-1110
120 E0 77 C-1111
121 E0 78 C-1112
122 E0 79 C-1113
123 E0 7A C-1114
124 E0 7B C-1115
125 E0 7C C-1116
126 E0 7D C-1124
127 E0 7E C-1125
128 E0 7F C-1126
129 E0 80 C-1127
130 E0 81 C-1132
131 E0 82 C-1137
132 E0 83 C-1138
133 E0 84 C-1139
134 E0 85 C-1140
135 E0 86 C-1141
136 E0 87 C-1142
137 E0 88 C-1143
138 E0 89 C-1144
139 E0 8A C-1145
140 E0 8B C-1146
141 E0 8C C-1147
142 E0 8D C-1148
143 E0 8E C-1201
144 E0 8F C-1202
145 E0 90 C-1203
146 E0 91 C-1204
147 E0 92 C-1205
148 E0 93 C-1206
149 E0 94 C-1211
150 E0 95 C-1212
151 E0 96 C-1213
152 E0 97 C-1214
153 E0 98 C-1215
154 E0 99 C-1216
155 E0 9A C-1221
156 E0 9B C-1222
157 E0 9C C-1223
158 E0 9D C-1224
159 E0 9E C-1225
160 E0 9F C-1226
I-86
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
161 E0 A0 C-1227
162 E0 A1 C-1228
163 E0 A2 C-1229
164 E0 A3 C-1230
165 E0 A4 C-1231
166 E0 A5 C-1232
167 E0 A6 C-1233
168 E0 A7 C-1234
169 E0 A8 C-1235
170 E0 A9 C-1241
171 E0 AA C-1242
172 E0 AB C-1243
173 E0 AC C-1244
174 E0 AD C-1245
175 E0 AE C-1246
176 E0 AF C-1247
177 E0 B0 C-1248
178 E0 B1 C-1249
179 E0 B2 C-1250
180 E0 B3 C-1251
181 E0 B4 C-1252
182 E0 B5 C-1253
183 E0 B6 C-1254
184 E0 B7 C-1255
185 E0 B8 C-1256
186 E0 B9 C-1257
187 E0 BA C-1258
188 E0 BB C-1259
189 E0 BC C-1260
190 E0 BD C-1261
191 E0 BE C-1262
192 E0 BF C-1263
193 E0 C0 C-1264
194 E0 C1 C-1265
195 E0 C2 C-1266
196 E0 C3 C-1267
197 E0 C4 C-1268
198 E0 C5 C-1269
199 E0 C6 C-1270
200 E0 C7 C-1271
201 E0 C8 C-1272
202 E0 C9 C-1273
203 E0 CA C-1274
204 E0 CB C-1275
205 E0 CC C-1281
206 E0 CD C-1282
207 E0 CE C-1290
208 E0 CF C-1291
209 E0 D0 C-1292
210 E0 D1 C-1293
211 E0 D2 C-1294
212 E0 D3 C-1295
213 E0 D4 C-1296
214 E0 D5 C-1297
215 E0 D6 C-1289
216 E0 D7 C-1299
217 E0 D8 C-1301
I-87
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
218 E0 D9 C-1302
219 E0 DA C-1303
220 E0 DB C-1304
221 E0 DC C-1305
222 E0 DD C-1306
223 E0 DE C-1307
224 E0 DF C-1308
225 E0 E0 C-1309
226 E0 E1 C-1310
227 E0 E2 C-1311
228 E0 E3 C-1321
229 E0 E4 C-1322
230 E0 E5 C-1323
231 E0 E6 C-1324
232 E0 E7 C-1325
233 E0 E8 C-1330
234 E0 E9 C-1331
235 E0 EA C-1332
236 E0 EB C-1333
237 E0 EC C-1334
238 E0 ED C-1341
239 E0 EE C-1342
240 E0 EF C-1351
241 E0 F0 C-1352
242 E0 F1 C-1353
243 E0 F2 C-1354
244 E0 F3 C-1355
245 E0 F4 C-1356
246 E0 F5 C-1357
247 E0 F6 C-1358
248 E0 F7 C-1359
249 E0 F8 C-1360
250 E0 F9 C-1361
251 E0 FA C-1364
252 E0 FB C-1402
253 E0 FC C-1403
254 E0 FD C-1404
255 E0 FE C-1405
256 E0 FF C-1406
257 E1 00 C-1407
258 E1 01 C-1408
259 E1 02 C-1411
260 E1 03 C-1431
261 E1 04 C-1432
262 E1 05 C-1433
263 E1 06 C-1434
264 E1 07 C-1435
265 E1 08 C-1436
266 E1 09 C-1437
267 E1 0A C-1438
268 E1 0B C-1439
269 E1 0C C-1440
270 E1 0D C-1441
271 E1 0E C-1451
272 E1 0F C-1452
273 E1 10 C-1453
274 E1 11 C-1454
I-88
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
275 E1 12 C-1455
276 E1 13 C-1456
277 E1 14 -
278 E1 15 -
279 E1 16 -
280 E1 17 -
281 E1 18 -
282 E1 19 -
283 E1 1A -
284 E1 1B -
285 E1 1C C-1499
286 E1 1D C-1501
287 E1 1E C-1502
288 E1 1F C-1504
289 E1 20 C-1505
290 E1 21 C-1506
291 E1 22 C-1507
292 E1 23 C-1508
293 E1 24 C-1509
294 E1 25 C-1510
295 E1 26 C-1511
296 E1 27 C-1512
297 E1 28 C-1513
298 E1 29 C-1514
299 E1 2A C-1515
300 E1 2B C-1516
301 E1 2C C-1517
302 E1 2D C-1518
303 E1 2E C-1519
304 E1 2F C-1520
305 E1 30 C-1521
306 E1 31 C-1522
307 E1 32 C-1523
308 E1 33 C-1524
309 E1 34 C-1525
310 E1 35 C-1526
311 E1 36 C-1527
312 E1 37 C-1528
313 E1 38 C-1530
314 E1 39 C-1531
315 E1 3A C-1532
316 E1 3B C-1534
317 E1 3C C-1537
318 E1 3D C-1538
319 E1 3E C-1540
320 E1 3F C-1541
321 E1 40 C-1542
322 E1 41 C-1543
323 E1 42 C-1544
324 E1 43 C-1545
325 E1 44 C-1546
326 E1 45 C-1547
327 E1 46 C-1548
328 E1 47 C-1549
329 E1 48 C-1550
330 E1 49 C-1551
331 E1 4A C-1552
I-89
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
332 E1 4B C-1553
333 E1 4C C-1554
334 E1 4D C-1555
335 E1 4E C-1556
336 E1 4F C-1557
337 E1 50 C-1558
338 E1 51 C-1559
339 E1 52 C-1560
340 E1 53 C-1561
341 E1 54 C-1562
342 E1 55 C-1565
343 E1 56 C-1566
344 E1 57 C-1567
345 E1 58 -
346 E1 59 -
347 E1 5A -
348 E1 5B -
349 E1 5C -
350 E1 5D -
351 E1 5E -
352 E1 5F -
353 E1 60 -
354 E1 61 -
355 E1 62 -
356 E1 63 -
357 E1 64 -
358 E1 65 -
359 E1 66 -
360 E1 67 -
361 E1 68 -
362 E1 69 -
363 E1 6A -
364 E1 6B -
365 E1 6C -
366 E1 6D -
367 E1 6E -
368 E1 6F -
369 E1 70 -
370 E1 71 -
371 E1 72 -
372 E1 73 -
373 E1 74 -
374 E1 75 -
375 E1 76 -
376 E1 77 -
377 E1 78 -
378 E1 79 -
379 E1 7A -
380 E1 7B -
381 E1 7C -
382 E1 7D -
383 E1 7E -
384 E1 7F -
385 E1 80 -
386 E1 81 -
387 E1 82 -
388 E1 83 -
I-90
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
389 E1 84 -
390 E1 85 -
391 E1 86 -
392 E1 87 -
393 E1 88 -
394 E1 89 -
395 E1 8A -
396 E1 8B -
397 E1 8C C-2001
398 E1 8D C-2002
399 E1 8E C-2201
400 E1 8F C-2202
401 E1 90 C-2203
402 E1 91 C-2204
403 E1 92 C-2211
404 E1 93 C-2212
405 E1 94 C-2213
406 E1 95 C-2214
407 E1 96 C-2220
408 E1 97 C-2221
409 E1 98 C-2222
410 E1 99 C-2223
411 E1 9A C-2224
412 E1 9B C-2225
413 E1 9C C-2226
414 E1 9D C-2227
415 E1 9E C-2228
416 E1 9F C-2229
417 E1 A0 C-2230
418 E1 A1 C-2231
419 E1 A2 C-2232
420 E1 A3 C-2233
421 E1 A4 C-2234
422 E1 A5 C-2235
423 E1 A6 C-2302
424 E1 A7 C-2303
425 E1 A8 C-2304
426 E1 A9 C-2305
427 E1 AA C-2306
428 E1 AB C-2307
429 E1 AC C-2308
430 E1 AD C-2309
431 E1 AE C-2310
432 E1 AF C-2401
433 E1 B0 C-2402
434 E1 B1 C-2403
435 E1 B2 C-2404
436 E1 B3 C-2411
437 E1 B4 C-2412
438 E1 B5 C-2413
439 E1 B6 C-2414
440 E1 B7 C-2421
441 E1 B8 C-2422
442 E1 B9 C-2423
443 E1 BA C-2424
444 E1 BB C-2431
445 E1 BC C-2432
I-91
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
446 E1 BD C-2433
447 E1 BE C-2434
448 E1 BF C-2441
449 E1 C0 C-2442
450 E1 C1 C-2443
451 E1 C2 C-2444
452 E1 C3 C-2451
453 E1 C4 C-2452
454 E1 C5 C-2453
455 E1 C6 C-2454
456 E1 C7 C-2461
457 E1 C8 C-2462
458 E1 C9 C-2463
459 E1 CA C-2464
460 E1 CB C-2470
461 E1 CC C-2701
462 E1 CD C-2702
463 E1 CE C-2703
464 E1 CF C-2704
465 E1 D0 C-2711
466 E1 D1 C-2712
467 E1 D2 C-2713
468 E1 D3 C-2714
469 E1 D4 C-2720
470 E1 D5 C-2721
471 E1 D6 C-2731
472 E1 D7 C-2732
473 E1 D8 C-2733
474 E1 D9 C-2734
475 E1 DA C-2740
476 E1 DB C-2741
477 E1 DC C-2742
478 E1 DD C-2743
479 E1 DE C-2744
480 E1 DF C-2751
481 E1 E0 C-2752
482 E1 E1 C-2753
483 E1 E2 C-2754
484 E1 E3 C-2801
485 E1 E4 C-2802
486 E1 E5 C-2803
487 E1 E6 C-2804
488 E1 E7 C-2811
489 E1 E8 C-2812
490 E1 E9 C-2813
491 E1 EA C-2814
492 E1 EB C-2821
493 E1 EC C-2822
494 E1 ED C-2823
495 E1 EE C-2824
496 E1 EF C-2831
497 E1 F0 C-2832
498 E1 F1 C-2833
499 E1 F2 C-2834
500 E1 F3 C-2840
501 E1 F4 C-2841
502 E1 F5 C-2851
I-92
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
503 E1 F6 C-2852
504 E1 F7 C-2853
505 E1 F8 C-2861
506 E1 F9 C-2862
507 E1 FA C-2863
508 E1 FB C-2871
509 E1 FC C-2872
510 E1 FD C-2873
511 E1 FE C-2881
512 E1 FF C-2882
513 E2 00 C-2883
514 E2 01 C-2884
515 E2 02 C-2891
516 E2 03 C-2892
517 E2 04 C-2893
518 E2 05 C-2894
519 E2 06 C-3101
520 E2 07 C-3102
521 E2 08 C-3103
522 E2 09 C-3104
523 E2 0A C-3105
524 E2 0B C-3106
525 E2 0C C-3107
526 E2 0D C-3108
527 E2 0E C-3109
528 E2 0F C-3110
529 E2 10 C-3111
530 E2 11 C-3150
531 E2 12 C-3151
532 E2 13 C-3152
533 E2 14 C-3153
534 E2 15 C-3154
535 E2 16 C-3302
536 E2 17 C-3303
537 E2 18 C-3304
538 E2 19 C-3305
539 E2 1A C-3306
540 E2 1B C-3311
541 E2 1C C-3312
542 E2 1D C-3313
543 E2 1E C-3314
544 E2 1F C-3315
545 E2 20 C-3501
546 E2 21 C-3502
547 E2 22 C-3503
548 E2 23 C-3504
549 E2 24 C-3505
550 E2 25 C-3506
551 E2 26 C-3507
552 E2 27 C-3508
553 E2 28 C-3509
554 E2 29 C-3510
555 E2 2A C-3511
556 E2 2B C-3512
557 E2 2C C-3513
558 E2 2D C-3520
559 E2 2E C-3550
I-93
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
560 E2 2F C-3551
561 E2 30 C-3552
562 E2 31 C-3553
563 E2 32 C-3554
564 E2 33 C-3555
565 E2 34 C-3556
566 E2 35 C-3557
567 E2 36 C-3558
568 E2 37 C-3559
569 E2 38 C-3560
570 E2 39 C-3561
571 E2 3A C-3570
572 E2 3B C-3801
573 E2 3C C-3802
574 E2 3D C-3803
575 E2 3E C-3804
576 E2 3F C-3805
577 E2 40 C-3850
578 E2 41 C-3851
579 E2 42 C-3852
580 E2 43 C-3853
581 E2 44 C-3854
582 E2 45 C-3855
583 E2 46 C-3856
584 E2 47 C-3857
585 E2 48 C-3858
586 E2 49 C-3859
587 E2 4A C-3901
588 E2 4B C-3902
589 E2 4C C-3903
590 E2 4D C-3904
591 E2 4E C-3905
592 E2 4F C-3906
593 E2 50 C-3907
594 E2 51 C-3908
595 E2 52 C-3909
596 E2 53 C-3910
597 E2 54 C-3911
598 E2 55 C-3912
599 E2 56 C-3913
600 E2 57 C-3914
601 E2 58 C-3915
602 E2 59 C-3916
603 E2 5A C-3917
604 E2 5B C-3918
605 E2 5C C-3919
606 E2 5D C-3920
607 E2 5E C-3921
608 E2 5F C-3950
609 E2 60 C-3951
610 E2 61 C-3952
611 E2 62 C-3953
612 E2 63 C-3954
613 E2 64 C-3955
614 E2 65 C-3956
615 E2 66 C-3957
616 E2 67 C-3958
I-94
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
617 E2 68 C-3959
618 E2 69 C-3960
619 E2 6A C-3961
620 E2 6B C-3962
621 E2 6C C-3964
622 E2 6D C-3965
623 E2 6E C-3967
624 E2 6F C-4101
625 E2 70 C-4102
626 E2 71 C-4103
627 E2 72 C-4104
628 E2 73 C-4120
629 E2 74 C-4302
630 E2 75 C-4401
631 E2 76 C-4402
632 E2 77 C-4403
633 E2 78 C-4411
634 E2 79 C-4412
635 E2 7A C-4420
636 E2 7B C-4501
637 E2 7C C-4502
638 E2 7D C-4503
639 E2 7E C-4504
640 E2 7F C-4511
641 E2 80 C-4512
642 E2 81 C-4513
643 E2 82 C-4514
644 E2 83 C-4520
645 E2 84 C-4521
646 E2 85 C-4522
647 E2 86 C-4523
648 E2 87 C-4531
649 E2 88 C-4532
650 E2 89 C-4533
651 E2 8A C-4534
652 E2 8B C-4541
653 E2 8C C-4542
654 E2 8D C-4543
655 E2 8E C-4544
656 E2 8F C-4545
657 E2 90 C-4546
658 E2 91 C-4547
659 E2 92 C-4548
660 E2 93 C-4601
661 E2 94 C-4602
662 E2 95 C-4603
663 E2 96 C-4604
664 E2 97 C-4611
665 E2 98 C-4612
666 E2 99 C-4613
667 E2 9A C-4614
668 E2 9B C-4621
669 E2 9C C-4622
670 E2 9D C-4623
671 E2 9E C-4624
672 E2 9F C-4631
673 E2 A0 C-4632
I-95
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
674 E2 A1 C-4633
675 E2 A2 C-4634
676 E2 A3 C-4641
677 E2 A4 C-4642
678 E2 A5 C-4643
679 E2 A6 C-4644
680 E2 A7 C-4651
681 E2 A8 C-4652
682 E2 A9 C-4653
683 E2 AA C-4654
684 E2 AB C-4661
685 E2 AC C-4662
686 E2 AD C-4663
687 E2 AE C-4701
688 E2 AF C-4702
689 E2 B0 C-4703
690 E2 B1 C-4705
691 E2 B2 C-4706
692 E2 B3 C-4708
693 E2 B4 C-4709
694 E2 B5 C-4713
695 E2 B6 C-4714
696 E2 B7 C-4715
697 E2 B8 C-4716
698 E2 B9 C-4717
699 E2 BA C-4718
700 E2 BB C-4719
701 E2 BC C-4720
702 E2 BD C-4721
703 E2 BE C-4722
704 E2 BF C-4723
705 E2 C0 C-4724
706 E2 C1 C-4725
707 E2 C2 C-4840
708 E2 C3 C-4850
709 E2 C4 C-5001
710 E2 C5 C-5002
711 E2 C6 C-5003
712 E2 C7 C-5004
713 E2 C8 C-5005
714 E2 C9 C-5006
715 E2 CA C-5007
716 E2 CB C-5010
717 E2 CC C-5012
718 E2 CD C-5013
719 E2 CE C-5014
720 E2 CF C-5015
721 E2 D0 C-5016
722 E2 D1 C-5017
723 E2 D2 C-5018
724 E2 D3 C-5019
725 E2 D4 C-5020
726 E2 D5 C-5021
727 E2 D6 C-5022
728 E2 D7 C-5023
729 E2 D8 C-5024
730 E2 D9 C-5025
I-96
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
731 E2 DA C-5100
732 E2 DB C-5101
733 E2 DC C-5102
734 E2 DD C-5103
735 E2 DE C-5104
736 E2 DF C-5105
737 E2 E0 C-5106
738 E2 E1 C-5107
739 E2 E2 C-5108
740 E2 E3 C-5109
741 E2 E4 C-5121
742 E2 E5 C-5137
743 E2 E6 C-5301
744 E2 E7 C-5302
745 E2 E8 C-5303
746 E2 E9 C-5304
747 E2 EA C-6101
748 E2 EB C-6102
749 E2 EC C-6301
750 E2 ED C-6701
751 E2 EE C-6702
752 E2 EF C-6703
753 E2 F0 C-6704
754 E2 F1 C-6705
755 E2 F2 C-6706
756 E2 F3 C-6707
757 E2 F4 C-6708
758 E2 F5 C-6709
759 E2 F6 C-6710
760 E2 F7 C-6711
761 E2 F8 C-6712
762 E2 F9 C-6713
763 E2 FA C-6714
764 E2 FB C-6715
765 E2 FC C-6716
766 E2 FD C-6717
767 E2 FE C-6718
768 E3 FF C-6719
769 E3 00 C-6720
770 E3 01 C-6721
771 E3 02 C-6722
772 E3 03 C-6723
773 E3 04 C-6724
774 E3 05 C-6725
775 E3 06 C-6801
776 E3 07 C-7001
777 E3 08 C-8001
778 E3 09 C-8101
779 E3 0A C-8102
780 E3 0B C-8103
781 E3 0C C-8401
782 E3 0D C-8402
783 E3 0E C-8403
784 E3 0F C-8404
785 E3 10 C-8405
786 E3 11 C-8406
787 E3 12 C-8407
I-97
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
788 E3 13 C-C101
789 E3 14 C-C102
790 E3 15 C-C103
791 E3 16 C-C104
792 E3 17 C-C106
793 E3 18 C-C107
794 E3 19 C-C108
795 E3 1A C-C109
796 E3 1B C-C111
797 E3 1C C-C112
798 E3 1D C-C113
799 E3 1E C-C114
800 E3 1F C-C115
801 E3 20 C-C116
802 E3 21 C-C117
803 E3 22 C-C118
804 E3 23 C-C119
805 E3 24 C-C120
806 E3 25 C-C201
807 E3 26 C-C211
808 E3 27 C-C212
809 E3 28 C-C213
810 E3 29 C-C214
811 E3 2A C-C215
812 E3 2B C-C216
813 E3 2C C-C217
814 E3 2D C-C218
815 E3 2E C-C219
816 E3 2F C-C220
817 E3 30 C-C221
818 E3 31 C-C222
819 E3 32 C-D0E0
820 E3 33 C- D0E1
821 E3 34 C- D0E2
822 E3 35 C- D0E3
823 E3 36 C- D0E4
824 E3 37 C- D0E5
825 E3 38 C- D0E6
826 E3 39 C- D0E7
827 E3 3A C- D0E8
828 E3 3B C- D0EF
829 E3 3C C-D0F0
830 E3 3D C-E001
831 E3 3E C-E002
832 E3 3F C-E003
833 E3 40 C-E004
834 E3 41 C-E005
835 E3 42 C-E006
836 E3 43 C-E007
837 E3 44 C-E008
838 E3 45 -
839 E3 46 -
840 E3 47 -
841 E3 48 -
842 E3 49 -
843 E3 4A -
844 E3 4B -
I-98
No. CSRC Item

Parameter (SC Code)
845 E3 4C -
846 E3 4D -
847 E3 4E -
848 E3 4F -
849 E3 50 -
850 E3 51 -
851 E3 52 -
852 E3 53 -
853 E3 54 -
854 E3 55 -
855 E3 56 -
856 E3 57 -
857 E3 58 -
858 E3 59 -
859 E3 5A -
860 E3 5B -
861 E3 5C -
862 E3 5D -
863 E3 5E -
864 E3 5F -
865 E3 60 -
866 E3 61 -
867 E3 62 -
868 E3 63 -
869 E3 64 -
870 E3 65 -
871 E3 66 -
872 E3 67 -
873 E3 68 -
874 E3 69 -
875 E3 6A -
876 E3 6B -
877 E3 6C -
878 E3 6D -
879 E3 6E -
880 E3 6F -
881 E3 70 -
882 E3 71 -
883 E3 72 -
884 E3 73 -
885 E3 74 -
886 E3 75 -
887 E3 76 -
888 E3 77 -
889 E3 78 -
890 E3 79 -
891 E3 7A -
892 E3 7B -
893 E3 7C -
894 E3 7D -
895 E3 7E -
896 E3 7F -
897 E3 80 -
898 E3 81 -
899 E3 82 -
900 E3 83 -
I-99
5.6.11 SC data of time series

For the latest 20 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
5.6.12 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
• Item
• Reset Date
• Maintenance Counter
• Maintenance Limit Data
• Counter Average
• Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
5.6.13 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history is displayed.
• Item
• No.
(Number of the special parts counter)
• Parts Name
• P/N
• Counter/Limit
• Replacement Count
• ORU
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [14 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
I-100
5.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
(2) Specifications
Item
• Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start/End date and time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
• Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Transport
Trouble/JAM)
• Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average
Maximum storable number
• The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When replacing 4 units at a maintenance, the data of latest 25 maintenances can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 item to be stored) + 4 units replaced (4 items to be stored) = 5 items to be stored
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (PM, CM (image quality), CM (machine broken))
• The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time from when entering the ORU-M replacement screen to when exiting it.
Up to 50 data (time taken for replacement and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that
are stored as averaged value.
(3) ORU=M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
I-101
[1] [2]
[1] Information of ORU-M total maintenance history: [2] ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
5.6.15 RFID Information

(1) RFID
The following units are provided with special IC tag memory (hereafter, referred to as RFID memory).
• 2nd transfer unit
• Intermediate transfer unit
• Fusing unit
• 2nd fusing unit
Each RFID memory stores unique unit serial number, counted number for each part and so on.
When the maintenance target unit is RFID corresponding, CE replaces only the parts which require to be replaced and then write the
maintenance information into the RFID memory.
Note
• Write the data from PC using the dedicated jig. (Refer to E.1.7 Management Tool)
Refering to the RFID memory, CE can recognize that the parts replacements by the customers are performed via the main body control. CE
can also check respectively the replacement history and maintenace counter of each part of the unit, and so on.
Note
• Up to 3 RFID corresponding units are connectable to a main body.
(2) RFID Information display

1. "RFID Information screen"
Select each setting item and press [Information View].
• Parts: Select the target unit.
• Unit: Select the target unit when several units are used.
The mark "▲" indicates the unit currently used.
• View Object: Select the display item.
• [Basic Information]
I-102
Unit Serial Number, Unit Counter, Replacement Count, Replacement Date, Main Body Serial Number
• [Parts Counter Info.]
Parts Name, Status (Need to Replace/No Need to Replace), Replacement Count, Counter
5.6.16 Checking, setting and resetting procedure of the Special Parts Counter
Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter].
4. "Special Parts Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages and check the counter.
5. To reset the counter, press [▼] or [▲] to select the target item.
6. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen"
5.6.17 Special Parts Counter

Note
• Be sure to reset the parts counter after replacing any parts listed below. Otherwise, image failure or jam may occur.
1. Dust proof filters /A, /B and /C: No.003 to 008 Dust-proof Filter/A (Right Side), /B (Rear Side), /C (Left Side), /C (Rear Side1), /C
(Rear Side2) and /C (Rear Side3)
2. Charging coronas /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.013 to 020 Charging Corona/Y, /M, /C and /K
3. Drum cartridges /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.021 to 028 Drum Cartridge/Y, /M, /C and /K
4. Developers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.041 to 048 Developer/Y, /M, /C and /K
5. Transfer belt cleaning blade: No.059 to 062 Belt Cleaning Blade
6. 1st transfer rollers /Y, /M, /C and /K: No.063 to 066 1st Transfer Roller/Y, /M, /C and /K
7. Fusing web unit: No82, 83 Fusing Web Unit
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
No. CSRC Parts name Parts No. Count conditions
parameter
001 Z1 00 Toner collect box A1RFA366 *1
The waste toner full sensor (PS48) detects the
limit automatically.
002 Z1 01 Ozone filter A1RF1144 *1
003 Z1 02 Dust-proof Filter/A (Right) (%) A1RFE121 Counted for each color with the combination of
004 Z1 03 Dust-proof Filter/B (Rear) (%) A1RFB175 print coverage, drive distance of the
developing roller, humidity, and so on. Shows
005 Z1 04 Dust-proof filter /C (Left) (%) A1RFB171 the count in percentage with respect to the end
006 Z1 05 Dust-proof Filter /C (Rear1) (%) A1RFB171 of its parts life.
007 Z1 06 Dust-proof Filter/C (Rear2) (%) A1RFB171 The counters No.002 to 008 are reset
simultaneously.
008 Z1 07 Dust-proof Filter/C (Rear3) (%) A1RFB171
009 Z1 08 Developing Cooling Filter/Y A1RFC423 *1
010 Z1 09 Developing Cooling Filter/M A1RFC423 The counters No.009 to 012 are reset
simultaneously.
011 Z1 0A Developing Cooling Filter/C A1RFC423
012 Z1 0B Developing Cooling Filter/K A1RFC423
013 Z1 0C Charging Corona/Y(Page) A1RFA460 *2
When counting by number of pages
Resetting this counter also resets No.014.
014 Z1 0D Charging Corona/Y(Time %) A1RFA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count
in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
015 Z1 0E Charging Corona/M(Page) A1RFA460 *2
016 Z1 0F Charging Corona/M(Time %) A1RFA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
017 Z1 10 Charging Corona/C(Page) A1RFA460 *2
I-103

parameter
018 Z1 11 Charging Corona/C(Time %) A1RFA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
019 Z1 12 Charging Corona/K(Page) A1RFA460 *1
020 Z1 13 Charging Corona/K(Time %) A1RFA460 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
021 Z1 14 Drum Unit/Y(Page) A1RFA330 *2
Resetting this counter also resets No.022, 029,
030, 031.
022 Z1 15 Drum Unit/Y(Distance%) A1RFA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
that of the Lubricant applying roller and shows
the larger count number in percentage with
respect to the end of its parts life.
030, 031.
023 Z1 16 Drum Unit/M(Page) A1RFA330 *2
033, 034.
024 Z1 17 Drum Unit/M(Distance%) A1RFA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
033, 034.
025 Z1 18 Drum Unit/C(Page) A1RFA330 *2
036, 037.
026 Z1 19 Drum Unit/C(Distance%) A1RFA330 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
036, 037.
027 Z1 1A Drum Unit/K(Page) A03UA331 *1
039, 040.
028 Z1 1B Drum Unit/C(Distance%) A03UA331 Compares the drive distance of the drum with
039, 040.
029 Z1 1C Dis-elec. Pole/Y(Page) A1RFB334 When counting by number of pages
Resetting this counter also resets No.030 and
No.031.
030 Z1 1D Dis-elec. Pole/Y(Time %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging time and shows the
count in percentage with respect to the end of
its parts life.
No.031.
031 Z1 1E Dis-elec. Pole/Y(Distance %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging distance (time x speed)
and shows the count in percentage with
No.030.
032 Z1 1F Dis-elec. Pole/M(Page) A1RFB334 When counting by number of pages
No.034.
033 Z1 20 Dis-elec. Pole/M(Time %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging time and shows the
its parts life.
I-104

parameter
No.034.
034 Z1 21 Dis-elec. Pole/M(Distance %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging distance (time x speed)
No.033.
035 Z1 22 Dis-elec. Pole/C(Page) A1RFB334 When counting by number of pages
No.037.
036 Z1 23 Dis-elec. Pole/C(Time %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging time and shows the
its parts life.
No.037.
037 Z1 24 Dis-elec. Pole/C(Distance %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging distance (time x speed)
No.036.
038 Z1 25 Dis-elec. Pole/K(Page) A1RFB334 When counting by number of pages
No.040.
039 Z1 26 Dis-elec. Pole/K(Time %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging time and shows the
its parts life.
No.040.
040 Z1 27 Dis-elec. Pole/K(Distance %) A1RFB334 Counts the discharging distance (time x speed)
No.039.
041 Z1 28 Developer/Y(Page) A1DYT700 *2
042 Z1 29 Developer/Y(Distance %) A1DYT700 Counts the drive distance of the developing
roller and shows the count in percentage with
043 Z1 2A Developer/M(Page) A1DYT800 *2
044 Z1 2B Developer/M(Distance %) A1DYT800 Counts the drive distance of the developing
045 Z1 2C Developer/C(Page) A1DYT900 *2
046 Z1 2D Developer/C(Distance %) A1DYT900 Counts the drive distance of the developing
047 Z1 2E Developer/K(Page) A1DYT600 *1
048 Z1 2F Developer/K(Distance %) A1DYT600 Counts the drive distance of the developing
049 Z1 30 Developing Unit/Y(Page) A1RFA370 *2
When counting by number of pages.
050 Z1 31 Developing Unit/Y(Distance %) A1RFA370 Counts the travel distance and shows the
its parts life.
051 Z1 32 Developing Unit/M(Page) A1RFA370 *2
I-105

parameter
052 Z1 33 Developing Unit/M(Distance %) A1RFA370 Counts the travel distance and shows the
its parts life.
053 Z1 34 Developing Unit/C(Page) A1DUB380 *2
054 Z1 35 Developing Unit/C(Distance %) A1DUB380 Counts the travel distance and shows the
its parts life.
055 Z1 36 Developing Unit/K(Page) A1RFA370 *1
056 Z1 37 Developing Unit/K(Distance %) A1RFA370 Counts the travel distance and shows the
its parts life.
057 Z1 38 Intermediate transfer unit A1RFA500 *1
058 Z1 39 Intermediate transfer belt A1RF5001 *1
059 Z1 3A Transfer belt cleaning unit A1RFB506 *1
Resetting this counter also resets No.060 to
062, No. 189 and No.190.
060 Z1 3B Transfer toner recovery sheet 65AA-293 *1
061 Z1 3C Belt Cleaning Blade(Page) A1RF5106 *1
062 Z1 3D Belt Cleaning Blade(Distance %) A1RF5106 Counts the drive distance of the transfer belt
063 Z1 3E 1st transfer roller /Y A03U5012 *2
064 Z1 3F 1st transfer roller /M A03U5012
065 Z1 40 1st Transfer Roller/C A03U5012
066 Z1 41 1st Transfer Roller/K A03U5004 *1
067 Z1 42 - -
068 Z1 43 2nd transfer roller /Up A1RF5004 *1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
distance are reset simultaneously.
069 Z1 44 Transfer Belt Separation Claw 65AA-287 *1
070 Z1 45 Transfer Roller Bearing 65AA2638 *1
071 Z1 46 2nd transfer unit A1RFA520 *1
072 Z1 47 Transfer belt A1RF5204 *1
The nonvolatile powered time and the slide
distance are reset simultaneously.
073 Z1 48 2nd Transfer Cleaning Unit(Page) A1RF5211 *1
The counter No.074 is reset simultaneously.
074 Z1 49 2ndTrans.Cleaning Unit(Distance%) A1RF5211 Counts the drive distance by multiplying the
coefficient according to the environmental
temperature and shows the count in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
075 Z1 4A 2nd Transfer Separation Discharging A1RFB523 *1
The nonvolatile powered time is reset
simultaneously.
076 Z1 4B 2nd Transfer Entrance Guide/Top A1RFC538 *1
077 Z1 4C Transfer belt cleaning unit A1RFB531 *1
The counters No.073, and No.074 are reset
simultaneously.
078 Z1 4D 2nd transfer unit A1RFC520 *1
The counters No.072, No.136 and No.138 are
reset simultaneously.
I-106

parameter
079 Z1 4E 2nd Transfer Earth Plate/1 A1RFC522 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
mode, 2 counts in the double side mode.
080 Z1 4F 2nd Transfer Earth Plate/2 A1RFC523 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
081 Z1 50 Fusing unit Japan A1RFA72A *1
North America
A1RFA72E
Europe A1RFA72F
082 Z1 51 Fusing Web Unit(Page) A1RFB775 *1
083 Z1 52 Fusing Web Unit(Time %) A1RFB775 Counts the drive time and shows the count in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
084 Z1 53 Fusing Out Heat Assembly A1RFB785 *1
085 Z1 54 Fusing Oscillating Axis Assembly A1RFA752 *1
086 Z1 55 Fusing Paper Exit Guide Assembly A1RFA773 *1
087 Z1 56 Fusing Belt A1RFA780 *1
088 Z1 57 Fusing Roller Assembly A1RFA800 *1
089 Z1 58 Fusing Separation Claw Unit A1RFA774 *1
090 Z1 59 Fusing Web Torque Limiter A1RF7239 *1
091 Z1 5A Fusing Web Prevention Part A1RF7240 *1
092 Z1 5B Fusing Paper Exit Roller/Bottom A1RF7517 *1
093 Z1 5C Fusing Refresh Roller Assembly A1RFB754 *1
094 Z1 5D Fusing Drive Assembly A1RFA7F2 *1
095 Z1 5E Fusing Temp. Sensor(Out Heat) A1RFB793 *1
096 Z1 5F Fusing Temp. Sensor(U-Belt) A1RFA751 *1
097 Z1 60 Fusing Temp. Sensor(Fus.Roller) A1RFB750 *1
098 Z1 61 Fusing heater/1 A1RFM31A (Japan) *1
A1RFM31E (North
America)
A1RFM31F (Europe)
A1RFM34E (North
America)
A1RFM34F (Europe)
A1RFM35E (North
America)
A1RFM35F (Europe)
101 Z1 64 Fusing Paper Exit Actuator Ass. A1RFA776 *1
102 Z1 65 Fusing Web Motor Assembly A1RFB753 *1
103 Z1 66 Int. Separation Claw Solenoid 55VA8255 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
104 Z1 67 Sensor shutter A1RFD346 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
105 Z1 68 Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray1) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
106 Z1 69 Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray2) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2
107 Z1 6A Feed/Separation Rubber(Tray3) 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from Tray3
108 Z1 6B - -
109 Z1 6C Pick Up Roller (Tray1) 56AA-458 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
110 Z1 6D Pick Up Roller (Tray2) 56AA-458 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2
111 Z1 6E Pick Up Roller (Tray3) 56AA-458 1 count for each paper exit from Tray3
112 Z1 6F - -
113 Z1 70 Paper Feed Clutch(Tray3) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
116 Z1 73 Loop Roller Cleaning A1RFC711 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
117 Z1 74 Pre-regist. Clutch(Tray1) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray1
I-107

parameter
120 Z1 77 Vert. Transport Clutch/2(Tray2/3) A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray2 or
Tray3
121 Z1 78 Vert. Transport Clutch/1(Tray3) A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit from Tray3 in the
simplex mode, 2 count in the duplex mode
122 Z1 79 Registration Cleaning Sheet A1RFA714 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
123 Z1 7A Registration Roller 65LA-464 1 count for each paper exit in the single side
124 Z1 7B Int. Transport Roller Cleaning A1RFC811 1 count for each paper exit.
125 Z1 7C Int. Trans. Roller Clean Brush A1RFD813 1 count for each paper exit.
126 Z1 7D ADU Transport Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
(Not counted in the simplex mode)
127 Z1 7E Intermediate Transport Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit.
128 Z1 7F De-curler roller A1RF8605 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
129 Z1 80 MainBody Paper Exit DrivenRoller A1RF8950 1 count for each paper exit.
130 Z1 81 Exit Conveyance Driven Roller A1RF8950 1 count for each paper exit.
131 Z1 82 Exposure On Time A03UM301 Accumulation of time lamp is on. (unit: min.)
132 Z1 83 Main Power Switch 4038M600 1 count each time the main power switch turns
ON the power.
133 Z1 84 Sub Power Switch A0Y5M601 1 count each time the sub power switch turns
OFF the power.
134 Z1 85 Door Switch 40AA8501 1 count each time the front door is opened.
135 Z1 86 Toner Replacement Door 13GG-802 1 count each time the toner replacement door
is opened.
136 Z1 87 2nd Transfer Process Blade Assy A1RFD529 *1
137 Z1 88 - -
138 Z1 89 2nd Transfer Sub Brush A1RF5328 *1
139 Z1 8A ADU Reverse Cleaning 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
A1RFC846
140 Z1 8B ADU Transport roller cleaning A 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
A1RFC852
141 Z1 8C ADU Transport roller cleaning B 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
A1RFC853
142 Z1 8D 2nd Fusing Unit A1RJA72A (Japan) *3
A1RJA72E (North
America)
A1RJA72F (Europe)
143 Z1 8E 2nd fusing heating roller A03U7201 *3
144 Z1 8F 2nd Fusing Belt A03U7205 *3
145 Z1 90 2nd Fusing Belt Regulating Sleeve A03U7250 *3
146 Z1 91 2nd Fusing Insulating Sleeve A03U7295 *3
147 Z1 92 2nd Fusing Bearing A03U8078 *3
148 Z1 93 2nd Fusing Roller(Bottom) A1RJ7201 *3
149 Z1 94 2nd Fusing Roller(Top) A1RJ7202 *3
150 Z1 95 2nd Fusing Ball Bearing A1RJ7212 *3
151 Z1 96 - - *1
152 Z1 97 2nd Fusing Idler Gear/3 A1RJ8096 *3
153 Z1 98 2nd Fusing Lamp(Top) A1RJM31A (Japan) *1
A1RJM31E (North
America)
A1RJM31F (Europe)
154 Z1 99 2-Fus. Temp. Sensor Assembly(T) A1RJA765 *1
155 Z1 9A 2-Fus. Temp. Sensor Assembly(B) A1RJA738 *1
156 Z1 9B 2nd Fusing Decurler Roller A1RJ8152 *4
157 Z1 9C 2nd Fusing Exit Roller(T) A1RJ8973 1 count for each paper exit.
158 Z1 9D 2nd Fusing Drawer Entrance Guide A1RJA837 *4
159 Z1 9E - -
160 Z1 9F Fusing paper exit guide /Lw assy A1RFA772 *1
161 Z1 A0 - -
162 Z1 A1 PFU Feed Clutch(Tray4) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
I-108

parameter
165 Z1 A4 PFU Vertical Transport Clutch(Tray4) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4.
166 Z1 A5 PFU1 Vert. Trans. Clutch(Tray5) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray5.
167 Z1 A6 PFU1 Vert.Trans.Clutch(Tray4/5) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray4/5
168 Z1 A7 PFU1 Horiz. Transport Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 4, 5,
6, 7, 8 and 9.
169 Z1 A8 PFU1 Serial Transport Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 7, 8
and 9.
170 Z1 A9 PFU1 Registration Roller Bearing 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 4, 5,
6, 7, 8 and 9.
171 Z1 AA PFU1 Registration Roller A1RG7160 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 4, 5,
6, 7, 8 and 9.
172 Z1 AB PFU1 1st Loop Roller A1RG7161 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 4, 5,
6, 7, 8 and 9.
173 Z1 AC PFU1 2nd Loop Roller Bearing A03U8128 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray6.
174 Z1 AD PFU1 2nd Loop Roller A1RG6075 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray6.
175 Z1 AE PFU2 Feed Clutch(Tray7) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray7.
176 Z1 AF PFU2 Feed Clutch(Tray8) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray8.
177 Z1 B0 PFU2 Feed Clutch(Tray9) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray9.
178 Z1 B1 PFU2 Vert. Trans. Clutch(Tray7) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray7.
179 Z1 B2 PFU2 Vert. Trans. Clutch(Tray8) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray8.
180 Z1 B3 PFU2 Vert.Trans.Clutch(Tray7/8) 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray7 or
PF Tray8.
181 Z1 B4 PFU2 Horiz. Transport Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 7, 8
and 9.
182 Z1 B5 PFU2 Registration Roller Bearing A03U8128 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 7, 8
and 9.
183 Z1 B6 PFU2 Registration Roller A1RG7160 1 count for each paper exit from PF Trays 7, 8
and 9.
184 Z1 B7 PFU2 1st Loop Roller A1RG7161 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray7 and
PF Tray8.
185 Z1 B8 PFU2 2nd Loop Roller Bearing A03U8128 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray9.
186 Z1 B9 PFU2 2nd Loop Roller A1RG6075 1 count for each paper exit from PF Tray9.
187 Z1 BA - -
188 Z1 BB - -
189 Z1 BC Transfer Belt Cleaning Seal /F A1RF5112 *1
190 Z1 BD Transfer Belt Cleaning Seal /R A1RF5116 *1
191 Z1 BE - -
192 Z1 BF - -
193 Z1 C0 FS Staple/Front 15AA4222 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at front or the 2-staple mode.
194 Z1 C1 FS Staple/Back 15AA-450 1 count for each paper exit in either of the 1-
staple at rear or the 2-staple mode.
195 Z1 C2 FS Solenoid/A 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
mode and the sort mode.
196 Z1 C3 FS Paper Exit Roller/A 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit in the sort, non-sort
or staple mode.
197 Z1 C4 - -
198 Z1 C5 - -
199 Z1 C6 - -
200 Z1 C7 - -
201 Z1 C8 FD Feed Roller/A Top 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Up.
202 Z1 C9 FD Reverse Rubber/Top 13QN-443
203 Z1 CA FD Feed Roller/B Top 50BA-575
204 Z1 CB FD Feed Roller/A Low 50BA-574 Counts the paper feed from PI tray /Lw.
205 Z1 CC FD Reverse Rubber/Low 13QN-443
206 Z1 CD FD Feed Roller/B Low 56BA-575
207 Z1 CE FD Punch Motor Assy 15AG-573 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
I-109

parameter
208 Z1 CF FD Solenoid/A (Release/1) 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or
folding mode (all size).
209 Z1 D0 FD Solenoid/A (Release/2) 56QA8251 1) 1 count for each paper exit in the folding
mode (all size)
2) 1 count for each paper exit in the punch
mode (paper length 220mm or larger).
210 Z1 D1 FD Motor Assy(Up/Down Motor) 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
211 Z1 D2 - -
212 Z1 D3 - -
213 Z1 D4 - -
214 Z1 D5 - -
215 Z1 D6 LS2 Solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (all size).
216 Z1 D7 LS1 Solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
217 Z1 D8 LS1 Solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
218 Z1 D9 LS1 Solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
219 Z1 DA LS1 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
220 Z1 DB LS2 Solenoid (Lead) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
221 Z1 DC LS2 Solenoid (Rear) 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
222 Z1 DD LS2 Solenoid (Center) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
sort mode (Length 295mm or more and Width
226mm or more).
223 Z1 DE LS2 Solenoid (Curl) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
224 Z1 DF LS2 Up/Down motor 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor.
225 Z1 E0 - -
226 Z1 E1 - -
227 Z1 E2 - -
228 Z1 E3 - -
229 Z1 E4 SD trimmer edge A0H2R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
Counts when new trimming unit is mounted.
230 Z1 E5 SD Trimmer Receiver A0H2B622 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
231 Z1 E6 SD trimmer press motor A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
232 Z1 E7 SD trimmer edge drive motor A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
233 Z1 E8 SD trimmer unit A0H2A620 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
234 Z1 E9 SD Staple/Right 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
235 Z1 EA SD Staple/Left 15AN-550 mode.
Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
236 Z1 EB SD trimmer edge 15AN-570 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
237 Z1 EC SD Trimmer Receiver 15AN5282 trimming mode.
Counts when previous trimming unit is
238 Z1 ED SD trimmer edge drive motor 15AN8002 mounted.
239 Z1 EE SD Transport Solenoid 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding
240 Z1 EF SD Solenoid 13QE8251 section.
Counts when either new trimming unit or
previous trimming unit is mounted.
241 Z1 F0 SD FNS Solenoid/2 12QR8252 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
I-110

parameter
Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
242 Z1 F1 SD gear /B 15AN7719 1 count for each time the bundle up/down
section goes up (PS45/ON).
Counts when new or previous trimming unit is
mounted.
243 Z1 F2 SD Paper Adjusting Unit 15AN5092 1 count for each trimming.
Counts when previous trimming unit is
mounted.
244 Z1 F3 - -
245 Z1 F4 - -
246 Z1 F5 - -
247 Z1 F6 - -
248 Z1 F7 FNS Stapler/F 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front/2-
249 Z1 F8 FNS Stapler/R 15JM-501 staples/saddle stitching mode.
250 Z1 F9 FNS Shift Motor 12QR-361 1 count each time an even number of print is
exited in the sort mode.
251 Z1 FA FNS Exit Opening Motor 12QR-361 1 count for each starting job for the size A4S
and 81/2 x 11S, and 1count at exiting these
size in staple mode.
252 Z1 FB FNS Folding Knife Motor 13QJ-502 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch/
half-fold/tri-fold mode.
253 Z1 FC Bypass Gate Solenoid 12QR-263 1 count for each paper exit for the A4, B5, 81/2
x 11 and 16K sizes in the staple mode.
254 Z1 FD Tri-Folding Gate SD 12QR-263 1 count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
mode.
255 Z1 FE FNS Paper Exit Roller/A 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit to the FNS main
256 Z1 FF FNS Paper Exit Roller/B A04D8904 tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode.
257 Z7 00 FNS Paper Transport Roller/4 13QE4531 1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle
stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
258 Z7 01 FNS Paper Transport Roller/A 20AK4210 1 count for each paper exit in the staple/saddle
stitch/half-fold/tri-fold mode.
259 Z7 02 - -
260 Z7 03 - -
261 Z7 04 - -
262 Z7 05 - -
263 Z7 06 PI Conveyance Clutch/U 13QN8201 1 count for each PI upper paper feed.
264 Z7 07 PI Feed Roller/A/U 50BA-574
265 Z7 08 PI Feed Roller/B/U 13QN-446
266 Z7 09 PI Reverse Roller/U 13QN-443
267 Z7 0A PI Torque Limiter/U 13QN4073
268 Z7 0B PI Conveyance Clutch/L 13QN8201 1 count for each PI lower paper feed.
269 Z7 0C PI Feed Roller/A/L 50BA-574
270 Z7 0D PI Feed Roller/B/L 50BA-575
271 Z7 0E PI Reverse Roller/L 13QN-443
272 Z7 0F PI Torque Limiter/L 13QN4073
273 Z7 10 - -
274 Z7 11 - -
275 Z7 12 - -
276 Z7 13 - -
277 Z7 14 - -
278 Z7 15 - -
279 Z7 16 - -
280 Z7 17 - -
281 Z7 18 PK Punch Unit(2-Hole) A04E0Y0 Number of punching by PK
282 Z7 19 PK Punch Unit A04F0Y1 Number of punching by PK
(2/3,2/4-Hole) A04F0Y0 Only A04F0Y0 is displayed.
283 Z7 1A PK Punch Unit(4-Hole) A04G0G0 Number of punching by PK
284 Z7 1B - -
285 Z7 1C - -
I-111

parameter
286 Z7 1D - -
287 Z7 1E - -
288 Z7 1F ADU Paper Exit Roller 13YH4064
289 Z7 20 ADF Feed Roller 13YH4039
290 Z7 21 ADF Separation Roller 20AJ4015
291 Z7 22 - -
292 Z7 23 - -
293 Z7 24 - -
294 Z7 25 - -
295 Z7 26 PB sub tray exit solenoid 56QA8251 1 count for each paper exit to the PB sub tray.
296 Z7 27 PB SB Separate Motor 13GQ8005 1 count for each paper stack on the PB
297 Z7 28 PB Sub Compile FD SD 15AA8251 stacking section.
298 Z7 29 PB Clump Press(Top) SD 15AA8251
299 Z7 2A PB paper exit drive roller /A 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit from PB
300 Z7 2B PB tray feed roller 55VA-464 1 count for each book exit in PB tray cover
301 Z7 2C PB Tray Trans./Rev Roller 55VA-463 mode.
302 Z7 2D PB tray feed clutch 56AA8201
303 Z7 2E PB tray handle clutch 56AA8201
304 Z7 2F PB cutter /ASSY A0756230 1 count for each book exit when cover paper
trimming is set.
305 Z7 30 PB filter /1 A0753724 1 count for each paper exit from PB
306 Z7 31 PB filter /2 A0753724
307 Z7 32 PB path switch solenoid 56QA8251 1 count for each book exit in other than PB tray
cover mode.
308 Z7 33 PB melt tank ASSY A075A39A/39E/39F Time during which tank applying roller rotates.
1 count per an hour.
309 Z7 34 - -
310 Z7 35 - -
311 Z7 36 - -
312 Z7 37 - -
313 Z7 38 GP Aligner Idler Roller Assembly A0N9PA01 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
314 Z7 39 GP Bypass Assembly A0N9PA02 1 count for each paper exit.
315 Z7 3A GP roller drive section A0N9PA03 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
316 Z7 3B GP Belt Aligner (Green) A0N9PA04 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
317 Z7 3C GP back-gauge mechanism A0N9PA05 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
318 Z7 3D RU Driven Roller A1TT7111 1 count per page.
319 Z7 3E RU Driven Roller/8 A1TT7141 1 count per page.
320 Z7 3F - -
321 Z7 40 - -
322 Z7 41 HM supplying roller /1 A1TU5001 1 count per page.
323 Z7 42 HM supplying roller /2 A1TU5002 1 count per page.
324 Z7 43 HM supplying roller /3 A1TU5003 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
325 Z7 44 HM Filter A1TU5215 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
326 Z7 45 HM motor /P A1TUM201 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
ON.
*1 Count in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 count in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 count in the duplex mode.
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 count in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 count in the duplex mode.
Simplex - duplex = 1 count, Simplex - duplex = 2 counts for large size.
Bypass paper is not counted (counted by number of fed papers)
Simplex - duplex = 1 count, Simplex - duplex = 2 counts for large size.
I-112
Bypass paper is also counted (counted by number of fed papers)

Note
• For details on the paper size to be counted or setting of the count condition, refer to I.5.6.1 Maintenance Counter
5.6.18 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter)

Used to control the service history of each part not registered as a special part.
For 30 data from No. 01 up to 30, confirm and reset of the name, P/N (parts number), limit value and print count.
• Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
• When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes into red.
(1) Set/Check procedure

Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the data number.
5. Select either [Parts Name Setting], [P/N Setting], or [Limit Setting].
6. Enter the data to set or change.
[Parts Name]: Enter the part name. (8 digits)
[P/N]: Enter the part number. (9 digits)
[Limit]: Enter the limit value. (8 digits)
7. Press [OK] to update data.
(2) Reset procedure

Press [04 Counter/Data]
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [02 Voluntary Part Counter].
4. "Voluntary Part Counter screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the pages, and press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to set or check.
5. Press [Counter Clear].
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Voluntary Part Counter screen."
(3) Relationship between data number and CSRC parameter

No. Parts Name P/N Counter LIMIT Installation date
CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter CSRC parameter
(Z4) (Z3) (G0) (H0) (H3)
001 00 00 00 00 00
002 01 01 01 01 01
003 02 02 02 02 02
004 03 03 03 03 03
005 04 04 04 04 04
006 05 05 05 05 05
007 06 06 06 06 06
008 07 07 07 07 07
009 08 08 08 08 08
010 09 09 09 09 09
011 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A
012 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B
013 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
014 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D
015 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E
016 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
017 10 10 10 10 10
018 11 11 11 11 11
019 12 12 12 12 12
020 13 13 13 13 13
021 14 14 14 14 14
022 15 15 15 15 15
I-113
023 16 16 16 16 16
024 17 17 17 17 17
025 18 18 18 18 18
026 19 19 19 19 19
027 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
028 1B 1B 1B 1B 1B
029 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C
030 1D 1D 1D 1D 1D
5.6.19 Custom Counter Threshold Set

(1) OUTLINE
I.5.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)."
Note
• This setting is valid when the DIPSW8-7=1.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Custom Counter Threshold Set].
3. "Custom Size Counter Threshold Setting screen"
Select the custom size to be set.
• [Infinite1]: "Inf. 1" on the Paper Size Counter.
Note
• The value larger than that of [Infinite4] by 1mm up to 487mm is assigned to "Inf. 5".
• Be sure to set the values as followings.
Infinite1<Infinite2<Infinite3<Infinite4

• 1 step = 1mm
5. Press [Cancel] to reset the setting to default.
5.7 State Confirmation

5.7.1 I/O Check Mode
(1) OUTLINE
This mode provide self-diagnostic functions (input/output check function) to check the condition of input (checking the each signal to sensors)
and output (checking and adjustment of the load operation).
(2) "I/O Check Mode screen"
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[1] Input check [2] Output check

[3] I/O check code [4] Multi code
I-114
5.7.2 Input check procedures

(1) Usage
Check input condition of each signal to the sensors.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi mode, press [High/Low]. *
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. The condition of the sensor (000/001 etc.) is displayed in the message box "IN".
7. When executing another input check, repeat steps 3 to 6.
* The Access button of the hard key can be used.
5.7.3 Output check procedures

(1) Usage
Load operations can be checked and adjusted (output check) using this output check.
(2) Procedure
2. "State Confirmation menu screen"
3. "I/O Check Mode screen"
Enter an input check code with the numeric buttons.
4. To use multi mode, press [High/Low]. *1
5. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.
6. Press [Start]. *2
The load specified operates.
7. Press [Stop]. *2
The load specified completes.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 to perform the other load or signal output check.
*1 The Access button of the hard key can be used.
*2 The start key and the stop key of the hard key can be used.
5.7.4 IO check mode list

Input check Output check
Co Mul
de ti Classific Symb
Name
Display and Classific Symb
Name
Restrictive
ation ol signal source ation ol conditions
0 0 High TEM/ Temperature-humidity Display of High L101 Exposure lamp
voltage, HUM1 sensor /1 (machine inner humidity (%) voltage,
analog humidity) analog
signal signal
1 TEM/ Temperature-humidity Display of
HUM1 sensor /1 (machine inner temperature (°C)
temperature)
5 TEM/ Process temperature Display of
HUM2 sensor (humidity around humidity (%)
process mount)
6 TEM/ Process temperature Display of
HUM2 sensor (temperature temperature (°C)
around process mount)
7 TH10 Registration temperature Display of
sensor (temperature temperature (°C)
around registration roller)
8 TH9 Developing duct Display of
temperature sensor (the temperature (°C)
ambient temperature of the
toner collection pipe)
9 TH11 Writing temperature Display of
sensor (the ambient temperature (°C)
temperature of the the
writing unit)
1 0 High M20, Toner bottle motor (low
voltage, CL16 speed), toner bottle
analog clutch /Y
signal
I-115

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 M20, Toner bottle motor (high
CL16 speed), toner bottle
clutch /Y
2 M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
CL16 volatile), toner bottle
clutch /Y
3 M20, Toner bottle motor (low
clutch /M
4 PZS/Y Remaining toner sensor /Y • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor (high
• 001: Toner CL17 speed), toner bottle
clutch /M
5 PZS/M Remaining toner sensor /M • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor, toner
• 001: Toner CL17 bottle clutch /M
6 PZS/C Remaining toner sensor /C • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor (low
clutch /C
7 PZS/K Remaining toner sensor /K • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor (high
clutch /C
8 PS47 Waste toner door sensor • 000: No toner M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
collection box CL18 volatile), toner bottle
• 001: Toner clutch /C
collection box
9 PS48 Waste toner full sensor • 000: Other M20, Toner bottle motor (low
than full CL19 speed), toner bottle
• 001: Full clutch /K
10 M20, Toner bottle motor (high
clutch /K
11 M20, Toner bottle motor (non-
CL19 volatile), toner bottle
clutch /K
12 PS48 Waste toner full sensor • 000: Other PS48 Waste toner full sensor full
than full detection
• 001: Full
2 0 HV/ High voltage unit /1-1, Do not use in
1-1 (Charger /Y) the field.
1 HV/ High voltage unit /1-1, Do not use in
1-1 (Charger /M) the field.
2 HV/ High voltage unit /1-2, Do not use in
1-2 (Charger /C) the field.
3 HV/ High voltage unit /1-2 Do not use in
1-2 (Charger /K) the field.
3 0 HV/2 High voltage unit /2 Do not use in
(Intermediate transfer /Y) the field.
1 HV/2 High voltage unit /2 Do not use in
(Intermediate transfer /M) the field.
(Intermediate transfer /C) the field.
(Intermediate transfer /K) the field.
(Intermediate transfer /Y, / the field.
M, /C, /K)
M, /C, /K)
M, /C, /K)
(Intermediate transfer /K) the field.
(Neutralizing after the field.
intermediate transfer /Y)
I-116

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
intermediate transfer /M)
intermediate transfer /C)
intermediate transfer /K)
intermediate transfer /Y)
intermediate transfer /M)
intermediate transfer /C)
intermediate transfer /K)
intermediate transfer /Y,
1/1 speed)
intermediate transfer /M,
1/1 speed)
intermediate transfer /C,
1/1 speed)
intermediate transfer /K,
1/1 speed)
(Intermediate transfer /Y, the field.
constant voltage)
(Intermediate transfer /M, the field.
constant voltage)
(Intermediate transfer /C, the field.
constant voltage)
(Intermediate transfer /Y, the field.
constant voltage)
4 0 HV/2 High voltage unit /2
(Separation)
1 HV/2 High voltage unit /2
(Separation: for
measuring)
5 0 IDCS / IDC sensor /Fr, /Rr 0-255 is
1, /2 displayed on
"Input check"
1 IDCS / IDC sensor /Rr 0-255 is
2 displayed on
"Input check"
2 IDCS / IDC sensor /Fr 0-255 is
1 displayed on
"Input check"
5 IDCS / IDC sensor /Fr, /Rr 0-255 is
1, /2 displayed on
"Input check"
I-117

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 IDCS / IDC sensor /Fr 0-255 is
1 displayed on
"Input check"
6 0 DPS/Y Drum potential sensor /Y 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
1 DPS/ Drum potential sensor /M 0-255 is
M displayed on
"Input check"
2 DPS/C Drum potential sensor /C 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
3 DPS/K Drum potential sensor /K 0-255 is
displayed on
"Input check"
8 0 HV/2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd
transfer, low voltage)
1 HV/2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd
transfer, high voltage)
5 HV/2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd
transfer, guide plate)
9 0 HV/ High voltage unit /1-1
1-1 (Developing /Y)
1 HV/ High voltage unit /1-1
1-1 (Developing /M)
1-2 (Developing /C)
1-2 (Developing /K)
1-1 (Developing /Y)
1-1 (Developing /M)
1-2 (Developing /C)
1-2 (Developing /K)
11 0 Paper PS25 Paper empty sensor /1 • 000: No paper
feed, • 001: Paper
1 conveya PS26 Paper empty sensor /2 • 000: No paper
nce • 001: Paper
2 PS27 Paper empty sensor /3 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
(tray 4) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
(tray5) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
(tray 6) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
(tray 7) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper
12 0 PS28 Paper near empty sensor / • 000: No paper
1 • 001: Paper
1 PS29 Paper near empty sensor / • 000: No paper
2 • 001: Paper
2 PS30 Paper near empty sensor / • 000: No paper
3 • 001: Paper
10 VR2 Remaining paper VR /1 Remaining
(tray 4) (PF 1st tandem) display (0 to
100%)
I-118

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
100%)
100%)
(tray 7) (PF 2nd tandem) display (0 to
100%)
100%)
100%)
13 0 PS31 Paper size sensor /Rt1 • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
1 PS32 Paper size sensor /Lt1 • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
2 PS33 Paper size sensor /Rt2 • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
• 001: OFF
4 PS35 Paper size sensor /Rt3 • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
• 001: OFF
14 0 VR1 Paper size VR/1 Display of AD
1 VR2 Paper size VR/2 Display of AD
2 VR3 Paper size VR/3 Display of AD
10 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 Display of AD
(Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
11 VR4 CD paper size VR/1 (tray Display of AD
5) (PF 1st tandem)
12 VR7 CD paper size VR/3 (tray Display of AD
6) (PF 1st tandem)
13 VR1 CD paper size VR/1 Display of AD
(Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem)
14 VR4 CD paper size VR /2 Display of AD
15 VR7 CD paper size VR /3 Display of AD
20 VR3 FD paper size VR /1 Display of AD
15 1 Data Data - CSRC/collecting data Not reset when
clear clear counter clear DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
2 - Mode memory clear Not reset when
DIPSW3-6 is
OFF
80 RFID AB3 Antenna board /3 (Fusing) • 000: No tag RFID AB3 Antenna board /3 (Fusing) Displayed on
tag • 001: Tag tag "Input check"
81 AB3 Antenna board /3 receiving Receiving AB3 Antenna board /3 (Fusing) Displayed on
strength (Fusing) strength (0 to 7) "Input check"
I-119

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
82 AB1 Antenna board /1 • 000: No tag AB1 Antenna board /1 Displayed on
(Intermediate transfer) • 001: Tag (Intermediate transfer) "Input check"
83 AB1 Antenna board /1 receiving Receiving AB1 Antenna board /1 Displayed on
strength (Intermediate strength (0 to 7) (Intermediate transfer) "Input check"
transfer)
84 AB2 Antenna board /2 (2nd • 000: No tag AB2 Antenna board /2 (2nd Displayed on
transfer) • 001: Tag transfer) "Input check"
85 AB2 Antenna board /2 receiving Receiving AB2 Antenna board /2 (2nd Displayed on
strength (2nd transfer) strength (0 to 7) transfer) "Input check"
86 RFIDA RFID antenna board • 000: No tag RFIDA RFID antenna board (EF) is displayed on
B (existence or • 001: Tag B "Input check"
nonexistence) (EF)
87 RFIDA RFID antenna board Receiving RFIDA RFID antenna board (EF) is displayed on
B (receiving strength level) strength (0 to 7) B "Input check"
(EF)
98 Data High - CSRC memory Use when
clear voltage, initialization setting CSRC
analog
signal
16 0 Paper PS22 Upper limit sensor /1 • 000: Other Paper SD4 Pick-up solenoid /1
feed, than upper feed,
conveya limit conveya
nce • 001: Upper nce
limit
1 PS23 Upper limit sensor /2 • 000: Other SD5 Pick-up solenoid /2
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
2 PS24 Upper limit sensor /3 • 000: Other SD6 Pick-up solenoid /3
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
17 0 - Tray1 set signal (Main • 000: Not set
body) • 001: Set
1 - Tray2 set signal (Main • 000: Not set
body) • 001: Set
2 - Tray3 set signal (Main • 000: Not set
body) • 001: Set
10 - Tray4 set signal (PF 1st • 000: Not set
tandem) • 001: Set
13 - Tray7 set signal (PF 2nd • 000: Not set
20 HTR4 Dehumidification heater • 000: Not set
set signal (Tray4) (PF 1st • 001: Set
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
set signal (Tray7) (PF 2nd • 001: Set
tandem)
tandem)
I-120

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
tandem)
18 1 PS87 ADU centering sensor Display top 8 bit Paper PS87 ADU centering sensor 0-255 is
out of 16bit feed, displayed on
conveya "Input check"
3 PS40 Centering sensor (PF) Display top 8 bit nce PS40 Centering sensor (PF) 0-255 is
out of 16bit displayed on
"Input check"
4 MFDT Multi feed detection • 000: Normal MFDT Multi feed detection
B /S, / board /S, /R (PF 1st • 001: Multi B /S, / board /S, /R (PF 1st
R tandem) feed R tandem)
B /S, / board /S, /R (automatic • 001: Adjusting B /S, / board /S, /R (PF 1st
R adjustment) (PF 1st R tandem)
tandem)
B /S, / board /S, /R (PF 2nd • 001: Multi B /S, / board /S, /R (PF 2nd
R tandem) feed R tandem)
B /S, / board /S, /R (automatic • 001: Adjusting B /S, / board /S, /R (automatic
R adjustment condition) (2nd R adjustment) (2nd PF)
PF)
19 0 PS19 Paper feed sensor /1 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
1 PS20 Paper feed sensor /2 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
2 PS21 Paper feed sensor /3 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
10 PS14 Paper suction sensor /1 • 000: No paper
(Tray4) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
(Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper
20 0 Paper SD4 Pick-up solenoid /1
1 PS14 ADU conveyance sensor / • 000: No paper feed, SD5 Pick-up solenoid /2
2 • 001: Paper conveya
nce
2 PS13 ADU conveyance sensor / • 000: No paper SD6 Pick-up solenoid /3
1 • 001: Paper
3 PS9 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor /1 • 001: Paper
6 PS1 Registration sensor /Fr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
7 PS6 Vertical conveyance • 000: No paper
sensor • 001: Paper
8 PS18 Paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
9 PS15 ADU conveyance sensor / • 000: No paper
3 • 001: Paper
10 PS16 ADU reverse sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
12 PS17 ADU stop sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
I-121

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
13 PS54 De-curler sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
14 PS2 Registration sensor /Rr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
15 PS4 Paper skew sensor /Fr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
16 PS5 Paper skew sensor /Rr • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
20 Paper SD5 Shutter solenoid /Fr1
feed, (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
21 conveya SD6 Shutter solenoid /Rr1
nce (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
22 SD10 Shutter solenoid /Fr2
23 SD11 Shutter solenoid /Rr2
32 SD4 Paper leading edge shutter
solenoid /1 (Tray4) (PF 1st
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
35 SD7 Floating duct solenoid /Fr1
38 SD8 Floating duct solenoid /Rr1
solenoid /1 (Tray7) (PF
2nd tandem)
2nd tandem)
2nd tandem)
I-122

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
21 0 Paper CL1 Paper feed clutch /1
1 feed, CL3 Paper feed clutch /2
conveya
2 nce CL5 Paper feed clutch /3
10 PS2 Paper feed sensor /1 • 000: No paper CL15 Suction belt clutch /1 (PF
(Tray4) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
(Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper 2nd tandem)
15 PS10 Paper feed sensor /3 • 000: No paper CL17 suction belt clutch /3 (PF
22 0 CL2 Pre-registration clutch /1
(CL1)
1 CL4 Pre-registration clutch /2
2 CL6 Pre-registration clutch /3
23 0 PS22 Upper limit sensor /1 • 000: upper M36 Tray lift-up motor /1
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
• 001: upper
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
1 PS23 Upper limit sensor /2 • 000: upper M37 Tray lift-up motor /2
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
• 001: upper
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
2 PS24 Upper limit sensor /3 • 000: upper M38 Tray lift-up motor /3
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
• 001: upper
limit
(operating),
upper limit
detecting
number (stop)
I-123

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 PS3 Upper limit sensor /1 • 000: Other M7 Paper lift motor /4 (PF 1st
(Tray4) (PF 1st tandem) than upper tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
13 PS7 Upper limit sensor /2 (PF • 000: Other M8 Paper lift motor /5 (PF 1st
1st tandem) than upper tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
15 PS11 Upper limit sensor /3 • 000: Other M9 Paper lift motor /3 (PF 1st
(Tray6) (PF 1st tandem) than upper tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
17 PS3 Upper limit sensor /1 • 000: Other M7 Paper lift motor /1 (Tray7)
(Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem) than upper (PF 2nd tandem)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
24 0 2nd PS53 2nd transfer home sensor • 000: Other 2nd M41 2nd transfer pressure
transfer than home transfer release motor (Home
position position search)
• 001: Home
position
1 PS53 2nd transfer home sensor • 000: Other M41 2nd transfer pressure
than home release motor (Pressure
position position 1 stop)
• 001: Home
position
position position 2 stop)
• 001: Home
position
position release position stop)
• 001: Home
position
4 - 2nd transfer belt motor • 000: Normal M40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
abnormality signal • 001: Abnormal M46 2nd transfer steering motor
5 PS50 2nd transfer belt abnormal • 000: OFF M40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
sensor • 001: ON M46 2nd transfer steering motor
6 PS51 2nd transfer belt edge • 000: OFF M40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
sensor /2 • 001: ON M46 2nd transfer steering motor
7 PS52 2nd transfer belt edge • 000: OFF M40, 2nd transfer belt motor,
sensor /3 • 001: ON M46 2nd transfer steering motor
8 PS49 2nd transfer steering home • 000: Other M46 2nd transfer steering motor
sensor than home (Home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
sensor than home (Home position 1 search)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-124

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
sensor than home (Home position 2 search)
position
• 001: Home
position
25 0 Paper PS37 Front door sensor • 000: Close Paper M58 Registration motor (1/2
feed, • 001: Open feed, speed)
1 conveya PS39 Vertical conveyance door • 000: Close conveya M58 Registration motor (3/4
nce sensor • 001: Open nce speed)
2 PS38 Toner supply door open/ • 000: Close M58 Registration motor (1/1
close sensor • 001: Open speed)
3 PS45 Toner supply unit open/ • 000: Close M58 Registration motor (Paper
close sensor • 001: Open feed line speed)
4 M58 Registration motor (Hard
timer ON: 1/1 speed)
6 M58 Registration motor (1/1
speed)
8 PS3 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
10 PS1 Front door sensor (PF 1st • 000: Close
tandem) • 001: Open
11 PS1 Front door sensor (PF 2nd • 000: Close
tandem) • 001: Open
20 PS22 Horizontal conveyance • 000: Close
guide plate sensor /Rt (PF • 001: Open
1st tandem)
guide plate sensor /Lt (PF • 001: Open
1st tandem)
22 PS33 Vertical conveyance guide • 000: Close
plate sensor (PF 1st • 001: Open
tandem)
guide plate sensor /Rt (PF • 001: Open
2nd tandem)
guide plate sensor /Lt (PF • 001: Open
2nd tandem)
25 PS33 Vertical conveyance guide • 000: Close
plate sensor (PF 2nd • 001: Open
tandem)
26 0 Paper M44 Loop motor /Fr (1/2 speed)
1 feed, M44 Loop motor /Fr (3/4 speed)
conveya
2 nce M44 Loop motor /Fr (1/1 speed)
3 M44 Loop motor /Fr (Paper
feed line speed)
4 M45 Loop motor /Rr (1/2 speed)
7 M45 Loop motor /Rr (Paper
feed line speed)
10 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF 1st
tandem: 985mm/s)
tandem: 700mm/s)
tandem: 985mm/s)
tandem: 700mm/s)
20 M5 Loop motor 1 (PF 2nd
tandem: 985mm/s)
tandem: 700mm/s)
I-125

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
tandem: 985mm/s)
tandem: 700mm/s)
27 0 M11 Reverse/exit motor
(Forward: 1/2 speed)
(RU-508)
1 M11 Reverse/exit motor
(RU-508)
(RU-508)
(Forward: Maximum
speed) (RU-508)
(Reverse: 1/2 speed)
(RU-508)
(RU-508)
(RU-508)
(Reverse: Maximum
speed) (RU-508)
10 M42 Reverse de-curler motor
(Forward: Maximum
speed)
(Forward: Maximum
speed)
20 M34 Paper exit motor (Forward:
1/2 speed)
3/4 speed)
1/1 speed)
Maximum speed)
28 0 Paper M12 Paper feed motor The waste toner
feed, screw is rotated
conveya by the M12
nce rotation. Be
careful about the
toner adhesion
due to prolonged
rotation.
10 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(PF 1st tandem)
11 M3 Horizontal conveyance
motor (PF 1st tandem)
I-126

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
12 M1 Paper feed belt motor (PF
1st tandem)
13 M4 Tandem conveyance
motor (PF 1st tandem)
20 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(PF 2nd tandem)
21 M3 Horizontal conveyance
motor (PF 2nd tandem)
22 M1 Paper feed belt motor (PF
2nd tandem)
23 M4 Tandem conveyance
motor (PF 2nd tandem)
40 Paper PS34 Tandem entrance sensor • 000: No paper CL8 Horizontal conveyance
feed, (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 1st tandem)
41 conveya PS35 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL9 Horizontal conveyance
nce sensor /1 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /2 (PF 1st tandem)
42 PS36 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
sensor /2 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper 1st tandem)
43 PS37 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL10 Tandem conveyance
sensor /3 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 1st tandem)
46 PS17 Loop sensor /Lw (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL13 Tandem conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /4 (PF 1st tandem)
47 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL14 Tandem conveyance
48 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL1 Exit clutch /1 (PF 1st
sensor /2 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
49 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL2 Exit clutch /2 (PF 1st
sensor /3 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
50 PS18 Pre-registration sensor (PF • 000: No paper CL3 Vertical conveyance
1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 1st tandem)
51 PS25 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper CL4 Vertical conveyance
(PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /2 (PF 1st tandem)
52 PS26 Exit sensor /1 (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL5 Vertical conveyance
53 PS27 Exit sensor /2 (PF 1st • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
58 PS32 Loop sensor /Up (PF 1st • 000: No paper
tandem) • 001: Paper
59 - Interlock 24V detection • 000: OFF
• 001: ON
60 PS34 Tandem entrance sensor • 000: No paper Paper CL8 Horizontal conveyance
(PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper feed, clutch /1 (PF 2nd tandem)
61 PS35 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper conveya CL9 Horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper nce clutch /2 (PF 2nd tandem)
62 PS36 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper CL7 Pre-registration clutch (PF
sensor /2 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper 2nd tandem)
sensor /3 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 2nd tandem)
I-127

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
66 PS17 Loop sensor /Lw (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL13 Tandem conveyance
tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /4 (PF 2nd tandem)
67 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL14 Tandem conveyance
68 PS20 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL1 Exit clutch /1 (PF 2nd
sensor /2 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
69 PS21 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper CL2 Exit clutch /2 (PF 2nd
sensor /3 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
70 PS18 Pre-registration sensor (PF • 000: No paper CL3 Vertical conveyance
2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /1 (PF 2nd tandem)
71 PS25 Paper leading edge sensor • 000: No paper CL4 Vertical conveyance
(PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper clutch /2 (PF 2nd tandem)
72 PS26 Exit sensor /1 (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL5 Vertical conveyance
73 PS27 Exit sensor /2 (PF 2nd • 000: No paper CL6 Vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: Paper
78 PS32 Loop sensor /Up (PF 2nd • 000: No paper
79 - Interlock 24V detection • 000: OFF
• 001: ON
29 0 Paper CL20 Vertical conveyance
feed, clutch /1
1 conveya CL21 Vertical conveyance
nce clutch /2
2 CL14 Intermediate conveyance
clutch /1
3 SD7 Belt separation claw • 000: Not set SD7 Belt separation claw
solenoid • 001: Set solenoid
4 CL15 Intermediate conveyance
clutch /2
6 - Process mount, set • 000: Not set SD1 ADU lock solenoid
detection • 001: Set
12 FM7, Exhaust fan /1 + /2 (PF 1st
FM8 tandem)
13 FM7, Exhaust fan /1 + /2 (PF
FM8 2nd tandem)
14 FM9, Paper leading edge
FM10 separation fan /Fr1 + /Rr1
20 FM11, Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
FM12 + /Rr1 (Tray4) (PF 1st
tandem)
I-128

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
tandem)
tandem)
FM12 + /Rr1 (Tray7) (PF 2nd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
26 FM1, Paper suction fan /1 + /2
FM2 (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
FM2 (Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem)
32 FM21, Dehumidifier fan /Rt1 + /
FM22 Lt1 (Tray4) (PF 1st
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
FM22 Lt1 (Tray7) (PF 2nd
tandem)
tandem)
tandem)
38 FM11 Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
39 FM12 Paper feed assist fan /Rr1
40 Paper PS35 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper
feed, sensor /1 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
41 conveya PS36 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper
nce sensor /2 (PF 1st tandem) • 001: Paper
42 PS37 Tandem conveyance • 000: No paper
46 PS17 Loop sensor /Lw (PF 1st • 000: No paper
47 PS19 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper
I-129

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
51 PS18 Pre-registration sensor (PF • 000: No paper
1st tandem) • 001: Paper
56 PS32 Loop sensor /Up (PF 1st • 000: No paper
58 Paper FM15 Paper feed assist fan /Fr2
feed, (Tray5) (PF 1st tandem)
59 conveya FM16 Paper feed assist fan /Rr2
nce (Tray5) (PF 1st tandem)
60 SD1 Tray lock solenoid /4 (PF
1st tandem)
61 SD2 Tray lock solenoid /2
74 Paper PS4 Handle release sensor /1 • 000: ON
feed, (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
75 conveya PS8 Handle release sensor /2 • 000: ON
nce (Tray5) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
76 PS12 Handle release sensor /3 • 000: ON
(Tray6) (PF 1st tandem) • 001: OFF
(Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem) • 001: OFF
80 TEMS Temperature sensor /5 • 0 to 255 Paper HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
/5 (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem) • (0 is displayed feed, (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
when the conveya
temperature is nce
within a
specified
value.)
I-130

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
81 TEMS Temperature sensor /1 (PF 0 to 255 HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
/1 1st tandem) (Tray4) (PF 1st tandem)
82 TEMS Temperature sensor /6 • 0 to 255 HTR5 Dehumidification heater /2
/6 (Tray5) (PF 1st tandem) • (0 is displayed (Tray5) (PF 1st tandem)
when the
temperature is
within a
specified
value.)
83 TEMS Temperature sensor /2 (PF 0 to 255 HTR5 Dehumidification heater /2
/7 (Tray6) (PF 1st tandem) • (0 is displayed (Tray6) (PF 1st tandem)
when the
temperature is
within a
specified
value.)
86 TEMS Temperature sensor /5 • 0 to 255 HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
/5 (Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem) • (0 is displayed (Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem)
when the
temperature is
within a
specified
value.)
87 TEMS Temperature sensor /1 (PF 0 to 255 HTR4 Dehumidification heater/1
/1 2nd tandem) (Tray7) (PF 2nd tandem)
when the
temperature is
within a
specified
value.)
when the
temperature is
within a
specified
value.)
30 0 Optics PS101 Scanner home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
1 PS103 APS sensor /1 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
2 PS104 APS sensor /2 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
3 PS102 APS timing sensor • 000: Close
• 001: Open
32 0 Optics M21 Polygon motor /Y (1/1
rotation)
1 M22 Polygon motor /M (1/1
rotation)
2 M23 Polygon motor /C (1/1
rotation)
3 M24 Polygon motor /K (1/1
rotation)
I-131

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
4 M21, Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /
M22, K (1/1 rotation)
M23,
M24
5 M21 Polygon motor /Y (rotates
with non-volatile set value)
6 M22 Polygon motor /M (rotates
7 M23 Polygon motor /C (rotates
8 M24 Polygon motor /K (rotates
9 M21, Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /
M22, K (rotates with non-volatile
M23, set value)
M24
33 0 IDB /Y Index board /Y Laser turns ON
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor /Y (M21)
rotates at the
same time.
1 LDB/M Laser drive board /M Laser turns ON
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor /M (M22)
rotates at the
same time.
2 LDB/C Laser drive board /C Laser turns ON
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor /C (M23)
rotates at the
same time.
3 LDB/K Laser drive board /K Laser turns ON
by APC
operation.
The polygon
motor /K (M24)
rotates at the
same time.
4 LDB/ Laser drive board /Y, /M, / Laser turns ON
Y, / C, /K by APC
M, / operation.
C, /K The Polygon
motors /Y
(M21), /M
(M22), /C (M23)
and /K (24)
rotate at the
same time.
34 0 - Shading correction
operation
36 3 PS83 Color registration sensor / 0-255 is
Fr displayed on
"Input check"
4 PS84 Color registration sensor / 0-255 is
Md displayed on
"Input check"
5 PS85 Color registration sensor / 0-255 is
Rr displayed on
"Input check"
37 0 - LD alarm measurement /
Y, /M, /C and /K
I-132

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 Optics - LD alarm measured value Display order:
display /Y LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
2 - LD alarm measured value Display order:
display /M LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
display /C LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
display /K LD1, LD2, LD3,
LD4, LD5, LD6,
LD7, LD8
91 - LD1 to LD8 alarm data
clear /Y
clear /M
clear /C
clear /K
clear /Y, /M, /C, /K
38 0 M101 Scanner motor 11 x 17,
(Reciprocating driver 1) Magnification
(PF-705) 100%, 1
scanning
1 M101 Scanner motor 11 x 17,
(PF-705) 100%,
Continuous
scanning
(PF-705) 400%,
Continuous
scanning
(PF-705) 50%,
Continuous
scanning
4 M101 Scanner motor 81/2 x 11,
(Reciprocating driver 5)
Magnification
(PF-705)
100%,
Continuous
scanning
5 Optics PS101 Scanner home sensor • 000: Other M101 Scanner motor (Home
(PF-705) than home position search) (PF-705)
position
• 001: Home
position
6 M101 Scanner motor (back scan
position move) (PF-705)
7 M101 Scanner motor (back scan
ACS operation + scan
operation) (PF-705)
41 0 Main Main M1 Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)
1 body body M1 Drum motor /Y (3/4 speed)
2 M1 Drum motor /Y (1/1 speed)
3 M2 Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)
I-133

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 M3 Drum motor /C (2/3 speed)
9 M4 Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)
12 M9 Intermediate transfer belt
motor (1/2 speed)
motor (3/4 speed)
motor (1/1 speed)
21 M10 Cleaning motor
22 Main PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
body steering sensor motor (1/1 speed)
23 PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
steering sensor motor (3/4 speed)
24 PS86 Intermediate transfer Display of AD M9 Intermediate transfer belt
steering sensor motor (1/2 speed)
30 PS46 Intermediate transfer • 000: Other M33 Intermediate transfer
steering home sensor than home steering motor (Home
• 001: Home
position
31 M33 Intermediate transfer
steering motor (Forward)
32 M33 Intermediate transfer
steering motor (Reverse)
33 Main PS68 Intermediate transfer • 000: Abnormal
body steering edge sensor • 001: Normal
34 - Intermediate transfer set • 000: Set
signal • 001: Not set
35 - Intermediate transfer drive • 000: Set
set signal • 001: Not set
36 Main M9 Intermediate transfer belt
body motor (Reverse: 1/4
speed)
42 0 PF PF FM27 Scanner cooling fan
3 Main FM20 Intermediate transfer
body cleaning cooling fan /2
4 FM30 Toner collection cooling
fan
5 FM11, Deodorization fan /2
FM12
6 FM18 Dew condensation
prevention fan
7 FM38 ADU cooling fan /3
8 M27, tucking fan /1, /2, /3
M28,
M29
9 FM3, Motor cooling fan /1, /2
FM4
10 FM19 Intermediate transfer
cleaning cooling fan /1
11 FM24, Paper exit cooling fan /1, /
FM25, 2, /3
FM26
13 FM5 Cooling fan
14 FM40 Pre-fusing suction fan /Fr Turn ON 3 fans
simultaneously
15 FM41 Pre-fusing suction fan /Md Turn ON 3 fans
simultaneously
I-134

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
16 FM42 Pre-fusing suction fan /Rr Turn ON 3 fans
simultaneously
21 FM7 Developing charge fan /1
26 FM13, Writing ventilation fan /4
FM14,
FM15,
FM16
FM14,
FM15,
FM16
28 FM17 Toner suction fan /1
29 FM31, ADU exhaust fan /2
FM32
31 FM22, Fusing thermal insulation
FM23 fan /Fr, /Rr
33 FM43, Fusing belt cooling fan /
FM45 Fr, /Rr
34 FM44 Fusing belt cooling fan /Md
35 FM43, Fusing belt cooling fan /
FM45 Fr, /Rr
36 FM6 Toner suction fan /2
37 FM35 System cooling fan /Rr
38 FM17, Toner suction fan /1, /2 For measuring
FM6 air volume, both
of fans 1 and 2
are ON.
39 FM3, Motor cooling fan /1, /2
FM4
FM14,
FM15,
FM16
FM14,
FM15,
FM16
FM14,
FM15,
FM16
43 FM22, Fusing thermal insulation
FM23 fan /Fr, /Rr
43 90 FM5, Cooling fan, ADU exhaust
FM31, fan /1, /2, Intermediate
FM32, transfer cleaning cooling
FM19, fan /1, /2, Toner collection
FM20, cooling fan, Dew
FM21, condensation prevention
FM30, fan, ADU cooling fan /3
FM18,
FM38
I-135

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
91 FM5, Cooling fan, ADU exhaust
FM30, fan, ADU cooling fan /3,
FM18, Developing charge fan /1, /
FM38, 2, /3, /4, Deodorization
FM7, fan /1, /2, Motor cooling
FM8, fan /1, /2
FM9,
FM10,
FM11,
FM12,
FM3,
FM4
92 FM5, Cooling fan, ADU exhaust
FM30, fan, ADU cooling fan /3,
FM18, Developing charge fan /1, /
FM38, 2, /3, /4, Deodorization
FM7, fan /1, /2, Motor cooling
FM8, fan /1, /2, Fusing belt
FM9, cooling fan /Fr, /Md, /Rr
FM10,
FM11,
FM12,
FM3,
FM4,
FM43,
FM44,
FM45
1 CNT1 Total counter/1
2 CNT2 Total counter/2
45 0 Main TH1 Fusing temperature Display of L1, L2, Turn ON fusing heater Specified control
body sensor /1 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) L3, L4, lamp /1, /2, /3, /4, /5, /6 temperature
upper heat roller) L5, L6 simultaneously
1 TH2 Fusing temperature Display of L1, L2, Turn ON fusing heater Specified control
sensor /2 (Edge of fusing temperature (°C) L3, L4, lamp /1, /2, /3, /4, /5, /6 temperature
roller) L5, L6 simultaneously
sensor /3 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) L3, L4, lamp /1, /2, /3, /4, /5, /6 temperature
lower belt) L5, L6 simultaneously
sensor /4 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) L3, L4, lamp /1, /2, /3, /4, /5, /6 temperature
roller) L5, L6 simultaneously
6 TH7 Fusing temperature Display of
sensor /7 (Edge of fusing temperature (°C)
lower belt)
7 TH8 Fusing temperature Display of
sensor /8 (Edge of fusing temperature (°C)
upper heat roller)
8 Main L1, L2, Turn ON fusing heater Proper
body L3, L4, lamp /1, /2, /3, /4, /5, /6 temperature at
L5, L6 simultaneously idle (at warming
up)
I-136

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
11 Main TH1 Fusing temperature Display of L1, Fusing heater lamp /1 0-255 is
body sensor /1 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) TH1 displayed on
upper heat roller) "Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
12 TH2 Fusing temperature Display of L2, Fusing heater lamp /2 0-255 is
sensor /2 (Edge of fusing temperature (°C) TH2 displayed on
roller) "Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
13 L3, Fusing heater lamp /3 0-255 is
TH1 displayed on
"Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
14 Main TH3 Fusing temperature Display of L4, Fusing heater lamp /4 0-255 is
body sensor /3 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) TH3 displayed on
lower belt) "Input check"
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
sensor /4 (Center of fusing temperature (°C) TH4 displayed on
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
sensor /5 (Edge of fusing temperature (°C) TH5 displayed on
Turn ON with
temperature
lower than a
prescribed level
50 EF TH1 Fusing temperature Display of EF L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp /1, /2, / Temperature
sensor /1 (EF: Upper temperature (°C) L3, L4, 3, /4, /5, /6 (EF) detection of the
center) L5, L6 center of 2nd
fusing heating
roller /Up
51 TH4 Fusing temperature Display of L1, L2, Fusing heater lamp /1, /2, / Temperature
sensor /4 (EF: Lower temperature (°C) L3, L4, 3, /4, /5, /6 (EF) detection of the
center) L5, L6 center of 2nd
fusing heating
roller /Lw
sensor /3 (EF: Upper temperature (°C) L3, L4, 3, /4, /5, /6 (EF) detection of the
edge) L5, L6 edge of 2nd
fusing heating
roller /Up
sensor /6 (EF: Lower temperature (°C) L3, L4, 3, /4, /5, /6 (EF) detection of the
edge) L5, L6 edge of 2nd
fusing heating
roller /Lw
54 TH1 Fusing temperature Display of L1 Fusing heater lamp /1 Turn ON when
sensor /1 (EF: Upper temperature (°C) (Upper center) the center
center) temperature of
fusing heating
roller /Up is 200
°C or lower
I-137

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
sensor /3 (EF: Upper temperature (°C) (Upper edge) the edge
edge) temperature of
fusing heating
roller /Up is 200
°C or lower
sensor /1 (EF: Upper temperature (°C) (Upper flat) the center
fusing heating
roller /Up is 200
°C or lower
sensor /4 (EF: Lower temperature (°C) (Lower center) the center
fusing heating
roller /Lw is 200
°C or lower
sensor /6 (EF: Lower temperature (°C) (Lower edge) the edge
edge) temperature of
fusing heating
roller /Lw is 200
°C or lower
59 TH4 Fusing temperature Display of L6 Fusing heater lamp /6 (EF: Turn ON when
sensor /4 (EF: Lower temperature (°C) Lower flat) the center
fusing heating
roller /Lw is 200
°C or lower
46 0 Optics Optics - LD Laser emission timing
adjustment (main
scanning)
47 0 Main M48 Fusing motor (Forward:
body 1/2 speed)
1 M48 Fusing motor (Forward:
3/4 speed)
2 M48 Fusing motor (Forward:
1/1 speed)
6 Main PS64 Fusing loop sensor • 000: No paper
body • 001: Paper
7 PS61 Fusing paper exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
8 PS60 Fusing paper exit open/ • 000: Close
close sensor • 001: Open
9 Main M48 Fusing roller press
body (Continuous rotation 1/2
speed)
10 M48 Fusing roller press
(Continuous rotation 3/4
speed)
11 M48 Fusing roller press
(Continuous rotation 1/1
speed)
13 M48, Fusing motor (Turn ON all
L1, L2, heaters at the same time)
L3, L4,
L5, L6
15 M52 Fusing web motor Continuous
rotation
16 M49 Fusing belt /Lw pressure
release motor
17 Main PS58 Fusing belt /Lw pressure • 000: Other M49 Fusing belt /Lw pressure
body release home sensor /1 than home release motor
position
• 001: Home
position
I-138

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
18 PS59 Fusing belt /Lw pressure • 000: Other M49 Fusing belt /Lw pressure
release home sensor /2 than home release motor
position
• 001: Home
position
19 PS57 Fusing external heating • 000: Other M53 Fusing external heating
belt pressure release than home belt pressure release
home sensor position motor
• 001: Home
position
21 PS62 Fusing belt /Lw steering • 000: Other
home sensor /1 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
22 PS63 Fusing belt /Lw steering • 000: Other
home sensor /2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS65 Fusing belt /Lw edge • 000: Other
sensor /1 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
sensor /2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
abnormal sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
26 PS57 Fusing external heating • 000: OFF Main M53 Fusing external heating
belt pressure release • 001: ON body belt pressure release
home sensor motor (Press/release)
27 M53 Fusing external heating
belt pressure release
motor (Press/release)
28 PS57 Fusing external heating • 000: OFF M53 Fusing external heating
belt pressure release • 001: ON belt pressure release
home sensor motor (Slight press/
release)
29 PS62 Fusing belt /Lw steering • 000: Other M54 Fusing belt /Lw steering
home sensor /1 than home motor (Home position
position frontward movement, the
• 001: Home belt moves to the front)
position
30 PS63 Fusing belt /Lw steering • 000: Other M54 Fusing belt /Lw steering
home sensor /2 than home motor (Home position
position backward movement, the
• 001: Home belt moves to the rear)
position
40 PS56 Fusing refresh roller • 000: Other M55 Fusing refreshing roller Continuous
pressure release home than home pressure release motor rotation
sensor position
• 001: Home
position
41 PS56 Fusing refresh roller • 000: Other M55 Fusing refreshing roller Stops at the
pressure release home than home pressure release motor pressure
sensor position (Press) position
• 001: Home
position
I-139

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
42 PS56 Fusing refresh roller • 000: Other M55 Fusing refreshing roller
pressure release home than home pressure release motor
sensor position (Release)
• 001: Home
position
43 M51 Fusing refresh roller motor
45 M50 Fusing belt /Lw release
time motor
48 0 Interme PS44 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other Interme M11 1st transfer pressure
diate release home sensor than home diate release motor (Home
Trans. position Trans. position search)
• 001: Home
position
1 PS44 1st transfer pressure • 000: Other M11 1st transfer pressure
release home sensor than home release motor (Stop at
position release position)
• 001: Home
position
position black and white mode
• 001: Home pressure position)
position
position color mode pressure
• 001: Home position)
position
release home sensor than home release motor (Home
• 001: Home
position
5 M11 1st transfer pressure
release motor (Home
position search)
50 0 Peculiar M5 Developing motor /Y (1/1
function speed)
1 s M5 Developing motor /Y (3/4
speed)
2 M5 Developing motor /Y (1/2
speed)
3 M6 Developing motor /M (1/1
speed)
speed)
speed)
6 M7 Developing motor /C (1/1
speed)
speed)
speed)
9 M8 Developing motor /K (1/1
speed)
speed)
speed)
12 Peculiar TCRS TCR sensor /Y output 0 to 255 M5 Developing motor/ Y
function /Y value (1/1 speed)
13 s TCRS TCR sensor /M output 0 to 255 M6 Developing motor /M
/M value (1/1 speed)
14 TCRS TCR sensor /C output 0 to 255 M7 Developing motor/ C
/C value (1/1 speed)
I-140

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
15 TCRS TCR sensor /K output 0 to 255 M8 Developing motor/ K
/K value (1/1 speed)
16 TCRS TCR sensor /Y 0 to 255 M5, Developing motor /Y, /M, /
/Y M6, C
M7
17 TCRS TCR sensor /Y 0 to 255 M5, Developing motor /Y, /M, /
/Y M6, C, /K
M7,
M8,
51 0 EL /Y Erase lamp /Y
1 EL /M Erase lamp /M
2 EL /C Erase lamp /C
3 EL /K Erase lamp /K
54 0 M15, Toner skew conveyance
M16 motor, Toner supply
motor /Y (high speed)
1 M15, Toner skew conveyance
motor /Y (low speed)
motor /Y (set value)
3 M 15, Toner skew conveyance
motor /M (high speed)
motor /M (low speed)
motor /M (set value)
motor /C (high speed)
motor /C (low speed)
motor /C (set value)
motor /K (high speed)
motor /K (low speed)
motor /K (set value)
12 CL16 Toner bottle clutch/ Y
13 CL17 Toner bottle clutch /M
14 CL18 Toner bottle clutch /C
15 CL19 Toner bottle clutch /K
22 M14 Toner hopper agitated
motor
23 M35 Waste toner collection
motor
24 M15 Toner skew conveyance
motor
55 0 SD8, Color registration shutter
SD9 solenoid /1, /2
1 Peculiar M13 Filter cleaning motor
function
s
I-141

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
2 M13 Filter cleaning motor Performs the
filter cleaning
operation for a
specified period
of time.
56 0 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
1 ON)
1 - Status indicator lamp (PAT
2 ON)
3 ON)
4 ON)
57 0 Peculiar - FS connection detection • 000: Not
function connected
s • 001:
Connected
2 - DF connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
3 - PF 1st tandem connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
4 - PF 2nd tandem connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
5 - EF connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
6 - Scanner connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
58 0 TCRS TCR sensor /Y control
/Y voltage (1/1 speed)
1 TCRS TCR sensor /M control
/M voltage (1/1 speed)
2 TCRS TCR sensor /C control
/C voltage (1/1 speed)
3 TCRS TCR sensor /K control
/K voltage (1/1 speed)
4 - TCR set detection /Y • 000: Set
• 001: Not set
5 - TCR set detection /M • 000: Set
• 001: Not set
6 - TCR set detection /C • 000: Set
• 001: Not set
7 - TCR set detection /K • 000: Set
• 001: Not set
59 10 Peculiar M1 Entrance conveyance
function motor (EF: 1/1 speed)
11 s M1 Entrance conveyance
motor (EF: 2/3 speed)
12 M1 Entrance conveyance
motor (EF: 1/2 speed)
13 M2 Bypass conveyance motor
(EF: 1/1 speed)
(EF: 2/3 speed)
(EF: 1/2 speed)
I-142

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
16 M5 Fusing motor (EF: 1/1
speed)
speed)
speed)
19 Peculiar PS5 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: OFF M4 Fusing swing motor (EF:
function (EF) • 001: ON forward rotation)
20 s PS5 Fusing swing home sensor • 000: OFF M4 Fusing swing motor (home
(EF) • 001: ON position search) (EF)
21 PS6 De-curler home sensor • 000: Home M3 De-curler pressure motor
(EF) position (EF: Forward)
• 001: Other
than home
position
22 PS6 De-curler home sensor • 000: Home M3 De-curler pressure motor
(EF) position (EF: Forward)
• 001: Other
than home
position
23 M6 Fusing pressure motor
(EF)
24 Peculiar PS16 Fusing pressure release • 000: Pressure M6 Fusing pressure motor
function sensor /1 release (EF)
s • 001: Pressure
25 • 000: Pressure M6 Fusing pressure motor
release (EF)
• 001: Pressure
(EF: Press)
(EF: Release)
30 SD1 Gate solenoid (EF)
31 SD2 Mount lock solenoid (EF)
32 FM3, Entrance cooling fan /Fr, /
FM4, Md, /Rr (EF)
FM5
33 FM6, Paper exit cooling fan /
FM7, Up1, /Up2, /Up3 (EF)
FM8
34 FM9, Paper exit cooling fan /
FM10, Lw1, /Lw2, /Lw3 (EF)
FM11
35 FM1, Exhaust fan /Rt, /Lt (EF)
FM2
36 FM21 Fusing cooling fan (EF)
38 Peculiar PS4 Front door sensor (EF) • 000: Close
function • 001: Open
39 s - Fusing unit connection • 000: Not set
signal (EF) • 001: Set
40 PS3 Entrance guide plate • 000: Close
sensor (EF) • 001: Open
43 PS11 Bypass guide plate • 000: Close
sensor /2 (EF) • 001: Open
44 PS12 Bypass guide plate • 000: Close
sensor /1 (EF) • 001: Open
45 PS13 Conveyance guide plate • 000: Close
sensor (EF) • 001: Open
46 PS1 Entrance sensor (EF) • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
47 PS14 Fusing entrance sensor • 000: No paper
(EF) • 001: Paper
48 PS15 Fusing exit sensor (EF) • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
I-143

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
49 PS2 Paper exit sensor (EF) • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
50 PS7 Conveyance sensor /Rt • 000: No paper
(EF) • 001: Paper
51 PS8 Conveyance door sensor / • 000: No paper
Lt (EF) • 001: Paper
60 1 DF PS304 No paper sensor • 000: No paper DF M301 Paper feed motor
• 001: Paper (Forward: 300mm/sec)
2 PS301 Registration sensor • 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
3 PS302 Timing sensor • 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
4 PS305 Reverse sensor • 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
• 001: Paper (Reverse: 300mm/sec)
5 PS306 Paper exit sensor • 000: No paper M301 Paper feed motor
• 001: Paper (Reverse: 400mm/sec)
6 PS303 Paper feed cover sensor • 000: Close M301 Paper feed motor
• 001: Open (Reverse: 900mm/sec)
7 PS308 Tray open/close sensor • 000: Open M302 Paper feed motor
• 001: Close (Forward: 300mm/sec)
8 PS307 Paper exit cover sensor • 000: Close M302 Paper feed motor
• 001: Open (Forward: 400mm/sec)
9 RS ADF open/close switch • 000: Close M302 Paper feed motor
• 001: Open (Forward: 900mm/sec)
10 M302 Paper feed motor
(Reverse: 300mm/sec)
13 M303 Reverse/paper exit motor
(Forward: 300mm/sec)
19 SD302 Reverse solenoid
20 SD301 Exit solenoid
21 CL301 Registration clutch
69 1 RU-508 SD1 Humidification section gate
solenoid
2 SD2 De-curler gate solenoid /1
3 SD3 De-curler gate solenoid /2
4 SD6 Reverse/exit solenoid /Up
5 SD7 Reverse/exit solenoid /Lw
6 RU-508 - Humidification unit set • 000: ON
signal (DIPSW 4) • 001: OFF
7 - Subsequent stage • 000:
connection detection Connected
• 001: Not
connected
9 - RU-508 connection • 000: Not
detection connected
• 001:
Connected
10 - Water tank full sensor • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
I-144

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
15 RU-508 M10 Humidification section
roller pressure motor /Lt
(home position search)
16 M10 Humidification roller Enabled after
pressure home sensor /Lt conducting
(Press) home position
search (69-15)
17 RU-508 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400mm/s)
18 PS2 De-curler entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
• 001: No paper motor (400mm/s)
19 PS3 Color density detection • 000: Paper M4 Paper exit motor
timing sensor • 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
20 PS4 Reverse paper exit gate • 000: Paper M5 De-curler pressure home
previous sensor • 001: No paper sensor /Lw(home position
search)
21 PS5 De-curler pressure home • 000: Home M5 De-curler pressure motor / Enabled after
sensor /Lw position LW conducting
• 001: Other home position
than home search (69-20)
position
22 PS6 De-curler pressure home • 000: Other M6 De-curler pressure motor /
sensor /Up than home Up (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
23 M6 De-curler pressure motor / Enabled after
Up conducting
home position
search (69-22)
25 FM1, Entrance paper fan /1, /2, /
FM2, 3
FM3
26 FM4, Ventilation assist fan /1, /2
FM5
FM16, 6
FM17
FM19, 9
FM20
29 FM21, Ventilation assist fan /3,
FM22 Conveyance paper fan
30 RU-508 SW1 Door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board
• 001: Close
31 M3 De-curler conveyance
motor (400mm/s)
33 RU-508 PS7 Humidification section • 000: Paper M7 Humidification entrance
entrance sensor • 001: No paper conveyance motor
(400mm/s)
34 PS8 Water tank empty sensor • 000: No water P1 Pump motor
• 001: Water
35 PS9 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor /Rt
sensor /Rt position (home position search)
• 001: Home
position
36 PS10 Humidification section • 000: Other M9 Humidification section Enabled after
roller pressure home than home roller pressure motor/Rt conducting
sensor /Lt position (Press) home position
• 001: Home search (69-35)
position
37 M8 Humidification section
conveyance motor
(400mm/s)
39 PS11 Reverse/exit sensor • 000: Paper M11 Reverse/exit motor Reverse
• 001: No paper (1000mm/s) direction
I-145

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
40 PS12 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M11 Reverse/exit motor Exit direction
• 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
41 FM6, Humidification section
FM7, paper fan /1, /2, /3
FM8
44 FM9, Humidification section
FM10, paper fan /4, /5, /6
FM11
49 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit CDLE Color density LED/Y, Color
Y board /Y (LED OFF) out of 16bit DY, density LED/M, Color
CDLE density LED/C, Color
DM, density LED/K
CDLE
DC,
CDLE
DK
50 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit SD5 Shutter solenoid
M board /M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
51 CDDB Color density detection Display top 8 bit
C board /M (LED OFF) out of 16bit
K board /K (LED OFF) out of 16bit
Y board /Y (LED ON) out of 16bit
M board /M (LED ON) out of 16bit
C board /C (CDDBC) out of 16bit
K board /K (LED ON) out of 16bit
70 1 FD PS1 FD entrance sensor • 000: Paper FD M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: No paper motor
2 PS4 PI exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Punch conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS5 Punch conveyance sensor • 000: Paper M3 Intermediate conveyance
4 PS7 Main tray folding paper full • 000: Full M4 1st folding motor (F
sensor • 001: Other rotation)
than full
5 PS8 2 holes punch home • 000: Other M4 1st folding motor (R
sensor than home rotation)
position
• 001: Home
position
6 PS9 3 holes/4 holes home • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (F
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS10 Alignment plate home • 000: Other M5 2nd folding motor (R
position
• 001: Home
position
8 PS11 Punch registration home • 000: Other M6 3rd folding motor (F
position
• 001: Home
position
9 PS12 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not set M6 3rd folding motor (R
sensor • 001: Set rotation)
10 PS13 Intermediate conveyance • 000: No paper M7 PI conveyance motor
11 PS16 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M8 Paper lift motor /Up (down)
• 001: Paper
I-146

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
12 PS17 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full M8 Paper lift motor /Up (up)
• 001: Other
than full
13 PS18 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper M9 Paper lift motor /Lw (down)
14 PS20 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M9 Paper lift motor /Lw (up)
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
15 PS22 Main tray lower limit • 000: Other M17 Main tray exit motor
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
16 PS23 Main tray empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
17 PS26 Punch scraps full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 FD M10 Punch motor (3 holes)
22 FD PS2 Folding exit sensor • 000: No paper M10 Punch motor (2 holes)
• 001: Paper
23 CN90 Main tray connection • 000: M11 Tray up down motor (home
recognition (CN90 Connected position search)
connection) • 001:
Unconnected
24 PS51 1st folding conveyance • 000: Paper M12 Alignment motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
25 PS52 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
26 PS53 2nd folding conveyance • 000: Paper FD M13 Punch registration motor
sensor • 001: No paper
27 PS54 3rd folding conveyance • 000: Paper M14 1st folding release motor
sensor • 001: No paper (conveyance position
move)
28 PS55 1st folding cam home • 000: Pressure M14 1st folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
29 PS56 2nd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor
sensor • 001: Release (conveyance position
move)
30 PS57 3rd folding cam home • 000: Pressure M15 2nd folding release motor ON: Folding
sensor • 001: Release (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
31 PS58 S size conveyance sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor
• 001: Paper (conveyance position
move)
32 PS6 Punch registration sensor • 000: No paper M16 3rd folding release motor ON: Folding
• 001: Paper (folding position move) position OFF:
Conveyance
position
33 FDOB Staple selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
34 FDOB Punch selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
35 FDOB Folding selection switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
36 FDOB Start/Stop switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
37 FDOB Multi feed function select • 000: ON
switch • 001: OFF
39 PS46 Sub tray folding paper full • 000: Other
sensor than full
• 001: Full
I-147

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
40 PS31 PI conveyance sensor /Up • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
41 PS37 PI conveyance sensor /Lw • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
42 PS32 PI upper limit sensor /Up • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS33 PI paper empty sensor /Up • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
44 PS34 PI lift plate home sensor / • 000: Other
Up than home
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS35 L size sensor /Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS36 S size sensor /Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
48 PS38 PI upper limit sensor /Lw • 000: Other
than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS39 PI paper empty sensor /Lw • 000: Other
than full
• 001: Full
50 PS40 PI lift plate home sensor / • 000: Other
Lw than home
position
• 001: Home
position
51 PS41 L size sensor /Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
52 PS42 S size sensor /Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
53 PS43 PI cover open/close • 000: Open
sensor • 001: Close
54 PS44 PI paper set sensor /Up • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
55 PS45 PI paper set sensor /Lw • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
61 PS47 PI max paper size sensor / • 000: Paper FD SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
Up • 001: No paper
62 PS48 PI max paper size sensor / • 000: Paper SD3 S size gate solenoid
Lw • 001: No paper
63 SD4 L size gate solenoid
64 FD - FD connection detection • 000: Not SD5 Roller solenoid /1
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
65 SD6 Roller solenoid /2
68 SD9 Sub tray gate solenoid
69 SD12 Paper exit solenoid
70 SD13 PI pick-up solenoid /Up
71 SD14 PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
72 SD15 Folding gate solenoid
74 SD18 2nd folding roller solenoid
75 CL1 PI registration clutch /Up
76 CL2 PI registration clutch /Lw
I-148

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
82 MFDB Multi feed detection
1 board /1 (CLK output)
89 FDOB FD operation board (lit all
LEDs)
90 JAMIB Jam indication board (lit all
LEDs)
71 1 SD PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper SD M1 Entrance conveyance
• 001: Paper motor
2 PS2 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M2 Horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 • 001: Paper motor
3 PS3 Horizontal conveyance • 000: No paper M3 Folding entrance motor
4 PS4 Horizontal conveyance exit • 000: No paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor • 001: Paper (F rotation)
5 PS5 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M4 Folding conveyance motor
sensor /1 • 001: No paper (R rotation)
6 PS6 Right angle conveyance • 000: Paper M6 Right angle conveyance
sensor /2 • 001: No paper motor
7 PS7 Folding sensor /1 • 000: Paper M29 Stapler motor /Rt (1 staple)
• 001: No paper
8 PS8 Folding passage sensor • 000: No paper M30 Stapler motor /Lt (1 staple)
• 001: Paper
9 PS17 Overlap home sensor • 000: Other M5 Bundle exit motor
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
10 PS18 Folding main scan • 000: Home M8 Folding sub scan
alignment home sensor / position alignment exit motor
Fr1 • 001: Other
than home
position
11 PS49 Folding main scan • 000: Home
alignment home sensor / position
Fr2 • 001: Other
than home
position
12 PS20 1st folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor /1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
13 PS21 1st folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor /2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS22 2nd folding blade home • 000: Home
sensor /1 position
• 001: Other
than home
position
15 PS23 2nd folding blade home • 000: Other
sensor /2 than home
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS24 Folding exit home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS9 Tri-folding exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
18 PS10 Tri-folding paper full • 000: Full
sensor • 001: Other
than full
I-149

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
19 PS11 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
20 PS12 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full
• 001: Other
than full
21 PS44 Folding sensor /2 • 000: Paper SD M5 Bundle exit motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
22 PS19 Folding main scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor /Rr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS46 Guide shaft home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 HS2/ Clincher start sensors / • 000: Clinch SD M7 Folding main scan
HS4 Rt, /Lt • 001: No clinch alignment motor /Fr (home
position search)
25 M7 Folding main scan Enabled after
alignment motor /Fr conducting
(alignment) home position
search (71-24)
27 M8 Folding sub scan
alignment exit motor
29 M9 Saddle stitching alignment
motor /Rt (home position
search)
30 M9 Saddle stitching alignment Enabled after
motor /Rt (inward conducting
movement) home position
search (71-29)
31 M10 Bundle arm motor (home
position search)
32 M10 Bundle arm motor (inward Enabled after
movement) conducting
home position
search (71-31)
33 SD PS13 Saddle stitching paper • 000: Paper M11 Bundle clip motor (home
sensor • 001: No paper position search)
34 PS14 Bundle sensor /1 • 000: Paper M12 Bundle registration motor
• 001: No paper (home position search)
35 PS15 Bundle sensor /2 • 000: Paper M13 Overlap motor (home
• 001: No paper position search)
36 PS16 Bundle registration plate • 000: Home M14 Folding main scan
home sensor position alignment motor /Rr (home
• 001: Other position search)
than home
position
37 PS25 Stapler movement home • 000: Other M14 Folding main scan After conducting
sensor than home alignment motor /Rr home position
position (forward movement) search (71-36)
• 001: Home
position
38 PS26 Clincher up down home • 000: Home
sensor position
• 001: Other
than home
position
39 PS27 Saddle stitching press • 000: Other SD M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-150

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
40 PS28 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M15 Stapler movement motor
home sensor /Rt than home (staple position movement)
position
• 001: Home
position
41 PS29 Saddle stitching alignment • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
home sensor /Lt than home motor /Lt (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
42 PS33 Bundle clip upper limit • 000: Other M16 Saddle stitching alignment
sensor than upper motor /Lt (inward
limit movement)
• 001: Upper
limit
43 PS30 Bundle clip lower limit • 000: Other M17 Bundle press movement
sensor than lower motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Lower
limit
44 PS32 Bundle arm home sensor • 000: Other M18 1st folding blade motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
45 PS31 Bundle arm rotation home • 000: Other M19 2nd folding blade motor
sensor than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
46 PS34 Bundle registration home • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
position
• 001: Home
position
47 PS35 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M20 Clincher up down motor
down home sensor than home (stapling)
position
• 001: Home
position
48 PS45 Bundle press stage up • 000: Other M21 Saddle stitching press
down limit sensor than upper motor (home position
limit search)
• 001: Upper
limit
49 PS37 Bundle press home sensor • 000: Home M22 Bundle arm rotation motor
position (home position search)
• 001: Other
than home
position
50 PS47 Bundle press lower limit • 000: Lower M23 Bundle press motor (home
sensor limit position search)
• 001: Other
than lower
limit
51 PS48 Scraps press home sensor • 000: Other M24 Bundle press stage up
than home down motor (home
• 001: Home
position
52 PS40 Scraps box set sensor • 000: Not set M25 Guide shaft motor (home
• 001: Set position search)
53 PS41 Trimmer scraps full sensor • 000: Full M31 Trimmer blade motor
• 001: Other (home position search)
than full
I-151

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
54 PS36 Bundle press movement • 000: Other M31 Trimmer blade motor
home sensor than home (trimming position)
position
• 001: Home
position
55 PS38 Bundle arm assist home • 000: Other M32 Trimmer press motor
position
• 001: Home
position
56 PS39 Bundle arm assist upper • 000: Upper M32 Trimmer press motor
limit sensor limit (upper limit search)
• 001: Other
than upper
limit
57 SW1 Staple empty switch /Rt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (pressing) conducting
home position
search (71-55)
58 SW2 Staple empty switch /Lt • 000: Staple M32 Trimmer press motor Enabled after
• 001: No staple (movement to trimmer conducting
board release position) home position
search (71-55)
59 HS1 Stapler home sensor /Rt • 000: Home M10 Bundle arm motor (inward
position movement)
• 001: Other
than home
position
60 HS3 Stapler home sensor /Lt • 000: Home M23 Bundle press motor
position (pressing)
• 001: Other
than home
position
61 PS50 Trimmer blade home • 000: Other M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor than home down motor (up)
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS51 Trimmer blade upper limit • 000: Upper M24 Bundle press stage up
sensor limit down motor (home
• 001: Other position search for the
than upper bundle registration plate)
limit
63 PS52 Trimmer press upper limit • 000: Other M26 Bundle arm assist motor
sensor than upper (home position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
64 PS53 Trimmer press home • 000: Other
sensor than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
65 PS42 Front door sensor /Rt • 000: Close SD M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (forward rotation)
66 PS43 Front door sensor /Lt • 000: Close M33 Trimmer paddle motor
• 001: Open (reverse rotation)
67 PS54 Bundle sensor /4 • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
68 PS55 Trimmer registration • 000: Other
sensor than
registration
position
• 001:
Registration
position
I-152

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
69 PS56 Folding sub scan • 000: Other
alignment home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
70 PS57 Bundle exit sensor /2 • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
71 PS58 Bundle tray set sensor • 000: Set SD SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
• 001: Not set
72 PS59 Trimmer board • 000: Not SD2 Right angle conveyance
replacement sensor replace gate solenoid
• 001: replace
73 SD3 Horizontal conveyance
gate solenoid
74 SD4 Roller release solenoid /4
75 SD PS61 Bundle tray paper full • 000: Other SD5 Roller release solenoid /1
sensor than full (roller press)
• 001: Full
(roller release)
77 SD PS60 Folding entrance sensor • 000: Paper SD6 Roller release solenoid /2
• 001: No paper
(roller press)
(roller release)
80 SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
(lock)
81 SD PS62 Trimmer completion • 000: Other SD8 Folding unit lock solenoid
sensor than complete (release)
• 001: Complete
82 SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
(ON once)
83 SD PS66 Wire slack prevention • 000: Without SD11 Trimmer board solenoid
sensor slack (ON twice)
• 001: With
slack
84 - New trimming unit • 000: SD12 Brake solenoid
connection detection Connected
• 001: Not
connected
86 CL1 Tri-folding exit clutch
87 FM1 Scraps removal fan motor
88 SD - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
90 SD JAMIB Jam indication board (LED
/2 ON)
95 - Trimmer board solenoid Reset after
operation counter reset replace the
trimmer board
96 - Set of trimming operation
97 M32 Trimmer press motor
(Move the trimmer board
replace position after
home position search)
98 M32, Trimmer board forced
SD11 movement (Turn ON SD11
after the trimmer press
motor moves to the
trimmer board replacement
position)
72 1 FS-521 PS35 Rear stopper home sensor • 000: Other FS-521 M1 Conveyance motor
than home (1000mm/sec)
position
I-153

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
• 001: Home
position
2 PS33 Intermediate roller home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
3 PS32 Stack assist home sensor • 000: Other
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
4 PS14 Stapler rotation home • 000: Home
sensor position
• 001: Other
than home
position
5 PS11 Stapler movement home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
6 PS34 Staple scraps box set • 000: Not set FS-521 M3 Tray up down motor (home
sensor • 001: Set position search)
7 PS30 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Full M3 Tray up down motor (lower
• 001: Other limit move)
than full
8 PS1 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
9 PS5 Stacker entrance sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
10 PS4 FNS entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
11 PS15 Counter reset sensor • 000: Other FS-521 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (home
than reset position search)
• 001: Reset
12 PS12 Paper exit home sensor • 000: Home M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
position standby position move) from the home
• 001: Other position
than home
position
13 PS10 Main tray paper exit • 000: Paper M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
sensor • 001: No paper position move) from A4S
position
14 PS3 Tray lower limit sensor • 000: Other M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4S Available only
than lower standby position move) after the
limit alignment
• 001: Lower operation
limit
15 PS39 Paper empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
16 FS-521 M7 Main tray exit motor
(800mm/sec)
17 M7 Main tray exit motor
(205mm/sec)
21 FS-521 PS47 Staple ready sensor/Fr • 000: Ready M8 Paper exit opening motor
than ready
22 PS43 Cartridge set sensor /Fr • 000: Cartridge M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
• 001: No (full opening: approx. 55°) from the home
cartridge position
23 PS45 Staple empty sensor /Fr • 000: Staple M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
• 001: No staple (half opening: approx. 44°) from the home
position
I-154

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
24 PS41 Stapler home sensor /Fr • 000: Home M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
position (small opening: approx. from the home
• 001: Other 27°) position
than home
position
25 PS46 Staple ready sensor/Rr • 000: Ready
• 001: Other
than ready
26 PS42 Cartridge set sensor /Rr • 000: Cartridge FS-521 M31 Stapler motor /Fr (needles
• 001: No out, empty staple)
cartridge
27 PS44 Staple empty sensor /Rr • 000: Staple M31 Stapler motor /Fr (staple) Available after
• 001: No staple initialization
28 PS40 Stapler home sensor /Rr • 000: Home M30 Stapler motor /Rr (needles
position out, empty staple)
• 001: Other
than home
position
29 M30 Stapler motor /Rr (staple) Available after
initialization
30 FS-521 PS20 Stacker empty sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
31 PS9 Paper exit arm home • 000: Home FS-521 M4, Stapler rotation motor,
sensor position M11 Stapler movement motor
than home
position
32 MS1 Door switch • 000: Close M4, Stapler rotation motor,
• 001: Open M11 Stapler movement motor
(1 stapling position
movement in A4 size)
33 PS31 Alignment home sensor /Fr • 000: Other M16 Stacker entrance roller
than home release motor (home
• 001: Home
position
34 PS8 Alignment home sensor / • 000: Other M16 Stacker entrance roller
Rr than home release motor (pressing
position release position move)
• 001: Home
position
35 PS6 Tray middle position • 000: No tray
sensor • 001: Tray
36 PS13 Bypass roller release • 000: Home FS-521 M13 Stacker entrance motor
home sensor position (1000mm/sec)
• 001: Other
than home
position
37 PS16 Tray upper limit sensor • 000: Tray
• 001: No tray
38 PS19 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other
home sensor /Rr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
39 PS18 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other
home sensor /Fr than home
position
• 001: Home
position
40 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
41 OB Operation board (Pause • 000: ON FS-521 M26 Rear stopper motor (home
button) • 001: OFF position search)
I-155

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
42 PS24 Paper exit alignment plate • 000: Other M26 Rear stopper motor Available only
retraction home sensor than home (stopper release) from the home
position position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS17 Tray quarter position • 000: No tray
sensor • 001: Tray
44 PS23 Stacker entrance roller • 000: Other
release home sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
46 FS-521 SD5 Bypass solenoid
47 SD2 Gate solenoid
48 SD9 Paper exit opening
solenoid (ON/OFF)
49 SD7 Intermediate roller release
solenoid
51 M24 Stack assist guide motor
52 M24 Stack assist guide motor Available only
(assist position move) from the home
position
56 M25 Intermediate roller open
close motor (home position
search)
57 M25 Intermediate roller open Available only
close motor (reserve from the home
position move) position
61 M23 Paper exit arm motor Available after
(home position search) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
(800mm/sec) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
(400mm/sec) conducting
intermediate
roller open/close
motor shelter
position (72-57)
66 M6 Sub tray exit motor
(1000mm/sec)
67 M18 Paper exit alignment plate
retraction motor (home
position search)
retraction motor
(Alignment position move)
71 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (home
position search)
72 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4S Available only
standby position move) from the home
position
position move) from A4S
position
standby position move) after the
alignment
operation
I-156

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
75 OB Operation board (LED ON)
76 M2 Paddle motor (ON/OFF)
77 JAMIB Jam indication board
(illuminate all LEDs)
78 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr
M22 (home position search)
79 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr Available only
M22 (A4S standby position from the home
move) position
80 M5, Alignment motor /Rr, /Fr Available only
M22 (A4S position move) from A4S
position
81 M12 Bypass roller release
motor (home position
search)
82 M12 Bypass roller release Available only
motor (strong pressing from the home
motor (home position from strong
move) pressing position
motor (pressing release from the home
motor (home position from pressing
move) release position
86 M14 Paper exit alignment
motor /Rr (home position
search)
motor /Rr (A4S standby
position move)
88 M14 Paper exit alignment Available only
motor /Rr (Move from A4S from A4S
standby position to standby position
alignment position)
motor /Rr (Move from A4S from A4S
alignment position to alignment
standby position) position
motor /Fr (home position
search)
motor /Fr (A4S standby
position move)
motor /Fr (Move from A4S from A4S
standby position to standby position
alignment position)
motor /Fr (Move from A4S from A4S
alignment position to alignment
standby position) position
94 M8 Paper exit opening motor
(home position move
(close))
94 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (home
position move)
94 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (home
position move)
motor /Rr (home position
move)
I-157

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
motor /Fr (home position
move)
retraction motor (home
position move)
95 M8 Paper exit opening motor
(opening big)
95 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4
straight standby position
move)
95 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4
straight standby position
move)
motor /Rr (A4 straight
standby position move)
motor /Fr (A4 straight
standby position move)
retraction motor (Move
from home position to
alignment position)
95 M3 Tray up down motor
(paper exit alignment plate
avoiding operation (from
down to up))
95 SD9 Paper exit opening
solenoid ON
96 M5 Alignment motor /Rr (A4
straight alignment position
move)
96 M22 Alignment motor /Fr (A4
straight alignment position
move)
motor /Rr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
motor /Fr (A4 straight
alignment position move)
98 FS-521 - FS connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
1 FS-612 PS1 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper FS-612 M1 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper (667mm/sec)
2 PS4 FNS entrance sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
3 PS19 Sub tray paper full sensor • 000: Other FS-612 M2 Shift roller motor (home
than full position search)
• 001: Full
4 PS12 Paper exit opening sensor • 000: Close
position
• 001: Other
than close
position
5 PS16 Gate home sensor • 000: Home
position
• 001: Other
than home
position
6 PS6 Main tray paper exit • 000: No paper FS-612 M3 Main tray up down motor
sensor • 001: Paper (home position search)
I-158

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7 PS18 Shift roller home sensor • 000: Home M3 Main tray up down motor
position (lower limit move)
• 001: Other
than home
position
8 M3 Main tray up down motor
(a few sheet up down
movement in staple mode)
10 FS-612 PS3 Main tray lower limit • 000: Other M4 Clincher rotation motor
sensor than lower (home position search)
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
11 M5 Alignment motor /Up
12 FS-612 PS2 Main tray upper limit • 000: Other M5 Alignment motor /Up (A4S Available only
sensor than upper standby position move) from the home
limit position
• 001: Upper
limit
13 PS7 Stapler paper exit upper • 000: Upper M5 Alignment motor /Up Available only
limit sensor limit (alignment operation) from the A4
• 001: Other position
than upper
limit
14 PS15 Counter reset sensor • 000: No paper M5 Alignment motor /Up Available only
• 001: Paper (standby position move) after the
alignment
operation
16 M7 Stapler roller motor (staple
mode)
17 FS-612 PS5 Stacker entrance sensor • 000: No paper M7 Paper exit roller motor
• 001: Paper (folding mode)
18 PS8 Alignment home sensor / • 000: Other
Up than home
position
• 001: Home
position
19 PS9 Paper exit belt home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
20 PS11 Stapler movement home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
21 PS13 Stapler rotation home • 000: Other FS-612 M8 Paper exit opening motor
position
• 001: Home
position
22 PS14 Clincher rotation home • 000: Other M8 Paper exit opening motor Available only
sensor) than home (opening moved: in A4S from the home
position stapling mode) position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS20 Stacker empty sensor • 000: No paper
• 001: Paper
24 MS1 Door switch • 000: Close
• 001: Open
25 PS31 Stapler motor home • 000: Home
sensor /Fr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
I-159

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
26 PS30 Stapler motor home • 000: Home FS-612 M14 Stapler motor /Fr (initial
sensor /Rr position operation performed)
• 001: Other
than home
position
27 SW4 Staple empty switch /Fr • 000: Staple M14 Stapler motor /Fr (stapling
• 001: No staple operation performed)
28 SW2 Staple empty switch /Rr • 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor /Rr (initial
• 001: No staple operation performed)
29 SW4 Staple empty switch /Fr • 000: Staple M9 Stapler motor /Rr (stapling
(U-shaped staple) • 001: No staple operation performed)
30 SW2 Staple empty switch /Rr • 000: Staple
(U-shaped staple) • 001: No staple
31 SW3 Cartridge set switch /Fr • 000: Cartridge FS-612 M 11, Stapler rotation motor,
• 001: No M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (home position search)
32 SW1 Cartridge set switch /Rr • 000: Cartridge M 11, Stapler movement motor,
• 001: No M4 Clincher rotation motor
cartridge (A4, 1 staple position)
35 PS33 Clincher motor home • 000: Home
sensor /Fr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
36 PS32 Clincher up down home • 000: Home FS-612 M13 Stacker entrance motor
sensor /Rr position (670mm/sec)
• 001: Other
than home
position
38 M6 Stapler rotation motor
39 M16 Alignment motor /Lw
41 FS-612 PS22 Folding knife home sensor • 000: Home M18 Saddle stitching stopper
position motor (home position
• 001: Other search)
than home
position
42 PS23 Saddle stitching stopper • 000: Other M18 Saddle stitching stopper Available only
home sensor than home motor (A4S stopper from the home
position release) position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS24 Alignment home sensor / • 000: Other M19 Folding knife motor (1
Lw than home cycle performed)
position
• 001: Home
position
44 PS25 Folding paper exit sensor • 000: No paper M20 Folding transfer motor
• 001: Paper (high speed forward
rotation)
45 PS26 Folding passage sensor • 000: No paper SD4 paper exit opening
• 001: Paper solenoid
46 PS29 Folding full sensor • 000: Other SD5 Bypass gate solenoid
than full
• 001: Full
47 SD6 Tri-folding gate solenoid
48 SD51 Paper assist solenoid
49 FS-612 PS201 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper SD7, Flat stitching stopper
sensor /Up (PI) • 001: Paper SD8 release solenoid /Fr, /Rr
50 PS206 Paper pass-through • 000: No paper
sensor /Lw (PI) • 001: Paper
53 FS-612 M21 Sub tray exit motor
(667mm/sec)
55 M12 Gate motor (position
search)
I-160

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
57 FS-612 PS301 Punch home sensor (PK) • 000: Home
position
• 001: Other
than home
position
58 PS306 Punch encoder sensor • 000: FS-612 M51 Paper assist motor (F
(PK) Transparent rotation)
• 001: Light
blocked
59 PS302 Punch scraps box full • 000: Full
sensor (PK) • 001: Other
than full
60 PS304 Punch scraps box set • 000: Not set
sensor (PK) • 001: Set
61 PS303 Punch shift home sensor • 000: Other
(PK) than home
position
• 001: Home
position
62 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper
(edge detection 5) (PK) • 001: Paper
65 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper FS-612 M302 Punch shift motor (home
(edge detection 2) (PK) • 001: Paper position search) (PK)
66 PS305 Paper size sensor swing • 000: No paper M302 Punch shift motor (PK)
69 M301 Punch motor (home
position search) (PK)
70 M301 Punch motor (2-hole PK
punch execute)
71 M301 Punch motor (3/4-hole PK
punch execute)
73 FS-612 PS202 Paper empty sensor /Up • 000: Paper
(PI) • 001: No paper
74 PS203 PI paper set sensor /Up • 000: Paper
(PI) • 001: No paper
75 PS205 Tray upper limit sensor /Up • 000: Upper
(Upper tray) (PI) limit
• 001: Other
than upper
limit
76 PS204 Tray lower limit sensor /Up • 000: Lower
(Upper tray) (PI) limit
• 001: Other
than lower
limit
77 PIOB Sheet feeder manual start/ • 000: ON
clear switch • 001: OFF
78 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: ON
punch button switch (PI) • 001: OFF
79 PIOB Sheet feeder manual • 000: ON
function selection button • 001: OFF
switch (PI)
80 MS20 Upper door open/close • 000: Close
1 switch (PI) • 001: Open
81 FS-521/ PS207 Paper empty sensor /Lw • 000: Paper
612 (PI) • 001: No paper
82 FS-612 PS212 Paper set sensor /Lw (PI) • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
83 PS209 Tray upper limit sensor /Lw • 000: Other FS-612 M203 Conveyance motor
(Lower tray) (PI) than upper (667mm/sec) (PI)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
I-161

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
84 PS210 Tray lower limit sensor /Lw • 000: Other CL201 Transport clutch /Up (PI)
(Lower tray) (PI) than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
85 CL202 Transport clutch /Lw (PI)
86 FS-612 PS208 L size sensor /Lw (PI) • 000: Paper M201 Tray lift motor /Up (move
• 001: No paper down: home position
search)
87 M201 Tray lift motor /Up (move
up) (PI)
88 M202 Tray lift motor /Lw (move
down: home position
search) (PI)
89 M202 Tray lift motor /Lw (move
up) (PI)
90 SD201 Pick-up solenoid /Up (PI)
91 SD202 Pick-up solenoid /Lw (PI)
92 CL203 Registration clutch (PI)
96 FS-612 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
signal connected
• 001:
Connected
99 FS-612 - Paperless running mode
73 1 LS (1st PS4 Entrance sensor • 000: No paper LS (1st M2 Conveyance motor
tandem) • 001: Paper tandem)
2 PS10 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper M2 Conveyance motor
• 001: Paper
3 PS7 Conveyance sensor /1 • 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
• 001: Paper
4 PS16 Conveyance sensor /2 • 000: No paper M3 Sub tray exit motor
• 001: Paper
5 PS17 Conveyance sensor /3 • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
6 PS18 Coupling exit sensor • 000: No paper M6 Coupling conveyance
7 PS6 Paper empty sensor • 000: Full M4 Grip conveyance motor
• 001: Other
than full
8 PS3 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other M4 Grip conveyance motor
sensor than upper
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
9 PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
sensor • 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
• 001: Set motor (down)
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
• 001: Set motor (up)
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
I-162

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid /
• 001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid /
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid /2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor /
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor /Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor /1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /
Rr
32 LS (1st - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
74 1 LS (2nd M2 Conveyance motor
2 tandem) M2 Conveyance motor
5 M6 Coupling conveyance
motor
6 M6 Coupling conveyance
motor
7 M4 Grip conveyance motor
8 M4 Grip conveyance motor
9 LS (2nd PS13 2,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor (initial
tandem) sensor • 001: ON operation)
10 PS19 Paper detection sensor • 000: OFF M7 Alignment motor
• 001: ON
11 PS14 5,000 sheets stacked • 000: OFF M5 Shift unit motor (home
sensor • 001: ON position search)
12 PS9 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Other M5 Shift unit motor
than full
• 001: Full
13 PS1 Stacker tray set sensor • 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
• 001: Set motor (down)
14 RS1 Hand cart reset switch • 000: Not set M1 Stacker tray up down
• 001: Set motor (up)
15 PS15 Stacker tray arm release • 000: OFF SD1 1st gate solenoid
sensor • 001: ON
16 TOB Paper exit switch • 000: OFF SD10 2nd gate solenoid
• 001: ON
17 MS1 Front door switch • 000: Close SD9 Front stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
I-163

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
18 RS2 JAM door switch • 000: Close SD3 Rear stopper solenoid
• 001: Open
19 PS8 Sub tray door sensor • 000: Close SD8 Paper press arm solenoid /
• 001: Open 3
20 MS2 Stacker tray upper limit • 000: Other SD6 Paper press arm solenoid /
switch than upper 1
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
21 MS3 Stacker tray lower limit • 000: Other SD4 Front door lock solenoid
switch than lower
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
22 PS12 Alignment home sensor • 000: Other SD11 Tandem conveyance lock
than home solenoid
position
• 001: Home
position
23 PS11 Shift unit home sensor • 000: Other SD2 Job partition solenoid
than home
position
• 001: Home
position
24 PS5 Grip conveyance home • 000: Other SD7 Paper press solenoid /2
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
25 FM1, Paper cooling fan motor /
FM2, Fr, Paper cooling fan
FM3, motor /Mi, Paper cooling
FM6 fan motor /1, /2
26 FM5 Paper cooling fan motor /
Rr
32 LS (2nd - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
tandem) signal connected
• 001:
Connected
75 07 RU -506 PS5 Stacker jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
21 RU-506 SD1 Straight gate solenoid
22 SD2 Stacker exit shutter
solenoid
23 SD3 Stack switching solenoid
24 SD4 Stacker entrance guide
plate solenoid
29 RU -506 PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper M1 Entrance conveyance
40 - FNS connection detection • 000: Not
connected
• 001:
Connected
42 PS4 CD alignment plate home • 000: Other RU-506 M4 CD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS2 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M2 Paper exit motor
• 001: No paper
44 PS6 Entrance jam sensor • 000: Paper
• 001: No paper
46 PS3 FD alignment plate home • 000: Other RU-506 M3 FD alignment motor (home
sensor than home position move)
position
• 001: Home
position
I-164

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
47 FM2 Stack assist fan /Rr
49 RU -506 MS1 Interlock switch • 000: ON
• 001: OFF
52 RU-506 FM1 Stack assist fan /Fr
90 JAMIB JAM indicator board (lit all
LEDs)
77 1 PB PS1 Entrance sensor • 000: Paper PB M1 Entrance conveyance
2 PS2 SC entrance sensor • 000: Paper M2 Intermediate conveyance
3 PS3 Cover paper entrance • 000: No paper SD1 Entrance gate solenoid
4 PS4 Sub tray exit sensor • 000: No paper SD2 Bypass gate solenoid
• 001: Paper
5 PS5 Sub tray full sensor • 000: Full SD3 Sub tray gate solenoid
• 001: Other
than full
6 SD4 Sub tray exit solenoid
7 M11 SC entrance conveyance
motor
8 PB PS12 SC switchback arm • 000: Press M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Release conveyance motor (F
rotation)
9 PS13 SC switchback spring • 000: Release M12 SC switchback
pressure detection sensor • 001: Press conveyance motor (R
rotation)
10 PS14 SC alignment HP sensor • 000: Other M13 SC switchback release
than home motor (home position
position search)
• 001: Home
position
11 PS16 SC paper detection sensor • 000: Paper M13 SC switchback release
• 001: No paper motor (High pressing
position move)
12 PS17 SC roller release sensor • 000: Release M13 SC switchback release
• 001: Press motor (Low pressing
position move)
13 PS18 Clamp entrance movement • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor (home
HP sensor than home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
14 PS19 Clamp entrance roller • 000: Release M15 SC alignment motor (A4 77-13 must have
release sensor • 001: Press standby position move) been performed
in advance.
15 PS21 Clamp alignment HP • 000: Other M15 SC alignment motor
sensor than home (alignment)
position
• 001: Home
position
16 PS22 Clamp HP sensor • 000: Other M17 SC bundle conveyance
than home motor
position
• 001: Home
position
17 PS23 Clamp pressure sensor • 000: Release M18 SC roller release motor
• 001: Press (home position search)
18 PS24 Clamp rotation HP sensor • 000: Other M18 SC roller release motor
than home (movement to the pressing
position position)
• 001: Home
position
19 PS25 Clamp rotation pressure • 000: Release M19 Clamp entrance movement
sensor • 001: Press motor (home position
search)
I-165

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
20 PS26 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M19 Clamp entrance movement The following
limit sensor /Fr than upper motor (movement to the adjustments
limit entrance position) must have been
• 001: Upper made in
limit advance.
1. 77-19
2. 77-29
3. 77-31
4. 77-32
21 PS27 Cover paper table upper • 000: Other M20 Clamp entrance roller
limit sensor /Rr than upper release motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
22 PS28 Clamp paper sensor • 000: Paper M20 Clamp entrance roller
• 001: No paper release motor (pressing
position move)
23 PS29 Booklet thickness sensor • 000: Not SD11 FD alignment solenoid
detected
• 001: Detected
24 SD12 SC stopper solenoid
25 SD13 SC pressure arm solenoid
26 PB PS33 Glue tank HP sensor • 000: Other M21 Clamp alignment motor
than home (home position search)
position
• 001: Home
position
27 PS36 Pellet supply remaining • 000: Pellet M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: No pellet (A4 standby position
move)
28 PS37 Pellet supply passage • 000: Detected M21 Clamp alignment motor
sensor • 001: Not (alignment)
detected
29 PS38 Pellet supply arm upper • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (home
limit sensor than upper position search)
limit
• 001: Upper
limit
30 PS39 Pellet supply arm home • 000: Other M22 Clamp motor (movement
sensor than lower to the clamp position)
limit
• 001: Lower
limit
31 M32 Glue apply roller motor • 000: Abnormal M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: Normal (home position search) been performed
in advance.
32 PS3 Paper exit sensor • 000: Paper M23 Clamp rotation motor 77-19 must have
• 001: No paper (movement to the compile been performed
position) in advance.
33 PS41 Cover paper alignment HP • 000: Other SD91 Straight gate solenoid
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
34 PS42 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor /Rt than home motor (home position adjustments
position search) must have been
• 001: Home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
I-166

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
35 PS43 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M31 Glue tank movement The following
arm HP sensor /Lt than home motor (tank forward adjustments
position movement) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-51
36 PS44 Cover paper switchback • 000: Paper M31 Glue tank movement The following
sensor • 001: No paper motor (tank backward adjustments
movement) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-35
2. 77-55
3. 77-29
4. 77-34
5. 77-49
6. 77-51
37 PS45 Cover paper sensor /Rt • 000: Paper M32 Glue apply roller motor Be sure that the
• 001: No paper warm-up
completes.
38 PS46 Cover paper sensor /Lt • 000: Paper SD31 Glue tank up solenoid /1
• 001: No paper
39 PS47 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home SD32 Cover paper glue up
sensor /Fr position solenoid
• 001: Other
than home
position
40 PS53 Cover paper table HP • 000: Home H1 Glue tank heater
sensor /Rr position
• 001: Other
than home
position
41 PS48 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other H2 Glue apply roller heater
HP sensor /Rt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
42 PS49 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Other
HP sensor /Lt than home
position
• 001: Home
position
43 PS50 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not PB M34 Pellet supply arm motor
encoder sensor detected (home position search)
• 001: Detected
44 PS51 Cover paper folding plate • 000: Not at M34 Pellet supply arm motor The following
position sensor the reference (movement to the supply adjustments
position position) must have been
• 001: At the made in
reference advance.
position 1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
45 PS52 Cover paper folding • 000: Release M41 Cover paper alignment 77-55 must have
pressure sensor • 001: Press motor (home position been performed
search) in advance.
46 SW41 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (A3 standby position adjustments
• 001: Other move) must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
I-167

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
47 SW42 Cutter home sensor • 000: Home M41 Cover paper alignment The following
position motor (alignment) adjustments
• 001: Other must have been
than home made in
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-57
4. 77-60
5. 77-46
48 MS2 Front door switch • 000: Open M42 Booklet exit motor 77-55 must have
• 001: Close been performed
in advance.
49 PS57 Booklet door sensor • 000: Open M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
• 001: Close arm motor /Rt (home adjustments
position search) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
50 PS61 Booklet end sensor • 000: Not M43 Cover paper conveyance The following
detected arm motor /Rt (roller adjustments
• 001: Detected pressure) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
51 PS62 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
belt movement HP sensor than home arm motor /Lt (home adjustments
position position search) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
52 PS63 Cover paper belt home • 000: Other M44 Cover paper conveyance The following
sensor than home arm motor /Lt (roller adjustments
position pressure) must have been
position advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-51
53 PS64 Cover paper belt lower • 000: Other M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit sensor than lower motor (F rotation) been performed
limit in advance.
• 001: Lower
limit
54 PS65 Booklet load limit sensor • 000: Upper M45 Cover paper conveyance 77-55 must have
limit motor (R rotation) been performed
• 001: Other in advance.
than upper
limit
55 PS66 Booklet sensor /1 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down
• 001: No paper M47 motor /Fr, /Rr (home
position search)
I-168

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
56 PS67 Booklet sensor /2 • 000: Paper M46, Cover paper table up down The following
• 001: No paper M47 motor /Fr, /Rr (book spine adjustments
corner creation) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-50
6. 77-51
7. 77-52
8. 77-19
9. 77-31
10. 77-30
11. 77-32
12. 77-45
13. 77-58
14. 77-61
57 PS68 Booklet stopper HP sensor • 000: Other M48 Cover paper folding 77-55 must have
than home motor /Rt (home position been performed
position search) in advance.
• 001: Home
position
58 PS69 Cart set sensor • 000: Not set M48 Cover paper folding The following
• 001: Set motor /Rt (movement to adjustments
the open position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
59 OB/2 Booklet stock operation • 000: SW ON M48 Cover paper folding The following
board • 001: SW OFF motor /Rt (movement to adjustments
the close position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
3. 77-58
60 - - M49 Cover paper folding 77-55 must have
motor /Lt (home position been performed
search) in advance.
61 SW1 Upper door switch /1 • 000: Close M49 Cover paper folding The following
• 001: Open motor /Lt (movement to the adjustments
open position) must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-45
62 M50 Cutter motor (home 77-55 must have
position search) been performed
in advance.
63 M50 Cutter motor (cut position 77-55 must have
movement) been performed
in advance.
64 PBCB PB connection detection • 000: Not SD41 Cover paper lift solenoid The following
signal connected adjustments
• 001: must have been
Connected made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-49
5. 77-57
65 - Cover paper tray set • 000: Set
detection signal • 001: Not set
66 PB PS71 Cover paper empty sensor • 000: Paper PB
• 001: No paper
I-169

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
67 - power plug connection • 000: Power M61 Cover paper belt motor
detection signal detected
• 001:
68 PS74 Cover paper tray upper • 000: Other M62 Cover paper belt
limit sensor than upper movement motor (home
limit position search)
• 001: Upper
limit
69 PS75 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt 77-68 must have
sensor /1 • 001: No paper movement motor (A4 been performed
standby position move) in advance.
70 PS76 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M62 Cover paper belt
sensor /2 • 001: No paper movement motor (book
stock alignment)
71 PS77 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down
sensor /3 • 001: No paper motor (home position
search: upper limit)
72 PS78 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M63 Cover paper belt up down The following
sensor /4 • 001: No paper motor (movement to the adjustments
lower position) must have been
made in
advance.
1.77-68
2.77-69
73 PS79 Cover paper conveyance • 000: Paper M64 Booklet movement motor
sensor /5 • 001: No paper
74 PS80 Waste box full sensor • 000: Full M65 Book stopper motor (home
• 001: Other position search)
than full
75 PS81 Waste box set sensor • 000: Not set M65 Book stopper motor (A4 77-74 must have
• 001: Set standby position move) been performed
in advance.
76 M73 Cover paper tray lift motor
77 M74 Cover paper feed motor
78 SD71 Cover paper pick up
solenoid
79 SD72 Cover paper tray solenoid
80 PS82 Cover paper tray knob • 000: Release M71 Cover paper tray fan /1
sensor • 001: Lock
81 TH2 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 M72 Cover paper tray fan /2
sensor /Up
82 TH3 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 MC71 Cover paper feed clutch
sensor /Md
83 TH4 Glue tank temperature 0 to 255 MC72 Cover paper separation
sensor /Lw clutch
84 TH1 Glue apply roller 0 to 255 SD80 Front door lock solenoid
temperature sensor (locked)
85 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Glue SD80 Front door lock solenoid
apply SW ON (released)
• 001: Glue
apply SW OFF
86 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: M80 Exhaust fan /1
Alignment SW
ON
• 001:
Alignment SW
OFF
87 OB1 Manual operation board • 000: Start SW - Multi feed clock output
ON signal
• 001: Start SW
OFF
88 MS1 Pellet supply door switch • 000: Open JAMIB Jam indication board /1, /2
• 001: Close /1 (all the lights on)
JAMIB
/2
I-170

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
89 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal OB/1 Manual operation board
temperature sensor (high • 001: Abnormal (all the lights on)
temperature abnormality)
90 TH1 Glue apply roller • 000: Normal M4, Exhaust fan /2
temperature sensor (low- • 001: Abnormal M81 Pellet supply cooling fan
91 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor /Up (high • 001: Abnormal (lock)
92 TH2 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal SD61 Booklet door lock solenoid
sensor /Up (low- • 001: Abnormal (release)
93 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor /Md (high • 001: Abnormal
94 TH3 Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal
sensor /Md (low- • 001: Abnormal
95 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal M71, Cover paper feed 77-96 must have
sensor /Lw (high • 001: Abnormal M72, operation for the been performed
temperature abnormality) M73, adjustment of the multi in advance.
M74, feed detection board
SD71,
SD72,
MC71,
MC72
96 TH Glue tank temperature • 000: Normal - All initial operation
sensor /Lw (low- • 001: Abnormal
78 01 GP S1 Enter sensor • 000 : No GP - Entrance stepper motor
Paper
• 001 : Paper
02 S2 Stepper 1 speed sensor • 000 : No - Exit stepper motor
Paper
• 001 : Paper
03 S3 Punch module sensor • 000 : No - Transport motor
Paper
• 001 : Paper
04 S5 Back Gauge sensor • 000 : No - Punch motor
Paper
• 001 : Paper
05 S6 Stepper 2 speed sensor • 000 : No - Divert solenoid
Paper
• 001 : Paper
06 S7 Exit sensor • 000 : No - Backstop solenoid
Paper
• 001 : Paper
07 S8 Bypass sensor • 000 : No - Punch brake
Paper
• 001 : Paper
08 S9 Punch flag sensor • 000 : Home - Punch clutch
position
• 001 : Punch
operation
09 - Chip tray switch • 000 : Set - Punch stepper motor
• 001 : Not set punch operation
10 - Die set swtich • 000 : Set
• 001 : Not set
11 - Door switch • 000 : Close
• 001 : Open
13 S4 U-channel sensor • 000 : No
paper
• 001 : Paper
16 - GP connection detected • 000 : Not
connected
• 001 :
Connected
I-171

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
79 1 PB PS91 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper PB M92 Relay conveyance motor
intermediate sensor • 001: No paper (1000mm/s)
2 PS92 Relay conveyance door • 000: Open M91 Relay conveyance exit
sensor • 001: Close motor (1000mm/s)
3 PS93 Relay conveyance • 000: Paper OB2 Booklet stock operation
entrance sensor • 001: No paper board (JAM display LED
ON)
4 PS94 Relay conveyance exit • 000: Paper M33 Pellet supply pipe motor
sensor • 001: No paper (home position search)
5 M33 Pellet supply pipe motor The following
(upper limit position move) adjustments
must have been
made in
advance.
1. 77-55
2. 77-29
3. 77-34
4. 77-44
5. 79-05
6 PS96 Pellet supply pipe home • 000: Other
sensor than home
position
• 001: Home
position
7 PS95 Pellet supply pipe upper • 000: Not
limit sensor detected
• 001: Detected
80 0 ADU ADU SD3 Paper exit gate solenoid
81 0 PS13 ADU conveyance sensor / • 000: No paper CL7 ADU transport clutch /1
1 • 001: Paper
1 PS14 ADU conveyance sensor / • 000: No paper CL8 ADU transport clutch /2
2 • 001: Paper
3 CL8 ADU transport clutch /3
4 CL10 ADU transport clutch /4
5 CL11 ADU conveyance clutch /5
82 0 SD2 ADU solenoid ON
83 0 ADU ADU mount drive motor
ON
84 0 M56 ADU reverse motor (1/2
speed) (F rotation) ON
1 M56 ADU reverse motor (3/4
3 M56 ADU reverse motor
(470mm/s) (F rotation) ON
(1000mm/s) (F rotation)
ON
speed) (R rotation) ON
(470mm/s) (R rotation) ON
(1000mm/s) (R rotation)
ON
85 0 M57 ADU loop motor (1/2
I-172

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
1 M57 ADU loop motor (3/4
3 M57 ADU loop motor (470mm/
s) (F rotation) ON
s) (F rotation) ON
speed) (R rotation)
speed) (R rotation)
s) (F rotation)
s) (R rotation)
86 0 PS55 De-curler pressure • 000: Other M47 De-curler pressure
adjustment sensor than home adjustment motor ON
position
• 001: Home
position
1 M47 De-curler pressure
adjustment motor ON
90 0 Adjustm Adjustm - Finishing option Perform after
ent/ ent/ adjustment data EEPROM adjustment FD,
special special storage SD, FS (FS-521)
10 mode mode - Scanner adjustment data Perform after
EEPROM writing (PF-705) installation
91 0 - Main body adjustment data Perform after
NVRAM board storage installation
92 0 - NVRAM board data reset Cannot adjust in
the field
93 0 - Finishing option Cannot be
adjustment data EEPROM operated in the
storage (factory initial field. FD, SD, FS
data) (FS-521)
10 - Scanner adjustment data Cannot adjust in
EEPROM writing (PF-705) the field
(Factory Initial Data)
94 0 - Adjustment value list
display
1 - Operation panel all lit
96 0 - Main body adjustment data Cannot adjust in
NVRAM board storage the field
(initial data)
97 0 - Image memory (DRAM)
capacity check (1 color)
98 0 - Image memory (DRAM) /Y
check
1 - Image memory (DRAM) /M
check
2 - Image memory (DRAM) /C
check
3 - Image memory (DRAM) /K
check
4 - Image memory (DRAM) /A
check
5 - Image memory (DRAM) /P Always
check completes
normally when
no option P ch is
installed.
I-173

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM) /Y
check
7 - Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM) /M
check
8 Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM) /C
check
9 Image processing board
line memory (SDRAM) /K
check
99 1 HDD/ Hard disk capacity (1
Y, / color)
M, /
C, /K, /
A, /P
2 HDD/ Hard disk remaining
Y, / capacity
M, /
C, /K, /
A, /P
3 HDD/ Hard disc bad sectors
Y, / check/recovery
M, /
C, /K, /
A, /P
92 File system initialization Temporary
storage/HDD job
all clear.
Reboots
automatically
when
completed.
93 WebUtilities Job history WebUtilities
data initialization. Output history all
clear Reboots
automatically
when
completed.
5.7.5 Adjustment when replacing the multi feed detection board (PI)
(1) Usage
When the multi feed detection board (MFDB) of PI or PI drive board is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board /1 and /2 are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair of upper and lower. Be sure to
replace them as a pair.
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 °C to 30 °C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection board /1, /2. (Refer to G.12.3.17 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PI drive board (PIDB)
as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 6
F 7
Note
• The rotary switch5 is not used.
I-174
[1]
[2] a03uf3c027ca
3. Enter the I/O check mode.

7. Open the FD upper door and front door to turn the jam clearing knob [1]. Insert 1 sheet of paper [2] (P/N 65AA-991#, fusing adjustment
paper, 16 sheets/A3) between the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2 [3] (200g/m/2 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used).
Note
• Turn the jam clearing knob until the paper hits the roller [4], thus confirming that the paper is between the multi feed
detection board /1 and /2.
[2]
[3]
[1] [4] a03uf3c028ca
8. Press the Start key to activate the output check mode. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PIDB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP51 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP11 (SGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the FD is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short circuit and be damaged.
I-175
VR2
LED1
[1] [2] a03uf3c029ca
9. In the PIDB volume (VR2), set power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.2V
10. Press the Stop key and pull out the paper inserted in step 4.
11. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PIDB (LED1) turns ON.
LED ON: No multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
12. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED turns OFF.
13. If there is a detection error, return to step7 to conduct the adjustment again. In step9, set power voltage to the value1.0V lower than the
previous adjustment.
14. Repeat the steps 10 to 13 until detection error is resolved.
5.7.6 Adjustment when replacing the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)
(1) Usage
When the cover paper multi feed detection board of PB or the PB control board (PBCB) is replaced, conduct this adjustment.
Also, perform this adjustment when multi feed of special paper (thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness, thick paper) cannot be detected
properly.
Note
• The multi feed detection board /S and /R are adjusted in the manufacturing process as a pair. Be sure to replace them as a pair.
environment in which the copier is actually used (20 °C to 30 °C).
(In the case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the
room temperature become the same)
(2) Procedure
1. Replace the multi feed detection boards /S and /R. (Refer to G.14.2.31 Multi feed detection boards /S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR))
2. Check the stamp letter [1] placed on the cover paper multi feed detection boards /S and /R, and rotate the rotary switch [2] on the PBCB
as shown in the following table.
Stamp letter Rotary switch
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
I-176
[1]
[2]
564Af3c001cb
3. Insert 1 sheet of paper (P/N 65AA-9910, fusing adjustment paper, 16 sheets/A3) in the cover paper tray of the PB.
(200 to 300g/m2 paper can also be used.)
4. Select the output check code "77-96" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
5. Press the Start key.
Perform the all initializing operation.
6. After the operations, press the Stop key.
7. Select the output check code "77-95" of the I/O check mode in the service mode.
The paper is fed from the cover paper tray and stops at the conveyance section.
Note
• Confirm that the paper is between the multi feed detection boards /1 and /2.
9. After the operations, press the Stop key.

10. Connect the tester (voltmeter) to the following positions of the PBCB.
+ terminal: test pin Number TP28 (GAIN) [1]
- terminal: test pin Number TP24 (AGND) [2]
Range: DC 20V
Note
• Because the PB is powered, do not drop any metal material on the board, or do not connect the tester pin to an irrelevant
terminal.
It causes the board to short circuit and be damaged.
[1]
VR4 [2] 564Af3c002cd
11. In the PBCB volume (VR4), set power voltage to the standard value.
Standard value: 8.0 ± 0.1V
12. Pull out the paper inserted in step 8.
13. Insert 1 sheet of paper that customer mainly uses (paper weight 50g/m2 to 300g/m2), and confirm that the LED of PBCB (LED1) turns
ON.
LED ON: No multi feed (0 or 1 sheet of paper)
LED OFF: Multi feed (2 sheets of paper)
14. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all), that customer mainly uses, and check that the LED turns OFF.
15. If there is a detection error, return to step 3 to conduct the adjustment again. In step11, set power voltage to the value 1.0V lower than the
previous adjustment.
16. Repeat steps 3 to 14 until detection error is resolved.
I-177
5.7.7 FD, SD, FS and PB data EEPROM storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of FD, SD, FS and PB which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) of FD control
board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), FNSCB (FNS control board) and PB control board (PBCB). When necessary, it can be recalled by
selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Finisher adjustment data) in the Service Mode.
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
• When several units of FS, SD, FD and PB are connected, the data is backed up to all EEPROMs.
To back up the data of 1 option respectively, connect only the target option to the main body.
(2) Procedure
2. Enter "90" with the numeric keys.
Confirm that "90-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. When completed, "FIN" is displayed and the current finisher adjustment data is backed up in the
EEPROM.
5.7.8 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage

(1) Usage
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NRB). When necessary, it can be
recalled by selecting [Installation Initial Data] in Recall Standard Data (Machine Adjustment data), (Process Adjustment data).
Note
• Only 1 type of data can be backed up. When backed up again, data is overwritten.
(2) Procedure
4. "NOW" is displayed while in the back-up. Then when it completes, "FIN" is displayed and the current machine adjustment data and the
process adjustment data are backed up in the NRB.
5.7.9 Printer image processing board line memory check

(1) Usage
When the image of a particular color is misaligned in the sub scan direction and a notable image trouble occurs, check whether there is any
abnormality on the line memory of the printer image processing board (PRIPB).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "98-##" (## represent multi code number) is displayed in the message display area.
Multi Code 06: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /Y
Multi Code 07: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /M
Multi Code 08: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /C
Multi Code 09: Printer image processing board line memory (SDRAM) check /K
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, replace PRIPB.
5.7.10 Hard disk check

(1) Usage
Check the total capacity and remaining capacity of image memory area of the copier hard disk (HDD).
(2) Procedure
3. Press the Access key.
4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys.
Check that "99-##" (## represent multi code number) is displayed in the message display area.
Multi Code01: HDD image memory area capacity check
Multi Code02: HDD image memory area remaining capacity check
• Capacity check: Capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
• Remaining capacity check: Remaining capacity of HDD image memory area is displayed.
I-178
• The remaining capacity of the channel which shows the smallest value among C, M, Y, K, A and P is displayed.
5.7.11 Hard disk replacing procedure

(1) Usage
When an error code related to the copier hard disk (C-D0E0 to D0F0) occurs, perform this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
3. Press [High/Low].
The bad sectors check and recovery are performed on the hard disks /C, /M, Y, /K, /A and /P (HDD/C, /M, /Y, /K, /A, /P).
During the operation-"NOW" is displayed. when the check and recovery are completed, the result is displayed.
The operation succeeded - "OK" is displayed
The operation failed - "NG" is displayed
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start key to perform the bad sectors check and recovery again.
6. When "NG is displayed again, remove the HDD with abnormality and replace with the new one.
Note
The abnormal HDD can be determined according to the malfunction code. (C-D0E3 Y, C-D0E4 M, C-D0E5 C, C-D0E6 K, C-D0E7 A,
C-D0E8 P)
7. Note
When the customer has backed up the HDD data, restore it by conducting the following procedure.
"Utility menu" - Administrator Setting" - Security Setting" - HDD Management Setting" - "HDD Restore/Backup" - "HDD Restore"
The message "All data on HDD will be cleared Start restore Yes/No ?" is displayed.
Press [Yes].
Note
• Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
• Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW2).
• When the password is set in the enhanced security mode and 1 to 5 HDDs have any trouble, all 6 HDDs must be replaced.
Procedure: Remove the HDD → turn OFF the enhanced security mode → replace 6 HDDs
9. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2).

Note
• Otherwise, C-D0E0 is displayed.
Turning OFF and ON the main power switch (SW1) at this time causes HDD breakdown. Be sure to turn OFF and ON the sub
power switch (SW2) to start up the user mode.
5.7.12 Replacing procedure of the writing unit

(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
Press [05 State Confirmation] and then press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. Perform the LD1 to LD8 alarm data clear corresponding to the color of the replaced write unit.
"Output check"
• 37-91: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /Y
• 37-92: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /M
• 37-93: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /C
• 37-94: LD1 to LD-8 alarm data clear /K
4. Perform the LD alarm measurement by 37-00 of "Output check"
37-00: LD alarm measurement
Note
• The LD alarm data (laser power of the laser diode) can be checked by the "Adjustment Data List" in the "List output."
• The value displayed for "Default" on the adjustment data list is a value of when 37-00 is performed after LD alarm clear by
37-9*.
• "000" is normally displayed on the "Setting" on the adjustment data list. When performing 37-00 in the field, the LD alarm
data measured result is displayed, and is overwritten each time 37-00 is performed.
• The value of the LD alarm level decreases with the deterioration of the laser diode.
• Steps 1 to 3 are the procedures for history management at replacing the write unit.
I-179
5.8 ADF adjustment

5.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.
(1) Function
Adjust the output value of the variable resistance type sensor which detects the original size.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the original size detection of DF does not work properly.
Note
(3) Procedure
1. "Service Mode screen"
Press [06 ADF Adjustment].
2. "ADF adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 ADF Original Size Adj.].
3. "ADF Original Size Adj. screen"
Press [A4].
4. Load A4 (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [B6S].
7. Load B6S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
Press [A4S].
10. Load A4S (for metric destination) paper on the DF and press [Start].
11. After a message "Completed" is displayed, press [COPY].
12. Make sure the original size is properly detected.
5.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position

(1) Function
This adjustment changes read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
(2) Usage
Adjust the read start timing when scanning original in sub scanning direction of DF.
Note
• Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" have been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to I.
5.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
• Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment)" have been adjusted before performing this adjustment. (Refer to
I.5.3.18 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scanner Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 ADF Orig. Stop Position].
3. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
4. "Print Mode screen"
Set the copy settings (original setting and mode) according to the item to be adjusted, load an "Adjustment chart" on the DF, select A3
paper, and press the Start key.
5. Check the image leading edge timing.
Standard value: within ± 1.5mm
7. "ADF Orig. Stop Position screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -14 (image faster) to +14 (image slower)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.8.3 ADF Sensor Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the reflective type sensor.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM display does not disappear despite no paper JAM) occurs in the reflective type sensors.
Note
I-180
(3) Preparation
Clean each of the reflective sensors of DF.
(4) Procedure
Press [03 ADF Sensor Adjustment].
3. "ADF Sensor Adjustment screen"
Close the DF cover and press [Start].
The DF sensor sensitivity is automatically adjusted, and the message of completion appears.
4. Press [Copy] and check that the sensor is operating properly.
5. If the sensor still malfunctions, press [Service Mode] and repeat steps 3 to 5.
5.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj

(1) Function
Adjust the original loop amount at the DF registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.].
3. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
4. "Copy screen"
Set an "Adjustment chart" in the DF, select A3 paper, and press the Start key.
6. "ADF Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: -7 (smaller) to +7 (larger)
1 step = 0.5mm
5.9 Finisher Adjustment

5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the staple while in stapling by FS.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center position of the staple is not within the standard value by FS.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Finisher Adjustment].
2. "Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Finisher Position Adjustment].
3. "Staple Finisher Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
4. "Stapling Center Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Fold the output page in half in main-scanning direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the staple
center.
Standard value: a = ± 3mm
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c018ca
I-181
[1] Paper center [2] Staple center
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -20 (in front) to +20 (in back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the stacker plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Paper Width Adj.(Staple)].
4. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size to be adjusted.
6. Set paper in size to be adjusted on the tray and press the Start key to output test pattern (No.16).
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
Note
• If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
Standard value: 0 ± 0.5mm
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width Adj.(Staple) screen"
Setting range: -20 (wider) to +20 (narrower)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the stacker plates while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven paper stack (main scanning direction) on the main tray in non-staple mode by the FS-521.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Paper Width Adj.(Straight)].
4. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
7. Open the front door of the FS and pull out the stacker.
Note
• If the length of the paper is longer than 239mm in sub-scanning direction, the paper edge comes out from the stacker. In that
case, remove the paper through the paper opening section before pulling out the stacker, and reload the paper in the
stacker.
8. Measure the gap between the paper in the stacker and the alignment plate.
Standard value: 0.1mm to 1mm
9. When the value is not within the standard value, close the front door and press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Paper Width adjustment (Straight) screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
I-182
5.9.4 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate while in paper exit alignment.
(2) Usage
Note
• This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
• "Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
• Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" since the misalignment of the paper
width causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Exit Guide Center Pos. Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Select the item to be adjusted of small-size or large-size.
The following items are selectable for each small-size and large-size.
• Straight: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in straight mode.
• Shift in front: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in front
• Shift in back: Adjust the center position of the paper exit alignment plate in shifting in back
Note
• Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
• Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm

6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
• Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
• With too much adjustment, paper gets touch with the exit alignment plate in exiting paper, so be sure to check the alignment
operation.
• Be sure to adjust in the position where the fixed side of alignment plate has no improper gap and no stress in the case of
the shift adjustment.
8. To adjust the center position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Center Position Adj. screen"
Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
• Enter the same value to both large size and small size for straight adjustment.
• The input value of the straight does not reflect the value of the shift.
5.9.5 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj. (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)
(1) Function
Adjust the interval between the exit alignment plates (front and back) while in paper exit alignment.
I-183
(2) Usage
Note
• This adjustment is effective only for paper more than 182mm width (B5S) in the main scan direction in straight exit, or paper
more than 210mm width (A4) in shift exit. This adjustment is invalid for paper of minimum size (A5S, B6S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S) since it
does not operate the paper exit alignment.
• "Paper Width Adjustment (Straight) (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)" must have been done in advance.
• Adjust in conjunction with "Exit Guide Paper Width (Stapler Position Adj.)" since the center misalignment of the exit alignment
plate causes uneven paper stack.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
6. Select the paper size according to the item to be adjusted and press the Start key to output some test pattern (No.16).
7. Check the misalignment "a" of the stacked paper.
a0u0f3c003ca
Note
• Check the misalignment between exit paper and the exit alignment plate under the operation as a reference for the
adjustment.
• Too narrow adjustment causes uneven paper exit in the sub scan direction.
8. To adjust the position of the exit adjustment plate, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Exit Guide Unit Paper Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Adjustment standard value (at the alignment operation): Paper width 0mm to +1mm
5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment of punch holes for punching by FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder(Punch) Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Paper Width Adjustment].
4. "Paper Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
• Large size: Sub scan direction of paper is more than 298mm
• Small size: Sub scan direction of paper is less than 297mm
5. Set paper you want to adjust in the tray, the number of copies is set to 10 and press the Start key.
6. Check the diameter of the through-hole when the ejected paper is stacked.
Holes Standard value (mm)
2-Holes φ5.0 or larger
I-184
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
Setting range: -20 (narrower) to +20 (wider)
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
• When the alignment plate is wider than an appropriate position, the punch centering is displaced, and when too narrow, the
punch holes are apt to disperse.
5.9.7 Punch Vertical Position Adj. (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the position of the punch holes made by the FD in sub scanning direction.
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable.
Adjust in conjunction with "Center Adjustment (Staple Finisher Position Adj.)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].
Press [02 Punch Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch hole select menu screen"
Select [01 2-Hole Punch] or [02 3-Hole Punch].
5. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
7. Check the distance "a" from the outputted paper leading edge to the punch holes center position.
Holes Standard value "a"
(mm)
2-Holes 10.5 ± 4.0
3-Holes 9.5 ± 4
fs503fs3013c
9. "Punch Vertical Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
12. To configure other punch hole/paper size, repeat steps 4 to 11.
5.9.8 Half Fold Position Adjustment (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper stop position when folding paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold position on the half fold mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
I-185

Press [03 Multi Folder(Fold) Adj.].
3. "Multi Folder (Fold) adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Half-Fold Position Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": = ± 1.5mm
a
fs503fs3014c
1 step = 0.1mm
• If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.9 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-in mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check "a" and "b" on the outputted paper.
Paper size Standard value (mm)
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 139.0 142.0
B4 120.3 123.3
A4S 98.0 101.0
SRA4S 105.7 108.7
12 x 18 151.4 154.4
11 x 17 142.9 145.9
81/2 x 14 117.5 120.5
81/2 x 11S 92.1 95.1
8K 129.0 132.0
[1]
a
[2]
a03uf3c019ca
[1] First fold [2] Double fold
8. "Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj. screen"
9. Press [Single Fold].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer)
I-186
1 step = 0.1mm
• The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
11. Press [Double Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
• The dimension "b" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.10 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the tri-fold-out mode by the FD.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 282.0 144.0
B4 243.7 123.3
A4S 199.0 101.0
SRA4S 214.3 108.7
12 x 18 306.8 156.4
11 x 17 289.9 147.9
81/2 x 14 238.1 120.5
81/2 x 11S 187.3 95.1
8K 262.0 134.0
a [1]
[2]
a03uf3c020ca
8. "Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
14. To configure other paper size, repeat steps 4 to 13.
I-187
5.9.11 Double Parallel Pos. Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the double parallel mode by the FD.
Note
• When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.].
4. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 208.5 103.8
B4 180.5 89.8
A4S 147.0 73.0
SRA4S 158.5 78.8
12 x 18 227.1 113.1
11 x 17 214.4 106.7
81/2 x 14 176.3 87.7
81/2 x 11S 138.2 68.6
8K 193.5 96.3
b
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c021ca
8. "Double Parallel Pos. Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
5.9.12 Z-Fold Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjust the fold positions on the z-fold mode by the FD.
Note
• When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the single fold.
I-188
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Z-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5
A3 105.5 108.5
B4 91.5 94.5
A4S 74.8 77.8
SRA4S 80.5 83.5
12 x 18 114.8 117.8
11 x 17 108.5 111.5
81/2 x 14 94.0 -
81/2 x 11S 70.4 73.4
8K 98.0 101.0
[2] a [1]
a03uf3c022ca
8 1／ ×14
2
[1] a
a03uf3c031ca
8. "Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
5.9.13 Gate Position Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Adjusts the fold position on the gate fold mode by the FD.
Note
• When adjusting the single fold, the double fold and the triple fold, be sure to conduct the single fold, the double fold and the
triple fold in this order.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Gate Position Adj.].
I-189
4. "Gate Position Adj. screen"

Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the length of 2 places indicated with "a", "b" and "c".
a ± 1.5 b ± 1.5 c ± 1.5
A3 103.5 213.0 106.5
B4 89.5 185.0 92.5
A4S 72.8 151.5 75.8
SRA4S 78.5 163.0 81.5
12 x 18 112.8 231.6 115.8
11 x 17 106.5 218.9 109.5
81/2 x 14 87.4 180.8 90.4
81/2 x 11S 68.4 142.7 71.4
8K 96.0 198.0 99.0
b
a
[1]
c [2]
[3]
a03uf3c023ca
[1] First fold [3] Triple Fold

[2] Double fold
8. "Gate Position Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
13. Press [Triple Fold].
1 step = 0.1mm
• The dimension "c" in the step 6 gets larger when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets smaller when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.14 Fold Registration Loop Adj. (Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold registration loop amount.
(2) Usage
Adjust paper loop amount at the FD registration roller to correct paper skew, wrinkle, or paper jam at the roller.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fold Registration Loop Adj.].
4. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
7. "Fold Registration Loop Adj. screen"
I-190

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.15 Multi Folder(PI) Adjustment

5.9.16 Paper Width Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the main scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.17 Paper Length Adjustment (Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the lead edge stopper position.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a paper exit mis-alignment occurs in the sub scan direction of the LS stacker tray.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Stacker Adjustment menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
4. "Paper Length Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. If there are any uneven paper stack, press [Exit PrintMode].
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.18 Staple Center Position (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust the staple center position for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj. menu screen"
Press [01 Staple Center Position].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment between the staplecenter and the paper center.
I-191
Standard value "a": = ± 2mm
a
fs503fs3300c
Setting range: -20 (right) to +20 (left)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.19 Staple Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the saddle stitching alignment plate while in alignment.
(2) Usage
Adjust an uneven binding in a bundle of paper in saddle stitch mode by the SD.
Note
• Make sure that the folding skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment has been completed.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Staple Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check to see if the bundle of papers is misaligned (a: a misalignment occurs when the paper width setting is larger than the paper width)
and if the bundle is curved (b: the curve occurs when the paper width setting is smaller than the paper width).
Standard value "a": 1.0mm or less
a
fs503fs3012c
8. "Staple Paper Width Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.20 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the staple intervals for the saddle stitch mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching by SD are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
I-192

Press [03 Staple Pitch Adjustment].
4. "Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the interval "a" between the staples against the paper size "b."
Standard value: a = b/2 ± 2mm
a
b
fs503fs3011c
1 step = 1.0mm
• There are restrictions of setting range for each size of paper. Minimum value is determined based on the stapler movable range and
the maximum value is determined so that the saddle stitching alignment plate and stapler do not interfere with each other.
B5S: Setting is not possible (fixed to 91 mm)
B4: -20 to +20 mm (108.5 to 148.5 mm)
A4S: -14 to +14 mm (91 to 119 mm)
A3: -20 to +16.5 mm (128.5 to 165 mm)
5.9.21 Half-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold position on the multi half fold mode by the SD.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding by SD is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Half-Fold Position Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the outputted paper.
Standard value "a": 1.5mm or less
a
fs503fs3014c
1 step = 0.1mm
• If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the positive side.
5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the fold positions on the multi tri-fold-in mode by the SD.
I-193
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of multi tri-folding by SD is not within the standard value.
Note
• When adjusting both the single fold and the double fold, be sure to start with the double fold.
• The position of the single fold is based on the leading edge of paper and the position of the double fold is based on the position
of the single fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either position of the single fold and the double fold is
changed.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Tri-Fold Position Adj.].
4. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
a b
A4S 97.5 ± 2.0 102.0 ± 2.
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 2.0 96.1 ± 2.0
[2] b [1]
fs503fs3015c
8. "Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Select the size of paper to be adjusted.
1 step = 0.1mm
negative side.
1 step = 0.1mm
• The dimension "a" in the step 6 gets smaller when the set value is moved to the positive side and gets larger when moved to the
negative side.
5.9.23 Fold Paper Width Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the alignment width while in alignment (sub scan direction).
(2) Usage
When there is an uneven edge found with the bundle paper at the folding or multi tri-folding mode by SD, conduct this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Fold Paper Width Adj.].
4. "Fold Paper Width Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set the paper of the paper size to be adjusted. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the printed pages for misalignment.
a: When the paper width setting is set to wider than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs randomly.
b: When the paper width setting is set to narrower than the actual paper width, misalignment occurs in 1 direction.
I-194
fs503fs3302c
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.24 Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Change the registration position of the book for trimming.
(2) Usage
Adjust the misalignment in the trimmed fore-edge or the excess trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Trimming Adjustment].
4. "Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the trimming distance "a" on the cover paper.
Standard value "a": 2mm or more
Note
• Trimming distance less than 2mm causes trimming fault.
a
fs503fs3301c
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.25 Trimmer Receiver Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.)

(1) Function
Adjust the shift interval and the move pitch of the trimmer board.
(2) Usage
Adjust the poor trimming (for example, fluff on the cut end) in the trimming by the SD.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.].
I-195
4. "Trimmer Receiver Adjustment Menu screen"

Select the options for "Trimmer Count" (number of cuts counted until the trimmer board moves) and "Move Pitch" (travel distance of the
trimmer board when it moves).
5. Press [Execute Compulsive Movement] to move the trimmer board manually.
5.9.26 Cover Trimming Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the trimming position of the right-side edge of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the trimming position on the leading edge of the right cover does not fit to the leading edge of the left cover.
Note
• In order to align the leading edges on the left and right covers, perform I.5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder
Adjustment) first.
(3) Procedure
2. [Finisher Adjustment menu screen]
Press [08 Perfect Binder Adjustment].
3. "Perfect Binder Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Cover Trimming Adj.].
4. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
6. Select the paper type and press the start button to make test prints and carry out perfect binding.
7. Check the cover of the created book if its right-side edge and left-side edge align with each other.
[3]
[2] [1] 1050fs3357c
[1] Trimming position [3] Left cover paper

[2] Right cover paper
8. To adjust the position of the trimming position of the right cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Trimming Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (reduces the trimming amount) to +127 (enlarges the trimming amount)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.27 Cover Lead Edge Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the length that the left side of cover paper exceeds the length (width) of inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Cover Lead Edge Adj.].
4. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
Press [PB Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
5. Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size of cover paper.
Select the size of paper from the following options.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Custom (220mm to 379mm)
I-196

Note
• Above paper sizes are book (the inside pages) finished sizes.

8. Check that the width of the left cover paper is longer than the width of the inside pages by specified amount.
[3] [4]
[5]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3358c
[1] Body [4] Length differential

[2] Right cover paper [5] Edge of the left cover paper
[3] Left cover paper
9. To change the width of the left cover paper, press [Exit PrintMode].
10. "Cover Lead Edge Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.28 Spine Corner form Pos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the corner folding position of the cover paper.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the spine corner form position is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Spine Corner Forming Pos.].
4. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the corner edges of the cover paper are created uniformly in the main scan direction.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
1050fs3359c
[1] Right cover paper [3] Cover paper

[2] Main scan direction [4] Left cover paper
7. When the corner edges of the cover paper are not created uniformly, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Spine Corner Forming Pos. screen"
Select one of [Up/Down Forward Adj.] or [Up/Down Rear Adj.].
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.29 Glue Start Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the start position for applying glue to inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the start position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
I-197
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Glue Start Position].
4. "Glue Start Position screen"
Press [Ahead] and select "Glue Start Position."
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note
• [Back] does not require the adjustment.

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3360c
[1] Start position for frontward applying [3] Body

[2] Start position for backward applying [4]
9. To adjust the start position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Start Position screen"
Setting range: -128 (earlier) to +127 (later)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.30 Glue Finish Position (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the position to finish applying glue.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the completion position for applying glue to inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Glue Finish Position].
4. "Glue Finish Position screen"
Press [Ahead] or [Back] to select which finish position, for applying during forward movement or backward movement, to be adjusted.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
I-198
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note

8. Check that the glue applying start position to the inside pages is appropriate.
[3]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3361c
[1] Finish position for backward applying [3] Body

[2] Finish position for frontward applying [4]
9. To adjust the finish position, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Glue Finish Position screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.31 GlueFormationFinishPos. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the finish position of the process to make a uniform layer of glue applied on the inside pages spine.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the finish position of the process to make a uniform layer of glue applied on the inside pages spine is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 GlueFormationFinishPos.].
4. "GlueFormationFinishPos. screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the paper size.
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note

7. Check that the finish position of the process to make a uniform layer of glue on the inside pages spine is appropriate.
8. When adjusting the finish position of the process to make a uniform layer of glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "GlueFormationFinishPos. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
I-199
5.9.32 Temperature Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Sets the temperatures to be detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1), the glue tank temperature sensor/Up (TH2), the glue
tank temperature sensor/Md (TH3), and the glue tank temperature sensor/Lw (TH4) provided in the glue tank.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the applied glue does not harden or when the cover paper easily comes unglued.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Temperature Adjustment].
4. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check that the glue applied has dried appropriately.
7. To adjust the dryness of the glue, press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Temperature Adjustment screen"
Select the option of which the temperature is set.
The following options are provided.
• Metal tank - Top
• Metal tank - Mid
• Metal tank - Low
• Glue apply roller
• Metal tank - Top
Setting range: 128 °C to 136 °C
Default: 132 °C
• Metal tank - Mid
Setting range: 140 °C to +145 °C
Default: 145 °C
• Metal tank - Low
Default: 185 °C
Default: 165 °C
5.9.33 Sub Compile CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.].
4. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Sub Compile CD Width Adj. screen"
I-200

1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.34 Clamp CD Width Adjustment (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the main scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Clamp CD Width Adjustment].
4. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
Note
5. "Clamp CD Width Adjustment screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
6. Create multiple books in normal copy mode, and check the alignment of the second and later book.
Change set value set in Step5 until a properly aligned book is created.
5.9.35 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the positional relation in the main scan direction between the cover paper and the inside pages is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [10 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.].
4. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Perfect Binder Tray] or [Except PB Tray] to select the tray to be adjusted.
7. Check if the relation between the main scan position of the cover and that of the inside pages are appropriate.
8. To adjust the relation of their main-scanning positions, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Cover Up/Down CD Width Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
I-201
5.9.36 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the alignment width of the inside pages when aligning in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust when the alignment width of the inside pages in the sub scan direction is not adequate.
(3) Procedure
Press [11 Clamp FD Position Adj.].
4. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
Total
A4
B5
A5
81/2 x 11
16K
A5S
51/2 x 81/2S
Note

7. Check if the sub scan direction of all the inside pages are properly aligned.
8. To adjust the alignment width in sub-scanning direction of the inside pages, press [Exit PrintMode].
9. "Clamp FD Position Adjustment screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
Note
• If the setting is too wide, pages are misplaced in sub scan direction.
• If the setting is too narrow, mark of the FD alignment plate appears.
5.9.37 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the main scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
Note
• This function is available only for the machine which performs the double sheets conveyance. C8000 does not need this
adjustment.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the main scan direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set 10 sheets of paper with a size to be adjusted.
Set the setting to "10" to set the punch.
Press the Start key.
I-202
Adjustment range: -20 (narrow) to + 20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1mm
Note
• For adjusting it, be sure to find the alignment point where the punch holes are not misarranged by setting the value to the
maximum (wide) first and then changing it to narrower.
5.9.38 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the position of the alignment plate operates in the sub scan direction on the relay stacker (RU).
Note
• This function is available only for the machine which performs the double sheets conveyance. C8000 does not need this
adjustment.
(2) Usage
Adjust it when the punch holes are misarranged in the paper path direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Relay Stacker Adjustment].
3. "Relay Stacker Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Paper Length Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
5. Set 10 sheets of paper with a size to be adjusted.
Set the setting to "10" to set the punch.
Press the Start key.
Adjustment range: -50 (narrow) to + 50 (wide), 1 step = 0.1mm
Note
• For adjusting it, be sure to find the alignment point where the punch holes are not misarranged by setting the value to the
maximum (wide) first and then changing it to narrower.
5.9.39 Recall Standard Data

(1) Function
Reset various setting values of the finisher adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change in the finisher adjustment items by CE.
Note
• Adjustment data of "Stacker Adjustment (LS)", "Trimmer Receiver Adj. (SD)", "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. (PK)", "Post
Inserter Tray Size (PI)", and "Output Quantity Limit (FS-612)" are not restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [09/08 Recall Standard Data].
Note
conducted.
I-203
5.9.40 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the staple position in the sub scan direction while in the saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple position of the saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
• Be sure the " Half Fold Stopper Adj." (refer to I.5.9.41 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.) have been adjusted before performing this
adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Saddle Stitcher Stopper].
3. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
6. Check the saddle stitching staple position of the output paper.
15sjf3c100na
8. "Saddle Stitcher Stopper screen"
Setting range: -128 (down) to +127 (up)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.41 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.

(1) Function
Adjust the folding position while in the half folding and saddle stitching.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of half folding and saddle stitching by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.].
3. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
6. Check the misalignment "a" on the edge of the output paper.
a
15sjf3c101na
8. "Half-Fold Stopper Adj. screen"
1 step = 0.1mm
• If there is the misalignment given in the step 6, enter a set value on the negative side.
I-204
5.9.42 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Punch Adjustment].
3. "Punch Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Vertical Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"
7. Fold the output paper in half in the main scan direction, and measure the gap "a" between the center line of the print and the center of the
punch hole.
[1]
[2]
15knf3c002nb
[1] Center of the paper [2] Center of the punch hole
8. "Punch Adjustment <Vertical Position Adjustment> screen"

Setting range: -50 (to front) to +50 (to back)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.43 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the sub scan direction is not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Horizontal Position Adj.].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"
Select [PI Tray] or [Main Body Tray], and press [Print Mode].
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Check the punch position "a" of the output paper in the sub scan direction.
Standard value a: 10.5mm ± 5.0mm
a
15knf3c001nb
I-205
7. "Punch Adjustment <Horizontal Position Adjustment> screen"

1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.44 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the registration loop amount of punching to adjust the paper skew.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the punch hole of the punch kit (PK) is not straight.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Registration Adjustment].
4. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
5. Set paper in the tray or PI, and press Start to print the test pattern (No. 16).
7. "Punch Adjustment <Registration Adjustment> screen"
Setting range: -20 (larger) to +20 (smaller)
1 step = 0.8mm
5.9.45 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper size sensor automatically to detect the paper edge as the standard of the punch hole properly.
(2) Usage
Adjust the sensitivity of the sensor after replacing the punch drive board (PDB) or the paper size sensor (PS305).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment].
4. "Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
5. A message "Completed" is displayed when the adjustment is finished successfully.
5.9.46 Tri-Fold Adjustment

(1) Function
Adjust the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding mode.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position of the multi tri-folding by FS-612 is not within the standard value.
Note
• The 2nd folding position (dimension "b") is mechanically adjusted. (Refer to I.15.12 Tri-folding position adjustment)
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Tri-Fold Adjustment].
3. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Select the paper size to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
5. Check "a" on the outputted paper.
a b c
A4S 95 ± 2 101 ± 2 101 ± 2
I-206
81/2 x 11S 89 ± 2 95 ± 2 95 ± 2
c
a
[1]
b 15sjf3c102na
[1] First fold
7. "Tri-Fold Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -128 (larger) to +127 (smaller)
1 step = 0.1mm
5.9.47 2 Position Staple Pitch

(1) Function
Change the stop position of the stapler unit to adjust the staple interval.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching and flat stapling by FS-612 are not within the standard value.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.].
3. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Press [Fold&Staple] or [Staple].
5. Press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.16).
6. Check the staple pitch of the output paper.
Standard value a: 128mm ± 6mm
[1] Staple
[2] Folding & Stapling
a 15sjf3c103na
[1]
a
15sjf3c104na
[2]
8. "2 Position Staple Pitch Adjustment screen"
Setting range: +128 (narrower) to +160 (wider)
1 step = 1mm
I-207
5.9.48 Post Inserter Tray Size

(1) Function
Adjust the detection size of the PI tray.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size is not correctly detected at the cover sheet tray of the PI.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Post Inserter Tray Size].
3. "Post Inserter Tray Size screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous], select the upper or lower tray, and press [A4S] or [81/2 x 11S].
4. Load A4S paper in the selected tray of PI and press [Start]. (When you selected [81/ x 11S] in step 3, load 81/ x 11S paper in the tray.)
2 2
6. When adjusting another tray, repeat the steps 3 to 5.
7. Exit the service mode, and check if paper size set in the PI is correctly detected.
5.9.49 Output Quantity Limit

(1) Function
Set the maximum number of sheets for stapling, saddle stitching, multi half fold, and multi tri-fold of the FS-612.
(2) Usage
Change the max. setting when the staples are buckled or paper folded is not enough.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Output Quantity Limit].
3. "Output Quantity Limit screen"
Enter the maximum number of sheets for each item with the numeric buttons and press [<<SET].
5.10 Firmware Version

(1) Usage
Display the firmware version of the main body and options.
Note
• [Image control] that is displayed on the touch panel represents the firmware version of the overall control board (OACB).
(2) Procedure
Press [08 Firmware Version].
2. "Firmware Version menu screen"
Press [01 Firmware Version].
3. "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
Each firmware version is displayed.
5.11 CS Remote Care

5.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the management data of the main
body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through the phone line, E-mail, or WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
5.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail)

Note
• Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307 controller NIC.
Pay attention to the mail account and the DIPSW setting when selecting NIC to be used or using E-mail CS Remote Care and the
mail remote notification system at the same time. For the detail, refer to "I.5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care
and Mail remote notification system."
I-208
• Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server to be used for E-mail system of CS Remote Care beforehand. The
setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
• Controller NIC: [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting]. Or set from [E-mail Initial
Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
• Controller NIC: Set [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Controller] → [Controller NIC Setting] → [CSRC Setting].→ [CSRC
Send]/[CSRC Receive]. (Refer to I.5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
• Conduct RAM clear for CS Remote Care first and then setup again when conducting the setup again for the main body that has
been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to I.5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
(1) When using E-mail (Duplex)

1. Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. (This step can be skipped when sending the initial connection mail from the
machine to the center.) After the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care center application.
2. I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
3. CS Remote Care memory initialization
1. Press [Service Mode] → [Machine Condition] → [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press the [Access] button.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
4. CS Remote Care function ON
5. Select the NIC that is used for CSRC
1. Press [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting] and enter [14-7].
2. Specify the NIC that is used.
• On (1): Main body NIC
• Off (0): Controller NIC
6. CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
7. Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
• The serial number that is input from [Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Serial Number Setting] appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
4. Press [OK].
11. Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and time.
• Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year/month/day/hour/minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
• Press [ +/- ] to switch plus/minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
12. Response Timeout Setting
1. Press [Response Timeout Setting] on the [E-mail (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the response timeout (10 minute to 1440 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
3. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
14. Initial connection
Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps.
• Initial connection from the center side
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine. The initial connection completes when the
machine receives the initial connection mail.
• Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, set the E-mail address of the center on the [E-mail
(Duplex) Setting Menu] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail] and press [First Call]. In case the device pre-registration at the center side is
skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
Note
• When the CS Remote Care related window is opened while receiving the initial connection mail from the center, the
information being created is destroyed and the CS Remote Care setting screen is displayed.
• For the method of sending the initial connection mail from the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care
center application.
• Mail transmission is possible only between the center and the main body that the initial connection has been established.
• After when the initial registration is done, the center mail address is displayed on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [E-mail].
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote
Care error code list)
I-209
(2) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))

Pre-register the device with the application on the center side. The pre-registration of the device at the center side can be skipped. After
the initial connection, in this case, register the device at the center side.)
Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [E-mail].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [E-mail (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [E-mail] and enter the mail address of the center.
4. Press [Encrypt] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date and Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
12. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
13. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
3. Press [OK].
14. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [E-mail (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
16. Initial connection
1. Press [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] → [Basic Setting].
2. Press [First Call] to send the initial connection mail to the center.
3. Once the mail sending completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the mail sending to the SMTP server
normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
4. The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection mail. In case the device pre-registration at the center
side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving the initial connection mail. The initial connection is
completed when the device is registered at the center side.
I-210
Note
5.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using phone line modem as CR Remote Care system.
Note
been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to I.5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC))
• Use the Data modem of ITU-T V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 compliance, AT command compliance.
(1) When using the phone line modem

2. Modem connection
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and the modem and the wall outlet with a
modular cable.
For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem to be used.
Press [Modem] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
7. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
8. Press [Detail Setting] to display the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
9. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
4. Press [Machine Phone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
• Use [P], [T], [W], [-], and so on as needed.
5. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
11. Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
• Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to change.)
• For the detail of AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial command] to enter AT command.
3. Press [OK].
12. DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
• Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to the connection environment.
1. Press [DIP-SW Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed. (Refer to I.5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.)
14. First call execution
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
• When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen appears.
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears. (Refer to I.5.11.17 CS Remote Care
error code list)
• In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status by center receiving
the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device is registered at the center side.
I-211
5.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server)
Conduct the following procedure to set up when using http communication as CR Remote Care system.
Note
• Select one of main body NIC or IC-601 controller NIC to use. CSRC cannot be used for the IC-306/IC-307 controller NIC.
been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to I.5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care)
• Set the proxy beforehand when using http proxy server. The setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
• Controller NIC: [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting]. Or set from [CSRC http
Communication Setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to I.5.11.8 http communication setting (In the
case of the main body NIC))
• Controller NIC: Set [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Controller] → [Controller NIC Setting] → [CSRC Setting].→ [http
Communication Setting]. (Refer to I.5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC))
(1) When using http (Duplex)

Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Duplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
13. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
I-212
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
(2) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))

Press [http] on [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care].
Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
8. ID code entry
1. Press [ID code].
9. Press [Detail Setting] to display [http (Simplex) Setting Menu] screen.
10. Basic setting
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Press [Web Server] and enter the URL of the Web server (Less than 255 one-byte characters)
4. Press [Cryptogram] to make a selection to decide whether it is encrypted or not. (Default: Use Encryptogram).
5. Press [OK].
11. Heart Beat setting *1
1. Press [Heart Beat Setting] on the [http (Duplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Heart Beat Setting] to make a selection to decide whether the Heart Beat function is made valid or invalid. (Default: Enable)
3. Press [Heart Beat Interval] to enter the transmission interval of the Heart Beats (1 minute to 256 minutes, default: 30 minutes).
4. Press [Heart Beat Send] to make a selection to decide whether the fixed time transmission of the Heart Beat is made valid or invalid.
(Default: Enable)
5. Press [Heart Beat Fix Send Time] to enter the time for the Heart Beat transmission at the fixed time.
6. Press [OK].
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
4. Press [OK].
13. Regular send setting
1. Press [Periodical Transmission Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Set the regular send schedule to the center.
• Every month: Send it regularly to the center on the same date. Sent date is set at the end of the month by [End of Month].
• Every week: Send it regularly to the center on the same time and the same day of the week.
• Every day: Send it regularly to the center on the same time everyday.
Reference:
• To distribute the access to the center, the default time of the periodical transmission setting after the RAM clear is calculated from
the serial number.
3. Press [OK].
14. Fixed Date/Time Setting
1. Press [Fixed Date/Time Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Enter the fixed date/time.
3. Press [OK].
15. Collecting Data Setting
1. Press [Collecting Data Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
2. Select data to be collected.
• Basic data
• Account track data
• Machine adjustment data
• Coverage data
3. Press [OK].
I-213
16. Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
1. Press [Basic Setting] on the [http (Simplex) Setting menu] screen.
3. Once the initial call completes normally, CS Remote Care setting screen appears. (Once the initial connection file is stored in the Web
server normally, the registration on the machine completes.)
• The initial connection completes when the center receives the initial connection file. In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary registered status. The initial connection is completed when the device is
registered at the center side.
Note
• 1* Heart Beat function is a function to notify that the machine being active by uploading the Heart Beat file to the registered Web server
periodically. Heart Beat file contains the information of the total counter and the status.
5.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to configure the DIPSW setting or
the mail account setting.
Mail remote E-mail CS Remote
E-mail CS Remote
notification Care using the
Care using the
Case system machine NIC Setting item Set value Remark
controller NIC
Notification E-mail used
E-mail used
system CS Remote Care
"Use the mail remote notification
system" of the main body NIC Web ON
utility
"Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5
1 ○ ○ - 1 (*3)
(*1)
1
(*2)
utility
2 ○ - ○ 1 (*4)
(*1)
0
(*2)
utility
3 ○ - - "Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5 -
0
(*1)
0
(*2)
system" of the main body NIC Web ON (*5)
utility
4 - ○ - "Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5 -
1
(*1)
1
(*2)
system" of the main body NIC Web OFF
utility
5 - - ○ "Service Mode - Software DIPSW": 15-5 -
1
(*1)
0
(*2)
*1 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
*2 Service Mode - Software DIPSW: 14-7 (NIC selection of E-mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main body NIC)
*3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail account.
*4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts.
*5 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, set it to "Yes" and conduct the mail initial setting.
5.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the mail address and the mail server for the machine NIC.
I-214
Note
• E-mail initial setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.1.3.4
Initial setting.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter].
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [E-mail Initial Setting].
3. Conduct the following settings.
• [Use E-mail System]: Select [ON].
• [Time Zone]: Set the time zone.
• [Trans(SMTP) Mail Server]: Set the host name of the AMTP server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
• [SMTP port number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
• [Trans Mail Server Timeout]: Set the timeout period (sec).
• [New-arrival Check Interval]: Set the interval (min) for checking the new-arrivals.
• [Receive mail server]: Set the IP address of the receiving mail server. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [Machine
NIC Setting].
• [Receive Mail Server Type]: Set the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
• [POP3/IMAP Port Number]: Set the port number of the receive mail server.
• [Receive Mail Account]: Set the account name.
• [Receive Mail Password]: Set the account password.
• [E-mail Address for Machine]: Set the E-mail address for machine NIC.
• [POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication]: Make a setting to decide whether the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Authentication is used.
• [SSL Encryption of SMTP]: Set whether to encrypt the SMTP communication.
• [SSL Encryption of POP (IMAP)]: Set whether to encrypt the POP (IMAP) communication.
4. Press [Test] and press [Yes] on the confirmation screen to conduct the sending and receiving test.
5. Press [OK].
5.11.7 E-mail Initial Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the mail address and the mail server for the controller NIC.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Controller] → [Controller NIC Setting] → [CSRC Setting] → [CSRC Send].
• [CSRC Send]: Select [Enable].
• [SMTP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [SMTP Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
• [Port Number]: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
• [Administrator From Address]: Set the E-mail address for the controller NIC used for CSRC.
• [Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
• [Authentication Setting]: Set the enable/disable of POP before SMTP or SMTP Authentication.
• [POP before SMTP Time]: Set the time period from connecting to the POP server with the POP before SMTP Authentication to
connecting to the SMTP server.
4. Press [Next] to conduct the following settings.
• [SMTP Authentication Setting]: Set the User ID, Password, and realm for the SMTP Authentication.
5. Press [CSRC Receive Setting] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the following settings.
• [CSRC Receive Setting]: When using E-mail duplex, select [Enable].
• [POP Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [POP Server Address] to set the server
address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
• [Login Name]: Set the account name.
• [Password]: Set the account password.
• [APOP Authentication]: Set the enable/disable of APOP Authentication.
• [Port Number]: Set the port number of the POP server.
• [Connection Timeout]: Set the time-out period (sec).
• [Auto Receive Check]: Select [Enable] normally. Select [Disable] to stop the auto receive check temporally when the POP server is
down and so on. When [Disable] is selected, the mail cannot be received manually.
• [Polling Interval]: Set the polling interval (min).
6. Press [CSRC Communication Test] on [CSRC Setting] screen to conduct the test.
7. Press [OK].
5.11.8 http communication setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the following settings when using http proxy server.
Note
• http communication setting can be set in the [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. For the detail of Web Utilities, refer to E.
1.3.4 Initial setting.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [http Communication Setting].
• [Enable Proxy Server]: Select [ON].
• [Proxy Server Address]: Set the host name of the proxy server or IP address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on
[Machine NIC Setting].
• When the proxy server authentication is required, follow the procedures below.
(Ex.) When the proxy server name: www.example.com, user name: user and password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com."
• Proxy Server Port: Set the port number of the proxy server.
• [Enable SSL]: Set whether to use SLL or not.
• [Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use the Web server authentication or not.
• [Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
• [Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
I-215
4. Press [OK].
5.11.9 http Communication Setting (In the case of controller NIC)

Set the following settings when using http proxy server.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [Controller] → [ControllerSetSet] → [http Communication Setting].
• [Proxy Server Setting]: Select [Enable].
• [Proxy Server Address]: Select the address specifying method (IPv4/IPv6/host name) and press [Proxy Server Address] to set the
server address. When inputting the host name, set the DNS server on [TCP/IP Setting] in [Controller NIC Setting].
• When the proxy server authentication is needed, set as following.
(Example) In the case of Proxy Server Name: www.example.com, User Name: user, Password: password, enter
"user:password@www.example.com".
• [Proxy Server Port Number]: Set the port number of the proxy server.
• [SSL Setting]: Set the enable/disable of SSL Encryption.
• [Enable Authentication]: Set whether to use Web Server authentication or not.
• [Authentication User Name]: Set the user name of the Web Server authentication.
• [Authentication Password]: Set the password of the Web Server authentication.
4. Press [OK].
5.11.10 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Note
• DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident,
be sure to restore the previous state.
Input procedure
2. Press [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] on [Service Mode menu] screen.
3. Press [ID Code] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [Software DIPSW Setting] on the Utility menu screen.
7. Select the DIPSW number on "Software DIPSW Setting."
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
8. Select the DIPSW bit number.
• Use the left arrow key or the numeric keys.
9. Select [ON (1)] or [OFF (0)].
10. Press [Return] to return to the "Setting menu screen."
Note
• About functions of each switch, refer to I.5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care.
5.11.11 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care

Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Dial mode • 0: Pulse dial 1 1 1
• 1: Tone dial
1 Modem reception • 0: Receive (Issue ATA by RING 0 0 0
delivery)
• 1: Not receive (Not issue ATA
by RING delivery)
2 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 Baud rate • 1200bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=0, 0 0 0
5 01-5=1, 01-4=1 0 0 0
• 2400bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
6 01-5=0, 01-4=0 0 0 0
7 • 4800bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1, 1 1 1
01-5=0, 01-4=1
• 9600bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=1, 01-4=0
• 19200bps: 01-7=0, 01-6=1,
01-5=1, 01-4=1
• 38400bps: 01-7=1, 01-6=0,
01-5=0, 01-4=0
• 57600bps: 01-7=1, 01-6=0,
01-5=0, 01-4=1
2 0 Auto call on SC occurrence • 0: OFF 1 1 1
1 Auto call on date specification • 1: ON 1 1 1
2 Auto call on the part replacement 1 1 1
3 Auto call on the drum replacement 1 1 1
4 Auto call on the periodic maintenance (PM) 1 1 1
I-216
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 Automatic calling when reset fixed replacement • 0: OFF 0 0 0
parts • 1: ON
3 0 Reservation • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
1 Auto call on the toner supply • 0: OFF 1 1 1
2 Auto call on frequent JAM occurrence • 1: ON 1 1 1
3 Notification of waste toner box full 1 1 1
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4 0 CS Remote Care communication mode • Data modem: 04-1=0, 04-0=0 0 0 0
1 • FAX (not used): 04-1=0, 04-0=1 1 1 1
• E-mail: 04-1=1, 04-0=0
• http: 04-1=1, 04-0=1
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
5 0 Modem redial interval • 1 minute: 05-3=0, 05-2=0, 1 1 1
1 05-1=0, 05-0=1 1 1 1
• 2 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=0,
2 05-1=1, 05-0=0 0 0 0
3 • 3 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=0, 0 0 0
05-1=1, 05-0=1
• 4 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=0, 05-0=0
• 5 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=0, 05-0=1
• 6 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=1, 05-0=0
• 7 minutes: 05-3=0, 05-2=1,
05-1=1, 05-0=1
• 8 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=0, 05-0=0
• 9 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=0, 05-0=1
• 10 minutes: 05-3=1, 05-2=0,
05-1=1, 05-0=0
5 • 1: - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
6 0 Modem redial times • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
7 0 Redial for response time out • 0: Not redial 1 1 1
• 1: Redial
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
I-217
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 0 0 0
8 0 Retransmission interval on E-mail delivery error • 0 minute: 08-3=0, 08-2=0, 0 0 0
1 08-1=0, 08-0=0 1 1 1
• 10 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,
2 08-1=0, 08-0=1 1 1 1
3 • 20 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0, 0 0 0
08-1=1, 08-0=0
• 30 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
• 40 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
• 50 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=1
• 60 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=1, 08-0=0
• 70 minutes: 08-3=0, 08-2=1,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
• 80 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
• 90 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=0, 08-0=1
• 100 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=0
• 110 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=0,
08-1=1, 08-0=1
• 120 minutes: 08-3=1, 08-2=1,
08-1=0, 08-0=0
6 • 1: - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
9 0 Retransmission times on E-mail delivery error • 0 to 9: 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 0 0
1 • 10: 000 1010 1 1 1
• 11 to 99: 000 1011 to 110 0011
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
• 1: -
10 0 Time zone setting • -12 to -1: 1111 0100 to 1111 0 0 0
1 1111 0 0 0
• 0: 0000 0000
2 • 1 to 12: 0000 0001 to 0001100 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
11 0 Timer 1 • 0 to 31sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 RING receive → CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
• 32sec: 0010 0000
2 • 33 to 255sec: 0010 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
12 0 Timer 2 • 0 to 63sec: 0000 0000 to 0011 0 0 0
1 Dial calling complete → CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
• 64sec: 0100 0000
2 • 65 to 255sec: 0100 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
I-218
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
13 0 Timer 3 • 0: - 0 0 0
1 Not used • 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Timer 4 • 0 to 31 (x 100msec): 0000 0000 0 0 0
1 Connection → Start request telegram delivery to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 (x 100msec): 0010 0000
2 • 33 to 255 (x 100msec): 0010 0 0 0
3 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
15 0 Timer 5 • 0 to 29sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 Wait time for the response from other side 1101 1 1 1
• 30sec: 0001 1110
2 • 31 to 255sec: 0001 1111 to 1 1 1
3 1111 1111 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
16 0 Retry data, timer 6 • 0 to 254 (x 5msec): 0000 0000 1 1 1
1 Initialization OK → Dial request to 1111 1110 1 1 1
• 255 (x 5msec): 1111 1111
2 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1
6 1 1 1
7 1 1 1
17 0 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body) • 3000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=0 1 1 1
Number of enabled copy • 6000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=1
• 9000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=0
• 12000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=1
11 0 Timer 1 • 0 to 31sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 RING receive → CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
• 32sec: 0010 0000
2 • 33 to 255sec: 0010 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
12 0 Timer 2 • 0 to 63sec: 0000 0000 to 0011 0 0 0
1 Dial calling complete → CONNECT receive 1111 0 0 0
• 64sec: 0100 0000
2 • 65 to 255sec: 0100 0001 to 0 0 0
3 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
13 0 Timer 3 • 0: - 0 0 0
1 Not used • 1: - 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I-219
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
14 0 Timer 4 • 0 to 31 (x 100msec): 0000 0000 0 0 0
1 Connection → Start request telegram delivery to 0001 1111 0 0 0
• 32 (x 100msec): 0010 0000
2 • 33 to 255 (x 100msec): 0010 0 0 0
3 0001 to 1111 1111 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
15 0 Timer 5 • 0 to 29sec: 0000 0000 to 0001 0 0 0
1 Wait time for the response from other side 1101 1 1 1
• 30sec: 0001 1110
2 • 31 to 255sec: 0001 1111 to 1 1 1
3 1111 1111 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
16 0 Retry data, timer 6 • 0 to 254 (x 5msec): 0000 0000 1 1 1
1 Initialization OK → Dial request to 1111 1110 1 1 1
• 255 (x 5msec): 1111 1111
2 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1
5 1 1 1
6 1 1 1
7 1 1 1
17 0 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body) • 3000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=0 1 1 1
1 Number of enabled copy • 6000 copies: 17-1=0, 17-0=1 0 0 0
• 9000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=0
• 12000 copies: 17-1=1, 17-0=1
2 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF) • 600 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=0 1 1 1
3 Number of enabled original feed • 1200 copies : 17-3=0, 17-2=1 0 0 0
• 1800 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=0
• 2400 copies : 17-3=1, 17-2=1
4 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (main body) • 500: 17-5=0, 17-4=0 1 1 1
5 MCBJ setting • 1000: 17-5=0, 17-4=1 0 0 0
• 2000: 17-5=1, 17-4=0
• 3000: 17-5=1, 17-4=1
6 Call on frequent JAM occurrence (ADF) • 100: 17-7=0, 17-6=0 1 1 1
7 MOBJ setting • 200: 17-7=0, 17-6=1 0 0 0
• 400: 17-7=1, 17-6=0
• 600: 17-7=1, 17-6=1
18 0 Attention display • 0: OFF 1 1 1
• 1: ON
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
19 0 E-mail/http communication mode • 0: Duplex 0 0 0
• 1: Simplex
2 • 1: - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
I-220
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
20 0 http Heart Beat function • 0: ON 0 0 0
• 1: OFF
1 http Heart Beat Fix send • 0: Off 1 1 1
• 1: ON
3 • 1: - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
21 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
22 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
23 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
25 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
26 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
I-221
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
30 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
31 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
32 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
I-222
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
34 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
35 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
36 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
37 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
38 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
40 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
I-223
5.11.12 Setup confirmation

3. Make sure that only selected item "E-Mail", "Modem", or "http" is displayed on the "CS Remote Care setting screen".
5.11.13 Maintenance call

As the CE starts the maintenance, enter the ID code of CE (7-digit number with which each CE is identified, managed by a distributor.) to notify
the center the start of maintenance. After the maintenance, pressing [Maintenance Comp] notifies the center the completion of maintenance.
At the start of maintenance

* During the maintenance, [Start] button blinks until the completion of the maintenance.
At the end of maintenance

3. Press [Maintenance Comp] on the "CS Remote Care setting screen."
5.11.14 Center call from administrator

If the setup of CS Remote Care is completed, the manager can call the center of CS Remote Care.
1. Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. Press [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Administrator Call] on [Utility] screen.
3. Press [Start] on [Administrator Call] screen.
• If the setup is not completed, or if other call is made, [Start] is grayed out, disabling to make a call.
About how to call the center and send various data of the main body on the specified date and time, refer to the manual of CS Remote Care
center.
5.11.15 Confirm communication log

You can output and confirm the communication log.
2. Press [List Output] on the "Service Mode menu" screen.
3. Press [Communication Log List] on the "List Output screen."
5. Press start button to output the selected list.
For details of the log, refer to I.5.12 List Output.
5.11.16 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care

Initializing the RAM for CS Remote Care enables you to perform the setup again.
5. Press [Detail setting].
6. Press [RAM Clear] button on Utility screen.
7. Press [Execute] on "RAM Clear Setting" screen.
8. Press [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
9. The RAM is cleared, and the "CS Remote Care setting screen" is displayed.
10. Perform the setup again if necessary.
5.11.17 CS Remote Care error code list

Classificatio
Error Code Description Troubleshooting procedure
n
Connection K-0000 Connection NG (Cannot connect from the Redial.
via modem modem, timed out).
K-0001 Error code that may occur when a Redial and wait for re-reception.
transmission is made from the main body
to the center.
No response (After connection, no start
telegram from the center detected).
K-0002 Copying. Could not be written in non-
volatile memory, and line disconnected.
K-0003 Error code that may occur when a Confirm the center ID.
to the center.
Center ID mismatch.
K-0004 Serial number mismatch. Confirm the serial number.
I-224
Classificatio
n
K-0005 Error code that may occur when a Redial.
to the center.
Syntax error (when receiving undefined
commands or parameters)
K-0006 Received a write order for an unwritable
item.
K-0007 Unread item error.
to the center.
Signal reception time out after a
response detection (after the start
telegram shuttled).
K-0009 Error code that may occur when a
to the center.
Already registered serial number.
to the center.
Communication error occurred because
of the carrier OFF (NO CARRIER
detected in the modem).
to the center.
Dial tone (NO DIALTONE) detected in
the modem.
to the center.
Busy signal (BUSY) detected in the
modem.
to the center.
NO ANSWER detected in the modem.
K-0014 Error code that may occur when a Retry standard times, and redial.
to the center.
Telegram error (irregular telegram
received in response to the telegram you
sent).
K-0015 Serial number not registered in the center
(4 x 40 telegrams received).
to the center.
Errors not defined in K-0000 to 0015.
to the center.
Telephone number you must call was not
registered.
to the center.
DSR turned OFF or remains turned OFF.
K-0101 Error on creating a message queue.
K-0102 Error on generating a task.
to the center.
Error on sending a message.
to the center.
Error on receiving a message.
I-225
Classificatio
n
to the center.
Received an error (NG) from the timer
task.
to the center.
Modem initialization NG.
to the center.
Center call evacuation buffer is full.
Cannot evacuate any more.
Connection K-0590 Because of (E-mail/http) memory
via E-mail/ shortage, unable to secure enough area
http for sending a mail.
K-0592 (E-mail/http) Controller in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the controller is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
controller is in operation.
K-0593 Sending error: In the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after the
(E-mail) Error comes back from the mail specified time. Check if there is no fault in the network environment
server. and the network settings.
(http) Storing mail to Web server fails.
K-0594 (E-mail/http) Machine in operation: In the manual transmission, retry when the machine is idling. In the
unable to send a mail because the auto transmission, an automatic retry is performed after 1minute.
machine is in operation.
K-0595 (E-mail/http) Controller not connected: Check the connection between the controller and the main body.
unable to send a mail because the
controller is not connected.
K-0596 (E-mail/http) Controller-driven SC: unable If there is the controller-driven SC, a mail cannot be sent through the
to send a mail because of a controller- controller. Use a telephone. This error does not occur with the main
driven SC (49-xx). body NIC.
K-0597 (E-mail/http) No reply from controller
K-0600 (http) Fails to make the directory on Web
server
5.11.18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the followings when the main body does not receive the initial connection mail or does not return a response.
1. The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2. The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3. CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4. Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check it with a transmission test).
5.12 List Output

(1) Usage
Output various lists.
(2) Procedure
Press [10 List Output].
2. "List Output screen"
The list output mode menu includes the following items.
• Coverage data list
• Parameter List
• Font Pattern
• Communication Log List *1
• RFID Information List
• Memory Dump List
Note
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Font Pattern, Communication Log List and Memory Dump List are displayed.
• When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the Maintenance History, ORU-M Maintenance History and RFID Information List are
displayed.
• Do not use the parameter list and the memory dump list in the field because they are for development.
I-226

When outputting to the USB memory, press [Output All to USB].
4. [USB Memory Connection screen]
Connect the USB memory to the service port and press [OK].
Note
• The following data are stored; Counter List, Mode Memory List, User Management List, Use Management List, Audit Log
Report, Machine Management List, Adjustment Data List, Coverage Data List and Maintenance History.
• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
• When setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, the ORU-M Maintenance History and the RFID Information List.
• File Type
tab-delimited text file
• Save directory
Root directory
• File naming convention
listprint<Machine code> + <Destination code> + <Serial No.>_<YMD>_<Time>.txt
Example:
listprint505A000123456_20100107_1010.txt

To print on paper, press [Print Mode].
Press [Print Mode].
7. Press the Start key to output the selected list.
To output other lists, repeat steps 2 to 8.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and receiving history of the CS Remote Care. The start time of communications, the time
period of communications (modem only), the communication modes, the results of communications, and the senders (mail only) are printed.
The communication modes and the results of communications are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit number. For the meaning of them, refer
to the following table.
Communication mode Results of communication
0000 - Transmitted successfully
0001 Initial transmission Connection time out when
transmitting
0002 Emergency transmission -
0004 Emergency recovery transmission Received successfully
0005 - Reception failed
0008 Transmission for warning -
0010 Warning recovery transmission -
0020 Maintenance start transmission -
0040 Maintenance completion -
transmission
0080 Administrator transmission -
0100 Fixed date transmission -
0200 Response transmission -
0*** - Transmission failed
1000 Enquiry -
2000 Data rewrite -
4000 Response reception -
8000 Test mail -
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place of ***.
5.13 Test Mode

5.13.1 Running Test Mode
(1) Usage
Conduct a test while in the continuous print operation.
In this mode, the following items can be selected:
Note
• The scanner is mounted on PF-705 (option). When PF-705 is not connected, the scanner-related operations are not performed.
• Intermittent copy
After completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before
resuming the same operation.
• Paperless running mode
Without feeding paper and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
In the same manner as the intermittent copy, after completion of the printing operation for the set print count, the machine changes into
the ready state and waits for 0.5sec. before resuming the same operation.
• Paperless Mode
In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as
the normal operation.
I-227
• Paperless endless mode

The machine operates with the print count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without feeding paper
and detecting paper or jam, the printing operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal operation.
• Running Mode
The printing operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanning operation and the auto paper feed tray switching.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Select the mode to be adjusted and press [Print Mode].
3. Press the Start button to start the running test.
4. Press the STOP button to stop the running test.
5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode

(1) Usage
Output various test patterns to use them for troubleshooting.
Note
• Do not use any test pattern number not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [11 Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode menu screen"
Press [02 Test Pattern Output Mode ].
3. "Test Pattern screen"
Press any of the keys [Test Pattern], [Gradation-Y], [Gradation-M], [Gradation-C] or [Gradation-K]. Enter the test pattern number to output
through the numeric buttons and then press [SET].
• When selecting the screen, press any of the keys [Line1], [Line2], [Dot1], [Dot2], [Stochastic] or [Contone].
• When specifying arbitrary density, press [SET] and proceed to step 4. In other cases, proceed to step 6.
4. "Density Setting Display screen"
Specify the coverage or the background density.
Setting Range
Coverage-Y/M/C/K: 0% (low) to 100% (high)
Background-Y/M/C/K: 0 (light) to 255 (dark)
5. Press [Return].
7. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. To output another test pattern, press [Exit PrintMode] and repeat steps 3 to 7.
5.13.3 Test Pattern No.11 Beam check

(1) [Check item 1]
• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) [Check item 2]

• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the sub scan
direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: 2nd transfer unit
I-228
(3) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
5.13.4 Test Pattern No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading edge timing of the printer
system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 8050fs1021
[1] Storage of image data
5.13.5 Test Pattern No.49 RU color sensor gamma correction (Output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis XL/i1-Pro)
(1) [Purpose]
• Used by "Output Paper Density Adj." in the user's mode.
• A test pattern used for registering the paper category in "Output Paper Density Adj.."
Note
This test pattern has 3 sizes.
I-229
(2) Test pattern
5.13.6 Test Pattern No.51 Gradation evaluation pattern (Main scan)

(1) [Check item]
• If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c002ca
5.13.7 Test Pattern No.52 Gradation evaluation pattern (Sub scan)

(1) [Check item]
• If there are image stripes or the uneven density, check if the write system or the process system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof glass
I-230
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c003ca
5.13.8 Test Pattern No.53 Overall halftone

(1) [Check item]
Check the image quality of each screen. (No.1 can print only with Contone)
• When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are image stripes, determine whether the fault is with the write system or the process system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, intermediate transfer unit, charging corona, 2nd transfer unit, and dust-proof
glass
• When the density is set to 0 (white)
If image fogging occurs,check whether the printer system operates normally.
Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona and high voltage contact.
• When the density is set to 255 (Y, M, C, K)
If the density is light check whether the printer system operates normally.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
*Refer to I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode for adjusting density.
(2) Test pattern
8050fs1019
[1] When the density is set to 70 [3] When the density is set to 255
[2] When the density is set to 0 -
5.13.9 Test Pattern No.54 Gradation evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode
Screen Purpose Check item
Line1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Line2 by the copier from primary color to secondary color. even with no tone jump.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Conduct Printer Gamma
Dot1 Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Dot2
Stochastic
I-231
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in Make sure that the density increases in incremental step
the character area when the screen mentioned above is from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
selected by the copier. section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
(2) Test pattern

[2] [1]
a03uf3c004ca
[1] Primary color [2] Secondary color
5.13.10 Test Pattern No.55 5% coverage

(1) [Purpose]
When making test prints continuously in order to check the paper feed performance or etc., use this 5% coverage test pattern to protect
developer, drums, cleaners etc. from burden.
(2) Test pattern
a03uf3c005ca
5.13.11 Test Pattern No.58 Stripe check pattern

(1) [Usage]
• Use to locate the causes of sub-scan direction stripes which occur on the image.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "120".
2. Select [Dot1] for screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and set a sheet of A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
4. Check whether the sub-scan direction stripes occur on area [1] or [2].
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

• In the case of [1] : Intermediate transfer unit, 2nd transfer roller /Lw
• In the case of [2] : Drum cartridge
I-232
(4) Test pattern
[2] [1]
a03uf3c034ca
5.13.12 Test Pattern No.62 Uneven density check pattern

(1) [Usage]
• After the periodic maintenance, check uneven density and density difference between right and left side by each gradation of YMCK, RBG
and process Bk.
Check uneven density with both edges [1] and [2] of Y, M, C and process Bk.
(2) [Checking procedure]

1. Select [Test Pattern] and set the density of each color M, C and K to "255".
2. Select [Dot1] (default of controller) and [Line1] (default of copier) for screen.
3. Press [Print Mode] and set 8 sheets of A4 or 8 1/ x 11 paper.
2
(3) [Recommended checkpoints]

• Charging corona, write unit
(4) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
a03uf3c035ca
5.13.13 Test Pattern No.75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL

(1) [Purpose]
• A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
I-233
(2) Test pattern
5.13.14 Test Pattern No.76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2)

(1) [Purpose]
• A test pattern output by the density balance adjustment chart of the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern

• Type1
• Type2
I-234
5.13.15 Test Pattern No.77 Density correction pattern Manual

(1) [Purpose]
• A test pattern output by "Output Paper Density Manual Adj." in the user's mode.
(2) Test pattern
5.13.16 Test Pattern No.80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern

(1) [Purpose]
Check gradation reproducibility of each screen.
For details on procedures to select screens, refer to I.5.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode
Screen Purpose Check item
Line1 Check the gradation reproducibility of each screen used Make sure that the gradation of each color is smooth and
Line2 by the copier from primary color to tertiary color. even with no tone jump.
Dot1 Sensor Adj. and Printer Gamma Offset Adj.
Dot2
Stochastic
Contone Check the gradation reproducibility of the screen used in Make sure that the density increases in incremental step
the character area when the screen mentioned above is from the high light side, and the density in the shadow
selected by the copier. section of each color is dark enough.
Sensor Adj.
I-235
(2) Test pattern
b
c
a
b
c
a03uf3c024ca
A: Primary color
B: Secondary color
C: Tertiary color
5.13.17 Test Pattern No.88 Chart file output

(1) Usage
Prints a chart (TIFF image) stored in the USB media.
Note
USB media stands for USB memory or USB HDD.
Only USB media in FAT32 format is supported.
The service port is designed for low-power devices. When using a high-power device such as HDD, connect the external power
source to the device.
(2) Preparation:
1. Set the service port device setting to [ON].
(3) How to use

When using this function, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor to confirm its handling.
5.14 Setting data

5.14.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Stores each setting information stored in NVRAM board (NRB) from the machine to the USB memory and writes it from the USB memory to
the machine. However, the setting data cannot be edited since it is encrypted.
(a) Setting information which is able to store/write

Data items Data content
Paper setting data Tray setting
Paper Setting Register/
Delete
Register/Delete custom
size
Utility data Utility
Software DIPSW setting data Software DIPSW
CSRC setting data CSRC setting
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [01 Read from external memory].
I-236
Note
• If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
3. "Setting Data Scan File Selection screen"

Press [Next] or [Back] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
• By pressing [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine appears.
4. "Setting Data Scan Item Selection screen"

Select the data to be read from [Paper Setting Data]/[Utility data]/[Software DIPSW Setting Data]/[CSRC Setting Data] and press [Start
Reading].
5. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the setting data.
Note
• Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
6. "Setting Data Scan Complete screen"

To read another setting data, press [Continue]. To finish the procedure, press [Exit].
Note
• By pressing [Exit], the machine restarts automatically.
5.14.2 Store to external memory

(1) Function
Store the setting data from NRB to the USB memory.
(2) Preparation:
Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Setting Data].
2. "Setting Data menu screen"
Press [02 Store to external memory].
3. "Setting Data Start to Store screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
• Be sure not to turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
4. "Setting Data Store Complete screen"

Press [OK], to go back to "Setting Data <Store to external memory> screen".
(4) Folder structure of USB memory

When storing data to the USB memory and the folder is not created, it creates the next folder automatically.
I-237
C8000
NOVRAM
a1rfm0ij015ca
(5) Error list

If the error occurs for reading from the external memory or for storing to the external memory, the error message appears. Confirm the
following contents and the causes when the error message appears.
Message Cause of occurrence
Connection of an external memory device 1) The initialization of the USB device is not completed.
cannot be recognized. 2) The USB memory is not connected to the connection port.
It cannot store to the external memory device. 3) Prohibit to write to the USB memory
4) Capacity shortage of the USB memory
5) Unable to execute the compression from the binary data to
the ZLIB compressed data.
6) Unable to encrypt AES.
It cannot read from the external memory 7) Data error on the header (2nd line)
device. 8) Checksum abnormality
9) Unable to execute the replacement from the BASE64 data
to the AES encrypt data.
10) Unable to execute the compounding of AES.
11) Unable to execute the extension from the ZLIB
compressed data to the binary data.
5.15 Log Store

5.15.1 Log Store Setting
(1) Usage
Set the log storing method for troubleshooting.
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [01 Log Store Setting].
3. "Log Store Setting screen"
Set each item.
• "Store To"
Press [USB Memory] or [HDD].
Note
• The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port
Device Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
• When DIPSW2-0: 0 or DIPSW18-7: 1, the storage to HDD is not available.
• "Encryption Password" setting

Note
• When [USB Memory] is selected on "Store To", only [ON] can be selected for "Encryption Password".
1. Press [ON].
2. "Encryption Password Input screen"
Input the password and press [OK].
Note
• The default password is "0000".
• Input the password within 16-digit.
• "Auto Log Store"

When "Auto Log Store" is set to "ON", the log is automatically stored when SC (except for HDD related SC) occurs.
Note
• File name rule
With the file name created from the date, time, and SC number, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
Example:
/Log/201001070925SC_48_50.zip
• 100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100. (Refer to I.5.15.2
Execute Log Storing)
• When "USB Memory" is selected on "Store To" and the USB memory is not connected to the service port, the log is not
stored automatically.
• "Manual Log Store"

When "Manual Log Store" is set to "ON", the log can be stored manually by I.5.15.2 Execute Log Storing.
Note
I-238
· When "Manual Log Store" is set to [ON], [Log Store] button is displayed on "System Information" screen of Utility. User can collect
the log with this button.
5.15.2 Execute Log Storing

(1) Usage
Store the log for trouble shooting manually.
Note
• The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the utility mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory cannot be used.
• When DIPSW2-0: 1 or DIPSW18-7: 0, the storage to HDD is not available.
• 100 logs can be stored at the maximum. Be sure to clear the log file when the number exceeds 100.
• With the file name created from the date and time, the log is stored (encrypt zip) in the Log directory.
(2) Procedure
Press [14 Log Store].
2. "Log Store menu screen"
Press [02 Execute Log Storing].
3. "Execute Log Storing screen"
I.5.15.1 Log Store Setting
When USB memory is set as destination to which log is stored
• [Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
• [Transfer to USB Memory]: Cannot be selected.
• [Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the USB memory.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
When HDD is set as destination to which log is stored
• [Manual Log Store]: Stores the log in HDD.
1. Press [Manual Log Store].
• [Transfer to USB Memory]:
Transfers the log stored in the HDD to the route directory of the USB memory.
1. Press [Transfer to USB Memory].
• [Clear Log File]: Clears the log in the HDD.
1. Press [Clear Log File].
2. "Clear Log File screen"
Press [OK].
5.16 ORU-M Setting

5.16.1 Outline
Set the ORU-M target unit and the life.
Note
• ORU-M has to be enabled to select this setting. (The default is disabled.) To enable ORU-M, set DIPSW15-0: 1.
5.16.2 Procedure
Press [15 ORU-M Setting].
2. "ORU-M Setting screen"
Press "▼" or "▲" to select the unit to be set.
To set to the ORU-M target, press the button on the left of the unit to be registered and set it to "Enable".
3. To change the setting, select the replacement unit.
• Setting Range
Replacement Unit Standard Life Setting Range
Intermediate transfer unit 300,000 prints 66 to 333%
Developing Unit (Yellow) 784km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Magenta) 784km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Cyan) 784km 50 to 120%
Developing Unit (Black) 784km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Yellow) 196km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Magenta) 196km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Cyan) 196km 50 to 120%
Developer Unit (Black) 196km 50 to 120%
2nd transfer unit 150,000 prints 50 to 120%
I-239
Fusing unit 400,000 prints*1 50 to 120%

2nd fusing unit 400,000 prints*1 50 to 120%
Drum Unit (Yellow) 160km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Magenta) 160km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Cyan) 160km 80 to 113%
Drum Unit (Black) 160km 80 to 113%
Charging Corona (Yellow) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Magenta) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Cyan) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Charging Corona (Black) 70 hours 57 to 143%
Dust proof filter (A,B,C) 300,000 prints 50 to 120%
Developing cooling filter 300,000 prints 50 to 120%
Ozone filter 300,000 prints 50 to 120%
Separation Rubber (Tray1) 400,000 prints 50 to 120%
Feed Roller (Tray1) 2,400,000 prints 50 to 120%
• Note
*1 The life count of the main body fusing may differ from that of EF-101 2nd fusing.
I-240
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C8000 SETTING
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING

6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list
Adjustment/setting item
CE/Administrator Security Setting 01 CE Authentication
02 Authentication Password
03 Admin. Authentication
04 Machine Manager Password
Important
• The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
6.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
The CE/Administrator Security Setting can be set on the "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" in the CE/Administrator security
mode.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop → 0 → C
2. "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen"
The CE/Administrator security mode starts up and the CE/Administrator Security Setting becomes available.
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
Important
• The setting [03 Enhanced Security Mode] in [10 Security Setting] in [03 Administrator Setting] is available only when the CE
Authentication and Admin. Authentication are set to [ON].
6.3 CE Authentication
(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the service mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter the service mode.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 CE Authentication].
2. "CE Authentication ON/OFF screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
4. Press [Cancel] to cancel updating.
6.4 CE Auth. Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the service mode.
Note
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
• CE should not inform other people of the password.
• The selection of the [CE Authentication Password] key is limited to only when the CE authentication setting is set to [ON].
(2) Procedure
Press [02 CE Authentication Password].
2. "CE Authentication Password screen"
Press [Current Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter the current password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then
press [OK].
Default is "92729272."
When entering wrong password, the message "Password is incorrect" is displayed.
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and then
press [OK].
5. "CE Authentication Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
I-241
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY
bizhub PRESS C8000 SETTING
6.5 Admin. Authentication

(1) Usage
To strengthen security of the machine manager setting of the setting menu mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter
the machine manager setting.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Admin. Authentication].
2. "Admin. Authentication ON/OFF Setting screen"
Press [ON] or [OFF].
3. When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
6.6 Administrator Password

(1) Usage
Configure a password to enter the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
The administrator password can also be set in the Administrator Setting of the Utility.
Note
• When setting or changing the administrator password, CE must ask the administrator of the customer to change the
administrator password promptly.
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
• The selection of the [Administrator Password] key is limited only when the Admin. Authentication setting is set to [ON].
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Administrator Password].
2. "Administrator Password screen"
3. Press [New Password], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys and then press
[OK].
Press [OK].
4. Press [Input Confirmation], then a keyboard screen appears. Enter new password (8 digits) using the alphanumeric keys again and then
press [OK].
5. "Administrator Password screen"
When [OK] is pressed, the setting becomes valid and "CE/Administrator Security Setting Menu screen" is displayed.
I-242
bizhub PRESS C8000 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING

7.1 Fee Collection Setting list
Adjustment/Setting Item
Fee Collection Setting 01 Management Function
02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting*
* DIPSW33-7 needs to be set to 1 to display the setting.
7.2 Start/exit
(1) Usage
Set up the various settings concerning the fee collection setting from the "Fee Collection Setting" screen.
(2) Procedure
Before selecting any item in the service mode, press the hard keys in the order shown below.
Stop → 9
2. "Fee Collection Setting screen"
Fee collection setting mode is activated. Set the various settings concerning fee collection setting.
3. "Fee Collection Setting menu screen"
Select the item to be set to display the setting screen of each item.
Press [Close] to return to the "Service Mode screen."
7.3 Management Function

(1) Usage
Set the various settings concerning management equipment of the main body.
Note
• C8000 does not support this function.
(2) Procedure
Press [01 Management Function].
2. "Fee Collection < Management Setting > screen"
Select the options for each item of the management setting.
3. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
7.4 Billing Coefficient Setting

(1) Usage
Set the count coefficient for each coverage and size of the billing counter.
The counting method differs depending on the customer. In order to cope with this situation, change the coefficient.
(2) Functions
Set the calculation of the billing counter that is displayed on Web Utilities and the coefficient to display the counter.
Note
Set DIPSW33-7=1 to display this screen.
When the coefficient setting value is changed, the total value of the Web Utilities and the billing total counter value differ because of
the following approach.
For the display on the Web Utilities, since the main body sends each counter and calculates on Web Utilities, new coefficient is
used for the counter before changing the coefficient to calculate.
Since the display on the main body panel is calculated and accumulated for each output page, the coefficient after the change is
used only for the output after the change when the coefficient is changed. (The counter before changing the coefficient is not
changed.)
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Billing Counter Coefficient Setting].
2. "Billing Counter Coefficient Setting screen"
Press the number of the printing coefficient or size coefficient to select.
3. Enter a value with the numeric buttons.
• Setting Range
: 0.1 to 4.0
4. To set other coefficient, repeat steps 2 to 3.
5. Press [OK] to activate the setting, and the "Fee Collection Setting menu screen" is displayed.
I-243
bizhub PRESS C8000 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD

8.1 Process Adjustment
8.1.1 Outline
This adjustment shows the directions of each adjustment of [Process Adjustment] in the [Paper Setting] which are displayed when the
DIPSW1-0 "Process adjustment user screen display" is set to "1." When adjusting each item, check the problem, the paper on which it tends to
occur, the paper weight and the environment in which it tends to occur to make a proper adjustment.
Separate setting can be set for each tray by setting offset to the adjustment value set in this setting. However be careful not to make excessive
adjustment. Otherwise image trouble may occur.
8.1.2 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)

(1) Measure taken according to cause
1. poor transfer
Poor transfer is an uneven color problem which occurs on the area with multiple colors put. It is caused when the transfer electric field is
insufficient.
1. Paper on which it tends to occur
• Plain paper (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
3. Environment in which it tends to occur
• Unidentified
• After continuous low coverage printing
4. Adjustment method
1. Adjust to the negative side
2. Adjust negatively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
5. Precaution related to other adjustments
• When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back)

1. poor transfer
Poor transfer is an uneven color problem which occurs on the area with multiple colors put. It is caused when the transfer electric field is
insufficient.
• Plain
• Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Low humidity environment
• After continuous low coverage printing
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• When too much steps are moved, the noise of white dots or rough image on the half-tone area may occur.
2. noise of white spot
• Plain
• Fine (rough surface, with high resistance)
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
1. Adjust to the positive side
2. Adjust positively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• When too much steps are moved, the poor transfer may occur. In this case, adjust it by 5 steps.
8.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
Poor transfer stands for color unevenness phenomenon on the color overlay portion in image, due to the insufficient transfer electric field.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
I-244

• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.8.1.2
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front).
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Back)

1. Poor transfer on lead edge area
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the poor transfer occurs especially on the paper lead edge area. To entirely adjust, conduct I.8.1.3
2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Back).
8.1.6 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front)

1. Paper trailing edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
2. Paper trailing edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 221g/m2 to 350g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.7 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Back)

1. Paper trailing edge poor transfer, transfer jitter
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
I-245
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
2. Paper trailing edge transfer repelling
Transfer repelling is a problem which the toner is repelled due to the discharge of the paper when the electric field is too strong.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 221g/m2 to 350g/m2
2. Adjusgt positively by 10steps until the proper condition can be obtained.
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.8 Separation AC(Front)

1. Paper wrap to the 2nd transfer belt
• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the Separation DC adjustment.
2. Transfer charge leak trails, blurred
Blurred is a problem which the toner scatters around the text area or line cross point to blurred the image.
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
8.1.9 Separation AC(Back)

• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• Conduct this adjustment when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment. Conduct this adjustment
when the problem still occurs even after conducting the de-curler adjustment + Separation DC adjustment.
I-246

• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
8.1.10 Separation DC(Front)

• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
• Plain
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.11 Separation DC(Back)

• Coated
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
• Unidentified
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
• Plain
I-247
• Fine
2. Paper weight
• 64g/m2 to 74g/m2
Setting Range
: - 50 to + 50
• None
8.1.12 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Idle)

1. rough gloss
Rough gloss is a problem which the entire image looks white depending on the brightness condition.
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• High temperature and high humidity environment
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment has been adjusted; I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center
Temp. (Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.14 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
2. insufficient fusing
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
• Low temperature environment
• Around temperature 20 ℃
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment has been adjusted; I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center
Temp. (Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.14 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to adjust the following adjustment by the same steps; I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp.
(Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
2. Insufficient fusing
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I-248

Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to adjust the following adjustment by the same steps; I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp.
(Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
8.1.14 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment has been adjusted; I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge
Temp. (Print). At this time adjust I.8.1.12 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment has been adjusted; I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge
Temp. (Print). At this time adjust I.8.1.12 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to adjust the following adjustment by the same steps; I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I-249
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
8.1.16 Fus. UnderBelt CenterTemp. (Idle)

1. rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to adjust the following adjustments by the same steps; I.8.1.22 2nd Fus. T-Belt
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.23 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print)
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.17 Fus. UnderBelt CenterTemp. (Print), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print)
8.1.17 Fus. UnderBelt CenterTemp. (Print)

1. rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment have been adjusted; I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) and I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat
Edge Temp. (Print)
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I-250

Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the problem still occurs even the following adjustment have been adjusted; I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) and I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat
Edge Temp. (Print)
8.1.18 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
• Adjust this setting when the effect is insufficient at starting the print even the following adjustment has been adjusted; I.8.1.19 Fus.
Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.20 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.20 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Idle) by the same steps.
8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
I-251

Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
8.1.20 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.18 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Idle) by the same steps.
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Out Heat Center Temp.(Print) At this time adjust I.8.1.18 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Idle) by the same steps.
8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print)

1. rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print).
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
Setting Range
I-252
: - 10 to + 10
Temp. (Print), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print).
8.1.22 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Idle)

1. rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print).
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
• Unidentified
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print)
8.1.23 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Print)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print).
2. Poor gloss
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print).
I-253
8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle)

1. Rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
2. Poor gloss
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print)

1. rough gloss
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 81g/m2 to 105g/m2
2. Set to -10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.23 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle).
2. Poor gloss
• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
• Unidentified
• Unidentified
2. Set to +10 step.
Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
CenterTem. (Idle), I.8.1.23 2nd Fus. T-Belt CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle).
8.1.26 Speed Down

• Unidentified
2. Paper weight
I-254
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
1. Set to [ON] from [OFF] (default).
• When this setting is set to [ON], the productivity is reduced. Adjust this setting when the insufficient fusing still occurs even the
following adjustment have been adjusted; I.8.1.12 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Idle), I.8.1.13 Fusing Roller Center Temp. (Print),
I.8.1.14 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Idle), I.8.1.15 Fusing Roller Edge Temp. (Print), I.8.1.24 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Idle), I.
8.1.25 2nd Fus. U-Belt CenterTem. (Print), I.8.1.18 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Idle), I.8.1.19 Fus. Out Heat Center Temp.(Print),
I.8.1.20 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Idle) and I.8.1.21 Fus. Out Heat Edge Temp. (Print).
8.1.27 CPM Down

1. The brightness change during continuous print is large
• Coated
2. Paper weight
• 106g/m2 to 135g/m2
• 257g/m2 to 300g/m2
• Around temperature 20°C
1. Set to [Down] from [Normal] (default)
• When this setting is set to [Down], the productivity is reduced.
I-255
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub
bizhub PRESS C8000 PRESS C8000
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub PRESS C8000

9.1 Centering adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a miscentering that cannot be adjusted in the service mode occurs.
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] under the up/down plate [1].
3. Move the guide plate [3] to adjust the center position.
4. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5. Output the test pattern (No.16).
[3] a052f3c004ca
6. Hold the output paper at the center of the sub scan direction and
check that the miscentering amount [3] between the centers of
[2]
paper [1] and the image [2] is within the standard value.
[3] Standard value: within ± 3mm
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the miscentering amount turns to be
[1] within the standard value.
8050fs1056
9.2 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed trays /1 to /3

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when no feed or double feed occurs. Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely
in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the
symptom.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Remove the paper feed unit. (Refer to F.5.10.3 Replacing the
paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch)
3. Change the position to hook the spring [1] on the bottom of the
paper feed unit.
Weak [2]: A double feed is improved.
Strong [3]: A no feed jam is improved.
4. Install the paper feed unit and then set the paper feed tray.
[3] [2] a03uf3c006ca
9.3 Fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven wax due to the fusing paper exit roller of the main body occurs.
I-256
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub
bizhub PRESS C8000 PRESS C8000
(2) Procedure
1. Slide the knob [1] to align the triangle mark [2] with the position [3],
[4], or [5]. Then, adjust the pressure condition of the fusing paper
[2] [1] exit roller.
For the adjustment of the pressure condition, only the
combinations shown in the following list can be set. Change the
setting of Adjustment1 and Adjustment2 in this order.
Plain, Color, Fine (g/ Coated (g/m2) Postcard
m2)
64 to 81 to 136 to 81 to 106 to 1 4
80 135 350 105 350 sheet
Initial 1st fusing:Strong pressure
settin 2nd fusing:Strong pressure
g
[3] [4] Adjust No 1st 1st 1st 1st No 1st
[5]
ment1 chang fusing: fusing: fusing: fusing: chang fusing:
e Weak Press Weak Press e Press
press ure press ure ure
ure releas ure releas releas
2nd e 2nd e e
fusing: 2nd fusing: 2nd 2nd
- *1 fusing: Press fusing: fusing:
Press ure Press Press
ure releas ure ure
releas e releas releas
e e e
Adjust - 1st - 1st - - -
ment2 fusing: fusing:
Press Press
ure ure
releas releas
e e
2nd 2nd
fusing: fusing:
- *1 Press
ure
releas
e
*1: Not fed to the 2nd fusing, but fed to the bypass route.
Note
• [3]: Pressure release
• [4]: Weak pressure
• [5]: Strong pressure
• Do not set to the positions other than the mark [3], [4], or
[5]. Note that JAM occurs when the pressure condition is
not stable.
• When a jam occurs after switching to Adjustment1 or
Adjustment2, turn back the knob to the pressure position
before change.
2. After the adjustment, execute the test print to check the condition
of the uneven wax.
I-257
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub PRESS C8000 DF-622
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-622

10.1 Hinge angle adjustment (70 degrees and 40 degrees)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the maximum opening angle of DF.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and 2 hinge adjustment brackets [2].
There are 2 types of the bracket installed in the DF; one for 70
[1] degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and they can be
distinguished by the scratched number on each surface.
2. Install 2 new hinge adjustment brackets [2] and tighten them with 4
screws [1] securely.
[2]
10.2 Hinge angle adjustment (90 degrees)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when removing DF or scanner part.
Note
• When removing the DF or removing any parts from the scanner section with the DF opened, be sure to secure the hinge
adjustment brackets at 90 degrees. Without this operation, it deforms the metal frame in the DF installation section.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. To secure the hinge adjustment brackets at 90 degrees, follow
either of the steps below. There are 2 types of the bracket installed
in the DF; one for 70 degrees and the other for 40 degrees, and
they can be distinguished by the scratched number on each
surface.
Brackets for 70 degrees:
Loosen 4 screws [1] and slide 2 brackets [2] downward, and then
secure them with 4 screws [1] again.
Brackets for 40 degrees:
Remove 4 screws [1]. Turn 2 brackets [2] upside down and
reinstall them to DF and secure 4 screw [1] again.
2. When completed, be sure to put the brackets back to the original
state.
[2] [1]
a052f3c002ca
I-258
bizhub PRESS C8000 PF-704/705
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-704/705

11.1 Upper limit sensor standard position adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to return the position of the upper limit sensor which is changed in the feeding ability adjustment to the standard
position.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen the screw [1], remove 2 screws [2] and remove the duct
[1] [3] [4] [3].
[2]
[1] 3. Adjust it so that the distance "A" between the sensor mounting
plate and the duct (inside dimension) comes to the standard value,
and then tighten the screw [1].
Standard value: A = 6 ± 0.5mm
A
11.2 Paper feed performance adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct the paper feed pressure adjustment when the multi-feed or jam in the tray section occurs frequently. There are 3 adjustment
methods; air volume setting, solenoid control setting and upper limit sensor position adjustment.
CAUTION
• Since the machine operates without the paper feed check window in this adjustment, be sure not to put your hand there.
(2) Preparation
• Remove the paper feed check window of the tray to be adjusted. (Refer to G.4.3.31 Paper feed check windowPaper feed check window)
• The inside of the tray 1 cannot be checked through the paper feed check window. Set the paper to check on the tray 2 to check.
(3) Multi-feed adjustment (J-1649, J-1849)

[1] [2] 1. Select [Machine] tab in the user mode and set [Paper setting] and
[Air blow] to [Manual].
2. Print out with paper on which the jam occurs to check the paper
movement through the paper feed check window.
Note
• To check the paper movement inside the tray, use the
light.
3. Set [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] stronger than the current setting.
4. When the multi feed is not improved just by [Lead Edge Air Level
Setting], set [Side Air Level Setting] weaker.
5. When the multi feed is not improved by adjusting [Lead Edge Air
Level Setting] and [Side Air Level Setting], loosen the screw [1]
and move down the upper limit sensor [2].
Note
• When changing the paper to the paper with no jam occurs
after conducting this adjustment, be sure to return the
setting of [Paper setting] and [Air blow] to [Auto].
• When using the paper with no jam occurs after
conducting this adjustment, be sure to return the upper
limit sensor which is moved to its standard position.
I-259
(Refer toI.11.1 Upper limit sensor standard position
adjustment)
(4) No feed adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803)

1. Set [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
2. When the no feed is not improved just by [Lead Edge Air Level Setting], set [Side Air Level Setting] stronger.
3. When the no feed is not improved by adjusting [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] and [Side Air Level Setting], set [Side Duct Up/Down] to
[Active (Strong)].
4. When the no feed is not improved by steps 1 to 3, move up the upper limit sensor installation position.
(5) Paper lead edge buckle adjustment

1. Set [Lead Edge Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
(6) Adjustment for paper surface scratch due to floating duct

1. Set [Side Duct Up/Down] to [OFF].
(7) Adjustment for no feed due to paper convex curl (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803)
1. Set [Lead Edge Nozzle Change] to [Active (Strong)].
(8) Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603, J-1801 to 1803)

Note
• It is regarded not as the no feed jam but as the feed failed jam in the following case; the paper is fed until its lead edge reaches
around the exit roller when pulling out the tray.
1. Set [Side Air Level Setting] weaker than the current setting.
2. When the jam is not improved just by [Side Air Level Setting], set [Side Duct Up/Down] to [OFF].
11.3 Centering adjustment (for each tray)

(1) Usage
This adjustment is made when the centering of paper varies each paper supplied from the trays 1, 2 and 3. The centering is automatically
adjusted in the image-processing unit, and this adjustment is made only when a centering exceeding the range of auto correction (± 5mm)
occurs.
Note
• When the centering error occurs on the paper fed from all of the trays 1 to 3, perform I.11.4 Centering Adjustment (PF).
(2) Procedure
1. Make the software DIPSW26-4 "Printer auto centering correction
[3] (PF)" disable (data = 1).
2. Perform copying/printing without automatic correction to check the
centering of image.
3. Pull out the tray.
4. If any paper remaining, remove it.
5. If the paper guide [1] is at the small-size position, stretch the guide.
7. Move the paper guide [1]. According to the centering you checked
[2]
in step2, adjust the center position using the marking line [3].
9. Insert a paper, and set the tray.
[1] [1]
10. Make a copy/print and check to see if the centering is within the
standard value (± 2mm).
11. When not up to the standard value, repeat the steps 3 to 10.
12. Make the software DIPSW26-4 "Printer auto centering correction
(PF) " enable (data = 0).
11.4 Centering Adjustment (PF)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering of the same kind occurs in all the fed paper from the PF trays 1, 2 and 3. The centering is
automatically adjusted in the image-processing unit, and this adjustment is made only when a centering exceeding the range of auto
correction (±5mm) occurs.
Note
• Conduct "I.11.3 Centering adjustment (for each tray)" when the mis-centering differs between trays 1, 2, and 3.
I-260
(2) Procedure
1. Make the software DIPSW26-4 "Printer Centering Adjustment"
[2] [1] [3]
disable (data = 1).
2. Make a copy/print for each of the trays 1 to 3, and make sure of
the mis-centering of image with no automatic adjustment made.
(SW1) of the main body and unplug the power plug of the main
body from the power outlet.
4. Detach the PF from the main body. (Refer to "Installation manual")
5. Remove the screw [2] of the PF positioning bracket /FrUp [1] on
the main body side, and then loosen the screws [3], 2 each.
6. Move the PF positioning bracket /FrUp [1] back and forth, and
adjust the center position referring to the amount of discrepancy
found in the step2.
8. Remove the screw [5] of the PF positioning bracket /FrLw [4] on
the main body side, and then loosen the screws [6], 2 each.
9. Move the PF positioning bracket /FrLw [4] back and forth, and
adjust the center position referring to the amount of discrepancy
found in the step2.
Note
• Move the PF positioning brackets /FrUp and /FrLw for the
same amount.

11. Connect the PF to the main body.
12. Connect the power plug of the main body to the power outlet and
turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2)
of the main body.
13. Make a copy/print for each of the trays 1 to 3 to check the mis-
centering to see if it is within the standard value (±2mm).
[6] [4] [5] 14. When not up to the standard value, repeat the steps 3 to 12.
15. Make the software DIPSW26-4 "Printer Centering Adjustment"
enable (data = 0).
11.5 Horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the PF is placed in a horizontal position or when any discrepancy in height and/or tilt is found between the
device and the main body.
Note
• Conducting horizontal adjustments may cause slipping-off of the position relative to the main body. So, after completion of
adjustments, be sure to make a test copy/print to check to see if the paper feed is properly made from the PF.
(2) Procedure
[6] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt3. (Refer to G.4.3.3 Rear cover /Lt3)
[7]
[8] outlet.
[4] 3. Loosen the caster nuts [1] provided at the 2 places.
4. Use a wrench to rotate the caster nuts [2] provided at the 2 places
[5]
and make height adjustments of the device.
[3] Note
• Adjust the height so that the positioning plate [5] fits
between the holes [4] of the positioning brackets [3] on
the main body seen from the PF front side.
• Adjust the height so that the positioning plate [8] cannot
be seen from the holes [7] of the positioning brackets [6]
on the main body seen from the PF rear side.
[2]
[1]
I-261
5. Insert a screw driver in one of the holes [2] of the adjuster foot [1]
at 2 positions and rotate it to adjust the leveling of the PF.
[1] [2]
11.6 Tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the copy/print image tilt is found in all the fed paper from the PF trays 1, 2 and 3.
Note
• Execute the test copy/print for all trays 1 to 3 after the adjustment to check that the image skew is adjusted.
(2) Procedure
outlet.
2. Detach the PF from the main body. ("Refer to the installation
manual")
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning plate [2].
4. Turn over the positioning plate [2], and then reinstall the
positioning plate [2] with 2 screws [1] which have been removed in
step 3.
Note
• When reinstalling, move the positioning plate [2] to the
right and left and adjust the skew based on the marking
line [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
I-262
bizhub PRESS C8000 EF-101
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT EF-101

12.1 Height adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the EF is not in a horizontal position or when the height of EF is not equal to the main body and the other
options.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and then lift the mount movement stand [2] to
secure 2 screws [1].
Note
• After the adjustment, lower the mount movement stand to
the ground and secure it.
[1] [2]
2. Adjust the heights of 4 casters [3] by turning 2 screws [1] on the

front side or 2 screws [2] on the rear side.
Note
• Tightening the screws [1] or [2] lifts the caster and
loosening them lowers the caster.
• Be sure to make adjustments while considerate the height
[2]
between the main body and other optional devices.
• Be sure to check that the casters are on the ground. When
any of the caster is not on the ground, loosen the screws
[1] or [2].
[3]
[1]
12.2 Fusing exit roller pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven wax due to the fusing exit roller of the EF occurs.
I-263
bizhub PRESS C8000 EF-101
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Slide the knob [1] to align the triangle mark [2] with the position [3]
or [4]. Then, adjust the pressure condition of the fusing exit roller.
• [3]: Pressure release
• [4]: Pressure
• Note that JAM occurs when the knob is at between the
pressure position and the release position.
2. After the adjustment, execute the test print to check the condition
of the uneven wax.
[3] [4]
I-264
bizhub PRESS C8000 RU-508
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-508

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the height adjustment by rotating the screw [1] at each of
4 positions. It goes up when rotating the screw [1] to the right, and
goes down when rotating to the left.
Note
between other optional devices.
[1]
I-265
bizhub PRESS C8000 FS-521
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-521

14.1 Adjusting the flat-stapling stopper position
(1) Usage
In the flat-stapling mode, adjustments are made when the distance from the edge of paper to the stapling position is not within the standard
value, or when it is on a slant.
Note
• When making adjustments, be sure not to move the stapler by hand. (It causes the teeth of the belt and the gear to jump.)
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Conduct the following in the output check of the I/O check mode in
the service mode.
• 72-31 (Stapler movement motor home position search)
• 72-78 (Alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position search)
• 72-42 (Rear stopper motor stopper release)
2. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch
outlet.
3. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[1] 4. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3002c
I-266
5. Loosen the screws [2], 1 each, of 4 flat-stapling stopper [1] and
make adjustments of the positions of the 4 flat-stapling stoppers.
Note
• With the paper [3] inserted, be sure to check to see if the
paper is on a slant and that all of 4 flat-stapling stoppers
are in contact with the edge [4] of paper.
[4] • When the stopper is not seen clearly, be sure to adjust it
after removing the guide plate assembly [5].
[3]
[1]
[5] [1] [3]
[2] fs503fs3009c
6. Conduct flat-stapling to check to see if it is within the standard

value.
• Standard value: a = 9.5 ± 2mm
• The line [1] connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of
paper.
• When the value is not within the standard value or the line is
[1] not parallel to the edge of paper, repeat the above steps 1 to
A 6.
fs503fs3004c 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
14.2 Adjusting the alignment plate position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment operation when the slippage in the bundle of paper while in stapling and the uneven paper exit while in non-stapling
cannot be adjusted by conducting "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" in the service mode.
Note
• After conducting this adjustment, be sure to conduct "I.5.9.1 Staple Center Position (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)", "I.
5.9.2 Paper Width Adj.(Staple) (Staple Finisher Position Adjustment)" and "I.5.9.3 Paper Width Adj.(Straight) (Staple Finisher
Position Adjustment)" again.
I-267
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Reset the setting values of "Staple Center Position", "Paper Width
Adj.(Staple)" and "Paper Width Adj.(Straight)" to "0".
2. Conduct the alignment motors /Fr and /Rr home position
movement in the output check 72-78 of the I/O check mode in the
service mode.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) of the main body, and
unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
4. Open the front door and remove the screw [1] of the wire [2].
a0gyt3c015ca
[1] 5. Pull out the stacker unit, remove the rail stopper screws [1], 1
each, in front and rear and pull the stacker unit further out.
[1] fs503fs3005c
B A [2] 6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and check to see if the distance from the front
side of the side plate [2] in the rear to the paper side of the
alignment plate /Rr [3] is within the standard value A, and then
tighten the screws [1].
Standard value A = 17.9 + 1.0/ - 0.0mm
7. Check the alignment plate /Rr to see if it is on a slant. Loosen 2
screws [4] and check to see if the distance between the alignment
plate /Rr [3] and the inner face on the paper side of the alignment
plate /Fr [5] is within the standard value B, and then tighten the
screws [4].
Standard value: B = 376mm + 0/- 0.5mm
8. Move the staple home position using I/O check mode 72-31 in
[3]
service mode, insert a thick paper or similar sheet, and check the
[5] [4] [1] fs503fs3006c
angle of the rear end stopper and the alignment plate.
Note
• Move the alignment plates with your hand until the paper
width space is created between them, and make sure
I-268
there is no improper gap at the upper and lower side of
the alignment plates.

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the horizontal adjustment by inserting the driver to the
holes [2] and [3] on each of 4 ratchet material [1] and moving it
back and forth. It goes up with the hole [2] and goes down with the
hole [3].
Note
• Be sure not to go it up too much, otherwise the bolt
comes off. (max. ±5mm)
• Be sure that the caster is contacting installation surface,
otherwise the ratchet does not work. In this case, adjust
the casters which are on the ground first to get the
casters spinning to be on the ground.
[1] [2] [3]
a0gyf3c001ca
I-269
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-612

15.1 Adjustment the bypass gate
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a JAM occurs in the bypass gate.
(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2] of the rail stopper and pull the stacker unit
frontward further.
[2] Note
• To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold [3]
under the stacker unit pulled out.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c001na
[2] 4. Open the bypass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Check that the distance between the bypass gate [2] and the
bypass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the
[1] bypass gate solenoid (SD5) is OFF.
Standard value: A = 3.2mm ± 0.5mm
When the value is not within the standard value, perform the
following procedure.
mm [3]
0.5
3.2
A=
[2]
15jkf3c002na
[3] [2] [1] 6. Remove the rear cover.

(Refer to G.8.3.5 Rear cover)
7. Disconnect all connectors [2] connected to the FNS control board
(FNSCB) [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the clamp
[3].
8. Release 8 board supports [4] and remove FNSCB [1] from the
board mounting plate [5].
[4] [4] [5]

a04df2c002ca
[2] 9. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the board mounting plate [2].
[1]
a04df2c003ca
I-270
10. Loosen [2 screws [2] of the bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [1] and
[4] A= adjust the position of SD5 while checking the engraved line [5] so
3.2
0.5 that the distance between the bypass gate [3] and the bypass
mm conveyance plate [4] is within the standard value when SD5 is
[3] OFF.
[2]
[5]
[1] 15jkf3c005na
15.2 Adjusting the shift position

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard value (30 mm).
(2) Procedure
• Upper cover /1
(Refer to G.8.3.2 Upper cover /1)
• Upper cover /2
2. Turn ON the main body to enter the service mode and select
[State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Perform the output code
72-03 : Shift roller motor (M2).
[4] [3] [5] [4]
3. Turn OFF the main body.
4. Both in the home position and the shift position, check to see if the
edge of the actuator [5] of the slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of
the slide stay [2] of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of the slide stay,
perform the following adjustment.
[1] [2] 15jkf3c006na
[3] [2] [4] [1] 5. Loosen the screw [2] on the mounting plate [4] of the shift roller
home sensor (PS18) [1], and then adjust the position of the
mounting plate [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. After completing the adjustment, tighten the screw [2].
15jkf3c007na
15.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper exited to the main tray is misaligned.
I-271
(2) Procedure
[1]
• Upper cover /1 (Refer to G.8.3.2 Upper cover /1) or the option
PI (when PI is connected)
• Upper cover /2
A=6.5 0.5mm • Rear cover
[2] [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode]. Turn the output code
72-45 : Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4) to ON.
4. Check to see if the gap between the plunger [2] of the solenoid
and the stopper [3] of the mounting plate is within a standard value
[3] 15jkf3c008na
when SD4 [1] is OFF.
following adjustment.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] from the solenoid mounting plate [3], and
then remove the solenoid [2] together with the mounting plate [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf3c009na
[2] 6. Loosen 2 screws [1] on the solenoid, and then adjust the position
of the solenoid [2] and tighten the screws.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1] 15jkf3c010na
I-272
[1] [5] 7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1], and then install
the solenoid mounting plate at the position where the paper exit
guide [2] contacts with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
[4] guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
Note
[3] • Check that there is 1 mm or larger gap between the paper
exit guide [2] and the paper guide stay [3].
[2]
[4] [2]
[2] [3] 15jkf3c011na
15.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is problem with the paper exit during the stapling operation.
(2) Procedure
[3] 2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of the actuator [2]
of the belt detection gear [1] with the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[2]
[1]
15jkf3c012na
I-273
[2] [1] 3. Check to see if the paper exit arm [1] is within the extent shown in
the illustration [2].
When the position is not within the extent, perform the following
adjustment.
4. Remove screws [2] provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
the stacker unit [2] further. (Refer to I.15.1 Adjustment the bypass
gate)
Note
• To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold under
the stacker unit pulled out.
15jmf3c001na
[1]
5. Remove the screw [2] from the belt detection gear [1] and adjust
the position of the paper exit arm to the standard position, and
then adjust the position of the belt detection gear [1] to the position
in step 2 and secure it.
[2]
15jkf3c014na
15.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Up

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the flat-stapled paper bundle.
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Turn ON the main body, and then turn OFF the main body after the
FS initial operation.
[2] 2. Open the front door and pull out the stacker unit.
gate)
Note
4. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS2) is
on its home position.
15jmf3c002na
A=49.75 0.5mm 5. Check that the distance between the front surface of the rear plate
1.5 [1] and the paper side surface of the alignment plate /UpRr [2] is
A=335.5 mm
0
within a standard value A, and also check that the gap between
[1]
the alignment plate /UpRr [2] and the alignment plate /UpFr [3] is
within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm + 1.5/- 0.5mm
[3] [2]
I-274
[4] [1] [2]

6. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate /
UpRr [2] referring to the marking line [3] so that the misalignment
amount is within the a standard value A, and then fix it. Then
adjust the position of the alignment plate /UpFr [4] with reference
to the alignment plate /UpRr so that the standard value B is
obtained.
[2]
[1] [3]
15jmf3c004na
15.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is an uneven edge found with the bundle of paper in the saddle stitching mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.15.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment
plate /Up" has been conducted.
72-41: Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18)
[1] gate)
Note
[2] • To prevent FS from falling, put something to hold under
[3]
15jmf3c005na
6. Remove the stapler unit cover.
(Refer to F.12.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
7. Check that the actuator of the alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) is
on its home position.
8. Check that the actuator [3] of the alignment home sensor /Lw
(PS24) [2] of the alignment plate /Lw [1] is on its home position.
9. Put the paper larger than A4S on the stacker section and check
that the paper [3] is vertical by putting it against the alignment
plates /UpRr [1] and /LwRr [2]. Check that the distance between
[3]
[1] the front surface of the rear plate [4] and the paper side surface of
the alignment plate /LwRr [2] is within a standard value A, and also
check that the gap between the alignment plate /LwRr [2] and the
[4] alignment plate /LwFr [5] is within a standard value B.
Standard value: B = 335.5mm ± 0.5mm (within)
[5] [2]
B=335.5 1.5
0 mm A=49.75 0.5mm
I-275
10. Check point for the adjustment.
Note
• When putting the paper in the stacker, press the flat-
stapling stopper release lever [2] with fingers so that the
paper does not cover the flat-stapling stopper [1].
[1] [2] 15jmf3c007na
11. Loosen the screws [1] and [2] to adjust the alignment plate /LwRr
[4] [3] [3] so that the standard value A is obtained, and then tighten the
screw [1].
Note
• When it is hard to check the standard value A, press the
paper against the alignment plates /UpRr and /LwRr and
fix the alignment plate /LwRr at the position at which the
paper is vertical.
12. Adjust the alignment plate /LwFr [4] with reference to the alignment
plate /LwRr [3] so that the standard value B is obtained, and then
[4]
[2] [1] tighten the screw [2].
[2]
15.7 Staple position adjustment

(1) Usage
When the stapling position is not at the standard, conduct this adjustment.
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause the belt and gear tooth
skipping.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform stapling to check that the stapling position is within the
[1] [2]
A=8.5 1.5mm
standard.
• Standard value for 1-coner staple at rear [1]: A = 8.5mm ±
1.5m
• Standard value for 1-staple at front [2]: B = 8.5mm ± 1.5m
• Standard value for flat-staple [3]: C = 8.5mm ± 1.5mm
(In the case of flat-staple, make sure that the line [4]
connecting 2 staples is parallel to the edge of paper.)
When the value is not within the standard value or the line is not
B=8.5 1.5mm parallel to the edge of paper, conduct the following procedure.
[3]
C=8.5 1.5mm
[4]
I-276
72-32 : Stapler movement motor (M11) (A4,1-stapling position).
Then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note

6. Loosen 2 adjustment screws [1] of the flat-stapling stopper /Fr and
2 adjustment screws [2] of the flat-stapling stopper /Rr, and adjust
the position of the flat-stapling stoppers referring to the engraved
[1] lines [3] and [4].
7. Perform stapling to check that the stapling position is within the
standard.
[3]
[2]
[4] 15jmf3c010na
15.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the center-stapling positions are not parallel to the paper edge.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform stapling to check that the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1]
is parallel to the edge of paper and also check that the gap amount
L is within a standard value.
[2] Standard value: Gap amount L = 1mm or less
[3]
L
15jmf3c011na
I-277
2. Check that "I.15.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment
[1] plate /Up" and "I.15.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the
alignment plate /Lw" have been conducted.
gate)
Note

(Refer to F.12.4.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
[2] 6. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the alignment plate /Lw [1].
7. Adjust the position of the alignment plate /Lw frontward in the case
of [4] and backward in the case of [5], with reference to the
engraved line [3].
8. After adjustment, tighten 3 screws and perform stapling to check
[3] that the center-stapling position is at the standard.
[4] [5]
15jmf3c012na
15.9 Staple up/down position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is a problem in clinching of the stapler.
Note
skipping.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the stapling operation and check to see if there is one of
the following clinching problems.
• There is the buckling [1] of the staple.
[1]
• The floating of the staple [2] is more than the standard value (L
= 1 mm).
• The bending height of the staple [3] is more than the standard
[2] value (L = 0.5 mm).
L=1mm
When there is any trouble, perform the following procedure.
[3] L=0.5mm
[1] [2] 2. Turn ON the main body and enter the service mode to select
72-32 to move the stapler unit to the position for A4 and 1 staple,
and then turn OFF the main body.
gate)
Note
[3] [3] 15jmf3c015na 5. Remove the stapler unit cover.

6. Remove the cartridge.
7. Remove the flat-stapling stopper release units /Fr and /Rr.
(Refer to F.12.4.2 Replacing the stapler unit)
8. Loosen the screws [3], 4 each, of the clinchers /Fr [1] and /Rr [2].
I-278
9. Install the stapler positioning jig [1] to the cartridge set section.
[1]
15jmf3c016na
10. Rotate the gears [1] of the staplers downward and adjust the
clinchers to the positions where 2 pins [2] of the stapler positioning
jigs are inserted into the positioning holes [4] of the clinchers [3],
and then rotate the gears [1] downward further to fully insert the
pins into the positioning holes.
Note
• Be sure to rotate the gears of the staplers carefully
because the pins of the stapler positioning jigs may be
clogged if they are inserted forcibly.
11. Tighten 4 screws on each clincher. (Refer to step 8.)

12. Rotate the gears of the staplers upward to pull out the pins of the
[1] [3] jig from the positioning holes of the clinchers, and then lift up and
remove the jig.
13. Reinstall the cartridge.
14. Check the stapling operation.
[4]
[2] 15jmf3c017na
15.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the edges of the fold paper.
Note
skipping.
• Never loosen the screw [1] of the folding stopper. It is prohibited to be removed.
• For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
I-279
[1]
15jmf3c018na
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the folding operation on A3 paper and check to see if the
misalignment amount is within the standard value.
Standard value: A = 1mm or less
A
15jmf3c019na
gate)
Note

5. Loosen 5 screws [2] on the folding stopper [1], and then adjust the
tilt of the folding stopper by referring to the engraved line [3].
Note
[4] • Never loosen the screw [4] of the folding stopper. It is
[2] prohibited to be removed.
• For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper
[1] is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
[3]
6. Tighten 5 screws [2], and then perform the folding operation and
15jmf3c020na
check to see if the misalignment amount is within the standard
value.
15.11 Folding pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment to change the power of the pressure of the folding roller.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the stacker unit cover.
(Refer to G.8.3.9 Stacker unit cover)
4. Change the mounting position of each 2 of pressure springs [3] at the front [1] and the rear [2].
The folding pressure is:
A: Weak B: Normal C: Strong
I-280
[1] Note
A • Hook each 4 of pressure springs [3] on the hook holes
[3] B with the same mark.
C
C
B
A
C C
B B
A A
[3] [2] 15jmf3c021na
15.12 Tri-folding position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position or the 2nd folding position is not within the standard value.
(2) Procedure
1. Check that "I.15.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment" has been
conducted.
2. Perform the tri-folding operation and check to see if the tri-folding
positions are within the standard values.
When the tri-folding positions are not within the standard values,
perform the following adjustment.
Folding Standard value Standard
position A4S
c 81/2 x 11S
a
a 95mm 89mm ± 2mm
b 101mm 95mm ± 2mm
b 15jmf3c022na c 101mm 95mm ± 2mm
3. Turn ON the main body, adjust the 1st folding position (standard
"a") with the "Tri-Fold Position Adj." in "Finisher Adjustment" in the
service mode, and then perform the tri-folding operation.
4. If the 1st folding position "a" is within the standard, open the front
door and then pull out the stacker unit.
5. Open the tri-folding guide plate [1] and loosen 2 screws [2] of the
[3] tri-folding stopper, and then adjust the positions of the tri-folding
stoppers [4] by referring to the engraved line [3].
6. Tighten 2 screws [2], and then perform the tri-folding operation and
check to see if the 2nd folding position "b" is within the standard.
[2]
[4]
[2] [1]
15jmf3c023na
I-281
bizhub PRESS C8000 PK-512/513
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513

16.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Check the tilt by using the platen copy or Service Mode after
A
aligning paper in the main body paper feed tray with the side guide
plate and the rear guide plate.
2. Conduct the paper skew adjustment when too much tilt is checked.
3. As a sample for checking the tilt of the punch hole position,
conduct 3 sheets of punch mode printing for each simplex mode
C and duplex mode.
4. Measure the punch hole positions on 3 sheets of printed paper to
check the tilt.
Tilt of the punch hole position (%) = (A-B)/C
B 15kjf3c001na
5. Open the front door of FS.

[1]
6. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf3c002na
[1] 7. Loosen the 4 adjustment screws [1] of PK.

[3] 8. Based on the division [2] of the mark, move the punch unit [3] to
the right and left only for the tilt amount of the punch hole position.
1 division : 0.5%
9. Tighten the 4 adjustment screws [1].
10. Install the punch unit cover.
11. Repeat step 3 to 10 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1] [2] 15kjf3c003na
I-282
bizhub PRESS C8000 PI-502
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502

17.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position of the paper fed from PI is not in parallel.
(2) Procedure
1. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and then feed them in
[1] [2]
the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider
15jff3c004na
3. Open the front door of FS, and then loosen the screw [2] of the
guide plate [1].
4. Adjust the guide plate [1] in accordance with the misalignment of
the punch holes by referring to the markings [3].
The back is wider: Move to [4]
The front is wider: Move to [5]
5. Tighten the screw [2].
6. Repeat step 1 to 5 until the tilt of the punch holes is corrected.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
15jff3c005na
I-283
bizhub PRESS C8000 LS-505
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-505

18.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
Note
• Before starting this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) turned on by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 1.5mm to 3mm.
Rear end retaining

part motor (M2)
Paper exit guide plate
2. When not in the range of adjustment, remove the spring, loosen

the fixing screw of the paper press solenoid /1 (SD6), and make
adjustment by moving it from side to side so that the range of the
SD stroke becomes 6 ± 0.5mm.
rOO

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the B4 or larger paper.
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 66 ± 2mm.
ls502to3004c
2. When not in the range of adjustment, loosen the fixing screw of the
paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) and make adjustments by sliding it
up and down.
ls502to3005c

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs.
I-284
(2) Procedure
1. With the paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) turned OFF by hand, check
to see if the A section in the drawing left is 50.1 ± 1mm.
ls502fs3006c
paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3007c
18.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when uneven stack occurs with the shift paper and non-shift paper in the sort mode.
(2) Procedure
1. With the job partition solenoid (SD2) turned ON by hand, check to
NG OK see if the job partition blade [1] in the drawing left does not
protrude from the metal frame [2].
[1]
[2]
ls502to3009c
job partition solenoid (SD2) and make adjustments by sliding it
from side to side.
ls502fs3008c

(1) Usage
Adjustments are made when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
I-285
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
comes off. (max. ± 5mm)
[1] [2] [3]
a0h1f3c001ca
18.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the grip standby position on the grip belt is improper to receive the paper or when the shift unit drive
abnormality occurs.
Note
• When the shift unit drive abnormality (C-1204: 1st tandem, C-1214: 2nd tandem) occurs after replacing the LS control board
(LSCB), conduct the following adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the power of the main body.
2. Move the grip belt by hand and stop it at the position in which the
leading edge of the grip [1] is about 4mm from the stack exit guide
plate [2].
a: approx. 4mm
[2]
[1] ls502fs3010c
3. Rotate VR1 [1] on the LS control board (LSCB) fully to the left.
[1] ls502fs3011c
I-286
4. Rotate VR1 [1] to the right and stop it at the position in which LED2
[2] turns ON from flashing.
Note
• When LED2 is rotated too much from the turn-on position
to the flashing position, repeat the procedure starting at
Step2.
5. After completion of adjustment, turn off and on the power of the

main body and check if the interval "a" between the edge of the
grip and the stack exit guide plate is 8 ± 2mm.
[2] [1] ls502fs3012c
6. When the interval is not within the standard value, change the
position of the sensor mounting plate [1]. Loosen 2 screws [2] and
slide the sensor mounting plate to the right [3] to widen the interval
"a". Slide the plate to the left [4] to narrow the interval.
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
I-287
bizhub PRESS C8000 FD-503
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503

19.1 Roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment
(1) Usage
When the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7), /4 (SD8) are changed, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
Note
• The following adjustment steps show the steps for the roller solenoid /2 (SD6). The steps for the roller solenoids /1 (SD5), /3
(SD7) and /4 (SD8), are the same as the steps for the roller solenoid /2.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the roller solenoid /2 (SD6) [1].
2. Measure the distance A [5] between the end face of the vertical
conveyance roller /Lt [3] and the right side (the opposite of the
paper through side) of the guide plate [4] when the roller solenoid /
[1] 2 (SD6) [1] is turned ON, and then tighten the screw [2] after
adjusting the distance so that it becomes the standard value.
[4] Standard value: A = 0mm to 1.5mm
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
A
[5]
[4] fd501fs3001c
19.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18).
I-288
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] on the 2nd folding roller solenoid mounting
[1] plate [1].
2. Measure the gap A which the vertical conveyance roller /Lt [4] is
out from the guide plate [5] when the 2nd folding roller solenoid
(SD18) [3] is ON.
[2] 3. Adjust the mounting position so that the gap A is within the
standard value shown in the following table, and then loosen 3
screws [2].
Standard value: A = 4mm to 5mm
[3]
[4]
[4]
A
[5]
[4] a0h0f3c002ca
19.3 Punch Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
When the front to rear position of the punch holes cannot be adjusted up to the specification in the paper width adjustment, be sure to conduct
this adjustment. (Refer to I.5.9.6 Paper Width Adjustment (Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.))
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Disconnect the connector [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove
the cord support board /A [3].
[1]
[2] fd501fs3002c
A [1] [2] B 2. With the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2]
moved to the center, loosen the 2 screws [3].
3. Measure the distances A and B using a ruler and adjust the
positions of the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr
[2] so that the distances A and B become equal, and then tighten 2
screws [3].
[3] fd501fs3003c
I-289

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when there is any discrepancy in height and slant found between the main body and other optional devices.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1] [2] [3]
a0h0f3c001ca
19.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the paper size detection of PI does not work properly.
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Install the regulation plate rack A [1] and the regulation rack B [2]
so that they are aligned with the reference hole of the detection
gear [3].
[3] [2] fd501fs3008c
I-290
[3] [1] 2. Check the paper size VR [2] to ensure it is held by the 2 bosses on
the paper size VR mounting plate [1].
3. Install the paper size VR [2] so that the notch of its center hole is
set to the notch of the detection gear [3].
[2] fd501fs3009c
[1] [2] 4. Check to see if the regulation plate rack A [1], the regulation plate
rack B [2], the hole position of the detection gear [3] and the notch
position of the paper size VR [4] are in the correct position
respectively.
[3]
[4] fd501fs3010c
19.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray)

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when multi-feed or paper jam occurs when feeding paper from the PI.
(2) Procedure
1. Slide 2 papers feed arm fixing levers [1] to inside, and insert the
[4] shafts [2] into the holes [3] in the paper feed arm to secure the
paper feed arm [4].
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
fd501fs3011c
I-291
bizhub PRESS C8000 SD-506
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-506

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when SD is not in a horizontal position.
(2) Procedure
hole [3].
Note
[1] [2] [3]
a0h2f3c001ca
20.2 Folding skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew in the center folding.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the center folding operation for 5 sheets of A3 or 11 x 17
paper and check their skew "a".
Standard value a = ± 1.5mm
a 15anf3c002na
I-292
[3] [6] [2] [1] [8] 2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen the screw [1], adjust the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] back
and forth by sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to right and left, and
tighten the screw [1].
Note
• If the folding pattern on paper exited to the direction of
bundle exit tray front side [4] is [5], slide the adjusting
bracket [2] in the arrowed direction [6].
• If the folding pattern is [7], slide the adjusting bracket [2]
in the arrowed direction [8].
• By sliding the adjusting bracket [2] to 1mm right and left,
the alignment stopper /Rr2 [3] moves 1/3mm back and
forth.
4. Return the folding unit to the original position and repeat the steps
1 through 3 until the standard value can be obtained.
[5] [7]
[4] a0h2f3c002ca
20.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is for adjusting the misalignment of the second folding position in tri-folding.
Note
• This adjustment is to adjust the variation per each folding. This adjustment is to adjust the variation per each folding. Adjust the
second folding position by following "I.5.9.22 Tri-Fold Position Adj. (Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.) Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
(Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)."
• Be sure that the adjusting position is vary from the number of folding sheets.
(2) Procedure
1. Conduct the tri-folding with A4S or 8 1/2 x 11S, and check if the
interval "A" between the first folding and the second folding is
within the standard value.
Standard value A = 102.0mm ± 3mm (A4S)
Standard value A = 96.1mm ± 3mm (81/2 x 11S)
a0h2f3c003ca
I-293
[2] [1] 2. Open the front door /Rt and pull out the folding unit.
3. Loosen 2 screws [1] and move the stopper [2] in parallel back and
forth referring to the mark [3].
Note
• Moving to the front side [4] makes the length between the
foldings longer.
• Moving to the back side [5] makes the length between the
foldings shorter.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the standard value is obtained.
[4] [3] [5] a0h2f3c004ca
20.4 Staple position adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the misalignment between the staple position and the folding position.
(2) Procedure
1. Perform the saddle stitching operation for 25 to 30 sheets of A3 or
11 x 17 paper and check the misalignment "a" between the staple
position and the folding position.
Standard value a = ± 1mm
When the value is not within the standard value, conduct "(2).
Adjustment Procedure /1" then "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2" in
this order.
a
15anf3c005na
(3) Adjustment Procedure /1

Note
• Be sure not to adjust over the allowable value since only the saddle stitching hold /Up is adjusted but the saddle stitching hold /
Lw is not.
• When it cannot be adjusted by this simple adjustment (fine adjustment), be sure to conduct "(3). Adjustment Procedure /2".
1. Open the front door /Lt.
2. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
[2]
[1] the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
• Do not tighten the screw [1] too tight. Stop tightening
when it is contacted.
[4]
[5]
4. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] on both of the stapler /Rt and /Lt for the length of the
misalignment "a".
Note
• Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
• When the screw [1] is tightened, the staple position moves
forward. When the screw [1] is loosened, the staple
position moves backward.
5. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the allowed
[3] a0h2f3c005ca
direction [5] and contacting it to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4].
6. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
7. Conduct a test print in procedure A, and repeat steps 2 to 6 until
the standard value is obtained.
I-294
(4) Adjustment Procedure /2

1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.15.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
2. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers and lock the clinchers [2].
[1] [2] 15anf3c006na
[10] [4] [2] [3] [1] 3. Install the M4 screw [1] obtained from the exterior and so on into
the adjustment screw hole [3] of the saddle stitching hold /Up [2]
with your fingers and tighten it slightly until it is contacted.
Note
4. Loosen the screws [4], [5] and [6].

5. Rotate the screw [1] to move the position of the saddle stitching
hold /Up [2] for the length of the misalignment "a".
Note
• Rotating the screw [1] 1 revolution moves the saddle
stitching hold /Up 0.7mm (same width with staple).
6. While pushing the mounting plate [7] to the arrow-marked direction

[9] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the screw [1],
[9] [8] [7] [6] [5] a0h2f3c006ca
tighten the screws [5].
7. While pushing the saddle stitching hold /Up [2] to the arrow-
marked direction [10] and contacting the saddle stitching hold /Up
to the screw [1], tighten the screw [4], and then tighten the screw
[6].
8. Remove the screw [1] and return it to the original position.
9. Return the saddle stitching unit, and then repeat steps 2 to 8 until
the standard value can be obtained.
20.5 Stapler position adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a broken staple, a bent staple, or a defective staple occurs in stapling.
This adjustment adjusts the phase lag with the clincher at front and rear.
(2) Procedure
[4] [6] [3] [1] [2] 1. Carry out stapling operation to check that the broken staple, the
bent staple, or the defective staple does not occur. If the defective
occurs, conduct the following procedure.
2. Open the front door /Lt.
3. Install the M3 screw about 20mm long [3] into the adjustment
screw hole [2] of the stapler mounting bracket [1] with fingers and
tighten it slightly until it is contacted to the supporting bracket [4].
Note

5. Rotate the screw [3] and move the anteroposterior position of the
stapler to adjust the phase lag with the clincher.
[5] Note
a0h2f3c007ca
• Rotating the screw [3] 1 revolution moves the stapler
0.5mm.
6. While pushing the stapler mounting bracket [1] to the back side [6]
and contacting the screw [3] to the supporting bracket [4], tighten
the screw [5].
I-295
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the defective staple does not occur.
20.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the staple break through the paper by stapling a few pages of booklet.
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Carry out stapling operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if
the staple break through the paper. If the paper is broken through,
perform the following steps.
2. Pull out the saddle stitching unit.
(Refer to F.15.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit)
3. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
4. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
5. Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy inward,
then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the interval between
the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
Note
• Rotate the stapler move gear [3] to move the stapler assy
inward, then move them outward by approx. 30mm (the
interval between the stapler becomes approx. 60mm).
[1] 15anf3c009na
[1] [2] 6. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf3c010na

Note
• When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, be careful not
to let the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
8. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide
plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf3c011na
I-296
[3] 9. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers
[2] contact with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2]. At the
moment the clinchers are locked, check if the clinchers do not roll
from side to side and the gap between the staplers and the
clinchers equals to the standard value.
a Standard value "a": 0.3 ± 0.1mm (2 sheets of 80g/m2 papers can
pass through the gap while 3 sheets cannot.)
10. When the gap is out of the standard value, loosen the screw [1]
counterclockwise and lower the clinchers once. Then perform the
adjustment the following procedure.
[2]
[1]
15anf3c012ca
11. Loose the 4 screws [1].

[3] [2]
12. Adjust the gap between the staplers and the clinchers so that the
gap equals the standard value while loosening (gap becomes
narrower) /tightening (gap becomes wider) the adjusting screw/Rt
[2] and /Lt [3] in the same manner.
Note
• Be sure to perform the adjustment for both left and right
side of each clincher/Rt [4] and /Lt [5] so that the stapler
and the clinchers are parallel to each other.
• When the adjustment is completed, be sure to tighten the
fixing screws [1].
[5] [4] 13. Put the saddle stitching unit back. Then carry out stapling
operation with 2 sheets of papers, and check if the staple does not
break through the paper.
[1] [2] [3]

15anf3c013ca
20.7 Roller cutter skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Adjust the skew when it occurs at trimming.
I-297
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming parallelism by trimmng center folded or senter
a stitched paper if it is within the standard value.
Standard value:
"a" = 1.0mm or less (2 to 15 sheets)
"a" = 1.5mm or less (16 to 50 sheets)
Note
• Remove the staple to check it for 2 sheets to 15 sheets.
a0h2f3c008ca
[1] [2] 2. Open the front door /Lt.

3. Loosen the screw [2] of the registration claw.
4. Turn the gear flange [4] with holding the shaft [3], adjust the
registration claw /Rt [1] back and forth, and then tighten the screw
[2].
[4]
[3]
a0h2f3c009ca
5. Check point for the adjustment.

Note
• Move the registration claw /Rt to the front side in case the
skew is [2] to the paper exit direction [1], or move the claw
to the rear side in case the skew is [3].
[2]
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the standard value is obtained.
[1]
[3]
a0h2f3c010ca
20.8 Trimming adjustment

(1) Usasge
Adjust the gap when a large gap occurs at trimming thick books.
Note
• This adjustment is effective for the thick book more than 30 pages.
I-298
(2) Procedure
1. Check the trimming gap “a“ by trimming the center folded or senter
stitched book which has 31 pages or more.
a Conduct the following steps if the gap is large.
Note
• There is no standard value of trimming gap for 31 pages
or more. Refer to the standard value for 16 pages to 30
pages, which is 1.5mm.
a0h2f3c011ca
[3] [1] [2] 2. Open the front door /Lt.

3. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.15.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
4. Loosen the 2 screws [2] each of the registration claw /Rt and /Lt
[1], move the fold retaining bracket [3] down to the bottom, and
then tighten the screws [2].
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the allowable value can be obtained.
a0h2f3c012ca
I-299
bizhub PRESS C8000 PB-503
21. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503

21.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment
(1) Usage
Carry out the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The fore edges near the top or the bottom of the book do not line up perfectly.
The pages come off from the cover paper near the top or the bottom of the book due to insufficient gluing to the spine of inside papers.
An improper gap between the reference plate and the sub scan alignment plate causes misalignment of the pages in the sub scan direction.
To correct the misalignment, perform "I.5.9.36 Clamp FD Position Adj. (Perfect Binder Adjustment)" from Service Mode → Finisher
Adjustment → Perfect Binder Adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover /Fr. (Refer to G.14.2.11 SC cover /Fr)
3. Adjust the position of the sub scan alignment plate by moving the
clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of the arrow [4] or [5] to
change the installation position of the clamp entrance assy against
the coupling bracket [3].
Note
• Be sure to hold down the coupling bracket [3] when
moving the clamp entrance assy, as the assy is heavy and
hard to move.
• [6] shows the book exit direction;
a. A misalignment occurs near the bottom side (front side
when inside paper alignment is performed)
[7]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [4] to make the gap at the front side narrower.
b. A misalignment occurs near the top side (back side
[5] [4] when inside paper alignment is performed)
[8]: Move the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction of
the arrow [5] to make the gap at the front side wider.
• When moving the clamp entrance assy [2] in the direction
of the arrow [5], the misalignment of the inside papers
occurs at both the top and bottom sides. To correct the
misalignment, perform "Clamp FD Position Adjustment
(Perfect Binder Adjustment)" from Service Mode →
Finisher Adjustment → Perfect Binder Adjustment after
this adjustment.
4. After performing the adjustment, make a test print and binding to

[7] [8] check that the inside papers are perfectly lined up in the sub scan
direction.
Top 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[6]
Bottom
a075f3e014ca
21.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment

(1) Usage
The top and bottom edges of inside papers do not line up and it cannot be corrected even after performing "Clamp section CD alignment
width adjustment" and "SC section CD alignment width adjustment" in the service mode.
The cover and the inside papers are not aligned.
Note
• The misalignment of cover and inside papers can also be adjusted in "I.21.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment" and "I.
21.12 Cover paper table positioning."
I-300
(2) Procedure
[2] [4] [1] 1. Pull out the clamp unit.
2. Move the clamp alignment plates /Fr [1] and /Rr [2] inward as far
as they go [3].
Note
• Be sure to hold both clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2], and move them slowly to maintain the proper
engagement of the belt and the pulleys.
3. Loosen 2 screws [4] and adjust the position of the clamp alignment
plates/Fr [1] and /Rr [2] by moving them back and forth.
Note
a. When top edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [6]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[3]
[2] backward by the same distance.
[6] [7] b. When bottom edge of cover paper runs off that of inside
papers [7]: Move the clamp alignment plates/Fr [1] and /Rr
[2] forward by the same distance.
[5] • When moving 2 clamp alignment plates in the same
direction, always move them by the same distance.

check that the top and bottom edges of inside papers are perfectly
lined up and the cover edges neatly align with edges of inside
a075f3c015ca
papers.
21.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment

(1) Usage
• The pellet is supplied to the tank improperly and it spills out of the tank.
• The pellet supply arm contacts with the other parts when the arm is in its home position.
Note
• Be sure to turn Off the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) of the main body in advance.
(2) Procedure
[4] [8] [5] [12] [13] [14] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt.
(Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Adjust the home position of the pellet supply arm by moving the
mounting plate [3] of the pellet supply arm home sensor (PS39) [2]
referring to the engraved lines [4] on the mounting plate [3].
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [5] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become closer to the glue
tank [7].
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [8] to make
the pellet supply arm [6] home position become further from the
glue tank [7].
Note
• Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
[1] [3] [2] [10] [11] [9]
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is 0mm to 3mm: A when the arm comes to the home
position.
• Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
[6] with the other parts.
[15]
5. Adjust the pellet supply position by moving the mounting plate [11]
[7] of the pellet supply arm upper limit sensor (PS38) [10] referring to
the engraved lines [12] on the mounting plate.
a. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [13] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become
a15xf3c001ca narrower.
b. Move the mounting plate in the direction of the arrow [14] to
make the angle range of the pellet supply arm [6] become wider.
Note
• Adjust the position of the pellet supply arm so that the
distance between the arm and the edge of the metal frame
is +2mm to -4mm: B when the arm comes to the home
position.
• Do not move the mounting plate excessively or it contacts
with the other parts.
6. Turn on the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch
(SW2).
I-301
7. Carry out the output check "77-43" of I/O check in the service
mode to detect the home position of the pellet supply arm and
check if the home position is appropriate.
8. Move the pellet supply arm to the pellet supply position using the
output check "77-44" of I/O check in the service mode and check if
the pellet supply position is appropriate.
Note
• For restrictions or cautions of the output check "77-44",
refer to the I/O check mode.
• When it is hard to check the supply position, turn OFF the
sub power switch (SW) and the main power switch (SW1)
and remove the suction unit [15].
A a15xf3c002ca (Refer to G.14.2.20 Glue tank unit)
B 9. When the test result is not good, turn off the sub power switch
(SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) and repeat steps 2 to 8.
a15xf3c003ca
21.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the gap between the metal surface of the glue apply roller and the spine of inside papers.
Changing the gap allows you to adjust the amount of glue applied to the spine.
Note
• Reference values: The thickness of glue layer formed on the roller is about 2mm with the gap of 1.8mm.
CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
• To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Adjust the stopper [4] position by moving it up and down with 2
screws [3] referring to the engraved lines [2], then loosen the
screws [1].
Note
• The stopper [4] moves down 0.5mm by tightening the
screws [3] for 1 rotation and it moves up by loosening the
screws.
• Raising the stopper brings the glue apply roller upward
[4] [3] making the gap become smaller, which decreases the
amount of glue applied.
• Lowering the stopper brings the glue apply roller down
making the gap become larger, which increases the
amount of glue applied.
• Do not lower the stopper excessively. Too much gap
causes the glue application to fail.
• When raising or lowering the stopper, be sure to adjust 2
screws [3] for the same amount and maintain the
horizontal state of the stopper.

a15xf3c004ca check that the amount of glue applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
21.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjustment is to adjust the gap between the surface of the cover paper glue material (scraper /Fr) and the spine of inside paper.
Adjust the glue amount applied to the book spine by changing the gap.
There are 2 types of gap, one is for the thick coat mode and the other is for the thin coat mode. *1
I-302
Note
• The gap between the scraper /Fr and the spine is 2.5mm in the thin coat mode and 2.5mm in the thick coat mode. *1
• When the gap in the thick coat mode is adjusted, the gap in the thin coat mode is changed. Therefore, be sure to adjust the gap
in the thin coat mode also after adjusting the gap in the thick coat mode.
*1 The thick coat mode is not used for 1200/1200P/1051.
CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is extremely hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
• To prevent burn injuries, make sure to leave the unit until it cools enough before performing the adjustment.
(2) Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode

[6] [3] [5] [4]
1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
• Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.
2. Loosen 1 screw [3].

3. Adjust the thin coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
• The thin coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm interval.
• The thin coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screw [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screw.
• Raising the thin coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
• If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thin coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
• If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
much, lifting the thin coat stopper (decreasing the gap
between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.

check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
[1] [2]
a15xf3c005ca appropriate.
(3) Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode

1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] frontward.
Note
• Be sure to hold the right arm [2] of the glue tank unit to
move it.

3. Adjust the thick coat stopper [6] position by moving it up and down
with the screw [5] referring to the engraved line [4], then tighten the
screw [3] hitting it against the screw [5].
Note
• The thick coat stopper [6] moves down 0.5mm by
tightening the screws [5] for 1 rotation and it moves up by
loosening the screws.
[4] [5] [6] [3] • The thick coat stopper has a scale marked at 1mm
interval. The right and left scales shift 0.5mm vertically.
When adjusting it, be sure to move it by 1mm and check
the position.
• When raising or lowering the thick coat stopper, be sure
to maintain its horizontal state.
• Raising the thick coat stopper brings the cover paper glue
part closer to the book spine and it makes the scraped-off
glue amount larger, which reduces the glue amount
applied to the book spine.
• If the applied glue is thin and the cover does not stick to
the book body, lowering the thick coat stopper (increasing
the gap between the cover paper glue part and the book
spine) increases the amount of glue applied to the book
spine.
• If the applied glue is thick and the glue comes out too
[1] [2] much, lifting the thick coat stopper (decreasing the gap
a15xf3c006ca
I-303
between the cover paper glue part and the book spine)
reduces the amount of glue applied to the book spine.

check that the glue amount applied to the book spine is
appropriate.
5. Conduct the gap adjustment in the thin coat mode.
21.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the glue tank movement rail and the spine of inside papers.
Perform this when glue is not applied uniformly on the spine, especially when amount of glue applied is different between the top and bottom
side of the book.
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws [2] of the bracket /Rt [1].
[1] 2. Loosen 2 screws [4] of the bracket /Lt [3].
3. Move the brackets /Rt [1] and /Lt [3] up and down by turning the
[5] screws [7] and [8] to adjust the height of the glue tank movement
rails/Rt [9] and /Lt [10] referring to the engraved lines [5] and [6] on
the brackets /Rt and /Lt.
Note
[2]
• Be sure to turn the screws [7] and [8] by the same amount
so that the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2] move the same
amount.
[9] • When the glue applied to the spine gets lower toward the
bottom side, lower the brackets/Rt [1] and /Lt [2].

check that the glue is applied to the book spine uniformly.
[7]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[6] [8]
a075f3c020ca
21.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper folding plate/Lt to apply pressure to the cover paper.
Perform this adjustment when the cover paper is not folded at the right angle (when the book spine inclines).
I-304
(2) Procedure
[3] [6] [4]
1. Turn the knob [1] to move the cover paper alignment plate/Fr [2]
backward.
2. Loosen the screw [3] and adjust the actuator [6] position of the
cover paper folding plate HP sensor /Lt (PS49) [5] by moving the
actuator right and left referring to the engraved lines [4].
Note
a. When the book spine inclines as [8]: Move the actuator
[6] to the left.
b. When the book spine inclines as [9]: Move the actuator
[6] to the right.
[1] [2] [5] 3. After performing the adjustment, make a test print and binding to
check that the book spine ends form right angle and no inside
papers come off from the cover paper.
Note
• At the test print, print more than 50 sheets, or you cannot
check the book spine.
[8]
[7]
[9]
a075f3c021ca
21.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the parallelism between the cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt.
Perform the adjustment when the book spine corners are not uniformly formed from the top and the bottom.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.14.2.28 Cover paper
[1] [2]
tray
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the cover /Rt [2].
[1]
a075f3c022ca
I-305
[9] [8] [1] 3. Loosen 4 screws [1].

4. Put a hand from under the cover paper tray section and turn the
knob [2] to move the cover paper folding plate /Rt [3] and /Lt [4] so
that the gap between them becomes a few millimeters [5].
5. Slowly turn the knob [2] in reverse until the cover paper folding
plate/Rt [3] and /Lt [4] contact each other without any gap at both
front side [6] and rear side [7].
Note
• Make sure that the pressure drive plate/Rt [8] does not run
[7] on the pressure assist plate [9].
• Do not turn the knob [2] too much. Doing so brings the
plates into pressure-applying state making the position
adjustment impossible.

check that the book spine ends are forming right angle from the
top and the bottom.
[6]
[2]
[3] [5] [4]
a075f3c023ca
21.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the following conditions occur.
The cover paper table up down drive system does not synchronize successfully.
The front and rear cover paper table belts do not synchronize smoothly.
(2) Check point

Check that the pin [1] is placed on the center of the central sector of the gear [2].
When the pin is out of the center, perform the following adjustment.
[2]
[1]
a075f3c030ca
I-306
(3) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.14.2.5 Rear cover /Rt)
3. Move the gear [2] to the right [3] and remove the pin [4].
5. Move the gear [2] to the left [6] and install the E-ring [1].
6. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch
(SW2) to let the system perform the initial operation.
7. Insert the pin [4], adjust the gear [2] so that it aligns with the gear
inside, and slide the gear [2] to the right.
8. Install the E-ring [5] Install the rear cover
9. Install the rear cover.
[5] [4] [2] [1] [3]
[6] [2] [1]
a075f3c024cb
21.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment

(1) Usage
This adjusts the position of the cover paper alignment plate/Fr in the main scan direction and its perpendicularity against the main scan
direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper and the inside papers are vertically or relatively misaligned.
Note
• The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in "I.21.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment"
and "I.21.12 Cover paper table positioning."
I-307
(2) Procedure
[8] [7] 1. Loosen the screw [1] and [2].
2. Adjust the position and angle of the cover paper alignment plate /
[1] Fr [9] by moving the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6] to the
front [7] and to the back [8] referring to the engraved lines [3] and
[4].
[5]
Note
• Do not move the mounting bracket /Lt [6] excessively, or
[3]
the plate contacts with the gear [10].
[2] [6] a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [12]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /Lt [6]
[4] forward [7] by the same distance.
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [13]: Move the mounting brackets /Rt [5] and /
Lt [6] backward [8] by the same distance.
c. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [14]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
[8] backward [8] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
[7] forward [7].
d. When 3 edges of cover paper misalign with the edges of
inside paper [15]: Move the mounting bracket /Rt [5]
forward [7] and move the mounting bracket /Lt [6]
backward [8].

check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside papers.
[10] [9]
[12] [13]
[11]
[14] [15]
a075f3c025ca
21.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when the roller cutter trims the cover paper askew.
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the scraps box.
[1]
a075f3c026ca
I-308
[5] [4] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and adjust the position of the roller cutter
assy [3] by moving it to the right [4] and the left [5] referring to the
engraved lines [2].
Note
• When the length of the back cover is shorter than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the right side [4].
• When the length of the back cover is longer than the
length of the front cover at the bottom side:
Move the roller cutter assy [3] to the left side [5].

check that the cover paper is trimmed correctly.
[2] [1] [3] 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
a075f3c027ca
21.12 Cover paper table positioning

(1) Usage
This adjusts the relative position between the clamp unit and the cover table unit in the main scan direction.
Perform the adjustment when the cover paper is vertically misaligned with the inside papers.
Note
• The misalignment of cover and inside paper can also be adjusted in "I.21.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment"
and "I.21.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment."
(2) Procedure
[3] [2] [5] [4] 1. Loosen 3 screws [1].
2. Adjust the position of the positioning pin/Fr [3] by moving it forward
[4] and backward [5] referring to the engraved lines [2].
Note
a. When the cover paper runs off the top edge of inside
paper [7]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the back [5].
b. When the cover paper runs off the bottom edge of
inside paper [8]: Move the positioning pin /Fr [3] to the
front [4].

check that the cover paper is neatly aligned with the inside paper.
[1]
[7] [8]
[6]
a075f3c028ca
21.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform the adjustment when no feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
I-309
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the cover paper tray.
2. Remove all remaining cover papers from the cover paper tray.
4. Push the stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow with the release
lever [2] retracted, and secure the stopper [3] with the screw [1].
Note
• After performing the adjustment, loosen the screw [1] and
retighten it after releasing the stopper [3].
5. Install the cover paper tray, and pull out the tray again after the
cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
judged by the operating sound of the cover paper lift motor.
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.14.2.28
Cover paper tray)
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c001ca
7. Pull out the tray again. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper
[1] feed cover [2].
[2] a075f3c002ca
I-310
[1] [2] 8. Pull the plunger [2] of the pick-up solenoid [1] and measure the
gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the cover paper lift plate [4]
with a thickness gauge.
Measured value A = 0.1mm to 1.5mm
If it is not within the standard value, follow step 9 and after.
Note
• Before loosening the screw, be sure to mark off the
position of the pick-up solenoid [1] by drawing a line [6].
10. With the plunger [2] pulled, adjust the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] so that the gap between the pick-up roller [3] and the
cover paper lift plate [4] falls into the specified range.
[5] [6] 11. Tighten the screw [5] to fix the pick-up solenoid [1].
12. Load cover paper on the cover paper tray and close the tray.
13. Make a test print and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
binding method and the PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
Check that the no feed error does not occur.
[3]
A
[4]
a075f3c003ca
21.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed, crimp of leading edge, or paper jam occurs frequently when feeding the cover papers from the cover
paper tray, or when curled cover papers need to be used.
This adjusts the vertical position of the cover paper pick-up roller. Changing the roller position changes the vertical gap between the top paper
surface on the tray and the bottom surface of the cover paper feed roller.
Note
• With this adjustment, cover paper pick-up ability changes accordingly. When the adjustment is completed, make sure to
perform the cover paper feed pick-up amount adjustment to check the pick-up amount.
I-311
(2) Procedure
Note
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c004ca
[1] cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
rails and pull the cover paper tray further out. (Refer to G.14.2.28
Cover paper tray)
7. Pull out the tray again. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the paper
feed cover [2].
[2] a075f3c005ca
[1] [2] 8. Check that the actuator [1] of the pick-up roller assy is aligned with
the center [3] of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor (PS74) [2].
9. Remove the pick-up roller section [4]. (Refer to F.16.3.1
Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation
roller assy)
[3]
[4]
a075f3c006ca
I-312
[2] [3] [1] 10. Mark off the position of the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] by drawing a line [2].
11. Remove 2 screws [3] and temporarily install the cover paper upper
limit sensor mounting plate [1] with the screws through the
elongated screw holes [4].
12. Make vertical adjustments of the cover paper upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] and fasten it with the screws [3].
Note
• Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
Reference:
• Raising the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings the pick-up roller [5] down (It increases the
[4] [1] vertical gap [7] between the paper feed roller [6] and the
pick-up roller [5].)
• Lowering the position of the cover paper tray upper limit
sensor brings up the pick-up roller [5] (reduces the
vertical gap [7] between the cover paper feed roller [6] and
the pick-up roller [5]).
• When crimp of leading edge or paper jam occurs, or when
curled cover paper (concave curl) need to be used, raise
the cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
• When feeding warped cover paper (convex curl), lower the
cover paper tray upper limit sensor mounting plate.
13. Reinstall the pick-up roller assembly.

[3]
Note
[6]
• Be sure to install the cover paper tray upper limit sensor
[5] mounting plate [1] so that it keeps in a horizontal position.
binding method and PB cover paper tray as the cover feeder.
[7]
Check that the errors do not occur. If the errors still occur, repeat
steps 9 to 15.
16. Check the cover paper tray paper feed pick-up adjustment. (Refer
a075f3c007ca to I.21.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment)
21.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when no-feed or multi-feed from the cover paper tray occurs frequently.
Note
• A no-feed error tends to occur in low temperature environment, while a multi-feed error does in high temperature environment.
Perform this adjustment with this in mind.
• Do not make an excessive adjustment. Doing so may reverse the respective symptoms.
I-313
(2) Procedure
2. Change the position of the spring adjustment lever [1]. The
separation pressure is strengthened when the lever moves to the
direction [2] and is weakened when the lever moves to the
direction [3].
Weak: A double feed jam is improved.
Strong: A no feed jam is improved.
Reference:
• The spring load changes in increments of about 10%.
3. Set the cover paper tray.

[1] Check that no-feed errors or multi-feed errors do not occur.
5. If the errors still occur, repeat steps 1 to 4.
[2] [3]
a075f3c008ca
21.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment

(1) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the deviation between the cover paper and the inside papers is out of spec.
Standard value: 0 ± 1mm or less (aligned edges), 0 ± 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Make a test print and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
Check how much the cover paper misaligns with the inside papers.
4. When the cover paper guides [1] are set at the small-size position,
extend them.
6. Move the cover paper guides [1] and adjust the center position
based on the misalignment amount checked at step1, referring to
the marking-off line [3].
[2]
Check that the misalignment amount falls into the specified range.
Standard value:
0 ± 1mm or less (aligned edges)
0 ± 1.5mm or less (trimmed edges)
10. If the value falls outside the range, repeat the steps 2 to 9.
[3]
a075f3c009ca
21.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the jam, no feed, or the folded paper occurs in the cover paper tray.
I-314
(2) Procedure
Note
cover paper lift plate has lifted to the upper limit, which can be
[2] [1] [3]

a075f3c010ca
[2] [1] 6. Check if the cover paper lift plate [3] is placed horizontally using
the engraved lines on the near side [1] and the far side [2] of the
tray. If the plate is not horizontal, perform step7 and the steps that
follow.
[3]
a075f3c011ca
I-315
[2] 7. Remove 6 screws [1] of the cover paper tray front cover [3].
8. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray
front cover [3].
[3]
[1] [1]
a075f3c012ca
I-316
9. Lift up the pick-up roller [1].
10. Move the cover paper guides [2] to the positions for the smallest
paper size.
11. Remove the screw [3] and tighten it through the elongated screw
hole [4] temporarily.
12. Loosen the screw [5] while supporting the pulley mounting plate [6]
[9] by hand, and correct the tilt of the cover paper lift plate [8] referring
to the engraved lines [7].
13. Check that the cover paper lift plate [8] is placed horizontally, and
secure the plate with the screw [5] and [9].
[5] [3] Note
• When tightening the screws [5] and [9], check that the
wire [10] has not come off the pulley or not crossed.
14. Pull down the pick-up roller [1].

16. Make a test and binding selecting the perfect binding as the
Check that cover papers are fed normally without any jam.
[4] [7]
[1]
[8] [2]
[10]
[6]
a075f3c013ca

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the PB is not in a horizontal position or when the height of PB is not equal to the main body and the other
options.
I-317
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen the nut [2] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places.
[2] [3] [1]
2. Rotate the screw [3] at 2 places for adjusting the height of the PB
left side.
3. Conduct the height adjustment by inserting the driver to the holes
[6] and [7] on each of 4 ratchet section [5] of the casters /A [4] and
moving it back and forth. It goes up with the hole [6] and goes
down with the hole [7].
Note
comes off.
• When the caster /A [4] is not on the ground, fix the caster
so that the ratchet does not spin out.
• Be sure to adjust so that every casters /A and /B are on
the ground.
4. Secure the screw [3] of the caster /B [1] at 2 places and tighten the
nut [2].
[6] [7] [5] [4]

a15xf3c007ca
I-318
22. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-506

22.1 Straight gate solenoid (SD1) position adjustment
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the straight gate solenoid (SD1).
(2) Procedure
1. Turn OFF the straight gate solenoid (SD1) manually and check
[1] [2] that its edge [1] is above the guide plate [2]. At the same time turn
ON the plunger and check the edge [3] of the straight is below the
guide plate [4].
[3] [4] a0get3c021ca
2. When it is not within the adjustment range, loosen 2 fixing screws

[1] [2] [2] and slide upward/downward the SD1 [1] to adjust the position.
a0gef3c001ca
22.2 Position adjustment of the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2).
I-319
(2) Procedure
1. Turn ON the stacker exit shutter solenoid (SD2) [2] manually and
[2]
check that its edge [3] is inside the folded area [6] of the guide
plate [5] of the paper re-feed roller[4].
Note
[3] [6] [5] [4]
[1] [7] a0get3c024ca

[1] [2] and slide SD2 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
[2] a0gef3c002ca
22.3 Position adjustment of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stack switching solenoid (SD3).
I-320
(2) Procedure
1. Turn OFF the plunger [1] of the stack switching solenoid (SD3)
[2] [3] manually and check that the driven roller [2] is in contact with the
paper re-feed roller [3]. Then turn ON to check that the gap
between them is same as or lager than the standard value "a".
Standard value "a": The gap between the driven roller [2] and the
re-feed roller [3] is 2mm or more.
Note
[1] [4] a0get3c027ca
[2] [1] 2. When it is not within the adjustment range, loosen 2 fixing screws
[2] and slide SD3 [1] to left/right to adjust the position.
a0gef3c003ca
22.4 Position adjustment of the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid (SD4)
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid.
I-321
(2) Procedure
1. Be sure to fix the stacker entrance guide plate solenoid assy at the
[5] [4] position where the roller [4] installed to the drive shaft [3] of the
solenoid starts pushing the mounting bracket [6] of the stacker
entrance roller [5] with the plunger [1] touching with the mounting
bracket [2].
Note
[6] [3]
[2] [1] [7] a0get3c030ca

[2] [2] and slide upward/downward the SD4 [1] to adjust the position.
[1] a0gef3c004ca
I-322
bizhub PRESS C8000 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. OUTLINE
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
1. OUTLINE
1.1 Precautions on rewriting the firmware
(1) ISW execution procedures
When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the occurrence of malfunction
resulting from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Step Type of programs
1 FD (H), FS-521 (N1), FS-612(N2), SD(B), LS 1st tandem (S1), LS 2nd tandem (S2), RU-508 (R1), RU-506 (R2), PB (J), DF
(F), GP (G)
2 Printer control (C)
3 Overall control (I)
Note
• After replacing the OACB, be sure to conduct the ISW of the image control (Collective (I0)) first. The main body turns ON
abnormally if the overall control firmware is not in the OACB.
(2) DIPSW and toggle SW setting on the boards

Note
• Whenever the FNSCB (FS-521), FDCB, SDCB, LSCB, or PBCB is replaced, be sure to make the main body model setting using
the DIPSW (FD, FS, SD, PB) (Refer to L.2.11.1 FD control board (FDCB), L.2.6.1 FNS control board (FNSCB), L.2.12.1 SD control
board (SDCB), L.2.13.1 PB control board (PBCB)) or using the LS toggle SW (Refer to G.11.2.4 Caution when setting models
using toggle SW) then execute the ISW.
(3) Connecting short connector when rewriting firmware

Be sure to connect the jumper connector to the post-processing option by following the table below.
Machine GP-501 RU-506 RU-508 LS-505 FD-503 SD-506 PB-503 FS-521 FS-612
type
Short Not required When using Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not
connector GP-501 + required
connection RU-506,
remove the
connector B
(CN6) and
connect the
blue
connector to
the board.
(4) Checksum check

The firmware data is supplied in sets with the execution program and the sum check file.
When rewriting the firmware, the error detection can be performed by calculating the file checksum using the dedicated tool ISWTrans_G.
When conducting the ISW regarding the image process (Collective(I0)), be sure to perform the checksum check in advance.
1.2 Firmware data flow

The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
USB memory Overall control board (OACB) Printer control board (PRCB) FNS control board (FNSCB)
FD control board (FDCB)
SD control board (SDCB)
LS control board (LSCB)
RU control board (RUCB)
PB control board (PBCB)
GP controller PCB
DF control board (DFCB)
1.3 Main body setting for ISW

There are the following 2 ways for settings on the main body side.
(1) Type of setting

• Power ON mode
This mode is used when the firmware is not installed to the overall control board (OACB) or when it is damaged. In this condition, ISW of
the OACB is possible when sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON.
• Service Mode
J-1
bizhub PRESS C8000 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. OUTLINE
This mode is used when the firmware of the OACB is installed properly.
(2) When in the version up of the program

Target board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Overall control board Normal Service mode
Other boards Normal Service mode
(3) When writing new firmware (When replacing board and rewriting firmware failed)
Target board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Overall control board Power save LED blinks in orange Power ON mode
No display on touch panel
Other boards Error code display Service Mode
(1) For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with the firmware or no firmware is written, the normal start-up cannot be
made. In this condition, the power save LED blinks in orange when power switch is turned ON and placed in the ISW stand-by mode.
Note
• Firmware can only be written in Boot USB memory ISW.
(2) For other boards, when the firmware of the overall controller is normal and something is wrong with other firmware, a malfunction code is
shown on the touch panel when the power is turned ON. In that case, enter the service mode and perform ISW normally.
1.4 Type
(1) USB MEMORY ISW
Directly connect the USB memory to the service port of the main body, and use the program stored in the USB memory to rewrite the
firmware. For the USB memory ISW, the following methods are available depending on the start up method.
• USB memory ISW from service mode
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
• Boot USB memory ISW when turning ON the power
Conduct when replacing the overall control board (OACB) or failed in rewriting a firmware.
(2) Internet ISW

Use the main body NIC to connect the main body to network environment, and use the FTP or the HTTP protocol to rewrite firmware via the
program server on the Internet. For the internet ISW, the following methods are available.
• Internet ISW using the Web Utilities
Rewrite the firmware by accessing the Web Utilities of the main body from the Web browser of the PC.
However, a network connected PC with the main body is required.
• Internet ISW using the operation panel
Rewrite the firmware using the operation panel.
• Internet ISW using the CS Remote Care
J-2
bizhub PRESS C8000 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. ISWTrns_G
2. ISWTrns_G
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software)
(1) Operating environment of the software
• OS: Windows95/98/98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise
• CPU: Pentium 75MHz or above
• Memory: 32MB or above
• Free space in hard disk: 100MB or more
• Others: PC provided with USB interface (TypeA)
The operation environment of the hardware is pursuant to the specification of each OS.
(2) Requirements for checking the check sum

• Personal computer (PC): 1
PC provided with USB interface
• ISWTrns_G program
• Firmware
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G

Install the ISWTrns_G program to the PC.
(1) Procedure
1. Start the PC.
2. Copy the setup files to the PC and double click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the install program.
Note
• When there remains the ISWTrns_G.exe of the old version, uninstall the old version first, and then install the new version.
3. "ISWTrns setup screen"

Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which an installation is made, and then click [Next].
Note
• "C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G" has been set as a folder to be installed in default.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, click [Reference] and specify one as you please.
4. Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored and then click [Next].
J-3
Note
• For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder to which an installation is made.
When changing the folder to which an installation is made, enter a folder name directly, or select one from the existing
folder displayed.
5. Following the instructions on the screen, click [Completed].

6. The installation of the ISWTrns_G program is automatically completed.
7. Select "ISWTrns_G" from the start menu or double click the "ISWTrns_G" icon on the desk top to start up the "ISWTrns program_G."
8. "ISWTrns dialog screen"
Click [OK] to set the storage folder of the firmware.
Note
• This screen is shown only when the program is started for the first time after installing the ISWTrns_G.
9. "Option screen"
Click [Make Folder].
J-4
Note
• A folder (C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns_G) on which the ISWTrns_G program is installed has been set as a
storage folder in default.
• When changing a storage folder, click [Browse] and specify the folder, or make an entry directly in the editor box in full path.
• Clicking [Make Folder] creates hierarchical folders with the storage folder set above as a route.
10. "Option screen"

Click [OK].
Note
• This operation stores the data folder created in the step9 into the INI file of the ISWTrns program.
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G

2.3.1 Firmware checksum check
(1) Details on the operation panel display
When the ISWTrns_G program starts up, the main screen of the ISWTrns_G is displayed. On the main screen, perform selecting of the file
(firmware), information display and checksum. For detailed information of the functions, refer to the following.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]: Select Folder (File storage folder edit box)

A folder name is displayed in full path from the information of the data folder set and the INI file. When the firmware is in a folder other than
the specified data folder, click [Browse] [2] to specify the file location or entering directly the file location.
[2]: [Browse]
This key is used when the firmware is in a folder other than the specified data folder. Display the folder selection screen to select the folder of
[1].
[3]: File Status (File detail information)
View detailed information about the version file when select firmware.
[4]: Checksum Information frame
Display the firmware to be used based on the information selected in the frames [1], and click [File Check] [6] to display the checksum of the
file and the consistency (OK, NG, ??) of the checksum.
[5]: File information display frame
Display the file version selected.
Click [File Check] at [6] to calculate the checksum of the entire displayed files. Compare the obtained value with the checksum value stored in
the checksum file (*.sum) attached to the firmware to display the result.
[6]: [File Check]
With a file used in "Checksum Information" of [4] displayed, press this key to calculate the file checksum (checksum of the entire file) of the
displayed file and show a result beside the file. Also, compare the result of the checksum with the checksum file attached to the firmware and
display the obtained result in the following form.
"OK": accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": Checksum file (*.sum) not found
2.4 Error list

(1) ISWTrns_G error list
The ISWTrns_G displays messages when an error is shown or the operation is completed. The following table shows the contents of the
message and the status of the ISWTrns_G.
Message Status of the ISWTrns_G
The opening of the file the checksum The opening of the checksum file failed. The file is in use or damaged.
of which is to be taken is not
available.
The opening of the file the checksum The reading of the checksum file failed. The memory is insufficient or the OS is in trouble.
of which is to be taken cannot be
read.
The folder name is illegal. The name of the input folder is illegal. Be sure to enter the whole path from the drive name such as
"C:¥."
The default folder has not been set. The data folder setting has not been set to the ISWtrns.INI.
J-5
Set the folder correctly. Displays at the first startup only.

Some files cannot be copied. 1. The folder to be stored in does not exist.
2.When a file is copied into the folder in which a file of the same name is contained with "O/W
(overwrite check box)" not checked.
3.When overwriting is made on an overwrite prohibited file.
4.Another application is using the file. OS trouble.
The transferred file is not found, or a The number of divisions of the transferred file written in the checksum file does not correspond with
file with an illegal name is found in the number of files that actually exist.
the folder. Make sure of it. 1.When a file with an illegal name is in the data folder, or a file name that seems to be illegal is
displayed in the folder list.
2.The number of divided files is insufficient. Check the insufficient number of files in the folder list
and copy them again.
3.When the checksum file is damaged, copy it again to the folder.
(2) ISWTrns_G troubleshooting

When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns_G program, take the measures shown in the following table.
Condition Cause Countermeasures
1 The ISWTrns_G does not start The IswTrns_G.EXE file is Set it up again.
up. damaged
The setup file itself is damaged. Check the setup file and set it up again.
2 When an item in the combo box The file is not stored in the Check to see if the relevant file is stored in the folder
is selected, the file is not relevant folder. displayed in the "Select Folder" text box. When a folder into
displayed. which a file is stored is not found, use the "File copy" function.
The Data Folder in the Option Check the setting of the Data Folder.
screen is set incorrectly. When a folder into which a file is stored is not found, use the
"File copy" function.
The file name is illegal (or has The file name must be used with no change made. When the
been changed.) file name is changed, the display or selection of the file
becomes unavailable. When the file name is changed, return
it to former state.
The folder name is illegal (or has When the folder name created by the [Make Folder] button in
been changed.) the Option screen has been changed, it cannot be found.
Return it to former state and check it again.
3 "NG" is displayed in the File The firmware using is damaged. Copy the firmware and check it again. When "NG" still recurs,
Check. contact the supplier of the firmware.
4 "??" is displayed while in the File When the firmware was copied to Copy the checksum file to the folder same as the firmware at
Check. the PC, the copying of the the same time. (When using the data copying function, a copy
checksum file (*.sum) was is made automatically.)
forgotten.
J-6
bizhub PRESS C8000 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. USB MEMORY ISW
3. USB MEMORY ISW

3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW
Note
• The "Service Port Device" must be set to [ON] in the settings menu mode of the "User Setting-System Setting-Service Port Device
Setting", or the USB memory ISW cannot be used.
(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware

Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB), Printer control board (PRCB), DF control board (DFCB), FNS
control board (FNSCB), FD control board (FDCB), SD control board (SDCB), LS control
board (LSCB), RU control board (RUCB), PB control board (PBCB), GP controller PCB
Rewritable firmware Image control Collective (I0), I1 to I5, T
Printer system C1
ADF F
Stapler (FS-521) N1
Stapler (FS-612) N2
Multi folder (FD-503) H
Saddle stitcher (SD-506) B
Stacker (LS-505) S1 (1st tandem), S2 (2nd tandem)
RU (RU-508) R1
RU (RU-506) R2
Perfect binder (PB-503) J
Multi puncher (GP-501) G
(2) Procedure
1. Save the firmware to the USB memory in the following folder structure.
C8000
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
N1
N2
Note
• Create the C8000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
• Several firmware can be saved to a folder. However 24 files is the maximum it can display on the touch panel. Also, 2 byte
font cannot be displayed.
• Maximum 40 letters for a file name.
• The file name is the same for S1 and S2. When S1 is selected on the rewriting screen, the file is written in the 1st tandem.
When S2 is selected, the file is written in the 2nd tandem of LS.
2. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2].
J-7
[1] [2]

4. "Service mode menu screen"
Press [12 ISW].
5. "ISW Menu screen"
Press [01 ISW].
6. "Board Type Selection screen"
Press [USB Memory ISW] and confirm that the message "Connection of a USB memory has been recognized." is displayed, then press
the button that corresponds to the firmware to be rewritten.
7. Example) <Image Control> Collective (I0)

The file in the USB memory applicable folder is displayed. (Maximum 24 files)
Select the version of the file to be rewritten, and press [OK].
Note
• From the file name, the file availability is judged and the result is shown by text color.
White: File effective as ISW.
Yellow: Special ROM file.
Red: File other than ISW or file for different destination.
• Press [Limit] to display only the effective files. Press [File Name], [Date]or [Size (byte)] to sort the files by that order.
J-8
8. "External Memory Device ISW Mode" screen

Check the type and name of file to conduct ISW, and press [Start].
Note
• Press [File Select] to return to the file name selection screen.
• Press [ROM Selection] to return to the board type selection screen.
J-9
9. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
10. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, pull out the USB memory from the service port, then press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
11. Check the firmware version in the service mode to see if the ISW is completed successfully.
3.2 Boot USB memory ISW

(1) Board to be rewritten and firmware
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB)
J-10
Rewritable firmware Image control Collective (I0), I1 to I5
(2) Procedure
1. Save the firmware to the USB memory in the following folder structure.
C8000
I0
Note
• Create the C8000 folder directly under the USB memory route.
• The file name is recover.bin.
2. Start the main body.

3. "Start screen"
The power save LED blinks in orange displaying "PLEASE WAIT STARTING SYSTEM" on the touch panel.
4. Connect the USB memory [1] to the main body service port [2] and ISW starts automatically.
The condition of the process can be checked according to the status of the power save LED.
• Lighting in green: Reading file from USB memory/Deleting flash
• Blinks in green: Writing
Note
• When the power save LED starts blinking in green, the USB memory can be pulled out from the service port.
[1] [2]
5. The main body automatically restarts when ISW finishes.

3.3 Error list

When an error occurs during USB memory ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the touch panel.
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality

When the main body detects an overall control board firmware abnormality after turning ON the power switch, the power save LED turns ON
with nothing displayed on the LCD of the operation panel (ISW stand-by condition). For details of the power save LED display, refer to the
table below.
No. Operation Power save LED status
1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flush memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby Blinks in orange
status)
4 Reading file from USB memory Lighting in green
5 ISW processing (deleting flash memory and writing firmware) Lighting in green (deleting flash memory)
Blinks in green (writing)
6 When abnormality is detected while in data transmission Flashing alternately in red and green
7 The type name of transferred data is abnormal Blinks in red
8 When an error is detected while in writing firmware Blinks in red
9 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting OFF
(2) Error list

The following table shows error codes.
Error code Description Applicable program
41 Input data format abnormality Common
42 Input data model name abnormality
J-11
43 Input data board name abnormality

64 Rewritten address error F (DFCB)
81 Input device abnormality, such as input time-out Common
C1 Flash ROM deletion failure I (OACB)
C2 Flash ROM writing error
C3 Checksum abnormality
C4 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
E0 No completion of writing the Flush ROM F (DFCB)
E1 Program SUM check error
Flash ROM deletion failure C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
E2 Flash ROM writing error (FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
E3 Blanc check error F (DFCB)
Communication error C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
(FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
F6 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
100 Network/USB memory connection error
101 Network/USB memory file error
102 Communication error with the USB memory
4xx HTTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
5xx FTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
J-12
bizhub PRESS C8000 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. Internet ISW
4. Internet ISW
4.1 Outline
"Internet ISW" is a system to operate the ISW by the main body automatically receiving firmware from the program server, using Web browser,
main body operation panel, or Internet mail (E-mail) to direct the ISW. ISW can be operated at the customer facility without carrying the program
by using the Internet ISW from the main body operation panel or Web browser.

To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must to be met.
• The main body must be connected to the network environment that allows the download of firmware from the Internet by using ftp or http
protocol.
In the following 9 cases, the "Internet ISW" does not operate on the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is off
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is off
• The copier is in the auto shut-off mode.
• When the "Security Strengthen Set" is set to ON (The main body NIC other than the CS Remote Care cannot be used)
• During print operation, or various JOB (including reserve JOB) exists, or suspended JOB exists during main body idling.
• Using modes other than normal mode.
• Paper JAM has occurred.
• Image file exists in the image memory.
• Program type, board do not match.
4.3 Initial setting

To make use of the Internet ISW, it is necessary to set in advance the network parameter, program server address, the fire wall address and so
on, of the main body.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

To introduce the copier main body into the network, set the IP address of the copier from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to J.4.3.(2) Settings from the Web browser.
(a) Procedure
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
6. Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) to restart the main body.
Note
(2) Settings from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the program server from the Web browser. At this time, in order to use the Web browser, make preparations of the PC that
can be introduced into the network.
Note
• No "space" is allowed in all set items.
• When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error message. When no correction of
input error is made, program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer 6.02, NetscapeNavigator 7.1 or Firefox 1.0 is
recommended. However, be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "J.4.3.(1) Setting from the operation panel".
Access the Web Utilities of the main body to display the "Main page screen".
J-13

4. Enter the user name and the CE password in the "Extension for maintenance" and then press [OK].
Password: Enter the CE password. (Default: "92729272")

Click [Internet ISW].
6. "Internet ISW screen"

Click [Initial Setting].
J-14
7. "Proxy Server Setting screen"

Set the proxy server.
When using no proxy server (fire wall), proceed to the step 9.
Enable Proxy When using no proxy: "Connect to the program server."

When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
When using ftp proxy: "Use ftp proxy."
Select one of the above.
Proxy Server Type When selecting "Use ftp proxy" in "Enable Proxy", select the
Proxy Server Type from the followings.
Type1: "User user@host name"
Type2: "OPEN host name"
Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name
Type 4: "FW user name => FW password => User user@host"
Note
Types 2, 3 and 4 are unsupported.
For authentication of proxy server, refer to J.4.7
Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW.
Proxy Server IP Address When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy
server.
Port Number When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that uses
the proxy server.
User name on the proxy server When selecting the type1 or type2 in "Type of proxy server"
shown above, set the account of the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Type of proxy server"
above set the password of the proxy server.
8. After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Next]. However, if there is
an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
9. "Program Server Setting screen"
Set the program server. (When using the proxy)
J-15
Program Server Address Set the address of the server into which the program to download is stored. Select
the protocol to be used from the pull-down menu on the left and enter the following
address in the text box on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path from the
home directory.
User name on the program server Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program server Enter the password of the program server.
Receiving time out Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
program forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
without conducting the ISW.
10. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete].
However, if there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
11. Set the program server. (When not using the proxy)
Protocol Select the protocol that receives the program.
Program Server IP Address Set the IP address of the server into which the program to be down loaded is
stored.
Target directory In the case of http, set the path after the host domain. In the case of ftp, set the
relative path from the home directory.
User name on the program server Enter the account name of the program server.
Password for the program server Enter the password of the program server.
Receiving time out Set the receiving time-out of the program. When the time is out, the download of the
firmware forcibly comes to an end, and the system returns to the normal mode
without conducting the ISW.
12. After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen, click [Complete]. However, if there
is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to re-set the item.
13. Conduct the Download test.
• In the down load test, "test.dat" is down loaded from the program server set in the initialization to check the settings. When the
download test failed, recheck the set items following the error message.
• When the download test is successfully completed, the communication speed and the expected download time are displayed as
following. Refer to this information to set the "Receiving time out".
• When the download test failed, the response error code from the server is display as following. Since it may be because of a setting
error, recheck the initialization.
J-16
4.4 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities

Using the Web Utilities of the main body allows, by just making a click from the browser, to download the programs from the program server
automatically for rewriting.
(1) Procedure
1. Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
"Internet ISW screen"
The firmware version of the present board is displayed beside each of the board types.
2. Select one ISW intended board at the item of "ISW". When specifying a firmware file name to be download, enter it in the [File name] text
box.
J-17
When specifying no firmware name, the following files stored in the program server are rewritten.
I0 bootI0.bin
I1 bootI1.bin
I2 bootI2.bin
I3 bootI3.bin
I4 bootI4.bin
I5 bootI5.bin
T bootT1.bin
C1 bootC1.bin
F1 bootF1.bin
H1 bootH1.bin
N1 bootN1.bin
N2 bootN2.bin
B1 bootB1.bin
S1 bootS1.bin
S2 bootS2.bin
R1 bootR1.bin
R2 (Not used)
J1 bootJ1.bin
G1 (Not used)
Note
• bootN1.bin is for FS-521 and bootN2.bin is for FS-612.
bootS1.bin is for LS (1st tandem) and bootS2.bin is for LS (2nd tandem).
3. After completion of entry, click the [ISW].

If there is an input error, follow the message shown in red and click [Back] to enter the item again.
4. Checking of the ISW conditions.
The power save LED lights in green during downloading the program. From the Web screen, check the current processing condition to
see if there is any error.
• "ISW in communication"
• "ISW in rewriting" "Completed successfully":
• "Completed normally": Be sure to avoid pressing the "Read again" key of the browser to reboot after successful completion.
• "Aborted due to a communication error."
• "Aborted due to a communication time error."
• "Aborted due to a writing error."
5. When ISW is completed normally, the main body automatically restarts and completes ISW.
6. After restart of the main body, check the firmware version in "Internet ISW main screen" to see if it is being updated successfully.
4.5 Usage precautions

4.5.1 Notice to administrator
When conducting the Internet ISW, be sure to notify the administrator of it and get approval from administrator in advance.
Be sure to execute ISW with the main body not used. However, when the main body is in use (jobs present), the Internet ISW does not operate.
4.5.2 Power cut during writing

While in the ISW rewrite, the operation panel and the power switch (SW2) are locked. However, when the main power source is turned off due
to power cut etc., the main body cannot start up.
J-18
However, this is a problem encountered while in the overall control board (OACB) rewrite. As for other errors while in the ISW, they can be
rewritten by the Internet ISW again.
Should the main body be not able to start due to the reason above, go to the actual place and use Boot USB memory ISW to conduct the rewrite
of the program.
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel

When using the Internet ISW from the operation panel, with no PC brought with, the main body can download the program from the program
server to conduct the rewrite automatically.
(1) Procedure
Example: When rewrite the overall control board (OACB) firmware (ALL).
1. Display "ISW mode screen".
2. Press the [Internet ISW] on the screen and then press the [Collective(I0)] of <Image Control>.
J-19
3. Press the [Start] and download the latest firmware to start the rewrite.
J-20
In a case in which the download of an old version firmware is required, press the [File Name Input] and enter the file name manually.
J-21
4. The following screen is displayed when ISW is completed.
5. Press [Continue] when conducting the ISW successively.

To end the ISW, press [End].
The main body automatically restarts when [End] is pressed.
(2) Main body error list

When an error occurs while in the execution of the Internet ISW, an error code is displayed on the operation panel. (Refer to J.3.3.(2) Error
list)
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW

(1) Proxy server
Proxy server which is provided on the inside of the fire wall is the generic name of a mail server that serves the proxy of a client who receives
an access demand (HTTP and FTP) from the client.
(2) Authentication of the proxy server

There are 4 types of authentication methods for the proxy server.
The Internet ISW is corresponding to these 4 types.
(3) Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list
(a) Type1: User user name@host name
When accessing the outside through the proxy, authentication to the proxy server is not required.
When accessing the outside through the proxy server, or when the entry of the user name and password of the proxy server is not required,
this proxy authentication is likely to be used.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
name address
PASS Password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
(b) Type2: OPEN host name

This process is almost the same as the type1, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 1 authentication, apply this type.
Command
OPEN Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(c) Type 3: FW user => FW password => SITE host name

This is a type that requires the authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing the outside.
J-22
The information of the server you want to access, the user name and password of the proxy server (F/W) are necessary. In the case of the
user name and the password of the proxy server are required when accessing the outside through the proxy server, this proxy
authentication is likely to be used.
Command
USER FW user 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
SITE Host name ftp expanded function, Transmit the user name of the program server
defined for each server
USER User name 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
(d) Type 4: FW user => FW password => USER user@host

This process is almost the same as the type3, except for the exchange of commands while in authentication.
When all the settings are made correctly and no communication is available with type 3 authentication, apply this type.
Command
USER FW user name 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
USER User name@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the program server
name address
(4) Remark
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type1 authentication is used. For most of the proxy servers, the type 1
authentication is used. When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known, you are recommended to make settings in type1
authentication as a temporary measure.
J-23
bizhub PRESS C8000 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM INDICATION
K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM INDICATION
1.1 Jam code list
Classificatio
JAM Code Cause Resulting operation Correction
n
Tray1 J-1101 During operation: The paper feed sensor /1 If paper jam occurs during Pull out tray 1 and remove
(PS19) does not turn ON within a specified printing process, main jammed paper if any.
period of time after the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD4) body stops after paper
turns ON. exit.
J-1151 When idling: The paper feed sensor /1 (PS19) - Pull out tray 1 and remove
turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
Tray 2 J-1201 During operation: The paper feed sensor /2 If paper jam occurs during Pull out tray 2 and remove
turns ON. exit.
Tray 3 J-1301 During operation: The paper feed sensor /3 If paper jam occurs during Pull out tray 3 and remove
turns ON. exit.
Tray 4 J-1601 During operation: The paper suction sensor /1 PF stops immediately. If Pull out tray 4 and remove
(PFU1) (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified paper jam occurs during jammed paper if any.
period of time after the paper feed sensor /1 printing process, main
(PS2) is turned OFF by the previous paper. body stops after paper
Tray 5 J-1602 During operation: The paper suction sensor /2 exit. Pull out tray 5 and remove
(PFU1) (PS15) does not turn ON within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after the paper feed sensor /2
(PS6) is turned OFF by the previous paper.
Tray 6 J-1603 During operation: The paper suction sensor /3 Pull out tray 6 and remove
Vertical J-1604 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the PF front door and the
conveyance sensor /1 (PS28) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door, and
(PFU1) specified period of time after the paper feed remove jammed paper if any.
sensor /1 (PS2) turns ON.
J-1605 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor /2 (PS29) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door, and
specified period of time after the vertical remove jammed paper if any.
conveyance sensor /1 (PS28) turns ON.
J-1608 During operation: The exit sensor /1 (PS26) Open the PF front door and the
does not turn ON within a specified period of vertical conveyance door, and
time after the paper feed sensor /1 (PS2) turns remove jammed paper if any.
ON.
J-1609 During operation: The loop sensor /Up (PS32) Open the PF front door and the
time after the paper feed sensor /2 (PS6) or the remove jammed paper if any.
vertical conveyance sensor /4 (PS31) turns ON.
ON.
J-1611 During operation: The pre-registration sensor Open the PF front door and the
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified vertical conveyance door /Up and
period of time after the loop sensor /Up (PS32) remove jammed paper if any.
turns ON.
K-1
Classificatio
n
Horizontal J-1612 During operation: The loop sensor /Lw (PS17) Pull out tray 6 and remove
conveyance does not turn ON within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
(PFU1) time after the paper feed sensor /3 (PS10) turns
ON.
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified horizontal conveyance door /Lw,
period of time after the loop sensor /Lw (PS17) and remove jammed paper if any.
turns ON.
J-1614 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor /1 (PS19) does not turn ON within a horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
specified period of time after the loop sensor /Up and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS32) turns ON.
specified period of time after the loop sensor /Lw and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS17) turns ON.
specified period of time after the horizontal and remove jammed paper if any.
J-1618 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor /1 (PS9) of the main body does not turn horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
ON within a specified period of time after the and remove jammed paper if any.
horizontal conveyance sensor /3 (PS21) turns
ON.
Tray 4 J-1621 During operation: The paper feed sensor /1 Pull out tray 4 and remove
(PFU1) (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period jammed paper if any.
of time after the suction belt clutch /1 (CL15)
turns ON.
turns ON.
period of time after the suction belt clutch /3
(CL17) turns ON.
Tandem J-1624 During operation: The tandem entrance sensor Open tray 5 and the tandem
conveyance (PS34) of the PFU1 does not turn ON within a conveyance jam release lever,
(PFU1) specified period of time after the horizontal and remove jammed paper if any.
conveyance sensor /3 (PS21) of the PFU2 turns
ON.
J-1625 During operation: The tandem entrance sensor / Open tray 5 and the tandem
1 (PS35) does not turn ON within a specified conveyance jam release lever,
period of time after the tandem entrance sensor and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS34) turns ON.
J-1626 During operation: The tandem conveyance Open tray 5 and the tandem
sensor /2 (PS36) does not turn ON within a conveyance jam release lever,
specified period of time after the tandem and remove jammed paper if any.
does not turn ON within a specified period of horizontal conveyance door /Up,
time after the tandem conveyance sensor /5 and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS39) turns ON.
K-2
Classificatio
n
Horizontal J-1649 During operation: The multi feed detection Open the PF front door and the
conveyance boards /R (MFDBR) and /S (MFDBS) detect the horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
(PFU1) multi feed. and remove jammed paper if any.
Tray 4 J-1651 When idling: The paper feed sensor /1 (PS2) - Pull out tray 4 and remove
(PFU1) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
Tray 5 J-1652 When idling: The paper feed sensor /2 (PS6) Pull out tray 5 and remove
Vertical J-1654 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor /1 Open the PF front door and the
conveyance (PS28) turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
(PFU1) remove jammed paper if any.
J-1655 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor /2 Open the PF front door and the
(PS29) turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
remove jammed paper if any.
J-1658 When idling: The loop sensor /Up (PS32) turns Open the PF front door and the
ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Up,
and remove jammed paper if any.
Horizontal J-1660 When idling: The pre-registration sensor (PS18) Open the PF front door and the
conveyance turns ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
(PFU1) and remove jammed paper if any.
J-1661 When idling: The loop sensor /Lw (PS17) turns Open the PF front door and the
ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Lw,
J-1662 When idling: The horizontal conveyance sensor / Open the PF front door and the
1 (PS19) turns ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
Vertical J-1665 When idling: The exit sensor /1 (PS26) turns ON Open the PF front door and the
conveyance while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
J-1666 When idling: The exit sensor /2 (PS27) turns ON Open the PF front door and the
while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
Tandem J-1670 When idling: The tandem entrance sensor Open the PF front door and the
conveyance (PS34) is ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Up,
J-1671 When idling: The tandem conveyance sensor /1 Open the PF front door and the
(PS35) turns ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Up,
Paper feed J-1701 During operation: The registration sensors /Fr If paper jam occurs during Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS1) and /Rr (PS2) do not turn ON within a printing process, main jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after writing starts during body stops after paper
front side printing. exit.
K-3
Classificatio
n
J-1702 During operation: The registration sensors /Fr Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS1) and /Rr (PS2) do not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after writing starts during
back side printing.
J-1703 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the pre-registration any.
clutch /3 (CL6) turns ON.
J-1704 During operation: The vertical conveyance Pull out tray 2 and remove
sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the pre-registration
J-1705 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PS9) does not turn ON within a door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the vertical any.
conveyance sensor (PS6) turns ON.
J-1706 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor /1 (PS9) does not turn ON within a door and remove jammed paper if
specified period of time after the pre-registration any.
J-1708 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor /3 (PS11) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the intermediate
J-1709 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor /4 (PS12) does not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the intermediate
Otherwise, the paper skew sensor /Fr (PS4)
does not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the intermediate conveyance sensor /
4 (PS12) turns ON.
J-1710 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Open the PF front door and the
sensor /1 (PS9) does not turn ON within a PF vertical conveyance door /Lt,
J-1751 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor - Open the vertical conveyance
(PS6) turns ON while in idling. door and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-1752 When idling: The intermediate conveyance Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor /1 (PS9) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-1754 When idling: The registration sensors /Fr (PS1) Pull out the ADU and remove
and /Rr (PS2) are ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
Tray 7 J-1801 During operation: The paper suction sensor /1 PF stops immediately. If Pull out tray 7 and remove
(PFU2) (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified paper jam occurs during jammed paper if any.
period of time after the paper feed sensor /1 printing process, main
(PS2) is turned OFF by the previous paper. body stops after paper
Tray 8 J-1802 During operation: The paper suction sensor /2 exit. Pull out tray 8 and remove
Tray 9 J-1803 During operation: The paper suction sensor /3 Pull out tray 9 and remove
Vertical J-1804 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the PF front door and the
conveyance sensor /1 (PS28) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door, and
(PFU2) specified period of time after the paper feed remove jammed paper if any.
K-4
Classificatio
n
ON.
time after the paper feed sensor /2 (PS6) or the remove jammed paper if any.
vertical conveyance sensor /4 (PS31) turns ON.
ON.
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified vertical conveyance door /Up and
period of time after the loop sensor /Up (PS32) remove jammed paper if any.
turns ON.
Horizontal J-1812 During operation: The loop sensor /Lw (PS17) Pull out tray 6 and remove
conveyance does not turn ON within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
(PFU2) time after the paper feed sensor /3 (PS10) turns
ON.
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified horizontal conveyance door /Lw,
period of time after the loop sensor /Lw (PS17) and remove jammed paper if any.
turns ON.
specified period of time after the loop sensor /Up and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS32) turns ON.
specified period of time after the loop sensor /Lw and remove jammed paper if any.
(PS17) turns ON.
J-1818 During operation: The tandem entrance sensor Open the PFU2 front door, the
(PS34) of the PFU1 does not turn ON within a horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
specified period of time after the horizontal and the PFU1 tandem entrance
conveyance sensor /3 (PS21) of the PFU2 turns door, and remove jammed paper
ON. if any.
turns ON.
turns ON.
period of time after the suction belt clutch /3
(CL17) turns ON.
Horizontal J-1849 During operation: The multi feed detection Open the PF front door and the
conveyance boards /R (MFDBR) and /S (MFDBS) detect the horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
(PFU2) multi feed. and remove jammed paper if any.
Tray 7 J-1851 When idling: The paper feed sensor /1 (PS2) - Pull out tray 7 and remove
K-5
Classificatio
n
Vertical J-1854 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor /1 Open the PF front door and the
conveyance (PS28) turns ON while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
J-1858 When idling: The loop sensor /Up (PS32) turns Open the PF front door and the
ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Up,
Horizontal J-1860 When idling: The pre-registration sensor (PS18) Open the PF front door and the
conveyance turns ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Lt,
J-1861 When idling: The loop sensor /Lw (PS17) turns Open the PF front door and the
ON while in idling. horizontal conveyance door /Lw,
Vertical J-1865 When idling: The exit sensor /1 (PS26) turns ON Open the PF front door and the
conveyance while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
J-1866 When idling: The exit sensor /2 (PS27) turns ON Open the PF front door and the
while in idling. vertical conveyance door, and
Vertical J-1901 During operation: The vertical conveyance door If paper jam occurs during Close the vertical conveyance
conveyance open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor printing process, main door.
(PS39) turns OFF during printing. body stops after paper
exit.
PFU1/2 J-1903 During operation: The front door open jam. PF stops immediately Close the front door.
When the front door sensor (PS1) turns OFF during PF paper feeding,
during printing. and the main body stops
after paper exit. The main
body does not stop in the
case other than PF paper
feeding.
Registration J-3101 During operation: The paper leading edge The main body stops Pull out the ADU and remove
sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within a immediately. jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the registration
motor (M58) turns ON.
Fusing/ J-3102 During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
paper exit (PS61) does not turn ON within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after the registration motor (M58)
turns ON.
Registration J-3103 During operation: The registration sensors /Fr Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS1) and /Rr (PS2) do not turn ON within a jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the registration
J-3149 During operation: The upstream sensor which Pull out the ADU and remove
detects OFF is ON when the registration jammed paper if any.
sensors /Fr (PS1) and /Rr (PS2) are ON.
J-3151 When idling: The paper leading edge sensor - Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS3) is ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
K-6
Classificatio
n
J-3152 When idling: The fusing loop sensor (PS64) Pull out the ADU and remove
Fusing/ J-3201 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS18) The main body stops Pull out the ADU and remove
paper exit does not turn ON within a specified period of immediately. jammed paper if any.
time after the fusing paper exit sensor (PS61)
turns ON.
J-3204 During operation: The fusing paper exit sensor Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS61) does not turn OFF within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after it turns ON.
J-3252 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS18) Pull out the ADU and remove
does not turn OFF within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON.
J-3209 During operation: The de-curler sensor (PS54) Pull out the ADU and remove
does not turn ON within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
time after the fusing paper exit sensor (PS61)
turns ON.
EF J-3220 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS1) The main body/EF stops Open the EF front door and the
does not turn ON within a specified period of immediately. entrance guide plate, and remove
time after the main body paper exit sensor turns jammed paper, if any.
ON.
J-3221 During operation: The fusing exit sensor (PS15) Open the EF front door and the
does not turn ON within a specified period of entrance guide plate, and remove
time after the entrance sensor (PS1) turns ON. jammed paper, if any.
J-3222 During operation: The fusing exit sensor (PS15) Open tray EF front door, pull out
does not turn OFF within a specified period of the fusing mount, open the fusing
time after it turns ON. entrance guide plate, paper exit
door, or paper exit jam release
lever, and remove jammed paper
if any.
J-3223 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS2) Open tray EF front door, pull out
does not turn ON within a specified period of the fusing mount, open the fusing
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS15) turns entrance guide plate, paper exit
ON. door, or paper exit jam release
if any.
J-3224 During operation: The conveyance sensor /Rt Open the EF front door and the
(PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period entrance guide plate, and remove
of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) turns jammed paper, if any.
ON.
J-3225 During operation: The conveyance sensor /Lt Open the EF front door, pull out
(PS8) does not turn ON within a specified period the fusing mount, open the
of time after the conveyance sensor /Rt (PS7) bypass guide plate /Lw, and
turns ON. remove jammed paper if any.
J-3226 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS2) Open the EF front door, pull out
does not turn ON within a specified period of the fusing mount, open the
time after the conveyance sensor /Lt (PS8) turns bypass guide plate /Lt, and
ON. remove jammed paper if any.
Fusing/ J-3251 When idling: The fusing paper exit sensor - Pull out the ADU and remove
paper exit (PS61) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-3252 When idling: The paper feed sensor (PS18) Pull out the ADU and remove
J-3254 When idling: The de-curler sensor (PS54) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
EF J-3270 When idling: The entrance sensor (PS1) turns Open the EF front door and the
ON while in idling. entrance guide plate, and remove
jammed paper, if any.
J-3271 When idling: The fusing entrance sensor (PS14) Open tray EF front door, pull out
turns ON while in idling. the fusing mount, open the fusing
entrance guide plate, paper exit
if any.
J-3272 When idling: The fusing exit sensor (PS15) turns Open tray EF front door, pull out
ON while in idling. the fusing mount, open the fusing
entrance guide plate, paper exit
if any.
K-7
Classificatio
n
J-3273 When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS2) turns Open the entrance section jam
ON while in idling. release lever of the post
processing option connected to
EF, and remove jammed paper if
any.
J-3274 When idling: The conveyance sensor /Rt (PS7) Open the EF front door, pull out
turns ON while in idling. the fusing mount, open the
bypass guide plate /Rt, and
J-3275 When idling: The conveyance sensor /Lt (PS8) Open the EF front door, pull out
turns ON while in idling. the fusing mount, open the
bypass guide plate /Lt, and
External J-5101 During operation: The front door open jam. The main body stops Close the front door.
When the front door sensor (PS37) turns OFF immediately.
during printing.
EF J-5102 During operation: The front door open jam. EF and the main body stop Close the front door.
When the front door sensor (PS4) turns OFF immediately.
during printing.
DF J-6101 During operation: The paper feed section cover The DF stops immediately. Close the paper feed section
open jam. The paper feed cover sensor (PS303) If paper jam occurs during cover.
turns OFF during printing. printing process, main
J-6102 During operation: The paper feed tray open jam. body stops after paper Close the paper feed tray.
The tray open/close sensor (PS308) turns OFF exit.
during printing.
J-6103 During operation: The paper exit section cover Close the paper exit section
open jam. The paper exit cover sensor (PS307) cover.
turns OFF during printing.
J-6201 During operation: The registration sensor Open the paper feed section
(PS301) does not turn OFF within a specified cover and remove jammed paper
period of time after the paper feeding starts. if any.
Remove jammed paper if any in
the main body conveyance
section.
J-6203 During operation: The timing sensor (PS302) Open the paper feed section
does not turn ON within a specified period of cover and remove jammed paper
time after the paper feed motor (M301) turns if any.
reverse rotation ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6206 During operation: The timing sensor (PS302) Open the paper feed section
does not turn OFF within a specified period of cover and remove jammed paper
time after it turns ON. if any.
Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6209 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn ON within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) Remove jammed paper if any in
turns ON. the main body conveyance
section.
J-6301 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS305) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn OFF within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
J-6304 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn ON within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after the simplex original exiting starts. Remove jammed paper if any in
The paper exit sensor (PS306) does not turn ON the main body conveyance
within a specified period of time after the reverse section.
sensor (PS305) turns ON during exiting duplex
original.
J-6305 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
does not turn OFF within a specified period of and remove jammed paper if any.
time after it turns ON. Remove jammed paper if any in
section.
K-8
Classificatio
n
J-6501 When idling: The registration sensor (PS301) - Open the paper feed section
turns ON while in idling. cover and remove jammed paper
if any.
J-6502 When idling: The reverse sensor (PS305) turns Open the paper exit section cover
ON while in idling. and remove jammed paper if any.
J-6504 When idling: The paper exit sensor (PS306) Open the paper exit section cover
turns ON while in idling. and remove jammed paper if any.
J-6508 When idling: The timing sensor (PS302) turns Open the paper feed section
ON while in idling. cover and remove jammed paper
if any.
FS J-7101 During operation: The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-521) stop immediately. from the FS/main body.
The FS front door open jam. The door switch
(MS1) turns OFF while in printing.
(FS-612)
The front door and the PI upper door are opened
while in printing.
RU J-7102 During operation: RU/main body stop Remove jammed paper in the RU/
(RU-506) immediately. main body, if any.
RU front door open jam. Interlock switch (MS1)
was turned OFF when printing.
LS (1st J-7103 During operation: The LS front door open jam. The LS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in stop immediately. from the LS/main body.
printing.
LS (2nd J-7104 During operation: The LS front door open jam. Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) The door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in from the LS/main body.
printing.
FD J-7105 During operation: The FD front door open jam. The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
The front door switch (MS1) turns OFF while in stop immediately. from the FD/main body.
the print.
SD J-7107 During operation: The SD front door/Rt open jam The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
or the SD front door/Lt open jam. During stop immediately. from the SD/main body.
printing, either the SD front door switch /Rt
(MS1) or /Lt (MS2) turns OFF.
PB J-7108 During operation: The PB front door open jam. The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
During printing, the front door switch (SW2), stop immediately. from the PB/main body.
book door switch (SW3), upper door switch
(SW1), and relay conveyance section door
switch (MS3) turn OFF.
GP J-7109 During operation: The GP front door open jam. The GP and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
The door switch turns OFF while in the print. stop immediately. from the GP/main body.
RU J-7110 During operation: The RU front door open jam. The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
The door switch (SW1) turns OFF while in stop immediately. from the RU/main body.
printing.
FS J-7216 During operation: The FS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-612) stop immediately. from the FS/main body.
The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time after the
main body paper exit sensor (PS13) turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
(FS-521) from the FS/main body.
The main tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after the
stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns OFF.
(FS-612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not
turn ON within a specified period of time after
the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7218 During operation: (FS-521) Remove jammed paper if any
The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not from the FS/main body.
the paper exit sensor turns ON.
(FS-612)
(Staple) The stacker conveyance passage
sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the FNS entrance
sensor (PS4) turns ON.
K-9
Classificatio
n
J-7219 During operation: While in stapling, the stacker Remove jammed paper if any
entrance sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within from the FS/main body.
a specified period of time after the stacker
entrance motor (M13) turns ON.
While in any other operations than stapling, the
PS5 does not turn OFF within a specified period
of time after it turns ON.
While in stapling a small-size paper, the main
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the paper exit
arm motor (M23) turns ON. Or the stacker empty
sensor (PS20) turns OFF.
(FS-612)
tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the paper exit
operation starts.
While in stapling a large-size paper, the main
tray exit sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF within
a specified period of time after the paper exit
belt motor (M23) turns ON.
(FS-612)
While in stapling a large size paper, the main
tray paper exit sensor (PS6) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after the start of
exiting paper.
The sub tray exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the FNS
entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
(FS-521)
While in exiting paper in the sub tray, the sub
tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the paper
exit sensor of the previous option turns ON.
J-7223 During operation: While in exiting paper in the Remove jammed paper if any
sub tray, the sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) from the FS/main body.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS1 turns ON.
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
not turn ON within a specified period of time
after stapling completes.
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.
The Folding paper exit sensor (PS25) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of time after
PS25 turns ON.
While in the straight/shift of the small-size paper,
the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) does not
the PS10 turns ON.
(FS-612)
While in the stapling/center folding/saddle
stitching/tri-folding of the small-size paper, the
stacker entrance sensor (PS5) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after the
PS5 turns ON.
K-10
Classificatio
n
The main tray exit sensor (PS6) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON. (in non-staple mode)
The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) does not
the PS1 turns ON. (Staple mode)
within a specified period of time after the PS10
turns ON.
(FS-612)
within a specified period of time after the PS6
turns ON.
PI J-7235 During operation: The paper passage sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Lw (PS206) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Lw
(CL202) turns ON.
PK J-7243 During operation: The punch shift home sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS303) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the punch shift motor (M302)
turns ON.
FS J-7248 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) does
after the PS26 turns ON.
PI J-7249 During operation: The paper passage sensor / Open the PI upper door and
Up (PS201) does not turn ON within a specified remove jammed paper if any.
period of time after the conveyance clutch /Up
(CL201) turns ON.
J-7250 During operation: The FNS entrance sensor Open the PI upper door and
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period remove jammed paper if any.
of time after the paper passage sensor /Up
(PS201) turns ON.
J-7251 During operation: The FNS entrance sensor Open the PI upper door and
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period remove jammed paper if any.
of time after the paper passage sensor /Lw
(PS206) turns ON.
FS J-7281 During operation: Remove jammed paper if any
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) do
after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) and the clincher
motor /Fr (M15) turn ON.
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) and
the clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) do
after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) and the clincher
motor /Rr (M10) turn ON.
The stapler motor home sensors /Rr, /Fr
(PS30/31) and the clincher motor home
sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS32/33) do not turn ON within
a specified period of time after the stapler
motors /Rr, /Fr (M9/14) and the clincher motors /
Rr, /Fr (M10/15) turn ON.
FS does not stop within a specified period of
time after the operation stop signal is transmitted
from the main body to the FS.
K-11
Classificatio
n
J-7301 When idling: - Open the FS front door and the
(FS-521) jam release lever, and remove
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) turns jammed paper, if any.
ON while in idling.
(FS-612)
The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6) turns ON
while in idling.
J-7302 When idling: The stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Open the FS front door and the
turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
jammed paper if any.
J-7305 When idling : The FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Open the FS front door and the
turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
J-7307 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the FS front door and the
(PS1) turns ON while in idling. jam release lever, and remove
J-7308 When idling: The FS and the main body Open the FS front door and the
(FS-612) stop immediately. jam release lever, and remove
The stacker empty sensor (PS20) turns ON jammed paper, if any.
during exiting jam.
J-7309 When idling: Open the FS front door and the
The folding pass-through sensor (PS26) turns jammed paper if any.
ON while in idling.
J-7310 When idling: Open the FS front door and the
The folding paper exit sensor (PS25) turns ON jammed paper if any.
while in idling.
PI J-7314 When idling: The paper passage sensor /Lw - Open the FS front door and the
J-7317 When idling: The paper passage sensor /Up Open the FS front door and the
RU J-7340 When idling: Open the front door and remove
(RU-506) jammed paper, if any.
The entrance jam sensor (PS6) turns ON while
in idling.
J-7341 When idling: Open the front door and remove
The stacker jam sensor (PS5) turns ON while in
idling.
J-7342 When idling: Open the front door and remove
The paper exit sensor (PS2) turns ON while in
idling.
LS (1st J-7350 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Open the LS front door, open then
tandem) turns ON while in idling. entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7351 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the LS sub tray cover, and
(PS10) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7352 When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1 Open the LS jam door, and
(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in remove jammed paper, if any
idling.
J-7353 When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18) Open the LS front door, open then
turns ON while in idling. the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
LS (2nd J-7354 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Open the LS front door, open then
tandem) turns ON while in idling. entrance conveyance jam release
lever and remove jammed paper,
if any.
J-7355 When idling: The sub tray paper exit sensor Open the LS sub tray cover, and
J-7356 When idling: Either of the conveyance sensor /1 Open the LS jam door, and
(PS7), /2 (PS16), or /3 (PS17) turns ON while in remove jammed paper, if any
idling.
K-12
Classificatio
n
J-7357 When idling: The coupling exit sensor (PS18) Open the LS front door, open then
turns ON while in idling. the coupling exit jam release lever
and remove jammed paper, if any.
FD J-7358 When idling: Either of the FD entrance sensor Open the FD front door, open
(PS1), the punch conveyance sensor (PS5), or then the entrance conveyance
the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON jam release levers /1 and /2 and
while in idling. the punch conveyance jam
release levers /1 and /2, and then
remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7359 When idling: Either of the intermediate Open the FD front door and the
conveyance sensor (PS13), the sub tray paper intermediate conveyance jam
exit sensor (PS16), or the main tray paper exit lever, and remove the jammed
sensor (PS18) turns ON while in idling. paper, if any.
J-7360 When idling: Either of the 1st folding Open the FD front door, pull out
conveyance sensor (PS51), the 2nd folding the folding conveyance section,
conveyance sensor (PS53), the 3rd folding open the folding conveyance jam
conveyance sensor (PS54), the S size release levers /1 to /5, and
conveyance sensor (PS58), the folding entrance remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor (PS52), or the folding exit sensor (PS2)
turns ON while in idling.
J-7361 When idling: Either of the PI conveyance Open the FD upper door and
sensor /Up (PS31), the PI conveyance sensor / remove jammed paper, if any.
Lw (PS37), or the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON When jammed paper gets in the
while in idling. PI exit, open the entrance
conveyance jam release lever /1
and remove the jammed paper.
RU J-7365 When idling: The entrance sensor (PS1) turns Open the front door, and remove
ON while in idling. jammed paper, if any
J-7366 When idling: Either of the de-curler entrance Open the front door, and remove
sensor (PS2) or the humidification section jammed paper, if any
entrance sensor (PS7) turns ON while in idling.
J-7367 When idling: Open the front door, and remove
(RU-508) jammed paper, if any
Either of the color density detection timing
sensor (PS3), reverse paper exit gate previous
sensor (PS4), reverse/exit sensor (PS11), or
paper exit sensor (PS12) turns ON while in
idling.
SD J-7368 When idling: The entrance sensor (PS1) turns Open the SD front door /Rt and
ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7369 When idling: Either of the horizontal conveyance Open the SD front door /Rt and
sensor /1 (PS2), the horizontal conveyance remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor /2 (PS3), or the sub tray exit sensor
(PS11) turns ON while in idling.
J-7370 When idling: The horizontal conveyance exit Open the SD front door /Lt and
sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7371 When idling: Either of the right angle Open the SD front door /Rt and
conveyance sensor /1 (PS5) or the right angle remove jammed paper, if any.
conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) turns ON while in
idling.
J-7372 When idling: Either of the folding sensor /1 Open the SD front door /Lt and
(PS7), the folding passage sensor (PS8), the tri- remove jammed paper, if any.
folding exit sensor (PS9), or the folding sensor /
2 (PS44) turns ON while in idling.
J-7373 When idling: The saddle stitching paper sensor Open the SD front door /Lt and
J-7374 When idling: Either of the bundle sensor /1 Open the SD front door /Lt and
(PS14), /2 (PS15), /4 (PS54), or the bundle exit remove jammed paper, if any.
sensor /2 (PS57) turns ON while in idling.
PB J-7380 When idling: Either of the entrance sensor Open the PB front door or the
(PS1), the SC entrance sensor (PS2), the cover upper door, and remove jammed
paper entrance sensor (PS3), or the sub tray paper, if any.
paper exit sensor (PS4) turns ON while in idling.
J-7381 When idling: The SC paper detection sensor Open the PB upper door, and
J-7382 When idling: The clamp paper sensor (PS28) Open the PB front door, pull out
turns ON while in idling. the clamp section, and remove
K-13
Classificatio
n
J-7383 When idling: Either of the cover paper Open the PB front door, and
switchback sensor (PS44), the cover paper remove jammed paper, if any
sensor /Rt (PS45), or the cover paper sensor /Lt
(PS46) turns ON while in idling.
J-7384 When idling: The book end fence sensor (PS61) Open the PB stacker door, and
turns ON while in idling. remove jammed paper, if any.
J-7385 When idling: The cover paper conveyance Pull out the paper feed tray, and
sensors /1 (PS75), /2 (PS76), /3 (PS77), / remove jammed paper, if any.
4(PS78), and /5 (PS79) turn ON while in idling.
J-7386 When idling: The relay conveyance entrance Open the PB relay conveyance
sensor (PS93), the relay conveyance door and remove jammed paper if
intermediate sensor (PS91) and the relay any.
conveyance exit sensor (PS94) turn ON during
idling.
GP J-7390 When idling: The enter sensor (S1) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
while in idling. bypass panel cover, and remove
the jammed paper, if any.
J-7391 When idling: The stepper 1 speed sensor (S2) Open the GP front door, the
turns ON while in idling. entrance aligner panel, and
remove the jammed paper, if any.
J-7392 When idling: The bypass sensor (S8) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
J-7393 When idling: The exit sensor (S7) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
J-7394 When idling: The punch flag sensor (S9) turns Open the GP front door, the
ON while in idling. entrance aligner panel, the bottom
U-channel, and remove the
J-7395 When idling: The u-channel sensor (S4) turns Open the GP front door, the
ON while in idling. bottom U-channel, and remove
J-7396 When idling: The backstop sensor (S5) turns ON Open the GP front door, the
while in idling. bottom U-channel, and remove
J-7397 When idling: The stepper 2 speed sensor (S6) Open the GP front door, the exit
turns ON while in idling. aligner panel, and remove the
LS (1st J-7401 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) The LS and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the LS/main body.
time after the main body paper exit sensor (PS3)
turns ON.
J-7402 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
J-7403 During operation: The sub tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS10) does not turn ON within a specified from the LS/main body.
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.
J-7404 During operation: The sub tray paper exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS10) does not turn OFF within a specified from the LS/main body.
J-7405 During operation: The conveyance sensor /1 Remove jammed paper if any
(PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period from the LS/main body.
of time after the entrance sensor (PS4) turns
ON.
period of time after the conveyance sensor /1
(PS7) turns ON.
K-14
Classificatio
n
(PS16) turns ON.
J-7411 During operation: The coupling exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS17) turns ON.
LS (2nd J-7431 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Remove jammed paper if any
tandem) does not turn ON within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
turns ON.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the LS/main body.
J-7433 During operation: The sub tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
period of time after the entrance sensor (PS4)
turns ON.
(PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period from the LS/main body.
ON.
(PS7) turns ON.
(PS16) turns ON.
(PS17) turns ON.
FD J-7501 During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1) The FD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the FD/main body.
turns ON.
J-7502 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a from the FD/main body.
specified period of time after the FD entrance
J-7503 During operation: The main tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS18) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the intermediate conveyance
K-15
Classificatio
n
J-7504 During operation: The main tray exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS18) does not turn OFF within a specified from the FD/main body.
(PS16) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the intermediate conveyance
(PS16) does not turn OFF within a specified from the FD/main body.
J-7507 During operation: The punch conveyance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period from the FD/main body.
of time after the FD entrance sensor (PS1) turns
ON.
J-7508 During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the punch
J-7509 During operation: The punch registration sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS6) does not turn ON within a specified period from the FD/main body.
of time after the punch conveyance sensor
(PS5) turns ON.
J-7510 During operation: The 1st folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the punch
registration sensor (PS6) turns ON.
J-7511 During operation: The 3rd folding conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the 1st folding
J-7512 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the 3rd folding
J-7513 During operation: While in the folding operation, Remove jammed paper if any
the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) does from the FD/main body.
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.
the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) does from the FD/main body.
after the 1st folding motor (M4) starts to
accelerate.
after the 2nd folding motor (M5) starts to
accelerate.
the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13) from the FD/main body.
time after the 3rd folding motor (M6) starts to
accelerate.
after the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
turns ON.
the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13) from the FD/main body.
time after the 3rd folding conveyance sensor
(PS54) turns ON.
J-7519 During operation: The PI conveyance sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Up (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Up
(SD13) turns ON.
K-16
Classificatio
n
J-7520 During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn ON within a specified period of time from the FD/main body.
after the PI conveyance sensor /Up (PS31) turns
ON.
J-7521 During operation: The PI conveyance sensor / Remove jammed paper if any
Lw (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified from the FD/main body.
period of time after the PI pick-up solenoid /Lw
(SD14) turns ON.
J-7522 During operation: The PI exit sensor (PS4) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn ON within a specified period of time from the FD/main body.
after the PI conveyance sensor /Lw (PS37) turns
ON.
J-7523 During operation: The FD entrance sensor (PS1) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the FD/main body.
time after the PI exit sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7524 During operation: The PI multi feed is detected. Remove jammed paper if any
from the FD/main body.
RU J-7530 During operation: The RU and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
(RU-506) stop immediately. from the RU/main body.
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the exit
sensor of the previous device turns ON.
(RU-506) from the RU/main body.
While in the straight pass, the paper exit sensor
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period
ON.
The entrance sensor (PS1) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it turns ON.
While in the reverse pass, the paper exit sensor
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period
ON.
The paper exit sensor (PS2) does not turn OFF
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the RU/main body.
time.
J-7551 During operation: The humidification section Remove jammed paper if any
entrance sensor (PS7) does not turn ON within a from the RU/main body.
specified period of time.
J-7552 During operation: the de-curler entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period from the RU/main body.
of time in the bypass path conveyance.
J-7553 During operation: The de-curler entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period from the RU/main body.
of time in the lower path conveyance.
J-7554 During operation: The color density detection Remove jammed paper if any
timing sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within a from the RU/main body.
J-7555 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS12) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the RU/main body.
time.
J-7556 During operation: The paper exit sensor (PS12) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the RU/main body.
time.
The reverse/exit sensor (PS11) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time in the
reverse/exit mode.
K-17
Classificatio
n
The paper exit sensor (PS12) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time in the reverse/
exit mode.
SD J-7561 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS1) The SD and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the SD/main body.
turns ON.
J-7562 During operation: The horizontal conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /1 (PS2) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the entrance
specified period of time after the horizontal
exit sensor (PS4) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the horizontal
exit sensor (PS4) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after it turns ON.
(PS11) does not turn ON within a specified from the SD/main body.
period of time after the horizontal conveyance
(PS11) does not turn OFF within a specified from the SD/main body.
J-7568 During operation: The right angle conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the right angle
conveyance motor (M6) turns ON.
J-7569 During operation: The folding sensor /1 (PS7) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the SD/main body.
time after the folding entrance motor (M3) turns
ON.
J-7570 During operation: The saddle stitching paper Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the folding sub
scan alignment exit motor (M8) turns ON.
J-7571 During operation: The bundle sensor /1 (PS14) Remove jammed paper if any
time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
turns ON.
time after the bundle clip motor (M11) turns ON.
time after the bundle sensor /2 (PS15) turns ON.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the SD/main body.
J-7575 During operation: The right angle conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /2 (PS6) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after it turns ON. Or the
folding entrance sensor (PS60) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.
J-7576 During operation: The folding sensor /2 (PS44) Remove jammed paper if any
K-18
Classificatio
n
J-7579 During operation: The folding passage sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS8) does not turn ON within a specified period from the SD/main body.
of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.
J-7580 During operation: The tri-folding exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS9) does not turn ON within a specified period from the SD/main body.
of time after the folding transfer motor (M4) turns
ON.
J-7581 During operation: The folding sub scan Remove jammed paper if any
alignment exit motor (M8) does not turn OFF from the SD/main body.
J-7582 During operation: The folding passage sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS8) does not turn OFF within a specified from the SD/main body.
J-7583 During operation: The tri-folding paper exit Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
J-7584 During operation: The trimming registration Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS55) does not turn ON within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the bundle press
movement motor (M17) turns ON.
J-7585 During operation: The trimming registration Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS55) does not turn OFF within a from the SD/main body.
specified period of time after the bundle
registration motor (M12) turns ON.
GP J-7590 During operation: The enter sensor (S1) does The GP/main body stop Remove jammed paper if any
not turn OFF within a specified period of time immediately. from the GP/main body.
after it turns ON.
J-7591 During operation: The stepper 1 speed sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(S2) does not turn OFF within a specified period from the GP/main body.
J-7592 During operation: The bypass sensor (S8) does Remove jammed paper if any
not turn OFF within a specified period of time from the GP/main body.
after it turns ON.
J-7593 During operation: The exit sensor (S7) does not Remove jammed paper if any
turn OFF within a specified period of time after it from the GP/main body.
turns ON.
J-7594 During operation: The punch flag sensor (S9) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the GP/main body.
J-7595 During operation: The u-channel sensor (S4) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7596 During operation: The backstop sensor (S5) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7597 During operation: The stepper 2 speed sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(S6) does not turn OFF within a specified period from the GP/main body.
PB J-7660 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS1) The PB and the main body Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of stop immediately. from the PB/main body.
time after the main body paper exit sensor turns
ON.
J-7661 During operation: The SC entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period from the PB/main body.
ON.
J-7662 During operation: The SC entrance sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS2) does not turn OFF within a specified from the PB/main body.
J-7663 During operation: The cover paper entrance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
specified period of time after the main body
paper exit sensor turns ON.
K-19
Classificatio
n
(PS4) does not turn ON within a specified period from the PB/main body.
ON.
J-7666 During operation: The SC paper detection Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the SC entrance
sensor (PS16) does not turn OFF within a from the PB/main body.
J-7668 During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a Remove jammed paper if any
time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) from the PB/main body.
time after the operation starts.
J-7669 During operation: When conveying 2 sheets at a Remove jammed paper if any
time, the SC paper detection sensor (PS16) from the PB/main body.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
specified period of time after the SC bundle
conveyance motor (M17) turns ON.
J-7671 During operation: The clamp paper sensor Remove jammed paper if any
period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns
OFF.
J-7674 During operation: The cover paper sensor /Rt Remove jammed paper if any
(PS45) does not turn ON within a specified from the PB/main body.
period of time after the cover paper feed clutch
(CL71) turns ON.
J-7675 During operation: The relay conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
entrance sensor (PS93) does not turn ON within from the PB/main body.
a specified period of time after the SC
switchback conveyance motor (M12) turns ON.
J-7676 During operation: When starting trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper from the PB/main body.
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn ON
within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
J-7677 During operation: When finishing trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the PB, the cover paper from the PB/main body.
switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn OFF
J-7678 During operation: When positioning the leading Remove jammed paper if any
edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the from the PB/main body.
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn OFF
edge of the cover paper fed from the PB, the from the PB/main body.
cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn ON
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.
J-7680 During operation: When cover paper is fed from Remove jammed paper if any
the main body, the cover paper sensor/Rt from the PB/main body.
(PS45) does not turn ON within a specified time
period after the cover paper entrance sensor
(PS3) turns ON.
J-7681 During operation: The relay conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
intermediate sensor (PS91) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the relay
conveyance entrance sensor (PS93) turns ON.
K-20
Classificatio
n
J-7682 During operation: When starting trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the main body, the cover from the PB/main body.
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover
J-7683 During operation: When finishing trimming of the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper fed from the main body, the cover from the PB/main body.
paper switchback sensor (PS44) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
edge of the cover paper fed from the main body, from the PB/main body.
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
OFF within a specified time period after the
cover paper conveyance motor (M45) turns ON.
edge of the cover paper fed from the main body, from the PB/main body.
the cover paper sensor/Lt (PS46) does not turn
ON within a specified time period after the cover
paper conveyance motor (M45) turns forward
rotation ON.
J-7686 During operation: The booklet end sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS61) does not turn ON within a specified from the PB/main body.
period of time after the booklet conveyance belt
J-7687 During operation: When loading first book, the Remove jammed paper if any
booklet sensor /1 (PS66) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.
J-7688 During operation: When first row of book moves, Remove jammed paper if any
the book sensor /2 (PS67) does not turn ON from the PB/main body.
within a specified period of time after the book
movement motor (M64) turns ON.
J-7689 During operation: When feeding paper, the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper conveyance sensor /1 (PS75) does from the PB/main body.
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.
J-7690 During operation: The cover paper conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /2 (PS76) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
specified period of time after the cover paper
J-7691 During operation: When refeeding paper, the Remove jammed paper if any
cover paper conveyance sensor /3 (PS77) does from the PB/main body.
after the cover paper feed clutch (CL71) turns
ON.
J-7692 During operation: The cover paper conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /4 (PS78) does not turn ON within a from the PB/main body.
J-7693 During operation: The multi feed detection Remove jammed paper if any
board /2 (MFDBR) turns OFF. from the PB/main body.
J-7694 During operation: The relay conveyance exit Remove jammed paper if any
specified period of time after the relay
conveyance intermediate sensor (PS91) turns
ON.
J-7695 During operation: The relay conveyance exit Remove jammed paper if any
J-7696 During operation: The cover paper switchback Remove jammed paper if any
feed motor (M74) turns ON.
J-7697 During operation: No paper is detected (paper Remove jammed paper if any
has been removed) when restarting the job after from the PB/main body.
recovery.
K-21
Classificatio
n
J-7698 During operation: A cover paper has not been Remove jammed paper if any
conveyed to the cover paper table section when from the PB/main body.
clamping of inside pages is finished.
ADU J-9201 During operation: The ADU reverse sensor The main body stops Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS16) does not turn ON within a specified immediately. jammed paper if any.
period of time after the fusing paper exit sensor
(PS61) turns ON.
J-9202 During operation: The ADU stop sensor (PS17) Pull out the ADU and remove
does not turn OFF within a specified period of jammed paper if any.
J-9251 When idling: The ADU reverse sensor (PS16) - Pull out the ADU and remove
J-9252 When idling: The ADU stop sensor (PS17) turns Pull out the ADU and remove
ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-9301 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor / The main body stops Pull out the ADU and remove
1 (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified immediately. jammed paper if any.
period of time after the ADU reverse motor
(M56) turns ON.
J-9351 When idling: The ADU conveyance sensor /1 - Pull out the ADU and remove
(PS13) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
J-9401 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor / The main body stops Pull out the ADU and remove
2 (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified immediately. jammed paper if any.
period of time after the ADU conveyance
J-9402 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor / Pull out the ADU and remove
3 (PS15) does not turn ON within a specified jammed paper if any.
period of time after the ADU conveyance
J-9451 When idling: The ADU conveyance sensor /2 - Pull out the ADU and remove
J-9452 When idling: The ADU conveyance sensor /3 Pull out the ADU and remove
K-22
bizhub PRESS C8000 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Trouble reset method
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
2.2 Function to detach defective sections

When the abnormality occurs on the part for which the faulty part isolation function is available, the defective units can be detached temporarily
to use other control unit manually.
While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
(1) User operation

When a malfunction code occurs, press the HELP key following the message on the operation panel and then turn the sub power switch
(SW2) OFF and ON. This operation allows you to use it temporarily until the SW2 is OFF and ON (including an OFF/ON operation by the
weekly timer) next time.
(2) DIPSW setting

Turning the sub power switch (SW2) OFF and ON after setting the specified software DIPSW bit allows you to make a limited use of it until
the bit setting is released next time (it requires the OFF/ON operation of the SW2).
2.3 Malfunction code list

WARNING
• When any malfunction of C1540 to 1562; PB glue tank temperature abnormality or C3501 to 3916; Fusing temperature abnormality
occurs, be sure to repair defective parts then set the software DIPSW3-1 of service mode to 0. If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before
defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Malfunction Resulting Faulty part Control
Classification Cause Estimated abnormal parts
code operation isolation DIPSW when
Main body: C-0002 Communication error The main body • Conveyance drive board
Communication between the printer control stops (CDB)
error board (PRCB) and the immediately to • Printer control board
conveyance drive board turn OFF the (PRCB)
(CDB). main relay • DC power supply /1
(RL1). (DCPS/1)
Main body: C-0101 An error detection signal is • Paper feed motor (M12)
Paper feed detected continuously for a • Printer control board
motor specified period of time (PRCB)
abnormality while the paper feed motor • DC power supply /3
(M12) is ON. (DCPS/3)
Main body: ADU C-0104 An error detection signal is • ADU conveyance motor
conveyance detected continuously for a (M39)
motor specified period of time • Conveyance drive board
abnormality while the ADU conveyance (CDB)
motor (M39) is ON. • DC power supply /3
(DCPS/3)
Main body: C-0105 An error detection signal is • Paper exit motor (M34)
Paper exit motor detected continuously for a • Printer control board
abnormality specified period of time (PRCB)
while the paper exit motor • DC power supply /4
Main body: C-0106 An error detection signal is • Reverse de-curler motor
Reverse de- detected continuously for a (M42)
curler motor specified period of time • Conveyance drive board
abnormality while the reverse de-curler (CDB)
(DCPS/2)
Main body: C-0107 An error detection signal is • Reverse motor (M43)
Reverse motor detected continuously for a • Conveyance drive board
abnormality specified period of time (CDB)
while the reverse motor • DC power supply /2
Main body: ADU C-0108 An error detection signal is • ADU reverse motor
reverse motor detected continuously for a (M56)
abnormality specified period of time • Conveyance drive board
while the ADU reverse (CDB)
(DCPS/2)
K-23

Main body: C-0109 An error signal is detected • Registration motor
Registration while the registration motor (M58)
motor circuit (M58) is ON. • Conveyance drive board
abnormality (CDB)
• DC power supply /2
(DCPS/2)
Main body: Loop C-0110 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /Fr (M44)
motor /Fr drive while the loop motor /Fr • Conveyance drive board
circuit (M44) is ON. (CDB)
abnormality • DC power supply /2
(DCPS/2)
Main body: Loop C-0111 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /Rr (M45)
motor /Rr drive while the loop motor /Fr • Conveyance drive board
(DCPS/2)
Main body: ADU C-0112 An error signal is detected • ADU loop motor (M57)
loop motor drive while the ADU loop motor • Conveyance drive board
(DCPS/2)
PF-704/705 (1st C-0113 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /1 (M5) DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): Loop while the loop motor /1 • PF drive board (PFDB) in trays 4 to
motor (M5) is ON. 9 is
abnormality unavailable
C-0114 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /2 (M6) DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
while the loop motor /2 • PF drive board (PFDB) in trays 4 to
(M6) is ON. 9 is
unavailable
PF-704/705 (1st C-0115 An error signal is detected • Paper feed belt motor DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): Paper while the paper feed belt (M1) in trays 4 to
feed belt motor motor (M1) is ON. • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
PF-704/705 (1st C-0116 An error signal is detected • Horizontal conveyance DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): while the horizontal motor (M3) in trays 4 to
Horizontal conveyance motor (M3) is • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
conveyance ON. unavailable
motor
abnormality
PF-704/705 (1st C-0117 An error signal is detected • Vertical conveyance DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): while the vertical motor (M2) in trays 4 to
Vertical conveyance motor (M2) is • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
motor
abnormality
PF-704/705 (1st C-0118 An error signal is detected • Tandem conveyance DIPSW35-0 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): while the tandem motor (M4) in trays 4 to
Tandem conveyance motor (M4) is • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
motor
abnormality
PF-704 (2nd C-0119 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /1 (M5) DIPSW35-3 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): Loop while the loop motor /1 • PF drive board (PFDB) in trays 7 to
motor (M5) is ON. 9 is
C-0120 An error signal is detected • Loop motor /2 (M6) DIPSW35-3 to 5 Paper feed
while the loop motor /2 • PF drive board (PFDB) in trays 7 to
(M6) is ON. 9 is
unavailable
PF-704 (2nd C-0121 An error signal is detected • Paper feed belt motor DIPSW35-3 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): Paper while the paper feed belt (M1) in trays 7 to
feed belt motor motor (M1) is ON. • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
PF-704 (2nd C-0122 An error signal is detected • Horizontal conveyance DIPSW35-3 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): while the horizontal motor (M3) in trays 7 to
Horizontal conveyance motor (M3) is • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
motor
abnormality
K-24

PF-704 (2nd C-0123 An error signal is detected • Vertical conveyance DIPSW35-3 to 5 Paper feed
tandem): while the vertical motor (M2) in trays 7 to
Vertical conveyance motor (M2) is • PF drive board (PFDB) 9 is
motor
abnormality
EF: Entrance C-0150 An error detection signal is • Entrance conveyance
conveyance detected continuously for a motor (M1)
motor specified period of time • EF control board (EFCB)
abnormality while the entrance
conveyance motor (M1) is
ON.
EF: Bypass C-0151 An error detection signal is • Bypass conveyance
conveyance detected continuously for a motor (M2)
motor specified period of time • EF control board (EFCB)
abnormality while the bypass
ON.
Main body: C-0201 The upper limit sensor /1 • Tray lift-up motor /1 DIPSW18-0 Paper feed
Paper feed tray (PS22) does not turn ON (M36) in tray 1 is
abnormality within a specified period of • Upper limit sensor /1 unavailable
time after the tray lift-up (PS22)
motor /1 (M36) turns ON. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
C-0202 The upper limit sensor /2 • Tray lift-up motor /2 DIPSW18-1 Paper feed
(PS23) does not turn ON (M37) in tray 2 is
within a specified period of • Upper limit sensor / unavailable
time after the tray lift-up 2(PS23)
(PRCB)
C-0203 The upper limit sensor /3 • Tray lift-up motor /3 DIPSW18-2 Paper feed
(PS24) does not turn ON (M38) in tray 3 is
within a specified period of • Upper limit sensor /3 unavailable
time after the tray lift-up (PS24)
(PRCB)
PF-704/705 (1st C-0209 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-0 Paper feed
tandem): Paper the paper lift motor /1 (M7) • Paper lift motor /1 (M7) in tray 4 is
lift motor /1 blows out. unavailable
abnormality C-0212 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-1 Paper feed
the paper lift motor /2 (M8) • Paper lift motor /2 (M8) in tray 5 is
blows out. unavailable
C-0215 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-2 Paper feed
PF-704 (2nd C-0218 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-3 Paper feed
tandem): Paper the paper lift motor /1 (M7) • Paper lift motor /1 (M7) in tray 7 is
lift motor blows out. unavailable
abnormality C-0221 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-4 Paper feed
C-0224 Power supply line fuse for • PF drive board (PFDB) DIPSW35-5 Paper feed
Main body: C-0301 An error detection signal is • Deodorization fan /1
Deodorization detected continuously for a (FM11), /2 (FM12)
fan abnormality specified period of time • Printer control board
while the deodorization (PRCB)
fans /1 (FM11) and /2
(FM12) are ON.
Main body: Fan C-0302 An error detection signal is • Tucking fan /1 (FM27), /
abnormality detected continuously for a 2 (FM28), /3 (FM29)
specified period of time • Printer control board
while the tucking fans /1 (PRCB)
(FM27), /2 (FM28) and /3
(FM29) are ON.
An error detection signal is
detected continuously
while retrying power feed
several times.
K-25

C-0303 An error detection signal is • ADU cooling fan /1
detected continuously for a (FM36)
specified period of time • Conveyance drive board
while the ADU cooling fan / (CDB)
1 (FM36) is ON. • DC power supply /2
An error detection signal is (DCPS/2)
detected continuously • Front door switch/4
while retrying power feed (SW4)
several times.
C-0304 An error detection signal is • Paper exit cooling fan /1
detected continuously for a (FM24), /2 (FM25), /3
specified period of time (FM26)
while the paper exit • Printer control board
cooling fans /1 (FM24), /2 (PRCB)
(FM25) and /3 (FM26) are
ON.
several times.
C-0305 An error detection signal is • Cooling fan (FM5)
detected continuously for a • Printer control board
specified period of time (PRCB)
while the cooling fan (FM5)
is ON.
several times.
detected continuously • Front door switch /4
several times.
C-0308 An error detection signal is • ADU ventilation fan /1
detected continuously for a (FM31), (FM32)
specified period of time • Toner collection cooling
while the ADU ventilation fan (FM30)
fans /1 (FM31), /2 (FM32) • Printer control board
and the toner collection (PRCB)
cooling fan (FM30) are
ON.
several times.
detected continuously • Front door switch /4
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0310 An error detection signal is • Cooling fan /1 (FM7), /2
tandem): detected continuously for a (FM8)
Cooling fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the cooling fan /1
(FM7) or /2 (FM8) is ON.
several times.
K-26

PF-704/705 (1st C-0311 An error detection signal is • Paper leading edge
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a separation fan /Fr1
leading edge specified period of time (FM9), /Rr1 (FM10)
separation fan while the paper leading • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality edge separation fans /Fr1
(FM9) and /Rr1 (FM10) are
ON.
several times.
C-0312 An error detection signal is • Paper leading edge
detected continuously for a separation fan /Fr2
specified period of time (FM13), /Rr2 (FM14)
while the paper leading • PF drive board (PFDB)
edge separation fans /Fr2
(FM13) and /Rr2 (FM14)
are ON.
several times.
are ON.
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0314 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fan /Fr
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a (FM11)
feed assist fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the paper feed assist
fan /Fr1 (FM11) is ON.
several times.
C-0315 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fan /
detected continuously for a Fr2 (FM15)
specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
while the paper feed assist
several times.
C-0316 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fans /
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0317 An error detection signal is • Paper suction fan /1
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a (FM1), /2 (FM2)
suction fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the paper suction
fans /1 (FM1) and /2 (FM2)
are ON.
several times.
K-27

C-0318 An error detection signal is • Paper suction fan /3
detected continuously for a (FM3), /4 (FM4)
while the paper suction
are ON.
several times.
are ON.
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0320 An error detection signal is • Dehumidifier fan /Rt1
tandem): detected continuously for a (FM21), /Lt1 (FM22)
Dehumidifier fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the dehumidifier
fans /Rt1 (FM21) and /Lt1
(FM22) are ON.
several times.
C-0321 An error detection signal is • Dehumidifier fan /Rt2
detected continuously for a (FM23), /Lt2 (FM24)
while the dehumidifier
(FM24) are ON.
several times.
(FM26) are ON.
several times.
PF-704 (2nd C-0323 An error detection signal is • Cooling fan /1, /2 (FM8)
tandem): detected continuously for a • PF drive board (PFDB)
Cooling fan specified period of time
abnormality while the cooling fans /1
(FM7) and /2 (FM8) are
ON.
several times.
PF-704 (2nd C-0324 An error detection signal is • Paper leading edge
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a separation fan /Fr1
leading edge specified period of time (FM9), /Rr1 (FM10)
separation fan while the paper leading • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality edge separation fans /Fr1
(FM9) and /Rr1 (FM10) are
ON.
several times.
K-28

are ON.
several times.
are ON.
several times.
PF-704 (2nd C-0327 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fan /
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a Fr1
several times.
several times.
C-0329 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fans /
several times.
PF-704 (2nd C-0330 An error detection signal is • Paper suction fan /1
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a (FM1), /2 (FM2)
suction fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the paper suction
are ON.
several times.
are ON.
several times.
K-29

are ON.
several times.
PF-704 (2nd C-0333 An error detection signal is • Dehumidifier fan /Rt1
tandem): detected continuously for a (FM21), /Lt1 (FM22)
Dehumidifier fan specified period of time • PF drive board (PFDB)
abnormality while the dehumidifier
(FM22) are ON.
several times.
(FM24) are ON.
several times.
C-0335 An error detection signal is • Fan /Rt3 (FM25), /Lt3
(FM26) are ON.
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0336 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fan /
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a Rr1 (FM12)
fan /Rr1 (FM12) is ON.
several times.
detected continuously for a Rr2 (FM16)
several times.
several times.
K-30

PF-704 (2nd C-0339 An error detection signal is • Paper feed assist fan /
tandem): Paper detected continuously for a Rr1 (FM12)
several times.
several times.
several times.
PF-704/705 (1st C-0405 An error detection signal of PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): 12V the 12V in PFDB (blowout
power of ICP) is detected.
abnormality in
the PF drive
board (PFDB)
PF-704 (2nd C-0406 An error detection signal of PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): 12V the 12V in PFDB (blowout
power of ICP) is detected.
abnormality in
the PF drive
board (PFDB)
PF-704/705 (1st C-0407 After turned ON, the • AC drive board (ACDB)
tandem): temperature sensor /5 • PF drive board (PFDB)
Dehumidification (TEMS/5) detects a heater • Upper tray fan heater
heater /1 (HTR4) abnormality signal. (HT-506)
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/6) detects a heater • Middle tray fan heater
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/7) detects a heater • Lower tray fan heater
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/5) detects that the • Upper tray fan heater
heater /1 (HTR4) heater temperature is 110 (HT-506)
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
K-31

Dehumidification (TEMS/6) detects that the • Middle tray fan heater
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
Dehumidification (TEMS/7) detects that the • Lower tray fan heater
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
PF-704/705 (1st C-0413 The temperature detected • AC drive board (ACDB)
tandem): by the temperature • PF drive board (PFDB)
Dehumidification sensor /5 (TEMS/5) has • Upper tray fan heater
heater /1 (HTR4) not risen to a prescribed (HT-506)
high level within a specified
temperature period of time.
abnormality
(software)
Dehumidification sensor /6 (TEMS/6) has • Middle tray fan heater
temperature rise level within a specified
abnormality period of time.
Dehumidification sensor /7 (TEMS/7) has • Lower tray fan heater
PF-704 (2nd C-0416 After turned ON, the • AC drive board (ACDB)
Dehumidification (TEMS/5) detects a heater • Upper tray fan heater
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/6) detects a heater • Middle tray fan heater
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/7) detects a heater • Lower tray fan heater
high
temperature
abnormality
(hardware)
Dehumidification (TEMS/5) detects that the • Upper tray fan heater
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
K-32

Dehumidification (TEMS/6) detects that the • Middle tray fan heater
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
Dehumidification (TEMS/7) detects that the • Lower tray fan heater
high °C or higher.
temperature
abnormality
(software)
PF-704/2 (2nd C-0422 The temperature detected • AC drive board (ACDB)
Dehumidification sensor /5 (TEMS/5) has • Upper tray fan heater
PF-704 (2nd C-0423 The temperature detected • AC drive board (ACDB)
Dehumidification sensor /6 (TEMS/6) has • Middle tray fan heater
PF-704 (2nd C-0424 The temperature detected • AC drive board (ACDB)
Dehumidification sensor /7 (TEMS/7) has • Lower tray fan heater
EF: 24V power C-0450 After turned ON, the 24V • EF control board (EFCB)
abnormality in power is not supplied for a • DC power supply
the PF drive specified period of time. (DCPS)
board (PFDB) • DC power relay /1 (RL1)
• Power plug of EF
• Circuit breaker (CBR) of
EF
FS: FS C-1005 Communication error. The main body • Printer control board
abnormality and the FS stop (PRCB)
immediately to • FNS control board
turn OFF the (FNSCB)
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1006 Communication error. The main body • Printer control board
abnormality and the FD stop (PRCB)
immediately to • FD control board
turn OFF the (FDCB)
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD C-1007 Communication error. The main body • Printer control board
abnormality and the SD stop (PRCB)
immediately to • SD control board
turn OFF the (SDCB)
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1009 Communication error The main body • PB control board
abnormality between Main CPU in the and the PB stop (PBCB)
PB control board (PBCB) immediately to • Control program
and Sub CPU1. turn OFF the
C-1010 Communication error main relay • PB control board
between Main CPU in the (RL1). (PBCB)
PB control board (PBCB) • Control program
and Sub CPU2.
PB control board C-1011 Paper feed error between • PB control board
(PBCB) the main body and PB. (PBCB)
• Control program
K-33

GP : GP C-1012 Communication The main body • Printer control board
abnormality abnormality. and the RU stop (PRCB)
immediately to • Punch Controller PCB
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU-508: RU-508 C-1013 Communication error. The main body • Printer control board
abnormality and the RU stop (PRCB)
immediately to • RU control board
turn OFF the (RUCB)
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506 C-1014 Communication The main body • Printer control board
abnormality abnormality. and the RU stop (PRCB)
immediately to • RU control board
turn OFF the (RUCB)
main relay
(RL1).
FS: FS-612 C-1101 The shift unit does not get The main body • FNS control board
abnormality (FS-612) to the shift position or the and the FS stop (FNSCB)
home position within a immediately to • Shift roller motor (M2)
specified period of time. turn OFF the • Shift roller home sensor
main relay (PS18)
FS: FS-521 C-1102 The tray up down motor (RL1). • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) (M3) does not turn OFF (FNSCB) tray and
even when a specified • FNS drive board stapling are
period of time elapses (FNSDB) not available
after it starts operations. • Main tray up down motor
Or, it operates for more (M3)
than the allowed time at a • Main tray upper limit
speed out of the specified sensor (PS2)
one. • Main tray lower limit
sensor (PS3)
FS: FS-612 C-1102 The main tray upper limit • FNS control board
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS2) does not turn (FNSCB)
ON within a specified • Main tray up down motor
period of time after the (M3)
main tray up down motor • Main tray upper limit
(M3) turns ON. sensor (PS2)
FS: FS-521 C-1103 The alignment home • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr (FNSCB) tray and
(PS31) do not turn ON • FNS drive board stapling are
within a specified period of (FNSDB) not available
time after the home • Alignment motor /Rr
position search operation (M5)
of the alignment motors / • Alignment motor /Fr
Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) (M22)
starts. • Alignment home
sensor /Rr (PS8)
• Alignment home
sensor /Fr (PS31)
FS: FS-612 C-1103 The alignment home • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor /Up (PS8) does not • Alignment motor /Up
turn ON or OFF within a (M5)
specified period of time • Alignment home
after the alignment motor / sensor /Up (PS8)
Up (M5) turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1104 The main tray paper exit • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) motor (M7) operates for (FNSCB) tray and
more than the allowed time • FNS drive board stapling are
at a speed out of the (FNSDB) not available
specified one. • Main tray exit motor
(M7)
FS: FS-612 C-1104 A prescribed speed is not • FNS control board
abnormality (FS-612) obtained within a specified (FNSCB)
period of time after the • Paper exit roller motor
paper exit roller motor (M7)
(M7) turns ON.
K-34

FS: FS-521 C-1105 The paper exit opening • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) unit does not get to the (FNSCB) tray and
specified opening position • Paper exit opening stapling are
within a specified period of motor (M8) not available
time after the paper exit • Paper exit home sensor
opening motor (M8) starts (PS12)
operations.
FS: FS-612 C-1105 The paper exit home • FNS control board
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS12) does not (FNSCB)
turn ON or OFF within a • Paper exit opening
specified period of time motor (M8)
after the paper exit • Paper exit home sensor
opening motor (M8) turns (PS12)
ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1106 The stapler movement • FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) home sensor (PS11) does (FNSCB) staple is
not turn ON within a • FNS drive board unavailable
specified period of time (FNSDB)
after the home position • Stapler movement motor
search operation of the (M11)
stapler movement motor • Stapler movement home
(M11) starts. sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-612 C-1106 The stapler movement • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) home sensor (PS11) does • Stapler movement motor
not turn ON within a (M11)
specified period of time • Stapler movement home
after the stapler movement sensor (PS11)
FS: FS-521 C-1107 The stapler rotation home • FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) sensor (PS14) does not (FNSCB) staple is
(skew rotation) turn ON within a specified • FNS drive board unavailable
period of time after the (FNSDB)
home position search • Stapler rotation motor
operation of the stapler (M4)
rotation motor (M4) starts. • Stapler rotation home
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612 C-1107 The clincher rotation home • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS14) does not • Clincher rotation motor
turn ON or OFF within a (M4)
specified period of time • Clincher rotation home
after the clincher rotation sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-521 C-1108 The stapler rotation home • FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) sensor (PS14) does not (FNSCB) staple is
(vertical rotation) turn ON within a specified • FNS drive board unavailable
period of time after the (FNSDB)
home position search • Stapler rotation motor
operation of the stapler (M4)
rotation motor (M4) starts. • Stapler rotation home
sensor (PS14)
FS: FS-612 C-1108 The stapler rotation home • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor (PS13) does not • Stapler rotation motor
turn ON within a specified (M6)
period of time after the • Stapler rotation home
stapler rotation motor (M6) sensor (PS13)
turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1109 After the stapler motor /Fr • FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) (M31) starts operations, it (FNSCB) staple is
does not complete • FNS drive board unavailable
operations within a (FNSDB)
specified period of time, • Stapler board (SB)
and the stapler home • Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not • Stapler home sensor /Fr
turn ON. (PS41)
FS: FS-612 C-1109 The stapler motor home • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor /Fr (PS31) does not • Stapler motor /Fr (M14)
turn ON within a specified • Stapler motor home
period of time after the sensor /Fr (PS31)
stapler motor /Fr (M14)
turns ON.
K-35

FS: FS-521 C-1110 After the stapler motor /Rr • FNS control board DIPSW6-3 The use of
abnormality (FS-521) (M30) starts operations, it (FNSCB) staple is
does not complete • FNS drive board unavailable
operations within a (FNSDB)
specified period of time, • Stapler board (SB)
and the stapler home • Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
sensor /Rr (PS40) does • Stapler home sensor /Rr
not turn ON. (PS40)
FS: FS-612 C-1110 The stapler motor home • Relay board (RB)
abnormality (FS-612) sensor /Rr (PS30) does • Stapler motor /Rr (M9)
not turn ON within a • Stapler motor home
specified period of time sensor /Rr (PS30)
after the stapler motor /Rr
(M9) turns ON.
C-1111 The clincher motor home • Relay board (RB)
(FS-612) sensor /Fr (PS33) does not • Clincher motor /Fr (M15)
turn ON within a specified • Clincher motor home
period of time after the sensor /Fr (PS33)
clincher motor /Fr (M15)
turns ON.
C-1112 The clincher motor home • Relay board (RB)
(FS-612) sensor /Rr (PS32) does • Clincher motor /Rr (M10)
not turn ON within a • Clincher motor home
specified period of time sensor /Rr (PS32)
after the clincher motor /Rr
(M10) turns ON.
FS: FS-521 C-1113 After the home position • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) search operation of the (FNSCB) tray and
rear stopper motor (M26) • FNS drive board stapling are
starts, the rear stopper (FNSDB) not available
home sensor (PS35) does • Rear stopper motor
not turn ON within a (M26)
specified period of time. • Rear stopper home
sensor (PS35)
FS: FS-612 C-1113 After the home position • Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
abnormality (FS-612) search operation of saddle • Saddle stitching stopper multi half
stitching stopper motor motor (M18) folding,
(M18) starts, the saddle • Saddle stitching stopper saddle
stitching stopper home home sensor (PS23) stitching and
sensor (PS23) does not multi tri-
turn ON within a specified folding
period of time. unavailable
C-1114 The alignment home • Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) sensor /Lw (PS24) does • Alignment motor /Lw multi half
not turn ON within a (M16) folding,
specified period of time • Alignment home saddle
after the alignment motor / sensor /Lw (PS24) stitching and
Lw (M16) turns ON. multi tri-
folding
unavailable
C-1115 The folding knife home • Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) sensor (PS22) does not • Folding knife motor multi half
turn ON within a specified (M19) folding,
period of time after the • Folding knife home saddle
folding knife motor (M19) sensor (PS22) stitching and
turns ON. multi tri-
folding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
C-1116 A prescribed speed is not • Relay board (RB) DIPSW18-5 The use of
(FS-612) obtained within a specified • Folding transfer motor multi half
period of time after the (M20) folding,
folding transfer motor saddle
(M20) turns ON. stitching and
multi tri-
folding
unavailable
(FS not
connected)
K-36

PI: PI C-1124 The tray upper limit • FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
abnormality sensor /Lw (PS209) or the (FNSCB) (PI not
tray lower limit sensor /Lw • PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
(PS210) does not turn ON • Tray lift up down motor /
within a specified period of Lw (M202)
time after the tray up down • Tray upper limit sensor /
motor /Lw (M202) turns Lw (PS209)
ON. • Tray lower limit sensor /
Lw (PS210)
C-1125 The tray upper limit • FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
sensor /Up (PS205) or the (FNSCB) (PI not
tray lower limit sensor /Up • PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
(PS204) does not turn ON • Tray up down motor /Up
within a specified period of (M201)
time after the tray up down • Tray upper limit sensor /
motor /Up (M201) turns Up (PS205)
ON. • Tray lower limit sensor /
Up (PS204)
C-1126 A prescribed speed is not • FNS control board DIPSW18-6 PI unusable
obtained within a specified (FNSCB) (PI not
period of time after the • PI drive board (PIDB) connected)
conveyance motor (M203) • Conveyance motor
turns ON. (M203)
PK: PK C-1127 The punch shift home • FNS control board DIPSW19-5 PK
abnormality sensor (PS303) does not (FNSCB) unusable
turn ON within a specified • Punch drive board (PK not
period of time after the (PDB) connected)
punch shift motor (M302) • Punch shift motor
turns ON. (M302)
• Punch shift home sensor
(PS303)
C-1132 The punch home sensor • FNS control board DIPSW19-5 PK
(PS301) does not turn ON (FNSCB) unusable
within a specified period of • Punch drive board (PK not
time after the punch motor (PDB) connected)
(M301) turns ON. • Punch motor (M301)
• Punch home sensor
(PS301)
FS: FS-612 C-1137 The gate home sensor • FNS control board
abnormality (FS-612) (PS16) does not turn ON (FNSCB)
within a specified period of • Gate motor (M12)
time after the gate motor • Gate home sensor
(M12) turns ON. (PS16)
FS: FS-521 C-1140 After the paper exit arm • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
abnormality (FS-521) motor /Fr (M23) starts (FNSCB) tray and
operations, it does not • FNS drive board stapling are
complete operations within (FNSDB) not available
a specified period of time, • Paper exit arm motor
and the paper exit arm (M23)
home sensor /Fr (PS9) • Paper exit arm home
does not turn ON. Or, it sensor (PS9)
operates for more than the
allowed time at a speed
out of the specified one.
C-1141 The stack assist home • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 The use of
(FS-521) sensor (PS32) does not (FNSCB) FS main
turn ON within a specified • FNS drive board tray and
period of time after the (FNSDB) staple can
home position search • Stack assist guide motor not be used.
operation of the stack (M24)
assist motor (M24) starts. • Stack assist home
sensor (PS32)
C-1142 The intermediate roller • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) home sensor (PS33) does (FNSCB) tray and
not turn ON even after a • FNS drive board stapling are
specified period of time (FNSDB) not available
after the intermediate roller • Alignment motor /Fr
open/close motor (M25) (M22)
starts the home position • Alignment motor /Rr
search operation. (M5)
• Intermediate roller
release solenoid (SD7)
K-37

C-1143 The conveyance motor • FNS control board DIPSW6-5 FS unusable
(FS-521) (M1) does not turn ON (FNSCB) (FS not
when the start button is • Conveyance motor (M1) connected)
turned ON. Or the • Paper exit sensor
conveyance motor (M1) (PS37)
does not shift the speed • FNS entrance sensor
for each processing. (PS4)
C-1144 The paper exit alignment • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) plate home sensor /Fr (FNSCB) tray and
(PS18) does not turn ON • FNS drive board stapling are
time after the paper exit • Paper exit alignment
alignment motor /Fr (M15) motor /Fr (M15)
starts the home position • Paper exit alignment
search operation. Or, even plate home sensor /Fr
after a specified period of (PS18)
time after M15 starts the
operation, it does not stop.
(FS-521) plate home sensor /Rr (FNSCB) tray and
time after the paper exit • Paper exit alignment
alignment motor /Rr (M14) motor /Rr (M14)
starts the home position • Paper exit alignment
search operation. Or, even plate home sensor /Rr
after a specified period of (PS19)
C-1146 The bypass roller release • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) home sensor (PS13) does (FNSCB) tray and
not turn ON within a • FNS drive board stapling are
specified period of time (FNSDB) not available
after the bypass roller • Bypass roller release
release motor (M12) starts motor (M12)
the home position search • Bypass roller release
operation. Or, even after a home sensor (PS13)
specified period of time
after M12 starts the
(FS-521) plate retraction home (FNSCB) tray and
sensor (PS24) does not • FNS drive board stapling are
turn ON within a specified (FNSDB) not available
period of time after the • Paper exit alignment
paper exit alignment plate plate retraction motor
retraction home motor (M18)
(M18) starts the home • Paper exit alignment
position search operation. plate retraction home
Or, even after a specified sensor (PS24)
period of time after M18
starts the operation, it
does not stop.
C-1148 The stacker entrance roller • FNS control board DIPSW6-4 FS main
(FS-521) release home sensor (FNSCB) tray and
time after the stacker • Stacker entrance roller
entrance roller release release motor (M16)
motor (M16) starts the • Stacker entrance roller
home position search release home sensor
operation. Or, even after a (PS23)
LS (1st tandem): C-1201 The stacker tray encoder The main body • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
LS abnormality sensor (PS2) does not turn and the LS stop motor (M1) tandem)
ON within a specified immediately to • LS control board (LSCB) unusable
period of time after the turn OFF the
stacker tray up down main relay
motor (M1) turns ON. Or, (RL1).
the initial operation or the
K-38

stacker tray down
operation is not completed
within a specified period of
time.
C-1202 The shift unit home sensor • Shift unit motor (M5) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
(PS11) does not turn ON • LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
within a specified period of unusable
time after the shift unit
motor (M5) turns ON. Or,
PS11 does not turn ON
time.
C-1203 The alignment plate home • Alignment motor (M7) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
sensor (PS12) does not • LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
turn ON within a specified unusable
period of time after the
alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time.
C-1204 The grip conveyance Grip conveyance motor DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
home sensor (PS5) does (M4) tandem)
not turn ON within a unusable
after the grip conveyance
C-1205 The stacker tray upper • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
limit switch (MS2) is ON motor (M1) tandem)
when the stacker tray up • Stacker tray upper limit unusable
down motor (M1) is in the switch (MS2)
up operation.
C-1206 The stacker tray lower limit • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
switch (MS3) is ON when motor (M1) tandem)
the stacker tray up down • Stacker tray lower limit unusable
motor (M1) is in the down switch (MS3)
operation.
LS (2nd C-1211 The stacker tray encoder • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
tandem): LS sensor (PS2) does not turn motor (M1) tandem)
abnormality ON within a specified • LS control board (LSCB) unusable
stacker tray up down
the initial operation or the
stacker tray down
operation is not completed
time.
C-1212 The shift unit home sensor • Shift unit motor (M5) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
(PS11) does not turn ON • LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
within a specified period of unusable
time after the shift unit
PS11 does not turn ON
time.
C-1213 The alignment plate home • Alignment motor (M7) DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
sensor (PS12) does not • LS control board (LSCB) tandem)
turn ON within a specified unusable
alignment motor (M7) turns
ON. Or, PS12 does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time.
C-1214 The grip conveyance Grip conveyance motor DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
home sensor (PS5) does (M4) tandem)
not turn ON within a unusable
after the grip conveyance
K-39

C-1215 The stacker tray upper • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
limit switch (MS2) is ON motor (M1) tandem)
when the stacker tray up • Stacker tray upper limit unusable
down motor (M1) is in the switch (MS2)
up operation.
C-1216 The stacker tray lower limit • Stacker tray up down DIPSW6-6 LS (1st
switch (MS3) is ON when motor (M1) tandem)
the stacker tray up down • Stacker tray lower limit unusable
motor (M1) is in the down switch (MS3)
operation.
FD: FD C-1221 The 1st folding cam home The main body • 1st folding release motor DIPSW6-0 The use of
abnormality sensor (PS55) does not and the FD stop (M14) the folding
turn ON within a specified immediately to • Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 1st turn OFF the (FDB) the punch
folding release motor main relay • 1st folding cam home section is
(M14) turns ON. (RL1). sensor (PS55) unavailable
C-1222 The 2nd folding cam home • 2nd folding release DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS56) does not motor (M15) the folding
turn ON within a specified • Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 2nd (FDB) the punch
folding release motor • 2nd folding cam home section is
(M15) turns ON. sensor (PS56) unavailable
C-1223 The 3rd folding cam home • 3rd folding release DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS57) does not motor (M16) the folding
turn ON within a specified • Folding drive board function and
period of time after the 3rd (FDB) the punch
folding release motor • 3rd folding cam home section is
(M16) turns ON. sensor (PS57) unavailable
C-1224 The 2 holes punch home • Punch motor (M10) DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS8) does not turn • Punch drive board the folding
OFF within a specified (PDB) function and
period of time after the 2- • 2 holes punch home the punch
holes punch home position sensor (PS8) section is
return operation starts. Or, unavailable
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 2
holes punch home sensor
(PS8) does not turn OFF.
C-1225 The 3 holes/4 holes punch • Punch motor (M10) DIPSW6-0 The use of
home sensor (PS9) does • Punch drive board the folding
not turn OFF within a (PDB) function and
specified period of time • 3 holes/4 holes home the punch
after the 3 holes/4 holes sensor (PS9) section is
punch home position unavailable
return operation starts. Or,
after the punch motor
(M10) turns ON, the 3
holes/4 holes punch home
sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF.
C-1226 The alignment plate home • Alignment motor (M12) DIPSW6-0 The use of
sensor (PS10) does not • Punch drive board the folding
turn ON within a specified (PDB) function and
period of time after the • Alignment plate home the punch
alignment plate home sensor (PS10) section is
position return operation unavailable
starts. Or, after the
alignment motor (M12)
turns ON, the alignment
plate home sensor (PS10)
does not turn OFF.
C-1227 The punch registration • Punch registration motor DIPSW6-0 The use of
home sensor (PS11) does (M13) the folding
not turn ON within a • Punch drive board function and
specified period of time (PDB) the punch
after the punch registration • Punch registration home section is
claw home position return sensor (PS11) unavailable
operation starts. Or, after
the punch registration
motor (M13) turns ON, the
punch registration home
sensor (PS11) does not
turn OFF.
K-40

C-1228 The main tray upper limit • Tray up down motor DIPSW6-1 Main tray
sensor (PS20) does not (M11) unusable
turn ON within a specified • Main tray upper limit
period of time after the sensor (PS20)
main tray home position • Punch drive board
search starts. Or, after the (PDB)
tray up down motor (M11)
turns ON, the main tray
upper limit sensor (PS20)
does not turn OFF.
C-1229 The main tray lower limit • Tray up down motor DIPSW6-1 Main tray
sensor (PS22) does not (M11) unusable
turn ON within a specified • Punch drive board
period of time after the tray (PDB)
up down motor (M11) is in • Main tray lower limit
the down operation. sensor (PS22)
C-1230 After the FD paper lift • Paper lift motor /Up (M8) DIPSW6-2 The use of
motor /Up (M8) is in the • PI drive board (PIDB) the PI
down operation, the PI lift • PI lift plate home section
plate home sensor /Up sensor /Up (PS34) unavailable
(PS34) does not turn ON • PI upper limit sensor /Up
within a specified period of (PS32)
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Up (M8) is in the up
operation, the PI tray
upper limit sensor /Up
(PS32) does not turn ON.
C-1231 After the FD paper lift • Paper lift motor /Lw (M9) DIPSW6-2 The use of
motor /Lw (M9) is in the • PI drive board (PIDB) the PI
down operation, the PI lift • PI lift plate home section
plate home sensor /Lw sensor /Lw (PS40) unavailable
(PS40) does not turn ON • PI upper limit sensor /Lw
within a specified period of (PS38)
time. Or, after the paper lift
motor /Lw (M9) is in the up
operation, the PI upper
limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
does not turn ON.
C-1232 An error detection signal is • Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
detected continuously for a • PI drive board (PIDB)
specified period of time • PI lift plate home
while the entrance sensor /Lw (PS40)
conveyance motor (M1) is • PI upper limit sensor /Lw
ON. (PS38)
C-1233 An error detection signal of • Intermediate
M3 is detected conveyance motor (M3)
continuously for a • Punch drive board
specified period of time (PDB)
while the intermediate
ON.
C-1234 An error detection signal of • PI conveyance motor DIPSW6-2 The use of
M7 is detected (M7) the PI
continuously for a • PI drive board (PIDB) section
specified period of time unavailable
while the PI conveyance
motor (M7) is ON.
C-1235 An error detection signal of • Main tray exit motor
M17 is detected (M17)
continuously for a • Punch drive board
specified period of time (PDB)
while the main tray exit
motor (M17) is ON.
SD: SD C-1241 The scraps press home The main body • Bundle exit motor (M5) DIPSW7-0 The use of
abnormality sensor (PS48) does not and the SD stop • Scraps press home the saddle
turn ON within a specified immediately to sensor (PS48) stitching,
period of time after the turn OFF the • SD control board multi center
bundle exit motor (M5) main relay (SDCB) folding and
starts the home position (RL1). • SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
search operation. unavailable
K-41

C-1242 The folding main scan • Folding main scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor / alignment motor /Fr (M7) the saddle
Fr1 (PS18) does not turn • Folding main scan stitching,
ON within a specified alignment home sensor / multi center
period of time after the Fr1 (PS18) folding, multi
folding main scan • SD control board tri-folding
alignment motor /Fr (M7) (SDCB) and trimmer
starts the home position • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
search operation. Or, even
after a specified period of
C-1243 The folding exit home • Folding sub scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS24) does not alignment exit motor the saddle
turn ON within a specified (M8) stitching,
period of time after the • Folding exit home multi center
folding sub scan alignment sensor (PS24) folding, multi
exit motor (M8) starts the • SD control board tri-folding
home position search (SDCB) and trimmer
operation. Or, even after a • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
after M8 starts to
decelerate, it does not
stop.
C-1244 The saddle stitching • Saddle stitching DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Rt alignment motor /Rt the saddle
(PS28) does not turn ON (M9) stitching,
within a specified period of • Saddle stitching multi center
time after the saddle alignment home sensor / folding and
stitching alignment motor / Rt (PS28) trimmer
Rt (M9) starts the home • SD control board unavailable
position search operation. (SDCB)
Or, even after a specified • SD drive board (SDDB)
does not stop.
C-1245 The bundle arm home • Bundle arm motor (M10) DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS32) does not • Bundle arm home the saddle
turn ON within a specified sensor (PS32) stitching,
period of time after the • SD control board multi center
bundle arm motor (M10) (SDCB) folding and
starts the home position • SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
search operation. Or, even unavailable
C-1246 The bundle clip upper limit • Bundle clip motor (M11) DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS33) does not • Bundle clip upper limit the saddle
turn ON within a specified sensor (PS33) stitching,
period of time after the • Bundle clip lower limit multi center
bundle clip motor (M11) sensor (PS30) folding and
starts the home position • SD control board trimmer
search operation. Or, even (SDCB) unavailable
after a specified period of • SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1247 The bundle registration • Bundle registration DIPSW7-0 The use of
home sensor (PS34) does motor (M12) the saddle
not turn ON within a • Bundle registration stitching,
specified period of time home sensor (PS34) multi center
after the bundle • SD control board folding and
registration motor (M12) (SDCB) trimmer
K-42

C-1248 The overlap home sensor • Overlap motor (M13) DIPSW7-0 The use of
(PS17) does not turn ON • Overlap home sensor the saddle
within a specified period of (PS17) stitching,
time after the overlap • SD control board multi center
motor (M13) starts the (SDCB) folding, multi
home position search • SD drive board (SDDB) tri-folding
operation. Or, even after a and trimmer
C-1249 The folding main scan • Folding main scan DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Rr alignment motor /Rr the saddle
within a specified period of • Folding main scan multi center
time after the folding main alignment home sensor / folding, multi
scan alignment motor /Rr Rr (PS19) tri-folding
(M14) starts the home • SD control board and trimmer
position search operation. (SDCB) unavailable
does not stop.
C-1250 The stapler movement • Stapler movement motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
home sensor (PS25) does (M15) the saddle
not turn ON within a • Stapler movement home stitching,
specified period of time sensor (PS25) multi center
after the home position • SD control board folding and
search operation of the (SDCB) trimmer
stapler movement motor • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
(M15) starts. Or, even after
a specified period of time
C-1251 The saddle stitching • Saddle stitching DIPSW7-0 The use of
alignment home sensor /Lt alignment motor /Lt the saddle
within a specified period of • Saddle stitching multi center
time after the saddle alignment home sensor / folding and
stitching alignment motor / Lt (PS29) trimmer
Lt (M16) starts the home • SD control board unavailable
position search operation. (SDCB)
does not stop.
C-1252 The bundle press • Bundle press movement DIPSW7-0 The use of
movement home sensor motor (M17) the saddle
(PS36) does not turn ON • Bundle press movement stitching,
within a specified period of home sensor (PS36) multi center
time after the bundle press • SD control board folding and
movement motor (M17) (SDCB) trimmer
C-1253 The 1st folding blade • 1st folding blade motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a • 1st folding blade home stitching,
specified period of time sensor /1 (PS20), /2 multi center
after the 1st folding blade (PS21) folding, multi
motor (M18) starts the • SD control board tri-folding
home position search (SDCB) and trimmer
operation. Or 1st folding • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
blade home sensor /1
(PS20) does not turned
ON within a specified
starts the operation.
K-43

C-1254 The 2nd folding blade • 2nd folding blade motor DIPSW7-2 The use of
home sensor /2 (PS23) (M19) the multi tri-
does not turn ON within a • 2nd folding blade home folding
specified period of time sensor /1 (PS22), /2 unavailable
after the 2nd folding blade (PS23)
motor (M19) starts the • SD control board
home position search (SDCB)
operation. Or the 2nd • SD drive board (SDDB)
folding blade home
sensor /1 (PS22) does not
turned ON within a
operation.
C-1255 The clincher up down • Clincher up down motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON even after a • Clincher up down home stitching,
specified period of time sensor (PS26) multi center
after the clincher up down • SD control board folding and
motor (M20) starts the (SDCB) trimmer
home position search. Or, • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
even after a specified
does not stop.
C-1256 The saddle stitching press • Saddle stitching press DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a • Saddle stitching press stitching,
after the saddle stitching • SD control board folding and
press motor (M21) starts (SDCB) trimmer
the home position search • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
operation. Or, even after a
C-1257 The bundle arm rotation • Bundle arm rotation DIPSW7-0 The use of
not turn ON within a • Bundle arm rotation stitching,
after the bundle arm • SD control board folding and
rotation motor (M22) starts (SDCB) trimmer
the home position search • SD drive board (SDDB) unavailable
operation. Or, even after a
C-1258 The bundle press home • Bundle press motor DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS37) does not (M23) the saddle
turn ON within a specified • Bundle press home stitching,
period of time after the sensor (PS37) multi center
bundle press motor (M23) • Bundle press lower limit folding and
starts the home position sensor (PS47) trimmer
search operation. Or, even • SD control board unavailable
after a specified period of (SDCB)
time after M23 starts the • SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1259 The bundle press home • Bundle press stage up DIPSW7-0 The use of
sensor (PS35) does not down motor (M24) the saddle
turn ON within a specified • Bundle press stage up stitching,
period of time after the down home sensor multi center
bundle press stage up (PS35) folding and
down motor (M24) starts • Bundle press stage up trimmer
the home position search down limit sensor unavailable
operation. Or PS35 or the (PS45)
bundle press stage up • SD control board
down upper limit sensor (SDCB)
(PS45) does not turned • SD drive board (SDDB)
ON after a specified period
of time M24 starts the
operation.
K-44

C-1260 The guide shaft home • Guide shaft motor (M25) DIPSW7-0, The use of
sensor (PS46) does not • Guide shaft home DIPSW7-1, the saddle
turn ON even after a sensor (PS46) DIPSW7-3 stitching,
specified period of time • SD control board multi center
after the guide shaft motor (SDCB) folding and
(M25) starts the home • SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
position search operation. unavailable
Or, even after a specified
does not stop.
C-1261 The stapler home sensor / • Stapler assembly /Rt DIPSW7-0, The use of
Rt (HS1) or the clincher • SD control board DIPSW7-3 the saddle
start sensor /Rt (HS2) (SDCB) stitching and
does not turn ON even • SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
after a specified period of unavailable
time after the stapler
motor /Rt (M29) starts the
operation.
C-1262 The stapler home sensor / • Stapler assembly /Lt DIPSW7-0, The use of
Lt (HS3) or the clincher • SD control board DIPSW7-3 the saddle
start sensor /Lt (HS4) does (SDCB) stitching and
not turn ON even after a • SD drive board (SDDB) trimmer
after the stapler motor /Lt
(M30) starts the operation.
C-1263 It does not stop even after • Trimmer blade motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
a specified period of time (M31) the trimmer
after the trimmer blade • Trimmer blade home unavailable
motor (M31) starts the sensor (PS50)
operation. • Trimmer blade upper
limit sensor (PS51)
• SD control board
(SDCB)
• SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1264 It does not stop even after • Trimmer press motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
a specified period of time (M32) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
after the trimmer press • Trimmer press home DIPSW7-3 stitching,
motor (M32) starts the sensor (PS53) multi center
operation. • Trimmer press upper folding and
limit sensor (PS52) trimmer
• SD control board unavailable
(SDCB)
C-1265 It does not stop even after • Bundle arm assist motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
a specified period of time (M26) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
after the bundle arm assist • Bundle arm assist home DIPSW7-3 stitching,
motor (M26) starts the sensor (PS38) multi center
operation. • Bundle arm assist upper folding and
limit sensor (PS39) trimmer
• SD control board unavailable
(SDCB)
C-1266 Rotation abnormality is • Entrance conveyance
detected for a specified motor (M1)
period of time in • SD control board
succession while the (SDCB)
entrance conveyance • SD drive board (SDDB)
motor (M1) is driving.
C-1267 Rotation abnormality is • Horizontal conveyance DIPSW7-4 Sub tray,
detected for a specified motor (M2) paper exit to
period of time in • SD control board subsequent
succession while the (SDCB) stage and
horizontal conveyance • SD drive board (SDDB) FS
motor (M2) is driving. unavailable
C-1268 Rotation abnormality is • Folding entrance motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified (M3) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in • SD control board DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 multi center
folding entrance motor • SD drive board (SDDB) folding, multi
(M3) is driving. tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
K-45

C-1269 Rotation abnormality is • Folding transfer motor DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified (M4) DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in • SD control board DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 multi center
folding transfer motor (M4) • SD drive board (SDDB) folding, multi
is driving. tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1270 Rotation abnormality is • Bundle exit motor (M5) DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified • SD control board DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in (SDCB) DIPSW7-3 stitching,
succession while the • SD drive board (SDDB) multi center
bundle exit motor (M5) is folding and
driving. trimmer
unavailable
C-1271 Rotation abnormality is • Folding sub scan DIPSW7-0, The use of
detected for a specified alignment exit motor DIPSW7-1, the saddle
period of time in (M8) DIPSW7-2, stitching,
succession while the • SD control board DIPSW7-3 multi center
folding sub scan alignment (SDCB) folding, multi
exit motor (M8) is driving. • SD drive board (SDDB) tri-folding
and trimmer
unavailable
C-1272 Rotation abnormality is • Trimmer paddle motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
detected for a specified (M33) the trimmer
period of time in • SD control board unavailable
succession while the (SDCB)
trimmer paddle motor • SD drive board (SDDB)
(M33) is driving.
C-1273 The trimmer completion • Trimmer blade motor DIPSW7-3 The use of
sensor (PS62) does not (M31) the trimmer
turn ON even after a • Trimmer completion unavailable
specified period of time sensor (PS62)
after the trimmer blade • SD control board
motor (M31) is in the up (SDCB)
operation. • SD drive board (SDDB)
C-1275 The wire slack sensor • Wire slack prevention
(PS66) detected the slack sensor (PS66)
of the trimmer edge drive • SD control board
wire. (SDCB)
RU : RU-506 C-1281 FD alignment motor (M3) Main body and • RU control board
abnormality drive abnormality. The FD RU stop (RUCB)
alignment home sensor immediately and • FD alignment motor
(PS3) does not turn ON main relay (RY1) (M3)
even after a specified is turned OFF. • FD alignment home
period of time after M3 sensor (PS3)
starts the home position
C-1282 CD alignment motor (M4) • RU control board
drive abnormality. The CD (RUCB)
alignment home sensor • CD alignment motor
(PS4) does not turn ON (M4)
even after a specified • CD alignment home
period of time after M4 sensor (PS4)
starts the home position
RU-508: RU-508 C-1290 Rotation abnormality is The main body • De-curler conveyance
abnormality detected for a specified and the RU stop motor (M3)
period of time in immediately to • RU control board
succession while the de- turn OFF the (RUCB)
curler conveyance motor main relay
(M3) is driving. (RL1).
K-46

C-1291 The operation does not • De-curler pressure
finish within a specified motor /Lw (M5)
period of time after the • RU control board
home position search of (RUCB)
the de-curler pressure
motor /Lw (M5) starts.
C-1292 The operation does not • De-curler pressure
finish within a specified motor /Up (M6)
period of time after the • RU control board
home position search of (RUCB)
the de-curler pressure
motor /Up (M6) starts.
C-1293 Rotation abnormality is • Humidification section
detected for a specified conveyance motor (M8)
period of time in • RU drive board (RUDB)
succession while the • RU control board
humidification section (RUCB)
driving.
C-1294 The operation does not • Humidification section
finish within a specified roller pressure motor /Rt
period of time after the (M9)
home position search of • RU drive board (RUDB)
the humidification section • RU control board
roller pressure motor /Rt (RUCB)
(M9) starts.
C-1295 The operation does not • Humidification roller
finish within a specified pressure motor /Lt (M10)
period of time after the • RU drive board (RUDB)
home position search of • RU control board
the humidification section (RUCB)
roller pressure motor /Lt
(M10) starts.
C-1296 Color density sensor • Color density sensor unit DIPSW13-3 Color
detection preparation • Color density control density
adjustment value board (CDCB) sensor
abnormality • RU control board cannot be
(RUCB) used.
C-1297 Color density sensor • Color density sensor unit DIPSW13-3 Color
detection start abnormality • Color density control density
board (CDCB) sensor
• RU control board unusable
(RUCB)
C-1298 EEPROM read out • Color density control DIPSW13-3 Color
abnormality in the color board (CDCB) density
density relay board • RU control board sensor
(CDRLB) (RUCB) cannot be
used.
C-1299 The water tank full sensor • Drain path DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
(PS13) detects ON • Water tank full sensor on unusable
continuously for more than (PS13)
a specified period of time. • RU deive board (RUDB)
LS (1st tandem): C-1301 An error detection signal is The main body • Paper cooling fan
LS abnormality detected continuously for a and the LS stop motor /Fr (FM1)
specified period of time immediately to • LS control board (LSCB)
while the paper cooling fan turn OFF the
motor /Fr (FM1) is ON. main relay
C-1302 An error detection signal is (RL1). • Paper cooling fan
detected continuously for a motor /1 (FM2)
specified period of time • LS control board (LSCB)
while the paper cooling fan
motor /Fr (FM2) is ON.
C-1303 An error detection signal is • Paper cooling fan
detected continuously for a motor /Mi (FM3)
motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
K-47

C-1304 An error detection signal of • Motor cooling fan motor
FM4 is detected (FM4)
continuously for a • LS control board (LSCB)
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.
C-1305 An error detection signal of • Paper cooling fan
FM5 is detected motor /Rr (FM5)
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
LS (2nd C-1306 An error detection signal is • Paper cooling fan
tandem): LS detected continuously for a motor /Fr (FM1)
abnormality specified period of time • LS control board (LSCB)
motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
detected continuously for a motor /1 (FM2)
motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
detected continuously for a motor /Mi (FM3)
motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
C-1309 An error detection signal of • Motor cooling fan motor
FM4 is detected • LS control board (LSCB)
continuously for a
while the motor cooling fan
motor (FM4) is ON.
C-1310 An error detection signal of • Paper cooling fan
FM5 is detected motor /Rr (FM5)
motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
SD: SD C-1311 A rotation error detection The main body • Scraps removal fan DIPSW7-3 The use of
abnormality signal is detected and the SD stop motor (FM1) the trimmer
continuously for specified immediately to • SD control board unavailable
period of time while the turn OFF the (SDCB)
scraps removal fan motor main relay • SD drive board (SDDB)
(FM1) is started or driving. (RL1).
PB: PB C-1330 A rotation error detection The main body • PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
abnormality signal is detected and the PB stop (PBCB) from the PB
continuously for specified immediately to • PB drive board (PBCB) is
time period while the cover turn OFF the • Cover paper tray fan /1 unavailable.
paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is main relay (FM71)
started or driving. (RL1).
C-1331 A rotation error detection • PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
signal is detected (PBCB) from the PB
continuously for specified • PB drive board (PBCB) is
time period while the cover • Cover paper tray fan /2 unavailable.
paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is (FM72)
started or driving.
C-1332 A rotation error detection • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected (PBCB) onto the sub
continuously for a • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified time period while • Exhaust fan /1 (FM80) possible.
the exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
is started or driving.
C-1333 A rotation error detection • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected • PB control board onto the sub
continuously for a (PBCB) tray is
specified time period while • PB drive board (PBDB) possible.
the exhaust fan /2 (FM81) • Exhaust fan /2 (FM81)
is started or driving.
K-48

C-1334 A rotation error detection • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
signal is detected • PB control board onto the sub
continuously for specified (PBCB) tray is
period of time while the • PB drive board (PBDB) possible.
pellet supply cooling fan • Pellet supply cooling fan
(FM4) is started or driving. (FM4)
RU : RU-506 C-1341 Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) The main body • RU control board
abnormality rotation abnormality. and the RU stop (RUCB)
Rotation abnormality immediately to • Stack assist fan /Fr
detected continuously for turn OFF the (FM1)
the specified time during main relay
FM1 operation. (RL1).
C-1342 Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2) • RU control board
rotation abnormality. (RUCB)
Rotation abnormality • Stack assist fan /Rr
detected continuously for (FM2)
the specified time during
FM2 operation.
RU-508: RU-508 C-1351 An error detection signal is The main body • Entrance paper fan /1
abnormality detected continuously for a and the RU stop (FM1)
specified period of time immediately to • Entrance paper fan /2
while the entrance paper turn OFF the (FM2)
fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) main relay • Entrance paper fan /3
and /3 (FM3) are ON. (RL1). (FM3)
• RU control board
(RUCB)
C-1352 An error detection signal is • Ventilation assist fan /1
specified period of time • Ventilation assist fan /2
while the ventilation assist (FM5)
fans /1 (FM4) and /2 (FM5) • RU control board
are ON. (RUCB)
C-1353 An error detection signal is • Entrance paper fan /4
specified period of time • Entrance paper fan /5
while the entrance paper (FM16)
fans /4 (FM15), /5 (FM16) • Entrance paper fan /6
and /6 (FM17) are ON. (FM17)
(RUCB)
C-1354 An error detection signal is • Entrance paper fan /7
specified period of time • Entrance paper fan /8
while the entrance paper (FM19)
fans /7 (FM18), /8 (FM19) • Entrance paper fan /9
(RUCB)
C-1355 An error detection signal is • Ventilation assist fan /3
specified period of time • Conveyance paper fan
while the ventilation assist (FM22)
fan /3 (FM21) and the • RU control board
conveyance paper fan (RUCB)
(FM22) are ON.
C-1356 An error detection signal is • Humidification section DIPSW13-2 Humidificati
detected continuously for a paper fan /1 (FM6) on unusable
specified period of time • RU drive board (RUDB)
while the humidification • RU control board
section paper fan /1 (FM6) (RUCB)
is ON.
is ON.
K-49

is ON.
is ON.
section paper fan /5 (RUCB)
(FM10) is ON.
section paper fan /6 (RUCB)
(FM11) is ON.
C-1364 An error detection signal is • Power supply fan
specified period of time • DC power supply
while the power supply fan (DCPS)
(FM14) is ON.
FS: FS C-1402 Non-volatile memory The main body • FS control board (LSCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the FS stop • FNS control board
immediately to (FNSCB)
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1403 Non-volatile memory The main body FD control board (FDCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD C-1404 Non-volatile memory The main body SD control board (SDCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1406 Non-volatile memory The main body • PB control board
abnormality abnormality in the PB and the PB stop (PBCB)
control board (PBCB) immediately to • Control program
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU-508: RU-508 C-1407 Non-volatile memory The main body RU control board (RUCB)
abnormality abnormality. and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506 C-1408 Non-volatile memory error. The main body RU control board (RUCB)
abnormality and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD C-1411 5V power abnormality in The main body SD drive board (SDDB)
abnormality the SD drive board and the SD stop
(SDDB) immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
K-50

FS: FS-612 C-1431 Communication error in FS The main body Software bug
abnormality (FS-612) and the FS stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
FD: FD C-1432 Communication error in FD The main body Software bug
abnormality and the FD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD C-1433 Communication error in The main body Software bug
abnormality SD and the SD stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1435 Message queue full or the The main body • PB control board
abnormality control abnormality of Sub and the PB stop (PBCB)
CPU1 in the PB control immediately to • Control program
board (PBCB) turn OFF the
C-1436 Message queue full or the main relay • PB control board
control abnormality of Sub (RL1). (PBCB)
CPU2 in the PB control • Control program
board (PBCB)
C-1437 Message queue of the Control program
communication among
tasks in the PB is full.
RU-508: RU-508 C-1438 Communication error in The main body Software bug
abnormality RU and the RU stop
immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506 C-1439 RU received operation The main body Software bug
abnormality start from the main body and the RU stop
when unready. immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU-508: RU-508 C-1440 RU SubCPU The main body • RU control board DIPSW13-3 Color
abnormality communication error (Main and the RU stop (RUCB) density
side) immediately to • RU program sensor
turn OFF the cannot be
main relay used
C-1441 RU SubCPU (RL1). • RU control board DIPSW13-3 Color
communication error (Sub (RUCB) density
side) • RU program sensor
cannot be
used
FD: FD C-1451 When the FD is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the FD stop
received from the main immediately to
body. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
SD: SD C-1452 When the SD is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the SD stop
body. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1454 PB operation prohibition The main body Control program
abnormality abnormality. and the PB stop
PB received operation immediately to
start signal from the main turn OFF the
body when the PB is main relay
unready. (RL1).
RU-508: RU-508 C-1455 When RU is unready, a The main body Software bug
abnormality signal to start operations is and the RU stop
K-51

body. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
RU : RU-506 C-1456 RU received operation The main body Software bug
abnormality start signal from the main and the RU stop
body when the RU is immediately to
unready. turn OFF the
main relay
(RL1).
PB: PB C-1501 The entrance conveyance The main body • PB control board DIPSW7-7 The use of
abnormality has not been completed and the PB stop (PBCB) the PB is
within a specified period of immediately to • PB drive board (PBDB) unavailable
time after the entrance turn OFF the • Entrance conveyance
conveyance motor (M1) main relay motor (M1)
turns ON. (RL1).
signal is detected for a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time in • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
succession while the • Intermediate possible.
intermediate conveyance conveyance motor (M2)
motor (M2) is driving.
C-1504 The SC entrance • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
conveyance has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
completed within a • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified period of time • SC entrance possible.
after the SC entrance conveyance motor
conveyance motor (M11) (M11)
turns ON.
C-1505 The switchback • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time • SC switchback possible.
after the SC switchback conveyance motor
conveyance motor (M12) (M12)
turns ON.
C-1506 The switchback roller • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
release operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
been completed within a • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
specified period of time • SC switchback release possible.
after the SC switchback motor (M13)
conveyance motor (M13)
turns ON.
C-1507 The SC alignment has not • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
been completed within a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
after SC alignment motor • SC alignment motor possible.
(M15) turns ON. (M15)
C-1508 The SC paper bundle • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time • SC bundle conveyance possible.
after the SC paper bundle motor (M17)
conveyance motor (M17)
turns ON.
C-1509 The SC roller release • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
completed within a • PB drive board (PBCB) tray is
specified period of time • SC roller release motor possible.
after the SC roller release (M18)
C-1510 The SC entrance • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
movement operation has (PBCB) onto the sub
not been completed within • PB drive board (PBCB) tray is
a specified period of time • Clamp entrance possible.
after the clamp entrance movement motor (M19)
movement motor (M19)
turns ON.
K-52

C-1511 The SC entrance roller • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
release operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Clamp entrance roller possible.
after the SC entrance roller release motor (M20)
release motor (M20) turns
ON.
C-1512 The SC alignment has not • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
after SC alignment motor • Clamp alignment motor possible.
(M21) turns ON. (M21)
C-1513 The clamp section open/ • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
close operation has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Clamp motor (M22) possible.
after the clamp motor
(M22) turns ON.
C-1514 The clamp rotation • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time • Clamp rotation motor possible.
after the clamp rotation (M23)
C-1515 The glue tank movement • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
specified period of time • Glue tank movement possible.
after the glue tank motor (M31)
turns ON.
signal is detected for a (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time in • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
succession while the glue • Glue apply roller motor possible.
apply roller motor (M32) is (M32)
driving.
C-1517 The count of a specified • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
number of pellets, which is (PBCB) onto the sub
counted by the pellet • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
supply passage sensor • Pellet supply pipe motor possible.
(PS37), has not been (M33)
reached after the pellet
supply pipe motor (M33)
turns ON.
C-1518 The operation of the pellet • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
supply arm has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Pellet supply arm motor possible.
after the pellet supply arm (M34)
C-1519 The alignment in the cover • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
paper table up/down (PBCB) onto the sub
section has not been • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
completed within a • Cover paper alignment possible.
after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41)
turns ON.
C-1520 The booklet exit has not • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
after the booklet exit motor • Booklet exit motor (M42) possible.
(M42) turns ON.
C-1521 The driven arm /Rt swing • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Cover paper possible.
after the cover paper conveyance arm motor /
conveyance arm motor /Rt Rt (M43)
(M43) turns ON
K-53

C-1522 The driven arm /Lt swing • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
after the cover paper conveyance arm motor /
conveyance arm motor /Lt Lt (M44)
(M44) turns ON
C-1523 The cover paper • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
conveyance start has not (PBCB) onto the sub
after cover paper feed conveyance motor
motor (M45) turns ON. (M45)
C-1524 The cover paper table up • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
or down movement has (PBCB) onto the sub
not been completed within • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
a specified period of time • Cover paper table up possible.
after the cover paper table down motor /Fr (M46)
up down motor /Fr (M46)
turns ON.
C-1525 The cover paper table up • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
or down movement has (PBCB) onto the sub
not been completed within • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
a specified period of time • Cover paper table up possible.
after the cover paper table down motor /Rr (M47)
up down motor /Rr (M47)
turns ON.
C-1526 The movement of the • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
cover paper folding plate / (PBCB) onto the sub
Rt has not been completed • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
within a specified period of • Cover paper folding possible.
time after the cover paper motor /Rt (M48)
folding motor /Rt (M48)
turns ON.
C-1527 The movement of the • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
cover paper folding plate / (PBCB) onto the sub
Lt has not been completed • PB drive board (PBDB) tray is
within a specified period of • Cover paper folding possible.
time after the cover paper motor /Lt (M49)
folding motor /Lt (M49)
turns ON.
C-1528 The trimming of the cover • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
paper has not been (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Cutter motor (M50) possible.
after the cutter motor
(M50) turns ON.
C-1530 The booklet movement of • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
the booklet conveyance (PBCB) onto the sub
completed within a • Booklet conveyance belt possible.
after the book movement
belt motor (M61) turns ON.
C-1531 The size changing • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation of the carriage (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time movement motor (M62)
after the booklet
conveyance belt
turns ON.
C-1532 The up/down movement • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
operation of the carriage (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time up down motor (M63)
after the booklet
conveyance belt up down
K-54

C-1534 The booklet rear edge • PB control board DIPSW7-6 Ejecting
pressing process has not (PBCB) onto the sub
specified period of time • Book stopper motor possible.
after the booklet stopper (M65)
C-1537 The tray moving up • PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
process has not been (PBCB) from the PB
completed within a • PB drive board (PBDB) is
specified period of time • Cover paper tray lift unavailable.
after the cover paper tray motor (M73)
lift motor (M73) turns ON.
C-1538 The cover paper feed has • PB control board DIPSW7-5 Paper feed
not been completed within (PBCB) from the PB
a specified period of time • PB drive board (PBDB) is
after the cover paper feed • Cover paper feed motor unavailable.
motor (M74) turns ON. (M74)
C-1540 After the warm-up is • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
started, temperature • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detected by the glue tank • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature sensor /Md (H2)
(TH3) has not risen to a • PB control board
prescribed level within a (PBCB)
specified time period. • PB drive board (PBDB)
• Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
• Glue tank temperature
sensor /Md (TH3)
detected by the glue tank • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature sensor /Lw (H2)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
detected by the glue apply • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
roller temperature sensor (H2)
(M32)
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1543 After the pellet supply, • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature detected by • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
the glue tank temperature • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
sensor /Up (TH2) has not (H2)
risen to a prescribed level • PB control board
within a specified period of (PBCB)
time. • PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
C-1544 During standby, after the • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
glue tank heater (H1) is • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
turned ON, temperature • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
detected by the glue tank (H2)
temperature sensor /Md • PB control board
(TH3) has not risen to a (PBCB)
prescribed level within a • PB drive board (PBDB)
specified time period. • Glue apply roller motor
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
K-55

C-1545 When the prescribed • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is obtained • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
and after the glue tank • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
heater (H1) is turned ON, (H2)
temperature detected by • PB control board
the glue tank temperature (PBCB)
sensor /Lw (TH4) has not • PB drive board (PBDB)
risen to a prescribed level • Glue apply roller motor
within a specified time (M32)
period. • Glue tank temperature
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1546 When the prescribed • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is obtained • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
and after the glue tank • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
heater (H1) is turned ON, (H2)
temperature detected by • PB control board
the glue apply roller (PBCB)
temperature sensor (TH1) • PB drive board (PBDB)
has not risen to a • Glue apply roller motor
prescribed level within a (M32)
specified time period. • Glue apply roller
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1547 The glue apply roller • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal high • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature. (H2)
• PB control board
(PBCB)
• PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1548 The glue tank temperature • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
sensor /Up (TH2) detects • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
an abnormal high • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature. (H2)
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
sensor /Md (TH3) detects • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature. (H2)
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
sensor /Lw (TH4) detects • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature. (H2)
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
K-56

C-1551 The glue apply roller • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal high • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware) (H2)
TH1 detects an abnormal • PB control board
high temperature of the (PBCB)
glue apply roller. • PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
temperature sensor
(TH1)
sensor /Up (TH2) detects • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature (hardware). (H2)
glue tank. • PB drive board (PBDB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1555 After warming-up is • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
completed, the glue apply • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
roller temperature sensor • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(TH1) detects an abnormal (H2)
low temperature. • PB control board
(PBCB)
(M32)
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1556 When glue supply control • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature is reached, • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
the glue tank temperature • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
sensor /Up (TH2) detects (H2)
an abnormal low • PB control board
temperature. (PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
K-57

completed, the glue tank • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature sensor /Md • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
completed, the glue tank • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
temperature sensor /Lw • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
(PBCB)
(M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
C-1559 The glue apply roller The main body • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
temperature sensor (TH1) stops • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
detects an abnormal low immediately to • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware). turn OFF the (H2)
After warming-up is main relay • PB control board
completed, TH1 detects (RL1). (PBCB)
the glue apply roller error • PB drive board (PBDB)
signal of abnormal low • Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
temperature sensor
(TH1)
C-1560 The glue tank temperature The main body • AC drive board (ACDB) DIPSW7-7 The use of
sensor /Up (TH2) detects and the PB stop • Glue tank heater (H1) the PB is
an abnormal low immediately to • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
temperature (hardware). turn OFF the (H2)
After glue supply control main relay • PB control board
temperature is reached, (RL1). (PBCB)
TH2 detects the glue tank • PB drive board (PBDB)
error signal of abnormal • Glue apply roller motor
low temperature. (M32)
sensor /Up (TH2)
an abnormal low • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
After warming-up is • PB control board
completed, TH3 detects (PBCB)
the glue tank error signal • PB drive board (PBDB)
of abnormal low • Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
sensor /Md (TH3)
an abnormal low • Glue apply roller heater unavailable
After warming-up is • PB control board
completed, TH4 detects (PBCB)
the glue tank error signal • PB drive board (PBDB)
of abnormal low • Glue apply roller motor
temperature. (M32)
sensor /Lw (TH4)
K-58

C-1565 Relay conveyance motor The main body • Relay conveyance motor
drive abnormality and the PB stop (M92)
immediately to • PB control board
turn OFF the (PBCB)
main relay • PB drive board (PBCB)
(RL1).
The relay
conveyance
does not start
within the
specified period
of time after M92
turns ON.
C-1566 Relay conveyance exit The main body • Relay conveyance paper
motor drive abnormality and the PB stop exit motor (M91)
A rotation error detection immediately to • PB control board
signal is detected for a turn OFF the (PBCB)
specified period of time in main relay • PB drive board (PBCB)
succession while the relay (RL1).
conveyance exit motor
(M91) is driving.
C-1567 Pellet supply pipe motor • Pellet supply pipe motor
drive abnormality (M33)
The pellet supply pipe has • PB control board
not completed the (PBCB)
operations within a • PB drive board (PBCB)
after the pellet supply pipe
Main body: C-2001 Communication error with The main body Printer control board
Communication the DSP on the printer stops (PRCB)
error control board (PRCB) immediately to
A sufficient space cannot turn OFF the
be obtained for a specified main relay
period of time in the (RL1).
circular buffer to send to
the DSP on the printer
control board (PRCB).
C-2002 Communication error with Printer control board
the DSP on the printer (PRCB)
control board (PRCB)
An error signal of
communication error in the
DSP on the printer control
board (PRCB) is detected.
Main body: C-2201 An error detection signal of • Developing motor /Y
Developing M5 is detected (M5)
motor continuously for a • Printer control board
while the developing • DC power supply /2
motor /Y (M5) is ON. (DCPS/2)
C-2202 An error detection signal of • Developing motor /M
M6 is detected (M6)
continuously for a • Printer control board
motor /M (M6) is ON. (DCPS/2)
C-2203 An error detection signal of • Developing motor /C
M7 is detected (M7)
motor /C (M7) is ON. (DCPS/2)
C-2204 An error detection signal of • Developing motor /K
M8 is detected (M8)
motor /K (M8) is ON. (DCPS/2)
K-59

Main body: C-2211 An error detection signal of • Drum motor /Y (M1)
Drum motor M1 is detected • Printer control board
abnormality continuously for a (PRCB)
specified period of time • Encoder sensor /Y1
while the drum motor /Y (PS73), /Y2 (PS74)
(M1) is ON. • DC power supply /2
(DCPS/2)
C-2212 An error detection signal of • Drum motor /M (M2)
M2 is detected • Printer control board
continuously for a (PRCB)
specified period of time • Encoder sensor /M1
while the drum motor /M (PS75), /M2 (PS76)
(DCPS/2)
C-2213 An error detection signal of • Drum motor /C (M3)
specified period of time • Encoder sensor /C1
while the drum motor /C (PS77), /C2 (PS78)
(DCPS/2)
C-2214 An error detection signal of • Drum motor /K (M4)
specified period of time • Encoder sensor /K1
while the drum motor /K (PS79), /K2 (PS80)
(DCPS/2)
Main body: C-2220 An error detection signal of • Intermediate transfer
Intermediate M9 is detected belt motor (M9)
transfer belt continuously for a • Printer control board
abnormality while the intermediate • Intermediate transfer
transfer belt motor (M9) is belt encoder /1 (M81), /2
ON. (M82)
(DCPS/4)
Main body: 1st C-2221 While the 1st transfer • Printer control board
transfer pressure release home (PRCB)
pressure release sensor (PS44) is ON, • 1st transfer pressure
abnormality PS44 does not turn OFF release motor (M11)
time after the 1st transfer
pressure release motor
(M11) turns ON.
Main body: C-2222 An error detection signal of • Waste toner collection
Waste toner M35 is detected motor (M35)
collection motor continuously for a • Printer control board
while the waste toner • DC power supply /2
collection motor (M35) is (DCPS/2)
ON.
Main body: 2nd C-2223 An error detection signal is • 2nd transfer belt motor
transfer belt detected continuously for a (M40)
motor specified period of time • Conveyance drive board
abnormality while the 2nd transfer belt (CDB)
(DCPS/3)
Main body: 2nd C-2224 The 2nd transfer steering • 2nd transfer steering
transfer steering home sensor (PS49) does motor (M46)
motor not turn ON within a • 2nd transfer steering
abnormality specified period of time home sensor (PS49)
after the initial operation of • Conveyance drive board
the 2nd transfer steering (CDB)
motor (M46) starts. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
Main body: 2nd C-2225 The 2nd transfer belt • 2nd transfer belt
transfer belt abnormal sensor (PS50) abnormal sensor (PS50)
edge sensor detects an error detection • Conveyance drive board
abnormality signal. (CDB)
• Printer control board
(PRCB)
K-60

Main body: C-2226 An error detection signal of • Toner bottle motor
Toner bottle M20 is detected (M20)
motor continuously for a • Printer control board
while the toner bottle • DC power supply /2
motor (M20) is ON. (DCPS/2)
Main body: toner C-2227 An error detection signal of • Toner skew conveyance
skew M15 is detected motor (M15)
conveyance continuously for a • Printer control board
abnormality while the toner skew • Toner drive board (TDB)
conveyance motor (M15) • DC power supply /2
is ON. (DCPS/2)
Main body: C-2228 An error detection signal of • Toner hopper agitated
Toner hopper M14 is detected motor (M14)
agitated motor continuously for a • Printer control board
while the toner hopper • Toner drive board (TDB)
agitated motor (M14) is • DC power supply /2
ON. (DCPS/2)
Main body: C-2229 An error detection signal of Toner drive board (TDB)
Toner supply the toner supply motor /Y
motor /Y (M16), / (M16), /M (M17) drive
M (M17) drive circuit abnormality is
circuit detected.
abnormality
Main body: C-2230 An error detection signal of Toner drive board (TDB)
Toner supply the toner supply motor /C
motor /C (M18), / (M18), /K (M19) drive
K (M19) drive circuit abnormality is
circuit detected.
abnormality
Main body: Filter C-2231 An error detection signal of • Filter cleaning motor
cleaning motor M13 is detected (M13)
abnormality continuously for a • Printer control board
while the filter cleaning • DC power supply /2
motor (M13) is ON. (DCPS/2)
Main body: 1st C-2232 An error detection signal of • 1st transfer pressure
transfer the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11)
pressure release release motor (M11) drive • Printer control board
motor drive circuit abnormality is (PRCB)
circuit detected.
abnormality
Main body: C-2233 An error detection signal of • Cleaning motor (M10)
Cleaning motor M10 is detected • Printer control board
abnormality continuously for a (PRCB)
specified period of time • DC power supply /2
while the cleaning motor (DCPS/2)
(M10) is ON.
Main body: C-2234 The intermediate transfer • Intermediate transfer
Intermediate steering home sensor steering motor (M33)
transfer steering (PS46) does not turn ON • Intermediate transfer
motor (M33) within a specified period of steering home sensor
abnormality time after the initial (PS46)
operation of the • Printer control board
intermediate transfer (PRCB)
steering motor (M33)
starts.
Main body: C-2235 The intermediate transfer • Intermediate transfer
Intermediate steering edge sensor steering edge sensor
transfer steering (PS68) detect an error (PS68)
edge sensor detection signal. • Printer control board
abnormality (PRCB)
Main body: C-2302 An error detection signal of • Motor cooling fan /1
Motor cooling FM3 or FM4 is detected (FM3)
fan abnormality continuously for a • Motor cooling fan /2
while the motor cooling • Printer control board
fans /1 (FM3) and /2 (FM2) (PRCB)
are ON.
K-61

Main body: C-2303 An error detection signal of • Intermediate transfer
Intermediate FM19, FM20 or FM21 is cleaning cooling fan /1
transfer cleaning detected continuously for a (FM19)
cooling fan specified period of time • Intermediate transfer
abnormality while the intermediate cleaning cooling fan /2
transfer cleaning cooling (FM20)
fans /1 (FM19), /2 • Intermediate transfer
(FM20), /3 (FM21) are ON. cleaning cooling fan /3
(FM21)
(PRCB)
Main body: C-2304 An error detection signal of • Toner suction fan /1
Toner suction FM17 is detected (FM17)
fan abnormality continuously for a • Printer control board
while the toner suction
fan /1 (FM17) is ON.
C-2305 An error detection signal of • Toner suction fan /2
FM6 is detected (FM6)
while the toner suction
fan /2 (FM6) is ON.
Main body: C-2306 An error detection signal of • Developing charge fan /
Developing FM7 is detected 1 (FM7)
charge fan /1 continuously for a • Toner drive board (TDB)
abnormality specified period of time
while the developing
charge fan /1 (FM7) is ON.
C-2307 An error detection signal of • Developing charge fan /
FM8 is detected 2 (FM8)
continuously for a • Toner drive board (TDB)
charge fan /4 (FM10) is
ON.
Main body: C-2401 The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y) • Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
Erase lamp set status cannot be • Printer control board
abnormality detected. (PRCB)
C-2402 The erase lamp /M (EL/M) • Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
set status cannot be • Printer control board
detected. (PRCB)
C-2403 The erase lamp /C (EL/C) • Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
detected. (PRCB)
C-2404 The erase lamp /K (EL/K) • Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
detected. (PRCB)
Main body: TCR C-2411 The input value of the TCR • TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /
sensor sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) is low Y)
abnormality while the TCR sensor • Printer control board
control voltage is at (PRCB)
maximum value. (There
may be connector
disconnection or sensor
abnormality.)
K-62

C-2412 The input value of the TCR • TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
sensor /M (TCRS/M) is low M)
while the TCR sensor • Printer control board
may be connector
abnormality.)
C-2413 The input value of the TCR • TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
sensor /C (TCRS/C) is low C)
may be connector
abnormality.)
C-2414 The input value of the TCR • TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
sensor /K (TCRS/K) is low K)
may be connector
abnormality.)
Main body: TCR C-2431 While in the initial • TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /
sensor initial adjustment of the TCR Y)
adjustment sensor /Y (TCRS /Y), • Printer control board
abnormality (low TCRS/Y detects a value (PRCB)
density) higher than the prescribed
one with the minimum
control voltage.
C-2432 While in the initial • TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR M)
sensor /M (TCRS /M), • Printer control board
TCRS/M detects a value (PRCB)
higher than the prescribed
control voltage.
C-2433 While in the initial • TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR C)
sensor /C (TCRS /C), • Printer control board
TCRS/C detects a value (PRCB)
control voltage.
C-2434 While in the initial • TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR K)
sensor /K (TCRS /K), • Printer control board
TCRS/K detects a value (PRCB)
control voltage.
Main body: TCR C-2441 While in the initial • TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /
sensor initial adjustment of the TCR Y)
adjustment sensor /Y (TCRS /Y), • Printer control board
abnormality TCRS/Y detects a value (PRCB)
(high density) lower than the prescribed
one with the maximum
control voltage.
C-2442 While in the initial • TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR M)
sensor /M (TCRS /M), • Printer control board
TCRS/M detects a value (PRCB)
lower than the prescribed
control voltage.
K-63

C-2443 While in the initial • TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR C)
sensor /C (TCRS /C), • Printer control board
TCRS/C detects a value (PRCB)
control voltage.
C-2444 While in the initial • TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
adjustment of the TCR K)
sensor /K (TCRS /K), • Printer control board
TCRS/K detects a value (PRCB)
control voltage.
Main body: C-2451 When the developing • Developing motor /Y
Toner low motor /Y (M5) is ON, the (M5)
density maximum detection value • TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /
abnormality of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/ Y)
Y) is more than the • Printer control board
specified value and the (PRCB)
difference between the
maximum detection value
and the minimum detection
value is less than the
specified value.
C-2452 When the developing • Developing motor /M
motor /M (M6) is ON, the (M6)
maximum detection value • TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/ M)
M) is more than the • Printer control board
specified value.
C-2453 When the developing • Developing motor /C
motor /C (M7) is ON, the (M7)
maximum detection value • TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/ C)
C) is more than the • Printer control board
specified value.
C-2454 When the developing • Developing motor /K
motor /K (M8) is ON, the (M8)
maximum detection value • TCR sensor /K (TCRS /
of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/ K)
K) is more than the • Printer control board
specified value.
Main body: C-2461 Charging corona /Y is not • Drum potential sensor /Y
Charging corona connected. (DPS/Y)
connection Otherwise, drum potential • Drum potential sensor
abnormality, sensor /Y (DPS/Y) board /Y (DPSB/Y)
drum potential detection value does not • Printer control board
abnormality reach the specified value. (PRCB)
• Charging corona
C-2462 Charging corona /M is not • Drum potential sensor /
connected. M (DPS/M)
Otherwise, drum potential • Drum potential sensor
sensor /M (DPS/M) board /M (DPSB/M)
detection value does not • Printer control board
reach the specified value. (PRCB)
• Charging corona
K-64

C-2463 Charging corona /C is not • Drum potential sensor /
connected. C (DPS/C)
sensor /C (DPS/C) board /C (DPSB/C)
• Charging corona
C-2464 Charging corona /K is not • Drum potential sensor /K
connected. (DPS/K)
sensor /K (DPS/K) board /K (DPSB/K)
• Charging corona
Main body: C-2470 Connector of the process Printer control board
Process unit mount is not connected. (PRCB)
mount
connection
abnormality
Main body: TCR C-2471 The result of TCR sensor / • TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /
sensor initial Y (TCRS/Y) initial Y)
adjustment adjustment has not • Printer control board
abnormality reached the minimum (PRCB)
(adjustment value of the adjustment
trouble) range.
C-2472 The result of TCR sensor / • TCR sensor /M (TCRS /
M (TCRS/M) initial M)
adjustment has not • Printer control board
reached the minimum (PRCB)
value of the adjustment
range.
C-2473 The result of TCR sensor / • TCR sensor /C (TCRS /
C (TCRS/C) initial C)
adjustment has not • Printer control board
reached the minimum (PRCB)
value of the adjustment
range.
C-2474 The result of TCR sensor / • TCR sensor /K (TCRS/
K (TCRS/K) initial K) (Wiring diagram:
adjustment has not Main body (4/5): 15-G)
reached the minimum • Printer control board
value of the adjustment (PRCB)
range.
Main body: C-2701 An error detection signal of • Charging corona /Y
Charging corona the charging corona /Y is • High voltage unit /1-1
(Y) abnormality detected continuously for a (HV/1-1) (Wiring
specified period of time diagram: Main body
while the charging corona / (4/5): 10-N)
Y is ON. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
Main body: C-2702 An error detection signal of • Charging corona /M
Charging corona the charging corona /M is • High voltage unit /1-1
(M) abnormality detected continuously for a (HV/1-1)
while the charging corona / (PRCB)
M is ON.
Main body: C-2703 An error detection signal of • Charger /C
Charging corona the charging corona /C is • High voltage unit /1-2
(C) abnormality detected continuously for a (HV/1-2)
C is ON.
Main body: C-2704 An error detection signal of • Charging corona /K
Charging corona the charging corona /K is • High voltage unit /1-2
(K) abnormality detected continuously for a (HV/1-2)
K is ON.
Main body: 1st C-2711 An error detection signal of • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
transfer (Y) the 1st transfer /Y is 2)
abnormality detected continuously for a • Printer control board
specified period of time. (PRCB)
K-65

transfer (M) the 1st transfer /M is 2)
transfer (C) the 1st transfer /C is 2)
transfer (K) the 1st transfer /K is 2)
Main body: 2nd C-2720 An error detection signal of • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
transfer the 2nd transfer is 2)
Main body: C-2721 An error detection signal of • High voltage unit /4 (HV/
Separation the separation charger is 4)
while the separation
charger is ON.
Main body: Post C-2731 An error detection signal of • High voltage unit /3 (HV/
1st transfer the separation charger is 3)
neutralizing detected continuously for a • Printer control board
while the post 1st transfer
neutralizing /Y is ON.
C-2732 An error detection signal of • High voltage unit /3 (HV/
the separation charger is 3)
neutralizing /M is ON.
neutralizing /C is ON.
neutralizing /K is ON.
Main body: C-2740 The difference between • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
ATVC feedback the maximum detection 2)
voltage value and the minimum • Printer control board
abnormality detection value of the Y, (PRCB)
M, C or K roller feedback
voltage is over the
specified value.
ATVC sampling the maximum detection 2)
abnormality (Y) detection value of any of 8 (PRCB)
sampling voltages is over
the specified value.
abnormality (M) detection value of any of 8 (PRCB)
abnormality (C) detection value of any of 8 (PRCB)
K-66

abnormality (K) detection value of any of 8 (PRCB)
Main body: C-2751 The ATVC feedback Error code is not • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
ATVC feedback voltage detection range /Y displayed on the 2)
voltage is not within the specified operation panel, • Printer control board
detection range range. but displayed (PRCB)
abnormality C-2752 The ATVC feedback only on the data • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
voltage detection range /M collection, the 2)
is not within the specified list output and • Printer control board
range. CSRC. (PRCB)
C-2753 The ATVC feedback • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
voltage detection range /C 2)
is not within the specified • Printer control board
range. (PRCB)
C-2754 The ATVC feedback • High voltage unit /2 (HV/
voltage detection range /K 2)
is not within the specified • Printer control board
range. (PRCB)
Main body: C-2801 Dmax correction /Y has The main body • High voltage unit /1-1
Dmax correction terminated abnormally. stops (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
abnormality (patch detection immediately to • Printer control board
abnormality 1) turn OFF the (PRCB)
main relay • IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/
(RL1). 1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
• Developing unit
C-2802 Dmax correction /M has • High voltage unit /1-1
terminated abnormally. (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
(patch detection • Printer control board
abnormality 1) (PRCB)
• IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
• Color registration shutter
solenoid /1 (SD8), /2
(SD9)
• Developing unit
C-2803 Dmax correction /C has • High voltage unit /1-1
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
• Developing unit
C-2804 Dmax correction /K has • High voltage unit /1-1
(PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
• Developing unit
Main body: C-2811 The drum surface • Printer control board
Surface potential potential /Y is out of the (PRCB)
abnormality specified range while in • Drum potential sensor /Y
the charging potential (DPS/Y)
control. • Drum potential sensor
board /Y (DPSB/Y)
C-2812 The drum surface • Printer control board
potential /M is out of the (PRCB)
specified range while in • Drum potential sensor /
the charging potential M (DPS/M)
board /M (DPSB/M)
K-67

potential /C is out of the (PRCB)
specified range while in • Drum potential sensor /
the charging potential C (DPS/C)
board /C (DPSB/C)
potential /K is out of the (PRCB)
specified range while in • Drum potential sensor /K
the charging potential (DPS/K)
board /K (DPSB/K)
Main body: C-2821 Charging potential Vh /Y • Printer control board
Potential has terminated (PRCB)
correction Vh abnormally. • Drum potential sensor /Y
abnormality (DPS/Y)
• Drum potential sensor
board /Y (DPSB/Y)
• Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y)
C-2822 Charging potential Vh /M • Printer control board
has terminated (PRCB)
abnormally. • Drum potential sensor /
M (DPS/M)
board /M (DPSB/M)
• Erase lamp /M (EL/M)
C-2823 Charging potential Vh /C • Printer control board
abnormally. • Drum potential sensor /
C (DPS/C)
board /C (DPSB/C)
• Erase lamp /C (EL/C)
C-2824 Charging potential Vh /K • Printer control board
abnormally. • Drum potential sensor /K
(DPS/K)
board /K (DPSB/K)
• Erase lamp /K (EL/K)
Main body: MPC C-2831 MPC correction /Y has • Writing unit /Y
correction terminated abnormally. • Printer image
abnormality processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2832 MPC correction /M has • Writing unit /M
terminated abnormally. • Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2833 MPC correction /C has • Writing unit /C
processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2834 MPC correction /K has • Writing unit /K
processing board
(PRIPB)
• IDC sensor /Rr (IDCS/2)
Main body: C-2840 When the Dmax load value • Printer image
Dmax base line is not within the processing board
correction permissible range even the (PRIPB)
abnormality Dmax control voltage is • High voltage unit /1-1
changed several times, it (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
is detected as the Dmax • IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/
base line correction error. 1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
Main body: C-2841 • Printer control board
(PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
K-68

Main body: C-2851 Dmax correction /Y has • High voltage unit /1-1
Dmax correction terminated abnormally. (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
abnormality (patch detection • Printer control board
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
C-2852 Dmax correction /M has • High voltage unit /1-1
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
C-2853 Dmax correction /C has • High voltage unit /1-1
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
C-2861 Dmax correction /Y has • Printer control board
terminated abnormally. (PRCB)
(patch detection • IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/
abnormality 3) 1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
C-2862 Dmax correction /M has • Printer control board
(SD9)
C-2863 Dmax correction /C has • Printer control board
(SD9)
C-2871 Dmax correction /Y has • Printer control board
It has not terminated even • Developing unit
when repeated several
times.
C-2872 Dmax correction /M has • Printer control board
times.
C-2873 Dmax correction /C has • Printer control board
times.
K-69

Main body: C-2881 Paper interval Dmax • High voltage unit /1-1
Paper interval correction /Y has (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
Dmax correction terminated abnormally. • Printer control board
abnormality (PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
C-2882 Paper interval Dmax • High voltage unit /1-1
correction /M has (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
terminated abnormally. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
correction /C has (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
(PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
correction /K has (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
(PRCB)
1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
(SD9)
Main body: C-2891 Paper interval MPC • Writing unit /Y
Paper interval correction /Y has • Printer image
MPC correction terminated abnormally. processing board
abnormality (PRIPB)
C-2892 Paper interval MPC • Writing unit /M
correction /M has • Printer image
terminated abnormally. processing board
(PRIPB)
C-2893 Paper interval MPC • Writing unit /C
correction /C has • Printer image
(PRIPB)
C-2894 Paper interval MPC • Writing unit /K
correction /K has • Printer image
(PRIPB)
Main body: C-3101 An error detection signal of • Printer control board
Fusing motor M48 is detected (PRCB)
abnormality continuously for a • Fusing motor (M48)
specified period of time • DC power supply /3
while the fusing motor (DCPS/3)
(M48) is ON.
Main body: C-3102 The press or release • Conveyance drive board
Fusing belt /Lw operation of the fusing (CDB)
pressure release belt /Lw pressure release • Fusing belt /Lw pressure
motor motor (M49) does not release motor (M49)
completes within 10 • Fusing belt /Lw pressure
seconds. release home sensor /1
(PS58)
• Fusing belt /Lw pressure
release home sensor /2
(PS59)
(DCPS/2)
K-70

Main body: 2nd C-3103 The 2nd transfer pressure • Conveyance drive board
transfer release motor (M41) does (CDB)
pressure release not complete the pressure • 2nd transfer pressure
motor release or release release motor (M41)
abnormality operation within a • 2nd transfer home
specified period of time sensor (PS53)
after it turns ON. • DC power supply /2
(DCPS/2)
Main body: C-3104 An error detection signal is • Conveyance drive board
Fusing belt /Lw detected while the fusing (CDB)
edge abnormal belt /Lw edge abnormal • Fusing belt /Lw edge
sensor sensor (PS67) is ON. abnormal sensor (PS67)
abnormality • Fusing belt /Lw
• Fusing swing shaft assy
Main body: C-3105 The pressure or the • Conveyance drive board
Fusing external release does not finish (CDB)
heating belt within a specified period of • Fusing external heating
pressure release time after the fusing belt pressure release
motor external heating belt motor (M53)
abnormality pressure release motor • Fusing external heating
(M53) turns ON. belt pressure release
home sensor (PS57)
(DCPS/2)
Main body: C-3106 The fusing unit is not set. Printer control board
Fusing unit set (PRCB)
abnormality
Main body: C-3107 The pressure or the • Conveyance drive board
Fusing release does not finish (CDB)
refreshing roller within a specified period of • Fusing refreshing roller
pressure release time after the fusing pressure release motor
motor refreshing roller pressure (M55)
abnormality release motor (M55) turns • Fusing refreshing roller
ON. pressure release home
sensor (PS56)
(DCPS/2)
Main body: C-3108 An error detection signal of • Conveyance drive board
Fusing belt /Lw M50 is detected (CDB)
release time continuously for a • Fusing belt /Lw release
motor specified period of time time motor (M50)
abnormality while the fusing belt /Lw • DC power supply /4
release time motor (M50) (DCPS/4)
is ON.
Fusing refresh M51 is detected (CDB)
roller motor continuously for a • Fusing refresh roller
abnormality specified period of time motor (M51)
while the fusing refresh • DC power supply /4
roller motor (M51) is ON. (DCPS/4)
Main body: C-3110 The steering initial • Conveyance drive board
Fusing belt /Lw operation of the fusing (CDB)
steering initial belt /Lw does not finish • DC power supply /2
operation within a specified period of (DCPS/2)
abnormality time. • Fusing belt /Lw steering
motor (M54)
Main body: C-3111 An error detection signal is • Conveyance drive board
Fusing web detected while the fusing (CDB)
motor drive web motor (M52) drive • DC power supply /2
circuit power circuit power is ON. (DCPS/2)
abnormality • Fusing web motor (M52)
EF: Fusing C-3150 The operation of the fusing • EF control board (EFCB)
pressure motor pressure motor (M6) does • Fusing pressure motor
abnormality not complete within a (M6)
specified period of time • Fusing pressure release
while applying or releasing sensor /1 (PS16)
pressure on the EF fusing • Fusing pressure release
belt unit /Lw. sensor /2 (PS17)
K-71

EF: Fusing C-3151 An error detection signal is • EF control board (EFCB)
motor detected continuously for a • Fusing motor (M5)
abnormality specified period of time
while the fusing motor
(M5) is ON.
EF: Fusing C-3152 An error detection signal is • EF control board (EFCB)
pressure motor detected continuously for a • Fusing pressure motor
abnormality specified period of time (M6)
while the fusing pressure
motor (M6) is ON.
EF: Fusing C-3153 The mount is not set. Overall control board
mount set (OACB)
abnormality
EF: Fusing C-3154 The EF fusing swing home • EF control board (EFCB)
swing home sensor (PS5) does not turn • Fusing swing motor (M4)
sensor operation OFF within a specified • Fusing swing home
non-completion period of time after it turns sensor (PS5)
ON.
Fusing belt FM44 is detected (CDB)
cooling fan continuously for a • Fusing belt cooling fan /
(center) specified period of time Md (FM44)
abnormality while the fusing belt
cooling fan /Md (FM44) is
ON.
several times.
Fusing belt eitherFM43 or FM45 is (CDB)
cooling fan detected continuously for a • Fusing belt cooling fan /
(edge) specified period of time Fr (FM43)
abnormality while the fusing belt • Fusing belt cooling fan /
cooling fans /Fr (FM43) Rr (FM45)
and /Rr (FM45) are ON.
several times.
Main body: C-3304 An error detection signal of • Printer control board
fusing thermal either FM22 or FM23 is (PRCB)
insulation fan detected continuously for a • Fusing thermal
abnormality specified period of time insulation fan /Fr (FM22)
while the fusing thermal • Fusing thermal
insulation fans /Fr (FM22) insulation fan /Rr (FM23)
and /Rr (FM23) are ON.
several times.
Main body: Dew C-3305 An error detection signal of • Printer control board
condensation FM18 is detected (PRCB)
prevention fan continuously for a • Dew condensation
specified period of time prevention fan (FM18)
while the dew
condensation prevention
fan (FM18) is ON.
several times.
K-72

Main body: Pre- C-3306 An error detection signal of • Conveyance drive board
fusing suction any of FM40, FM41 or (CDB)
fan abnormality FM42 is detected • Pre-fusing suction fan /
continuously for a Fr (FM40)
specified period of time • Pre-fusing suction fan /
while the pre-fusing Md (FM41)
suction fans /Fr (FM40), / • Pre-fusing suction fan /
Md (FM41) and /Rr (FM42) Rr (FM42)
are ON.
several times.
EF: Entrance C-3311 An error detection signal of • EF control board (EFCB)
cooling fan any of FM3, FM4 or FM5 is • Entrance cooling fan /Fr
abnormality detected continuously for a (FM3)
specified period of time • Entrance cooling fan /
while the entrance cooling Md (FM4)
fans /Fr (FM3), /Md (FM4) • Entrance cooling fan /Rr
and /Rr (FM5) are ON. (FM5)
several times.
EF: Paper exit C-3312 An error detection signal of • EF control board (EFCB)
cooling fan /Up any of FM6, FM7 or FM8 is • Paper exit cooling fan /
abnormality detected continuously for a Up1 (FM6)
specified period of time • Paper exit cooling fan /
while the paper exit Up2 (FM7)
cooling fan /Up1 (FM6), / • Paper exit cooling fan /
Up2 (FM7) and /Up3 Up3 (FM8)
(FM8) are ON.
several times.
EF: Paper exit C-3313 An error detection signal of • EF control board (EFCB)
cooling fan /Lw any of FM9, FM10 or • Paper exit cooling fan /
abnormality FM11 is detected Lw1 (FM9)
continuously for a • Paper exit cooling fan /
specified period of time Lw2 (FM10)
while the EF paper exit • Paper exit cooling fan /
cooling fans /Lw1 (FM9), / Lw3 (FM11)
Lw2 (FM10) and /Lw3
(FM11) are ON.
several times.
EF: Main body C-3314 An error detection signal of • EF control board (EFCB)
ventilation fan FM1 or FM2 is detected • Ventilation fan /Rt
abnormality while the EF ventilation (FM11)
fans /Rt (FM1) and /Lt • Ventilation fan /Lt (FM2)
(FM2) are ON.
several times.
EF: Fusing C-3315 An error detection signal of • EF control board (EFCB)
cooling fan FM21 is detected • Fusing cooling fan
abnormality continuously for a (FM21)
while the EF fusing cooling
fan (FM21) is ON.
several times.
K-73

Main body: C-3501 Fusing high temperature • Printer control board
Fusing high abnormality (PRCB)
temperature The fusing temperature • Fusing temperature
abnormality sensor /1 (TH1) detects sensor /1 (TH1)
235 °C or higher value • AC drive board /1
continuously for a (ACDB/1)
specified period of time. • AC drive board /2
(ACDB/2)
C-3502 Fusing compensation high • Printer control board
temperature abnormality (PRCB)
The fusing temperature • Fusing temperature
sensor /1 (TH1) detects sensor /1 (TH1)
(ACDB/2)
C-3503 Fusing high temperature • Printer control board
abnormality (PRCB)
(ACDB/2)
(ACDB/2)
C-3505 Contact sensor high • Printer control board
(ACDB/2)
abnormality (PRCB)
(ACDB/2)
(ACDB/2)
(ACDB/2)
abnormality (PRCB)
(ACDB/2)
K-74

C-3510 Fusing external heating Be sure to • Printer control board
center compensation high change the (PRCB)
temperature abnormality software • Fusing temperature
The fusing temperature DIPSW3-1 from sensor /4 (TH4)
sensor /4 (TH4) detects 1 to 0 and turn • AC drive board /1
143 °C or higher value OFF/ON the sub (ACDB/1)
continuously for a power switch • AC drive board /2
specified period of time. (SW2) of the (ACDB/2)
C-3511 Fusing high temperature main body after • Printer control board
abnormality fixing the (PRCB)
The fusing temperature defective parts. • Fusing temperature
(ACDB/2)
C-3512 Fusing compensation high The main body • Printer control board
temperature abnormality stops (PRCB)
The fusing temperature immediately to • Fusing temperature
sensor /5 (TH5) detects turn OFF the sensor /5 (TH5)
143 °C or higher value main relay • AC drive board /1
continuously for a (RL1). (ACDB/1)
(ACDB/2)
(ACDB/2)
Main body: C-3520 Paper is wound around the • Conveyance drive board
Fusing roller fusing roller. (CDB)
paper winding J-3102 occurs a specified • Fusing paper exit sensor
abnormality number of times in (PS61)
succession.
EF: Fusing C-3550 EF high temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
temperature abnormality • AC drive board (ACDB)
sensor /1 high The fusing temperature • Fusing temperature
temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects sensor /1 (TH1)
abnormality 235 °C or higher value
continuously for a
continuously for a
continuously for a
continuously for a
sensor /1 The fusing temperature • Fusing temperature
(compensation) sensor /1 (TH1) detects sensor /1 (TH1)
high 143 °C or higher value
temperature continuously for a
abnormality specified period of time.
K-75

sensor /4 The fusing temperature • Fusing temperature
(compensation) sensor /4 (TH4) detects sensor /4 (TH4)
high 143 °C or higher value
temperature continuously for a
EF: Fusing C-3560 EF high temperature • AC drive board (ACDB)
temperature abnormality • EF control board (EFCB)
sensors/1 (TH1) While in standby, the • Fusing temperature
and /3 (TH3) fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
high sensor /3 (TH3) detects 25 • Fusing temperature
temperature °C or higher value than the sensor /3 (TH3)
abnormality fusing temperature
sensor /1 (TH1)
continuously for a
EF: Fusing C-3561 EF high temperature • AC drive board (ACDB)
temperature abnormality • EF control board (EFCB)
sensors /4 (TH4) While in standby, the • Fusing temperature
and /6 (TH6) fusing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
high sensor /6 (TH6) detects 25 • Fusing temperature
temperature °C or higher value than the sensor /6 (TH6)
abnormality fusing temperature
sensor /4 (TH4)
continuously for a
EF: Fusing belt C-3570 Paper is wound around the • EF control board (EFCB)
paper winding fusing belt. • Fusing exit sensor
abnormality J-3121 occurs a specified (PS15)
number of times in
succession.
Main body: C-3801 Fusing low temperature • Printer control board
Fusing abnormality. (PRCB)
temperature The fusing temperature • AC drive board /1
sensor /1 low sensor /1 (TH1) detects a (ACDB/1)
temperature temperature 50 °C or more • AC drive board /2
abnormality lower than the prescribed (ACDB/2)
value continuously for a • Fusing heater/1
specified period of time. • Fusing temperature
sensor /1 (TH1)
• Main relay (RL1)
• Thermostat /1 (TS1)
fusing abnormality. (PRCB)
sensor /2 (TH2)
sensor /3 (TH3)
K-76

sensor /4 (TH4)
sensor /5 (TH5)
EF: Fusing C-3850 EF low temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
sensor /1 low When the fusing power • 2nd Fusing Lamp(Top)
temperature feed is available, the • Fusing temperature
abnormality fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
sensor /1 (TH1) detects a • Main relay (RL2)
temperature 50 °C or more • Thermostat /1 (TS1)
lower than the prescribed • Thermostat /2 (TS2)
value.
EF: Fusing C-3852 Fusing low temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
temperature abnormality. • AC drive board (ACDB)
sensor /3 low The fusing temperature • 2nd Fusing Lamp(Top)
temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detects a • Fusing temperature
abnormality temperature 50 °C or more sensor /3 (TH3)
value continuously for a • Thermostat /2 (TS2)
EF: Unmounted C-3854 Internal data error -
part malfunction Malfunction code of the
code unmounted part is
detected.
EF: Fusing C-3850 EF low temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
abnormality temperature lower than the sensor /1 (TH1)
prescribed value • Main relay (RL2)
continuously for a • Thermostat /1 (TS1)
specified period of time. • Thermostat /2 (TS2)
K-77

prescribed value • Thermostat /1 (TS1)
Fusing abnormality (hardware (PRCB)
temperature detection). • Fusing temperature
sensor /1 high The fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detects an
hardware error detection signal
detection continuously for a
sensor /1 low The fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
Main body: C-3903 After the warm-up is • Printer control board
Fusing started, temperature (PRCB)
temperature detected by the fusing • AC drive board /1
sensor /1 temperature sensor /1 (ACDB/1)
abnormality (TH1) has not risen to 100 • AC drive board /2
°C within a specified (ACDB/2)
period of time.Or, the • Fusing heater/1
warm-up of the main body • Fusing temperature
fixture is not completed sensor /1 (TH1)
within a specified period of • Main relay (RL1)
time. • Thermostat /1 (TS1)
temperature detection). • AC drive board /1
sensor /2 low The fusing temperature (ACDB/1)
temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detects an • Fusing temperature
hardware error detection signal sensor /2 (TH2)
K-78

period of time. • Fusing heater/1
• Fusing temperature
sensor /2 (TH2)
sensor /3 (TH3)
K-79

sensor /4 (TH4)
sensor /5 (TH5)
K-80

temperature abnormality (hardware • AC drive board (ACDB)
sensor detection). • Fusing temperature
abnormality The fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)
sensor /1 (TH1) detects
245 °C/160 °C/150 °C or
higher value continuously
for a specified period of
time.
C-3952 EF high temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
abnormality (hardware • AC drive board (ACDB)
detection). • Fusing temperature
The fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)
240 °C or higher value
continuously for a
C-3953 High temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
hardware detection • AC drive board (ACDB)
abnormality • Fusing temperature
245 °C/160 °C/150 °C or
higher value continuously
for a specified period of
time.
C-3955 High temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
detection). • Fusing temperature
240 °C or higher value
continuously for a
C-3956 Low temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
detection). • 2nd Fusing Lamp(Top)
-13 °C or lower value • Main relay (RL2)
detection). • Replace the 2nd fusing
The fusing temperature heater lamp.
sensor /3 (TH3) detects -6 • Fusing temperature
°C or lower value sensor /3 (TH3)
detection). • Replace the 2nd fusing
The fusing temperature heater lamp.
sensor /4 (TH4) detects • fusing temperature
-13 °C or lower value sensor /4 (TH4)
C-3961 The fusing temperature • EF control board (EFCB)
sensor /6 (TH6) detects -6 • AC drive board (ACDB)
°C or lower value • Replace the 2nd fusing
continuously for a heater lamp.
sensor /6 (TH6)
K-81

C-3962 When the fusing power • EF control board (EFCB)
feed is available, the • AC drive board (ACDB)
temperature detected by • Replace the 2nd fusing
the fusing temperature heater lamp.
sensor /1 (TH1) has not • Fusing temperature
risen to 100 °C within a sensor /1 (TH1)
specified period of time • Thermostat /1 (TS1)
after the warm-up is • Thermostat /2 (TS2)
started.
started.
sensor /4 (TH4) has not • fusing temperature
started.
started.
Main body: C-4101 When the polygon motor / • Polygon motor /Y (M21)
Polygon motor Y (M21) starts up or its • Printer control board
(Y) abnormality speed changes, the lock (PRCB)
signal of M21 is not • DC power supply /2
detected within a specified (DCPS/2)
period of time. • Writing unit /Y
Main body: C-4102 The lock signal of M22 is • Polygon motor /M (M22)
Polygon motor not detected when the • Printer control board
(M) abnormality polygon motor /M (M22) (PRCB)
starts up or its speed • DC power supply /2
changes. (DCPS/2)
• Writing unit /M
Main body: C-4103 When the polygon motor / • Polygon motor /C (M23)
Polygon motor C (M23) starts up or its • Printer control board
(C) abnormality speed changes, the lock (PRCB)
period of time. • Writing unit /C
Main body: C-4104 When the polygon motor / • Polygon motor /K (M24)
Polygon motor K (M24) starts up or its • Printer control board
(K) abnormality speed changes, the lock (PRCB)
period of time. • Writing unit /K
Main body: C-4120 The writing temperature • Writing temperature
Writing sensor (TH11) detects an sensor (TH11)
temperature abnormal high temperature • Printer control board
sensor in the write unit. (PRCB)
abnormality
K-82

Main body: C-4302 An error detection signal of • Writing ventilation fan /1
Writing any of FM13, FM14 or (FM13)
ventilation fan FM15 is detected • Writing ventilation fan /2
abnormality continuously for a (FM14)
specified period of time • Writing ventilation fan /3
while the writing ventilation (FM15)
fans /1 (FM13), /2 (FM14) • Writing ventilation fan /4
(PRCB)
Main body: Tilt C-4501 An edge is detected while • Skew correction home
correction the tilt correction motor /Y sensor /Y (PS40)
motor /Y (M25) moves. • Tilt correction motor /Y
abnormality It has moved beyond the (M25)
movable range. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
correction the tilt correction motor /M sensor /M (PS41)
motor /M (M26) moves. • Tilt correction motor /M
(PRCB)
correction the tilt correction motor /C sensor /C (PS42)
motor /C (M27) moves. • Tilt correction motor /C
(PRCB)
Main body: Tilt C-4504 An edge is detected while • Tilt correction home
correction the tilt correction motor /K sensor /K (PS43)
motor /K (M28) moves. • Tilt correction motor /K
(PRCB)
Main body: Tilt C-4511 The tilt correction motor /Y • Tilt correction motor /Y
correction (M25) does not turn OFF (M25)
motor /Y time within a specified period of • Skew correction home
out abnormality time after it turns ON to sensor /Y (PS40)
move. Or, the installation • Writing unit /Y
position of the tilt • Printer control board
correction motor /Y (PS40) (PRCB)
is improper.
Main body: Tilt C-4512 The tilt correction motor /M • Tilt correction motor /M
motor /M time within a specified period of • Skew correction home
out abnormality time after it turns ON to sensor /M (PS41)
move. Or, the installation • Writing unit /M
correction motor /M (PS41) (PRCB)
is improper.
Main body: Tilt C-4513 The tilt correction motor /C • Tilt correction motor /C
motor /C time within a specified period of • Skew correction home
out abnormality time after it turns ON to sensor /C (PS42)
move. Or, the installation • Writing unit /C
correction motor /C (PS42) (PRCB)
is improper.
Main body: Tilt C-4514 The tilt correction motor /K • Tilt correction motor /K
motor /K time within a specified period of • Tilt correction home
out abnormality time after it turns ON to sensor /K (PS43)
move. Or, the installation • Writing unit /K
correction motor /K (PS43) (PRCB)
is improper.
Main body: C-4520 Time out occurs before -
Response time receiving a response from
out abnormality color registration image
of color process.
registration
image process
K-83

Main body: C-4521 The color registration base • Color registration
Color line correction /Fr has sensor /Fr (PS83)
registration base terminated abnormally. • Printer control board
line correction (PRCB)
abnormality • Intermediate transfer
(front) belt
(SD9)
Color line correction /Rr has sensor /Rr (PS85)
(rear) belt
(SD9)
Color line correction /Md has sensor /Md (PS84)
(middle) belt
(SD9)
Main body: C-4531 An edge is detected while • Partial CD magnification
Partial CD the partial CD correction motor /Y
magnification magnification correction (M29)
correction motor /Y (M29) moves. • Partial CD magnification
motor /Y It has moved beyond the correction home sensor /
abnormality movable range. Y (PS69)
(PRCB)
Partial CD the partial CD correction motor /M
correction motor /M (M30) moves. • Partial CD magnification
motor /M It has moved beyond the correction home sensor /
abnormality movable range. M (PS70)
(PRCB)
Partial CD the partial CD correction motor /C
correction motor /C (M31) moves. • Partial CD magnification
motor /C It has moved beyond the correction home sensor /
abnormality movable range. C (PS71)
(PRCB)
Partial CD the partial CD correction motor /K
correction motor /K (M32) moves. • Partial CD magnification
motor /K It has moved beyond the correction home sensor /
abnormality movable range. K (PS72)
(PRCB)
Main body: C-4541 The partial CD • Partial CD magnification
Partial CD magnification correction correction motor /Y
magnification motor /Y (M29) does not (M29)
correction turn OFF within a specified • Partial CD magnification
motor /Y time period of time after it turns correction home sensor /
out abnormality ON. Y (PS69)
Or, the installation position • Printer control board
of the partial CD (PRCB)
magnification correction
home sensor /Y (PS69) is
improper.
K-84

Partial CD magnification correction correction motor /M
magnification motor /M (M30) does not (M30)
motor /M time period of time after it turns correction home sensor /
out abnormality ON. M (PS70)
home sensor /M (PS70) is
improper.
Partial CD magnification correction correction motor /C
magnification motor /C (M31) does not (M31)
motor /C time period of time after it turns correction home sensor /
out abnormality ON. C (PS71)
home sensor /C (PS71) is
improper.
Partial CD magnification correction correction motor /K
magnification motor /K (M32) does not (M32)
motor /K time period of time after it turns correction home sensor /
out abnormality ON. K (PS72)
home sensor /K (PS72) is
improper.
Main body: C-4601 The color registration -
Color sensor /Fr (PS83) has not
registration detected any data of Y
sensor /Fr (Y) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
registration detected any data of M
sensor /Fr (M) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
registration detected any data of C
sensor /Fr (C) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
registration detected any data of K
sensor /Fr (K) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
Color sensor /Md (PS84) has not
sensor /Md (Y) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
sensor /Md (M) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
K-85

sensor /Md (C) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
sensor /Md (K) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
Color sensor /Rr (PS85) has not
sensor /Rr (Y) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
sensor /Rr (M) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
sensor /Rr (C) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
sensor /Rr (K) toner.
data undetected
abnormality
Main body: C-4631 The histogram processing -
Color of the Y toner has
registration terminated abnormally on
sensor /Fr (Y) the color registration
abnormality sensor /Fr (PS83).
Color of the M toner has
sensor /Fr (M) the color registration
Color of the C toner has
sensor /Fr (C) the color registration
Color of the K toner has
sensor /Fr (K) the color registration
sensor /Md (Y) the color registration
abnormality sensor /Md (PS84).
Color of M toner has terminated
registration abnormally on the color
sensor /Md (M) registration sensor /Md
abnormality (PS84).
Color of the C toner has
sensor /Md (C) the color registration
K-86

sensor /Md (K) the color registration
sensor /Rr (Y) the color registration
abnormality sensor /Rr (PS85).
Color of the M toner has
sensor /Rr (M) the color registration
Color of C-toner has terminated
registration abnormally in the color
sensor /Rr (C) registration sensor /Rr
abnormality (PS85).
sensor /Rr (K) the color registration
Color correction /Y has
registration terminated abnormally.
correction
abnormality (Y)
Color correction /M has
correction
abnormality (M)
Color correction /C has
correction
abnormality (C)
Main body: C-4701 FIFO address abnormality • Memory control board /1
Printer FIFO for the printer. While in the (MCB1)
abnormality image write, the expansion • Memory control board /2
processing of image data (MCB2)
that is read in does not
terminate correctly.
Main body: C-4702 An error interrupt occurs • Memory control board /1
Compression I/O with the compression/ (MCB1)
FIFO expansion chip FIFO. • Memory control board /2
abnormality (MCB2)
Main body: C-4703 Image data expansion • Memory control board /1
Expansion abnormality. (MCB1)
abnormality • Memory control board /2
(MCB2)
Main body: C-4705 While in the image write, • Memory control board /1
Printer time out the expansion processing (MCB1)
from the memory to the • Memory control board /2
printer does not terminate (MCB2)
within a specified period of • Printer image
time. The output from the processing board
page memory to the printer (PRIPB)
does not terminate within a
The PVV is not detected
time.
K-87

Main body: C-4706 While in the image write, • Memory control board /1
Expansion despite of no resource (MCB1)
device access provided, an inappropriate • Memory control board /2
abnormality processing such as (MCB2)
accessing to the
elongation device is made.
Main body: C-4708 When accessing to the • Memory control board /1
Memory device memory device, a (MCB1)
access defective software is • Memory control board /2
abnormality in detected. (MCB2)
data flow
Main body: Data C-4709 The expansion processing • Memory control board /1
flow memory from the memory to the (MCB1)
mode time out page memory does not • Memory control board /2
terminate within a (MCB2)
The compression
processing from the page
memory to the memory
does not terminate within a
The development from the
memory to the page
memory does not
terminate within a
The transmission of the
compressed data from
memory to memory does
not terminated within a
Main body: Print C-4713 A page memory for HDD/Y, HDD/M, HDD/C,
page memory printing cannot be HDD/K, HDD/A, HDD/P
overflow secured.
Main body: C-4714 When executing APC, the • Writing unit /Y
Index sensor Index sensor output does • Printer image
abnormality (Y) not change. The index processing board
sensor failed to detect the (PRIPB)
laser because the polygon
mirror does not rotate, the
position of the index
sensor is improper, or the
index sensor is defective.
Main body: C-4715 When executing APC, the • Writing unit /M
abnormality (M) not change. The index processing board
Main body: C-4716 When executing APC, the • Writing unit /C
abnormality (C) not change. The index processing board
Main body: C-4717 When executing APC, the • Writing unit /K
abnormality (K) not change. The index processing board
K-88

Main body: APC C-4718 APC abnormality. • Writing unit /Y
abnormality (Y) The laser does not turn • Printer image
ON because 12V DC processing board
power source for driving (PRIPB)
laser is not fed, MPC is
wrong, or the laser is
defective.
Main body: APC C-4719 APC abnormality. • Writing unit /M
abnormality (M) The laser does not turn • Printer image
defective.
Main body: APC C-4720 APC abnormality. • Writing unit /C
abnormality (C) The laser does not turn • Printer image
defective.
Main body: APC C-4721 APC abnormality. • Writing unit /K
abnormality (K) The laser does not turn • Printer image
defective.
Main body: C-4722 Connection abnormality • Writing unit /Y
Printer-related between the index board / • Printer image
connectors Y (IDB/Y) or the laser drive processing board
unconnected (Y) board /Y (LDB/Y) and the (PRIPB)
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
Main body: C-4723 Connection abnormality • Writing unit /M
connectors M (IDB/M) or the laser processing board
unconnected (M) drive board /M (LDB/M) (PRIPB)
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
Main body: C-4724 Connection abnormality • Writing unit /C
connectors C (IDB/C) or the laser processing board
unconnected (C) drive board /C (LDB/C) (PRIPB)
and the printer image
processing board (PRIPB).
Main body: C-4725 Connection abnormality • Writing unit /K
connectors K (IDB/K) or the laser drive processing board
unconnected (K) board /K (LDB/K) and the (PRIPB)
printer image processing
board (PRIPB).
Main body: C-4840 The engine section has Printer control board
Engine nonstop kept driving continuously (PRCB)
drive for a specified period of
abnormality time without producing
image or process patch.
Main body: C-4850 The overall control Overall control board
Segmentation software accesses an (OACB)
fault illegal address.
Main body: C-4860 An abnormal value is -
Total/section detected in the total
printing ratio printing ratio or the section
abnormality printing ratio.
Main body: 12V C-5001 12V DC abnormality. • Printer control board
DC abnormality An error signal is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a • DC power supply /1
specified period of time. (DCPS/1)
K-89

Main body: 24V C-5002 24V DC abnormality. • Printer control board
DC abnormality An error signal is detected (PRCB)
specified period of time (DCPS/2)
after the power turns ON.
Main body: ADU C-5003 ADU conveyance drive • Front door sensor
conveyance board (CDB) 24V (PS37)
drive board 24V abnormality. • Front door switch (SW4)
abnormality An error signal is detected • Conveyance drive board
continuously for a (CDB)
specified period of time. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
(DCPS/1)
(DCPS/2)
C-5004 ADU conveyance drive • Front door sensor
board (CDB) 24V (PS37)
abnormality. • Front door switch (SW4)
An error signal is detected • Conveyance drive board
continuously for a (CDB)
specified period of time. • Printer control board
(PRCB)
(DCPS/1)
(DCPS/2)
Main body: ADU C-5005 Conveyance drive board • Conveyance drive board
conveyance (CDB) 12V power source (CDB)
drive board 12V abnormality. • Printer control board
abnormality An error signal is detected (PRCB)
Main body: C-5006 Conveyance drive board • Conveyance drive board
Conveyance (CDB) -5V power source (CDB)
drive board -5V abnormality. • Printer control board
abnormality An error signal is detected (PRCB)
continuously for a • ADU centering sensor
specified period of time. (PS87)
• PF drive board (PFDB)
• RU Color density sensor
unit
Main body: 5V C-5007 5V power abnormality Printer control board
power An error signal is detected (PRCB)
abnormality continuously for a
Main body: C-5010 A line status error or a • Overall control board
Communication checksum error occured (OACB)
abnormality between the overall control • Printer control board
between overall board (OACB) and the (PRCB)
control and printer control board
printer control (PRIPB) is detected and it
cannot be recovered by
sending a retransmission
request. Recovery failed
even after the requested
retransmission is
performed. A sufficient
space cannot be obtained
in the circular buffer within
a specified period of time.
Conveyance (CDB) control circuit port (CDB)
drive board output communication • Printer control board
control circuit abnormality (PRCB)
port output A checksum error occurs • DC power supply /1
communication in a data sent to the (DCPS/1)
abnormality control circuit.
K-90

Conveyance control circuit motor output (CDB)
drive board communication • Printer control board
control circuit abnormality. (PRCB)
motor output A checksum error occurs • DC power supply /1
communication in a data sent to the (DCPS/1)
Main body: PF C-5014 PF drive board (PFDB) • PF drive board (PFDB)
drive board control circuit port output1 • Printer control board
control circuit communication (PRCB)
port output abnormality.
communication A checksum error occurs
abnormality in a data sent to the
control circuit.
Main body: PF C-5015 PF drive board control • PF drive board (PFDB)
drive board circuit motor output • Printer control board
motor output1 abnormality.
control circuit.
Main body: PF C-5016 PF drive board (PFDB) • PF drive board (PFDB)
drive board control circuit port output • Printer control board
port output2 abnormality
control circuit.
Main body: PF C-5017 PF drive board control • PF drive board (PFDB)
drive board circuit motor output • Printer control board
motor output2 abnormality.
control circuit.
Main body: C-5018 Printer control board Printer control board
Printer control control circuit port output (PRCB)
board control communication
circuit port abnormality.
output A checksum error occurs
communication in a data sent to the
Main body: C-5019 Printer control board Printer control board
Printer control control circuit motor output (PRCB)
circuit motor abnormality.
Main body: C-5020 Toner drive board (TDB) • Toner drive board (TDB)
Toner drive control circuit port output • Printer control board
board control communication (PRCB)
circuit port abnormality.
Main body: C-5021 Toner drive board (TDB) Toner drive board (TDB)
Toner drive control circuit motor output
circuit motor abnormality.
Main body: C-5022 Fusing control circuit port • Conveyance drive board
Fusing control output communication (CDB)
circuit port abnormality. • Printer control board
output A checksum error occurs (PRCB)
communication in a data sent to the • DC power supply /1
abnormality control circuit. (DCPS/1)
K-91

Main body: C-5023 Fusing control circuit motor • Conveyance drive board
Fusing control output communication (CDB)
circuit motor abnormality. • Printer control board
output A checksum error occurs (PRCB)
communication in a data sent to the • DC power supply /1
abnormality control circuit. (DCPS/1)
Main body: Main C-5024 Main body system control • Conveyance drive board
body system circuit communication error (CDB)
control circuit (receiving). • Toner drive board (TDB)
communication A checksum error occurs • EF control board (EFCB)
error (receiving) in a data received from the • Printer control board
control circuit. (PRCB)
Main body: PF C-5025 PF system control circuit • PF drive board (PFDB)
system control communication error • Printer control board
circuit (receiving). (PRCB)
error (receiving) in a data received from the
control circuit.
PF-704/705 (1st C-5100 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): PF and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
control circuit control circuit initial (PRCB)
initial communication 1 is not
communication performed within a
C-5101 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
control circuit initial (PRCB)
communication 2 is not
performed within a
PF-704 (2nd C-5102 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): PF and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
control circuit control circuit initial (PRCB)
initial communication 1 is not
C-5103 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
control circuit initial (PRCB)
communication 2 is not
performed within a
Main body: C-5104 After the power turns ON Printer control board
Control circuit of and ACK is enabled, the (PRCB)
the printer initial communication of
control board the control circuit in the
initial printer control board
communication (PRCB) is not performed
abnormality within a specified period of
time.
Main body: C-5105 After the power turns ON • Printer control board
Toner drive and ACK is enabled, the (PRCB)
board control initial communication of • Toner drive board (TDB)
circuit initial the toner drive board
communication (TDB) control circuit is not
abnormality performed within a
Main body: C-5106 After the power turns ON • Conveyance drive board
Fusing control and ACK is enabled, the (CDB)
circuit initial fusing control circuit initial • Printer control board
communication communication is not (PRCB)
abnormality performed within a • DC power supply /1
Main body: C-5107 After the power turns ON • Conveyance drive board
Conveyance and ACK is enabled, the (CDB)
drive board conveyance drive board • Printer control board
control circuit (CDB) control circuit initial (PRCB)
initial communication is not • DC power supply /1
communication performed within a (DCPS/1)
K-92

Main body: C-5108 After the power turns ON • Centering sensor (PS40)
Conveyance and ACK is enabled, the • Conveyance drive board
drive board conveyance drive board/ (CDB)
(CDB) entering centering control circuit • Printer control board
control circuit initial communication is not (PRCB)
initial performed within a • DC power supply /1
communication specified period of time. (DCPS/1)
abnormality Or, an error signal is
detected while the
centering sensor (PS40) is
ON.
PF-704/705 (1st C-5109 After the power turns ON • Centering sensor (PS40)
tandem): and ACK is enabled, the • PF drive board (PFDB)
Centering centering control circuit • Printer control board
control circuit initial communication is not (PRCB)
initial performed within a
communication specified period of time.
abnormality Or, an error signal is
detected while the
centering sensor (PS40) is
ON.
PF-704/705 (1st C-5121 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
SubCPU control SubCPU control circuit (PRCB)
circuit initial initial communication is not
PF-704 (2nd C-5137 After the power turns ON • PF drive board (PFDB)
tandem): and ACK is enabled, the • Printer control board
SubCPU control SubCPU control circuit (PRCB)
circuit initial initial communication is not
EF: SubCPU C-5149 After the power turns ON EF control board (EFCB)
Control circuit and ACK is enabled, the
initial SubCPU control circuit
communication initial communication is not
abnormality. performed within a
EF: Control C-5199 After the power turns ON EF control board (EFCB)
circuit initial and ACK is enabled, the
communication EF control circuit initial
abnormality. communication is not
performed within a
Main body: C-5301 An error detection signal of • Power supply cooling
Power supply FM1 or FM2 is detected fan /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2)
cooling fan continuously for a • DC power supply /1
abnormality specified period of time (DCPS/1)
while the power supply • Overall control board
cooling fans /1 (FM1) and / (OACB)
2 (FM2) are ON.
several times.
Main body: C-5302 An error detection signal of • System cooling fan /Up
System cooling FM33 or FM34 is detected (FM33), /Lw (FM34)
fan abnormality continuously for a • Overall control board
specified period of time (OACB)
while the system cooling
fans /Up (FM33) and /Lw
(FM34) are ON.
several times.
K-93

C-5303 An error detection signal of • Overall control board
FM35 is detected (OACB)
continuously for a • System cooling fan /Rr
while the system cooling
fan /Rr (FM35) is ON.
several times.
Main body: HDD C-5304 An error detection signal of • HDD unit cooling fan /1
unit cooling fan FM46 or FM47 is detected (FM46)
abnormality continuously for a • HDD unit cooling fan /2
while the HDD unit cooling
fans /1 (FM46) and /2
(FM47) are ON.
several times.
Scanner: C-6101 While in the home position • Printer control board
Scanner home search operation, the (PRCB)
sensor scanner home sensor • Scanner drive board
abnormality (PS101) does not turn ON (SCDB)
within a specified period of • Scanner motor (M101)
time after the scanner • Scanner home sensor
motor (M101) turns ON. (PS101)
Scanner: Optics C-6102 When in optics scan • Printer control board
scan returning operation, the (PRCB)
abnormality scanner home sensor • Scanner drive board
(PS101) does not turn ON (SCDB)
within a specified period of • Scanner motor (M101)
time after the scanner • Scanner home sensor
motor (M101) turns ON. (PS101)
Scanner: C-6301 An error detection signal of • Printer control board
Scanner cooling the scanner cooling fan (PRCB)
fan abnormality (FM27) is detected • Scanner drive board
continuously for a (SCDB)
specified period of time • Scanner cooling fan
while FM27 is ON. (FM27)
Scanner: Filter C-6701 When processing images, • Scanner relay board
coefficient a filter coefficient cannot (SCRB)
abnormality be created normally. • Scanner image
processing board
(SCIPB)
• Memory control board /1
(MCB1)
(MCB2)
Scanner: C-6702 Address error of the • Scanner image
Scanner FIFO scanner FIFO. While in the processing board
abnormality image read, the (SCIPB)
compression processing of • Memory control board /1
image data that is read in (MCB1)
does not terminate • Memory control board /2
correctly. (MCB2)
Scanner: AVV C-6703 After negation of SVV, the • Scanner image
length compression of images processing board
abnormality that are read in and their (SCIPB)
development into the page • Memory control board /1
memory are not terminated (MCB1)
within a specified period of • Memory control board /2
time. (MCB2)
• Overall control board
(OACB)
K-94

Scanner: C-6704 While in the image read, • Scanner image
Scanner time the compression processing board
out processing from the (SCIPB)
scanner into the memory • Memory control board /1
does not terminate within a (MCB1)
specified period of time. • Memory control board /2
The development from the (MCB2)
scanner into the page • Overall control board
memory does not (OACB)
terminate within a
The SVV is not detected
time.
Scanner: C-6705 While in the image read, • Replace SCIPB.
Compression despite of no resource • Replace MCB1.
device access provided, an inappropriate • Replace MCB2.
abnormality processing such as
accessing to the
compression device is
made.
Scanner: SVV C-6706 While in the image read, • Scanner image
OFF abnormality SVV does not turn OFF processing board
within a specified period of (SCIPB)
time and the preparation • Memory control board /1
for scanning the next page (MCB1)
cannot be started. • Memory control board /2
(MCB2)
(OACB)
Scanner: C-6707 Time out during shading • Scanner relay board
Shading correction The index signal (SCRB)
correction has not received or the • Scanner image
abnormality index cycle is too long. processing board
(SCIPB)
Scanner: AOC/ C-6708 AOC/AGC adjustment • Scanner relay board
AGC level abnormality (SCRB)
adjustment - The light blocking cover • Scanner image
abnormality and the lens cover of the processing board
scanner section are (SCIPB)
removed. • CCD board (CCDB)
- The connector of the • Exposure lamp (L101)
CCD board (CCDB) is
disconnected.
- The power cable of
CCDB is disconnected.
- CCDB abnormality.
- Overexposure of the
exposure lamp (L101).
- L101 does not light.
Scanner: C-6709 The adjustment data • Scanner image
Abnormality of evacuated by resolutions processing board
the adjustment is not available. (SCIPB)
data by • Memory control board /1
resolutions (MCB1)
(MCB2)
Scanner: C-6710 A density conversion • Scanner image
Density gamma curve cannot be processing board
conversion created normally. (SCIPB)
gamma curve • Memory control board /1
creation failed (MCB1)
(MCB2)
(OACB)
K-95

Writing: Pulse C-6711 Pulse width modulation IC • Scanner image
width modulation calibration cannot be processing board
IC calibration started. (SCIPB)
cannot be • Memory control board /1
started normally. (MCB1)
(MCB2)
(OACB)
Writing: Pulse C-6712 Pulse width modulation IC • Scanner image
width modulation calibration cannot be processing board
IC calibration completed normally. (SCIPB)
cannot be • Memory control board /1
completed (MCB1)
normally. • Memory control board /2
(MCB2)
(OACB)
Writing: APC C-6713 APC initial sampling is Printer image processing
initial sampling started before MPC is board (PRIPB)
abnormality completed.
Writing: MPC C-6714 MPC is started before APC Printer image processing
abnormality is in progress. board (PRIPB)
Writing: Sub C-6715 Sub scan beam correction Printer image processing
scan beam is started before APC or board (PRIPB)
correcting MPC is completed.
abnormality
Writing: C-6716 Sub scan beam interval Printer image processing
Initialization of correction is started with board (PRIPB)
pulse width write clock abnormality
modulation IC is occurred due to
unfinished. noncompletion of pulse
width modulation IC
initialization.
Scanner: N-in-1 C-6717 N-in-1 page area Scanner image processing
page area abnormality. Due to an board (SCIPB)
abnormality image area abnormality of
the memory, images
cannot be expanded on
the memory.
Scanner: Sub C-6718 The sub scan beam Scanner image processing
scan beam interval cannot be set board (SCIPB)
interval cannot within a standard value by
be adjusted performing adjustment
properly predetermined number of
times.
Scanner: The tilt C-6719 The scan operation starts • Scanner image
correction is too before the tilt correction is processing board
late. terminated. (SCIPB)
• Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Scanner: The C-6720 The scan operation starts • Scanner image
centering before the centering processing board
adjustment is adjustment is terminated. (SCIPB)
too late • Printer image
processing board
(PRIPB)
Scanner: AGC C-6721 The AGC is retried due to • Scanner relay board
retry the decreased light volume (SCRB)
of the exposure lamp • Scanner image
(L101). However, no error processing board
occurs. (SCIPB)
• CCD board (CCDB)
• Exposure lamp (L101)
• Scanner drive board
(SCDB)
Scanner: The C-6722 A PWM gamma curve is • Printer image
creation of the not created properly. processing board
PWM gamma (PRIPB)
curve failed • Writing unit
K-96

Scanner: C-6723 The connection signal of • Scanner relay board
Scanner-related the CCD board (CCDB) (SCRB)
connectors cannot be detected • Scanner image
unconnected CCDB / Scanner relay processing board
board (SCRB) / Scanner (SCIPB)
image processing board • CCD unit
(SCIPB) power • CCD cable
abnormality or connector is
not connected.
Scanner: Read C-6724 When the sub power • Scanner relay board
system board switch (SW2) turns ON, (SCRB)
malfunction connection check of • Scanner image
reading system board processing board
failed. (SCIPB)
• CCD unit
Scanner: C-6725 The parameter setting Scanner image processing
Reading process cannot be performed while board (SCIPB)
sequence preparing for scanning.
abnormality
Operation C-6801 After the sub power switch • Operation board /1
section: Initial (SW2) turns ON, the (OB1)
communication communication between • Operation board /4
unreached error the overall control board (OB4)
(OACB) and the operation • Overall control board
board /1 (OB1) is not (OACB)
started within a specified
period of time.
Main body: C-7001 Communication error The main body • Printer control board
RU-508 between the main body and the RU stop (PRCB)
communication and RU. immediately to • RU control board
error turn OFF the (RUCB)
main relay
(RL1).
DF: DF C-8001 Communication error The main body • Printer control board
communication between the main body stops (PRCB)
error and DF. immediately to • DF control board
turn OFF the (DFCB)
DF: Paper feed C-8101 Paper feed motor (M301) main relay • Paper feed motor
motor error error (RL1). (M301)
• DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Conveyance C-8102 Conveyance motor (M302) • Conveyance motor
motor error error (M302)
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse/ C-8103 Reverse/paper exit motor • Reverse/paper exit
paper exit motor (M303) error. motor (M303)
error • DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Registration C-8401 Registration sensor • Original registration
sensor error (PS301) error sensor (PS301)
(DFCB)
DF: Timing C-8402 Timing sensor (PS302) • Timing sensor (PS302)
sensor error error • DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Reverse C-8403 Reverse sensor (PS305) • Reverse sensor (PS305)
sensor error error • DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Paper exit C-8404 Paper exit sensor (PS306) • Paper exit sensor
sensor error error (PS306)
(DFCB)
DF: Size VR C-8405 Size VR (VR301) error. • Size VR (VR301)
error • DF control board
(DFCB)
DF: Non-volatile C-8406 Non-volatile memory error DF control board (DFCB)
memory error
K-97

DF: ISW C-8407 When the sub power • DFCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • DF control board
ISW unwritten area is (DFCB)
detected in the DF
firmware.
Main body: C-C101 When the sub power • Printer control board
Printer control switch (SW2) turns ON, a (PRCB)
initial response from the printer • Overall control board
communication control board (PRCB) has (OACB)
abnormality not received within a
C-C102 When receiving from the • Overall control board
printer control is (OACB)
completed, either error is • Printer control board
detected; (1) data (PRCB)
checksum error or (2)
communication GA
produces an error vector
(parity, framing or brake
detection). Or, sending
does not complete within a
after sending is started.
Main body: C-C103 When receiving from the • Operation board /1
Operation panel operation panel control is (OB1)
communication completed, either error is • Operation board /4
error detected; (1) data (OB4)
checksum error or (2) • Overall control board
communication GA (OACB)
produces an error vector
(parity, framing or brake
detection). Or, sending
does not complete within a
after sending is started.
Main body: C-C104 When the sub power • PRCB firmware
Printer control switch (SW2) turns ON, • Printer control board
ISW unwritten ISW unwritten area is (PRCB)
detected in the printer
control firmware.
Main body: ISW C-C106 No normal header is • USB memory
time out error transmitted within a • Relay board /U (RBU)
after ISW is started.
Main body: ISW C-C107 While in data transmission • USB memory
data error by ISW, a checksum error • Relay board /U (RBU)
or a header error is • Firmware
detected in the
downloaded error.
Main body: C-C108 While in data transmission • Overall control board
Overall control by ISW, data cannot be (OACB)
ISW write error written in the overall • OACB firmware
control board (OACB)
properly.
FS: FS ISW C-C109 When the sub power • FNSCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • FNS control board
ISW unwritten area is (FNSCB)
detected in the FS
firmware.
LS: LS ISW C-C111 When the sub power • LSCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • LS control board (LSCB)
ISW unwritten area is
detected in the LS
firmware (1st tandem).
C-C112 When the sub power • LSCB firmware
switch (SW2) turns ON, • LS control board (LSCB)
detected in the LS
firmware (2nd tandem).
K-98

FD: FD ISW C-C113 When the sub power • FDCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • FD control board
ISW unwritten area is (FDCB)
detected in the FD
firmware.
SD: SD ISW C-C114 When the sub power • SDCB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • SD control board
ISW unwritten area is (SDCB)
detected in the SD
firmware.
PB: PB ISW C-C116 When the sub power • PB firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • PB control board
ISW unwritten area is (PBCB)
detected in the PB
firmware.
GP: GP ISW C-C117 When the sub power • GP firmware
unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • Punch Controller PCB
detected in the GP
firmware.
RU: RU-506 C-C118 When the sub power • RU-506 firmware
ISW unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • RU control board
ISW unwritten area is (RUCB)
detected in the RU
firmware.
RU: RU-508 C-C119 When the sub power • RU-508 firmware
ISW unwritten switch (SW2) turns ON, • RU control board
ISW unwritten area is (RUCB)
detected in the RU
firmware.
Main body: C-C120 Printer control program • PRCB firmware
Printer control error. • Printer control board
firmware (PRCB)
abnormality
Main body: C-C201 When an error response is • RFID control board
Communication received from SubCPU; (RFIDCB)
error between An error is detected in the • Overall control board
main body and serial communication (OACB)
RFID hardware
communication Checksum of the received
board data does not match.
Data length of the received
data is 0.
The receiving command of
the message is undefined.
While receiving data
specified by the data
length, the main body
detects an error in the
communication with the
Sub CPU in which there is
an 200ms or more
character interval.
While sending serial, CTS
bit does not switch to Low
for 550ms or more.
Checksum of the received
data does not match.
Data length of the received
data is shorter than the
defined value.
Main body: C-C211 When notified by SubCPU • RFID control board
Communication that an error occurs in the (RFIDCB)
error between communication with the • Antenna board /3 (AB3)
RFID RFID Tag of the fusing • Overall control board
communication unit; (OACB)
board and RFID An error is returned for the
tag (fusing) data read request.
An error is returned for the
data write request.
K-99

Main body: Data C-C212 An abnormality (checksum • Fusing RFID (FRID3)
abnormality in error) is detected in data • RFID control board
RFID kept by the RFID Tag of (RFIDCB)
the fusing unit. • Antenna board /3 (AB3)
(OACB)
Main body: Unit C-C213 The unit serial number • Fusing RFID (RFID3)
replacement kept by the RFID Tag of • RFID control board
while power ON the fusing unit does not (RFIDCB)
(fusing) match the fusing unit serial • Antenna board /3 (AB3)
number recognized by the • Overall control board
main body. (OACB)
RFID RFID Tag of the • Overall control board
communication intermediate transfer belt (OACB)
board and RFID unit;
Tag An error is returned for the
(intermediate data read request.
transfer belt) An error is returned for the
data write request.
Main body: Data C-C215 An abnormality (checksum • Intermediate transfer
abnormality in error) is detected in data RFID (RFID1)
RFID kept by the RFID Tag of • RFID control board
(intermediate the intermediate transfer (RFIDCB)
transfer belt) belt unit. • Antenna board /1 (AB1)
(OACB)
Main body: Unit C-C216 The unit serial number • Intermediate transfer
replacement kept by the RFID Tag of RFID (RFID1)
while power ON the intermediate transfer • RFID control board
detection belt unit does not match (RFIDCB)
(intermediate the fusing unit serial • Antenna board /1 (AB1)
transfer belt) number recognized by the • Overall control board
main body. (OACB)
RFID control RFID Tag of the 2nd • Overall control board
board and RFID transfer unit; (OACB)
tag (2nd An error is returned for the
transfer) data read request.
data write request.
Main body: Data C-C218 An abnormality (checksum • 2nd transfer RFID
abnormality in error) is detected in data (RFID2)
RFID (2nd kept by the RFID Tag of • RFID control board
transfer) the 2nd transfer unit. (RFIDCB)
• Antenna board /2 (AB2)
(OACB)
Main body: Unit C-C219 The unit serial number • 2nd transfer RFID
replacement kept by the RFID Tag of (RFID2)
while power ON the fusing unit does not • RFID control board
detection (2nd match the 2nd transfer unit (RFIDCB)
transfer) serial number recognized • Antenna board /2 (AB2)
by the main body. • Overall control board
(OACB)
RFID control RFID Tag of EF; • Overall control board
board and RFID An error is returned for the (OACB)
tag (EF) data read request.
data write request.
K-100

Main body: Data C-C221 An abnormality (checksum • EF fusing RFID (RFID4)
abnormality in error) is detected in data • RFID control board
RFID (EF) kept by the RFID Tag of (RFIDCB)
EF. • Antenna board /4 (AB4)
(OACB)
Main body: Unit C-C222 The unit serial number • EF fusing RFID (RFID4)
replacement kept by the RFID Tag of • RFID control board
while power ON the fusing unit does not (RFIDCB)
detection (EF) match the 2nd fusing serial • Antenna board /4 (AB4)
number recognized by the • Overall control board
main body. (OACB)
Main body: HDD C-D0E0 There is HDD to be • HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
initialization initialized. • HDD/M (HDD/M)
abnormality • HDD/C (HDD/C)
• HDD/K (HDD/K)
• HDD/A (HDD/A)
• HDD/P (HDD/P)
Main body: HDD C-D0E1 HDD (Y/M/C/K/A) is not • HDD/Y (HDD/Y) DIPSW18-7 HDD
abnormality (any connected. Or damaged, • HDD/M (HDD/M) unusable
of Y, M, C, K or or while in initialization. • HDD/C (HDD/C) (HDD not
A) • HDD/K (HDD/K) connected)
• HDD/A (HDD/A)
(MCB1)
(MCB2)
Main body: C-D0E2 HDD/P unconnected or • HDD/P (HDD/P) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/P damaged, or while in • Preview control board unusable
abnormality initialization. (PHCB) (HDD not
connected)
Main body: C-D0E3 Writing/reading to the HDD/Y (HDD/Y) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/Y read/ HDD/Y failed. unusable
write (HDD not
abnormality connected)
Main body: C-D0E4 Writing/reading to the HDD/M (HDD/M) DIPSW18-7 HDD
HDD/M read/ HDD/M failed. unusable
write (HDD not
abnormality connected)
Main body: C-D0E5 Writing/reading to the HDD/C (HDD/C)
HDD/C read/ HDD/C failed.
write
abnormality
Main body: C-D0E6 Writing/reading to the HDD/K (HDD/K)
HDD/K read/ HDD/K (HDD/K) failed.
write
abnormality
Main body: C-D0E7 Writing/reading to the HDD/A (HDD/A)
HDD/A read/ HDD/A (HDD/A) failed.
write
abnormality
Main body: C-D0E8 Writing/reading to the • HDD/P (HDD/P)
HDD/P read/ HDD/P (HDD/P) failed. • Preview control board
write (PHCB)
abnormality
Main body: HDD C-D0EF An error is detected while • HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
verify in HDD verify check. • HDD/M (HDD/M)
abnormality * SC is not counted. • HDD/C (HDD/C)
• HDD/K (HDD/K)
• HDD/A (HDD/A)
• HDD/P (HDD/P)
(MCB1)
(MCB2)
• Preview control board
(PHCB)
K-101

Main body: HDD C-D0F0 HDD Lock abnormality • HDD/Y (HDD/Y)
Lock while in enhanced security. • HDD/M (HDD/M)
abnormality HDD is locked due to • HDD/C (HDD/C)
incorrect password, • HDD/K (HDD/K)
password unset or security • HDD/A (HDD/A)
OFF. • HDD/P (HDD/P)
Main body: C-E001 The message queue is Overall control board
Message queue insufficient or destroyed. (OACB)
error
Main body: C-E002 The parameter value is in Overall control board
Message and excess of the permissible (OACB)
method limits.
parameters
invalid
Main body: Task C-E003 The ID of the task that Overall control board
invalid sends the message queue (OACB)
is undefined.
Main body: C-E004 The receiving event of the Overall control board
Event invalid message is undefined. (OACB)
Main body: C-E005 Memory access Overall control board
Memory access abnormality. (OACB)
abnormality
Main body: C-E006 Header address read out Overall control board
Header access abnormality. (OACB)
abnormality
Main body: C-E007 DIMM initialization • Memory control board /1
DIMM abnormality at turning (MCB1)
initialization power ON. • Memory control board /2
abnormality DIMM may not be installed (MCB2)
correctly.
Main body: C-E008 An error is detected while Color density sensor unit
Output paper in the output paper density
density adjustment.
automatic
adjustment
abnormality
2.4 Malfunction code caused by connector disconnection

2.4.1 bizhub PRESS C8000
Board name Connector Connected to Malfunction Remark
number code
Overall control CN1 NVRAM board (NRB) (Board to Board CN) C-4850 Segmentation fault (overall control
board CN2 NVRAM board (NRB) (Board to Board CN) software invalid address access)
(OACB)
CN200 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (power input) - The main body does not start up (power
source transformer oscillation with no
load).
CN204 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (remote signal) - The main body 5V system does not start
up.
The operation section does not start up
(Operation panel does not lit).
CN205 Memory control board /2 (MCB2) (Board to Board C-E007 DIMM initialization abnormality
CN)
CN)
CN215 Printer control board (PRCB) - The sub power switch detection failed and
the main body does not start up.
CN216 Operation board /4 (OB4) (operation section I/F - The operation section does not function
signal) (Operation panel does not lit, keys
unavailable).
CN218 RFID control board (RFIDCB) C-0201 Communication error between the main
body and the RFID control board.
CN219 LAN -
CN220 CSRC -
CN248 System cooling fan /Up (FM33), /Lw (FM34) C-5302 System cooling fan (FM33,34) abnormality
Memory CN201 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (power input) C-E007 => DIMM initialization abnormality => HDD/P
control board / CC135 unconnected
1 (MCB1)
K-102
*The malfunction code changes after a

few seconds.
CN207 Printer image processing board (PRIPB) (Board to C-4725 Printer-related connectors unconnected
Board CN)
Board CN)
Board CN)
CN)
CN)
CN212 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) (Board to - Copy and scanner functions do not work.
Board CN)
CN213 Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) (Board to - Copy and scanner functions do not work.
Board CN)
CN)
CN223 Controller I/F - The message "Controller is not
connected" is displayed on the operation
panel.
CN246 HDD/A AC-D0E1 (A) HDD abnormality
CN250 Preview control board (PHCB) (Board to Board CN) C-C135 HDD/P unconnected
CN251 Preview control board (PHCB) (Board to Board CN) C-C135 HDD/P unconnected
Printer image CN202 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (power input) C-4725 Printer-related connectors unconnected
processing CN207 Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to Board C-4725 Printer-related connectors unconnected
board (PRIPB) CN)
CN208 Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to Board C-4725 Printer-related connectors unconnected
CN)
CN209 Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to Board C-4725 Printer-related connectors unconnected
CN)
CN225 LD wiring harness (Ych image signal) C-4718 APC abnormality (Y)
CN226 LD wiring harness (Ych control signal) C-4722 Printer-related connectors unconnected
(Y)
CN229 LD wiring harness (Mch image signal) C-4719 APC abnormality (M)
CN230 LD wiring harness (Mch control signal) C-4723 Printer-related connectors unconnected
(M)
CN233 LD wiring harness (Cch image signal) C-4720 APC abnormality (C)
CN234 LD wiring harness (Cch control signal) C-4724 Printer-related connectors unconnected
(C)
CN237 LD wiring harness (Kch image signal) C-4717 APC abnormality (K)
CN238 LD wiring harness (Kch control signal) C-4725 Main body: Printer-related connectors
unconnected (K)
CN240 Toner supply door sensor (PS38) wiring harness - The message "Please set replenish toner
unit correctly" is displayed on the
operation panel.
Memory CN1 DIMM/C C-E006 Header access abnormality
control board / *Occurs when conducting large amount
2 (MCB2) print job.
CN2 DIMM/M C-E006 Header access abnormality
*Occurs when conducting large amount
print job.
CN3 DIMM/Y C-E006 Header access abnormality
print job.
CN4 DIMM/K C-E006 Header access abnormality
print job.
CN203 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (power input) C-E007 DIMM initialization abnormality => HDD/P
C-C135 unconnected
*The SC code changes after a few
seconds.
CN205 Overall control board (OACB) (Board to Board CN) C-E007 DIMM initialization abnormality
CN206 Overall control board (OACB) (Board to Board CN) C-E007 DIMM initialization abnormality
CN)
K-103
CN)
CN)
CN242 HDD/Y C-D0E1(Y) HDD/Y abnormality
CN243 HDD/M C-D0E1(M) HDD/M abnormality
CN244 HDD/C C-D0E1(C) HDD/C abnormality
CN245 HDD/K C-D0E1(K) HDD/K abnormality
Printer control CN114 Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), /2 (TH2), /4 C-3106 Fusing set detection abnormality
board (PRCB) (TH4), /5 (TH5), /6 (TH6), /8 (TH8)
CN115 Fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3), /7 (TH7) C-3106 Fusing set detection abnormality
CN117 AC drive board /1 (ACDB/1) C-4840 Engine nonstop drive abnormality.
CN118 EF-101 - EF is not detected and it causes JAM.
CN120 Paper exit motor (M34), Toner collection cooling fan C-2310 Toner collection cooling fan (FM30)
(FM30), Tucking fan /1 (FM/27) to /3 (FM/29) abnormality
Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM/24) to /3 (FM/26)
CN122 ADU ventilation fan /1 (FM31), /2 (FM32), waste C-0308 The message "Please set toner recovery
toner collection motor (M35) box and close door" is displayed.
Waste toner full sensor (PS48) Then the SC of the ADU ventilation fans
Waste toner door sensor (PS47) (FM31,32) abnormality shown on the right
appears.
CN125 Total counter /1 (CNT1), /2 (CNT2), fusing thermal - The message "Please set replenish toner
insulation fan /Fr (FM22), /Rr (FM23) unit correctly" is displayed.
Intermediate transfer cleaning cooling fan /1 (FM19) Warm-up not performed
to /3 (FM21), dew condensation prevention fan
(FM18)
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS45)
CN129 Sub power switch (SW2) - The sub power switch (SW2) detection
failed and the main body does not start
up.
CN130 Overall control board (OACB) - The sub power switch (SW2) detection
failed and the main body does not start
up.
CN131 5V, 12V, -12V C-C101 It occurs when turning power ON.
CN132 24V system C-5002 24V abnormality
CN133 Main relay (RL1), DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1), 2 C-2229 Toner collection screw motor YM power
(DCPS/2) abnormality
CN134 Developing motor /Y (M5), /M (M6), /C (M7), /K (M8) C-2201 While in printing operation, developing
Developing duct temperature sensor (TH9) motor abnormality shown on the left
CN135 Intermediate transfer belt motor (M9) C-2221 1st transfer pressure release abnormality
Intermediate transfer belt encoder /1 (PS81), /2
(PS82), cleaning motor (M10)
CN136 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11) C-2221 1st transfer pressure release abnormality
CN137 Motor cooling fan /1 (FM3), /2 (FM4) C-2302 Motor cooling fan (FM3,4) abnormality
CN139 Drum motor /Y (M1), /M (M2), /C (M3), /K (M4) C-2214 Drum /K abnormality
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS73), /Y2 (PS74), /M1
(PS75), /M2 (PS76), /C1 (PS77), /C2 (PS78), /K1
(PS79), /K2 (PS80)
CN140 Tray1 - The message "Please set tray" is
displayed on the operation panel.
CN141 Tray 2 - The message "Please set tray" is
CN142 Tray 3 - The message "Please set tray" is
CN143 Tray lift-up motor /1 (M36) to /3 (M38) C-0201 to When tray goes up, trays 1, 2, 3 up
0203 abnormality
CN144 Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL20), /2 (CL21), C-0305 The message "Please close right side
cooling fan (FM5) cover" is displayed on the operation panel.
Filter cleaning motor (M13), paper feed motor (M12), Then the cooling fan abnormality shown
toner hopper unit on the left occurs.
CN146 PF 1st and 2nd - PF not connected
CN150 Conveyance drive board (CDB), ADU lock solenoid C-5106 :Fusing control circuit initial
(SD1), front door sensor (PS37) communication abnormality.
CN160 IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2), process C-2470 Process mount coming off.
temperature sensor (TEM/HUM2),
Color registration sensor /Fr (PS83), /Md (PS84), /Rr
(PS85)
Color registration shutter solenoid /1 (SD8), /2 (SD9)
K-104
CN161 Drum potential sensor /Y (DPSB/Y), /M (DPSB/M), /C C-2401 PCL set detection abnormality
(DPSB/C), /K (DPSB/K)
Erase lamp /Y (EL/Y), /M (EL/M), /C (EL/C), /K (EL/
K)
CN162 TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y), /M (TCRS/M), /C (TCRS/ C-2434 TCR sensor initial adjustment /Y
C), /K (TCRS/K), intermediate transfer steering motor abnormality
(M33),
Intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68)
Intermediate transfer steering sensor (PS86)
Intermediate transfer steering home sensor (PS46)
CN163 Toner bottle motor (M20), toner bottle clutch /Y C-0301 Ozone fan abnormality (FM11,12)
(CL16), /M (CL17), /C (CL18), /K (CL19)
Toner suction fan /1 (FM17), writing ventilation fan /1
(FM13) to 4 (FM16)
Deodorization fan /1 (FM11), /2 (FM12)
CN164 Toner drive board (TDB), writing temperature sensor C-5105 Toner drive board (TDB) initial
(TH1) communication abnormality
CN165 Polygon motor /Y (M21), /M (M22), /C (M23), /K C-4101 Polygon motor /Y (M21) abnormality
(M24)
CN166 Tilt correction motor /Y (M25), /M (M26), /C (M27), /K - They function only when at low-
(M28) temperature condition in the morning.
Skew correction home sensor /Y (PS40), /M At this time, malfunction code related to
(PS41), /C (PS42), /K (PS43) write correction is supposed to occur.
CN167 Partial CD magnification correction motor /Y (M29), / - They function only when at low-
M (M30), /C (M31), /K (M32) temperature condition in the morning.
Partial CD magnification correction home sensor /Y At this time, malfunction code related to
(PS69), /M (PS70), /C (PS71), /K (PS72) partial horizontal magnification correction
is supposed to occur.
CN170 High voltage unit /1-1 (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2) C-2704 Charging /K abnormality
CN171 High voltage unit /2 (HV/2) C-2711 1st transfer /Y abnormality
CN172 High voltage unit /3 (HV/3) C-2731 While in print operation, post 1st transfer
neutralizing abnormality.
CN173 High voltage unit /4 (HV/4) C-2721 While in print operation, separation
abnormality
CN180 PF-705 scanner drive board (SCDB) - Scanner does not function
CN181 Status indicator lamp - Status indicator lamp is not lit
CN182 DF - DF does not function.
Conveyance CN300 Printer control board (PRCB) C-5106 Immediately after turning ON the power,
drive board fusing initial communication abnormality
(CDB) CN301 Power source 24V, 12V, -12V, 5V, GND C-5106 Immediately after turning ON the power,
fusing initial communication abnormality
CN302 Power source, 24V, GND C-5003 Immediately after turning ON the power,
ADU conveyance drive board 24V1, 24V2
abnormality
CN303 Power source, 24V, GND, relay C-5004 Immediately after turning ON the power,
ADU conveyance drive board 24V3
abnormality
CN304 Loop motor /Fr (M44), /Rr (M45) - While in printing operation, J-1701,
registration sensor front side not reached
CN305 Registration motor (M58) - While in printing operation, J-3101,
registration leading edge timing not
reached
CN306 ADU loop motor (M57) - While in printing operation, J-9401, ADU
conveyance sensor /2 (PS10) not reached
(JAM occurs for A3, A4 can be passed
through normally)
CN307 2nd transfer steering motor (M46), de-curler pressure C-2224 Immediately after turning ON the power,
adjustment motor (M47) 2nd transfer steering abnormality
CN308 Reverse motor (M43), reverse de-curler motor (M42) - While in printing operation, J-3204, fusing
paper exit sensor not passed through
CN309 ADU cooling fan /2 (FM37), /3 (FM38), pre-fusing C-0309 While in print operation, ADU cooling fan 3
suction fan /Fr (FM40), /Md (FM41), /Rr (FM42) (FM38) abnormality
CN310 Fusing belt cooling fan /Fr (FM43), /Md (FM44), /Rr C-3302 While in initial operation, fusing belt
(FM45) cooling fan (Md) (FM44) abnormality
CN311 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (CL14), /2 (CL15), C-0104 While in printing operation, ADU
intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS10), /3 conveyance motor (M39) abnormality
(PS11),
ADU conveyance motor (M39)
K-105
CN312 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41), 2nd C-3103 Immediately after turning ON the power,
transfer belt motor (M40) 2nd transfer pressure release abnormality
(motor does not function).
CN313 [Registration unit] C-3103 While in initial operation, 2nd transfer
Registration sensor /Fr (PS1), /Rr (PS2), paper pressure release abnormality (HP sensor
leading edge sensor (PS3), defective).
Paper skew sensor /Fr (PS4), /Rr (PS5), registration
temperature sensor (TH10)
[2nd Transfer Unit]
2nd transfer steering home sensor (PS49)
2nd transfer belt edge sensor /2 (PS51), /3 (PS52)
2nd transfer belt abnormal sensor (PS50)
2nd transfer home sensor (PS53), ADU conveyance
sensor /2 (PS14), /3 (PS15)
CN314 ADU conveyance clutch /1 (CL7) to /7 (CL13), paper - The message "Please close front door" is
exit gate solenoid (SD3), displayed.
de-curler sensor (PS54), de-curler pressure
adjustment sensor (PS55)
CN315 [ADU Unit] - While in printing operation, J-9201, ADU
ADU reverse motor (M56), ADU solenoid (SD2), reverse sensor (PS16) not reached
ADU cooling fan /1 (FM36),
ADU stop sensor (PS17), ADU reverse sensor
(PS16), ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS13),
ADU centering sensor (PS87)
CN316 Fusing external heating belt pressure release home C-3105 While in initial operation, fusing external
sensor (PS57) heating belt pressure release abnormality
Fusing refreshing roller pressure release home
sensor (PS56)
CN317 Fusing paper exit sensor (PS61), fusing paper exit C-3102 While in initial operation, fusing pressure
open/close sensor (PS60), release abnormality
Fusing belt /Lw pressure release home sensor /1
(PS58), /2 (PS59)
CN318 Fusing belt /Lw pressure release motor (M49), fusing C-3108 Immediately after turning ON the power,
belt /Lw release time motor (M50) fusing belt /Lw pressure release drive
Fusing refresh roller motor (M51) motor abnormality
CN319 Fusing belt /Lw edge sensor /1 (PS65), /2 (PS66) C-3110 Immediately after turning ON the power,
Fusing belt /Lw edge abnormal sensor (PS67), fusing fusing belt /Lw steering abnormality
loop sensor (PS64)
Fusing belt /Lw steering home sensor /1 (PS62), /2
(PS63)
CN320 Fusing web motor (M52), fusing external heating belt C-3105 While in initial operation, fusing external
pressure release motor (M53) heating belt pressure release abnormality
CN321 Fusing belt /Lw steering motor (M54) C-3110 Immediately after turning ON the power,
Fusing refreshing roller pressure release motor fusing belt /Lw steering abnormality
(M55)
CN322 ADU cooling fan /4 (FM39) - While in print operation, ADU cooling fan 4
(FM39) abnormality
Toner drive CN250 DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1), DC power supply /2 C-5105 It occurs only when turning ON the power.
board (TDB) (DCPS/2)
CN251 Printer control board (PRCB) C-5105 It occurs only when turning ON the power.
CN252 Developing charge fan /1 (FM7) to /4 (FM10), C-2306 It occurs only while in print operation.
remaining toner sensor /Y (PZS/Y), /M (PZS/M), /C
(PZS/C), /K (PZS/K)
CN253 toner supply motor /Y (M16), /M (M17), /C (M18), /K - TCR sensor toner density abnormality
(M19)
CN254 Toner skew conveyance motor (M15), toner hopper C-2227
agitated motor (M14)
Relay board / CN4 Overall control board (OACB) (USB) via operation - The USB port of the operation section unit
U (RBU) board /4 (OB4) does not function.
AC drive CN481 Printer control board (PRCB) (AC drive board /2 C-3903 The malfunction code on the left occurs or
board /1 (ACDB/2) for Europe) C-3906 warm-up not completed
(ACDB/1) C-3911
C-3916
C-3919
C-3801 to
3805
CN475 Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1) C-3903 The malfunction code on the left occurs or
C-3801 warm-up not completed
K-106
CN476 Fusing heater lamp /3 (L3), /6 (L6) C-3801 The malfunction code on the left occurs or
C-3919
C-3805
C-3802
C-3803
AC drive CN482 Printer control board (PRCB) C-3903 The malfunction code on the left occurs or
board /2 C-3906 warm-up not completed
(ACDB/2) C-3911
(Europe only) C-3916
C-3919
C-3801 to
3805
CN483 AC drive board /1 (ACDB/1) C-3903 The malfunction code on the left occurs or
C-3911
C-3916
C-3919
C-3801 to
3805
C-3804
C-3805
C-3802
C-3803
Operation CN190 Overall control board (OACB) (operation section I/F - The operation section does not function
board /4 signal) (Operation pane does not lit, keys
(OB4) unavailable).
CN191 Operation board /1 (OB1), LCD unit (LCD) - The operation section does not function
(Operation pane does not lit, keys
unavailable).
CN192 DC power supply (DCPS) (power input 5V3, 12V1) - The operation section does not function
(Operation pane does not lit, keys
unavailable).
2.4.2 OR-101
Connector
Board name Connected to SC code Remark
number
Overall control board Communication error between the main body and the RFID
CN1 C-0201
(OACB) CN218 communication board.
Communication error between RFID communication board and
RFID control RFID tag
board C-0211 C-0211: Occurs in the communication to the fusing section
(RFIDCB) Antenna board /1 C-0214 C-0214: Occurs in the communication to the intermediate
CN5
(AB1) to /4 (AB4) C-0217 transfer section
C-0220 C-0217: Occurs in the communication to the 2nd transfer
section
C-0220: Occurs in the communication to the 2nd fusing section
2.4.3 HD-514
Board name Connector number Connected to SC code Remark
SATA CN SATA (Y) signal CN C-D0E1(Y) HDD abnormality
HDD/Y
Power CN SATA (Y) power CN C-D0E1(Y) HDD abnormality
SATA CN SATA (M) signal CN C-D0E1(M) HDD abnormality
HDD/M
Power CN SATA (M) power CN C-D0E1(M) HDD abnormality
SATA CN SATA (C) signal CN C-D0E1(C) HDD abnormality
HDD/C
Power CN SATA (C) power CN C-D0E1(C) HDD abnormality
HDD/K SATA CN SATA (K) signal CN C-D0E1(K) HDD abnormality
K-107
Power CN SATA (K) power CN C-D0E1(K) HDD abnormality

SATA CN SATA (A) signal CN AC-D0E1 (A) HDD abnormality
HDD/A
Power CN SATA (A) power CN AC-D0E1 (A) HDD abnormality
SATA CN SATA (P) signal CN C-D0E2 HDD abnormality (P)
HDD/P
Power CN SATA (P) power CN C-D0E2 HDD abnormality (P)
Power source wiring
C-D0E2 HDD abnormality (P)
harness
System cooling fan
Fan wiring harness C-5302
abnormality
2.4.4 PH-101
Connector
number
Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to
CN6 C-C135 HDD/P unconnected
Preview control Board CN)
board Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to
CN211 C-C135 HDD/P unconnected
(PHCB) Board CN)
CN247 HDD/P C-D0E2 HDD abnormality (P)
2.4.5 EF-101
Connector
number
Sensors in the fusing section (fusing entrance
CN101 sensor (PS14), fusing exit sensor (PS15), fusing C-3150
pressure release sensor /1 (PS16), /2 (PS17))
CN102 Fusing pressure motor (M6) C-3152
CN103 Fusing swing motor (M4) C-6151
CN104 Fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), /3 (TH3) C-3153
Conveyance sensors (entrance sensor (PS1), paper
JAM at paper pass-through, front
CN105 exit sensor (PS2), entrance guide plate sensor -
door not detected
(PS3), front door sensor (PS4))
Sensors in the mount (de-curler home sensor (PS6),
conveyance sensors /Rt (PS7) and /Lt (PS8), fusing
CN107 C-3154
swing home sensor (PS5), mount lock solenoid
(SD2))
By-pass guide plate sensors /1 (PS12), /2 (PS11), Door sensor in the mount not
CN108 -
conveyance guide plate sensor (PS13) detected
Fusing system
CN111 Main relay (RL2) low-temperature Fusing unit not lit
SC
Fusing system
CN112 AC drive board (ACDB) low-temperature Fusing unit not lit
EF control board SC
(EFCB) DC power supply (24V) does not
CN113 DC power supply (DCPS), DC power relay (RL1) C-0450
turn ON.
CN114 Entrance conveyance motor (M1) C-0150
CN115 Bypass conveyance motor (M2) C-0151
De-curler pressure motor (M3), fusing swing motor
CN118 C-3154
(M4), gate solenoid (SD1)
Entrance cooling fans /Fr (FM3), /Md (FM4), /Rr
CN120 C-3311
(FM5)
Paper exit cooling fan /Up1 (FM6) to /Up3 (FM8),
CN121 C-3312 or 3313
paper exit cooling fan /Lw1 (FM9) to /Lw3 (FM11)
CN123 Fusing cooling fan (FM21) C-3315
Entrance/exit/fusing cooling fan SC
24V abnormality detected. Main
CN124 24V DC source C-0450
relay does not turn ON, lamp not
lit. SC of each fan.
CN125 5V/12V power source - Connection not detected
CN126 Main body communication - Connection not detected
CN127 Fusing temperature sensor /4 (TH4), /6 (TH6) C-3153
CN129 IL 24V poser source C-3150 C-3314 or C-3151
CN130 Ventilation fan /Rt (FM11), /Lt (FM2) C-3314
K-108
Mount cannot be pulled out. Lock

CN131 24V (for lock solenoid) -
solenoid does not function.
2.4.6 PF-704/705
Connector
number
Main body DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1), /2 (DCPS/
CN100 2) (5V, 12V and -12V power supplied by the main - PF is not detected.
body)
PF fan abnormality
CN101 PF DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1) (24V1) C-0310
All the fans do not function.
Tray lift-up motor /1 fuse blowout
CN102 PF DC power supply /2 (DCPS/2) (24V2) C-0209 Any of SC codes C-0209, C-0212 or C-0215
is displayed.
The message indicating that the PF power
CN103 Interlock switch (SW1) (24V3) -
code is not connected is displayed.
CN105 Main body (signal line) - PF is not detected.
The message "Please set tray1" is
CN112 Tray1 -
displayed.
When the tray 1 is its upper limit height,
J-1601 occurs after started (or other JAM).
CN113 Tray1 - When the tray1 is at lower position, the
messages of no paper and tray reset
appear in order.
CN114 Tray 2 -
displayed.
CN115 Tray 2 - When the tray2 is at lower position, the
appear in order.
CN116 Tray 3 -
displayed.
CN117 Tray 3 - When the tray3 is at lower position, the
PF drive board appear in order.
(PFDB)
Centering sensor (PS40), paper leading edge
CN119 - J-1614
sensor (PS25)
Loop sensor /Lw (PS17), horizontal conveyance
sensor /1 (PS19) to /3 (PS21), pre-registration
CN120 - J-1609
sensor (PS18), horizontal conveyance guide plate
sensor /Rt (PS22), /Lt (PS23)
Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS28) to /4 (PS31),
exit sensor /1 (PS26), /2 (PS27), loop sensor /Up
CN125 - J-1608
(PS32), vertical conveyance guide plate sensor
(PS33)
Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL3) to /4 (CL6), exit
CN126 - J-1608
clutch /1 (CL1), /2 (CL2)
CN131 Tandem conveyance clutch /1 (CL10) to /5 (CL14) - J-1625
CN136 Tray1, tray2 fan heater unit - Tray1, tray2 fan heater do not turn ON.
Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL8), /2 (CL9), pre-
registration clutch (CL7)
The message indicating that the PF power
CN137 Suction belt clutch /1 (CL15) to /3 (CL17), DC power -
code is not connected is displayed.
supply /1 (DCPS/1), /2 (DCPS/2)
AC drive board (ACDB)
CN138 Tray 3 fan heater unit - The lower tray heater does not turn ON.
J-1621 (Paper feed sensor of the selected
CN140 Tray1, tray2 suction unit -
tray not reached JAM occurs)
CN141 Tray3 suction unit - J-1623
PF fan abnormality
Cooling fan /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8), front door sensor
CN145 C-0310 As the tray lock is not released, the tray
(PS1), tray lock solenoid /1 (SD1), /2 (SD2)
cannot be pulled out.
J-1621 (Paper feed sensor of the selected
CN150 Paper feed belt motor (M1) -
tray not reached JAM occurs)
CN151 Vertical conveyance motor (M2) - J-1608
CN152 Horizontal conveyance motor (M3) C-0122 Horizontal conveyance motor abnormality
K-109
CN153 Tandem conveyance motor (M4) C-0118 Tandem conveyance motor abnormality
CN154 Loop motor /1 (M5) - J-1609
CN155 Loop motor /2 (M6) - J-1612
CN175 Multi feed detection board /S (MFDBS) - J-1649
CN176 Multi feed detection board /R (MFDBR) - J-1649
Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to Board
CN212 - Copy and scanner functions do not work.
Scanner image CN)
processing Memory control board /1 (MCB1) (Board to Board
CN213 - Copy and scanner functions do not work.
board (SCIPB) CN)
CN234 Scanner relay wiring harness C-6708 AOC/AGC level adjustment abnormality
Scanner relay CN233 Scanner relay wiring harness C-6708 AOC/AGC level adjustment abnormality
board (SCRB) CN232 Scanner wiring harness (FFC) C-6708 AOC/AGC level adjustment abnormality
2.4.7 HT-506
Connector
number
Dehumidification
The temperature rise abnormality occurs on any of the
CN651 heater /1 (HTR4), /2 C-0413, 0414, 0415
AC drive board top, middle or bottom heaters in use.
(HTR5), /3 (HTR6)
(ACDB)
AC drive board The temperature rise abnormality occurs on any of the
CN654 C0413, 0414, 0415
(ACDB) top, middle or bottom heaters in use.
2.5 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300)

2.5.1 C-0002
Code
C-0002
Classification
Main body: Communication error
Cause
Communication error between the printer control board (PRCB) and the conveyance drive board (CDB).
Measures to take when alert occurs
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Estimated abnormal parts
• Conveyance drive board (CDB)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
• DC power supply /1 (DCPS/1)
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch of the main body.
Note
• The message "Please turn on power again" is displayed on the touch panel.
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connection status of PRCB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connection status of CDB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
5. Replace CDB.
Faulty part isolation DIPSW
Control while detached
2.5.2 C-0101
Code
C-0101
Classification
Main body: Paper feed motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed motor (M12) is ON.
• Paper feed motor (M12)
Correction
Note
• "Please call service" is displayed.
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
K-110
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS/3 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:Main body (3/5):
1-D)
4. Replace M12.
5. Replace PRCB.
6. Replace DCPS /3.
2.5.3 C-0104
Code
C-0104
Classification
Main body: ADU conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ADU conveyance motor (M39) is ON.
• ADU conveyance motor (M39)
Correction
Note
• The message "Please call service" is displayed on the panel.
Solution
1. Check that the front door is closed properly, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace the PRCB (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/5): 20-O)
5. Replace M39 and CDB at a time.
6. Replace DCPS /3.
2.5.4 C-0105
Code
C-0105
Classification
Main body: Paper exit motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit motor (M34) is ON.
• Paper exit motor (M34)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB and M34 at a time.
2.5.5 C-0106
Code
C-0106
Classification
Main body: Reverse de-curler motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the reverse de-curler motor (M42) is ON.
• Reverse de-curler motor (M42)
K-111

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and DCPS /2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5):
14-N)
5. Replace M42.
6. Replace CDB.
7. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.6 C-0107
Code
C-0107
Classification
Main body: Reverse motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the reverse motor (M43) is ON.
• Reverse motor (M43)
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (2/5): 13-N)
5. Replace M43 and PFUDB at a time.
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.7 C-0108
Code
C-0108
Classification
Main body: ADU reverse motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ADU reverse motor (M56) is ON.
• ADU reverse motor (M56)
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (2/5): 13-B)
5. Replace M56 and CDB at a time.
6. Replace DCPS /2.
K-112
2.5.8 C-0109
Code
C-0109
Classification
Main body: Registration motor circuit abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the registration motor (M58) is ON.
• Registration motor (M58)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and DCPS /2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace the CDB (Wiring
diagram: Main body (2/5): 10-L)
5. Replace M58 and CDB.
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.9 C-0110
Code
C-0110
Classification
Main body: Loop motor /Fr drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the loop motor /Fr (M44) is ON.
• Loop motor /Fr (M44)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.10 C-0111
Code
C-0111
Classification
Main body: Loop motor /Rr drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the loop motor /Fr (M45) is ON.
• Loop motor /Rr (M45)
Correction
Note
K-113
Solution
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.11 C-0112
Code
C-0112
Classification
Main body: ADU loop motor drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the ADU loop motor (M57) is ON.
• ADU loop motor (M57)
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (2/5): 17-C)
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.5.12 C-0113
Code
C-0113
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Loop motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the loop motor /1 (M5) is ON.
• Loop motor /1 (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace the PFDB (Wiring
diagram: PF (1/2): 13-H)
3. Replace M5.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
Paper feed in trays 4 to 9 is unavailable
2.5.13 C-0114
Code
C-0114
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Loop motor abnormality
Cause
K-114
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: PF (1/2): 21-J)
3. Replace M6.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
2.5.14 C-0115
Code
C-0115
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Paper feed belt motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the paper feed belt motor (M1) is ON.
• Paper feed belt motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M1.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
2.5.15 C-0116
Code
C-0116
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Horizontal conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the horizontal conveyance motor (M3) is ON.
• Horizontal conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: PF (1/2): 4-G)
3. Replace M3.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
K-115
2.5.16 C-0117
Code
C-0117
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Vertical conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the vertical conveyance motor (M2) is ON.
• Vertical conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M2.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
2.5.17 C-0118
Code
C-0118
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Tandem conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the tandem conveyance motor (M4) is ON.
• Tandem conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M4.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-0 to 5
2.5.18 C-0119
Code
C-0119
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Loop motor abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
K-116
3. Replace M5.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-3 to 5
2.5.19 C-0120
Code
C-0120
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Loop motor abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M6.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-3 to 5
2.5.20 C-0121
Code
C-0121
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Paper feed belt motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the paper feed belt motor (M1) is ON.
• Paper feed belt motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M1.
4. ReplacePFDB.
DIPSW35-3 to 5
2.5.21 C-0122
Code
C-0122
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Horizontal conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the horizontal conveyance motor (M3) is ON.
K-117

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M3.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-3 to 5
2.5.22 C-0123
Code
C-0123
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Vertical conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error signal is detected while the vertical conveyance motor (M2) is ON.
• Vertical conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M2.
4. Replace PFDB.
DIPSW35-3 to 5
2.5.23 C-0150
Code
C-0150
Classification
EF: Entrance conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is ON.
• Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
• EF control board (EFCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between EFCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace EFDB. (Wiring
diagram: 16-E)
4. Replace M1 and EFCB.
2.5.24 C-0151
Code
C-0151
Classification
EF: Bypass conveyance motor abnormality
K-118
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the bypass conveyance motor (M2) is ON.
• Bypass conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace EFDB. (Wiring
diagram: 17-E)
4. Replace M2 and EFCB.
2.5.25 C-0201
Code
C-0201
Classification
Main body: Paper feed tray abnormality
Cause
The upper limit sensor /1 (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the tray lift-up motor /1 (M36) turns ON.
• Tray lift-up motor /1 (M36)
• Upper limit sensor /1 (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper loaded condition and the rear end restriction plate condition of the tray 1, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(5/5): 15-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (5/5): 17-E)
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M36 and PRCB at a time.
DIPSW18-0
Paper feed in tray 1 is unavailable
2.5.26 C-0202
Code
C-0202
Classification
Cause
• Upper limit sensor /2(PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
(5/5): 15-D)
5. Replace PS23.
K-119

DIPSW18-1
2.5.27 C-0203
Code
C-0203
Classification
Cause
• Upper limit sensor /3 (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
(5/5): 15-D)
5. Replace PS24.
DIPSW18-2
2.5.28 C-0209
Code
C-0209
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Paper lift motor /1 abnormality
Cause
Power supply line fuse for the paper lift motor /1 (M7) blows out.
• Paper lift motor /1 (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace M7 and PFDB at a time.
DIPSW35-0
2.5.29 C-0212
Code
C-0212
Classification
Cause
K-120
Correction
Note
Solution
DIPSW35-1
2.5.30 C-0215
Code
C-0215
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
DIPSW35-2
2.5.31 C-0218
Code
C-0218
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Paper lift motor abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
DIPSW35-3
2.5.32 C-0221
Code
C-0221
Classification
Cause
K-121

Correction
Note
Solution
DIPSW35-4
2.5.33 C-0224
Code
C-0224
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
DIPSW35-5
2.6 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400)

2.6.1 C-0301
Code
C-0301
Classification
Main body: Deodorization fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the deodorization fans /1 (FM11) and /2 (FM12) are
ON.
• Deodorization fan /1 (FM11), /2 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the fun, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF (1/2): 5-O)
3. Replace FM11, FM12 and PRCB at a time.
2.6.2 C-0302
Code
K-122
C-0302
Classification
Main body: Fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the tucking fans /1 (FM27), /2 (FM28) and /3 (FM29)
are ON.
An error detection signal is detected continuously while retrying power feed several times.
• Tucking fan /1 (FM27), /2 (FM28), /3 (FM29)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (5/5): 4-E, 5-E)
3. Replace FM27, FM28, FM29 and PRCB at a time.
2.6.3 C-0303
Code
C-0303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ADU cooling fan /1 (FM36) is ON.
• ADU cooling fan /1 (FM36)
• Front door switch/4 (SW4)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB, SW4 and DCPS /2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 16-C)
5. Replace FM36 and CDB at a time.
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.6.4 C-0304
Code
C-0304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper exit cooling fans /1 (FM24), /2 (FM25) and /
3 (FM26) are ON.
• Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM24), /2 (FM25), /3 (FM26)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (5/5): 2-E, 1-E)
K-123
2.6.5 C-0305
Code
C-0305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the cooling fan (FM5) is ON.
• Cooling fan (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 2-D)
3. Replace FM5 and PRCB at a time.
2.6.6 C-0306
Code
C-0306
Classification
Cause
• Front door switch /4 (SW4)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 16-L)
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.6.7 C-0308
Code
C-0308
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ADU ventilation fans /1 (FM31), /2 (FM32) and
the toner collection cooling fan (FM30) are ON.
• ADU ventilation fan /1 (FM31), (FM32)
• Toner collection cooling fan (FM30)
Correction
Note
K-124
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (5/5): 10-F, 9-F, 5-E)
2.6.8 C-0309
Code
C-0309
Classification
Cause
• Front door switch /4 (SW4)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 16-L)
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.6.9 C-0310
Code
C-0310
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the cooling fan /1 (FM7) or /2 (FM8) is ON.
• Cooling fan /1 (FM7), /2 (FM8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704705 (1/2): 6-G, 5-G)
3. Replace FM7 or FM8, and PFDB at a time.
2.6.10 C-0311
Code
C-0311
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Paper leading edge separation fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper leading edge separation fans /Fr1 (FM9)
and /Rr1 (FM10) are ON.
• Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Rr1 (FM10)
K-125
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (1/2): 4-J)
2.6.11 C-0312
Code
C-0312
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.12 C-0313
Code
C-0313
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.13 C-0314
Code
C-0314
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Paper feed assist fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Fr1 (FM11) is ON.
• Paper feed assist fan /Fr (FM11)
K-126

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM11 and PFDB at a time.
2.6.14 C-0315
Code
C-0315
Classification
Cause
• Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 (FM15)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.15 C-0316
Code
C-0316
Classification
Cause
• Paper feed assist fans /Fr3 (FM19)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.16 C-0317
Code
C-0317
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Paper suction fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper suction fans /1 (FM1) and /2 (FM2) are ON.
• Paper suction fan /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2)
K-127
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (1/2): 7-G)
2.6.17 C-0318
Code
C-0318
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-705/705 (1/2): 9-G, 8-G)
2.6.18 C-0319
Code
C-0319
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (1/2): 10-G)
2.6.19 C-0320
Code
C-0320
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Dehumidifier fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the dehumidifier fans /Rt1 (FM21) and /Lt1 (FM22)
are ON.
• Dehumidifier fan /Rt1 (FM21), /Lt1 (FM22)
K-128
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (2/2): 14-B)
2.6.20 C-0321
Code
C-0321
Classification
Cause
are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (2/2): 14-D)
2.6.21 C-0322
Code
C-0322
Classification
Cause
are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704/705 (2/2): 14-F, 14-E)
2.6.22 C-0323
Code
C-0323
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the cooling fans /1 (FM7) and /2 (FM8) are ON.
• Cooling fan /1, /2 (FM8)
K-129

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Turn the fan with I/O or manually, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (1/2): 6-G, 5-G)
2.6.23 C-0324
Code
C-0324
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Paper leading edge separation fan abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2.6.24 C-0325
Code
C-0325
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (1/2): 9-J)
2.6.25 C-0326
Code
C-0326
Classification
Cause
K-130

Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.26 C-0327
Code
C-0327
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Paper feed assist fan abnormality
Cause
• Paper feed assist fan /Fr1
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.27 C-0328
Code
C-0328
Classification
Cause
• Paper feed assist fan /Fr2 (FM15)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.28 C-0329
Code
C-0329
Classification
Cause
K-131
• Paper feed assist fans /Fr3 (FM19)

Correction
Note
Solution
2.6.29 C-0330
Code
C-0330
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Paper suction fan abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (1/2): 7-G)
2.6.30 C-0331
Code
C-0331
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (1/2): 9-G, 8-G)
2.6.31 C-0332
Code
C-0332
Classification
Cause
K-132

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (1/2): 10-G)
2.6.32 C-0333
Code
C-0333
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Dehumidifier fan abnormality
Cause
are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (2/2): 14-B)
2.6.33 C-0334
Code
C-0334
Classification
Cause
are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Turn the fan with I/O or manually, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (2/2): 14-D)
2.6.34 C-0335
Code
C-0335
Classification
Cause
are ON.
K-133
• Fan /Rt3 (FM25), /Lt3 (FM26)

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PF-704 (2/2): 14-F, 14-E)
2.6.35 C-0336
Code
C-0336
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM12) is ON.
• Paper feed assist fan /Rr1 (FM12)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM12.
4. Replace PFDB
2.6.36 C-0337
Code
C-0337
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM16.
4. Replace PFDB
2.6.37 C-0338
Code
C-0338
Classification
Cause
K-134

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM20.
4. Replace PFDB
2.6.38 C-0339
Code
C-0339
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM12.
4. Replace PFDB
2.6.39 C-0340
Code
C-0340
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM16.
4. Replace PFDB
2.6.40 C-0341
Code
C-0341
Classification
Cause
K-135

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM20.
4. Replace PFDB
2.7 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500)

2.7.1 C-0405
Code
C-0405
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): 12V power abnormality in the PF drive board (PFDB)
Cause
An error detection signal of the 12V in PFDB (blowout of ICP) is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PFDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
2.7.2 C-0406
Code
C-0406
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): 12V power abnormality in the PF drive board (PFDB)
Cause
An error detection signal of the 12V in PFDB (blowout of ICP) is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on PFDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Replace PFDB
2.7.3 C-0407
Code
C-0407
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR4) high temperature abnormality (hardware)
Cause
After turned ON, the temperature sensor /5 (TEMS/5) detects a heater abnormality signal.
• AC drive board (ACDB)
K-136

• Upper tray fan heater (HT-506)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between ACDB and the heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the temperature and the installation of the fan heater, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace the fun heater.
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.4 C-0408
Code
C-0408
Classification
Cause
• Middle tray fan heater (HT-506)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.5 C-0409
Code
C-0409
Classification
Cause
• Lower tray fan heater (HT-506)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.6 C-0410
Code
C-0410
K-137
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR4) high temperature abnormality (software)
Cause
After turned ON, the temperature sensor /5 (TEMS/5) detects that the heater temperature is 110 °C or higher.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.7 C-0411
Code
C-0411
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.8 C-0412
Code
C-0412
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
K-138
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.9 C-0413
Code
C-0413
Classification
Cause
The temperature detected by the temperature sensor /5 (TEMS/5) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between ACDB and the noise filter of PF.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PFDB and ACDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.10 C-0414
Code
C-0414
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR5) temperature rise abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.11 C-0415
Code
C-0415
Classification
PF-704/705 (1st tandem): Dehumidification heater /3 (HTR6) temperature rise abnormality
Cause
K-139

Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.12 C-0416
Code
C-0416
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Dehumidification heater /4 (HTR4) high temperature abnormality (hardware)
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.13 C-0417
Code
C-0417
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.14 C-0418
Code
K-140
C-0418
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.15 C-0419
Code
C-0419
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR4) high temperature abnormality (software)
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.16 C-0420
Code
C-0420
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
K-141
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.17 C-0421
Code
C-0421
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace ACDB.
6. Replace PFDB
2.7.18 C-0422
Code
C-0422
Classification
PF-704/2 (2nd tandem): Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR4) temperature rise abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.19 C-0423
Code
C-0423
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Dehumidification heater /2 (HTR5) temperature rise abnormality
Cause
K-142
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.20 C-0424
Code
C-0424
Classification
PF-704 (2nd tandem): Dehumidification heater /3 (HTR6) temperature rise abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PFDB
2.7.21 C-0450
Code
C-0450
Classification
EF: 24V power abnormality in the PF drive board (PFDB)
Cause
After turned ON, the 24V power is not supplied for a specified period of time.
• DC power supply (DCPS)
• DC power relay /1 (RL1)
• Power plug of EF
• Circuit breaker (CBR) of EF
Correction
Note
• The message "Please confirm power of 2nd fusing and turn on power again" is displayed on the panel.
Solution
1. If the power plug is disconnected from the outlet, connect it.
2. Check the switch of CBR and turn the switch ON if it is turned OFF.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between EFCB and DCPS, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS and RL1, and repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace EFCB
7. Replace DCPS.
8. Replace RL1.
K-143
2.8 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126)

2.8.1 C-1005
Code
C-1005
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Communication error.
The main body and the FS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• FNS control board (FNSCB)
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch, and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the main body and each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in each option, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Rewrite the firmware of the option.
5. Replace the control board of the option corresponds to the malfunction code.
2.8.2 C-1006
Code
C-1006
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main body and the FD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• FD control board (FDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
after 10 seconds.
2.8.3 C-1007
Code
C-1007
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The main body and the SD stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• SD control board (SDCB)
Correction
Note
K-144
Solution
after 10 seconds.
2.8.4 C-1009
Code
C-1009
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU1.
The main body and the PB stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• PB control board (PBCB)
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Turn OFF the sub power switch and then turn OFF the main power switch. Then unplug all the power plug. Restart the main body after
10 seconds.
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.5 C-1010
Code
C-1010
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Communication error between Main CPU in the PB control board (PBCB) and Sub CPU2.
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection of the control board and the drive board in PB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rewrite the firmware of PB.
4. Replace PBCB.
2.8.6 C-1011
Code
C-1011
Classification
PB control board (PBCB)
Cause
Paper feed error between the main body and PB.
• Control program
Correction
K-145
Note
Solution
2.8.7 C-1012
Code
C-1012
Classification
GP : GP abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
Resulting operation
The main body and the RU stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• Punch Controller PCB
Correction
Error conditions are cleared by turning OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
Note
• "Please call service" is displayed on the touch panel.
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
Control during separation
2.8.8 C-1013
Code
C-1013
Classification
RU-508: RU-508 abnormality
Cause
• RU control board (RUCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.8.9 C-1014
Code
C-1014
Classification
RU : RU-506 abnormality
Causes
Communication abnormality.
Resulting operation
K-146

Correction
Note
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the all the power plugs. Restart the main body
after 10 seconds.
DipSW
2.8.10 C-1101 (FS-612)

Code
C-1101 (FS-612)
Classification
FS: FS-612 abnormality
Cause
The shift unit does not get to the shift position or the home position within a specified period of time.
• Shift roller motor (M2)
• Shift roller home sensor (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-612: 2-B)
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 3-B)
5. Replace PS18.
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.11 C-1102 (FS-521)

Code
C-1102 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The tray up down motor (M3) does not turn OFF even when a specified period of time elapses after it starts operations. Or, it operates for
more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
• FNS drive board (FNSDB)
• Main tray up down motor (M3)
• Main tray upper limit sensor (PS2)
• Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the sensor operation, LED emission and light-receiving path, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:
2-B, 4-B)
6. Replace PS3.
7. Replace LED1 and PS16.
8. Replace M3.
9. Replace FNSDB.
K-147
10. Replace FNSCB.

DIPSW6-4
FS main tray and stapling are not available
2.8.12 C-1102 (FS-612)

Code
C-1102 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray up down motor (M3) turns
ON.
• Main tray up down motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the tray up/down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-612: 5-B)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.13 C-1103 (FS-521)

Code
C-1103 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensors /Rr (PS8) and /Fr (PS31) do not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search
operation of the alignment motors /Rr (M5) and /Fr (M22) starts.
• Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
• Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
• Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)
• Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:4-G)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-G, 4-G)
6. Replace PS8 or PS31.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace M22.
9. Replace FNSDB.
10. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.14 C-1103 (FS-612)

Code
K-148
C-1103 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensor /Up (PS8) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the alignment motor /Up (M5) turns
ON.
• Relay board (RB)
• Alignment motor /Up (M5)
• Alignment home sensor /Up (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 3-B)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.15 C-1104 (FS-521)

Code
C-1104 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The main tray paper exit motor (M7) operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
• Main tray exit motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace FNSDB.
6. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.16 C-1104 (FS-612)

Code
C-1104 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the paper exit roller motor (M7) turns ON.
• Paper exit roller motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
K-149
3. Replace M7.
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.17 C-1105 (FS-521)

Code
C-1105 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit opening unit does not get to the specified opening position within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening
motor (M8) starts operations.
• Paper exit opening motor (M8)
• Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521:2-C)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:3-B)
6. Replace PS12.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.8.18 C-1105 (FS-612)

Code
C-1105 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the paper exit opening motor (M8)
turns ON.
• Paper exit opening motor (M8)
• Paper exit home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit opening section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 2-B)
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace FNSCB.
2.8.19 C-1106 (FS-521)

Code
C-1106 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
K-150
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M11) starts.
• Stapler movement motor (M11)
• Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 5-G)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 2-G)
6. Replace PS11.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
The use of staple is unavailable
2.8.20 C-1106 (FS-612)

Code
C-1106 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler movement motor (M11)
turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-612: 7-I)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.21 C-1107 (FS-521)

Code
C-1107 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (skew rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
• Stapler rotation motor (M4)
• Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
K-151
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.22 C-1107 (FS-612)

Code
C-1107 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON or OFF within a specified period of time after the clincher rotation motor (M4)
turns ON.
• Clincher rotation motor (M4)
• Clincher rotation home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS14.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.23 C-1108 (FS-521)

Code
C-1108 (FS-521)
Classification
FS: FS-521 abnormality (vertical rotation)
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stapler rotation motor (M4) starts.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M4.
8. Replace FNSDB.
K-152
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.24 C-1108 (FS-612)

Code
C-1108 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler rotation home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler rotation motor (M6) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring betweenRB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS13.
6. Replace M6.
7. Replace RB.
2.8.25 C-1109 (FS-521)

Code
C-1109 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Fr (M31) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Fr (PS41) does not turn ON.
• Stapler board (SB)
• Stapler motor /Fr (M31)
• Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.26 C-1109 (FS-612)

Code
C-1109 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Fr (M14) turns ON.
K-153

• Stapler motor /Fr (M14)
• Stapler motor home sensor /Fr (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace RB.
2.8.27 C-1110 (FS-521)

Code
C-1110 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the stapler motor /Rr (M30) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the stapler home
sensor /Rr (PS40) does not turn ON.
• Stapler board (SB)
• Stapler motor /Rr (M30)
• Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS40)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the stapler, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace FNSDB.
5. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-3
2.8.28 C-1110 (FS-612)

Code
C-1110 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) turns ON.
• Stapler motor /Rr (M9)
• Stapler motor home sensor /Rr (PS30)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.29 C-1111 (FS-612)

Code
C-1111 (FS-612)
K-154
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Fr (M15) turns ON.
• Clincher motor /Fr (M15)
• Clincher motor home sensor /Fr (PS33)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.30 C-1112 (FS-612)

Code
C-1112 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the clincher motor /Rr (M10) turns ON.
• Clincher motor /Rr (M10)
• Clincher motor home sensor /Rr (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace RB.
2.8.31 C-1113 (FS-521)

Code
C-1113 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of the rear stopper motor (M26) starts, the rear stopper home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time.
• Rear stopper motor (M26)
• Rear stopper home sensor (PS35)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS14.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
K-155

DIPSW6-4
2.8.32 C-1113 (FS-612)

Code
C-1113 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
After the home position search operation of saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) starts, the saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
• Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18)
• Saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS23.
6. Replace M18.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
The use of multi half folding, saddle stitching and multi tri-folding unavailable
2.8.33 C-1114 (FS-612)

Code
C-1114 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor /Lw (M16) turns ON.
• Alignment motor /Lw (M16)
• Alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS24.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
2.8.34 C-1115 (FS-612)

Code
C-1115 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
The folding knife home sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding knife motor (M19) turns ON.
K-156
• Folding knife motor (M19)
• Folding knife home sensor (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M19.
7. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.35 C-1116 (FS-612)

Code
C-1116 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the folding transfer motor (M20) turns ON.
• Folding transfer motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M20.
5. Replace RB.
DIPSW18-5
(FS not connected)
2.8.36 C-1124
Code
C-1124
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209) or the tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the Tray lift motor /Lw (M202) turns ON.
• PI drive board (PIDB)
• Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
• Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
• Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI lower tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
K-157
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PI: 5-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 6-B)
5. Replace M202.
6. Replace PS209.
7. Replace PS210.
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.37 C-1125
Code
C-1125
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
The tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205) or the tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
the tray lift motor /Up (M201) turns ON.
• Traylift motor /Up (M201)
• Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS205)
• Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS204)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PI: 4-B)
5. Replace M201.
6. Replace PS204.
7. Replace PS205.
8. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
(PI not connected)
2.8.38 C-1126
Code
C-1126
Classification
PI: PI abnormality
Cause
A prescribed speed is not obtained within a specified period of time after the conveyance motor (M203) turns ON.
• Conveyance motor (M203)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M203.
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW18-6
PI unusable
K-158
(PI not connected)
2.9 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230)

2.9.1 C-1127
Code
C-1127
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch shift home sensor (PS303) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch shift motor (M302) turns ON.
• Punch drive board (PDB)
• Punch shift motor (M302)
• Punch shift home sensor (PS303)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PK:7-C)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M302.
6. Replace PS303.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
2.9.2 C-1132
Code
C-1132
Classification
PK: PK abnormality
Cause
The punch home sensor (PS301) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch motor (M301) turns ON.
• Punch motor (M301)
• Punch home sensor (PS301)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch kit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PK: 4-C)
5. Replace M301.
6. Replace PS301.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW19-5
PK unusable
(PK not connected)
2.9.3 C-1137 (FS-612)

Code
C-1137 (FS-612)
Classification
K-159
Cause
The gate home sensor (PS16) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the gate motor (M12) turns ON.
• Gate motor (M12)
• Gate home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FNSCB.
2.9.4 C-1140 (FS-521)

Code
C-1140 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
After the paper exit arm motor /Fr (M23) starts operations, it does not complete operations within a specified period of time, and the paper
exit arm home sensor /Fr (PS9) does not turn ON. Or, it operates for more than the allowed time at a speed out of the specified one.
• Paper exit arm motor (M23)
• Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS9.
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.5 C-1141 (FS-521)

Code
C-1141 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The stack assist home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of the
stack assist motor (M24) starts.
• Stack assist guide motor (M24)
• Stack assist home sensor (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-160
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-G)
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
The use of FS main tray and staple can not be used.
2.9.6 C-1142 (FS-521)

Code
C-1142 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the intermediate roller open/close
motor (M25) starts the home position search operation.
• Alignment motor /Fr (M22)
• Alignment motor /Rr (M5)
• Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate roller open close section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.7 C-1143 (FS-521)

Code
C-1143 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The conveyance motor (M1) does not turn ON when the start button is turned ON. Or the conveyance motor (M1) does not shift the speed
for each processing.
• Conveyance motor (M1)
• Paper exit sensor (PS37)
• FNS entrance sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FNSDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace FNSDB.
7. Replace FNSCB.
K-161

DIPSW6-5
FS unusable
(FS not connected)
2.9.8 C-1144 (FS-521)

Code
C-1144 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Fr (M15) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
• Paper exit alignment motor /Fr (M15)
• Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Fr (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the front side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.9 C-1145 (FS-521)

Code
C-1145 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit alignment
motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the operation, it does
not stop.
• Paper exit alignment motor /Rr (M14)
• Paper exit alignment plate home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the rear side of the paper exit alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
K-162
2.9.10 C-1146 (FS-521)

Code
C-1146 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The bypass roller release home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bypass roller release motor
(M12) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Bypass roller release motor (M12)
• Bypass roller release home sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bypass roller section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FS-521:5-C)
6. Replace PS13.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.11 C-1147 (FS-521)

Code
C-1147 (FS-521)
Classification
Cause
The paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper exit
alignment plate retraction home motor (M18) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M18
starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Paper exit alignment plate retraction motor (M18)
• Paper exit alignment plate retraction home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the paper exit alignment retraction section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FS-521: 7-M)
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.12 C-1148 (FS-521)

Code
C-1148 (FS-521)
K-163
Classification
Cause
The stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker entrance roller
release motor (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the operation, it
does not stop.
• Stacker entrance roller release motor (M16)
• Stacker entrance roller release home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker entrance roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS23.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace FNSDB.
9. Replace FNSCB.
DIPSW6-4
2.9.13 C-1201
Code
C-1201
Classification
LS (1st tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
The main body and the LS stop immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
• LS control board (LSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stacker tray up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
LS (1st tandem) unusable
2.9.14 C-1202
Code
C-1202
Classification
Cause
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
• Shift unit motor (M5)
K-164
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 5-H)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.15 C-1203
Code
C-1203
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
• Alignment motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.16 C-1204
Code
C-1204
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
• Grip conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
K-165
2.9.17 C-1205
Code
C-1205
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
• Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and motor/switch, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the operation of the switch, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 7-A)
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.18 C-1206
Code
C-1206
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
• Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.19 C-1211
Code
C-1211
Classification
LS (2nd tandem): LS abnormality
Cause
The stacker tray encoder sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns
ON. Or, the initial operation or the stacker tray down operation is not completed within a specified period of time.
Correction
K-166
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:LS-505:5-A)
5. Replace PS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.20 C-1212
Code
C-1212
Classification
Cause
The shift unit home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the shift unit motor (M5) turns ON. Or, PS11
• Shift unit motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the shift unit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M5.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.21 C-1213
Code
C-1213
Classification
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment motor (M7) turns ON. Or,
PS12 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PS12.
6. Replace M7.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
K-167
2.9.22 C-1214
Code
C-1214
Classification
Cause
The grip conveyance home sensor (PS5) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the grip conveyance motor (M4) turns
ON.
• Grip conveyance motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the grip conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS5.
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.23 C-1215
Code
C-1215
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the up operation.
• Stacker tray upper limit switch (MS2)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS2.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.24 C-1216
Code
C-1216
Classification
Cause
The stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3) is ON when the stacker tray up down motor (M1) is in the down operation.
• Stacker tray lower limit switch (MS3)
Correction
K-168
Note
Solution
5. Replace MS3.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace LSCB.
DIPSW6-6
2.9.25 C-1221
Code
C-1221
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding release motor (M14) turns
ON.
• 1st folding release motor (M14)
• Folding drive board (FDB)
• 1st folding cam home sensor (PS55)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between FDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 2-B)
5. Replace PS55.
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
The use of the folding function and the punch section is unavailable
2.9.26 C-1222
Code
C-1222
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding release motor (M15)
turns ON.
• 2nd folding release motor (M15)
• 2nd folding cam home sensor (PS56)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS56.
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
K-169

2.9.27 C-1223
Code
C-1223
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 3rd folding release motor (M16) turns
ON.
• 3rd folding release motor (M16)
• 3rd folding cam home sensor (PS57)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3rd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PS57.
6. Replace M16.
7. Replace FDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.28 C-1224
Code
C-1224
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 2-holes punch home position return
operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF.
• 2 holes punch home sensor (PS8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-F)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS8.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.29 C-1225
Code
C-1225
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 3 holes/4 holes punch home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch motor (M10) turns ON, the 3 holes/4 holes punch home sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF.
K-170

• 3 holes/4 holes home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 3-hole/4-hole punch section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-E)
5. Replace PS9.
6. Replace M10.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.30 C-1226
Code
C-1226
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the alignment plate home position return
operation starts. Or, after the alignment motor (M12) turns ON, the alignment plate home sensor (PS10) does not turn OFF.
• Alignment plate home sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the punch alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:5-D)
5. Replace PS10.
6. Replace M12.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.31 C-1227
Code
C-1227
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The punch registration home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the punch registration claw home
position return operation starts. Or, after the punch registration motor (M13) turns ON, the punch registration home sensor (PS11) does
not turn OFF.
• Punch registration motor (M13)
• Punch registration home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-171

4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 5-E)
5. Replace PS11.
6. Replace M13.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-0
2.9.32 C-1228
Code
C-1228
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the main tray home position search starts.
Or, after the tray up down motor (M11) turns ON, the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) does not turn OFF.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 6-D)
5. Replace PS20.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
2.9.33 C-1229
Code
C-1229
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
The main tray lower limit sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the tray up down motor (M11) is in the
down operation.
• Main tray lower limit sensor (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 3-D)
5. Replace PS22.
6. Replace M11.
7. Replace PDB.
DIPSW6-1
Main tray unusable
K-172
2.9.34 C-1230
Code
C-1230
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Up (M8) is in the up operation, the PI tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS32) does not
turn ON.
• Paper lift motor /Up (M8)
• PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34)
• PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI upper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:FD-503:8-A, 9-A)
6. Replace M8.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
The use of the PI section unavailable
2.10 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270)

2.10.1 C-1231
Code
C-1231
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
After the FD paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the down operation, the PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time. Or, after the paper lift motor /Lw (M9) is in the up operation, the PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38) does not turn
ON.
• Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
• PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
• PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 7-A, 8-A)
6. Replace M9.
7. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
2.10.2 C-1232
Code
C-1232
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
K-173
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is ON.
• Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)
• PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)
• PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M1.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.3 C-1233
Code
C-1233
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is ON.
• Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.4 C-1234
Code
C-1234
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M7 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the PI conveyance motor (M7) is ON.
• PI conveyance motor (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the PI conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PIDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: FD-503: 9-A)
4. Replace M7.
5. Replace PIDB.
DIPSW6-2
K-174
2.10.5 C-1235
Code
C-1235
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the main tray exit motor (M17) is ON.
• Main tray exit motor (M17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the main tray exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace M17.
5. Replace PDB.
2.10.6 C-1241
Code
C-1241
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The scraps press home sensor (PS48) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle exit motor (M5) starts the home
position search operation.
• Bundle exit motor (M5)
• Scraps press home sensor (PS48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D)
6. Replace PS48.
7. Replace M5.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi center folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.7 C-1242
Code
C-1242
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Fr (M7) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M7 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
• Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)
K-175
• Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS18.
7. Replace M7.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching, multi center folding, multi tri-folding and trimmer unavailable
2.10.8 C-1243
Code
C-1243
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding exit home sensor (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding sub scan alignment exit motor
(M8) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M8 starts to decelerate, it does not stop.
• Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
• Folding exit home sensor (PS24)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS24.
7. Replace M8.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.9 C-1244
Code
C-1244
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Rt (M9) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M9 starts the operation,
it does not stop.
• Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)
K-176
• Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS28.
7. Replace M9.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.10 C-1245
Code
C-1245
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm motor (M10) starts the home
position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M10 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Bundle arm motor (M10)
• Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS32.
7. Replace M10.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.11 C-1246
Code
C-1246
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle clip motor (M11) starts the
home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M11 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Bundle clip motor (M11)
• Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)
• Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)
K-177

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle clip section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:16-D)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:19-D)
6. Replace PS33.
7. Replace M11.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.12 C-1247
Code
C-1247
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle registration home sensor (PS34) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle registration motor (M12)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M12 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Bundle registration motor (M12)
• Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle registration section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS34.
7. Replace M12.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.13 C-1248
Code
C-1248
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The overlap home sensor (PS17) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the overlap motor (M13) starts the home position
search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M13 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Overlap motor (M13)
• Overlap home sensor (PS17)
Correction
K-178
Note
Solution
1. Check the overlap section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS17.
7. Replace M13.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.14 C-1249
Code
C-1249
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the folding main scan
alignment motor /Rr (M14) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M14 starts the
• Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)
• Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding main scan alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS19.
7. Replace M14.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.15 C-1250
Code
C-1250
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler movement home sensor (PS25) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the home position search operation of
the stapler movement motor (M15) starts. Or, even after a specified period of time after M15 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Correction
K-179
Note
Solution
6. Replace PS25.
7. Replace M15.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.16 C-1251
Code
C-1251
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching
alignment motor /Lt (M16) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M16 starts the
• Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)
• Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS29.
7. Replace M16.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.17 C-1252
Code
C-1252
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press movement
motor (M17) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M17 starts the operation, it does not
stop.
• Bundle press movement motor (M17)
• Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)
Correction
K-180
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS36.
7. Replace M17.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.18 C-1253
Code
C-1253
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The 1st folding blade home sensor (PS21) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 1st folding blade motor (M18) starts
the home position search operation. Or 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) does not turned ON within a specified period of time after
M18 starts the operation.
• 1st folding blade motor (M18)
• 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20), /2 (PS21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS20.
7. Replace M18.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-2
DIPSW7-3
2.10.19 C-1254
Code
C-1254
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
starts the home position search operation. Or the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) does not turned ON within a specified period of
time after M19 starts the operation.
• 2nd folding blade motor (M19)
• 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22), /2 (PS23)
Correction
K-181
Note
Solution
1. Check the 2nd folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:12-D, 13-D)
6. Replace PS22.
7. Replace M19.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-2
The use of the multi tri-folding unavailable
2.10.20 C-1255
Code
C-1255
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The clincher up down home sensor (PS26) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the clincher up down motor (M20)
starts the home position search. Or, even after a specified period of time after M20 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Clincher up down motor (M20)
• Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clincher up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS26.
7. Replace M20.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.21 C-1256
Code
C-1256
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the saddle stitching press motor
(M21) starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M21 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Saddle stitching press motor (M21)
• Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the saddle stitching press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-182
6. Replace PS27.
7. Replace M21.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.22 C-1257
Code
C-1257
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M22 starts the operation, it does not stop.
• Bundle arm rotation motor (M22)
• Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm rotation section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
6. Replace PS31.
7. Replace M22.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.23 C-1258
Code
C-1258
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS37) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press motor (M23) starts the
• Bundle press motor (M23)
• Bundle press home sensor (PS37)
• Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-183
7. Replace M23.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.24 C-1259
Code
C-1259
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The bundle press home sensor (PS35) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the bundle press stage up down motor
(M24) starts the home position search operation. Or PS35 or the bundle press stage up down upper limit sensor (PS45) does not turned
ON after a specified period of time M24 starts the operation.
• Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)
• Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)
• Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle press stage up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 24-D, 25-D)
7. Replace M24.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0
DIPSW7-1
DIPSW7-3
2.10.25 C-1260
Code
C-1260
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The guide shaft home sensor (PS46) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the guide shaft motor (M25) starts the
• Guide shaft motor (M25)
• Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the guide shaft, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-184
6. Replace PS46.
7. Replace M25.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-1, DIPSW7-3
2.10.26 C-1261
Code
C-1261
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Rt (HS1) or the clincher start sensor /Rt (HS2) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Rt (M29) starts the operation.
• Stapler assembly /Rt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.27 C-1262
Code
C-1262
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The stapler home sensor /Lt (HS3) or the clincher start sensor /Lt (HS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the
stapler motor /Lt (M30) starts the operation.
• Stapler assembly /Lt
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the stapler unit /Rt, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the stapler unit /Rt, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replacing the stapler assy /Rt
4. Replace SDDB.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-3
The use of the saddle stitching and trimmer unavailable
2.10.28 C-1263
Code
C-1263
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
K-185
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the operation.
• Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
• Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 23-R)
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
The use of the trimmer unavailable
2.10.29 C-1264
Code
C-1264
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the trimmer press motor (M32) starts the operation.
• Trimmer press motor (M32)
• Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
• Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer press section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:SD-506:23-R)
7. Replace M32.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.30 C-1265
Code
C-1265
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
It does not stop even after a specified period of time after the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the operation.
• Bundle arm assist motor (M26)
• Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)
• Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)
K-186

Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle arm assist section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
7. Replace M26.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
2.10.31 C-1266
Code
C-1266
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the entrance conveyance motor (M1) is driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.10.32 C-1267
Code
C-1267
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the horizontal conveyance motor (M2) is driving.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the horizontal conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
K-187

DIPSW7-4
Sub tray, paper exit to subsequent stage and FS unavailable
2.10.33 C-1268
Code
C-1268
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding entrance motor (M3) is driving.
• Folding entrance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M3.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-0, DIPSW7-1, DIPSW7-2, DIPSW7-3
2.10.34 C-1269
Code
C-1269
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding transfer motor (M4) is driving.
• Folding transfer motor (M4)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M4.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.10.35 C-1270
Code
C-1270
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the bundle exit motor (M5) is driving.
K-188

• Bundle exit motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the bundle exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M5.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400)

2.11.1 C-1271
Code
C-1271
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) is driving.
• Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the folding sub scan alignment exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace SDDB.
7. Replace SDCB.
2.11.2 C-1272
Code
C-1272
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the trimmer paddle motor (M33) is driving.
• Trimmer paddle motor (M33)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer paddle, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-189
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 11-W)
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.3 C-1273
Code
C-1273
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time after the trimmer blade motor (M31) is in the
up operation.
• Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer blade upper limit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 22-R)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
6. Replace PS62.
7. Replace M31.
8. Replace SDDB.
9. Replace SDCB.
DIPSW7-3
2.11.4 C-1275
Code
C-1275
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
The wire slack sensor (PS66) detected the slack of the trimmer edge drive wire.
• Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the wire slack, and repair the trimmer blade if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 10-U)
4. Replace PS66.
5. Replace SDCB.
2.11.5 C-1281
Code
C-1281
Classification
Causes
K-190
FD alignment motor (M3) drive abnormality. The FD alignment home sensor (PS3) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M3 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M3 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
• FD alignment motor (M3)
• FD alignment home sensor (PS3)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the FD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 1-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS3.
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.6 C-1282
Code
C-1282
Classification
Causes
CD alignment motor (M4) drive abnormality. The CD alignment home sensor (PS4) does not turn ON even after a specified period of time
after M4 starts the home position search operation. Or, even after a specified period of time after M4 starts the operation, it does not stop.
Resulting operation
Main body and RU stop immediately and main relay (RY1) is turned OFF.
• CD alignment motor (M4)
• CD alignment home sensor (PS4)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the CD alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 2-B)
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 5-B)
5. Replace PS4
6. Replace M4
7. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.7 C-1290
Code
C-1290
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the de-curler conveyance motor (M3) is driving.
• De-curler conveyance motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the de-curler section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 11-F)
4. Replace M3.
5. Replace RUCB
K-191

2.11.8 C-1291
Code
C-1291
Classification
Cause
The operation does not finish within a specified period of time after the home position search of the de-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5)
starts.
• De-curler pressure motor /Lw (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M5.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.9 C-1292
Code
C-1292
Classification
Cause
The operation does not finish within a specified period of time after the home position search of the de-curler pressure motor /Up (M6)
starts.
• De-curler pressure motor /Up (M6)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace M6.
5. Replace RUCB
2.11.10 C-1293
Code
C-1293
Classification
Cause
Rotation abnormality is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the humidification section conveyance motor (M8) is
driving.
• Humidification section conveyance motor (M8)
• RU drive board (RUDB)
Correction
Note
K-192
Solution
1. Check the humidification section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 13-O)
5. Replace M8.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
2.11.11 C-1294
Code
C-1294
Classification
Cause
The operation does not finish within a specified period of time after the home position search of the humidification section roller pressure
motor /Rt (M9) starts.
• Humidification section roller pressure motor /Rt (M9)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M9.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
2.11.12 C-1295
Code
C-1295
Classification
Cause
The operation does not finish within a specified period of time after the home position search of the humidification section roller pressure
motor /Lt (M10) starts.
• Humidification roller pressure motor /Lt (M10)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M10.
6. Replace RUDB.
7. Replace RUCB
2.11.13 C-1296
Code
C-1296
Classification
K-193
Cause
Color density sensor detection preparation adjustment value abnormality
• Color density sensor unit
• Color density control board (CDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the color density sensor unit, and clean/repair them if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor unit and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDCB and RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
5. Replace the color density sensor unit.
6. Replace CDCB
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used.
2.11.14 C-1297
Code
C-1297
Classification
Cause
Color density sensor detection start abnormality
• Color density sensor unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the color density sensor and CDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace the color density sensor unit if any abnormality.
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor unusable
2.11.15 C-1298
Code
C-1298
Classification
Cause
EEPROM read out abnormality in the color density relay board (CDRLB)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-194
4. Reinstalling RU firmware
6. Replace CDCB.
7. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used.
2.11.16 C-1299
Code
C-1299
Classification
Cause
The water tank full sensor (PS13) detects ON continuously for more than a specified period of time.
• Drain path
• Water tank full sensor (PS13)
• RU deive board (RUDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drain path, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUDB, the pump motor (1) and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 16-O)
4. Replace PS13.
5. Replace RUDB.
DIPSW13-2
Humidification unusable
2.11.17 C-1301
Code
C-1301
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between LSCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 4-A)
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.18 C-1302
Code
C-1302
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /1(FM2) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
Correction
K-195
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: LS-505: 6-H)
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.19 C-1303
Code
C-1303
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/Mi (FM3) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.20 C-1304
Code
C-1304
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
• Motor cooling fan motor (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.21 C-1305
Code
C-1305
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-196
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.22 C-1306
Code
C-1306
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM1.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.23 C-1307
Code
C-1307
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM2 or FM6.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.24 C-1308
Code
C-1308
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM3
4. Replace LSCB.
K-197

2.11.25 C-1309
Code
C-1309
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fan motor (FM4) is ON.
• Motor cooling fan motor
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.26 C-1310
Code
C-1310
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of FM5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5) is ON.
• Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM5.
4. Replace LSCB.
2.11.27 C-1311
Code
C-1311
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the scraps removal fan motor (FM1) is started or
driving.
• Scraps removal fan motor (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between SDDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: SD-506: 26-D)
4. Replace FM1.
5. Replace SDDB.
6. Replace SDCB.
K-198

DIPSW7-3
2.11.28 C-1330
Code
C-1330
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71) is started or
driving.
• Cover paper tray fan /1 (FM71)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 21-D)
3. Replace FM71.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
Paper feed from the PB is unavailable.
2.11.29 C-1331
Code
C-1331
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified time period while the cover paper tray fan /2 (FM72) is started or
driving.
• Cover paper tray fan /2 (FM72)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM72.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-5
2.11.30 C-1332
Code
C-1332
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /1 (FM80) is started or driving.
1. PB control board (PBCB)
2. PB drive board (PBDB)
3. Exhaust fan /1 (FM80)
Correction
K-199
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 3-D, 19-U)
3. Replace FM80, FM97 and FM98.
4. Replace PBDB1 and PBDB3.
DIPSW7-6
Ejecting onto the sub tray is possible.
2.11.31 C-1333
Code
C-1333
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified time period while the exhaust fan /2 (FM81) is started or driving.
• Exhaust fan /2 (FM81)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:3-D)
3. Replace FM81.
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
2.11.32 C-1334
Code
C-1334
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected continuously for specified period of time while the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) is started or
driving.
• Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Replace FM4
4. Replace PBDB1.
DIPSW7-6
2.11.33 C-1341
Code
C-1341
Classification
Causes
K-200
Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM1 operation.
Resulting operation
• Stack assist fan /Fr (FM1)
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUCB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM1
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.34 C-1342
Code
C-1342
Classification
Causes
Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2) rotation abnormality. Rotation abnormality detected continuously for the specified time during FM2 operation.
Resulting operation
• Stack assist fan /Rr (FM2)
Correction
Note
Procedure
2. Rotate the fan by I/O or hand, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (RU-506: 3-B)
3. Replace FM2
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.11.35 C-1351
Code
C-1351
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the entrance paper fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3
(FM3) are ON.
• Entrance paper fan /1 (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair or replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 8-F, 9-F)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.36 C-1352
Code
C-1352
Classification
K-201

Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fans /1 (FM4) and /2 (FM5) are
ON.
• Ventilation assist fan /1 (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 9-F, 8-H)
3. Replace FM4 and FM5.
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.37 C-1353
Code
C-1353
Classification
Cause
(FM17) are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 17-L, 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.38 C-1354
Code
C-1354
Classification
Cause
(FM20) are ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 18-L)
4. Replace RUCB
K-202
2.11.39 C-1355
Code
C-1355
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the ventilation assist fan /3 (FM21) and the
conveyance paper fan (FM22) are ON.
• Conveyance paper fan (FM22)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 19-L, 23-K)
3. Replace FM21 and FM22.
4. Replace RUCB
2.11.40 C-1356
Code
C-1356
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6) is ON.
• Humidification section paper fan /1 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between RUDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 19-O)
4. Replace FM6.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.41 C-1357
Code
C-1357
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
K-203
Solution
4. Replace FM7.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.42 C-1358
Code
C-1358
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM8.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.43 C-1359
Code
C-1359
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM9.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.44 C-1360
Code
C-1360
K-204
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM10.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.45 C-1361
Code
C-1361
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FM11.
5. Replace RUDB.
6. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-2
2.11.46 C-1364
Code
C-1364
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the power supply fan (FM14) is ON.
• Power supply fan (FM14)
• DC power supply (DCPS)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
K-205
3. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: RU-508: 6-I)
4. Replace FM14.
5. Replace DCPS.
2.12 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500)

2.12.1 C-1402
Code
C-1402
Classification
FS: FS abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality.
• FS control board (LSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FS firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.12.2 C-1403
Code
C-1403
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
• FD control board (FDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling FD firmware
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.3 C-1404
Code
C-1404
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling SD firmware
4. Replace SDCB.
K-206

2.12.4 C-1406
Code
C-1406
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality in the PB control board (PBCB)
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstalling PB firmware
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.5 C-1407
Code
C-1407
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of RUCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.6 C-1408
Code
C-1408
Classification
Causes
Non-volatile memory error.
Resulting operation
Correction
Note
Procedure
1. After turning OFF the sub power switch, turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
K-207
2.12.7 C-1411
Code
C-1411
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
5V power abnormality in the SD drive board (SDDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring of SDDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Replace SDDB.
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.8 C-1431
Code
C-1431 (FS-612)
Classification
Cause
Communication error in FS
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring of FNSCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Reinstall FS-612 firmware
4. Replace FNSCB.
2.12.9 C-1432
Code
C-1432
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
Communication error in FD
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.10 C-1433
Code
C-1433
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
Communication error in SD
K-208

• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.11 C-1435
Code
C-1435
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU1 in the PB control board (PBCB)
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.12 C-1436
Code
C-1436
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue full or the control abnormality of Sub CPU2 in the PB control board (PBCB)
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.13 C-1437
Code
C-1437
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Message queue of the communication among tasks in the PB is full.
• Control program
Correction
K-209
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.14 C-1438
Code
C-1438
Classification
Cause
Communication error in RU
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.15 C-1439
Code
C-1439
Classification
Causes
RU received operation start from the main body when unready.
Resulting operation
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.12.16 C-1440
Code
C-1440
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Main side)
• RU program
Correction
Note
K-210
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used
2.12.17 C-1441
Code
C-1441
Classification
Cause
RU SubCPU communication error (Sub side)
• RU program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
DIPSW13-3
Color density sensor cannot be used
2.12.18 C-1451
Code
C-1451
Classification
FD: FD abnormality
Cause
When the FD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace FDCB.
2.12.19 C-1452
Code
C-1452
Classification
SD: SD abnormality
Cause
When the SD is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
• Software bug
Correction
Note
K-211
Solution
4. Replace SDCB.
2.12.20 C-1454
Code
C-1454
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
PB operation prohibition abnormality.
PB received operation start signal from the main body when the PB is unready.
• Control program
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PBCB.
2.12.21 C-1455
Code
C-1455
Classification
Cause
When RU is unready, a signal to start operations is received from the main body.
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace RUCB
2.12.22 C-1456
Code
C-1456
Classification
Causes
RU received operation start signal from the main body when the RU is unready.
Resulting operation
• Software bug
Correction
Note
Procedure
seconds.
K-212
4. Replace RUCB
DipSW
2.13 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539)

2.13.1 C-1501
Code
C-1501
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB/PBDB1 and PBCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 1-D)
5. Replace M1.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
The use of the PB is unavailable
2.13.2 C-1502
Code
C-1502
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the intermediate conveyance motor (M2) is
driving.
• Intermediate conveyance motor (M2)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the intermediate conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503:2-D)
5. Replace M2.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.3 C-1504
Code
C-1504
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-213
The SC entrance conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
turns ON.
• SC entrance conveyance motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC entrance conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M11.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.4 C-1505
Code
C-1505
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
turns ON.
• SC switchback conveyance motor (M12)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M12.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.5 C-1506
Code
C-1506
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The switchback roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC switchback release motor
(M13) turns ON.
• SC switchback release motor (M13)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC switchback release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-214
5. Replace M13.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.6 C-1507
Code
C-1507
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after SC alignment motor (M15) turns ON.
• SC alignment motor (M15)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M15.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.7 C-1508
Code
C-1508
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC paper bundle conveyance has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
turns ON.
• SC bundle conveyance motor (M17)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC bundle conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M17.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.8 C-1509
Code
C-1509
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-215
Cause
The SC roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the SC roller release motor (M18) turns ON.
• SC roller release motor (M18)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the SC roller release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M18.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.9 C-1510
Code
C-1510
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The SC entrance movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance movement motor
(M19) turns ON.
• Clamp entrance movement motor (M19)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M19.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.10 C-1511
Code
C-1511
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp entrance roller release operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp entrance roller
release motor (M20) turns ON.
• Clamp entrance roller release motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp entrance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-216
5. Replace M20.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.11 C-1512
Code
C-1512
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp alignment has not been completed within a specified period of time after clamp alignment motor (M21) turns ON.
• Clamp alignment motor (M21)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M21.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.12 C-1513
Code
C-1513
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The clamp section open/close operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp motor (M22) turns ON.
• Clamp motor (M22)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M22.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.13 C-1514
Code
C-1514
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-217
The clamp rotation operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the clamp rotation motor (M23) turns ON.
• Clamp rotation motor (M23)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the clamp section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M23.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.14 C-1515
Code
C-1515
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank movement operation has not been completed within a specified period of time after the glue tank movement motor (M31)
turns ON.
• Glue tank movement motor (M31)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue tank movement section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M31.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.15 C-1516
Code
C-1516
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the glue apply roller motor (M32) is driving.
• Glue apply roller motor (M32)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the glue apply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-218
5. Replace M32.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.16 C-1517
Code
C-1517
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The count of a specified number of pellets, which is counted by the pellet supply passage sensor (PS37), has not been reached after the
pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
• Pellet supply pipe motor (M33)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the pellet supply section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M33.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.17 C-1518
Code
C-1518
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The operation of the pellet supply arm has not been completed within a specified period of time after the pellet supply arm motor (M34)
turns ON.
• Pellet supply arm motor (M34)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M34.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.18 C-1519
Code
C-1519
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-219
The alignment in the cover paper table up/down section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper
alignment motor (M41) turns ON.
• Cover paper alignment motor (M41)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper alignment section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M41.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.19 C-1520
Code
C-1520
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet exit has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet exit motor (M42) turns ON.
• Booklet exit motor (M42)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M42.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.20 C-1521
Code
C-1521
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Rt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Rt (M43) turns ON
• Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Rt (M43)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-220
5. Replace M43.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.21 C-1522
Code
C-1522
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The driven arm /Lt swing operation start has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper conveyance arm
motor /Lt (M44) turns ON
• Cover paper conveyance arm motor /Lt (M44)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M44.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.22 C-1523
Code
C-1523
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper conveyance start has not been completed within a specified period of time after cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
turns ON.
• Cover paper conveyance motor (M45)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M45.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.23 C-1524
Code
C-1524
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-221
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Fr (M46) turns ON.
• Cover paper table up down motor /Fr (M46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 11-D)
5. Replace M46.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.24 C-1525
Code
C-1525
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper table up or down movement has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper table up down
motor /Rr (M47) turns ON.
• Cover paper table up down motor /Rr (M47)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper table up down section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M47.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.25 C-1526
Code
C-1526
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Rt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Rt (M48) turns ON.
• Cover paper folding motor /Rt (M48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
K-222
5. Replace M48.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.26 C-1527
Code
C-1527
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The movement of the cover paper folding plate /Lt has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper folding
motor /Lt (M49) turns ON.
• Cover paper folding motor /Lt (M49)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper folding section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M49.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.27 C-1528
Code
C-1528
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The trimming of the cover paper has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cutter motor (M50) turns ON.
• Cutter motor (M50)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the trimmer section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M50.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.28 C-1530
Code
C-1530
Classification
K-223
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet movement of the booklet conveyance section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt motor (M61) turns ON.
• Booklet conveyance belt motor (M61)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the booklet conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M61.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.29 C-1531
Code
C-1531
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The size changing operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet conveyance
belt movement motor (M62) turns ON.
• Booklet conveyance belt movement motor (M62)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M62.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.30 C-1532
Code
C-1532
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The up/down movement operation of the carriage section has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet
conveyance belt up down motor (M63) turns ON.
• Booklet conveyance belt up down motor (M63)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-224

5. Replace M63.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.31 C-1534
Code
C-1534
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The booklet rear edge pressing process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the booklet stopper motor (M65)
turns ON.
• Booklet stopper motor (M65)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace M65.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-6
2.13.32 C-1537
Code
C-1537
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The tray moving up process has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper tray lift motor (M73) turns ON.
• Cover paper tray lift motor (M73)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper tray section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M73.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.13.33 C-1538
Code
C-1538
K-225
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The cover paper feed has not been completed within a specified period of time after the cover paper feed motor (M74) turns ON.
• Cover paper feed motor (M74)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the cover paper feed section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace M74.
6. Replace PBDB1.
7. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-5
2.14 Solution 10 (C-1540_1567)

2.14.1 C-1540
Code
C-1540
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not risen to a prescribed level
within a specified time period.
• Glue tank heater (H1)
• Glue apply roller heater (H2)
• Glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3)
Correction
Be sure to change the software DIPSW3-1 from 1 to 0 and turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body after fixing the
defective parts.
WARNING
• If DIPSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it may cause fire.
Solution
1. Check the glue tank heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBCB and the temperature sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the installation conditions of the heater and the temperature sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.2 C-1541
Code
C-1541
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level
K-226

• Glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
• If DipSW3-1 is set to 0 before defective parts are fixed, it causes fire.
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.3 C-1542
Code
C-1542
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After the warm-up is started, temperature detected by the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level
• Glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
1. Check the glue apply heater, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.4 C-1543
Code
C-1543
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-227
After the pellet supply, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) has not risen to a prescribed level within a
• Glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2)
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.5 C-1544
Code
C-1544
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
During standby, after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) has not
risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.6 C-1545
Code
C-1545
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-228
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue tank
temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.7 C-1546
Code
C-1546
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When the prescribed temperature is obtained and after the glue tank heater (H1) is turned ON, temperature detected by the glue apply
roller temperature sensor (TH1) has not risen to a prescribed level within a specified time period.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.8 C-1547
Code
C-1547
Classification
K-229
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.9 C-1548
Code
C-1548
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.10 C-1549
Code
C-1549
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-230
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.11 C-1550
Code
C-1550
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.12 C-1551
Code
C-1551
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-231
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware) TH1 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue apply roller.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.13 C-1552
Code
C-1552
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH2 detects an abnormal high
temperature of the glue tank.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.14 C-1553
Code
C-1553
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-232
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH3 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.15 C-1554
Code
C-1554
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal high temperature (hardware). TH4 detects an abnormal high
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.16 C-1555
Code
C-1555
Classification
K-233
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.17 C-1556
Code
C-1556
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
When glue supply control temperature is reached, the glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.18 C-1557
Code
C-1557
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-234
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.19 C-1558
Code
C-1558
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
After warming-up is completed, the glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.20 C-1559
Code
C-1559
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
K-235
The glue apply roller temperature sensor (TH1) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH1
detects the glue apply roller error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH1.
6. Replace H2.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.21 C-1560
Code
C-1560
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Up (TH2) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After glue supply control temperature is
reached, TH2 detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 9-U)
5. Replace TH2.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.22 C-1561
Code
C-1561
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
K-236
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Md (TH3) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH3
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH3.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.23 C-1562
Code
C-1562
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
The glue tank temperature sensor /Lw (TH4) detects an abnormal low temperature (hardware). After warming-up is completed, TH4
detects the glue tank error signal of abnormal low temperature.
Correction
defective parts.
WARNING
Solution
PB-503: 27-Q, 10-U)
5. Replace TH4.
6. Replace H1.
7. Replace ACDB.
8. Replace PBCB.
DIPSW7-7
2.14.24 C-1565
Code
C-1565
Classification
K-237
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance motor drive abnormality
The relay conveyance does not start within the specified period of time after M92 turns ON.
• Relay conveyance motor (M92)
Correction
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PBDB2 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:PB-503: 23-V)
4. Replace M92.
5. Replace PBDB2.
6. Replace PBCB.
2.14.25 C-1566
Code
C-1566
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Relay conveyance exit motor drive abnormality
A rotation error detection signal is detected for a specified period of time in succession while the relay conveyance exit motor (M91) is
driving.
• Relay conveyance exit motor (M91)
Correction
Solution
1. Check the relay conveyance paper exit section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: PB-503: 26-W)
5. Replace M91.
6. Replace PBDB2.
7. Replace PBDB1.
8. Replace PBCB.
2.14.26 C-1567
Code
C-1567
Classification
PB: PB abnormality
Cause
Pellet supply pipe motor drive abnormality
The pellet supply pipe has not completed the operations within a specified period of time after the pellet supply pipe motor (M33) turns ON.
• Pellet supply pipe motor (M33)
Correction
Solution
4. Replace M33.
5. Replace PBDB1.
6. Replace PBCB.
K-238
2.15 Solution 11 (C-2001_2310)

2.15.1 C-2001
Code
C-2001
Classification
Cause
Communication error with the DSP on the printer control board (PRCB)
A sufficient space cannot be obtained for a specified period of time in the circular buffer to send to the DSP on the printer control board
(PRCB).
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Replace PRCB.
2.15.2 C-2002
Code
C-2002
Classification
Cause
Communication error with the DSP on the printer control board (PRCB)
An error signal of communication error in the DSP on the printer control board (PRCB) is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Replace PRCB.
2.15.3 C-2201
Code
C-2201
Classification
Main body: Developing motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M5 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /Y (M5) is ON.
• Developing motor /Y (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the drive and the coupling of the motor, repair/replace it if any abnormality, and then replace PRCB. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (4/5): 3-P)
4. Replace M5 and PRCB.
K-239
2.15.4 C-2202
Code
C-2202
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /M (M6) is ON.
• Developing motor /M (M6)
Correction
Note
Solution
body (4/5): 3-P)
2.15.5 C-2203
Code
C-2203
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M7 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /C (M7) is ON.
• Developing motor /C (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
diagram: Main body (4/5): 1-P)
2.15.6 C-2204
Code
C-2204
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M8 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing motor /K (M8) is ON.
• Developing motor /K (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-240
body (4/5): 2-P)
2.15.7 C-2211
Code
C-2211
Classification
Main body: Drum motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M1 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /Y (M1) is ON.
• Drum motor /Y (M1)
• Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS73), /Y2 (PS74)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the drum unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor, the coupling of the gear, and the I/O and operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any
abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 11-E, 12-E)
5. Replace PS73 and PS74.
6. Replace M1.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.8 C-2212
Code
C-2212
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M2 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /M (M2) is ON.
• Drum motor /M (M2)
• Encoder sensor /M1 (PS75), /M2 (PS76)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace M2.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.9 C-2213
Code
C-2213
Classification
Cause
K-241
An error detection signal of M3 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /C (M3) is ON.
• Drum motor /C (M3)
• Encoder sensor /C1 (PS77), /C2 (PS78)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace M3.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.10 C-2214
Code
C-2214
Classification
Cause
An error detection signal of M4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the drum motor /K (M4) is ON.
• Drum motor /K (M4)
• Encoder sensor /K1 (PS79), /K2 (PS80)
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.11 C-2220
Code
C-2220
Classification
Main body: Intermediate transfer belt motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M9 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the intermediate transfer belt motor (M9) is ON.
• Intermediate transfer belt motor (M9)
• Intermediate transfer belt encoder /1 (M81), /2 (M82)
Correction
Note
K-242
Solution
1. Check the intermediate transfer belt, and repair it if any mis-centering or abnormality.
2. Check the intermediate transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the I/O drive of the motor, the coupling of the gear and the I/O or operations of the sensor, and then repair/replace it if any
abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5) 20-O, 21-O)
7. Replace M9.
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace DCPS/4.
2.15.12 C-2221
Code
C-2221
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer pressure release abnormality
Cause
While the 1st transfer pressure release home sensor (PS44) is ON, PS44 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after the 1st
transfer pressure release motor (M11) turns ON.
• 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the 1st transfer fusing pressure release section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
21-L)
4. Replace M11.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.15.13 C-2222
Code
C-2222
Classification
Main body: Waste toner collection motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M35 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the waste toner collection motor (M35) is ON.
• Waste toner collection motor (M35)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the waste toner box and the waste toner door, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the waste toner section, and repair it if any abnormality.
(5/5):8-E)
6. Replace M35.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.14 C-2223
Code
C-2223
K-243
Classification
Main body: 2nd transfer belt motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the 2nd transfer belt motor (M40) is ON.
• 2nd transfer belt motor (M40)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the 2nd transfer belt, and repair it if any mis-centering or abnormality.
3. Check the 2nd transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
(2/5): 15-O)
8. Replace M40.
9. Replace CDB.
10. Replace DCPS /3.
2.15.15 C-2224
Code
C-2224
Classification
Main body: 2nd transfer steering motor abnormality
Cause
The 2nd transfer steering home sensor (PS49) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the initial operation of the 2nd
transfer steering motor (M46) starts.
• 2nd transfer steering motor (M46)
• 2nd transfer steering home sensor (PS49)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the 2nd transfer intermediate transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 3-N, 4-O)
7. Replace M46.
8. Replace PS49.
9. Replace CDB.
2.15.16 C-2225
Code
C-2225
Classification
Main body: 2nd transfer belt edge sensor abnormality
Cause
The 2nd transfer belt abnormal sensor (PS50) detects an error detection signal.
• 2nd transfer belt abnormal sensor (PS50)
K-244
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 4-N)
6. Replace PS50.
7. Replace CDB.
2.15.17 C-2226
Code
C-2226
Classification
Main body: Toner bottle motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M20 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the toner bottle motor (M20) is ON.
• Toner bottle motor (M20)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the toner bottle, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
10-O)
5. Replace M20.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.18 C-2227
Code
C-2227
Classification
Main body: toner skew conveyance motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M15 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the toner skew conveyance motor (M15) is
ON.
• Toner skew conveyance motor (M15)
• Toner drive board (TDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the toner conveyance section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
7-K)
6. Replace M15.
7. Replace TDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace DCPS /2.
K-245

2.15.19 C-2228
Code
C-2228
Classification
Main body: Toner hopper agitated motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M14 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the toner hopper agitated motor (M14) is ON.
• Toner hopper agitated motor (M14)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the toner hopper section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TDB and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TDB and PRCB, and repair it if any abnormality.
8-K)
6. Replace M14.
7. Replace TDB.
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.20 C-2229
Code
C-2229
Classification
Main body: Toner supply motor /Y (M16), /M (M17) drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the toner supply motor /Y (M16), /M (M17) drive circuit abnormality is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on TDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connection between TDB and DCPS/2.
3. Replace TDB.
2.15.21 C-2230
Code
C-2230
Classification
Main body: Toner supply motor /C (M18), /K (M19) drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the toner supply motor /C (M18), /K (M19) drive circuit abnormality is detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-246
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring on TDB, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connection between TDB and DCPS/2.
3. Replace TDB.
2.15.22 C-2231
Code
C-2231
Classification
Main body: Filter cleaning motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M13 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the filter cleaning motor (M13) is ON.
• Filter cleaning motor (M13)
Correction
Note
Solution
2-E)
4. Replace M13.
5. Replace PRCB.
6. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.23 C-2232
Code
C-2232
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer pressure release motor drive circuit abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11) drive circuit abnormality is detected.
• 1st transfer pressure release motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connection between PRCB and DCPS/2.
(4/5):21-L)
4. Replace M11.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.15.24 C-2233
Code
C-2233
Classification
Main body: Cleaning motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M10 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the cleaning motor (M10) is ON.
• Cleaning motor (M10)
Correction
K-247
Note
Solution
18-O)
5. Replace M10.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replace DCPS /2.
2.15.25 C-2234
Code
C-2234
Classification
Main body: Intermediate transfer steering motor (M33) abnormality
Cause
The intermediate transfer steering home sensor (PS46) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the initial operation of the
intermediate transfer steering motor (M33) starts.
• Intermediate transfer steering motor (M33)
• Intermediate transfer steering home sensor (PS46)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the process unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 13-G)
6. Replace M33.
7. Replace PS46.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.15.26 C-2235
Code
C-2235
Classification
Main body: Intermediate transfer steering edge sensor abnormality
Cause
The intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68) detect an error detection signal.
• Intermediate transfer steering edge sensor (PS68)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 14-G)
6. Replace PS68.
7. Replace PRCB.
K-248
2.15.27 C-2302
Code
C-2302
Classification
Main body: Motor cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM3 or FM4 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the motor cooling fans /1 (FM3) and /2
(FM2) are ON.
• Motor cooling fan /1 (FM3)
• Motor cooling fan /2 (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 13-E)
3. Replace FM3, FM4 and PRCB at a time.
2.15.28 C-2303
Code
C-2303
Classification
Main body: Intermediate transfer cleaning cooling fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM19, FM20 or FM21 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the intermediate transfer
cleaning cooling fans /1 (FM19), /2 (FM20), /3 (FM21) are ON.
• Intermediate transfer cleaning cooling fan /1 (FM19)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 7-D, 8-D)
2.15.29 C-2304
Code
C-2304
Classification
Main body: Toner suction fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM17 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the toner suction fan /1 (FM17) is ON.
• Toner suction fan /1 (FM17)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 7-O)
K-249
2.15.30 C-2305
Code
C-2305
Classification
Main body: Toner suction fan abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM6 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the toner suction fan /2 (FM6) is ON.
• Toner suction fan /2 (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 3-D)
2.15.31 C-2306
Code
C-2306
Classification
Main body: Developing charge fan /1 abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM7 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the developing charge fan /1 (FM7) is ON.
• Developing charge fan /1 (FM7)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection and the wiring between TDB and the fan, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Rotate the fan or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (3/5): 6-J)
3. Replace FM7 and TDB at a time.
2.15.32 C-2307
Code
C-2307
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15.33 C-2308
Code
K-250
C-2308
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15.34 C-2309
Code
C-2309
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.16 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500)

2.16.1 C-2401
Code
C-2401
Classification
Main body: Erase lamp abnormality
Cause
The erase lamp /Y (EL/Y) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the EL section, and clean/repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 18-G)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and EL, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
K-251
2.16.2 C-2402
Code
C-2402
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /M (EL/M) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.3 C-2403
Code
C-2403
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /C (EL/C) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.16.4 C-2404
Code
C-2404
Classification
Cause
The erase lamp /K (EL/K) set status cannot be detected.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace EL.
5. Replace PRCB.
K-252
2.16.5 C-2411
Code
C-2411
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor abnormality
Cause
The input value of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) is low while the TCR sensor control voltage is at maximum value. (There may be
connector disconnection or sensor abnormality.)
• TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /Y)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the TCRS, and clean/replace it if any abnormality or dirt on sensor(Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 16-G)
3. Check the developing section, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and TCRS, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.6 C-2412
Code
C-2412
Classification
Cause
The input value of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) is low while the TCR sensor control voltage is at maximum value. (There may be
• TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check TCRS, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 16-G)
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.7 C-2413
Code
C-2413
Classification
Cause
The input value of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) is low while the TCR sensor control voltage is at maximum value. (There may be
• TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C)
Correction
Note
K-253
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.8 C-2414
Code
C-2414
Classification
Cause
The input value of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) is low while the TCR sensor control voltage is at maximum value. (There may be
• TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.9 C-2431
Code
C-2431
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (low density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /Y), TCRS/Y detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.10 C-2432
Code
C-2432
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M), TCRS/M detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
K-254

Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.11 C-2433
Code
C-2433
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C), TCRS/C detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.12 C-2434
Code
C-2434
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K), TCRS/K detects a value higher than the prescribed one with the minimum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.13 C-2441
Code
K-255
C-2441
Classification
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (high density)
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /Y (TCRS /Y), TCRS/Y detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.14 C-2442
Code
C-2442
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /M (TCRS /M), TCRS/M detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.15 C-2443
Code
C-2443
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /C (TCRS /C), TCRS/C detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-256
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.16 C-2444
Code
C-2444
Classification
Cause
While in the initial adjustment of the TCR sensor /K (TCRS /K), TCRS/K detects a value lower than the prescribed one with the maximum
control voltage.
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.17 C-2451
Code
C-2451
Classification
Main body: Toner low density abnormality
Cause
When the developing motor /Y (M5) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) is more than the specified value and
the difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value is less than the specified value.
• Developing motor /Y (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.18 C-2452
Code
C-2452
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /M (M6) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) is more than the specified value
and the difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value is less than the specified value.
• Developing motor /M (M6)
K-257
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.19 C-2453
Code
C-2453
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /C (M7) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) is more than the specified value and
• Developing motor /C (M7)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.20 C-2454
Code
C-2454
Classification
Cause
When the developing motor /K (M8) is ON, the maximum detection value of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) is more than the specified value and
• Developing motor /K (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace TCRS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.16.21 C-2461
Code
C-2461
K-258
Classification
Main body: Charging corona connection abnormality, drum potential abnormality
Cause
Charging corona /Y is not connected.
Otherwise, drum potential sensor /Y (DPS/Y) detection value does not reach the specified value.
• Drum potential sensor /Y (DPS/Y)
• Drum potential sensor board /Y (DPSB/Y)
• Charging corona
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the charger (charging wire and the grid), and clean/repair it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB, DPSB and DPS, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace DPS.
6. Replace DPSB.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace the charging corona.
2.16.22 C-2462
Code
C-2462
Classification
Cause
Charging corona /M is not connected.
Otherwise, drum potential sensor /M (DPS/M) detection value does not reach the specified value.
• Drum potential sensor /M (DPS/M)
• Drum potential sensor board /M (DPSB/M)
• Charging corona
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the I/O and drive of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 19-G)
5. Replace DPS.
6. Replace DPSB.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.16.23 C-2463
Code
C-2463
Classification
Cause
Charging corona /C is not connected.
Otherwise, drum potential sensor /C (DPS/C) detection value does not reach the specified value.
• Drum potential sensor /C (DPS/C)
• Drum potential sensor board /C (DPSB/C)
• Charging corona
Correction
K-259

Note
Solution
5. Replace DPS.
6. Replace DPSB.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.16.24 C-2464
Code
C-2464
Classification
Cause
Charging corona /K is not connected.
Otherwise, drum potential sensor /K (DPS/K) detection value does not reach the specified value.
• Drum potential sensor /K (DPS/K)
• Drum potential sensor board /K (DPSB/K)
• Charging corona
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace DPS.
6. Replace DPSB.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.16.25 C-2470
Code
C-2470
Classification
Main body: Process unit mount connection abnormality
Cause
Connector of the process mount is not connected.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the process mount, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and the process mount, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.16.26 C-2471
Code
C-2471
Classification
K-260
Main body: TCR sensor initial adjustment abnormality (adjustment trouble)

Cause
The result of TCR sensor /Y (TCRS/Y) initial adjustment has not reached the minimum value of the adjustment range.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace TCRS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.16.27 C-2472
Code
C-2472
Classification
Cause
The result of TCR sensor /M (TCRS/M) initial adjustment has not reached the minimum value of the adjustment range.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace TCRS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.16.28 C-2473
Code
C-2473
Classification
Cause
The result of TCR sensor /C (TCRS/C) initial adjustment has not reached the minimum value of the adjustment range.
Correction
Note
Solution
6. Replace TCRS.
7. Replace PRCB.
K-261

2.16.29 C-2474
Code
C-2474
Classification
Cause
The result of TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) initial adjustment has not reached the minimum value of the adjustment range.
• TCR sensor /K (TCRS/K) (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 15-G)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check TCRS, and clean/repair it if there is sensor dirt or any abnormality.
6. Replace TCRS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.17 Solution 13 (C-2701_2754)

2.17.1 C-2701
Code
C-2701
Classification
Main body: Charging corona (Y) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /Y is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charging corona /Y is
ON.
• Charging corona /Y
• High voltage unit /1-1 (HV/1-1) (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 10-N)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection of the high voltage contact of the process unit, and clean/repair it if any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/1-1 and the charger, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV/1-1, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace HV/1-1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.17.2 C-2702
Code
C-2702
Classification
Main body: Charging corona (M) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /M is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charging corona /M is
ON.
• Charging corona /M
• High voltage unit /1-1 (HV/1-1)
K-262

Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV1-1 and the charging corona, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
5. Replace HV/1-1.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.17.3 C-2703
Code
C-2703
Classification
Main body: Charging corona (C) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /C is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charging corona /C is
ON.
• Charger /C
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/1-2 and the charging corona, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
5. Replace HV/1-2.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.17.4 C-2704
Code
C-2704
Classification
Main body: Charging corona (K) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the charging corona /K is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the charging corona /K is
ON.
• Charging corona /K
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/1-2 and the charging corona, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
5. Replace HV/1-2.
6. Replace PRCB.
K-263
2.17.5 C-2711
Code
C-2711
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer (Y) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /Y is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
• High voltage unit /2 (HV/2)
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/2 and the 1st transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (4/5): 1-D)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV/2, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.6 C-2712
Code
C-2712
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer (M) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /M is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.7 C-2713
Code
C-2713
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer (C) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /C is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-264
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.8 C-2714
Code
C-2714
Classification
Main body: 1st transfer (K) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 1st transfer /K is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.9 C-2720
Code
C-2720
Classification
Main body: 2nd transfer abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the 2nd transfer is detected continuously for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/2 and the 2nd transfer unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.10 C-2721
Code
C-2721
Classification
Main body: Separation abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the separation charger is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the separation charger is
ON.
Correction
Note
K-265
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV4 and the separation section, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring
diagram: Main body (3/5): 14-C)
4. Replace HV/4.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.11 C-2731
Code
C-2731
Classification
Main body: Post 1st transfer neutralizing abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of the separation charger is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the post 1st transfer
neutralizing /Y is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/3 and the post 1st transfer neutralizing, and repair it if any abnormality.
(Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 6-N)
4. Replace HV/3.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.12 C-2732
Code
C-2732
Classification
Cause
neutralizing /M is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/3.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.13 C-2733
Code
C-2733
Classification
Cause
neutralizing /C is ON.
K-266
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/3.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.14 C-2734
Code
C-2734
Classification
Cause
neutralizing /K is ON.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/3.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.15 C-2740
Code
C-2740
Classification
Main body: ATVC feedback voltage abnormality
Cause
The difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value of the Y, M, C or K roller feedback voltage is over
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the connector connection and the wiring on HV/2, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 1-D)
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.16 C-2741
Code
K-267
C-2741
Classification
Main body: ATVC sampling voltage abnormality (Y)
Cause
The difference between the maximum detection value and the minimum detection value of any of 8 sampling voltages is over the specified
value.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.17 C-2742
Code
C-2742
Classification
Main body: ATVC sampling voltage abnormality (M)
Cause
value.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.18 C-2743
Code
C-2743
Classification
Main body: ATVC sampling voltage abnormality (C)
Cause
value.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
K-268
2.17.19 C-2744
Code
C-2744
Classification
Main body: ATVC sampling voltage abnormality (K)
Cause
value.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.20 C-2751
Code
C-2751
Classification
Main body: ATVC feedback voltage detection range abnormality
Cause
The ATVC feedback voltage detection range /Y is not within the specified range.
Error code is not displayed on the operation panel, but displayed only on the data collection, the list output and CSRC.
Correction
The main body does not stop.
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.21 C-2752
Code
C-2752
Classification
Cause
The ATVC feedback voltage detection range /M is not within the specified range.
Correction
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
K-269
2.17.22 C-2753
Code
C-2753
Classification
Cause
The ATVC feedback voltage detection range /C is not within the specified range.
Correction
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.17.23 C-2754
Code
C-2754
Classification
Cause
The ATVC feedback voltage detection range /K is not within the specified range.
Correction
Solution
4. Replace HV/2.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.18 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000)

2.18.1 C-2801
Code
C-2801
Classification
Main body: Dmax correction abnormality
Cause
Dmax correction /Y has terminated abnormally. (patch detection abnormality 1)
• High voltage unit /1-1 (HV/1-1), /2 (HV/1-2)
• IDC sensor /Fr (IDCS/1), /Rr (IDCS/2)
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the installation of developing unit and I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the sensor, and clean/repair it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between HV/1 and developing unit, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:
Main body (4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
7. Replace IDCS.
K-270
8. Replace PRCB.
9. Replace HV/1-1 and /1-2.
2.18.2 C-2802
Code
C-2802
Classification
Cause
Dmax correction /M has terminated abnormally. (patch detection abnormality 1)
• Color registration shutter solenoid /1 (SD8), /2 (SD9)
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Operate the solenoid or I/O by hand, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 21-G, 20-H)
4. Check the sensor and clean/replace it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
Main body (4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
7. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and sensor/solenoid, and repair it if any abnormality.
8. Replace IDCS.
9. Replace SD8 and SD9.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.18.3 C-2803
Code
C-2803
Classification
Cause
Dmax correction /C has terminated abnormally. (patch detection abnormality 1)
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the sensor and clean/replace it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
Main body (4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRCB.
K-271
2.18.4 C-2804
Code
C-2804
Classification
Cause
Dmax correction /K has terminated abnormally.
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the sensor, and clean/repair it if there is dirt or any abnormality.
Main body (4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
8. Replace IDCS.
10. Replace PRCB.
2.18.5 C-2811
Code
C-2811
Classification
Main body: Surface potential abnormality
Cause
The drum surface potential /Y is out of the specified range while in the charging potential control.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the DPS, and clean/repair it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 19-G)
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and DPSB/DPS, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace DPS.
5. Replace DPSB.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.18.6 C-2812
Code
C-2812
Classification
Cause
The drum surface potential /M is out of the specified range while in the charging potential control.
K-272

Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace DPS.
5. Replace DPSB.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.18.7 C-2813
Code
C-2813
Classification
Cause
The drum surface potential /C is out of the specified range while in the charging potential control.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace DPS.
5. Replace DPSB.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.18.8 C-2814
Code
C-2814
Classification
Cause
The drum surface potential /K is out of the specified range while in the charging potential control.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the sensor, and clean/repair it if any dirt or abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (4/5): 20-F,-G)
4. Replace DPS.
5. Replace DPSB.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.18.9 C-2821
Code
C-2821
Classification
K-273
Main body: Potential correction Vh abnormality

Cause
Charging potential Vh /Y has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the EL, and clean/repair it if there is dirt or any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and DPSB/DPS, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (4/5): 19-G)
5. Replace EL.
6. Replace DPS.
7. Replace DPSB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.10 C-2822
Code
C-2822
Classification
Cause
Charging potential Vh /M has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
body (4/5): 19-G)
5. Replace EL.
6. Replace DPS.
7. Replace DPSB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.11 C-2823
Code
C-2823
Classification
Cause
Charging potential Vh /C has terminated abnormally.
Correction
K-274
Note
Solution
body (4/5): 19-G)
5. Replace EL.
6. Replace DPS.
7. Replace DPSB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.12 C-2824
Code
C-2824
Classification
Cause
Charging potential Vh /K has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between the PRCB and EL, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (4/5): 20-G)
5. Replace EL.
6. Replace DPS.
7. Replace DPSB.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.13 C-2831
Code
C-2831
Classification
Main body: MPC correction abnormality
Cause
MPC correction /Y has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /Y
• Printer image processing board (PRIPB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the toner hopper unit is correctly installed without looseness, and reinstall/repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the write unit, and clean/replace it if there is dirt or any abnormality.
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRIB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace write unit.
5. Replace PRIPB.
2.18.14 C-2832
Code
K-275
C-2832
Classification
Cause
MPC correction /M has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PRIPB.
2.18.15 C-2833
Code
C-2833
Classification
Cause
MPC correction /C has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /C
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace PRIPB.
2.18.16 C-2834
Code
C-2834
Classification
Cause
MPC correction /K has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the IDC sensor, and clean/repair it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
6. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRIPB.
K-276
2.18.17 C-2840
Code
C-2840
Classification
Main body: Dmax base line correction abnormality
Cause
When the Dmax load value is not within the permissible range even the Dmax control voltage is changed several times, it is detected as
the Dmax base line correction error.
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring of PRCB, HV and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
5. Replace IDC.
6. Replace HV.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.18 C-2841
Code
C-2841
Classification
Main body:
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.19 C-2851
Code
C-2851
Classification
Cause
Correction
K-277

Note
Solution
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and HV/1, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body
(4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.20 C-2852
Code
C-2852
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
(4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.21 C-2853
Code
C-2853
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
(4/5): 24-F, 23-G)
K-278
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.22 C-2861
Code
C-2861
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.23 C-2862
Code
C-2862
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.24 C-2863
Code
C-2863
Classification
Cause
K-279

Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
7. Replace PRCB.
2.18.25 C-2871
Code
C-2871
Classification
Cause
It has not terminated even when repeated several times.
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the output of developing unit by I/O, and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
7. Replacing the developing unit
2.18.26 C-2872
Code
C-2872
Classification
Cause
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
K-280
2.18.27 C-2873
Code
C-2873
Classification
Cause
• Developing unit
Correction
Note
Solution
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.18.28 C-2881
Code
C-2881
Classification
Main body: Paper interval Dmax correction abnormality
Cause
Paper interval Dmax correction /Y has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
(4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.29 C-2882
Code
C-2882
Classification
Cause
Paper interval Dmax correction /M has terminated abnormally.
K-281

Correction
Note
Solution
(4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.30 C-2883
Code
C-2883
Classification
Cause
Paper interval Dmax correction /C has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
(4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.31 C-2884
Code
C-2884
Classification
Cause
Paper interval Dmax correction /K has terminated abnormally.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-282
(4/5): 10-N, 8-N)
6. Replace IDCS.
8. Replace PRCB.
2.18.32 C-2891
Code
C-2891
Classification
Main body: Paper interval MPC correction abnormality
Cause
Paper interval MPC correction /Y has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /Y
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between PRCB and write unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Replace PRCB.
2.18.33 C-2892
Code
C-2892
Classification
Cause
Paper interval MPC correction /M has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /M
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.18.34 C-2893
Code
C-2893
Classification
Cause
Paper interval MPC correction /C has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /C
Correction
K-283
Note
Solution
4. Replace PRCB.
2.18.35 C-2894
Code
C-2894
Classification
Cause
Paper interval MPC correction /K has terminated abnormally.
• Writing unit /K
Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the IDC sensor, and clean/repair it if there is any dirt or abnormality.
5. Replace IDCS.
6. Replace PRCB.
2.19 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500)

2.19.1 C-3101
Code
C-3101
Classification
Main body: Fusing motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M48 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing motor (M48) is ON.
• Fusing motor (M48)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connector connection between rear side of the fusing unit and the main body side, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the fusing unit, and repair it if any abnormality.
(1/5): 23-F)
6. Replace M48.
7. Replace PRCB.
8. Replace DCPS /3.
K-284
2.19.2 C-3102
Code
C-3102
Classification
Main body: Fusing belt /Lw pressure release motor
Cause
The press or release operation of the fusing belt /Lw pressure release motor (M49) does not completes within 10 seconds.
• Fusing belt /Lw pressure release motor (M49)
• Fusing belt /Lw pressure release home sensor /1 (PS58)
• Fusing belt /Lw pressure release home sensor /2 (PS59)
Correction
Note
Solution
(2/5):6-B)
6. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main body (2/5): 5-B)
7. Replace M49.
9. Replace CDB.
2.19.3 C-3103
Code
C-3103
Classification
Main body: 2nd transfer pressure release motor abnormality
Cause
The 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41) does not complete the pressure release or release operation within a specified period of
• 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M41)
• 2nd transfer home sensor (PS53)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check that the front cover is closed properly, and repair it if any abnormality.
(2/5):14-L)
7. Replace M41.
8. Replace PS53.
9. Replace CDB.
2.19.4 C-3104
Code
C-3104
Classification
Main body: Fusing belt /Lw edge abnormal sensor abnormality
Cause
K-285
An error detection signal is detected while the fusing belt /Lw edge abnormal sensor (PS67) is ON.
• Fusing belt /Lw edge abnormal sensor (PS67)
• Fusing belt /Lw
• Fusing swing shaft assy
Correction
Note
• This error cannot be released with the fusing belt /Lw mis-centered. Place the fusing belt /Lw on the center referring to the
section of the centering adjustment of the fusing belt /Lw in the disassembling/reassembling.
Solution
1. Check the fusing belt /Lw and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
3. Check the fusing swing shaft assy and repair/replace it if any abnormality.
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between CDB and the sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: main body (2/5): 3-B)
6. Replace PS67.
7. Replace CDB.
2.19.5 C-3105
Code
C-3105
Classification
Main body: Fusing external heating belt pressure release motor abnormality
Cause
The pressure or the release does not finish within a specified period of time after the fusing external heating belt pressure release motor
(M53) turns ON.
• Fusing external heating belt pressure release motor (M53)
• Fusing external heating belt pressure release home sensor (PS57)
Correction
Note
Solution
(2/5): 9-B)
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace M53.
9. Replace PS57.
2.19.6 C-3106
Code
C-3106
Classification
Main body: Fusing unit set abnormality
Cause
The fusing unit is not set.
Correction
Note
K-286
Solution
1. Check the fusing unit set condition, and repair it if any abnormality.
2. Check the connection between the rear side connector of the fusing unit and the main body side connector, and repair it if any
abnormality.
4. Check the connection status of PRCB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace PRCB.
2.19.7 C-3107
Code
C-3107
Classification
Main body: Fusing refreshing roller pressure release motor abnormality
Cause
The pressure or the release does not finish within a specified period of time after the fusing refreshing roller pressure release motor (M55)
turns ON.
• Fusing refreshing roller pressure release motor (M55)
• Fusing refreshing roller pressure release home sensor (PS56)
Correction
Note
Solution
(2/5): 10-B)
7. Replace M55.
8. Replace PS56.
9. Replace CDB.
2.19.8 C-3108
Code
C-3108
Classification
Main body: Fusing belt /Lw release time motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M50 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing belt /Lw release time motor (M50)
is ON.
• Fusing belt /Lw release time motor (M50)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS/4 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/5): 10-L)
(2/5):6-B)
6. Replace M50.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace DCPS/4.
K-287
2.19.9 C-3109
Code
C-3109
Classification
Main body: Fusing refresh roller motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of M51 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing refresh roller motor (M51) is ON.
• Fusing refresh roller motor (M51)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the connector connection and the wiring between DCPS/4 and the motor, and repair it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: Main
body (1/5): 10-L)
(2/5):6-B)
6. Replace M51.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace DCPS/4.
2.19.10 C-3110
Code
C-3110
Classification
Main body: Fusing belt /Lw steering initial operation abnormality
Cause
The steering initial operation of the fusing belt /Lw does not finish within a specified period of time.
• Fusing belt /Lw steering motor (M54)
Correction
Note
Solution
(2/5): 10-B)
6. Replace M54.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.19.11 C-3111
Code
C-3111
Classification
Main body: Fusing web motor drive circuit power abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected while the fusing web motor (M52) drive circuit power is ON.
K-288
• Fusing web motor (M52)

Correction
Note
Solution
2. Check the fusing web, and repair it if any abnormality.
(2/5):9-B)
6. Replace M52.
7. Replace CDB.
8. Replace DCPS /2.
2.19.12 C-3150
Code
C-3150
Classification
EF: Fusing pressure motor abnormality
Cause
The operation of the fusing pressure motor (M6) does not complete within a specified period of time while applying or releasing pressure
on the EF fusing belt unit /Lw.
• Fusing pressure motor (M6)
• Fusing pressure release sensor /1 (PS16)
• Fusing pressure release sensor /2 (PS17)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between EFCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: EF-101:16-P)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: EF-101: 17-O)
6. Replace M6.
8. Replace EFCB
2.19.13 C-3151
Code
C-3151
Classification
EF: Fusing motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing motor (M5) is ON.
• Fusing motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:EF-101:15-P)
5. Replace M5.
6. Replace EFCB
K-289
2.19.14 C-3152
Code
C-3152
Classification
EF: Fusing pressure motor abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing pressure motor (M6) is ON.
• Fusing pressure motor (M6)
Correction
Note
Solution
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:EF-101:16-P)
5. Replace M6.
6. Replace EFCB
2.19.15 C-3153
Code
C-3153
Classification
EF: Fusing mount set abnormality
Cause
The mount is not set.
• Overall control board (OACB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1. Check the connection between the rear side connector of the 2nd fusing unit and the EF side connector, and repair it if any
abnormality.
3. Turn OFF the sub power switch and the main power switch, and unplug the power plug. Restart the main body after 10 seconds.
4. Check the connection status of EFCB connector, and repair it if any abnormality.
5. Replace EFCB
2.19.16 C-3154
Code
C-3154
Classification
EF: Fusing swing home sensor operation non-completion
Cause
The EF fusing swing home sensor (PS5) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after it turns ON.
• Fusing swing motor (M4)
• Fusing swing home sensor (PS5)
Correction
Note
Solution
3. Check the connector connection and the wiring between EFCB and motor/sensor, and repair it if any abnormality.
K-290
4. Check the I/O drive of the motor and the coupling of the gear, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram:EF-101:19-O)
5. Check I/O and the operation of the sensor, and repair/replace it if any abnormality. (Wiring diagram: EF-101: 22-O)
6. Replace M4.
7. Replace PS5.
8. Replace EFCB
2.19.17 C-3302
Code
C-3302
Classification
Main body: Fusing belt cooling fan (center) abnormality
Cause
An error detection signal of FM44 is detected continuously for a specified period of time while the fusing belt cooling fan /Md (FM44) is ON.
The main body stops

Bizhub PRESS C8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub PRESS C8000 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

D OVERALL COMPOSITION ...........................................................................................................D-1

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................F-1

J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE ........................................................................................................J-1

L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING .................................................................................L-1

N WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................N-1

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-622 .........................................................................................PA-1

PB THEORY OF OPERATION PF-704/705/HT-506 ......................................................................PB-1

PC THEORY OF OPERATION EF-101 .........................................................................................PC-1

PD THEORY OF OPERATION RU-508/HM-101 ...........................................................................PD-1

PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-521 ..........................................................................................PE-1

PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-612 ..........................................................................................PF-1

PG THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513...................................................................................PG-1

PH THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 ..........................................................................................PH-1

PI THEORY OF OPERATION LS-505 .............................................................................................PI-1

PJ THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ...........................................................................................PJ-1

PK THEORY OF OPERATION SD-506 .........................................................................................PK-1

PL THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 ..........................................................................................PL-1

PM THEORY OF OPERATION RU-506.........................................................................................PM-1

PN THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501..........................................................................................PN-1

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

3. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

3.2 Descriptions for safety and important warning items

:Precaution when using the copier.

:Direction when using the copier.

4.1.2 Prohibited Actions

• Using any cables or power cord not specified

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety

4.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

4.2.2 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

• Use power supply cord set which meets the

• Conductors in the power cable must be

4.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

4.3.2 Power Supply

• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the

Power Plug and Cord

• When using the power cord set (inlet type)

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

• Check whether dust is collected around the

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug

• When an extension cord is required, use a

4.3.3 Installation Requirements

• Do not place the product near flammable

When not Using the Product for a long time

• When the product is not used over an

• The product generates ozone gas during

• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

• Before conducting an inspection, read all

Do not make any adjustment not described

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

• Take every care when making adjustments

• When taking a report of problems from a

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,

injured when you insert your hand in the

• Toner and developer are not harmful

Handling of Service Materials

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time

4.3.6 Used Batteries Precautions

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.

5.2 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE